Add a C-source spell-checking facility. make misspell (on Nix)

FossilOrigin-Name: 26c1bb4bd9e9f56613c3aa87407a7f562fd4ebde5bfd6dece02078001d9a45f8

69 files changed, 5573 insertions, 4133 deletions

diff --git a/Makefile.in b/Makefile.in
index 8b8292847..06355e746 100644
--- a/Makefile.in
+++ b/Makefile.in
@@ -599,7 +599,7 @@ SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_DBPAGE_VTAB
 SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_DBSTAT_VTAB
 SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_BYTECODE_VTAB
 SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_OFFSET_SQL_FUNC
-FUZZERSHELL_OPT = 
+FUZZERSHELL_OPT =
 FUZZCHECK_OPT += -I$(TOP)/test
 FUZZCHECK_OPT += -I$(TOP)/ext/recover
 FUZZCHECK_OPT += \
@@ -1556,3 +1556,21 @@ sqlite3.dll: $(REAL_LIBOBJ) sqlite3.def
 #
 fiddle: sqlite3.c shell.c
 	make -C ext/wasm fiddle emcc_opt=-Os
+
+#
+# Spell-checking for source comments
+# The sources checked are either C sources or C source templates.
+# Their comments are extracted and processed through aspell using
+# a custom dictionary that contains scads of odd identifiers that
+# find their way into the comments.
+#
+# Currently, this target is setup to be "made" in-tree only.
+# The output is ephemeral. Redirect it to guide spelling fixups,
+# either to correct spelling or add words to tool/custom.txt.
+#
+./custom.rws: ./tool/custom.txt
+	@echo 'Updating custom dictionary from tool/custom.txt'
+	aspell --lang=en create master ./custom.rws < $<
+
+misspell: ./custom.rws
+	$(TCLSH_CMD) ./tool/spellsift.tcl ./src/*.c ./src/*.h ./src/*.in
diff --git a/manifest b/manifest
index 6c27304ae..7f207323f 100644
--- a/manifest
+++ b/manifest
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-C Fix\scompiler\swarning\sin\ssrc-verify.c.
-D 2023-06-05T17:12:33.077
+C Add\sa\sC-source\sspell-checking\sfacility.\smake\smisspell\s(on\sNix)
+D 2023-06-07T08:40:31.431
 F .fossil-settings/empty-dirs dbb81e8fc0401ac46a1491ab34a7f2c7c0452f2f06b54ebb845d024ca8283ef1
 F .fossil-settings/ignore-glob 35175cdfcf539b2318cb04a9901442804be81cd677d8b889fcc9149c21f239ea
 F LICENSE.md df5091916dbb40e6e9686186587125e1b2ff51f022cc334e886c19a0e9982724
-F Makefile.in 3b155551e8c78751622bc5ce903b1a91beaa6e4c04710161ae51858bbd9e2edc
+F Makefile.in 572a91092815e65bc8d5bfb53a12f31005320048f607fc05b20012ba48afe426
 F Makefile.linux-gcc f609543700659711fbd230eced1f01353117621dccae7b9fb70daa64236c5241
 F Makefile.msc 9c032cabd86fc0468167459b714478be7fe77e47ce43fdf1bfaf2e48e829a112
 F README.md 6f942c2e542d53202dc75b114b0617e9e02f8a6a777508fc23c3d8297951c478
@@ -569,41 +569,41 @@ F sqlite.pc.in 42b7bf0d02e08b9e77734a47798d1a55a9e0716b
 F sqlite3.1 fc7ad8990fc8409983309bb80de8c811a7506786
 F sqlite3.pc.in 48fed132e7cb71ab676105d2a4dc77127d8c1f3a
 F sqlite_cfg.h.in baf2e409c63d4e7a765e17769b6ff17c5a82bbd9cbf1e284fd2e4cefaff3fcf2
-F src/alter.c 482c534877fbb543f8295992cde925df55443febac5db5438d5aaba6f78c4940
+F src/alter.c f1c686e7325a7449c5a0ebc16207186f52e1b6673da699392caa1de39f219511
 F src/analyze.c a1f3061af16c99f73aed0362160176c31a6452de1b02ada1d68f6839f2a37df0
 F src/attach.c cc9d00d30da916ff656038211410ccf04ed784b7564639b9b61d1839ed69fd39
-F src/auth.c f4fa91b6a90bbc8e0d0f738aa284551739c9543a367071f55574681e0f24f8cf
+F src/auth.c 19b7ccacae3dfba23fc6f1d0af68134fa216e9040e53b0681b4715445ea030b4
 F src/backup.c 5c97e8023aab1ce14a42387eb3ae00ba5a0644569e3476f38661fa6f824c3523
-F src/bitvec.c 7c849aac407230278445cb069bebc5f89bf2ddd87c5ed9459b070a9175707b3d
-F src/btmutex.c 6ffb0a22c19e2f9110be0964d0731d2ef1c67b5f7fabfbaeb7b9dabc4b7740ca
-F src/btree.c 46a97286ef0d6caedfbbb7d2fb4fc66fe2eee5484458efeddfce85fb5152799b
+F src/bitvec.c 9eac5f42c11914d5ef00a75605bb205e934f435c579687f985f1f8b0995c8645
+F src/btmutex.c 79a43670447eacc651519a429f6ece9fd638563cf95b469d6891185ddae2b522
+F src/btree.c 148228f60581e5ecbe4b57d0ba1d0bbc0ff737c6581c841e2dedd58fa07689c0
 F src/btree.h aa354b9bad4120af71e214666b35132712b8f2ec11869cb2315c52c81fad45cc
-F src/btreeInt.h b900603c8956bdeb313841f9b67bdeceef32c64d962d35477c07ec25e8cf0f9b
-F src/build.c 5512d5a335334b48d116f1ecd051edef96a60add18ae48e0ea302a395f00f3d9
+F src/btreeInt.h 3b4eff7155c0cea6971dc51f62e3529934a15a6640ec607dd42a767e379cb3a9
+F src/build.c bf900f75fb241130fe59299e00ea07d522080eb7e75811b175f313dcb3ab3291
 F src/callback.c db3a45e376deff6a16c0058163fe0ae2b73a2945f3f408ca32cf74960b28d490
 F src/complete.c a3634ab1e687055cd002e11b8f43eb75c17da23e
 F src/ctime.c 20507cc0b0a6c19cd882fcd0eaeda32ae6a4229fb4b024cfdf3183043d9b703d
 F src/date.c cb71f73d5df5303ec6630971b9c8b8c7df466fa3233dbdc643d613806e53e554
 F src/dbpage.c f3eea5f7ec47e09ee7da40f42b25092ecbe961fc59566b8e5f705f34335b2387
 F src/dbstat.c ec92074baa61d883de58c945162d9e666c13cd7cf3a23bc38b4d1c4d0b2c2bef
-F src/delete.c 05e27e3a55dcfeadf2f7ca95a5c5e0928f182c04640ec1954ffa42f3d5c19341
-F src/expr.c 099cf96cf72f1b8cebf0d91a8f75e111454cd011deed9c6dadcd0241c2abdca8
+F src/delete.c fe728a9ec79a719c2c2fb0c42822fc96a7cb457279eede8314e25d951b0e0dda
+F src/expr.c db2e4870db1577415f796c22ee893175432bd61abce082c5905902257724ad24
 F src/fault.c 460f3e55994363812d9d60844b2a6de88826e007
 F src/fkey.c 03c134cc8bffe54835f742ddea0b72ebfc8f6b32773d175c71b8afeea6cb5c83
-F src/func.c 03e6b501f3056d0ba398bda17df938b2b566aa0b3ca7e1942a3cd1925d04ec36
+F src/func.c e20ad8a7cf1a8a8237e7cfc5b3b3c82598e40a05c980e3de30b5323a7f8927ab
 F src/global.c bd0892ade7289f6e20bff44c07d06371f2ff9b53cea359e7854b9b72f65adc30
-F src/hash.c c6af5f96a7a76d000f07c5402c48c318c2566beecdee9e78b9d9f60ce7119565
+F src/hash.c 9ee4269fb1d6632a6fecfb9479c93a1f29271bddbbaf215dd60420bcb80c7220
 F src/hash.h 3340ab6e1d13e725571d7cee6d3e3135f0779a7d8e76a9ce0a85971fa3953c51
-F src/hwtime.h b638809e083b601b618df877b2e89cb87c2a47a01f4def10be4c4ebb54664ac7
+F src/hwtime.h f9c2dfb84dce7acf95ce6d289e46f5f9d3d1afd328e53da8f8e9008e3b3caae6
 F src/in-operator.md 10cd8f4bcd225a32518407c2fb2484089112fd71
-F src/insert.c a8de1db43335fc4946370a7a7e47d89975ad678ddb15078a150e993ba2fb37d4
-F src/json.c 39b1c7527f3111923e65f168a87b03b591f12a41400a63d05c119794bee36620
+F src/insert.c a38bbb944a4f2771d70140db9c5d57e36c37e28d5a366497b4f93272a6d2567e
+F src/json.c 89170fc7a484073e84c0573b31c2878bdbf5210e9cc9539b9a74404153c6a779
 F src/legacy.c d7874bc885906868cd51e6c2156698f2754f02d9eee1bae2d687323c3ca8e5aa
 F src/loadext.c 176d6b2cb18a6ad73b133db17f6fc351c4d9a2d510deebdb76c22bde9cfd1465
-F src/main.c 8024bdacd452fc114e34a6bc9d75d1b33ac64c40222d2aa82d3edd1a1a58f976
+F src/main.c 44a6b08c61b3256634767dd6b91f7c5ce9f9520d2fe4573300fea40b7c766114
 F src/malloc.c 47b82c5daad557d9b963e3873e99c22570fb470719082c6658bf64e3012f7d23
 F src/mem0.c 6a55ebe57c46ca1a7d98da93aaa07f99f1059645
-F src/mem1.c c12a42539b1ba105e3707d0e628ad70e611040d8f5e38cf942cee30c867083de
+F src/mem1.c 3bb59158c38e05f6270e761a9f435bf19827a264c13d1631c58b84bdc96d73b2
 F src/mem2.c c8bfc9446fd0798bddd495eb5d9dbafa7d4b7287d8c22d50a83ac9daa26d8a75
 F src/mem3.c 30301196cace2a085cbedee1326a49f4b26deff0af68774ca82c1f7c06fda4f6
 F src/mem5.c b7da5c10a726aacacc9ad7cdcb0667deec643e117591cc69cf9b4b9e7f3e96ff
@@ -613,47 +613,47 @@ F src/msvc.h 80b35f95d93bf996ccb3e498535255f2ef1118c78764719a7cd15ab4106ccac9
 F src/mutex.c 5e3409715552348732e97b9194abe92fdfcd934cfb681df4ba0ab87ac6c18d25
 F src/mutex.h a7b2293c48db5f27007c3bdb21d438873637d12658f5a0bf8ad025bb96803c4a
 F src/mutex_noop.c 9d4309c075ba9cc7249e19412d3d62f7f94839c4
-F src/mutex_unix.c dd2b3f1cc1863079bc1349ac0fec395a500090c4fe4e11ab775310a49f2f956d
-F src/mutex_w32.c caa50e1c0258ac4443f52e00fe8aaea73b6d0728bd8856bedfff822cae418541
+F src/mutex_unix.c bd52ec50e44a41fe1e3deb5a6e3fe98edb6f2059da3e46d196363d0fa3192cda
+F src/mutex_w32.c 38b56d0bc8d54c17c20cbaaad3719b0c36b92fd07a7e34360d0c6a18d5589912
 F src/notify.c 89a97dc854c3aa62ad5f384ef50c5a4a11d70fcc69f86de3e991573421130ed6
-F src/os.c 81c9c1c52eab711e27e33fd51fe5788488d3a02bc1a71439857abbee5d0d2c97
+F src/os.c 509452169d5ea739723e213b8e2481cf0e587f0e88579a912d200db5269f5f6d
 F src/os.h 1ff5ae51d339d0e30d8a9d814f4b8f8e448169304d83a7ed9db66a65732f3e63
 F src/os_common.h 6c0eb8dd40ef3e12fe585a13e709710267a258e2c8dd1c40b1948a1d14582e06
 F src/os_kv.c 4d39e1f1c180b11162c6dc4aa8ad34053873a639bac6baae23272fc03349986a
 F src/os_setup.h 6011ad7af5db4e05155f385eb3a9b4470688de6f65d6166b8956e58a3d872107
-F src/os_unix.c 1b3ddb7814c4bf37f494c04d2ab30c1ced5b2c927267e1930ce7cd388787a96d
-F src/os_win.c 2b2411279f7b24f927591561303fc5871845732df42641cbf695c23640b16975
+F src/os_unix.c 95b407307deb902a3bd9a5d5666c7838709cccb337baeee6ef0a53f512d3673e
+F src/os_win.c 79ff2345aafe92be324e8d9062050c6c5ae714c2db6b4b5334d7d28e70ea81e6
 F src/os_win.h 7b073010f1451abe501be30d12f6bc599824944a
-F src/pager.c 45e2ef5e9eb5cc0138bcc32b5d2299479be80b206f621873f59149dfb517f496
+F src/pager.c eeb41200c0d0d75b49e0c374eecb8f07f12f2c1deb0f1d3ca5573bcb300b9727
 F src/pager.h f82e9844166e1585f5786837ddc7709966138ced17f568c16af7ccf946c2baa3
 F src/parse.y 146f9a1db7db5ef4299c6897d335e5abed348c2626190d2877d45ffa210fd4ca
-F src/pcache.c 8ee13acccfd9accbf0af94910b7323dd7f7d55300d92ddafcf40e34fcc8e21be
+F src/pcache.c 4cd4a0043167da9ba7e19b4d179a0e6354e7fe32c16f781ecf9bf0a5ff63b40b
 F src/pcache.h 1497ce1b823cf00094bb0cf3bac37b345937e6f910890c626b16512316d3abf5
-F src/pcache1.c dee95e3cd2b61e6512dc814c5ab76d5eb36f0bfc9441dbb4260fccc0d12bbddc
-F src/pragma.c 26ed2cfdc5c12aa1c707178635709684960288cacc9cff9d491a38ff10e395f1
+F src/pcache1.c 602acb23c471bb8d557a6f0083cc2be641d6cafcafa19e481eba7ef4c9ca0f00
+F src/pragma.c 02c8e7b47e88c2afb77fb1f6ebf2cd9331e4469ae97d4a774ce824e2875fbfcb
 F src/pragma.h e690a356c18e98414d2e870ea791c1be1545a714ba623719deb63f7f226d8bb7
-F src/prepare.c 6350675966bd0e7ac3a464af9dbfe26db6f0d4237f4e1f1acdb17b12ad371e6e
+F src/prepare.c d6c4354f8ea0dc06962fbabc4b68c4471a45276a2918c929be00f9f537f69eb1
 F src/printf.c b9320cdbeca0b336c3f139fd36dd121e4167dd62b35fbe9ccaa9bab44c0af38d
 F src/random.c 606b00941a1d7dd09c381d3279a058d771f406c5213c9932bbd93d5587be4b9c
-F src/resolve.c 3e53e02ce87c9582bd7e7d22f13f4094a271678d9dc72820fa257a2abb5e4032
-F src/rowset.c ba9515a922af32abe1f7d39406b9d35730ed65efab9443dc5702693b60854c92
-F src/select.c a42b88d8bb9e824f45ccea16e7dfc5a812a32e2b8a0c5727b893734a14d83ade
-F src/shell.c.in 6915835eee0775c02ea1fb474da19f07ed76acbfc92444aef09e16b963abb46f
-F src/sqlite.h.in 6296fa5886cdf6f337d7b95da962791e352ce4c8b6aa53eff84137c1db62a79e
+F src/resolve.c c1457b920aeb33ed106bf478fad31b7473a8950a755ea898980c428928f3a514
+F src/rowset.c 8432130e6c344b3401a8874c3cb49fefe6873fec593294de077afea2dce5ec97
+F src/select.c d1d9e1e91098763573f15671323cc2fb869b199a889d51b1405b80161c6f6c24
+F src/shell.c.in de1299f089fc8c316a17bfc8ebb1f0a038da894c09920dc0aecee5c850df7b12
+F src/sqlite.h.in ddae9f672352c9e44e1acac99a401e6700752932fd4dc7f35e5569f7e0d609dc
 F src/sqlite3.rc 5121c9e10c3964d5755191c80dd1180c122fc3a8
 F src/sqlite3ext.h da473ce2b3d0ae407a6300c4a164589b9a6bfdbec9462688a8593ff16f3bb6e4
-F src/sqliteInt.h a531b7f352a0db457b5e0c56f41a3905273252ec8646526f8f897f0815519182
-F src/sqliteLimit.h d7323ffea5208c6af2734574bae933ca8ed2ab728083caa117c9738581a31657
+F src/sqliteInt.h 924ddd5bd9dad8a499005c2c02a492c67dbe784feafbd78fdd70d712cf839499
+F src/sqliteLimit.h 33b1c9baba578d34efe7dfdb43193b366111cdf41476b1e82699e14c11ee1fb6
 F src/status.c 160c445d7d28c984a0eae38c144f6419311ed3eace59b44ac6dafc20db4af749
 F src/table.c 0f141b58a16de7e2fbe81c308379e7279f4c6b50eb08efeec5892794a0ba30d1
-F src/tclsqlite.c 8522a04fb9c84faa1d80354430ae0ee9349727a3a4b32e3cfe39b9be8324cabd
-F src/test1.c 2b72555fdbf1b5755d40e5f72baed1cdd1dec9154b8a3b9b3de4d6d656b94fab
+F src/tclsqlite.c 9952874a1f1bb9fa6406b334cadf748c273cd2f2d4501152022a95dd37dc7958
+F src/test1.c f6076314e68b5803b962f94628a064aaf77850abed352999ec38db493294f2ae
 F src/test2.c 827446e259a3b7ab949da1542953edda7b5117982576d3e6f1c24a0dd20a5cef
-F src/test3.c 61798bb0d38b915067a8c8e03f5a534b431181f802659a6616f9b4ff7d872644
+F src/test3.c e5178558c41ff53236ae0271e9acb3d6885a94981d2eb939536ee6474598840e
 F src/test4.c 4533b76419e7feb41b40582554663ed3cd77aaa54e135cf76b3205098cd6e664
 F src/test5.c 328aae2c010c57a9829d255dc099d6899311672d
-F src/test6.c ae73a3a42bbc982fb9e301b84d30bda65a307be48c6dff20aba1461e17a9b0ce
-F src/test8.c 0c856d6ff6b0d2ff6696addc467a15ed17c6910f14475302cd5b3b4e54406161
+F src/test6.c e53bc69dc3cb3815fb74df74f38159ec05ba6dd5273216062e26bc797f925530
+F src/test8.c ccc5d3e2a2bf7248f7da185e2afc4c08b4c6840447f5eb4dd106db165fddbdbc
 F src/test9.c 12e5ba554d2d1cbe0158f6ab3f7ffcd7a86ee4e5
 F src/test_async.c 195ab49da082053fdb0f949c114b806a49ca770a
 F src/test_autoext.c 915d245e736652a219a907909bb6710f0d587871
@@ -664,24 +664,24 @@ F src/test_btree.c 8b2dc8b8848cf3a4db93f11578f075e82252a274
 F src/test_config.c 8264637b06a3c1f0727c88d1ea32dcf7986b9e7e358a970cae87cdac8a5b2708
 F src/test_delete.c e2fe07646dff6300b48d49b2fee2fe192ed389e834dd635e3b3bac0ce0bf9f8f
 F src/test_demovfs.c 38a459d1c78fd9afa770445b224c485e079018d6ac07332ff9bd07b54d2b8ce9
-F src/test_devsym.c aff2255ea290d7718da08af30cdf18e470ff7325a5eff63e0057b1496ed66593
+F src/test_devsym.c 649434ed34d0b03fbd5a6b42df80f0f9a7e53f94dd1710aad5dd8831e91c4e86
 F src/test_fs.c ba1e1dc18fd3159fdba0b9c4256f14032159785320dfbd6776eb9973cb75d480
 F src/test_func.c 24df3a346c012b1fc9e1001d346db6054deb426db0a7437e92490630e71c9b0a
 F src/test_hexio.c 9478e56a0f08e07841a014a93b20e4ba2709ab56d039d1ca8020e26846aa19bd
-F src/test_init.c 4413c211a94b62157ca4c145b3f27c497f03c664
+F src/test_init.c f2cc4774b7c9140f76e45ecbb2ae219f68e3acbbe248c0179db666a70eae9f08
 F src/test_intarray.c 39b4181662a0f33a427748d87218e7578d913e683dc27eab7098bb41617cac71
-F src/test_intarray.h d57ae92f420cda25e22790dac474d60961bd0c500cbaa3338a05152d4a669ef7
+F src/test_intarray.h 6c3534641108cd1bea517a8e117dcba237081310a29a4c35bd2190caa8972293
 F src/test_journal.c a0b9709b2f12b1ec819eea8a1176f283bca6d688a6d4a502bd6fd79786f4e287
 F src/test_loadext.c 337056bae59f80b9eb00ba82088b39d0f4fe6dfd
 F src/test_malloc.c 21121ea85b49ec0bdb69995847cef9036ef9beca3ce63bbb776e4ea2ecc44b97
-F src/test_md5.c 7268e1e8c399d4a5e181b64ac20e1e6f3bc4dd9fc87abac02db145a3d951fa8c
-F src/test_multiplex.c d8bc260a57c2028946a9bce9918d24e69e44cebd71ac6be240aa5b6b75e2b369
-F src/test_multiplex.h 5436d03f2d0501d04f3ed50a75819e190495b635
+F src/test_md5.c 0472c86d561f7f9e4ff94080100c2783196f50e583bb83375b759450c5b81802
+F src/test_multiplex.c 70479161239d65af2a231550b270e9d11ece717ad7bf0e13ef42206586e9dd7f
+F src/test_multiplex.h f0ff5b6f4462bfd46dac165d6375b9530d08089b7bcbe75e88e0926110db5363
 F src/test_mutex.c abf486e91bd65e2448027d4bb505e7cce6ba110e1afb9bd348d1996961cadf0d
 F src/test_onefile.c f31e52e891c5fef6709b9fcef54ce660648a34172423a9cbdf4cbce3ba0049f4
 F src/test_osinst.c d341f9d7613e007c8c3f7eba6cd307230047506aa8f97858c1fd21f5069616bd
-F src/test_pcache.c a5cd24730cb43c5b18629043314548c9169abb00
-F src/test_quota.c 6cb9297115b551f433a9ad1741817a9831abed99
+F src/test_pcache.c 3960cd2c1350adc992c4bf7adcfb0d1ac0574733012bd1a5f94e195928577599
+F src/test_quota.c ea44c05f29b995bdb71c55eb0c602604884e55681d59b7736e604bbcc68b0464
 F src/test_quota.h 2a8ad1952d1d2ca9af0ce0465e56e6c023b5e15d
 F src/test_rtree.c 671f3fae50ff116ef2e32a3bf1fe21b5615b4b7b
 F src/test_schema.c f5d6067dfc2f2845c4dd56df63e66ee826fb23877855c785f75cc2ca83fd0c1b
@@ -693,9 +693,9 @@ F src/test_tclvar.c 33ff42149494a39c5fbb0df3d25d6fafb2f668888e41c0688d07273dcb26
 F src/test_thread.c 7ddcf0c8b79fa3c1d172f82f322302c963d923cdb503c6171f3c8081586d0b01
 F src/test_vdbecov.c f60c6f135ec42c0de013a1d5136777aa328a776d33277f92abac648930453d43
 F src/test_vfs.c 193c18da3dbf62a0e33ae7a240bbef938a50846672ee947664512b77d853fe81
-F src/test_vfstrace.c bab9594adc976cbe696ff3970728830b4c5ed698
+F src/test_vfstrace.c a2ea82df2ed8927e9eba49bdba1aa1aeb1dcb13dbf6558cff036da813031de9a
 F src/test_windirent.c a895e2c068a06644eef91a7f0a32182445a893b9a0f33d0cdb4283dca2486ac1
-F src/test_windirent.h 90dfbe95442c9762357fe128dc7ae3dc199d006de93eb33ba3972e0a90484215
+F src/test_windirent.h da2e5b73c32d09905fbdd00f27cd802212a32a58ead882736fe4f5eb775ebc50
 F src/test_window.c cdae419fdcea5bad6dcd9368c685abdad6deb59e9fc8b84b153de513d394ba3f
 F src/test_wsd.c 41cadfd9d97fe8e3e4e44f61a4a8ccd6f7ca8fe9
 F src/threads.c 4ae07fa022a3dc7c5beb373cf744a85d3c5c6c3c
@@ -705,28 +705,28 @@ F src/trigger.c ad6ab9452715fa9a8075442e15196022275b414b9141b566af8cdb7a1605f2b0
 F src/update.c 88f30d38409ddcd2d583bef1a1265a3e8c701e232096505183680b2027439a00
 F src/upsert.c 5303dc6c518fa7d4b280ec65170f465c7a70b7ac2b22491598f6d0b4875b3145
 F src/utf.c ee39565f0843775cc2c81135751ddd93eceb91a673ea2c57f61c76f288b041a0
-F src/util.c d4bcb560471cd94e6e17d448311f8d5bf81a7e5276295a53501058ef1b95dd1a
-F src/vacuum.c 84ce7f01f8a7a08748e107a441db83bcec13970190ddcb0c9ff522adbc1c23fd
-F src/vdbe.c fedd2dfa5165256c8e372f2ae9454c4a82cf60ce79a04dff80a86ab2116ea15a
-F src/vdbe.h 637ae853b7d42ae3951034cc63ab7c8af837861f79504cdb5399552fcd89a884
-F src/vdbeInt.h a4147a4ddf613cb1bcb555ace9e9e74a9c099d65facd88155f191b1fb4d74cfb
-F src/vdbeapi.c b4982cde547054c4f7341198db3c3008a48e1eb028f757601bf5bf2fc026cbcf
-F src/vdbeaux.c 6ee48db408d4c297a363f1e31145c09793a580e7c508bb36063dd017d67117a2
+F src/util.c 6f9d2f278dcc8d41c618980cd3cfe88e1bafc0626209b917c6773d8202d29ef6
+F src/vacuum.c 604fcdaebe76f3497c855afcbf91b8fa5046b32de3045bab89cc008d68e40104
+F src/vdbe.c c3b6d8d60f2bb89ae771326f48945b8549f68c8f9a573e026b77b444f3d7d32e
+F src/vdbe.h 41485521f68e9437fdb7ec4a90f9d86ab294e9bb8281e33b235915e29122cfc0
+F src/vdbeInt.h 7bd49eef8f89c1a271fbf12d80a206bf56c876814c5fc6bee340f4e1907095ae
+F src/vdbeapi.c de9703f8705afc393cc2864669ce28cf9516983c8331d59aa2b978de01634365
+F src/vdbeaux.c 998e84345fe712e4ab3f28556daefe174e106ae0439faa7bec9f0ca674b3b276
 F src/vdbeblob.c 2516697b3ee8154eb8915f29466fb5d4f1ae39ee8b755ea909cefaf57ec5e2ce
 F src/vdbemem.c 1cac4028c0dabbf1f3259f107440e2780e05ac9fe419e9709e6eb4e166ba714b
-F src/vdbesort.c 43756031ca7430f7aec3ef904824a7883c4ede783e51f280d99b9b65c0796e35
+F src/vdbesort.c a0d71c5eb15e4da6eae6eea69c482762266adaf34551827d1f77bb49aa90ffed
 F src/vdbetrace.c fe0bc29ebd4e02c8bc5c1945f1d2e6be5927ec12c06d89b03ef2a4def34bf823
 F src/vdbevtab.c aae4bd769410eb7e1d02c42613eec961d514459b1c3c1c63cfc84e92a137daac
-F src/vtab.c 4758a96d36c9a120848386ae603b1ab32a4876e0a1faf81bfcfb524455e583dc
+F src/vtab.c 1ecf8c3745d29275688d583e12822fa984d421e0286b5ef50c137bc3bf6d7a64
 F src/vxworks.h d2988f4e5a61a4dfe82c6524dd3d6e4f2ce3cdb9
-F src/wal.c 7a65f64bfe4a783c5e2df73ffb0efc383dec934dee9e3ac706b2eeb3631d17ac
+F src/wal.c 7dbb27213acbc57819d97953e8434283b751cc5307a21b8847f664de45dc3307
 F src/wal.h c3aa7825bfa2fe0d85bef2db94655f99870a285778baa36307c0a16da32b226a
-F src/walker.c f890a3298418d7cba3b69b8803594fdc484ea241206a8dfa99db6dd36f8cbb3b
-F src/where.c b74a83b4c8f65b218c5c1c8d9122433f85ee1300fd9263ba1697d0e1040eeb36
-F src/whereInt.h e25203e5bfee149f5f1225ae0166cfb4f1e65490c998a024249e98bb0647377c
-F src/wherecode.c e63b522e780e92ed80b5e278e88f54e1166cafa272d2e06cd36297478f44bce2
-F src/whereexpr.c 22cf19b0ececeaf838daed1039c5231a8778784eba5ad67b991442a23473fd3f
-F src/window.c e075ea85bea322e30e361fa6e69eddba74f461e99e2a564dc09973f8a1fb27d9
+F src/walker.c 1f1c4743e064873efff71509d8839d9f7509b8960699aa2eeb906dec41a0f667
+F src/where.c efb828cc5f42634918902d352644bb3ddce672930e19859c80748810b29d4b8b
+F src/whereInt.h c7d19902863beadec1d04e66aca39c0bcd60b74f05f0eaa7422c7005dfc5d51a
+F src/wherecode.c bff0bc56cb1a382de266c2db3a691135c18a4360b6ad5e069e5c415d57eb0c38
+F src/whereexpr.c f0a29594a2c143e10af7adf513b32d11223d76c6981c7f428433ec1ccbc33f84
+F src/window.c e25c9c675a56b65c05102f592b895e8b0931a888f88bc66ece7c73cbd2226259
 F test/8_3_names.test ebbb5cd36741350040fd28b432ceadf495be25b2
 F test/affinity2.test ce1aafc86e110685b324e9a763eab4f2a73f737842ec3b687bd965867de90627
 F test/affinity3.test f094773025eddf31135c7ad4cde722b7696f8eb07b97511f98585addf2a510a9
@@ -1974,6 +1974,7 @@ F tool/build-all-msvc.bat c817b716e0edeecaf265a6775b63e5f45c34a6544f1d4114a22270
 F tool/build-shell.sh 950f47c6174f1eea171319438b93ba67ff5bf367
 F tool/cg_anno.tcl c1f875f5a4c9caca3d59937b16aff716f8b1883935f1b4c9ae23124705bc8099 x
 F tool/checkSpacing.c 810e51703529a204fc4e1eb060e9ab663e3c06d2
+F tool/custom.txt 7c5402073801047526d59d9ecd770e7bcd8f9e553bc7278ab2b0ac6fac96ad32
 F tool/dbhash.c 5da0c61032d23d74f2ab84ffc5740f0e8abec94f2c45c0b4306be7eb3ae96df0
 F tool/dbtotxt.c ca48d34eaca6d6b6e4bd6a7be2b72caf34475869054240244c60fa7e69a518d6
 F tool/dbtotxt.md c9a57af8739957ef36d2cfad5c4b1443ff3688ed33e4901ee200c8b651f43f3c
@@ -2035,6 +2036,7 @@ F tool/speedtest16.c ecb6542862151c3e6509bbc00509b234562ae81e
 F tool/speedtest2.tcl ee2149167303ba8e95af97873c575c3e0fab58ff
 F tool/speedtest8.c 2902c46588c40b55661e471d7a86e4dd71a18224
 F tool/speedtest8inst1.c 7ce07da76b5e745783e703a834417d725b7d45fd
+F tool/spellsift.tcl 52b4b04dc4333c7ab024f09d9d66ed6b6f7c6eb00b38497a09f338fa55d40618 x
 F tool/split-sqlite3c.tcl 5aa60643afca558bc732b1444ae81a522326f91e1dc5665b369c54f09e20de60
 F tool/sqldiff.c 2a693b4e7c1818c23f871f82f0c3fe67d80b67e3f087893089d33da29c1e387e
 F tool/sqlite3_analyzer.c.in f88615bf33098945e0a42f17733f472083d150b58bdaaa5555a7129d0a51621c
@@ -2073,8 +2075,11 @@ F vsixtest/vsixtest.tcl 6a9a6ab600c25a91a7acc6293828957a386a8a93
 F vsixtest/vsixtest.vcxproj.data 2ed517e100c66dc455b492e1a33350c1b20fbcdc
 F vsixtest/vsixtest.vcxproj.filters 37e51ffedcdb064aad6ff33b6148725226cd608e
 F vsixtest/vsixtest_TemporaryKey.pfx e5b1b036facdb453873e7084e1cae9102ccc67a0
-P aa8e79e16abf028d50370ae13b6c952a7b7f42985125bc8e7f51b20a10bfc336
-R bda07561c201ad16470d8d134cf52380
-U drh
-Z b7e41c600665e7a3d0b0507159b16a5e
+P 2d58c77448cfaaf12887b60bcfea039d3410a750ac8955a817c45be85c00eb9e
+R 59cd5de4738b59306e8e563e728e2e6a
+T *branch * spell-check
+T *sym-spell-check *
+T -sym-trunk *
+U larrybr
+Z 571f9428e6a0b3c7f2d392953641b395
 # Remove this line to create a well-formed Fossil manifest.
diff --git a/manifest.uuid b/manifest.uuid
index 6f2341689..70c1a7e0e 100644
--- a/manifest.uuid
+++ b/manifest.uuid
@@ -1 +1 @@
-2d58c77448cfaaf12887b60bcfea039d3410a750ac8955a817c45be85c00eb9e
\ No newline at end of file
+26c1bb4bd9e9f56613c3aa87407a7f562fd4ebde5bfd6dece02078001d9a45f8
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/src/alter.c b/src/alter.c
index 121b61711..6a3ab8189 100644
--- a/src/alter.c
+++ b/src/alter.c
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ static void renameTestSchema(
   int bNoDQS                      /* Do not allow DQS in the schema */
 ){
   pParse->colNamesSet = 1;
-  sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, 
+  sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
       "SELECT 1 "
       "FROM \"%w\"." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " "
       "WHERE name NOT LIKE 'sqliteX_%%' ESCAPE 'X'"
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ static void renameTestSchema(
   );
 
   if( bTemp==0 ){
-    sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, 
+    sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
         "SELECT 1 "
         "FROM temp." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " "
         "WHERE name NOT LIKE 'sqliteX_%%' ESCAPE 'X'"
@@ -82,20 +82,20 @@ static void renameTestSchema(
 
 /*
 ** Generate VM code to replace any double-quoted strings (but not double-quoted
-** identifiers) within the "sql" column of the sqlite_schema table in 
+** identifiers) within the "sql" column of the sqlite_schema table in
 ** database zDb with their single-quoted equivalents. If argument bTemp is
 ** not true, similarly update all SQL statements in the sqlite_schema table
 ** of the temp db.
 */
 static void renameFixQuotes(Parse *pParse, const char *zDb, int bTemp){
-  sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, 
-      "UPDATE \"%w\"." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE 
+  sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+      "UPDATE \"%w\"." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE
       " SET sql = sqlite_rename_quotefix(%Q, sql)"
       "WHERE name NOT LIKE 'sqliteX_%%' ESCAPE 'X'"
       " AND sql NOT LIKE 'create virtual%%'" , zDb, zDb
   );
   if( bTemp==0 ){
-    sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, 
+    sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
       "UPDATE temp." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE
       " SET sql = sqlite_rename_quotefix('temp', sql)"
       "WHERE name NOT LIKE 'sqliteX_%%' ESCAPE 'X'"
@@ -118,8 +118,8 @@ static void renameReloadSchema(Parse *pParse, int iDb, u16 p5){
 }
 
 /*
-** Generate code to implement the "ALTER TABLE xxx RENAME TO yyy" 
-** command. 
+** Generate code to implement the "ALTER TABLE xxx RENAME TO yyy"
+** command.
 */
 void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
   Parse *pParse,            /* Parser context. */
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
   int iDb;                  /* Database that contains the table */
   char *zDb;                /* Name of database iDb */
   Table *pTab;              /* Table being renamed */
-  char *zName = 0;          /* NULL-terminated version of pName */ 
+  char *zName = 0;          /* NULL-terminated version of pName */
   sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; /* Database connection */
   int nTabName;             /* Number of UTF-8 characters in zTabName */
   const char *zTabName;     /* Original name of the table */
@@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
    || sqlite3FindIndex(db, zName, zDb)
    || sqlite3IsShadowTableOf(db, pTab, zName)
   ){
-    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
         "there is already another table or index with this name: %s", zName);
     goto exit_rename_table;
   }
@@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
 
   /* Begin a transaction for database iDb. Then modify the schema cookie
   ** (since the ALTER TABLE modifies the schema). Call sqlite3MayAbort(),
-  ** as the scalar functions (e.g. sqlite_rename_table()) invoked by the 
+  ** as the scalar functions (e.g. sqlite_rename_table()) invoked by the
   ** nested SQL may raise an exception.  */
   v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
   if( v==0 ){
@@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
 
   /* Rewrite all CREATE TABLE, INDEX, TRIGGER or VIEW statements in
   ** the schema to use the new table name.  */
-  sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, 
+  sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
       "UPDATE \"%w\"." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " SET "
       "sql = sqlite_rename_table(%Q, type, name, sql, %Q, %Q, %d) "
       "WHERE (type!='index' OR tbl_name=%Q COLLATE nocase)"
@@ -233,14 +233,14 @@ void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
              "'sqlite_autoindex_' || %Q || substr(name,%d+18) "
             "ELSE name END "
       "WHERE tbl_name=%Q COLLATE nocase AND "
-          "(type='table' OR type='index' OR type='trigger');", 
+          "(type='table' OR type='index' OR type='trigger');",
       zDb,
-      zName, zName, zName, 
+      zName, zName, zName,
       nTabName, zTabName
   );
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT
-  /* If the sqlite_sequence table exists in this database, then update 
+  /* If the sqlite_sequence table exists in this database, then update
   ** it with the new table name.
   */
   if( sqlite3FindTable(db, "sqlite_sequence", zDb) ){
@@ -251,10 +251,10 @@ void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
 #endif
 
   /* If the table being renamed is not itself part of the temp database,
-  ** edit view and trigger definitions within the temp database 
+  ** edit view and trigger definitions within the temp database
   ** as required.  */
   if( iDb!=1 ){
-    sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, 
+    sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
         "UPDATE sqlite_temp_schema SET "
             "sql = sqlite_rename_table(%Q, type, name, sql, %Q, %Q, 1), "
             "tbl_name = "
@@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ void sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn(Parse *pParse, Token *pColDef){
     return;
   }
   if( (pCol->colFlags & COLFLAG_GENERATED)==0 ){
-    /* If the default value for the new column was specified with a 
+    /* If the default value for the new column was specified with a
     ** literal NULL, then set pDflt to 0. This simplifies checking
     ** for an SQL NULL default below.
     */
@@ -414,11 +414,11 @@ void sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn(Parse *pParse, Token *pColDef){
     ** have to use printf() to translate between these units: */
     assert( IsOrdinaryTable(pTab) );
     assert( IsOrdinaryTable(pNew) );
-    sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, 
+    sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
         "UPDATE \"%w\"." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " SET "
           "sql = printf('%%.%ds, ',sql) || %Q"
           " || substr(sql,1+length(printf('%%.%ds',sql))) "
-        "WHERE type = 'table' AND name = %Q", 
+        "WHERE type = 'table' AND name = %Q",
       zDb, pNew->u.tab.addColOffset, zCol, pNew->u.tab.addColOffset,
       zTab
     );
@@ -462,14 +462,14 @@ void sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn(Parse *pParse, Token *pColDef){
 
 /*
 ** This function is called by the parser after the table-name in
-** an "ALTER TABLE <table-name> ADD" statement is parsed. Argument 
+** an "ALTER TABLE <table-name> ADD" statement is parsed. Argument
 ** pSrc is the full-name of the table being altered.
 **
 ** This routine makes a (partial) copy of the Table structure
 ** for the table being altered and sets Parse.pNewTable to point
 ** to it. Routines called by the parser as the column definition
-** is parsed (i.e. sqlite3AddColumn()) add the new Column data to 
-** the copy. The copy of the Table structure is deleted by tokenize.c 
+** is parsed (i.e. sqlite3AddColumn()) add the new Column data to
+** the copy. The copy of the Table structure is deleted by tokenize.c
 ** after parsing is finished.
 **
 ** Routine sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn() will be called to complete
@@ -571,7 +571,7 @@ static int isRealTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, int bDrop){
   }
 #endif
   if( zType ){
-    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot %s %s \"%s\"", 
+    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot %s %s \"%s\"",
         (bDrop ? "drop column from" : "rename columns of"),
         zType, pTab->zName
     );
@@ -611,7 +611,7 @@ void sqlite3AlterRenameColumn(
   if( SQLITE_OK!=isAlterableTable(pParse, pTab) ) goto exit_rename_column;
   if( SQLITE_OK!=isRealTable(pParse, pTab, 0) ) goto exit_rename_column;
 
-  /* Which schema holds the table to be altered */  
+  /* Which schema holds the table to be altered */ 
   iSchema = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema);
   assert( iSchema>=0 );
   zDb = db->aDb[iSchema].zDbSName;
@@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ void sqlite3AlterRenameColumn(
   if( !zNew ) goto exit_rename_column;
   assert( pNew->n>0 );
   bQuote = sqlite3Isquote(pNew->z[0]);
-  sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, 
+  sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
       "UPDATE \"%w\"." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " SET "
       "sql = sqlite_rename_column(sql, type, name, %Q, %Q, %d, %Q, %d, %d) "
       "WHERE name NOT LIKE 'sqliteX_%%' ESCAPE 'X' "
@@ -658,7 +658,7 @@ void sqlite3AlterRenameColumn(
       pTab->zName
   );
 
-  sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, 
+  sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
       "UPDATE temp." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " SET "
       "sql = sqlite_rename_column(sql, type, name, %Q, %Q, %d, %Q, %d, 1) "
       "WHERE type IN ('trigger', 'view')",
@@ -708,7 +708,7 @@ struct RenameCtx {
   RenameToken *pList;             /* List of tokens to overwrite */
   int nList;                      /* Number of tokens in pList */
   int iCol;                       /* Index of column being renamed */
-  Table *pTab;                    /* Table being ALTERed */ 
+  Table *pTab;                    /* Table being ALTERed */
   const char *zOld;               /* Old column name */
 };
 
@@ -716,14 +716,14 @@ struct RenameCtx {
 /*
 ** This function is only for debugging. It performs two tasks:
 **
-**   1. Checks that pointer pPtr does not already appear in the 
+**   1. Checks that pointer pPtr does not already appear in the
 **      rename-token list.
 **
 **   2. Dereferences each pointer in the rename-token list.
 **
 ** The second is most effective when debugging under valgrind or
-** address-sanitizer or similar. If any of these pointers no longer 
-** point to valid objects, an exception is raised by the memory-checking 
+** address-sanitizer or similar. If any of these pointers no longer
+** point to valid objects, an exception is raised by the memory-checking
 ** tool.
 **
 ** The point of this is to prevent comparisons of invalid pointer values.
@@ -918,7 +918,7 @@ void sqlite3RenameExprUnmap(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
 }
 
 /*
-** Remove all nodes that are part of expression-list pEList from the 
+** Remove all nodes that are part of expression-list pEList from the
 ** rename list.
 */
 void sqlite3RenameExprlistUnmap(Parse *pParse, ExprList *pEList){
@@ -959,8 +959,8 @@ static void renameTokenFree(sqlite3 *db, RenameToken *pToken){
 ** the list maintained by the RenameCtx object.
 */
 static RenameToken *renameTokenFind(
-  Parse *pParse, 
-  struct RenameCtx *pCtx, 
+  Parse *pParse,
+  struct RenameCtx *pCtx,
   const void *pPtr
 ){
   RenameToken **pp;
@@ -1008,12 +1008,12 @@ static int renameColumnSelectCb(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
 */
 static int renameColumnExprCb(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
   RenameCtx *p = pWalker->u.pRename;
-  if( pExpr->op==TK_TRIGGER 
-   && pExpr->iColumn==p->iCol 
+  if( pExpr->op==TK_TRIGGER
+   && pExpr->iColumn==p->iCol
    && pWalker->pParse->pTriggerTab==p->pTab
   ){
     renameTokenFind(pWalker->pParse, p, (void*)pExpr);
-  }else if( pExpr->op==TK_COLUMN 
+  }else if( pExpr->op==TK_COLUMN
    && pExpr->iColumn==p->iCol
    && ALWAYS(ExprUseYTab(pExpr))
    && p->pTab==pExpr->y.pTab
@@ -1047,14 +1047,14 @@ static RenameToken *renameColumnTokenNext(RenameCtx *pCtx){
 }
 
 /*
-** An error occured while parsing or otherwise processing a database
+** An error occurred while parsing or otherwise processing a database
 ** object (either pParse->pNewTable, pNewIndex or pNewTrigger) as part of an
 ** ALTER TABLE RENAME COLUMN program. The error message emitted by the
 ** sub-routine is currently stored in pParse->zErrMsg. This function
 ** adds context to the error message and then stores it in pCtx.
 */
 static void renameColumnParseError(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
   const char *zWhen,
   sqlite3_value *pType,
   sqlite3_value *pObject,
@@ -1064,7 +1064,7 @@ static void renameColumnParseError(
   const char *zN = (const char*)sqlite3_value_text(pObject);
   char *zErr;
 
-  zErr = sqlite3MPrintf(pParse->db, "error in %s %s%s%s: %s", 
+  zErr = sqlite3MPrintf(pParse->db, "error in %s %s%s%s: %s",
       zT, zN, (zWhen[0] ? " " : ""), zWhen,
       pParse->zErrMsg
   );
@@ -1074,14 +1074,14 @@ static void renameColumnParseError(
 
 /*
 ** For each name in the the expression-list pEList (i.e. each
-** pEList->a[i].zName) that matches the string in zOld, extract the 
+** pEList->a[i].zName) that matches the string in zOld, extract the
 ** corresponding rename-token from Parse object pParse and add it
 ** to the RenameCtx pCtx.
 */
 static void renameColumnElistNames(
-  Parse *pParse, 
-  RenameCtx *pCtx, 
-  const ExprList *pEList, 
+  Parse *pParse,
+  RenameCtx *pCtx,
+  const ExprList *pEList,
   const char *zOld
 ){
   if( pEList ){
@@ -1099,14 +1099,14 @@ static void renameColumnElistNames(
 }
 
 /*
-** For each name in the the id-list pIdList (i.e. each pIdList->a[i].zName) 
-** that matches the string in zOld, extract the corresponding rename-token 
+** For each name in the the id-list pIdList (i.e. each pIdList->a[i].zName)
+** that matches the string in zOld, extract the corresponding rename-token
 ** from Parse object pParse and add it to the RenameCtx pCtx.
 */
 static void renameColumnIdlistNames(
-  Parse *pParse, 
-  RenameCtx *pCtx, 
-  const IdList *pIdList, 
+  Parse *pParse,
+  RenameCtx *pCtx,
+  const IdList *pIdList,
   const char *zOld
 ){
   if( pIdList ){
@@ -1147,7 +1147,7 @@ static int renameParseSql(
   p->nQueryLoop = 1;
   rc = sqlite3RunParser(p, zSql);
   if( db->mallocFailed ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
-  if( rc==SQLITE_OK 
+  if( rc==SQLITE_OK
    && NEVER(p->pNewTable==0 && p->pNewIndex==0 && p->pNewTrigger==0)
   ){
     rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
@@ -1196,8 +1196,8 @@ static int renameEditSql(
   char *zBuf2 = 0;
 
   if( zNew ){
-    /* Set zQuot to point to a buffer containing a quoted copy of the 
-    ** identifier zNew. If the corresponding identifier in the original 
+    /* Set zQuot to point to a buffer containing a quoted copy of the
+    ** identifier zNew. If the corresponding identifier in the original
     ** ALTER TABLE statement was quoted (bQuote==1), then set zNew to
     ** point to zQuot so that all substitutions are made using the
     ** quoted version of the new column name.  */
@@ -1220,7 +1220,7 @@ static int renameEditSql(
 
   /* At this point pRename->pList contains a list of RenameToken objects
   ** corresponding to all tokens in the input SQL that must be replaced
-  ** with the new column name, or with single-quoted versions of themselves. 
+  ** with the new column name, or with single-quoted versions of themselves.
   ** All that remains is to construct and return the edited SQL string. */
   if( zOut ){
     int nOut = nSql;
@@ -1259,7 +1259,7 @@ static int renameEditSql(
 
       iOff = pBest->t.z - zSql;
       if( pBest->t.n!=nReplace ){
-        memmove(&zOut[iOff + nReplace], &zOut[iOff + pBest->t.n], 
+        memmove(&zOut[iOff + nReplace], &zOut[iOff + pBest->t.n],
             nOut - (iOff + pBest->t.n)
         );
         nOut += nReplace - pBest->t.n;
@@ -1294,7 +1294,7 @@ static void renameSetENames(ExprList *pEList, int val){
 
 /*
 ** Resolve all symbols in the trigger at pParse->pNewTrigger, assuming
-** it was read from the schema of database zDb. Return SQLITE_OK if 
+** it was read from the schema of database zDb. Return SQLITE_OK if
 ** successful. Otherwise, return an SQLite error code and leave an error
 ** message in the Parse object.
 */
@@ -1308,7 +1308,7 @@ static int renameResolveTrigger(Parse *pParse){
   memset(&sNC, 0, sizeof(sNC));
   sNC.pParse = pParse;
   assert( pNew->pTabSchema );
-  pParse->pTriggerTab = sqlite3FindTable(db, pNew->table, 
+  pParse->pTriggerTab = sqlite3FindTable(db, pNew->table,
       db->aDb[sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pNew->pTabSchema)].zDbSName
   );
   pParse->eTriggerOp = pNew->op;
@@ -1601,7 +1601,7 @@ static void renameColumnFunc(
     if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto renameColumnFunc_done;
 
     for(pStep=sParse.pNewTrigger->step_list; pStep; pStep=pStep->pNext){
-      if( pStep->zTarget ){ 
+      if( pStep->zTarget ){
         Table *pTarget = sqlite3LocateTable(&sParse, 0, pStep->zTarget, zDb);
         if( pTarget==pTab ){
           if( pStep->pUpsert ){
@@ -1647,7 +1647,7 @@ renameColumnFunc_done:
 }
 
 /*
-** Walker expression callback used by "RENAME TABLE". 
+** Walker expression callback used by "RENAME TABLE".
 */
 static int renameTableExprCb(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
   RenameCtx *p = pWalker->u.pRename;
@@ -1661,7 +1661,7 @@ static int renameTableExprCb(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
 }
 
 /*
-** Walker select callback used by "RENAME TABLE". 
+** Walker select callback used by "RENAME TABLE".
 */
 static int renameTableSelectCb(Walker *pWalker, Select *pSelect){
   int i;
@@ -1691,7 +1691,7 @@ static int renameTableSelectCb(Walker *pWalker, Select *pSelect){
 /*
 ** This C function implements an SQL user function that is used by SQL code
 ** generated by the ALTER TABLE ... RENAME command to modify the definition
-** of any foreign key constraints that use the table being renamed as the 
+** of any foreign key constraints that use the table being renamed as the
 ** parent table. It is passed three arguments:
 **
 **   0: The database containing the table being renamed.
@@ -1805,7 +1805,7 @@ static void renameTableFunc(
       else{
         Trigger *pTrigger = sParse.pNewTrigger;
         TriggerStep *pStep;
-        if( 0==sqlite3_stricmp(sParse.pNewTrigger->table, zOld) 
+        if( 0==sqlite3_stricmp(sParse.pNewTrigger->table, zOld)
             && sCtx.pTab->pSchema==pTrigger->pTabSchema
           ){
           renameTokenFind(&sParse, &sCtx, sParse.pNewTrigger->table);
@@ -1881,12 +1881,12 @@ static int renameQuotefixExprCb(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
 **
 **   CREATE TABLE t1(a, b, c);
 **
-**   SELECT sqlite_rename_quotefix('main', 
+**   SELECT sqlite_rename_quotefix('main',
 **       'CREATE VIEW v1 AS SELECT "a", "string" FROM t1'
 **   );
 **
 ** returns the string:
-** 
+**
 **   CREATE VIEW v1 AS SELECT "a", 'string' FROM t1
 **
 ** If there is a error in the input SQL, then raise an error, except
@@ -1942,8 +1942,8 @@ static void renameQuotefixFunc(
           sqlite3WalkExprList(&sWalker, sParse.pNewTable->pCheck);
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS
           for(i=0; i<sParse.pNewTable->nCol; i++){
-            sqlite3WalkExpr(&sWalker, 
-               sqlite3ColumnExpr(sParse.pNewTable, 
+            sqlite3WalkExpr(&sWalker,
+               sqlite3ColumnExpr(sParse.pNewTable,
                                          &sParse.pNewTable->aCol[i]));
           }
 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS */
@@ -1960,7 +1960,7 @@ static void renameQuotefixFunc(
 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER */
       }
 
-      if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 
+      if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
         rc = renameEditSql(context, &sCtx, zInput, 0, 0);
       }
       renameTokenFree(db, sCtx.pList);
@@ -2071,7 +2071,7 @@ static void renameTableTest(
 
 /*
 ** The implementation of internal UDF sqlite_drop_column().
-** 
+**
 ** Arguments:
 **
 **  argv[0]: An integer - the index of the schema containing the table
@@ -2107,7 +2107,7 @@ static void dropColumnFunc(
   rc = renameParseSql(&sParse, zDb, db, zSql, iSchema==1);
   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto drop_column_done;
   pTab = sParse.pNewTable;
-  if( pTab==0 || pTab->nCol==1 || iCol>=pTab->nCol ){ 
+  if( pTab==0 || pTab->nCol==1 || iCol>=pTab->nCol ){
     /* This can happen if the sqlite_schema table is corrupt */
     rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
     goto drop_column_done;
@@ -2139,7 +2139,7 @@ drop_column_done:
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is called by the parser upon parsing an 
+** This function is called by the parser upon parsing an
 **
 **     ALTER TABLE pSrc DROP COLUMN pName
 **
@@ -2161,7 +2161,7 @@ void sqlite3AlterDropColumn(Parse *pParse, SrcList *pSrc, const Token *pName){
   pTab = sqlite3LocateTableItem(pParse, 0, &pSrc->a[0]);
   if( !pTab ) goto exit_drop_column;
 
-  /* Make sure this is not an attempt to ALTER a view, virtual table or 
+  /* Make sure this is not an attempt to ALTER a view, virtual table or
   ** system table. */
   if( SQLITE_OK!=isAlterableTable(pParse, pTab) ) goto exit_drop_column;
   if( SQLITE_OK!=isRealTable(pParse, pTab, 1) ) goto exit_drop_column;
@@ -2178,10 +2178,10 @@ void sqlite3AlterDropColumn(Parse *pParse, SrcList *pSrc, const Token *pName){
     goto exit_drop_column;
   }
 
-  /* Do not allow the user to drop a PRIMARY KEY column or a column 
+  /* Do not allow the user to drop a PRIMARY KEY column or a column
   ** constrained by a UNIQUE constraint.  */
   if( pTab->aCol[iCol].colFlags & (COLFLAG_PRIMKEY|COLFLAG_UNIQUE) ){
-    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot drop %s column: \"%s\"", 
+    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot drop %s column: \"%s\"",
         (pTab->aCol[iCol].colFlags&COLFLAG_PRIMKEY) ? "PRIMARY KEY" : "UNIQUE",
         zCol
     );
@@ -2206,7 +2206,7 @@ void sqlite3AlterDropColumn(Parse *pParse, SrcList *pSrc, const Token *pName){
 #endif
   renameTestSchema(pParse, zDb, iDb==1, "", 0);
   renameFixQuotes(pParse, zDb, iDb==1);
-  sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, 
+  sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
       "UPDATE \"%w\"." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " SET "
       "sql = sqlite_drop_column(%d, sql, %d) "
       "WHERE (type=='table' AND tbl_name=%Q COLLATE nocase)"
diff --git a/src/auth.c b/src/auth.c
index 3a4f73a23..fa6c82d85 100644
--- a/src/auth.c
+++ b/src/auth.c
@@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ int sqlite3AuthCheck(
   sqlite3 *db = pParse->db;
   int rc;
 
-  /* Don't do any authorization checks if the database is initialising
+  /* Don't do any authorization checks if the database is initializing
   ** or if the parser is being invoked from within sqlite3_declare_vtab.
   */
   assert( !IN_RENAME_OBJECT || db->xAuth==0 );
diff --git a/src/bitvec.c b/src/bitvec.c
index 9393428d9..13f87d567 100644
--- a/src/bitvec.c
+++ b/src/bitvec.c
@@ -17,8 +17,8 @@
 ** property.  Usually only a few pages are meet either condition.
 ** So the bitmap is usually sparse and has low cardinality.
 ** But sometimes (for example when during a DROP of a large table) most
-** or all of the pages in a database can get journalled.  In those cases, 
-** the bitmap becomes dense with high cardinality.  The algorithm needs 
+** or all of the pages in a database can get journalled.  In those cases,
+** the bitmap becomes dense with high cardinality.  The algorithm needs
 ** to handle both cases well.
 **
 ** The size of the bitmap is fixed when the object is created.
@@ -39,13 +39,13 @@
 /* Size of the Bitvec structure in bytes. */
 #define BITVEC_SZ        512
 
-/* Round the union size down to the nearest pointer boundary, since that's how 
+/* Round the union size down to the nearest pointer boundary, since that's how
 ** it will be aligned within the Bitvec struct. */
 #define BITVEC_USIZE \
     (((BITVEC_SZ-(3*sizeof(u32)))/sizeof(Bitvec*))*sizeof(Bitvec*))
 
-/* Type of the array "element" for the bitmap representation. 
-** Should be a power of 2, and ideally, evenly divide into BITVEC_USIZE. 
+/* Type of the array "element" for the bitmap representation.
+** Should be a power of 2, and ideally, evenly divide into BITVEC_USIZE.
 ** Setting this to the "natural word" size of your CPU may improve
 ** performance. */
 #define BITVEC_TELEM     u8
@@ -58,12 +58,12 @@
 
 /* Number of u32 values in hash table. */
 #define BITVEC_NINT      (BITVEC_USIZE/sizeof(u32))
-/* Maximum number of entries in hash table before 
+/* Maximum number of entries in hash table before
 ** sub-dividing and re-hashing. */
 #define BITVEC_MXHASH    (BITVEC_NINT/2)
 /* Hashing function for the aHash representation.
-** Empirical testing showed that the *37 multiplier 
-** (an arbitrary prime)in the hash function provided 
+** Empirical testing showed that the *37 multiplier
+** (an arbitrary prime)in the hash function provided
 ** no fewer collisions than the no-op *1. */
 #define BITVEC_HASH(X)   (((X)*1)%BITVEC_NINT)
 
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ struct Bitvec {
 
 /*
 ** Create a new bitmap object able to handle bits between 0 and iSize,
-** inclusive.  Return a pointer to the new object.  Return NULL if 
+** inclusive.  Return a pointer to the new object.  Return NULL if
 ** malloc fails.
 */
 Bitvec *sqlite3BitvecCreate(u32 iSize){
@@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ int sqlite3BitvecSet(Bitvec *p, u32 i){
   h = BITVEC_HASH(i++);
   /* if there wasn't a hash collision, and this doesn't */
   /* completely fill the hash, then just add it without */
-  /* worring about sub-dividing and re-hashing. */
+  /* worrying about sub-dividing and re-hashing. */
   if( !p->u.aHash[h] ){
     if (p->nSet<(BITVEC_NINT-1)) {
       goto bitvec_set_end;
@@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ int sqlite3BitvecBuiltinTest(int sz, int *aOp){
         break;
       }
       case 3:
-      case 4: 
+      case 4:
       default: {
         nx = 2;
         sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(i), &i);
diff --git a/src/btmutex.c b/src/btmutex.c
index 45745b001..232831e03 100644
--- a/src/btmutex.c
+++ b/src/btmutex.c
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(Btree *p){
 **
 ** There is a corresponding leave-all procedures.
 **
-** Enter the mutexes in accending order by BtShared pointer address
+** Enter the mutexes in ascending order by BtShared pointer address
 ** to avoid the possibility of deadlock when two threads with
 ** two or more btrees in common both try to lock all their btrees
 ** at the same instant.
diff --git a/src/btree.c b/src/btree.c
index 59f522c74..59bc68dc8 100644
--- a/src/btree.c
+++ b/src/btree.c
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+
 /*
 ** 2004 April 6
 **
@@ -51,7 +52,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 #define BTALLOC_LE    2           /* Allocate any page <= the parameter */
 
 /*
-** Macro IfNotOmitAV(x) returns (x) if SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM is not 
+** Macro IfNotOmitAV(x) returns (x) if SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM is not
 ** defined, or 0 if it is. For example:
 **
 **   bIncrVacuum = IfNotOmitAV(pBtShared->incrVacuum);
@@ -66,7 +67,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 /*
 ** A list of BtShared objects that are eligible for participation
 ** in shared cache.  This variable has file scope during normal builds,
-** but the test harness needs to access it so we make it global for 
+** but the test harness needs to access it so we make it global for
 ** test builds.
 **
 ** Access to this variable is protected by SQLITE_MUTEX_STATIC_MAIN.
@@ -101,7 +102,7 @@ int sqlite3_enable_shared_cache(int enable){
   ** manipulate entries in the BtShared.pLock linked list used to store
   ** shared-cache table level locks. If the library is compiled with the
   ** shared-cache feature disabled, then there is only ever one user
-  ** of each BtShared structure and so this locking is not necessary. 
+  ** of each BtShared structure and so this locking is not necessary.
   ** So define the lock related functions as no-ops.
   */
   #define querySharedCacheTableLock(a,b,c) SQLITE_OK
@@ -157,15 +158,15 @@ int corruptPageError(int lineno, MemPage *p){
 /*
 **** This function is only used as part of an assert() statement. ***
 **
-** Check to see if pBtree holds the required locks to read or write to the 
+** Check to see if pBtree holds the required locks to read or write to the
 ** table with root page iRoot.   Return 1 if it does and 0 if not.
 **
-** For example, when writing to a table with root-page iRoot via 
+** For example, when writing to a table with root-page iRoot via
 ** Btree connection pBtree:
 **
 **    assert( hasSharedCacheTableLock(pBtree, iRoot, 0, WRITE_LOCK) );
 **
-** When writing to an index that resides in a sharable database, the 
+** When writing to an index that resides in a sharable database, the
 ** caller should have first obtained a lock specifying the root page of
 ** the corresponding table. This makes things a bit more complicated,
 ** as this module treats each table as a separate structure. To determine
@@ -187,7 +188,7 @@ static int hasSharedCacheTableLock(
   BtLock *pLock;
 
   /* If this database is not shareable, or if the client is reading
-  ** and has the read-uncommitted flag set, then no lock is required. 
+  ** and has the read-uncommitted flag set, then no lock is required.
   ** Return true immediately.
   */
   if( (pBtree->sharable==0)
@@ -229,13 +230,13 @@ static int hasSharedCacheTableLock(
     iTab = iRoot;
   }
 
-  /* Search for the required lock. Either a write-lock on root-page iTab, a 
+  /* Search for the required lock. Either a write-lock on root-page iTab, a
   ** write-lock on the schema table, or (if the client is reading) a
   ** read-lock on iTab will suffice. Return 1 if any of these are found.  */
   for(pLock=pBtree->pBt->pLock; pLock; pLock=pLock->pNext){
-    if( pLock->pBtree==pBtree 
+    if( pLock->pBtree==pBtree
      && (pLock->iTable==iTab || (pLock->eLock==WRITE_LOCK && pLock->iTable==1))
-     && pLock->eLock>=eLockType 
+     && pLock->eLock>=eLockType
     ){
       return 1;
     }
@@ -268,7 +269,7 @@ static int hasSharedCacheTableLock(
 static int hasReadConflicts(Btree *pBtree, Pgno iRoot){
   BtCursor *p;
   for(p=pBtree->pBt->pCursor; p; p=p->pNext){
-    if( p->pgnoRoot==iRoot 
+    if( p->pgnoRoot==iRoot
      && p->pBtree!=pBtree
      && 0==(p->pBtree->db->flags & SQLITE_ReadUncommit)
     ){
@@ -280,7 +281,7 @@ static int hasReadConflicts(Btree *pBtree, Pgno iRoot){
 #endif    /* #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG */
 
 /*
-** Query to see if Btree handle p may obtain a lock of type eLock 
+** Query to see if Btree handle p may obtain a lock of type eLock
 ** (READ_LOCK or WRITE_LOCK) on the table with root-page iTab. Return
 ** SQLITE_OK if the lock may be obtained (by calling
 ** setSharedCacheTableLock()), or SQLITE_LOCKED if not.
@@ -293,14 +294,14 @@ static int querySharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTab, u8 eLock){
   assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || eLock==WRITE_LOCK );
   assert( p->db!=0 );
   assert( !(p->db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommit)||eLock==WRITE_LOCK||iTab==1 );
-  
+ 
   /* If requesting a write-lock, then the Btree must have an open write
-  ** transaction on this file. And, obviously, for this to be so there 
+  ** transaction on this file. And, obviously, for this to be so there
   ** must be an open write transaction on the file itself.
   */
   assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || (p==pBt->pWriter && p->inTrans==TRANS_WRITE) );
   assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_WRITE );
-  
+ 
   /* This routine is a no-op if the shared-cache is not enabled */
   if( !p->sharable ){
     return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -315,7 +316,7 @@ static int querySharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTab, u8 eLock){
   }
 
   for(pIter=pBt->pLock; pIter; pIter=pIter->pNext){
-    /* The condition (pIter->eLock!=eLock) in the following if(...) 
+    /* The condition (pIter->eLock!=eLock) in the following if(...)
     ** statement is a simplification of:
     **
     **   (eLock==WRITE_LOCK || pIter->eLock==WRITE_LOCK)
@@ -342,7 +343,7 @@ static int querySharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTab, u8 eLock){
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE
 /*
 ** Add a lock on the table with root-page iTable to the shared-btree used
-** by Btree handle p. Parameter eLock must be either READ_LOCK or 
+** by Btree handle p. Parameter eLock must be either READ_LOCK or
 ** WRITE_LOCK.
 **
 ** This function assumes the following:
@@ -354,7 +355,7 @@ static int querySharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTab, u8 eLock){
 **       with the requested lock (i.e. querySharedCacheTableLock() has
 **       already been called and returned SQLITE_OK).
 **
-** SQLITE_OK is returned if the lock is added successfully. SQLITE_NOMEM 
+** SQLITE_OK is returned if the lock is added successfully. SQLITE_NOMEM
 ** is returned if a malloc attempt fails.
 */
 static int setSharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, u8 eLock){
@@ -368,11 +369,11 @@ static int setSharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, u8 eLock){
 
   /* A connection with the read-uncommitted flag set will never try to
   ** obtain a read-lock using this function. The only read-lock obtained
-  ** by a connection in read-uncommitted mode is on the sqlite_schema 
+  ** by a connection in read-uncommitted mode is on the sqlite_schema
   ** table, and that lock is obtained in BtreeBeginTrans().  */
   assert( 0==(p->db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommit) || eLock==WRITE_LOCK );
 
-  /* This function should only be called on a sharable b-tree after it 
+  /* This function should only be called on a sharable b-tree after it
   ** has been determined that no other b-tree holds a conflicting lock.  */
   assert( p->sharable );
   assert( SQLITE_OK==querySharedCacheTableLock(p, iTable, eLock) );
@@ -417,7 +418,7 @@ static int setSharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, u8 eLock){
 ** Release all the table locks (locks obtained via calls to
 ** the setSharedCacheTableLock() procedure) held by Btree object p.
 **
-** This function assumes that Btree p has an open read or write 
+** This function assumes that Btree p has an open read or write
 ** transaction. If it does not, then the BTS_PENDING flag
 ** may be incorrectly cleared.
 */
@@ -449,7 +450,7 @@ static void clearAllSharedCacheTableLocks(Btree *p){
     pBt->pWriter = 0;
     pBt->btsFlags &= ~(BTS_EXCLUSIVE|BTS_PENDING);
   }else if( pBt->nTransaction==2 ){
-    /* This function is called when Btree p is concluding its 
+    /* This function is called when Btree p is concluding its
     ** transaction. If there currently exists a writer, and p is not
     ** that writer, then the number of locks held by connections other
     ** than the writer must be about to drop to zero. In this case
@@ -495,7 +496,7 @@ static int cursorHoldsMutex(BtCursor *p){
 }
 
 /* Verify that the cursor and the BtShared agree about what is the current
-** database connetion. This is important in shared-cache mode. If the database 
+** database connetion. This is important in shared-cache mode. If the database
 ** connection pointers get out-of-sync, it is possible for routines like
 ** btreeInitPage() to reference an stale connection pointer that references a
 ** a connection that has already closed.  This routine is used inside assert()
@@ -566,8 +567,8 @@ static void invalidateIncrblobCursors(
 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB */
 
 /*
-** Set bit pgno of the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. This is called 
-** when a page that previously contained data becomes a free-list leaf 
+** Set bit pgno of the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. This is called
+** when a page that previously contained data becomes a free-list leaf
 ** page.
 **
 ** The BtShared.pHasContent bitvec exists to work around an obscure
@@ -593,7 +594,7 @@ static void invalidateIncrblobCursors(
 ** may be lost. In the event of a rollback, it may not be possible
 ** to restore the database to its original configuration.
 **
-** The solution is the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. Whenever a page is 
+** The solution is the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. Whenever a page is
 ** moved to become a free-list leaf page, the corresponding bit is
 ** set in the bitvec. Whenever a leaf page is extracted from the free-list,
 ** optimization 2 above is omitted if the corresponding bit is already
@@ -654,13 +655,13 @@ static void btreeReleaseAllCursorPages(BtCursor *pCur){
 ** The cursor passed as the only argument must point to a valid entry
 ** when this function is called (i.e. have eState==CURSOR_VALID). This
 ** function saves the current cursor key in variables pCur->nKey and
-** pCur->pKey. SQLITE_OK is returned if successful or an SQLite error 
+** pCur->pKey. SQLITE_OK is returned if successful or an SQLite error
 ** code otherwise.
 **
 ** If the cursor is open on an intkey table, then the integer key
 ** (the rowid) is stored in pCur->nKey and pCur->pKey is left set to
-** NULL. If the cursor is open on a non-intkey table, then pCur->pKey is 
-** set to point to a malloced buffer pCur->nKey bytes in size containing 
+** NULL. If the cursor is open on a non-intkey table, then pCur->pKey is
+** set to point to a malloced buffer pCur->nKey bytes in size containing
 ** the key.
 */
 static int saveCursorKey(BtCursor *pCur){
@@ -676,8 +677,8 @@ static int saveCursorKey(BtCursor *pCur){
     /* For an index btree, save the complete key content. It is possible
     ** that the current key is corrupt. In that case, it is possible that
     ** the sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack() function may overread the buffer by
-    ** up to the size of 1 varint plus 1 8-byte value when the cursor 
-    ** position is restored. Hence the 17 bytes of padding allocated 
+    ** up to the size of 1 varint plus 1 8-byte value when the cursor
+    ** position is restored. Hence the 17 bytes of padding allocated
     ** below. */
     void *pKey;
     pCur->nKey = sqlite3BtreePayloadSize(pCur);
@@ -699,11 +700,11 @@ static int saveCursorKey(BtCursor *pCur){
 }
 
 /*
-** Save the current cursor position in the variables BtCursor.nKey 
+** Save the current cursor position in the variables BtCursor.nKey
 ** and BtCursor.pKey. The cursor's state is set to CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK.
 **
 ** The caller must ensure that the cursor is valid (has eState==CURSOR_VALID)
-** prior to calling this routine.  
+** prior to calling this routine. 
 */
 static int saveCursorPosition(BtCursor *pCur){
   int rc;
@@ -742,7 +743,7 @@ static int SQLITE_NOINLINE saveCursorsOnList(BtCursor*,Pgno,BtCursor*);
 ** routine is called just before cursor pExcept is used to modify the
 ** table, for example in BtreeDelete() or BtreeInsert().
 **
-** If there are two or more cursors on the same btree, then all such 
+** If there are two or more cursors on the same btree, then all such
 ** cursors should have their BTCF_Multiple flag set.  The btreeCursor()
 ** routine enforces that rule.  This routine only needs to be called in
 ** the uncommon case when pExpect has the BTCF_Multiple flag set.
@@ -840,9 +841,9 @@ static int btreeMoveto(
 
 /*
 ** Restore the cursor to the position it was in (or as close to as possible)
-** when saveCursorPosition() was called. Note that this call deletes the 
+** when saveCursorPosition() was called. Note that this call deletes the
 ** saved position info stored by saveCursorPosition(), so there can be
-** at most one effective restoreCursorPosition() call after each 
+** at most one effective restoreCursorPosition() call after each
 ** saveCursorPosition().
 */
 static int btreeRestoreCursorPosition(BtCursor *pCur){
@@ -910,7 +911,7 @@ BtCursor *sqlite3BtreeFakeValidCursor(void){
 /*
 ** This routine restores a cursor back to its original position after it
 ** has been moved by some outside activity (such as a btree rebalance or
-** a row having been deleted out from under the cursor).  
+** a row having been deleted out from under the cursor). 
 **
 ** On success, the *pDifferentRow parameter is false if the cursor is left
 ** pointing at exactly the same row.  *pDifferntRow is the row the cursor
@@ -992,7 +993,7 @@ static Pgno ptrmapPageno(BtShared *pBt, Pgno pgno){
   if( pgno<2 ) return 0;
   nPagesPerMapPage = (pBt->usableSize/5)+1;
   iPtrMap = (pgno-2)/nPagesPerMapPage;
-  ret = (iPtrMap*nPagesPerMapPage) + 2; 
+  ret = (iPtrMap*nPagesPerMapPage) + 2;
   if( ret==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt) ){
     ret++;
   }
@@ -1480,7 +1481,7 @@ static u16 cellSizePtrTableLeaf(MemPage *pPage, u8 *pCell){
     }while( *(pIter)>=0x80 && pIter<pEnd );
   }
   pIter++;
-  /* pIter now points at the 64-bit integer key value, a variable length 
+  /* pIter now points at the 64-bit integer key value, a variable length
   ** integer. The following block moves pIter to point at the first byte
   ** past the end of the key value. */
   if( (*pIter++)&0x80
@@ -1589,7 +1590,7 @@ static int defragmentPage(MemPage *pPage, int nMaxFrag){
   /* This block handles pages with two or fewer free blocks and nMaxFrag
   ** or fewer fragmented bytes. In this case it is faster to move the
   ** two (or one) blocks of cells using memmove() and add the required
-  ** offsets to each pointer in the cell-pointer array than it is to 
+  ** offsets to each pointer in the cell-pointer array than it is to
   ** reconstruct the entire page.  */
   if( (int)data[hdr+7]<=nMaxFrag ){
     int iFree = get2byte(&data[hdr+1]);
@@ -1770,7 +1771,7 @@ static SQLITE_INLINE int allocateSpace(MemPage *pPage, int nByte, int *pIdx){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;                  /* Integer return code */
   u8 *pTmp;                            /* Temp ptr into data[] */
   int gap;        /* First byte of gap between cell pointers and cell content */
-  
+ 
   assert( sqlite3PagerIswriteable(pPage->pDbPage) );
   assert( pPage->pBt );
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pPage->pBt->mutex) );
@@ -1858,7 +1859,7 @@ static SQLITE_INLINE int allocateSpace(MemPage *pPage, int nByte, int *pIdx){
 **
 ** Even though the freeblock list was checked by btreeComputeFreeSpace(),
 ** that routine will not detect overlap between cells or freeblocks.  Nor
-** does it detect cells or freeblocks that encrouch into the reserved bytes
+** does it detect cells or freeblocks that encroach into the reserved bytes
 ** at the end of the page.  So do additional corruption checks inside this
 ** routine and return SQLITE_CORRUPT if any problems are found.
 */
@@ -1881,7 +1882,7 @@ static int freeSpace(MemPage *pPage, u16 iStart, u16 iSize){
   assert( iSize>=4 );   /* Minimum cell size is 4 */
   assert( CORRUPT_DB || iStart<=pPage->pBt->usableSize-4 );
 
-  /* The list of freeblocks must be in ascending order.  Find the 
+  /* The list of freeblocks must be in ascending order.  Find the
   ** spot on the list where iStart should be inserted.
   */
   hdr = pPage->hdrOffset;
@@ -1900,7 +1901,7 @@ static int freeSpace(MemPage *pPage, u16 iStart, u16 iSize){
       return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pPage);
     }
     assert( iFreeBlk>iPtr || iFreeBlk==0 || CORRUPT_DB );
-  
+ 
     /* At this point:
     **    iFreeBlk:   First freeblock after iStart, or zero if none
     **    iPtr:       The address of a pointer to iFreeBlk
@@ -1917,7 +1918,7 @@ static int freeSpace(MemPage *pPage, u16 iStart, u16 iSize){
       iSize = iEnd - iStart;
       iFreeBlk = get2byte(&data[iFreeBlk]);
     }
-  
+ 
     /* If iPtr is another freeblock (that is, if iPtr is not the freelist
     ** pointer in the page header) then check to see if iStart should be
     ** coalesced onto the end of iPtr.
@@ -2075,7 +2076,7 @@ static int btreeComputeFreeSpace(MemPage *pPage){
       /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-55530-52930 In a well-formed b-tree page, there will
       ** always be at least one cell before the first freeblock.
       */
-      return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pPage); 
+      return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pPage);
     }
     while( 1 ){
       if( pc>iCellLast ){
@@ -2114,7 +2115,7 @@ static int btreeComputeFreeSpace(MemPage *pPage){
 
 /*
 ** Do additional sanity check after btreeInitPage() if
-** PRAGMA cell_size_check=ON 
+** PRAGMA cell_size_check=ON
 */
 static SQLITE_NOINLINE int btreeCellSizeCheck(MemPage *pPage){
   int iCellFirst;    /* First allowable cell or freeblock offset */
@@ -2152,7 +2153,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int btreeCellSizeCheck(MemPage *pPage){
 ** Initialize the auxiliary information for a disk block.
 **
 ** Return SQLITE_OK on success.  If we see that the page does
-** not contain a well-formed database page, then return 
+** not contain a well-formed database page, then return
 ** SQLITE_CORRUPT.  Note that a return of SQLITE_OK does not
 ** guarantee that the page is well-formed.  It only shows that
 ** we failed to detect any corruption.
@@ -2257,7 +2258,7 @@ static MemPage *btreePageFromDbPage(DbPage *pDbPage, Pgno pgno, BtShared *pBt){
     pPage->hdrOffset = pgno==1 ? 100 : 0;
   }
   assert( pPage->aData==sqlite3PagerGetData(pDbPage) );
-  return pPage; 
+  return pPage;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -2461,7 +2462,7 @@ static void pageReinit(DbPage *pData){
       ** call to btreeInitPage() will likely return SQLITE_CORRUPT.
       ** But no harm is done by this.  And it is very important that
       ** btreeInitPage() be called on every btree page so we make
-      ** the call for every page that comes in for re-initing. */
+      ** the call for every page that comes in for re-initializing. */
       btreeInitPage(pPage);
     }
   }
@@ -2479,11 +2480,11 @@ static int btreeInvokeBusyHandler(void *pArg){
 
 /*
 ** Open a database file.
-** 
+**
 ** zFilename is the name of the database file.  If zFilename is NULL
 ** then an ephemeral database is created.  The ephemeral database might
 ** be exclusively in memory, or it might use a disk-based memory cache.
-** Either way, the ephemeral database will be automatically deleted 
+** Either way, the ephemeral database will be automatically deleted
 ** when sqlite3BtreeClose() is called.
 **
 ** If zFilename is ":memory:" then an in-memory database is created
@@ -2516,7 +2517,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeOpen(
   /* True if opening an ephemeral, temporary database */
   const int isTempDb = zFilename==0 || zFilename[0]==0;
 
-  /* Set the variable isMemdb to true for an in-memory database, or 
+  /* Set the variable isMemdb to true for an in-memory database, or
   ** false for a file-based database.
   */
 #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_MEMORYDB
@@ -2639,7 +2640,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeOpen(
     assert( sizeof(u32)==4 );
     assert( sizeof(u16)==2 );
     assert( sizeof(Pgno)==4 );
-  
+ 
     pBt = sqlite3MallocZero( sizeof(*pBt) );
     if( pBt==0 ){
       rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
@@ -2658,7 +2659,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeOpen(
     pBt->db = db;
     sqlite3PagerSetBusyHandler(pBt->pPager, btreeInvokeBusyHandler, pBt);
     p->pBt = pBt;
-  
+ 
     pBt->pCursor = 0;
     pBt->pPage1 = 0;
     if( sqlite3PagerIsreadonly(pBt->pPager) ) pBt->btsFlags |= BTS_READ_ONLY;
@@ -2702,7 +2703,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeOpen(
     if( rc ) goto btree_open_out;
     pBt->usableSize = pBt->pageSize - nReserve;
     assert( (pBt->pageSize & 7)==0 );  /* 8-byte alignment of pageSize */
-   
+  
 #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_DISKIO)
     /* Add the new BtShared object to the linked list sharable BtShareds.
     */
@@ -2831,7 +2832,7 @@ static int removeFromSharingList(BtShared *pBt){
 }
 
 /*
-** Make sure pBt->pTmpSpace points to an allocation of 
+** Make sure pBt->pTmpSpace points to an allocation of
 ** MX_CELL_SIZE(pBt) bytes with a 4-byte prefix for a left-child
 ** pointer.
 */
@@ -2856,7 +2857,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int allocateTempSpace(BtShared *pBt){
   ** can mean that fillInCell() only initializes the first 2 or 3
   ** bytes of pTmpSpace, but that the first 4 bytes are copied from
   ** it into a database page. This is not actually a problem, but it
-  ** does cause a valgrind error when the 1 or 2 bytes of unitialized 
+  ** does cause a valgrind error when the 1 or 2 bytes of uninitialized
   ** data is passed to system call write(). So to avoid this error,
   ** zero the first 4 bytes of temp space here.
   **
@@ -2911,7 +2912,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeClose(Btree *p){
   sqlite3BtreeLeave(p);
 
   /* If there are still other outstanding references to the shared-btree
-  ** structure, return now. The remainder of this procedure cleans 
+  ** structure, return now. The remainder of this procedure cleans
   ** up the shared-btree.
   */
   assert( p->wantToLock==0 && p->locked==0 );
@@ -3017,7 +3018,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeSetPagerFlags(
 
 /*
 ** Change the default pages size and the number of reserved bytes per page.
-** Or, if the page size has already been fixed, return SQLITE_READONLY 
+** Or, if the page size has already been fixed, return SQLITE_READONLY
 ** without changing anything.
 **
 ** The page size must be a power of 2 between 512 and 65536.  If the page
@@ -3077,7 +3078,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeGetPageSize(Btree *p){
 ** held.
 **
 ** This is useful in one special case in the backup API code where it is
-** known that the shared b-tree mutex is held, but the mutex on the 
+** known that the shared b-tree mutex is held, but the mutex on the
 ** database handle that owns *p is not. In this case if sqlite3BtreeEnter()
 ** were to be called, it might collide with some other operation on the
 ** database handle that owns *p, causing undefined behavior.
@@ -3091,7 +3092,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeGetReserveNoMutex(Btree *p){
 
 /*
 ** Return the number of bytes of space at the end of every page that
-** are intentually left unused.  This is the "reserved" space that is
+** are intentionally left unused.  This is the "reserved" space that is
 ** sometimes used by extensions.
 **
 ** The value returned is the larger of the current reserve size and
@@ -3157,7 +3158,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeSecureDelete(Btree *p, int newFlag){
 /*
 ** Change the 'auto-vacuum' property of the database. If the 'autoVacuum'
 ** parameter is non-zero, then auto-vacuum mode is enabled. If zero, it
-** is disabled. The default value for the auto-vacuum property is 
+** is disabled. The default value for the auto-vacuum property is
 ** determined by the SQLITE_DEFAULT_AUTOVACUUM macro.
 */
 int sqlite3BtreeSetAutoVacuum(Btree *p, int autoVacuum){
@@ -3181,7 +3182,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeSetAutoVacuum(Btree *p, int autoVacuum){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return the value of the 'auto-vacuum' property. If auto-vacuum is 
+** Return the value of the 'auto-vacuum' property. If auto-vacuum is
 ** enabled 1 is returned. Otherwise 0.
 */
 int sqlite3BtreeGetAutoVacuum(Btree *p){
@@ -3213,9 +3214,9 @@ static void setDefaultSyncFlag(BtShared *pBt, u8 safety_level){
   Db *pDb;
   if( (db=pBt->db)!=0 && (pDb=db->aDb)!=0 ){
     while( pDb->pBt==0 || pDb->pBt->pBt!=pBt ){ pDb++; }
-    if( pDb->bSyncSet==0 
-     && pDb->safety_level!=safety_level 
-     && pDb!=&db->aDb[1] 
+    if( pDb->bSyncSet==0
+     && pDb->safety_level!=safety_level
+     && pDb!=&db->aDb[1]
     ){
       pDb->safety_level = safety_level;
       sqlite3PagerSetFlags(pBt->pPager,
@@ -3238,7 +3239,7 @@ static int newDatabase(BtShared*);
 ** SQLITE_OK is returned on success.  If the file is not a
 ** well-formed database file, then SQLITE_CORRUPT is returned.
 ** SQLITE_BUSY is returned if the database is locked.  SQLITE_NOMEM
-** is returned if we run out of memory. 
+** is returned if we run out of memory.
 */
 static int lockBtree(BtShared *pBt){
   int rc;              /* Result code from subfunctions */
@@ -3254,7 +3255,7 @@ static int lockBtree(BtShared *pBt){
   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
 
   /* Do some checking to help insure the file we opened really is
-  ** a valid database file. 
+  ** a valid database file.
   */
   nPage = get4byte(28+(u8*)pPage1->aData);
   sqlite3PagerPagecount(pBt->pPager, (int*)&nPageFile);
@@ -3292,7 +3293,7 @@ static int lockBtree(BtShared *pBt){
     }
 
     /* If the read version is set to 2, this database should be accessed
-    ** in WAL mode. If the log is not already open, open it now. Then 
+    ** in WAL mode. If the log is not already open, open it now. Then
     ** return SQLITE_OK and return without populating BtShared.pPage1.
     ** The caller detects this and calls this function again. This is
     ** required as the version of page 1 currently in the page1 buffer
@@ -3333,8 +3334,8 @@ static int lockBtree(BtShared *pBt){
     /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-25008-21688 The size of a page is a power of two
     ** between 512 and 65536 inclusive. */
     if( ((pageSize-1)&pageSize)!=0
-     || pageSize>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE 
-     || pageSize<=256 
+     || pageSize>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE
+     || pageSize<=256
     ){
       goto page1_init_failed;
     }
@@ -3342,7 +3343,7 @@ static int lockBtree(BtShared *pBt){
     assert( (pageSize & 7)==0 );
     /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-59310-51205 The "reserved space" size in the 1-byte
     ** integer at offset 20 is the number of bytes of space at the end of
-    ** each page to reserve for extensions. 
+    ** each page to reserve for extensions.
     **
     ** EVIDENCE-OF: R-37497-42412 The size of the reserved region is
     ** determined by the one-byte unsigned integer found at an offset of 20
@@ -3436,7 +3437,7 @@ static int countValidCursors(BtShared *pBt, int wrOnly){
   int r = 0;
   for(pCur=pBt->pCursor; pCur; pCur=pCur->pNext){
     if( (wrOnly==0 || (pCur->curFlags & BTCF_WriteFlag)!=0)
-     && pCur->eState!=CURSOR_FAULT ) r++; 
+     && pCur->eState!=CURSOR_FAULT ) r++;
   }
   return r;
 }
@@ -3445,7 +3446,7 @@ static int countValidCursors(BtShared *pBt, int wrOnly){
 /*
 ** If there are no outstanding cursors and we are not in the middle
 ** of a transaction but there is a read lock on the database, then
-** this routine unrefs the first page of the database file which 
+** this routine unrefs the first page of the database file which
 ** has the effect of releasing the read lock.
 **
 ** If there is a transaction in progress, this routine is a no-op.
@@ -3529,8 +3530,8 @@ int sqlite3BtreeNewDb(Btree *p){
 ** upgraded to exclusive by calling this routine a second time - the
 ** exclusivity flag only works for a new transaction.
 **
-** A write-transaction must be started before attempting any 
-** changes to the database.  None of the following routines 
+** A write-transaction must be started before attempting any
+** changes to the database.  None of the following routines
 ** will work unless a transaction is started first:
 **
 **      sqlite3BtreeCreateTable()
@@ -3544,7 +3545,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeNewDb(Btree *p){
 ** If an initial attempt to acquire the lock fails because of lock contention
 ** and the database was previously unlocked, then invoke the busy handler
 ** if there is one.  But if there was previously a read-lock, do not
-** invoke the busy handler - just return SQLITE_BUSY.  SQLITE_BUSY is 
+** invoke the busy handler - just return SQLITE_BUSY.  SQLITE_BUSY is
 ** returned when there is already a read-lock in order to avoid a deadlock.
 **
 ** Suppose there are two processes A and B.  A has a read lock and B has
@@ -3556,7 +3557,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeNewDb(Btree *p){
 ** proceed.
 */
 static SQLITE_NOINLINE int btreeBeginTrans(
-  Btree *p,                 /* The btree in which to start the transactino */
+  Btree *p,                 /* The btree in which to start the transaction */
   int wrflag,               /* True to start a write transaction */
   int *pSchemaVersion       /* Put schema version number here, if not NULL */
 ){
@@ -3576,8 +3577,8 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int btreeBeginTrans(
   }
   assert( pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_WRITE || IfNotOmitAV(pBt->bDoTruncate)==0 );
 
-  if( (p->db->flags & SQLITE_ResetDatabase) 
-   && sqlite3PagerIsreadonly(pPager)==0 
+  if( (p->db->flags & SQLITE_ResetDatabase)
+   && sqlite3PagerIsreadonly(pPager)==0
   ){
     pBt->btsFlags &= ~BTS_READ_ONLY;
   }
@@ -3591,7 +3592,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int btreeBeginTrans(
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE
   {
     sqlite3 *pBlock = 0;
-    /* If another database handle has already opened a write transaction 
+    /* If another database handle has already opened a write transaction
     ** on this shared-btree structure and a second write transaction is
     ** requested, return SQLITE_LOCKED.
     */
@@ -3616,8 +3617,8 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int btreeBeginTrans(
   }
 #endif
 
-  /* Any read-only or read-write transaction implies a read-lock on 
-  ** page 1. So if some other shared-cache client already has a write-lock 
+  /* Any read-only or read-write transaction implies a read-lock on
+  ** page 1. So if some other shared-cache client already has a write-lock
   ** on page 1, the transaction cannot be opened. */
   rc = querySharedCacheTableLock(p, SCHEMA_ROOT, READ_LOCK);
   if( SQLITE_OK!=rc ) goto trans_begun;
@@ -3640,7 +3641,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int btreeBeginTrans(
     /* Call lockBtree() until either pBt->pPage1 is populated or
     ** lockBtree() returns something other than SQLITE_OK. lockBtree()
     ** may return SQLITE_OK but leave pBt->pPage1 set to 0 if after
-    ** reading page 1 it discovers that the page-size of the database 
+    ** reading page 1 it discovers that the page-size of the database
     ** file is not pBt->pageSize. In this case lockBtree() will update
     ** pBt->pageSize to the page-size of the file on disk.
     */
@@ -3661,7 +3662,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int btreeBeginTrans(
         }
       }
     }
-  
+ 
     if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
       (void)sqlite3PagerWalWriteLock(pPager, 0);
       unlockBtreeIfUnused(pBt);
@@ -3700,7 +3701,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int btreeBeginTrans(
 
       /* If the db-size header field is incorrect (as it may be if an old
       ** client has been writing the database file), update it now. Doing
-      ** this sooner rather than later means the database size can safely 
+      ** this sooner rather than later means the database size can safely
       ** re-read the database size from page 1 if a savepoint or transaction
       ** rollback occurs within the transaction.
       */
@@ -3797,7 +3798,7 @@ static int setChildPtrmaps(MemPage *pPage){
 ** that it points to iTo. Parameter eType describes the type of pointer to
 ** be modified, as  follows:
 **
-** PTRMAP_BTREE:     pPage is a btree-page. The pointer points at a child 
+** PTRMAP_BTREE:     pPage is a btree-page. The pointer points at a child
 **                   page of pPage.
 **
 ** PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1: pPage is a btree-page. The pointer points at an overflow
@@ -3848,9 +3849,9 @@ static int modifyPagePointer(MemPage *pPage, Pgno iFrom, Pgno iTo, u8 eType){
         }
       }
     }
-  
+ 
     if( i==nCell ){
-      if( eType!=PTRMAP_BTREE || 
+      if( eType!=PTRMAP_BTREE ||
           get4byte(&pPage->aData[pPage->hdrOffset+8])!=iFrom ){
         return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pPage);
       }
@@ -3862,11 +3863,11 @@ static int modifyPagePointer(MemPage *pPage, Pgno iFrom, Pgno iTo, u8 eType){
 
 
 /*
-** Move the open database page pDbPage to location iFreePage in the 
+** Move the open database page pDbPage to location iFreePage in the
 ** database. The pDbPage reference remains valid.
 **
 ** The isCommit flag indicates that there is no need to remember that
-** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pDbPage->pgno 
+** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pDbPage->pgno
 ** can be written to. The caller has already promised not to write to that
 ** page.
 */
@@ -3883,14 +3884,14 @@ static int relocatePage(
   Pager *pPager = pBt->pPager;
   int rc;
 
-  assert( eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW2 || eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1 || 
+  assert( eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW2 || eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1 ||
       eType==PTRMAP_BTREE || eType==PTRMAP_ROOTPAGE );
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) );
   assert( pDbPage->pBt==pBt );
   if( iDbPage<3 ) return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
 
   /* Move page iDbPage from its current location to page number iFreePage */
-  TRACE(("AUTOVACUUM: Moving %u to free page %u (ptr page %u type %u)\n", 
+  TRACE(("AUTOVACUUM: Moving %u to free page %u (ptr page %u type %u)\n",
       iDbPage, iFreePage, iPtrPage, eType));
   rc = sqlite3PagerMovepage(pPager, pDbPage->pDbPage, iFreePage, isCommit);
   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -3949,19 +3950,19 @@ static int allocateBtreePage(BtShared *, MemPage **, Pgno *, Pgno, u8);
 
 /*
 ** Perform a single step of an incremental-vacuum. If successful, return
-** SQLITE_OK. If there is no work to do (and therefore no point in 
-** calling this function again), return SQLITE_DONE. Or, if an error 
+** SQLITE_OK. If there is no work to do (and therefore no point in
+** calling this function again), return SQLITE_DONE. Or, if an error
 ** occurs, return some other error code.
 **
-** More specifically, this function attempts to re-organize the database so 
+** More specifically, this function attempts to re-organize the database so
 ** that the last page of the file currently in use is no longer in use.
 **
 ** Parameter nFin is the number of pages that this database would contain
 ** were this function called until it returns SQLITE_DONE.
 **
-** If the bCommit parameter is non-zero, this function assumes that the 
-** caller will keep calling incrVacuumStep() until it returns SQLITE_DONE 
-** or an error. bCommit is passed true for an auto-vacuum-on-commit 
+** If the bCommit parameter is non-zero, this function assumes that the
+** caller will keep calling incrVacuumStep() until it returns SQLITE_DONE
+** or an error. bCommit is passed true for an auto-vacuum-on-commit
 ** operation, or false for an incremental vacuum.
 */
 static int incrVacuumStep(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nFin, Pgno iLastPg, int bCommit){
@@ -3992,7 +3993,7 @@ static int incrVacuumStep(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nFin, Pgno iLastPg, int bCommit){
       if( bCommit==0 ){
         /* Remove the page from the files free-list. This is not required
         ** if bCommit is non-zero. In that case, the free-list will be
-        ** truncated to zero after this function returns, so it doesn't 
+        ** truncated to zero after this function returns, so it doesn't
         ** matter if it still contains some garbage entries.
         */
         Pgno iFreePg;
@@ -4041,7 +4042,7 @@ static int incrVacuumStep(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nFin, Pgno iLastPg, int bCommit){
         }
       }while( bCommit && iFreePg>nFin );
       assert( iFreePg<iLastPg );
-      
+     
       rc = relocatePage(pBt, pLastPg, eType, iPtrPage, iFreePg, bCommit);
       releasePage(pLastPg);
       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -4062,7 +4063,7 @@ static int incrVacuumStep(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nFin, Pgno iLastPg, int bCommit){
 
 /*
 ** The database opened by the first argument is an auto-vacuum database
-** nOrig pages in size containing nFree free pages. Return the expected 
+** nOrig pages in size containing nFree free pages. Return the expected
 ** size of the database in pages following an auto-vacuum operation.
 */
 static Pgno finalDbSize(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nOrig, Pgno nFree){
@@ -4089,7 +4090,7 @@ static Pgno finalDbSize(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nOrig, Pgno nFree){
 **
 ** If the incremental vacuum is finished after this function has run,
 ** SQLITE_DONE is returned. If it is not finished, but no error occurred,
-** SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise an SQLite error code. 
+** SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise an SQLite error code.
 */
 int sqlite3BtreeIncrVacuum(Btree *p){
   int rc;
@@ -4136,7 +4137,7 @@ static int autoVacuumCommit(Btree *p){
   VVA_ONLY( int nRef );
 
   assert( p!=0 );
-  pBt = p->pBt;  
+  pBt = p->pBt; 
   pPager = pBt->pPager;
   VVA_ONLY( nRef = sqlite3PagerRefcount(pPager); )
 
@@ -4230,7 +4231,7 @@ static int autoVacuumCommit(Btree *p){
 **
 ** Otherwise, sync the database file for the btree pBt. zSuperJrnl points to
 ** the name of a super-journal file that should be written into the
-** individual journal file, or is NULL, indicating no super-journal file 
+** individual journal file, or is NULL, indicating no super-journal file
 ** (single database transaction).
 **
 ** When this is called, the super-journal should already have been
@@ -4281,8 +4282,8 @@ static void btreeEndTransaction(Btree *p){
     downgradeAllSharedCacheTableLocks(p);
     p->inTrans = TRANS_READ;
   }else{
-    /* If the handle had any kind of transaction open, decrement the 
-    ** transaction count of the shared btree. If the transaction count 
+    /* If the handle had any kind of transaction open, decrement the
+    ** transaction count of the shared btree. If the transaction count
     ** reaches 0, set the shared state to TRANS_NONE. The unlockBtreeIfUnused()
     ** call below will unlock the pager.  */
     if( p->inTrans!=TRANS_NONE ){
@@ -4293,7 +4294,7 @@ static void btreeEndTransaction(Btree *p){
       }
     }
 
-    /* Set the current transaction state to TRANS_NONE and unlock the 
+    /* Set the current transaction state to TRANS_NONE and unlock the
     ** pager if this call closed the only read or write transaction.  */
     p->inTrans = TRANS_NONE;
     unlockBtreeIfUnused(pBt);
@@ -4314,12 +4315,12 @@ static void btreeEndTransaction(Btree *p){
 ** the rollback journal (which causes the transaction to commit) and
 ** drop locks.
 **
-** Normally, if an error occurs while the pager layer is attempting to 
+** Normally, if an error occurs while the pager layer is attempting to
 ** finalize the underlying journal file, this function returns an error and
 ** the upper layer will attempt a rollback. However, if the second argument
-** is non-zero then this b-tree transaction is part of a multi-file 
-** transaction. In this case, the transaction has already been committed 
-** (by deleting a super-journal file) and the caller will ignore this 
+** is non-zero then this b-tree transaction is part of a multi-file
+** transaction. In this case, the transaction has already been committed
+** (by deleting a super-journal file) and the caller will ignore this
 ** functions return code. So, even if an error occurs in the pager layer,
 ** reset the b-tree objects internal state to indicate that the write
 ** transaction has been closed. This is quite safe, as the pager will have
@@ -4334,7 +4335,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo(Btree *p, int bCleanup){
   sqlite3BtreeEnter(p);
   btreeIntegrity(p);
 
-  /* If the handle has a write-transaction open, commit the shared-btrees 
+  /* If the handle has a write-transaction open, commit the shared-btrees
   ** transaction and set the shared state to TRANS_READ.
   */
   if( p->inTrans==TRANS_WRITE ){
@@ -4383,15 +4384,15 @@ int sqlite3BtreeCommit(Btree *p){
 **
 ** This routine gets called when a rollback occurs. If the writeOnly
 ** flag is true, then only write-cursors need be tripped - read-only
-** cursors save their current positions so that they may continue 
-** following the rollback. Or, if writeOnly is false, all cursors are 
+** cursors save their current positions so that they may continue
+** following the rollback. Or, if writeOnly is false, all cursors are
 ** tripped. In general, writeOnly is false if the transaction being
 ** rolled back modified the database schema. In this case b-tree root
 ** pages may be moved or deleted from the database altogether, making
 ** it unsafe for read cursors to continue.
 **
-** If the writeOnly flag is true and an error is encountered while 
-** saving the current position of a read-only cursor, all cursors, 
+** If the writeOnly flag is true and an error is encountered while
+** saving the current position of a read-only cursor, all cursors,
 ** including all read-cursors are tripped.
 **
 ** SQLITE_OK is returned if successful, or if an error occurs while
@@ -4497,8 +4498,8 @@ int sqlite3BtreeRollback(Btree *p, int tripCode, int writeOnly){
 
 /*
 ** Start a statement subtransaction. The subtransaction can be rolled
-** back independently of the main transaction. You must start a transaction 
-** before starting a subtransaction. The subtransaction is ended automatically 
+** back independently of the main transaction. You must start a transaction
+** before starting a subtransaction. The subtransaction is ended automatically
 ** if the main transaction commits or rolls back.
 **
 ** Statement subtransactions are used around individual SQL statements
@@ -4535,11 +4536,11 @@ int sqlite3BtreeBeginStmt(Btree *p, int iStatement){
 /*
 ** The second argument to this function, op, is always SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK
 ** or SAVEPOINT_RELEASE. This function either releases or rolls back the
-** savepoint identified by parameter iSavepoint, depending on the value 
+** savepoint identified by parameter iSavepoint, depending on the value
 ** of op.
 **
 ** Normally, iSavepoint is greater than or equal to zero. However, if op is
-** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then iSavepoint may also be -1. In this case the 
+** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then iSavepoint may also be -1. In this case the
 ** contents of the entire transaction are rolled back. This is different
 ** from a normal transaction rollback, as no locks are released and the
 ** transaction remains open.
@@ -4564,7 +4565,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeSavepoint(Btree *p, int op, int iSavepoint){
       rc = newDatabase(pBt);
       btreeSetNPage(pBt, pBt->pPage1);
 
-      /* pBt->nPage might be zero if the database was corrupt when 
+      /* pBt->nPage might be zero if the database was corrupt when
       ** the transaction was started. Otherwise, it must be at least 1.  */
       assert( CORRUPT_DB || pBt->nPage>0 );
     }
@@ -4602,10 +4603,10 @@ int sqlite3BtreeSavepoint(Btree *p, int op, int iSavepoint){
 ** is set.  If FORDELETE is set, that is a hint to the implementation that
 ** this cursor will only be used to seek to and delete entries of an index
 ** as part of a larger DELETE statement.  The FORDELETE hint is not used by
-** this implementation.  But in a hypothetical alternative storage engine 
+** this implementation.  But in a hypothetical alternative storage engine
 ** in which index entries are automatically deleted when corresponding table
 ** rows are deleted, the FORDELETE flag is a hint that all SEEK and DELETE
-** operations on this cursor can be no-ops and all READ operations can 
+** operations on this cursor can be no-ops and all READ operations can
 ** return a null row (2-bytes: 0x01 0x00).
 **
 ** No checking is done to make sure that page iTable really is the
@@ -4626,14 +4627,14 @@ static int btreeCursor(
   BtCursor *pX;                          /* Looping over other all cursors */
 
   assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(p) );
-  assert( wrFlag==0 
-       || wrFlag==BTREE_WRCSR 
-       || wrFlag==(BTREE_WRCSR|BTREE_FORDELETE) 
+  assert( wrFlag==0
+       || wrFlag==BTREE_WRCSR
+       || wrFlag==(BTREE_WRCSR|BTREE_FORDELETE)
   );
 
-  /* The following assert statements verify that if this is a sharable 
-  ** b-tree database, the connection is holding the required table locks, 
-  ** and that no other connection has any open cursor that conflicts with 
+  /* The following assert statements verify that if this is a sharable
+  ** b-tree database, the connection is holding the required table locks,
+  ** and that no other connection has any open cursor that conflicts with
   ** this lock.  The iTable<1 term disables the check for corrupt schemas. */
   assert( hasSharedCacheTableLock(p, iTable, pKeyInfo!=0, (wrFlag?2:1))
           || iTable<1 );
@@ -4886,7 +4887,7 @@ u32 sqlite3BtreePayloadSize(BtCursor *pCur){
 ** routine always returns 2147483647 (which is the largest record
 ** that SQLite can handle) or more.  But returning a smaller value might
 ** prevent large memory allocations when trying to interpret a
-** corrupt datrabase.
+** corrupt database.
 **
 ** The current implementation merely returns the size of the underlying
 ** database file.
@@ -4899,15 +4900,15 @@ sqlite3_int64 sqlite3BtreeMaxRecordSize(BtCursor *pCur){
 
 /*
 ** Given the page number of an overflow page in the database (parameter
-** ovfl), this function finds the page number of the next page in the 
+** ovfl), this function finds the page number of the next page in the
 ** linked list of overflow pages. If possible, it uses the auto-vacuum
-** pointer-map data instead of reading the content of page ovfl to do so. 
+** pointer-map data instead of reading the content of page ovfl to do so.
 **
 ** If an error occurs an SQLite error code is returned. Otherwise:
 **
-** The page number of the next overflow page in the linked list is 
-** written to *pPgnoNext. If page ovfl is the last page in its linked 
-** list, *pPgnoNext is set to zero. 
+** The page number of the next overflow page in the linked list is
+** written to *pPgnoNext. If page ovfl is the last page in its linked
+** list, *pPgnoNext is set to zero.
 **
 ** If ppPage is not NULL, and a reference to the MemPage object corresponding
 ** to page number pOvfl was obtained, then *ppPage is set to point to that
@@ -4931,9 +4932,9 @@ static int getOverflowPage(
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
   /* Try to find the next page in the overflow list using the
-  ** autovacuum pointer-map pages. Guess that the next page in 
-  ** the overflow list is page number (ovfl+1). If that guess turns 
-  ** out to be wrong, fall back to loading the data of page 
+  ** autovacuum pointer-map pages. Guess that the next page in
+  ** the overflow list is page number (ovfl+1). If that guess turns
+  ** out to be wrong, fall back to loading the data of page
   ** number ovfl to determine the next page number.
   */
   if( pBt->autoVacuum ){
@@ -5021,8 +5022,8 @@ static int copyPayload(
 **
 ** If the current cursor entry uses one or more overflow pages
 ** this function may allocate space for and lazily populate
-** the overflow page-list cache array (BtCursor.aOverflow). 
-** Subsequent calls use this cache to make seeking to the supplied offset 
+** the overflow page-list cache array (BtCursor.aOverflow).
+** Subsequent calls use this cache to make seeking to the supplied offset
 ** more efficient.
 **
 ** Once an overflow page-list cache has been allocated, it must be
@@ -5038,7 +5039,7 @@ static int accessPayload(
   BtCursor *pCur,      /* Cursor pointing to entry to read from */
   u32 offset,          /* Begin reading this far into payload */
   u32 amt,             /* Read this many bytes */
-  unsigned char *pBuf, /* Write the bytes into this buffer */ 
+  unsigned char *pBuf, /* Write the bytes into this buffer */
   int eOp              /* zero to read. non-zero to write. */
 ){
   unsigned char *aPayload;
@@ -5092,7 +5093,7 @@ static int accessPayload(
     Pgno nextPage;
 
     nextPage = get4byte(&aPayload[pCur->info.nLocal]);
- 
+
     /* If the BtCursor.aOverflow[] has not been allocated, allocate it now.
     **
     ** The aOverflow[] array is sized at one entry for each overflow page
@@ -5164,12 +5165,12 @@ static int accessPayload(
 #ifdef SQLITE_DIRECT_OVERFLOW_READ
         /* If all the following are true:
         **
-        **   1) this is a read operation, and 
+        **   1) this is a read operation, and
         **   2) data is required from the start of this overflow page, and
         **   3) there are no dirty pages in the page-cache
         **   4) the database is file-backed, and
         **   5) the page is not in the WAL file
-        **   6) at least 4 bytes have already been read into the output buffer 
+        **   6) at least 4 bytes have already been read into the output buffer
         **
         ** then data can be read directly from the database file into the
         ** output buffer, bypassing the page-cache altogether. This speeds
@@ -5276,7 +5277,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreePayloadChecked(BtCursor *pCur, u32 offset, u32 amt, void *pBuf){
 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB */
 
 /*
-** Return a pointer to payload information from the entry that the 
+** Return a pointer to payload information from the entry that the
 ** pCur cursor is pointing to.  The pointer is to the beginning of
 ** the key if index btrees (pPage->intKey==0) and is the data for
 ** table btrees (pPage->intKey==1). The number of bytes of available
@@ -5367,7 +5368,7 @@ static int moveToChild(BtCursor *pCur, u32 newPgno){
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
 /*
-** Page pParent is an internal (non-leaf) tree page. This function 
+** Page pParent is an internal (non-leaf) tree page. This function
 ** asserts that page number iChild is the left-child if the iIdx'th
 ** cell in page pParent. Or, if iIdx is equal to the total number of
 ** cells in pParent, that page number iChild is the right-child of
@@ -5384,7 +5385,7 @@ static void assertParentIndex(MemPage *pParent, int iIdx, Pgno iChild){
   }
 }
 #else
-#  define assertParentIndex(x,y,z) 
+#  define assertParentIndex(x,y,z)
 #endif
 
 /*
@@ -5402,8 +5403,8 @@ static void moveToParent(BtCursor *pCur){
   assert( pCur->iPage>0 );
   assert( pCur->pPage );
   assertParentIndex(
-    pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage-1], 
-    pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage-1], 
+    pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage-1],
+    pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage-1],
     pCur->pPage->pgno
   );
   testcase( pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage-1] > pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage-1]->nCell );
@@ -5420,19 +5421,19 @@ static void moveToParent(BtCursor *pCur){
 **
 ** If the table has a virtual root page, then the cursor is moved to point
 ** to the virtual root page instead of the actual root page. A table has a
-** virtual root page when the actual root page contains no cells and a 
+** virtual root page when the actual root page contains no cells and a
 ** single child page. This can only happen with the table rooted at page 1.
 **
-** If the b-tree structure is empty, the cursor state is set to 
+** If the b-tree structure is empty, the cursor state is set to
 ** CURSOR_INVALID and this routine returns SQLITE_EMPTY. Otherwise,
 ** the cursor is set to point to the first cell located on the root
 ** (or virtual root) page and the cursor state is set to CURSOR_VALID.
 **
 ** If this function returns successfully, it may be assumed that the
-** page-header flags indicate that the [virtual] root-page is the expected 
+** page-header flags indicate that the [virtual] root-page is the expected
 ** kind of b-tree page (i.e. if when opening the cursor the caller did not
 ** specify a KeyInfo structure the flags byte is set to 0x05 or 0x0D,
-** indicating a table b-tree, or if the caller did specify a KeyInfo 
+** indicating a table b-tree, or if the caller did specify a KeyInfo
 ** structure the flags byte is set to 0x02 or 0x0A, indicating an index
 ** b-tree).
 */
@@ -5483,19 +5484,19 @@ static int moveToRoot(BtCursor *pCur){
   /* If pCur->pKeyInfo is not NULL, then the caller that opened this cursor
   ** expected to open it on an index b-tree. Otherwise, if pKeyInfo is
   ** NULL, the caller expects a table b-tree. If this is not the case,
-  ** return an SQLITE_CORRUPT error. 
+  ** return an SQLITE_CORRUPT error.
   **
   ** Earlier versions of SQLite assumed that this test could not fail
   ** if the root page was already loaded when this function was called (i.e.
-  ** if pCur->iPage>=0). But this is not so if the database is corrupted 
-  ** in such a way that page pRoot is linked into a second b-tree table 
+  ** if pCur->iPage>=0). But this is not so if the database is corrupted
+  ** in such a way that page pRoot is linked into a second b-tree table
   ** (or the freelist).  */
   assert( pRoot->intKey==1 || pRoot->intKey==0 );
   if( pRoot->isInit==0 || (pCur->pKeyInfo==0)!=pRoot->intKey ){
     return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pCur->pPage);
   }
 
-skip_init:  
+skip_init: 
   pCur->ix = 0;
   pCur->info.nSize = 0;
   pCur->curFlags &= ~(BTCF_AtLast|BTCF_ValidNKey|BTCF_ValidOvfl);
@@ -5617,7 +5618,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeLast(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){
   /* If the cursor already points to the last entry, this is a no-op. */
   if( CURSOR_VALID==pCur->eState && (pCur->curFlags & BTCF_AtLast)!=0 ){
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
-    /* This block serves to assert() that the cursor really does point 
+    /* This block serves to assert() that the cursor really does point
     ** to the last entry in the b-tree. */
     int ii;
     for(ii=0; ii<pCur->iPage; ii++){
@@ -5643,7 +5644,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeLast(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){
 ** before or after the key.
 **
 ** An integer is written into *pRes which is the result of
-** comparing the key with the entry to which the cursor is 
+** comparing the key with the entry to which the cursor is
 ** pointing.  The meaning of the integer written into
 ** *pRes is as follows:
 **
@@ -5686,7 +5687,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeTableMoveto(
       /* If the requested key is one more than the previous key, then
       ** try to get there using sqlite3BtreeNext() rather than a full
       ** binary search.  This is an optimization only.  The correct answer
-      ** is still obtained without this case, only a little more slowely */
+      ** is still obtained without this case, only a little more slowly. */
       if( pCur->info.nKey+1==intKey ){
         *pRes = 0;
         rc = sqlite3BtreeNext(pCur, 0);
@@ -5833,10 +5834,10 @@ static int indexCellCompare(
     ** b-tree page.  */
     testcase( pCell+nCell+1==pPage->aDataEnd );
     c = xRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[1], pIdxKey);
-  }else if( !(pCell[1] & 0x80) 
+  }else if( !(pCell[1] & 0x80)
     && (nCell = ((nCell&0x7f)<<7) + pCell[1])<=pPage->maxLocal
   ){
-    /* The record-size field is a 2 byte varint and the record 
+    /* The record-size field is a 2 byte varint and the record
     ** fits entirely on the main b-tree page.  */
     testcase( pCell+nCell+2==pPage->aDataEnd );
     c = xRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[2], pIdxKey);
@@ -5871,7 +5872,7 @@ static int cursorOnLastPage(BtCursor *pCur){
 ** before or after the key.
 **
 ** An integer is written into *pRes which is the result of
-** comparing the key with the entry to which the cursor is 
+** comparing the key with the entry to which the cursor is
 ** pointing.  The meaning of the integer written into
 ** *pRes is as follows:
 **
@@ -5886,7 +5887,7 @@ static int cursorOnLastPage(BtCursor *pCur){
 **                  is larger than pIdxKey.
 **
 ** The pIdxKey->eqSeen field is set to 1 if there
-** exists an entry in the table that exactly matches pIdxKey.  
+** exists an entry in the table that exactly matches pIdxKey. 
 */
 int sqlite3BtreeIndexMoveto(
   BtCursor *pCur,          /* The cursor to be moved */
@@ -5907,8 +5908,8 @@ int sqlite3BtreeIndexMoveto(
 
   xRecordCompare = sqlite3VdbeFindCompare(pIdxKey);
   pIdxKey->errCode = 0;
-  assert( pIdxKey->default_rc==1 
-       || pIdxKey->default_rc==0 
+  assert( pIdxKey->default_rc==1
+       || pIdxKey->default_rc==0
        || pIdxKey->default_rc==-1
   );
 
@@ -5936,7 +5937,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeIndexMoveto(
       *pRes = c;
       return SQLITE_OK;  /* Cursor already pointing at the correct spot */
     }
-    if( pCur->iPage>0 
+    if( pCur->iPage>0
      && indexCellCompare(pCur, 0, pIdxKey, xRecordCompare)<=0
      && pIdxKey->errCode==SQLITE_OK
     ){
@@ -5990,9 +5991,9 @@ bypass_moveto_root:
       /* The maximum supported page-size is 65536 bytes. This means that
       ** the maximum number of record bytes stored on an index B-Tree
       ** page is less than 16384 bytes and may be stored as a 2-byte
-      ** varint. This information is used to attempt to avoid parsing 
-      ** the entire cell by checking for the cases where the record is 
-      ** stored entirely within the b-tree page by inspecting the first 
+      ** varint. This information is used to attempt to avoid parsing
+      ** the entire cell by checking for the cases where the record is
+      ** stored entirely within the b-tree page by inspecting the first
       ** 2 bytes of the cell.
       */
       nCell = pCell[0];
@@ -6002,10 +6003,10 @@ bypass_moveto_root:
         ** b-tree page.  */
         testcase( pCell+nCell+1==pPage->aDataEnd );
         c = xRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[1], pIdxKey);
-      }else if( !(pCell[1] & 0x80) 
+      }else if( !(pCell[1] & 0x80)
         && (nCell = ((nCell&0x7f)<<7) + pCell[1])<=pPage->maxLocal
       ){
-        /* The record-size field is a 2 byte varint and the record 
+        /* The record-size field is a 2 byte varint and the record
         ** fits entirely on the main b-tree page.  */
         testcase( pCell+nCell+2==pPage->aDataEnd );
         c = xRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[2], pIdxKey);
@@ -6013,10 +6014,10 @@ bypass_moveto_root:
         /* The record flows over onto one or more overflow pages. In
         ** this case the whole cell needs to be parsed, a buffer allocated
         ** and accessPayload() used to retrieve the record into the
-        ** buffer before VdbeRecordCompare() can be called. 
+        ** buffer before VdbeRecordCompare() can be called.
         **
         ** If the record is corrupt, the xRecordCompare routine may read
-        ** up to two varints past the end of the buffer. An extra 18 
+        ** up to two varints past the end of the buffer. An extra 18
         ** bytes of padding is allocated at the end of the buffer in
         ** case this happens.  */
         void *pCellKey;
@@ -6048,7 +6049,7 @@ bypass_moveto_root:
         c = sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(nCell, pCellKey, pIdxKey);
         sqlite3_free(pCellKey);
       }
-      assert( 
+      assert(
           (pIdxKey->errCode!=SQLITE_CORRUPT || c==0)
        && (pIdxKey->errCode!=SQLITE_NOMEM || pCur->pBtree->db->mallocFailed)
       );
@@ -6110,7 +6111,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeEof(BtCursor *pCur){
 
 /*
 ** Return an estimate for the number of rows in the table that pCur is
-** pointing to.  Return a negative number if no estimate is currently 
+** pointing to.  Return a negative number if no estimate is currently
 ** available.
 */
 i64 sqlite3BtreeRowCountEst(BtCursor *pCur){
@@ -6134,7 +6135,7 @@ i64 sqlite3BtreeRowCountEst(BtCursor *pCur){
 }
 
 /*
-** Advance the cursor to the next entry in the database. 
+** Advance the cursor to the next entry in the database.
 ** Return value:
 **
 **    SQLITE_OK        success
@@ -6323,7 +6324,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreePrevious(BtCursor *pCur, int flags){
 ** SQLITE_OK is returned on success.  Any other return value indicates
 ** an error.  *ppPage is set to NULL in the event of an error.
 **
-** If the "nearby" parameter is not 0, then an effort is made to 
+** If the "nearby" parameter is not 0, then an effort is made to
 ** locate a page close to the page number "nearby".  This can be used in an
 ** attempt to keep related pages close to each other in the database file,
 ** which in turn can make database access faster.
@@ -6365,7 +6366,7 @@ static int allocateBtreePage(
     Pgno iTrunk;
     u8 searchList = 0; /* If the free-list must be searched for 'nearby' */
     u32 nSearch = 0;   /* Count of the number of search attempts */
-    
+   
     /* If eMode==BTALLOC_EXACT and a query of the pointer-map
     ** shows that the page 'nearby' is somewhere on the free-list, then
     ** the entire-list will be searched for that page.
@@ -6428,8 +6429,8 @@ static int allocateBtreePage(
       ** is the number of leaf page pointers to follow. */
       k = get4byte(&pTrunk->aData[4]);
       if( k==0 && !searchList ){
-        /* The trunk has no leaves and the list is not being searched. 
-        ** So extract the trunk page itself and use it as the newly 
+        /* The trunk has no leaves and the list is not being searched.
+        ** So extract the trunk page itself and use it as the newly
         ** allocated page */
         assert( pPrevTrunk==0 );
         rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pTrunk->pDbPage);
@@ -6446,8 +6447,8 @@ static int allocateBtreePage(
         rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_PGNO(iTrunk);
         goto end_allocate_page;
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
-      }else if( searchList 
-            && (nearby==iTrunk || (iTrunk<nearby && eMode==BTALLOC_LE)) 
+      }else if( searchList
+            && (nearby==iTrunk || (iTrunk<nearby && eMode==BTALLOC_LE))
       ){
         /* The list is being searched and this trunk page is the page
         ** to allocate, regardless of whether it has leaves.
@@ -6470,13 +6471,13 @@ static int allocateBtreePage(
             memcpy(&pPrevTrunk->aData[0], &pTrunk->aData[0], 4);
           }
         }else{
-          /* The trunk page is required by the caller but it contains 
+          /* The trunk page is required by the caller but it contains
           ** pointers to free-list leaves. The first leaf becomes a trunk
           ** page in this case.
           */
           MemPage *pNewTrunk;
           Pgno iNewTrunk = get4byte(&pTrunk->aData[8]);
-          if( iNewTrunk>mxPage ){ 
+          if( iNewTrunk>mxPage ){
             rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_PGNO(iTrunk);
             goto end_allocate_page;
           }
@@ -6546,8 +6547,8 @@ static int allocateBtreePage(
           goto end_allocate_page;
         }
         testcase( iPage==mxPage );
-        if( !searchList 
-         || (iPage==nearby || (iPage<nearby && eMode==BTALLOC_LE)) 
+        if( !searchList
+         || (iPage==nearby || (iPage<nearby && eMode==BTALLOC_LE))
         ){
           int noContent;
           *pPgno = iPage;
@@ -6588,7 +6589,7 @@ static int allocateBtreePage(
     ** not set the no-content flag. This causes the pager to load and journal
     ** the current page content before overwriting it.
     **
-    ** Note that the pager will not actually attempt to load or journal 
+    ** Note that the pager will not actually attempt to load or journal
     ** content for any page that really does lie past the end of the database
     ** file on disk. So the effects of disabling the no-content optimization
     ** here are confined to those pages that lie between the end of the
@@ -6645,12 +6646,12 @@ end_allocate_page:
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is used to add page iPage to the database file free-list. 
+** This function is used to add page iPage to the database file free-list.
 ** It is assumed that the page is not already a part of the free-list.
 **
 ** The value passed as the second argument to this function is optional.
-** If the caller happens to have a pointer to the MemPage object 
-** corresponding to page iPage handy, it may pass it as the second value. 
+** If the caller happens to have a pointer to the MemPage object
+** corresponding to page iPage handy, it may pass it as the second value.
 ** Otherwise, it may pass NULL.
 **
 ** If a pointer to a MemPage object is passed as the second argument,
@@ -6658,7 +6659,7 @@ end_allocate_page:
 */
 static int freePage2(BtShared *pBt, MemPage *pMemPage, Pgno iPage){
   MemPage *pTrunk = 0;                /* Free-list trunk page */
-  Pgno iTrunk = 0;                    /* Page number of free-list trunk page */ 
+  Pgno iTrunk = 0;                    /* Page number of free-list trunk page */
   MemPage *pPage1 = pBt->pPage1;      /* Local reference to page 1 */
   MemPage *pPage;                     /* Page being freed. May be NULL. */
   int rc;                             /* Return Code */
@@ -6766,7 +6767,7 @@ static int freePage2(BtShared *pBt, MemPage *pMemPage, Pgno iPage){
 
   /* If control flows to this point, then it was not possible to add the
   ** the page being freed as a leaf page of the first trunk in the free-list.
-  ** Possibly because the free-list is empty, or possibly because the 
+  ** Possibly because the free-list is empty, or possibly because the
   ** first trunk in the free-list is full. Either way, the page being freed
   ** will become the new first trunk page in the free-list.
   */
@@ -6823,15 +6824,15 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int clearCellOverflow(
   assert( pBt->usableSize > 4 );
   ovflPageSize = pBt->usableSize - 4;
   nOvfl = (pInfo->nPayload - pInfo->nLocal + ovflPageSize - 1)/ovflPageSize;
-  assert( nOvfl>0 || 
+  assert( nOvfl>0 ||
     (CORRUPT_DB && (pInfo->nPayload + ovflPageSize)<ovflPageSize)
   );
   while( nOvfl-- ){
     Pgno iNext = 0;
     MemPage *pOvfl = 0;
     if( ovflPgno<2 || ovflPgno>btreePagecount(pBt) ){
-      /* 0 is not a legal page number and page 1 cannot be an 
-      ** overflow page. Therefore if ovflPgno<2 or past the end of the 
+      /* 0 is not a legal page number and page 1 cannot be an
+      ** overflow page. Therefore if ovflPgno<2 or past the end of the
       ** file the database must be corrupt. */
       return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
     }
@@ -6843,11 +6844,11 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int clearCellOverflow(
     if( ( pOvfl || ((pOvfl = btreePageLookup(pBt, ovflPgno))!=0) )
      && sqlite3PagerPageRefcount(pOvfl->pDbPage)!=1
     ){
-      /* There is no reason any cursor should have an outstanding reference 
+      /* There is no reason any cursor should have an outstanding reference
       ** to an overflow page belonging to a cell that is being deleted/updated.
-      ** So if there exists more than one reference to this page, then it 
-      ** must not really be an overflow page and the database must be corrupt. 
-      ** It is helpful to detect this before calling freePage2(), as 
+      ** So if there exists more than one reference to this page, then it
+      ** must not really be an overflow page and the database must be corrupt.
+      ** It is helpful to detect this before calling freePage2(), as
       ** freePage2() may zero the page contents if secure-delete mode is
       ** enabled. If this 'overflow' page happens to be a page that the
       ** caller is iterating through or using in some other way, this
@@ -6869,7 +6870,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int clearCellOverflow(
 
 /* Call xParseCell to compute the size of a cell.  If the cell contains
 ** overflow, then invoke cellClearOverflow to clear out that overflow.
-** STore the result code (SQLITE_OK or some error code) in rc.
+** Store the result code (SQLITE_OK or some error code) in rc.
 **
 ** Implemented as macro to force inlining for performance.
 */
@@ -6933,7 +6934,7 @@ static int fillInCell(
     pSrc = pX->pKey;
     nHeader += putVarint32(&pCell[nHeader], nPayload);
   }
-  
+ 
   /* Fill in the payload */
   pPayload = &pCell[nHeader];
   if( nPayload<=pPage->maxLocal ){
@@ -7024,8 +7025,8 @@ static int fillInCell(
       if( pBt->autoVacuum ){
         do{
           pgnoOvfl++;
-        } while( 
-          PTRMAP_ISPAGE(pBt, pgnoOvfl) || pgnoOvfl==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt) 
+        } while(
+          PTRMAP_ISPAGE(pBt, pgnoOvfl) || pgnoOvfl==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt)
         );
       }
 #endif
@@ -7033,9 +7034,9 @@ static int fillInCell(
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
       /* If the database supports auto-vacuum, and the second or subsequent
       ** overflow page is being allocated, add an entry to the pointer-map
-      ** for that page now. 
+      ** for that page now.
       **
-      ** If this is the first overflow page, then write a partial entry 
+      ** If this is the first overflow page, then write a partial entry
       ** to the pointer-map. If we write nothing to this pointer-map slot,
       ** then the optimistic overflow chain processing in clearCell()
       ** may misinterpret the uninitialized values and delete the
@@ -7136,8 +7137,8 @@ static void dropCell(MemPage *pPage, int idx, int sz, int *pRC){
 ** will not fit, then make a copy of the cell content into pTemp if
 ** pTemp is not null.  Regardless of pTemp, allocate a new entry
 ** in pPage->apOvfl[] and make it point to the cell content (either
-** in pTemp or the original pCell) and also record its index. 
-** Allocating a new entry in pPage->aCell[] implies that 
+** in pTemp or the original pCell) and also record its index.
+** Allocating a new entry in pPage->aCell[] implies that
 ** pPage->nOverflow is incremented.
 **
 ** The insertCellFast() routine below works exactly the same as
@@ -7449,16 +7450,16 @@ static u16 cachedCellSize(CellArray *p, int N){
 }
 
 /*
-** Array apCell[] contains pointers to nCell b-tree page cells. The 
+** Array apCell[] contains pointers to nCell b-tree page cells. The
 ** szCell[] array contains the size in bytes of each cell. This function
 ** replaces the current contents of page pPg with the contents of the cell
 ** array.
 **
 ** Some of the cells in apCell[] may currently be stored in pPg. This
-** function works around problems caused by this by making a copy of any 
+** function works around problems caused by this by making a copy of any
 ** such cells before overwriting the page data.
 **
-** The MemPage.nFree field is invalidated by this function. It is the 
+** The MemPage.nFree field is invalidated by this function. It is the
 ** responsibility of the caller to set it correctly.
 */
 static int rebuildPage(
@@ -7540,7 +7541,7 @@ static int rebuildPage(
 ** cell in the array. It is the responsibility of the caller to ensure
 ** that it is safe to overwrite this part of the cell-pointer array.
 **
-** When this function is called, *ppData points to the start of the 
+** When this function is called, *ppData points to the start of the
 ** content area on page pPg. If the size of the content area is extended,
 ** *ppData is updated to point to the new start of the content area
 ** before returning.
@@ -7548,7 +7549,7 @@ static int rebuildPage(
 ** Finally, argument pBegin points to the byte immediately following the
 ** end of the space required by this page for the cell-pointer area (for
 ** all cells - not just those inserted by the current call). If the content
-** area must be extended to before this point in order to accomodate all
+** area must be extended to before this point in order to accommodate all
 ** cells in apCell[], then the cells do not fit and non-zero is returned.
 */
 static int pageInsertArray(
@@ -7824,12 +7825,12 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pParent, MemPage *pPage, u8 *pSpace){
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pPage->pBt->mutex) );
   assert( sqlite3PagerIswriteable(pParent->pDbPage) );
   assert( pPage->nOverflow==1 );
-  
+ 
   if( pPage->nCell==0 ) return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;  /* dbfuzz001.test */
   assert( pPage->nFree>=0 );
   assert( pParent->nFree>=0 );
 
-  /* Allocate a new page. This page will become the right-sibling of 
+  /* Allocate a new page. This page will become the right-sibling of
   ** pPage. Make the parent page writable, so that the new divider cell
   ** may be inserted. If both these operations are successful, proceed.
   */
@@ -7860,10 +7861,10 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pParent, MemPage *pPage, u8 *pSpace){
     pNew->nFree = pBt->usableSize - pNew->cellOffset - 2 - szCell;
 
     /* If this is an auto-vacuum database, update the pointer map
-    ** with entries for the new page, and any pointer from the 
+    ** with entries for the new page, and any pointer from the
     ** cell on the page to an overflow page. If either of these
     ** operations fails, the return code is set, but the contents
-    ** of the parent page are still manipulated by thh code below.
+    ** of the parent page are still manipulated by the code below.
     ** That is Ok, at this point the parent page is guaranteed to
     ** be marked as dirty. Returning an error code will cause a
     ** rollback, undoing any changes made to the parent page.
@@ -7874,14 +7875,14 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pParent, MemPage *pPage, u8 *pSpace){
         ptrmapPutOvflPtr(pNew, pNew, pCell, &rc);
       }
     }
-  
+ 
     /* Create a divider cell to insert into pParent. The divider cell
     ** consists of a 4-byte page number (the page number of pPage) and
     ** a variable length key value (which must be the same value as the
     ** largest key on pPage).
     **
-    ** To find the largest key value on pPage, first find the right-most 
-    ** cell on pPage. The first two fields of this cell are the 
+    ** To find the largest key value on pPage, first find the right-most
+    ** cell on pPage. The first two fields of this cell are the
     ** record-length (a variable length integer at most 32-bits in size)
     ** and the key value (a variable length integer, may have any value).
     ** The first of the while(...) loops below skips over the record-length
@@ -7902,7 +7903,7 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pParent, MemPage *pPage, u8 *pSpace){
 
     /* Set the right-child pointer of pParent to point to the new page. */
     put4byte(&pParent->aData[pParent->hdrOffset+8], pgnoNew);
-  
+ 
     /* Release the reference to the new page. */
     releasePage(pNew);
   }
@@ -7914,7 +7915,7 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pParent, MemPage *pPage, u8 *pSpace){
 #if 0
 /*
 ** This function does not contribute anything to the operation of SQLite.
-** it is sometimes activated temporarily while debugging code responsible 
+** it is sometimes activated temporarily while debugging code responsible
 ** for setting pointer-map entries.
 */
 static int ptrmapCheckPages(MemPage **apPage, int nPage){
@@ -7929,7 +7930,7 @@ static int ptrmapCheckPages(MemPage **apPage, int nPage){
     for(j=0; j<pPage->nCell; j++){
       CellInfo info;
       u8 *z;
-     
+    
       z = findCell(pPage, j);
       pPage->xParseCell(pPage, z, &info);
       if( info.nLocal<info.nPayload ){
@@ -7954,7 +7955,7 @@ static int ptrmapCheckPages(MemPage **apPage, int nPage){
 #endif
 
 /*
-** This function is used to copy the contents of the b-tree node stored 
+** This function is used to copy the contents of the b-tree node stored
 ** on page pFrom to page pTo. If page pFrom was not a leaf page, then
 ** the pointer-map entries for each child page are updated so that the
 ** parent page stored in the pointer map is page pTo. If pFrom contained
@@ -7962,11 +7963,11 @@ static int ptrmapCheckPages(MemPage **apPage, int nPage){
 ** map entries are also updated so that the parent page is page pTo.
 **
 ** If pFrom is currently carrying any overflow cells (entries in the
-** MemPage.apOvfl[] array), they are not copied to pTo. 
+** MemPage.apOvfl[] array), they are not copied to pTo.
 **
 ** Before returning, page pTo is reinitialized using btreeInitPage().
 **
-** The performance of this function is not critical. It is only used by 
+** The performance of this function is not critical. It is only used by
 ** the balance_shallower() and balance_deeper() procedures, neither of
 ** which are called often under normal circumstances.
 */
@@ -7979,20 +7980,20 @@ static void copyNodeContent(MemPage *pFrom, MemPage *pTo, int *pRC){
     int const iToHdr = ((pTo->pgno==1) ? 100 : 0);
     int rc;
     int iData;
-  
-  
+ 
+ 
     assert( pFrom->isInit );
     assert( pFrom->nFree>=iToHdr );
     assert( get2byte(&aFrom[iFromHdr+5]) <= (int)pBt->usableSize );
-  
+ 
     /* Copy the b-tree node content from page pFrom to page pTo. */
     iData = get2byte(&aFrom[iFromHdr+5]);
     memcpy(&aTo[iData], &aFrom[iData], pBt->usableSize-iData);
     memcpy(&aTo[iToHdr], &aFrom[iFromHdr], pFrom->cellOffset + 2*pFrom->nCell);
-  
+ 
     /* Reinitialize page pTo so that the contents of the MemPage structure
     ** match the new data. The initialization of pTo can actually fail under
-    ** fairly obscure circumstances, even though it is a copy of initialized 
+    ** fairly obscure circumstances, even though it is a copy of initialized
     ** page pFrom.
     */
     pTo->isInit = 0;
@@ -8002,7 +8003,7 @@ static void copyNodeContent(MemPage *pFrom, MemPage *pTo, int *pRC){
       *pRC = rc;
       return;
     }
-  
+ 
     /* If this is an auto-vacuum database, update the pointer-map entries
     ** for any b-tree or overflow pages that pTo now contains the pointers to.
     */
@@ -8017,13 +8018,13 @@ static void copyNodeContent(MemPage *pFrom, MemPage *pTo, int *pRC){
 ** (hereafter "the page") and up to 2 siblings so that all pages have about the
 ** same amount of free space. Usually a single sibling on either side of the
 ** page are used in the balancing, though both siblings might come from one
-** side if the page is the first or last child of its parent. If the page 
+** side if the page is the first or last child of its parent. If the page
 ** has fewer than 2 siblings (something which can only happen if the page
 ** is a root page or a child of a root page) then all available siblings
 ** participate in the balancing.
 **
-** The number of siblings of the page might be increased or decreased by 
-** one or two in an effort to keep pages nearly full but not over full. 
+** The number of siblings of the page might be increased or decreased by
+** one or two in an effort to keep pages nearly full but not over full.
 **
 ** Note that when this routine is called, some of the cells on the page
 ** might not actually be stored in MemPage.aData[]. This can happen
@@ -8034,7 +8035,7 @@ static void copyNodeContent(MemPage *pFrom, MemPage *pTo, int *pRC){
 ** inserted into or removed from the parent page (pParent). Doing so
 ** may cause the parent page to become overfull or underfull. If this
 ** happens, it is the responsibility of the caller to invoke the correct
-** balancing routine to fix this problem (see the balance() routine). 
+** balancing routine to fix this problem (see the balance() routine).
 **
 ** If this routine fails for any reason, it might leave the database
 ** in a corrupted state. So if this routine fails, the database should
@@ -8049,7 +8050,7 @@ static void copyNodeContent(MemPage *pFrom, MemPage *pTo, int *pRC){
 ** of the page-size, the aOvflSpace[] buffer is guaranteed to be large
 ** enough for all overflow cells.
 **
-** If aOvflSpace is set to a null pointer, this function returns 
+** If aOvflSpace is set to a null pointer, this function returns
 ** SQLITE_NOMEM.
 */
 static int balance_nonroot(
@@ -8093,7 +8094,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
   assert( sqlite3PagerIswriteable(pParent->pDbPage) );
 
   /* At this point pParent may have at most one overflow cell. And if
-  ** this overflow cell is present, it must be the cell with 
+  ** this overflow cell is present, it must be the cell with
   ** index iParentIdx. This scenario comes about when this function
   ** is called (indirectly) from sqlite3BtreeDelete().
   */
@@ -8105,11 +8106,11 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
   }
   assert( pParent->nFree>=0 );
 
-  /* Find the sibling pages to balance. Also locate the cells in pParent 
-  ** that divide the siblings. An attempt is made to find NN siblings on 
-  ** either side of pPage. More siblings are taken from one side, however, 
+  /* Find the sibling pages to balance. Also locate the cells in pParent
+  ** that divide the siblings. An attempt is made to find NN siblings on
+  ** either side of pPage. More siblings are taken from one side, however,
   ** if there are fewer than NN siblings on the other side. If pParent
-  ** has NB or fewer children then all children of pParent are taken.  
+  ** has NB or fewer children then all children of pParent are taken. 
   **
   ** This loop also drops the divider cells from the parent page. This
   ** way, the remainder of the function does not have to deal with any
@@ -8121,7 +8122,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
     nxDiv = 0;
   }else{
     assert( bBulk==0 || bBulk==1 );
-    if( iParentIdx==0 ){                 
+    if( iParentIdx==0 ){                
       nxDiv = 0;
     }else if( iParentIdx==i ){
       nxDiv = i-2+bBulk;
@@ -8170,7 +8171,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
       ** This is safe because dropping a cell only overwrites the first
       ** four bytes of it, and this function does not need the first
       ** four bytes of the divider cell. So the pointer is safe to use
-      ** later on.  
+      ** later on. 
       **
       ** But not if we are in secure-delete mode. In secure-delete mode,
       ** the dropCell() routine will overwrite the entire cell with zeroes.
@@ -8333,7 +8334,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
   ** Figure out the number of pages needed to hold all b.nCell cells.
   ** Store this number in "k".  Also compute szNew[] which is the total
   ** size of all cells on the i-th page and cntNew[] which is the index
-  ** in b.apCell[] of the cell that divides page i from page i+1.  
+  ** in b.apCell[] of the cell that divides page i from page i+1. 
   ** cntNew[k] should equal b.nCell.
   **
   ** Values computed by this block:
@@ -8343,7 +8344,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
   **   cntNew[i]: Index in b.apCell[] and b.szCell[] for the first cell to
   **              the right of the i-th sibling page.
   ** usableSpace: Number of bytes of space available on each sibling.
-  ** 
+  **
   */
   usableSpace = pBt->usableSize - 12 + leafCorrection;
   for(i=k=0; i<nOld; i++, k++){
@@ -8453,7 +8454,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
     }
   }
 
-  /* Sanity check:  For a non-corrupt database file one of the follwing
+  /* Sanity check:  For a non-corrupt database file one of the following
   ** must be true:
   **    (1) We found one or more cells (cntNew[0])>0), or
   **    (2) pPage is a virtual root page.  A virtual root page is when
@@ -8504,15 +8505,15 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
   }
 
   /*
-  ** Reassign page numbers so that the new pages are in ascending order. 
+  ** Reassign page numbers so that the new pages are in ascending order.
   ** This helps to keep entries in the disk file in order so that a scan
-  ** of the table is closer to a linear scan through the file. That in turn 
+  ** of the table is closer to a linear scan through the file. That in turn
   ** helps the operating system to deliver pages from the disk more rapidly.
   **
   ** An O(N*N) sort algorithm is used, but since N is never more than NB+2
   ** (5), that is not a performance concern.
   **
-  ** When NB==3, this one optimization makes the database about 25% faster 
+  ** When NB==3, this one optimization makes the database about 25% faster
   ** for large insertions and deletions.
   */
   for(i=0; i<nNew; i++){
@@ -8564,14 +8565,14 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
   put4byte(pRight, apNew[nNew-1]->pgno);
 
   /* If the sibling pages are not leaves, ensure that the right-child pointer
-  ** of the right-most new sibling page is set to the value that was 
+  ** of the right-most new sibling page is set to the value that was
   ** originally in the same field of the right-most old sibling page. */
   if( (pageFlags & PTF_LEAF)==0 && nOld!=nNew ){
     MemPage *pOld = (nNew>nOld ? apNew : apOld)[nOld-1];
     memcpy(&apNew[nNew-1]->aData[8], &pOld->aData[8], 4);
   }
 
-  /* Make any required updates to pointer map entries associated with 
+  /* Make any required updates to pointer map entries associated with
   ** cells stored on sibling pages following the balance operation. Pointer
   ** map entries associated with divider cells are set by the insertCell()
   ** routine. The associated pointer map entries are:
@@ -8582,9 +8583,9 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
   **   b) if the sibling pages are not leaves, the child page associated
   **      with the cell.
   **
-  ** If the sibling pages are not leaves, then the pointer map entry 
-  ** associated with the right-child of each sibling may also need to be 
-  ** updated. This happens below, after the sibling pages have been 
+  ** If the sibling pages are not leaves, then the pointer map entry
+  ** associated with the right-child of each sibling may also need to be
+  ** updated. This happens below, after the sibling pages have been
   ** populated, not here.
   */
   if( ISAUTOVACUUM(pBt) ){
@@ -8609,7 +8610,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
       }
 
       /* Cell pCell is destined for new sibling page pNew. Originally, it
-      ** was either part of sibling page iOld (possibly an overflow cell), 
+      ** was either part of sibling page iOld (possibly an overflow cell),
       ** or else the divider cell to the left of sibling page iOld. So,
       ** if sibling page iOld had the same page number as pNew, and if
       ** pCell really was a part of sibling page iOld (not a divider or
@@ -8646,9 +8647,9 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
     if( !pNew->leaf ){
       memcpy(&pNew->aData[8], pCell, 4);
     }else if( leafData ){
-      /* If the tree is a leaf-data tree, and the siblings are leaves, 
-      ** then there is no divider cell in b.apCell[]. Instead, the divider 
-      ** cell consists of the integer key for the right-most cell of 
+      /* If the tree is a leaf-data tree, and the siblings are leaves,
+      ** then there is no divider cell in b.apCell[]. Instead, the divider
+      ** cell consists of the integer key for the right-most cell of
       ** the sibling-page assembled above only.
       */
       CellInfo info;
@@ -8661,9 +8662,9 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
       pCell -= 4;
       /* Obscure case for non-leaf-data trees: If the cell at pCell was
       ** previously stored on a leaf node, and its reported size was 4
-      ** bytes, then it may actually be smaller than this 
+      ** bytes, then it may actually be smaller than this
       ** (see btreeParseCellPtr(), 4 bytes is the minimum size of
-      ** any cell). But it is important to pass the correct size to 
+      ** any cell). But it is important to pass the correct size to
       ** insertCell(), so reparse the cell now.
       **
       ** This can only happen for b-trees used to evaluate "IN (SELECT ...)"
@@ -8761,8 +8762,8 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
     ** b-tree structure by one. This is described as the "balance-shallower"
     ** sub-algorithm in some documentation.
     **
-    ** If this is an auto-vacuum database, the call to copyNodeContent() 
-    ** sets all pointer-map entries corresponding to database image pages 
+    ** If this is an auto-vacuum database, the call to copyNodeContent()
+    ** sets all pointer-map entries corresponding to database image pages
     ** for which the pointer is stored within the content being copied.
     **
     ** It is critical that the child page be defragmented before being
@@ -8773,7 +8774,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
     assert( nNew==1 || CORRUPT_DB );
     rc = defragmentPage(apNew[0], -1);
     testcase( rc!=SQLITE_OK );
-    assert( apNew[0]->nFree == 
+    assert( apNew[0]->nFree ==
         (get2byteNotZero(&apNew[0]->aData[5]) - apNew[0]->cellOffset
           - apNew[0]->nCell*2)
       || rc!=SQLITE_OK
@@ -8803,7 +8804,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
 #if 0
   if( ISAUTOVACUUM(pBt) && rc==SQLITE_OK && apNew[0]->isInit ){
     /* The ptrmapCheckPages() contains assert() statements that verify that
-    ** all pointer map pages are set correctly. This is helpful while 
+    ** all pointer map pages are set correctly. This is helpful while
     ** debugging. This is usually disabled because a corrupt database may
     ** cause an assert() statement to fail.  */
     ptrmapCheckPages(apNew, nNew);
@@ -8833,15 +8834,15 @@ balance_cleanup:
 **
 ** A new child page is allocated and the contents of the current root
 ** page, including overflow cells, are copied into the child. The root
-** page is then overwritten to make it an empty page with the right-child 
+** page is then overwritten to make it an empty page with the right-child
 ** pointer pointing to the new page.
 **
-** Before returning, all pointer-map entries corresponding to pages 
+** Before returning, all pointer-map entries corresponding to pages
 ** that the new child-page now contains pointers to are updated. The
 ** entry corresponding to the new right-child pointer of the root
 ** page is also updated.
 **
-** If successful, *ppChild is set to contain a reference to the child 
+** If successful, *ppChild is set to contain a reference to the child
 ** page and SQLITE_OK is returned. In this case the caller is required
 ** to call releasePage() on *ppChild exactly once. If an error occurs,
 ** an error code is returned and *ppChild is set to 0.
@@ -8855,7 +8856,7 @@ static int balance_deeper(MemPage *pRoot, MemPage **ppChild){
   assert( pRoot->nOverflow>0 );
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) );
 
-  /* Make pRoot, the root page of the b-tree, writable. Allocate a new 
+  /* Make pRoot, the root page of the b-tree, writable. Allocate a new
   ** page that will become the new right-child of pPage. Copy the contents
   ** of the node stored on pRoot into the new child page.
   */
@@ -8920,7 +8921,7 @@ static int anotherValidCursor(BtCursor *pCur){
 /*
 ** The page that pCur currently points to has just been modified in
 ** some way. This function figures out if this modification means the
-** tree needs to be balanced, and if so calls the appropriate balancing 
+** tree needs to be balanced, and if so calls the appropriate balancing
 ** routine. Balancing routines are:
 **
 **   balance_quick()
@@ -8952,7 +8953,7 @@ static int balance(BtCursor *pCur){
         ** balance_deeper() function to create a new child for the root-page
         ** and copy the current contents of the root-page to it. The
         ** next iteration of the do-loop will balance the child page.
-        */ 
+        */
         assert( balance_deeper_called==0 );
         VVA_ONLY( balance_deeper_called++ );
         rc = balance_deeper(pPage, &pCur->apPage[1]);
@@ -8969,7 +8970,7 @@ static int balance(BtCursor *pCur){
       }
     }else if( sqlite3PagerPageRefcount(pPage->pDbPage)>1 ){
       /* The page being written is not a root page, and there is currently
-      ** more than one reference to it. This only happens if the page is one 
+      ** more than one reference to it. This only happens if the page is one
       ** of its own ancestor pages. Corruption. */
       rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
     }else{
@@ -8991,17 +8992,17 @@ static int balance(BtCursor *pCur){
           /* Call balance_quick() to create a new sibling of pPage on which
           ** to store the overflow cell. balance_quick() inserts a new cell
           ** into pParent, which may cause pParent overflow. If this
-          ** happens, the next iteration of the do-loop will balance pParent 
+          ** happens, the next iteration of the do-loop will balance pParent
           ** use either balance_nonroot() or balance_deeper(). Until this
           ** happens, the overflow cell is stored in the aBalanceQuickSpace[]
-          ** buffer. 
+          ** buffer.
           **
           ** The purpose of the following assert() is to check that only a
           ** single call to balance_quick() is made for each call to this
           ** function. If this were not verified, a subtle bug involving reuse
           ** of the aBalanceQuickSpace[] might sneak in.
           */
-          assert( balance_quick_called==0 ); 
+          assert( balance_quick_called==0 );
           VVA_ONLY( balance_quick_called++ );
           rc = balance_quick(pParent, pPage, aBalanceQuickSpace);
         }else
@@ -9012,15 +9013,15 @@ static int balance(BtCursor *pCur){
           ** modifying the contents of pParent, which may cause pParent to
           ** become overfull or underfull. The next iteration of the do-loop
           ** will balance the parent page to correct this.
-          ** 
+          **
           ** If the parent page becomes overfull, the overflow cell or cells
-          ** are stored in the pSpace buffer allocated immediately below. 
+          ** are stored in the pSpace buffer allocated immediately below.
           ** A subsequent iteration of the do-loop will deal with this by
           ** calling balance_nonroot() (balance_deeper() may be called first,
           ** but it doesn't deal with overflow cells - just moves them to a
-          ** different page). Once this subsequent call to balance_nonroot() 
+          ** different page). Once this subsequent call to balance_nonroot()
           ** has completed, it is safe to release the pSpace buffer used by
-          ** the previous call, as the overflow cell data will have been 
+          ** the previous call, as the overflow cell data will have been
           ** copied either into the body of a database page or into the new
           ** pSpace buffer passed to the latter call to balance_nonroot().
           */
@@ -9028,9 +9029,9 @@ static int balance(BtCursor *pCur){
           rc = balance_nonroot(pParent, iIdx, pSpace, iPage==1,
                                pCur->hints&BTREE_BULKLOAD);
           if( pFree ){
-            /* If pFree is not NULL, it points to the pSpace buffer used 
+            /* If pFree is not NULL, it points to the pSpace buffer used
             ** by a previous call to balance_nonroot(). Its contents are
-            ** now stored either on real database pages or within the 
+            ** now stored either on real database pages or within the
             ** new pSpace buffer, so it may be safely freed here. */
             sqlite3PageFree(pFree);
           }
@@ -9149,7 +9150,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int btreeOverwriteOverflowCell(
     if( rc ) return rc;
     iOffset += ovflPageSize;
   }while( iOffset<nTotal );
-  return SQLITE_OK;    
+  return SQLITE_OK;   
 }
 
 /*
@@ -9188,7 +9189,7 @@ static int btreeOverwriteCell(BtCursor *pCur, const BtreePayload *pX){
 ** hold the content of the row.
 **
 ** For an index btree (used for indexes and WITHOUT ROWID tables), the
-** key is an arbitrary byte sequence stored in pX.pKey,nKey.  The 
+** key is an arbitrary byte sequence stored in pX.pKey,nKey.  The
 ** pX.pData,nData,nZero fields must be zero.
 **
 ** If the seekResult parameter is non-zero, then a successful call to
@@ -9228,8 +9229,8 @@ int sqlite3BtreeInsert(
   **
   ** In some cases, the call to btreeMoveto() below is a no-op. For
   ** example, when inserting data into a table with auto-generated integer
-  ** keys, the VDBE layer invokes sqlite3BtreeLast() to figure out the 
-  ** integer key to use. It then calls this function to actually insert the 
+  ** keys, the VDBE layer invokes sqlite3BtreeLast() to figure out the
+  ** integer key to use. It then calls this function to actually insert the
   ** data into the intkey B-Tree. In this case btreeMoveto() recognizes
   ** that the cursor is already where it needs to be and returns without
   ** doing any work. To avoid thwarting these optimizations, it is important
@@ -9273,13 +9274,13 @@ int sqlite3BtreeInsert(
 
   if( pCur->pKeyInfo==0 ){
     assert( pX->pKey==0 );
-    /* If this is an insert into a table b-tree, invalidate any incrblob 
+    /* If this is an insert into a table b-tree, invalidate any incrblob
     ** cursors open on the row being replaced */
     if( p->hasIncrblobCur ){
       invalidateIncrblobCursors(p, pCur->pgnoRoot, pX->nKey, 0);
     }
 
-    /* If BTREE_SAVEPOSITION is set, the cursor must already be pointing 
+    /* If BTREE_SAVEPOSITION is set, the cursor must already be pointing
     ** to a row with the same key as the new entry being inserted.
     */
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
@@ -9310,14 +9311,14 @@ int sqlite3BtreeInsert(
       ** to an adjacent cell.  Move the cursor so that it is pointing either
       ** to the cell to be overwritten or an adjacent cell.
       */
-      rc = sqlite3BtreeTableMoveto(pCur, pX->nKey, 
+      rc = sqlite3BtreeTableMoveto(pCur, pX->nKey,
                (flags & BTREE_APPEND)!=0, &loc);
       if( rc ) return rc;
     }
   }else{
     /* This is an index or a WITHOUT ROWID table */
 
-    /* If BTREE_SAVEPOSITION is set, the cursor must already be pointing 
+    /* If BTREE_SAVEPOSITION is set, the cursor must already be pointing
     ** to a row with the same key as the new entry being inserted.
     */
     assert( (flags & BTREE_SAVEPOSITION)==0 || loc==0 );
@@ -9337,7 +9338,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeInsert(
         r.eqSeen = 0;
         rc = sqlite3BtreeIndexMoveto(pCur, &r, &loc);
       }else{
-        rc = btreeMoveto(pCur, pX->pKey, pX->nKey, 
+        rc = btreeMoveto(pCur, pX->pKey, pX->nKey,
                     (flags & BTREE_APPEND)!=0, &loc);
       }
       if( rc ) return rc;
@@ -9358,7 +9359,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeInsert(
       }
     }
   }
-  assert( pCur->eState==CURSOR_VALID 
+  assert( pCur->eState==CURSOR_VALID
        || (pCur->eState==CURSOR_INVALID && loc) || CORRUPT_DB );
 
   pPage = pCur->pPage;
@@ -9419,14 +9420,14 @@ int sqlite3BtreeInsert(
     BTREE_CLEAR_CELL(rc, pPage, oldCell, info);
     testcase( pCur->curFlags & BTCF_ValidOvfl );
     invalidateOverflowCache(pCur);
-    if( info.nSize==szNew && info.nLocal==info.nPayload 
+    if( info.nSize==szNew && info.nLocal==info.nPayload
      && (!ISAUTOVACUUM(p->pBt) || szNew<pPage->minLocal)
     ){
       /* Overwrite the old cell with the new if they are the same size.
       ** We could also try to do this if the old cell is smaller, then add
       ** the leftover space to the free list.  But experiments show that
       ** doing that is no faster then skipping this optimization and just
-      ** calling dropCell() and insertCell(). 
+      ** calling dropCell() and insertCell().
       **
       ** This optimization cannot be used on an autovacuum database if the
       ** new entry uses overflow pages, as the insertCell() call below is
@@ -9454,7 +9455,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeInsert(
   assert( pPage->nOverflow==0 || rc==SQLITE_OK );
   assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || pPage->nCell>0 || pPage->nOverflow>0 );
 
-  /* If no error has occurred and pPage has an overflow cell, call balance() 
+  /* If no error has occurred and pPage has an overflow cell, call balance()
   ** to redistribute the cells within the tree. Since balance() may move
   ** the cursor, zero the BtCursor.info.nSize and BTCF_ValidNKey
   ** variables.
@@ -9480,7 +9481,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeInsert(
     rc = balance(pCur);
 
     /* Must make sure nOverflow is reset to zero even if the balance()
-    ** fails. Internal data structure corruption will result otherwise. 
+    ** fails. Internal data structure corruption will result otherwise.
     ** Also, set the cursor state to invalid. This stops saveCursorPosition()
     ** from trying to save the current position of the cursor.  */
     pCur->pPage->nOverflow = 0;
@@ -9560,14 +9561,14 @@ int sqlite3BtreeTransferRow(BtCursor *pDest, BtCursor *pSrc, i64 iKey){
       pPgnoOut = &aOut[nOut];
       pBt->nPreformatSize += 4;
     }
-  
+ 
     if( nRem>nIn ){
       if( aIn+nIn+4>pSrc->pPage->aDataEnd ){
         return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
       }
       ovflIn = get4byte(&pSrc->info.pPayload[nIn]);
     }
-  
+ 
     do {
       nRem -= nOut;
       do{
@@ -9592,7 +9593,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeTransferRow(BtCursor *pDest, BtCursor *pSrc, i64 iKey){
           }
         }
       }while( rc==SQLITE_OK && nOut>0 );
-  
+ 
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK && nRem>0 && ALWAYS(pPgnoOut) ){
         Pgno pgnoNew;
         MemPage *pNew = 0;
@@ -9611,7 +9612,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeTransferRow(BtCursor *pDest, BtCursor *pSrc, i64 iKey){
         }
       }
     }while( nRem>0 && rc==SQLITE_OK );
-  
+ 
     releasePage(pPageOut);
     sqlite3PagerUnref(pPageIn);
     return rc;
@@ -9619,7 +9620,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeTransferRow(BtCursor *pDest, BtCursor *pSrc, i64 iKey){
 }
 
 /*
-** Delete the entry that the cursor is pointing to. 
+** Delete the entry that the cursor is pointing to.
 **
 ** If the BTREE_SAVEPOSITION bit of the flags parameter is zero, then
 ** the cursor is left pointing at an arbitrary location after the delete.
@@ -9637,12 +9638,12 @@ int sqlite3BtreeTransferRow(BtCursor *pDest, BtCursor *pSrc, i64 iKey){
 */
 int sqlite3BtreeDelete(BtCursor *pCur, u8 flags){
   Btree *p = pCur->pBtree;
-  BtShared *pBt = p->pBt;              
+  BtShared *pBt = p->pBt;             
   int rc;                    /* Return code */
   MemPage *pPage;            /* Page to delete cell from */
   unsigned char *pCell;      /* Pointer to cell to delete */
   int iCellIdx;              /* Index of cell to delete */
-  int iCellDepth;            /* Depth of node containing pCell */ 
+  int iCellDepth;            /* Depth of node containing pCell */
   CellInfo info;             /* Size of the cell being deleted */
   u8 bPreserve;              /* Keep cursor valid.  2 for CURSOR_SKIPNEXT */
 
@@ -9681,8 +9682,8 @@ int sqlite3BtreeDelete(BtCursor *pCur, u8 flags){
   /* If the BTREE_SAVEPOSITION bit is on, then the cursor position must
   ** be preserved following this delete operation. If the current delete
   ** will cause a b-tree rebalance, then this is done by saving the cursor
-  ** key and leaving the cursor in CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK state before 
-  ** returning. 
+  ** key and leaving the cursor in CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK state before
+  ** returning.
   **
   ** If the current delete will not cause a rebalance, then the cursor
   ** will be left in CURSOR_SKIPNEXT state pointing to the entry immediately
@@ -9696,7 +9697,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeDelete(BtCursor *pCur, u8 flags){
   */
   bPreserve = (flags & BTREE_SAVEPOSITION)!=0;
   if( bPreserve ){
-    if( !pPage->leaf 
+    if( !pPage->leaf
      || (pPage->nFree+pPage->xCellSize(pPage,pCell)+2) >
                                                    (int)(pBt->usableSize*2/3)
      || pPage->nCell==1  /* See dbfuzz001.test for a test case */
@@ -9792,7 +9793,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeDelete(BtCursor *pCur, u8 flags){
   ** on the leaf node first. If the balance proceeds far enough up the
   ** tree that we can be sure that any problem in the internal node has
   ** been corrected, so be it. Otherwise, after balancing the leaf node,
-  ** walk the cursor up the tree to the internal node and balance it as 
+  ** walk the cursor up the tree to the internal node and balance it as
   ** well.  */
   assert( pCur->pPage->nOverflow==0 );
   assert( pCur->pPage->nFree>=0 );
@@ -9853,7 +9854,7 @@ static int btreeCreateTable(Btree *p, Pgno *piTable, int createTabFlags){
   MemPage *pRoot;
   Pgno pgnoRoot;
   int rc;
-  int ptfFlags;          /* Page-type flage for the root page of new table */
+  int ptfFlags;          /* Page-type flags for the root page of new table */
 
   assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(p) );
   assert( pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_WRITE );
@@ -9956,7 +9957,7 @@ static int btreeCreateTable(Btree *p, Pgno *piTable, int createTabFlags){
       }
     }else{
       pRoot = pPageMove;
-    } 
+    }
 
     /* Update the pointer-map and meta-data with the new root-page number. */
     ptrmapPut(pBt, pgnoRoot, PTRMAP_ROOTPAGE, 0, &rc);
@@ -10024,7 +10025,7 @@ static int clearDatabasePage(
   }
   rc = getAndInitPage(pBt, pgno, &pPage, 0, 0);
   if( rc ) return rc;
-  if( (pBt->openFlags & BTREE_SINGLE)==0 
+  if( (pBt->openFlags & BTREE_SINGLE)==0
    && sqlite3PagerPageRefcount(pPage->pDbPage) != (1 + (pgno==1))
   ){
     rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
@@ -10111,12 +10112,12 @@ int sqlite3BtreeClearTableOfCursor(BtCursor *pCur){
 ** cursors on the table.
 **
 ** If AUTOVACUUM is enabled and the page at iTable is not the last
-** root page in the database file, then the last root page 
+** root page in the database file, then the last root page
 ** in the database file is moved into the slot formerly occupied by
 ** iTable and that last slot formerly occupied by the last root page
 ** is added to the freelist instead of iTable.  In this say, all
 ** root pages are kept at the beginning of the database file, which
-** is necessary for AUTOVACUUM to work right.  *piMoved is set to the 
+** is necessary for AUTOVACUUM to work right.  *piMoved is set to the
 ** page number that used to be the last root page in the file before
 ** the move.  If no page gets moved, *piMoved is set to 0.
 ** The last root page is recorded in meta[3] and the value of
@@ -10154,7 +10155,7 @@ static int btreeDropTable(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, int *piMoved){
 
     if( iTable==maxRootPgno ){
       /* If the table being dropped is the table with the largest root-page
-      ** number in the database, put the root page on the free list. 
+      ** number in the database, put the root page on the free list.
       */
       freePage(pPage, &rc);
       releasePage(pPage);
@@ -10163,7 +10164,7 @@ static int btreeDropTable(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, int *piMoved){
       }
     }else{
       /* The table being dropped does not have the largest root-page
-      ** number in the database. So move the page that does into the 
+      ** number in the database. So move the page that does into the
       ** gap left by the deleted root-page.
       */
       MemPage *pMove;
@@ -10205,7 +10206,7 @@ static int btreeDropTable(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, int *piMoved){
     releasePage(pPage);
   }
 #endif
-  return rc;  
+  return rc; 
 }
 int sqlite3BtreeDropTable(Btree *p, int iTable, int *piMoved){
   int rc;
@@ -10224,7 +10225,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeDropTable(Btree *p, int iTable, int *piMoved){
 ** is the number of free pages currently in the database.  Meta[1]
 ** through meta[15] are available for use by higher layers.  Meta[0]
 ** is read-only, the others are read/write.
-** 
+**
 ** The schema layer numbers meta values differently.  At the schema
 ** layer (and the SetCookie and ReadCookie opcodes) the number of
 ** free pages is not visible.  So Cookie[0] is the same as Meta[1].
@@ -10294,7 +10295,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeUpdateMeta(Btree *p, int idx, u32 iMeta){
 ** The first argument, pCur, is a cursor opened on some b-tree. Count the
 ** number of entries in the b-tree and write the result to *pnEntry.
 **
-** SQLITE_OK is returned if the operation is successfully executed. 
+** SQLITE_OK is returned if the operation is successfully executed.
 ** Otherwise, if an error is encountered (i.e. an IO error or database
 ** corruption) an SQLite error code is returned.
 */
@@ -10309,13 +10310,13 @@ int sqlite3BtreeCount(sqlite3 *db, BtCursor *pCur, i64 *pnEntry){
   }
 
   /* Unless an error occurs, the following loop runs one iteration for each
-  ** page in the B-Tree structure (not including overflow pages). 
+  ** page in the B-Tree structure (not including overflow pages).
   */
   while( rc==SQLITE_OK && !AtomicLoad(&db->u1.isInterrupted) ){
     int iIdx;                          /* Index of child node in parent */
     MemPage *pPage;                    /* Current page of the b-tree */
 
-    /* If this is a leaf page or the tree is not an int-key tree, then 
+    /* If this is a leaf page or the tree is not an int-key tree, then
     ** this page contains countable entries. Increment the entry counter
     ** accordingly.
     */
@@ -10324,7 +10325,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeCount(sqlite3 *db, BtCursor *pCur, i64 *pnEntry){
       nEntry += pPage->nCell;
     }
 
-    /* pPage is a leaf node. This loop navigates the cursor so that it 
+    /* pPage is a leaf node. This loop navigates the cursor so that it
     ** points to the first interior cell that it points to the parent of
     ** the next page in the tree that has not yet been visited. The
     ** pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage] value is set to the index of the parent cell
@@ -10348,7 +10349,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeCount(sqlite3 *db, BtCursor *pCur, i64 *pnEntry){
       pPage = pCur->pPage;
     }
 
-    /* Descend to the child node of the cell that the cursor currently 
+    /* Descend to the child node of the cell that the cursor currently
     ** points at. This is the right-child if (iIdx==pPage->nCell).
     */
     iIdx = pCur->ix;
@@ -10479,7 +10480,7 @@ static int checkRef(IntegrityCk *pCheck, Pgno iPage){
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
 /*
-** Check that the entry in the pointer-map for page iChild maps to 
+** Check that the entry in the pointer-map for page iChild maps to
 ** page iParent, pointer type ptrType. If not, append an error message
 ** to pCheck.
 */
@@ -10502,7 +10503,7 @@ static void checkPtrmap(
 
   if( ePtrmapType!=eType || iPtrmapParent!=iParent ){
     checkAppendMsg(pCheck,
-      "Bad ptr map entry key=%u expected=(%u,%u) got=(%u,%u)", 
+      "Bad ptr map entry key=%u expected=(%u,%u) got=(%u,%u)",
       iChild, eType, iParent, ePtrmapType, iPtrmapParent);
   }
 }
@@ -10597,7 +10598,7 @@ static void checkList(
 ** property.
 **
 ** This heap is used for cell overlap and coverage testing.  Each u32
-** entry represents the span of a cell or freeblock on a btree page.  
+** entry represents the span of a cell or freeblock on a btree page. 
 ** The upper 16 bits are the index of the first byte of a range and the
 ** lower 16 bits are the index of the last byte of that range.
 */
@@ -10629,7 +10630,7 @@ static int btreeHeapPull(u32 *aHeap, u32 *pOut){
     aHeap[j] = x;
     i = j;
   }
-  return 1;  
+  return 1; 
 }
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INTEGRITY_CHECK
@@ -10637,7 +10638,7 @@ static int btreeHeapPull(u32 *aHeap, u32 *pOut){
 ** Do various sanity checks on a single page of a tree.  Return
 ** the tree depth.  Root pages return 0.  Parents of root pages
 ** return 1, and so forth.
-** 
+**
 ** These checks are done:
 **
 **      1.  Make sure that cells and freeblocks do not overlap
@@ -10837,7 +10838,7 @@ static int checkTreePage(
     **
     ** EVIDENCE-OF: R-20690-50594 The second field of the b-tree page header
     ** is the offset of the first freeblock, or zero if there are no
-    ** freeblocks on the page. 
+    ** freeblocks on the page.
     */
     i = get2byte(&data[hdr+1]);
     while( i>0 ){
@@ -10857,13 +10858,13 @@ static int checkTreePage(
       assert( (u32)j<=usableSize-4 ); /* Enforced by btreeComputeFreeSpace() */
       i = j;
     }
-    /* Analyze the min-heap looking for overlap between cells and/or 
+    /* Analyze the min-heap looking for overlap between cells and/or
     ** freeblocks, and counting the number of untracked bytes in nFrag.
-    ** 
+    **
     ** Each min-heap entry is of the form:    (start_address<<16)|end_address.
     ** There is an implied first entry the covers the page header, the cell
     ** pointer index, and the gap between the cell pointer index and the start
-    ** of cell content.  
+    ** of cell content. 
     **
     ** The loop below pulls entries from the min-heap in order and compares
     ** the start_address against the previous end_address.  If there is an
@@ -11042,11 +11043,11 @@ int sqlite3BtreeIntegrityCheck(
       /* If the database supports auto-vacuum, make sure no tables contain
       ** references to pointer-map pages.
       */
-      if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)==0 && 
+      if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)==0 &&
          (PTRMAP_PAGENO(pBt, i)!=i || !pBt->autoVacuum) ){
         checkAppendMsg(&sCheck, "Page %u: never used", i);
       }
-      if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)!=0 && 
+      if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)!=0 &&
          (PTRMAP_PAGENO(pBt, i)==i && pBt->autoVacuum) ){
         checkAppendMsg(&sCheck, "Page %u: pointer map referenced", i);
       }
@@ -11111,7 +11112,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeTxnState(Btree *p){
 /*
 ** Run a checkpoint on the Btree passed as the first argument.
 **
-** Return SQLITE_LOCKED if this or any other connection has an open 
+** Return SQLITE_LOCKED if this or any other connection has an open
 ** transaction on the shared-cache the argument Btree is connected to.
 **
 ** Parameter eMode is one of SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE, FULL or RESTART.
@@ -11144,20 +11145,20 @@ int sqlite3BtreeIsInBackup(Btree *p){
 /*
 ** This function returns a pointer to a blob of memory associated with
 ** a single shared-btree. The memory is used by client code for its own
-** purposes (for example, to store a high-level schema associated with 
+** purposes (for example, to store a high-level schema associated with
 ** the shared-btree). The btree layer manages reference counting issues.
 **
 ** The first time this is called on a shared-btree, nBytes bytes of memory
-** are allocated, zeroed, and returned to the caller. For each subsequent 
+** are allocated, zeroed, and returned to the caller. For each subsequent
 ** call the nBytes parameter is ignored and a pointer to the same blob
-** of memory returned. 
+** of memory returned.
 **
 ** If the nBytes parameter is 0 and the blob of memory has not yet been
 ** allocated, a null pointer is returned. If the blob has already been
 ** allocated, it is returned as normal.
 **
-** Just before the shared-btree is closed, the function passed as the 
-** xFree argument when the memory allocation was made is invoked on the 
+** Just before the shared-btree is closed, the function passed as the
+** xFree argument when the memory allocation was made is invoked on the
 ** blob of allocated memory. The xFree function should not call sqlite3_free()
 ** on the memory, the btree layer does that.
 */
@@ -11173,8 +11174,8 @@ void *sqlite3BtreeSchema(Btree *p, int nBytes, void(*xFree)(void *)){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE if another user of the same shared 
-** btree as the argument handle holds an exclusive lock on the 
+** Return SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE if another user of the same shared
+** btree as the argument handle holds an exclusive lock on the
 ** sqlite_schema table. Otherwise SQLITE_OK.
 */
 int sqlite3BtreeSchemaLocked(Btree *p){
@@ -11215,11 +11216,11 @@ int sqlite3BtreeLockTable(Btree *p, int iTab, u8 isWriteLock){
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB
 /*
-** Argument pCsr must be a cursor opened for writing on an 
-** INTKEY table currently pointing at a valid table entry. 
+** Argument pCsr must be a cursor opened for writing on an
+** INTKEY table currently pointing at a valid table entry.
 ** This function modifies the data stored as part of that entry.
 **
-** Only the data content may only be modified, it is not possible to 
+** Only the data content may only be modified, it is not possible to
 ** change the length of the data stored. If this function is called with
 ** parameters that attempt to write past the end of the existing data,
 ** no modifications are made and SQLITE_CORRUPT is returned.
@@ -11250,7 +11251,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreePutData(BtCursor *pCsr, u32 offset, u32 amt, void *z){
   VVA_ONLY(rc =) saveAllCursors(pCsr->pBt, pCsr->pgnoRoot, pCsr);
   assert( rc==SQLITE_OK );
 
-  /* Check some assumptions: 
+  /* Check some assumptions:
   **   (a) the cursor is open for writing,
   **   (b) there is a read/write transaction open,
   **   (c) the connection holds a write-lock on the table (if required),
@@ -11269,7 +11270,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreePutData(BtCursor *pCsr, u32 offset, u32 amt, void *z){
   return accessPayload(pCsr, offset, amt, (unsigned char *)z, 1);
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Mark this cursor as an incremental blob cursor.
 */
 void sqlite3BtreeIncrblobCursor(BtCursor *pCur){
@@ -11279,14 +11280,14 @@ void sqlite3BtreeIncrblobCursor(BtCursor *pCur){
 #endif
 
 /*
-** Set both the "read version" (single byte at byte offset 18) and 
+** Set both the "read version" (single byte at byte offset 18) and
 ** "write version" (single byte at byte offset 19) fields in the database
 ** header to iVersion.
 */
 int sqlite3BtreeSetVersion(Btree *pBtree, int iVersion){
   BtShared *pBt = pBtree->pBt;
   int rc;                         /* Return code */
- 
+
   assert( iVersion==1 || iVersion==2 );
 
   /* If setting the version fields to 1, do not automatically open the
@@ -11355,7 +11356,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeSharable(Btree *p){
 
 /*
 ** Return the number of connections to the BtShared object accessed by
-** the Btree handle passed as the only argument. For private caches 
+** the Btree handle passed as the only argument. For private caches
 ** this is always 1. For shared caches it may be 1 or greater.
 */
 int sqlite3BtreeConnectionCount(Btree *p){
diff --git a/src/btreeInt.h b/src/btreeInt.h
index 6d3578422..3e6920619 100644
--- a/src/btreeInt.h
+++ b/src/btreeInt.h
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ typedef struct CellInfo CellInfo;
 ** page that has been loaded into memory.  The information in this object
 ** is derived from the raw on-disk page content.
 **
-** As each database page is loaded into memory, the pager allocats an
+** As each database page is loaded into memory, the pager allocates an
 ** instance of this object and zeros the first 8 bytes.  (This is the
 ** "extra" information associated with each page of the pager.)
 **
@@ -719,7 +719,7 @@ struct IntegrityCk {
 
 /*
 ** get2byteAligned(), unlike get2byte(), requires that its argument point to a
-** two-byte aligned address.  get2bytea() is only used for accessing the
+** two-byte aligned address.  get2byteAligned() is only used for accessing the
 ** cell addresses in a btree header.
 */
 #if SQLITE_BYTEORDER==4321
diff --git a/src/build.c b/src/build.c
index d6d90ea5f..d983e935e 100644
--- a/src/build.c
+++ b/src/build.c
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ struct TableLock {
 };
 
 /*
-** Record the fact that we want to lock a table at run-time.  
+** Record the fact that we want to lock a table at run-time. 
 **
 ** The table to be locked has root page iTab and is found in database iDb.
 ** A read or a write lock can be taken depending on isWritelock.
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ void sqlite3TableLock(
 */
 static void codeTableLocks(Parse *pParse){
   int i;
-  Vdbe *pVdbe = pParse->pVdbe; 
+  Vdbe *pVdbe = pParse->pVdbe;
   assert( pVdbe!=0 );
 
   for(i=0; i<pParse->nTableLock; i++){
@@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ void sqlite3FinishCoding(Parse *pParse){
     v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
     if( v==0 ) pParse->rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
   }
-  assert( !pParse->isMultiWrite 
+  assert( !pParse->isMultiWrite
        || sqlite3VdbeAssertMayAbort(v, pParse->mayAbort));
   if( v ){
     if( pParse->bReturning ){
@@ -234,8 +234,8 @@ void sqlite3FinishCoding(Parse *pParse){
     pParse->nVtabLock = 0;
 #endif
 
-    /* Once all the cookies have been verified and transactions opened, 
-    ** obtain the required table-locks. This is a no-op unless the 
+    /* Once all the cookies have been verified and transactions opened,
+    ** obtain the required table-locks. This is a no-op unless the
     ** shared-cache feature is enabled.
     */
     codeTableLocks(pParse);
@@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ Table *sqlite3FindTable(sqlite3 *db, const char *zName, const char *zDatabase){
          || sqlite3StrICmp(zName+7, &PREFERRED_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0
          || sqlite3StrICmp(zName+7, &LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0
         ){
-          p = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aDb[1].pSchema->tblHash, 
+          p = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aDb[1].pSchema->tblHash,
                               LEGACY_TEMP_SCHEMA_TABLE);
         }
       }else{
@@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ Table *sqlite3FindTable(sqlite3 *db, const char *zName, const char *zDatabase){
       if( sqlite3StrICmp(zName+7, &PREFERRED_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0 ){
         p = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aDb[0].pSchema->tblHash, LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE);
       }else if( sqlite3StrICmp(zName+7, &PREFERRED_TEMP_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0 ){
-        p = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aDb[1].pSchema->tblHash, 
+        p = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aDb[1].pSchema->tblHash,
                             LEGACY_TEMP_SCHEMA_TABLE);
       }
     }
@@ -442,7 +442,7 @@ Table *sqlite3LocateTable(
 
   /* Read the database schema. If an error occurs, leave an error message
   ** and code in pParse and return NULL. */
-  if( (db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_SchemaKnownOk)==0 
+  if( (db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_SchemaKnownOk)==0
    && SQLITE_OK!=sqlite3ReadSchema(pParse)
   ){
     return 0;
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ Table *sqlite3LocateTable(
 ** sqlite3FixSrcList() for details.
 */
 Table *sqlite3LocateTableItem(
-  Parse *pParse, 
+  Parse *pParse,
   u32 flags,
   SrcItem *p
 ){
@@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ const char *sqlite3PreferredTableName(const char *zName){
 }
 
 /*
-** Locate the in-memory structure that describes 
+** Locate the in-memory structure that describes
 ** a particular index given the name of that index
 ** and the name of the database that contains the index.
 ** Return NULL if not found.
@@ -755,7 +755,7 @@ void sqlite3ColumnSetColl(
 }
 
 /*
-** Return the collating squence name for a column
+** Return the collating sequence name for a column
 */
 const char *sqlite3ColumnColl(Column *pCol){
   const char *z;
@@ -802,10 +802,10 @@ void sqlite3DeleteColumnNames(sqlite3 *db, Table *pTable){
 **
 ** This routine just deletes the data structure.  It does not unlink
 ** the table data structure from the hash table.  But it does destroy
-** memory structures of the indices and foreign keys associated with 
+** memory structures of the indices and foreign keys associated with
 ** the table.
 **
-** The db parameter is optional.  It is needed if the Table object 
+** The db parameter is optional.  It is needed if the Table object
 ** contains lookaside memory.  (Table objects in the schema do not use
 ** lookaside memory, but some ephemeral Table objects do.)  Or the
 ** db parameter can be used with db->pnBytesFreed to measure the memory
@@ -817,7 +817,7 @@ static void SQLITE_NOINLINE deleteTable(sqlite3 *db, Table *pTable){
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
   /* Record the number of outstanding lookaside allocations in schema Tables
   ** prior to doing any free() operations. Since schema Tables do not use
-  ** lookaside, this number should not change. 
+  ** lookaside, this number should not change.
   **
   ** If malloc has already failed, it may be that it failed while allocating
   ** a Table object that was going to be marked ephemeral. So do not check
@@ -835,7 +835,7 @@ static void SQLITE_NOINLINE deleteTable(sqlite3 *db, Table *pTable){
     assert( pIndex->pSchema==pTable->pSchema
          || (IsVirtual(pTable) && pIndex->idxType!=SQLITE_IDXTYPE_APPDEF) );
     if( db->pnBytesFreed==0 && !IsVirtual(pTable) ){
-      char *zName = pIndex->zName; 
+      char *zName = pIndex->zName;
       TESTONLY ( Index *pOld = ) sqlite3HashInsert(
          &pIndex->pSchema->idxHash, zName, 0
       );
@@ -957,7 +957,7 @@ int sqlite3FindDbName(sqlite3 *db, const char *zName){
 /*
 ** The token *pName contains the name of a database (either "main" or
 ** "temp" or the name of an attached db). This routine returns the
-** index of the named database in db->aDb[], or -1 if the named db 
+** index of the named database in db->aDb[], or -1 if the named db
 ** does not exist.
 */
 int sqlite3FindDb(sqlite3 *db, Token *pName){
@@ -973,7 +973,7 @@ int sqlite3FindDb(sqlite3 *db, Token *pName){
 ** pName1 and pName2. If the table name was fully qualified, for example:
 **
 ** CREATE TABLE xxx.yyy (...);
-** 
+**
 ** Then pName1 is set to "xxx" and pName2 "yyy". On the other hand if
 ** the table name is not fully qualified, i.e.:
 **
@@ -1127,7 +1127,7 @@ i16 sqlite3StorageColumnToTable(Table *pTab, i16 iCol){
 ** The storage column number (0,1,2,....) is the index of the value
 ** as it appears in the record on disk.  Or, if the input column is
 ** the N-th virtual column (zero-based) then the storage number is
-** the number of non-virtual columns in the table plus N.  
+** the number of non-virtual columns in the table plus N. 
 **
 ** The true column number is the index (0,1,2,...) of the column in
 ** the CREATE TABLE statement.
@@ -1235,7 +1235,7 @@ void sqlite3StartTable(
     iDb = sqlite3TwoPartName(pParse, pName1, pName2, &pName);
     if( iDb<0 ) return;
     if( !OMIT_TEMPDB && isTemp && pName2->n>0 && iDb!=1 ){
-      /* If creating a temp table, the name may not be qualified. Unless 
+      /* If creating a temp table, the name may not be qualified. Unless
       ** the database name is "temp" anyway.  */
       sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "temporary table name must be unqualified");
       return;
@@ -1326,7 +1326,7 @@ void sqlite3StartTable(
   ** the schema table.  Note in particular that we must go ahead
   ** and allocate the record number for the table entry now.  Before any
   ** PRIMARY KEY or UNIQUE keywords are parsed.  Those keywords will cause
-  ** indices to be created and the table record must come before the 
+  ** indices to be created and the table record must come before the
   ** indices.  Hence, the record number for the table must be allocated
   ** now.
   */
@@ -1344,7 +1344,7 @@ void sqlite3StartTable(
     }
 #endif
 
-    /* If the file format and encoding in the database have not been set, 
+    /* If the file format and encoding in the database have not been set,
     ** set them now.
     */
     reg1 = pParse->regRowid = ++pParse->nMem;
@@ -1513,7 +1513,7 @@ void sqlite3AddColumn(Parse *pParse, Token sName, Token sType){
   }
   if( !IN_RENAME_OBJECT ) sqlite3DequoteToken(&sName);
 
-  /* Because keywords GENERATE ALWAYS can be converted into indentifiers
+  /* Because keywords GENERATE ALWAYS can be converted into identifiers
   ** by the parser, we can sometimes end up with a typename that ends
   ** with "generated always".  Check for this case and omit the surplus
   ** text. */
@@ -1573,7 +1573,7 @@ void sqlite3AddColumn(Parse *pParse, Token sName, Token sType){
   pCol->zCnName = z;
   pCol->hName = hName;
   sqlite3ColumnPropertiesFromName(p, pCol);
- 
+
   if( sType.n==0 ){
     /* If there is no type specified, columns have the default affinity
     ** 'BLOB' with a default size of 4 bytes. */
@@ -1632,11 +1632,11 @@ void sqlite3AddNotNull(Parse *pParse, int onError){
 ** Scan the column type name zType (length nType) and return the
 ** associated affinity type.
 **
-** This routine does a case-independent search of zType for the 
+** This routine does a case-independent search of zType for the
 ** substrings in the following table. If one of the substrings is
 ** found, the corresponding affinity is returned. If zType contains
-** more than one of the substrings, entries toward the top of 
-** the table take priority. For example, if zType is 'BLOBINT', 
+** more than one of the substrings, entries toward the top of
+** the table take priority. For example, if zType is 'BLOBINT',
 ** SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER is returned.
 **
 ** Substring     | Affinity
@@ -1734,7 +1734,7 @@ void sqlite3AddDefaultValue(
   Parse *pParse,           /* Parsing context */
   Expr *pExpr,             /* The parsed expression of the default value */
   const char *zStart,      /* Start of the default value text */
-  const char *zEnd         /* First character past end of defaut value text */
+  const char *zEnd         /* First character past end of default value text */
 ){
   Table *p;
   Column *pCol;
@@ -1775,7 +1775,7 @@ void sqlite3AddDefaultValue(
 
 /*
 ** Backwards Compatibility Hack:
-** 
+**
 ** Historical versions of SQLite accepted strings as column names in
 ** indexes and PRIMARY KEY constraints and in UNIQUE constraints.  Example:
 **
@@ -1809,11 +1809,11 @@ static void makeColumnPartOfPrimaryKey(Parse *pParse, Column *pCol){
     sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
       "generated columns cannot be part of the PRIMARY KEY");
   }
-#endif          
+#endif         
 }
 
 /*
-** Designate the PRIMARY KEY for the table.  pList is a list of names 
+** Designate the PRIMARY KEY for the table.  pList is a list of names
 ** of columns that form the primary key.  If pList is NULL, then the
 ** most recently added column of the table is the primary key.
 **
@@ -1843,7 +1843,7 @@ void sqlite3AddPrimaryKey(
   int nTerm;
   if( pTab==0 ) goto primary_key_exit;
   if( pTab->tabFlags & TF_HasPrimaryKey ){
-    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
       "table \"%s\" has more than one primary key", pTab->zName);
     goto primary_key_exit;
   }
@@ -1928,7 +1928,7 @@ void sqlite3AddCheckConstraint(
       while( sqlite3Isspace(zEnd[-1]) ){ zEnd--; }
       t.z = zStart;
       t.n = (int)(zEnd - t.z);
-      sqlite3ExprListSetName(pParse, pTab->pCheck, &t, 1);    
+      sqlite3ExprListSetName(pParse, pTab->pCheck, &t, 1);   
     }
   }else
 #endif
@@ -1956,7 +1956,7 @@ void sqlite3AddCollateType(Parse *pParse, Token *pToken){
   if( sqlite3LocateCollSeq(pParse, zColl) ){
     Index *pIdx;
     sqlite3ColumnSetColl(db, &p->aCol[i], zColl);
-  
+ 
     /* If the column is declared as "<name> PRIMARY KEY COLLATE <type>",
     ** then an index may have been created on this column before the
     ** collation type was added. Correct this if it is the case.
@@ -2054,7 +2054,7 @@ void sqlite3ChangeCookie(Parse *pParse, int iDb){
   sqlite3 *db = pParse->db;
   Vdbe *v = pParse->pVdbe;
   assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, iDb, 0) );
-  sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SetCookie, iDb, BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION, 
+  sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SetCookie, iDb, BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION,
                    (int)(1+(unsigned)db->aDb[iDb].pSchema->schema_cookie));
 }
 
@@ -2075,13 +2075,13 @@ static int identLength(const char *z){
 }
 
 /*
-** The first parameter is a pointer to an output buffer. The second 
+** The first parameter is a pointer to an output buffer. The second
 ** parameter is a pointer to an integer that contains the offset at
 ** which to write into the output buffer. This function copies the
 ** nul-terminated string pointed to by the third parameter, zSignedIdent,
 ** to the specified offset in the buffer and updates *pIdx to refer
 ** to the first byte after the last byte written before returning.
-** 
+**
 ** If the string zSignedIdent consists entirely of alpha-numeric
 ** characters, does not begin with a digit and is not an SQL keyword,
 ** then it is copied to the output buffer exactly as it is. Otherwise,
@@ -2125,7 +2125,7 @@ static char *createTableStmt(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){
     n += identLength(pCol->zCnName) + 5;
   }
   n += identLength(p->zName);
-  if( n<50 ){ 
+  if( n<50 ){
     zSep = "";
     zSep2 = ",";
     zEnd = ")";
@@ -2168,7 +2168,7 @@ static char *createTableStmt(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){
     testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER );
     testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL );
     testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_FLEXNUM );
-    
+   
     zType = azType[pCol->affinity - SQLITE_AFF_BLOB];
     len = sqlite3Strlen30(zType);
     assert( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_BLOB
@@ -2277,7 +2277,7 @@ static int isDupColumn(Index *pIdx, int nKey, Index *pPk, int iCol){
   assert( j!=XN_ROWID && j!=XN_EXPR );
   for(i=0; i<nKey; i++){
     assert( pIdx->aiColumn[i]>=0 || j>=0 );
-    if( pIdx->aiColumn[i]==j 
+    if( pIdx->aiColumn[i]==j
      && sqlite3StrICmp(pIdx->azColl[i], pPk->azColl[iCol])==0
     ){
       return 1;
@@ -2329,7 +2329,7 @@ static void recomputeColumnsNotIndexed(Index *pIdx){
 ** Changes include:
 **
 **     (1)  Set all columns of the PRIMARY KEY schema object to be NOT NULL.
-**     (2)  Convert P3 parameter of the OP_CreateBtree from BTREE_INTKEY 
+**     (2)  Convert P3 parameter of the OP_CreateBtree from BTREE_INTKEY
 **          into BTREE_BLOBKEY.
 **     (3)  Bypass the creation of the sqlite_schema table entry
 **          for the PRIMARY KEY as the primary key index is now
@@ -2377,13 +2377,13 @@ static void convertToWithoutRowidTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
   }
 
   /* Locate the PRIMARY KEY index.  Or, if this table was originally
-  ** an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY table, create a new PRIMARY KEY index. 
+  ** an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY table, create a new PRIMARY KEY index.
   */
   if( pTab->iPKey>=0 ){
     ExprList *pList;
     Token ipkToken;
     sqlite3TokenInit(&ipkToken, pTab->aCol[pTab->iPKey].zCnName);
-    pList = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0, 
+    pList = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0,
                   sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &ipkToken, 0));
     if( pList==0 ){
       pTab->tabFlags &= ~TF_WithoutRowid;
@@ -2622,7 +2622,7 @@ static void markExprListImmutable(ExprList *pList){
 ** the sqlite_schema table.  We do not want to create it again.
 **
 ** If the pSelect argument is not NULL, it means that this routine
-** was called to create a table generated from a 
+** was called to create a table generated from a
 ** "CREATE TABLE ... AS SELECT ..." statement.  The column names of
 ** the new table will match the result set of the SELECT.
 */
@@ -2701,7 +2701,7 @@ void sqlite3EndTable(
         pCol->notNull = OE_Abort;
         p->tabFlags |= TF_HasNotNull;
       }
-    }    
+    }   
   }
 
   assert( (p->tabFlags & TF_HasPrimaryKey)==0
@@ -2758,7 +2758,7 @@ void sqlite3EndTable(
           ** tree that have been allocated from lookaside memory, which is
           ** illegal in a schema and will lead to errors or heap corruption
           ** when the database connection closes. */
-          sqlite3ColumnSetExpr(pParse, p, &p->aCol[ii], 
+          sqlite3ColumnSetExpr(pParse, p, &p->aCol[ii],
                sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_NULL, 0, 0));
         }
       }else{
@@ -2796,7 +2796,7 @@ void sqlite3EndTable(
 
     sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Close, 0);
 
-    /* 
+    /*
     ** Initialize zType for the new view or table.
     */
     if( IsOrdinaryTable(p) ){
@@ -2880,12 +2880,12 @@ void sqlite3EndTable(
       Token *pEnd2 = tabOpts ? &pParse->sLastToken : pEnd;
       n = (int)(pEnd2->z - pParse->sNameToken.z);
       if( pEnd2->z[0]!=';' ) n += pEnd2->n;
-      zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db, 
+      zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
           "CREATE %s %.*s", zType2, n, pParse->sNameToken.z
       );
     }
 
-    /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the 
+    /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the
     ** schema table.  We just need to update that slot with all
     ** the information we've collected.
     */
@@ -3100,7 +3100,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int viewGetColumnNames(Parse *pParse, Table *pTable){
   ** Actually, the error above is now caught prior to reaching this point.
   ** But the following test is still important as it does come up
   ** in the following:
-  ** 
+  **
   **     CREATE TABLE main.ex1(a);
   **     CREATE TEMP VIEW ex1 AS SELECT a FROM ex1;
   **     SELECT * FROM temp.ex1;
@@ -3148,7 +3148,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int viewGetColumnNames(Parse *pParse, Table *pTable){
       ** normally holds CHECK constraints on an ordinary table, but for
       ** a VIEW it holds the list of column names.
       */
-      sqlite3ColumnsFromExprList(pParse, pTable->pCheck, 
+      sqlite3ColumnsFromExprList(pParse, pTable->pCheck,
                                  &pTable->nCol, &pTable->aCol);
       if( pParse->nErr==0
        && pTable->nCol==pSel->pEList->nExpr
@@ -3181,7 +3181,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int viewGetColumnNames(Parse *pParse, Table *pTable){
     sqlite3DeleteColumnNames(db, pTable);
   }
 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW */
-  return nErr;  
+  return nErr; 
 }
 int sqlite3ViewGetColumnNames(Parse *pParse, Table *pTable){
   assert( pTable!=0 );
@@ -3220,7 +3220,7 @@ static void sqliteViewResetAll(sqlite3 *db, int idx){
 ** on tables and/or indices that are the process of being deleted.
 ** If you are unlucky, one of those deleted indices or tables might
 ** have the same rootpage number as the real table or index that is
-** being moved.  So we cannot stop searching after the first match 
+** being moved.  So we cannot stop searching after the first match
 ** because the first match might be for one of the deleted indices
 ** or tables and not the table/index that is actually being moved.
 ** We must continue looping until all tables and indices with
@@ -3257,7 +3257,7 @@ void sqlite3RootPageMoved(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, Pgno iFrom, Pgno iTo){
 ** Also write code to modify the sqlite_schema table and internal schema
 ** if a root-page of another table is moved by the btree-layer whilst
 ** erasing iTable (this can happen with an auto-vacuum database).
-*/ 
+*/
 static void destroyRootPage(Parse *pParse, int iTable, int iDb){
   Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
   int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
@@ -3274,7 +3274,7 @@ static void destroyRootPage(Parse *pParse, int iTable, int iDb){
   ** is in register NNN.  See grammar rules associated with the TK_REGISTER
   ** token for additional information.
   */
-  sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, 
+  sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
      "UPDATE %Q." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE
      " SET rootpage=%d WHERE #%d AND rootpage=#%d",
      pParse->db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName, iTable, r1, r1);
@@ -3291,7 +3291,7 @@ static void destroyRootPage(Parse *pParse, int iTable, int iDb){
 static void destroyTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
   /* If the database may be auto-vacuum capable (if SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
   ** is not defined), then it is important to call OP_Destroy on the
-  ** table and index root-pages in order, starting with the numerically 
+  ** table and index root-pages in order, starting with the numerically
   ** largest root-page number. This guarantees that none of the root-pages
   ** to be destroyed is relocated by an earlier OP_Destroy. i.e. if the
   ** following were coded:
@@ -3301,7 +3301,7 @@ static void destroyTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
   ** OP_Destroy 5 0
   **
   ** and root page 5 happened to be the largest root-page number in the
-  ** database, then root page 5 would be moved to page 4 by the 
+  ** database, then root page 5 would be moved to page 4 by the
   ** "OP_Destroy 4 0" opcode. The subsequent "OP_Destroy 5 0" would hit
   ** a free-list page.
   */
@@ -3382,7 +3382,7 @@ void sqlite3CodeDropTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, int iDb, int isView){
   */
   pTrigger = sqlite3TriggerList(pParse, pTab);
   while( pTrigger ){
-    assert( pTrigger->pSchema==pTab->pSchema || 
+    assert( pTrigger->pSchema==pTab->pSchema ||
         pTrigger->pSchema==db->aDb[1].pSchema );
     sqlite3DropTriggerPtr(pParse, pTrigger);
     pTrigger = pTrigger->pNext;
@@ -3409,7 +3409,7 @@ void sqlite3CodeDropTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, int iDb, int isView){
   ** created in the temp database that refers to a table in another
   ** database.
   */
-  sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, 
+  sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
       "DELETE FROM %Q." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE
       " WHERE tbl_name=%Q and type!='trigger'",
       pDb->zDbSName, pTab->zName);
@@ -3660,8 +3660,8 @@ void sqlite3CreateForeignKey(
         }
       }
       if( j>=p->nCol ){
-        sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
-          "unknown column \"%s\" in foreign key definition", 
+        sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+          "unknown column \"%s\" in foreign key definition",
           pFromCol->a[i].zEName);
         goto fk_end;
       }
@@ -3687,7 +3687,7 @@ void sqlite3CreateForeignKey(
   pFKey->aAction[1] = (u8)((flags >> 8 ) & 0xff);    /* ON UPDATE action */
 
   assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, 0, p->pSchema) );
-  pNextTo = (FKey *)sqlite3HashInsert(&p->pSchema->fkeyHash, 
+  pNextTo = (FKey *)sqlite3HashInsert(&p->pSchema->fkeyHash,
       pFKey->zTo, (void *)pFKey
   );
   if( pNextTo==pFKey ){
@@ -3796,7 +3796,7 @@ static void sqlite3RefillIndex(Parse *pParse, Index *pIndex, int memRootPage){
   sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Next, iTab, addr1+1); VdbeCoverage(v);
   sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr1);
   if( memRootPage<0 ) sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Clear, tnum, iDb);
-  sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenWrite, iIdx, (int)tnum, iDb, 
+  sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenWrite, iIdx, (int)tnum, iDb,
                     (char *)pKey, P4_KEYINFO);
   sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, OPFLAG_BULKCSR|((memRootPage>=0)?OPFLAG_P2ISREG:0));
 
@@ -3815,7 +3815,7 @@ static void sqlite3RefillIndex(Parse *pParse, Index *pIndex, int memRootPage){
     ** user function that throws an exception when it is evaluated. But the
     ** overhead of adding a statement journal to a CREATE INDEX statement is
     ** very small (since most of the pages written do not contain content that
-    ** needs to be restored if the statement aborts), so we call 
+    ** needs to be restored if the statement aborts), so we call
     ** sqlite3MayAbort() for all CREATE INDEX statements.  */
     sqlite3MayAbort(pParse);
     addr2 = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
@@ -3888,7 +3888,7 @@ int sqlite3HasExplicitNulls(Parse *pParse, ExprList *pList){
     for(i=0; i<pList->nExpr; i++){
       if( pList->a[i].fg.bNulls ){
         u8 sf = pList->a[i].fg.sortFlags;
-        sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "unsupported use of NULLS %s", 
+        sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "unsupported use of NULLS %s",
             (sf==0 || sf==3) ? "FIRST" : "LAST"
         );
         return 1;
@@ -3899,8 +3899,8 @@ int sqlite3HasExplicitNulls(Parse *pParse, ExprList *pList){
 }
 
 /*
-** Create a new index for an SQL table.  pName1.pName2 is the name of the index 
-** and pTblList is the name of the table that is to be indexed.  Both will 
+** Create a new index for an SQL table.  pName1.pName2 is the name of the index
+** and pTblList is the name of the table that is to be indexed.  Both will
 ** be NULL for a primary key or an index that is created to satisfy a
 ** UNIQUE constraint.  If pTable and pIndex are NULL, use pParse->pNewTable
 ** as the table to be indexed.  pParse->pNewTable is a table that is
@@ -3908,7 +3908,7 @@ int sqlite3HasExplicitNulls(Parse *pParse, ExprList *pList){
 **
 ** pList is a list of columns to be indexed.  pList will be NULL if this
 ** is a primary key or unique-constraint on the most recent column added
-** to the table currently under construction.  
+** to the table currently under construction. 
 */
 void sqlite3CreateIndex(
   Parse *pParse,     /* All information about this parse */
@@ -3960,7 +3960,7 @@ void sqlite3CreateIndex(
   */
   if( pTblName!=0 ){
 
-    /* Use the two-part index name to determine the database 
+    /* Use the two-part index name to determine the database
     ** to search for the table. 'Fix' the table name to this db
     ** before looking up the table.
     */
@@ -3972,7 +3972,7 @@ void sqlite3CreateIndex(
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TEMPDB
     /* If the index name was unqualified, check if the table
     ** is a temp table. If so, set the database to 1. Do not do this
-    ** if initialising a database schema.
+    ** if initializing a database schema.
     */
     if( !db->init.busy ){
       pTab = sqlite3SrcListLookup(pParse, pTblName);
@@ -3992,7 +3992,7 @@ void sqlite3CreateIndex(
     assert( db->mallocFailed==0 || pTab==0 );
     if( pTab==0 ) goto exit_create_index;
     if( iDb==1 && db->aDb[iDb].pSchema!=pTab->pSchema ){
-      sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+      sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
            "cannot create a TEMP index on non-TEMP table \"%s\"",
            pTab->zName);
       goto exit_create_index;
@@ -4008,7 +4008,7 @@ void sqlite3CreateIndex(
   pDb = &db->aDb[iDb];
 
   assert( pTab!=0 );
-  if( sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0 
+  if( sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0
        && db->init.busy==0
        && pTblName!=0
 #if SQLITE_USER_AUTHENTICATION
@@ -4033,7 +4033,7 @@ void sqlite3CreateIndex(
 
   /*
   ** Find the name of the index.  Make sure there is not already another
-  ** index or table with the same name.  
+  ** index or table with the same name. 
   **
   ** Exception:  If we are reading the names of permanent indices from the
   ** sqlite_schema table (because some other process changed the schema) and
@@ -4133,8 +4133,8 @@ void sqlite3CreateIndex(
     }
   }
 
-  /* 
-  ** Allocate the index structure. 
+  /*
+  ** Allocate the index structure.
   */
   nName = sqlite3Strlen30(zName);
   nExtraCol = pPk ? pPk->nKeyCol : 1;
@@ -4255,7 +4255,7 @@ void sqlite3CreateIndex(
       int x = pPk->aiColumn[j];
       assert( x>=0 );
       if( isDupColumn(pIndex, pIndex->nKeyCol, pPk, j) ){
-        pIndex->nColumn--; 
+        pIndex->nColumn--;
       }else{
         testcase( hasColumn(pIndex->aiColumn,pIndex->nKeyCol,x) );
         pIndex->aiColumn[i] = x;
@@ -4274,7 +4274,7 @@ void sqlite3CreateIndex(
 
   /* If this index contains every column of its table, then mark
   ** it as a covering index */
-  assert( HasRowid(pTab) 
+  assert( HasRowid(pTab)
       || pTab->iPKey<0 || sqlite3TableColumnToIndex(pIndex, pTab->iPKey)>=0 );
   recomputeColumnsNotIndexed(pIndex);
   if( pTblName!=0 && pIndex->nColumn>=pTab->nCol ){
@@ -4330,13 +4330,13 @@ void sqlite3CreateIndex(
         if( pIdx->onError!=pIndex->onError ){
           /* This constraint creates the same index as a previous
           ** constraint specified somewhere in the CREATE TABLE statement.
-          ** However the ON CONFLICT clauses are different. If both this 
+          ** However the ON CONFLICT clauses are different. If both this
           ** constraint and the previous equivalent constraint have explicit
           ** ON CONFLICT clauses this is an error. Otherwise, use the
           ** explicitly specified behavior for the index.
           */
           if( !(pIdx->onError==OE_Default || pIndex->onError==OE_Default) ){
-            sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+            sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
                 "conflicting ON CONFLICT clauses specified", 0);
           }
           if( pIdx->onError==OE_Default ){
@@ -4357,7 +4357,7 @@ void sqlite3CreateIndex(
   if( !IN_RENAME_OBJECT ){
 
     /* Link the new Index structure to its table and to the other
-    ** in-memory database structures. 
+    ** in-memory database structures.
     */
     assert( pParse->nErr==0 );
     if( db->init.busy ){
@@ -4372,7 +4372,7 @@ void sqlite3CreateIndex(
           goto exit_create_index;
         }
       }
-      p = sqlite3HashInsert(&pIndex->pSchema->idxHash, 
+      p = sqlite3HashInsert(&pIndex->pSchema->idxHash,
           pIndex->zName, pIndex);
       if( p ){
         assert( p==pIndex );  /* Malloc must have failed */
@@ -4406,9 +4406,9 @@ void sqlite3CreateIndex(
       sqlite3BeginWriteOperation(pParse, 1, iDb);
 
       /* Create the rootpage for the index using CreateIndex. But before
-      ** doing so, code a Noop instruction and store its address in 
-      ** Index.tnum. This is required in case this index is actually a 
-      ** PRIMARY KEY and the table is actually a WITHOUT ROWID table. In 
+      ** doing so, code a Noop instruction and store its address in
+      ** Index.tnum. This is required in case this index is actually a
+      ** PRIMARY KEY and the table is actually a WITHOUT ROWID table. In
       ** that case the convertToWithoutRowidTable() routine will replace
       ** the Noop with a Goto to jump over the VDBE code generated below. */
       pIndex->tnum = (Pgno)sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Noop);
@@ -4432,7 +4432,7 @@ void sqlite3CreateIndex(
 
       /* Add an entry in sqlite_schema for this index
       */
-      sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, 
+      sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
          "INSERT INTO %Q." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " VALUES('index',%Q,%Q,#%d,%Q);",
          db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName,
          pIndex->zName,
@@ -4534,7 +4534,7 @@ void sqlite3DefaultRowEst(Index *pIdx){
   /* Indexes with default row estimates should not have stat1 data */
   assert( !pIdx->hasStat1 );
 
-  /* Set the first entry (number of rows in the index) to the estimated 
+  /* Set the first entry (number of rows in the index) to the estimated
   ** number of rows in the table, or half the number of rows in the table
   ** for a partial index.
   **
@@ -4830,7 +4830,7 @@ SrcList *sqlite3SrcListEnlarge(
 ** database name prefix.  Like this:  "database.table".  The pDatabase
 ** points to the table name and the pTable points to the database name.
 ** The SrcList.a[].zName field is filled with the table name which might
-** come from pTable (if pDatabase is NULL) or from pDatabase.  
+** come from pTable (if pDatabase is NULL) or from pDatabase. 
 ** SrcList.a[].zDatabase is filled with the database name from pTable,
 ** or with NULL if no database is specified.
 **
@@ -4964,7 +4964,7 @@ SrcList *sqlite3SrcListAppendFromTerm(
   SrcItem *pItem;
   sqlite3 *db = pParse->db;
   if( !p && pOnUsing!=0 && (pOnUsing->pOn || pOnUsing->pUsing) ){
-    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "a JOIN clause is required before %s", 
+    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "a JOIN clause is required before %s",
       (pOnUsing->pOn ? "ON" : "USING")
     );
     goto append_from_error;
@@ -5011,7 +5011,7 @@ append_from_error:
 }
 
 /*
-** Add an INDEXED BY or NOT INDEXED clause to the most recently added 
+** Add an INDEXED BY or NOT INDEXED clause to the most recently added
 ** element of the source-list passed as the second argument.
 */
 void sqlite3SrcListIndexedBy(Parse *pParse, SrcList *p, Token *pIndexedBy){
@@ -5024,7 +5024,7 @@ void sqlite3SrcListIndexedBy(Parse *pParse, SrcList *p, Token *pIndexedBy){
     assert( pItem->fg.isIndexedBy==0 );
     assert( pItem->fg.isTabFunc==0 );
     if( pIndexedBy->n==1 && !pIndexedBy->z ){
-      /* A "NOT INDEXED" clause was supplied. See parse.y 
+      /* A "NOT INDEXED" clause was supplied. See parse.y
       ** construct "indexed_opt" for details. */
       pItem->fg.notIndexed = 1;
     }else{
@@ -5039,7 +5039,7 @@ void sqlite3SrcListIndexedBy(Parse *pParse, SrcList *p, Token *pIndexedBy){
 ** Append the contents of SrcList p2 to SrcList p1 and return the resulting
 ** SrcList. Or, if an error occurs, return NULL. In all cases, p1 and p2
 ** are deleted by this function.
-*/ 
+*/
 SrcList *sqlite3SrcListAppendList(Parse *pParse, SrcList *p1, SrcList *p2){
   assert( p1 && p1->nSrc==1 );
   if( p2 ){
@@ -5165,7 +5165,7 @@ void sqlite3EndTransaction(Parse *pParse, int eType){
   assert( pParse->db!=0 );
   assert( eType==TK_COMMIT || eType==TK_END || eType==TK_ROLLBACK );
   isRollback = eType==TK_ROLLBACK;
-  if( sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_TRANSACTION, 
+  if( sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_TRANSACTION,
        isRollback ? "ROLLBACK" : "COMMIT", 0, 0) ){
     return;
   }
@@ -5177,7 +5177,7 @@ void sqlite3EndTransaction(Parse *pParse, int eType){
 
 /*
 ** This function is called by the parser when it parses a command to create,
-** release or rollback an SQL savepoint. 
+** release or rollback an SQL savepoint.
 */
 void sqlite3Savepoint(Parse *pParse, int op, Token *pName){
   char *zName = sqlite3NameFromToken(pParse->db, pName);
@@ -5204,7 +5204,7 @@ int sqlite3OpenTempDatabase(Parse *pParse){
   if( db->aDb[1].pBt==0 && !pParse->explain ){
     int rc;
     Btree *pBt;
-    static const int flags = 
+    static const int flags =
           SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE |
           SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE |
           SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE |
@@ -5252,7 +5252,7 @@ void sqlite3CodeVerifySchema(Parse *pParse, int iDb){
 
 
 /*
-** If argument zDb is NULL, then call sqlite3CodeVerifySchema() for each 
+** If argument zDb is NULL, then call sqlite3CodeVerifySchema() for each
 ** attached database. Otherwise, invoke it for the database named zDb only.
 */
 void sqlite3CodeVerifyNamedSchema(Parse *pParse, const char *zDb){
@@ -5298,9 +5298,9 @@ void sqlite3MultiWrite(Parse *pParse){
   pToplevel->isMultiWrite = 1;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** The code generator calls this routine if is discovers that it is
-** possible to abort a statement prior to completion.  In order to 
+** possible to abort a statement prior to completion.  In order to
 ** perform this abort without corrupting the database, we need to make
 ** sure that the statement is protected by a statement transaction.
 **
@@ -5309,7 +5309,7 @@ void sqlite3MultiWrite(Parse *pParse){
 ** such that the abort must occur after the multiwrite.  This makes
 ** some statements involving the REPLACE conflict resolution algorithm
 ** go a little faster.  But taking advantage of this time dependency
-** makes it more difficult to prove that the code is correct (in 
+** makes it more difficult to prove that the code is correct (in
 ** particular, it prevents us from writing an effective
 ** implementation of sqlite3AssertMayAbort()) and so we have chosen
 ** to take the safe route and skip the optimization.
@@ -5356,7 +5356,7 @@ void sqlite3UniqueConstraint(
   StrAccum errMsg;
   Table *pTab = pIdx->pTable;
 
-  sqlite3StrAccumInit(&errMsg, pParse->db, 0, 0, 
+  sqlite3StrAccumInit(&errMsg, pParse->db, 0, 0,
                       pParse->db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH]);
   if( pIdx->aColExpr ){
     sqlite3_str_appendf(&errMsg, "index '%q'", pIdx->zName);
@@ -5372,8 +5372,8 @@ void sqlite3UniqueConstraint(
     }
   }
   zErr = sqlite3StrAccumFinish(&errMsg);
-  sqlite3HaltConstraint(pParse, 
-    IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ? SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_PRIMARYKEY 
+  sqlite3HaltConstraint(pParse,
+    IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ? SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_PRIMARYKEY
                             : SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_UNIQUE,
     onError, zErr, P4_DYNAMIC, P5_ConstraintUnique);
 }
@@ -5385,7 +5385,7 @@ void sqlite3UniqueConstraint(
 void sqlite3RowidConstraint(
   Parse *pParse,    /* Parsing context */
   int onError,      /* Conflict resolution algorithm */
-  Table *pTab       /* The table with the non-unique rowid */ 
+  Table *pTab       /* The table with the non-unique rowid */
 ){
   char *zMsg;
   int rc;
@@ -5627,9 +5627,9 @@ void sqlite3CteDelete(sqlite3 *db, Cte *pCte){
   sqlite3DbFree(db, pCte);
 }
 
-/* 
-** This routine is invoked once per CTE by the parser while parsing a 
-** WITH clause.  The CTE described by teh third argument is added to
+/*
+** This routine is invoked once per CTE by the parser while parsing a
+** WITH clause.  The CTE described by the third argument is added to
 ** the WITH clause of the second argument.  If the second argument is
 ** NULL, then a new WITH argument is created.
 */
diff --git a/src/delete.c b/src/delete.c
index 0c9e764e2..43bc2fedb 100644
--- a/src/delete.c
+++ b/src/delete.c
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@
 ** (as in the FROM clause of a SELECT statement) in this case it contains
 ** the name of a single table, as one might find in an INSERT, DELETE,
 ** or UPDATE statement.  Look up that table in the symbol table and
-** return a pointer.  Set an error message and return NULL if the table 
+** return a pointer.  Set an error message and return NULL if the table
 ** name is not found or if any other error occurs.
 **
 ** The following fields are initialized appropriate in pSrc:
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ Table *sqlite3SrcListLookup(Parse *pParse, SrcList *pSrc){
   return pTab;
 }
 
-/* Generate byte-code that will report the number of rows modified 
+/* Generate byte-code that will report the number of rows modified
 ** by a DELETE, INSERT, or UPDATE statement.
 */
 void sqlite3CodeChangeCount(Vdbe *v, int regCounter, const char *zColName){
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ void sqlite3CodeChangeCount(Vdbe *v, int regCounter, const char *zColName){
 **      the table is not SQLITE_VTAB_INNOCUOUS.
 **
 **   3) It is a system table (i.e. sqlite_schema), this call is not
-**      part of a nested parse and writable_schema pragma has not 
+**      part of a nested parse and writable_schema pragma has not
 **      been specified
 **
 **   4) The table is a shadow table, the database connection is in
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ static int vtabIsReadOnly(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
   **      virtual tables if PRAGMA trusted_schema=ON.
   */
   if( pParse->pToplevel!=0
-   && pTab->u.vtab.p->eVtabRisk > 
+   && pTab->u.vtab.p->eVtabRisk >
            ((pParse->db->flags & SQLITE_TrustedSchema)!=0)
   ){
     sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "unsafe use of virtual table \"%s\"",
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ static int tabIsReadOnly(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
 }
 
 /*
-** Check to make sure the given table is writable. 
+** Check to make sure the given table is writable.
 **
 ** If pTab is not writable  ->  generate an error message and return 1.
 ** If pTab is writable but other errors have occurred -> return 1.
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ int sqlite3IsReadOnly(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, Trigger *pTrigger){
     return 1;
   }
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW
-  if( IsView(pTab) 
+  if( IsView(pTab)
    && (pTrigger==0 || (pTrigger->bReturning && pTrigger->pNext==0))
   ){
     sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,"cannot modify %s because it is a view",pTab->zName);
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ void sqlite3MaterializeView(
     assert( pFrom->a[0].fg.isUsing==0 );
     assert( pFrom->a[0].u3.pOn==0 );
   }
-  pSel = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, 0, pFrom, pWhere, 0, 0, pOrderBy, 
+  pSel = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, 0, pFrom, pWhere, 0, 0, pOrderBy,
                           SF_IncludeHidden, pLimit);
   sqlite3SelectDestInit(&dest, SRT_EphemTab, iCur);
   sqlite3Select(pParse, pSel, &dest);
@@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Expr *sqlite3LimitWhere(
   sqlite3 *db = pParse->db;
   Expr *pLhs = NULL;           /* LHS of IN(SELECT...) operator */
   Expr *pInClause = NULL;      /* WHERE rowid IN ( select ) */
-  ExprList *pEList = NULL;     /* Expression list contaning only pSelectRowid */
+  ExprList *pEList = NULL;     /* Expression list containing only pSelectRowid*/
   SrcList *pSelectSrc = NULL;  /* SELECT rowid FROM x ... (dup of pSrc) */
   Select *pSelect = NULL;      /* Complete SELECT tree */
   Table *pTab;
@@ -209,11 +209,11 @@ Expr *sqlite3LimitWhere(
     return pWhere;
   }
 
-  /* Generate a select expression tree to enforce the limit/offset 
+  /* Generate a select expression tree to enforce the limit/offset
   ** term for the DELETE or UPDATE statement.  For example:
   **   DELETE FROM table_a WHERE col1=1 ORDER BY col2 LIMIT 1 OFFSET 1
   ** becomes:
-  **   DELETE FROM table_a WHERE rowid IN ( 
+  **   DELETE FROM table_a WHERE rowid IN (
   **     SELECT rowid FROM table_a WHERE col1=1 ORDER BY col2 LIMIT 1 OFFSET 1
   **   );
   */
@@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Expr *sqlite3LimitWhere(
   }
 
   /* generate the SELECT expression tree. */
-  pSelect = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, pEList, pSelectSrc, pWhere, 0 ,0, 
+  pSelect = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, pEList, pSelectSrc, pWhere, 0 ,0,
       pOrderBy,0,pLimit
   );
 
@@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
   int addrEphOpen = 0;   /* Instruction to open the Ephemeral table */
   int bComplex;          /* True if there are triggers or FKs or
                          ** subqueries in the WHERE clause */
- 
+
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
   int isView;                  /* True if attempting to delete from a view */
   Trigger *pTrigger;           /* List of table triggers, if required */
@@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
   }
   iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema);
   assert( iDb<db->nDb );
-  rcauth = sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_DELETE, pTab->zName, 0, 
+  rcauth = sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_DELETE, pTab->zName, 0,
                             db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName);
   assert( rcauth==SQLITE_OK || rcauth==SQLITE_DENY || rcauth==SQLITE_IGNORE );
   if( rcauth==SQLITE_DENY ){
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
   */
 #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER)
   if( isView ){
-    sqlite3MaterializeView(pParse, pTab, 
+    sqlite3MaterializeView(pParse, pTab,
         pWhere, pOrderBy, pLimit, iTabCur
     );
     iDataCur = iIdxCur = iTabCur;
@@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRUNCATE_OPTIMIZATION
   /* Special case: A DELETE without a WHERE clause deletes everything.
   ** It is easier just to erase the whole table. Prior to version 3.6.5,
-  ** this optimization caused the row change count (the value returned by 
+  ** this optimization caused the row change count (the value returned by
   ** API function sqlite3_count_changes) to be set incorrectly.
   **
   ** The "rcauth==SQLITE_OK" terms is the
@@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
       addrEphOpen = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, iEphCur, nPk);
       sqlite3VdbeSetP4KeyInfo(pParse, pPk);
     }
-  
+ 
     /* Construct a query to find the rowid or primary key for every row
     ** to be deleted, based on the WHERE clause. Set variable eOnePass
     ** to indicate the strategy used to implement this delete:
@@ -530,12 +530,12 @@ void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
     if( sqlite3WhereUsesDeferredSeek(pWInfo) ){
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_FinishSeek, iTabCur);
     }
-  
+ 
     /* Keep track of the number of rows to be deleted */
     if( memCnt ){
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_AddImm, memCnt, 1);
     }
-  
+ 
     /* Extract the rowid or primary key for the current row */
     if( pPk ){
       for(i=0; i<nPk; i++){
@@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
       iKey = ++pParse->nMem;
       sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnOfTable(v, pTab, iTabCur, -1, iKey);
     }
-  
+ 
     if( eOnePass!=ONEPASS_OFF ){
       /* For ONEPASS, no need to store the rowid/primary-key. There is only
       ** one, so just keep it in its register(s) and fall through to the
@@ -580,10 +580,10 @@ void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
       }
       sqlite3WhereEnd(pWInfo);
     }
-  
-    /* Unless this is a view, open cursors for the table we are 
+ 
+    /* Unless this is a view, open cursors for the table we are
     ** deleting from and all its indices. If this is a view, then the
-    ** only effect this statement has is to fire the INSTEAD OF 
+    ** only effect this statement has is to fire the INSTEAD OF
     ** triggers.
     */
     if( !isView ){
@@ -600,7 +600,7 @@ void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
         sqlite3VdbeJumpHereOrPopInst(v, iAddrOnce);
       }
     }
-  
+ 
     /* Set up a loop over the rowids/primary-keys that were found in the
     ** where-clause loop above.
     */
@@ -623,8 +623,8 @@ void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
       addrLoop = sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_RowSetRead, iRowSet, 0, iKey);
       VdbeCoverage(v);
       assert( nKey==1 );
-    }  
-  
+    } 
+ 
     /* Delete the row */
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
     if( IsVirtual(pTab) ){
@@ -647,7 +647,7 @@ void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
       sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(pParse, pTab, pTrigger, iDataCur, iIdxCur,
           iKey, nKey, count, OE_Default, eOnePass, aiCurOnePass[1]);
     }
-  
+ 
     /* End of the loop over all rowids/primary-keys. */
     if( eOnePass!=ONEPASS_OFF ){
       sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrBypass);
@@ -658,7 +658,7 @@ void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
     }else{
       sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, addrLoop);
       sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrLoop);
-    }     
+    }    
   } /* End non-truncate path */
 
   /* Update the sqlite_sequence table by storing the content of the
@@ -669,7 +669,7 @@ void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
     sqlite3AutoincrementEnd(pParse);
   }
 
-  /* Return the number of rows that were deleted. If this routine is 
+  /* Return the number of rows that were deleted. If this routine is
   ** generating code because of a call to sqlite3NestedParse(), do not
   ** invoke the callback function.
   */
@@ -681,7 +681,7 @@ delete_from_cleanup:
   sqlite3AuthContextPop(&sContext);
   sqlite3SrcListDelete(db, pTabList);
   sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pWhere);
-#if defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_UPDATE_DELETE_LIMIT) 
+#if defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_UPDATE_DELETE_LIMIT)
   sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pOrderBy);
   sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pLimit);
 #endif
@@ -726,7 +726,7 @@ delete_from_cleanup:
 **   and nPk before reading from it.
 **
 **   If eMode is ONEPASS_MULTI, then this call is being made as part
-**   of a ONEPASS delete that affects multiple rows. In this case, if 
+**   of a ONEPASS delete that affects multiple rows. In this case, if
 **   iIdxNoSeek is a valid cursor number (>=0) and is not the same as
 **   iDataCur, then its position should be preserved following the delete
 **   operation. Or, if iIdxNoSeek is not a valid cursor number, the
@@ -762,7 +762,7 @@ void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(
   VdbeModuleComment((v, "BEGIN: GenRowDel(%d,%d,%d,%d)",
                          iDataCur, iIdxCur, iPk, (int)nPk));
 
-  /* Seek cursor iCur to the row to delete. If this row no longer exists 
+  /* Seek cursor iCur to the row to delete. If this row no longer exists
   ** (this can happen if a trigger program has already deleted it), do
   ** not attempt to delete it or fire any DELETE triggers.  */
   iLabel = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse);
@@ -772,7 +772,7 @@ void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(
     VdbeCoverageIf(v, opSeek==OP_NotExists);
     VdbeCoverageIf(v, opSeek==OP_NotFound);
   }
- 
+
   /* If there are any triggers to fire, allocate a range of registers to
   ** use for the old.* references in the triggers.  */
   if( sqlite3FkRequired(pParse, pTab, 0, 0) || pTrigger ){
@@ -789,7 +789,7 @@ void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(
     iOld = pParse->nMem+1;
     pParse->nMem += (1 + pTab->nCol);
 
-    /* Populate the OLD.* pseudo-table register array. These values will be 
+    /* Populate the OLD.* pseudo-table register array. These values will be
     ** used by any BEFORE and AFTER triggers that exist.  */
     sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Copy, iPk, iOld);
     for(iCol=0; iCol<pTab->nCol; iCol++){
@@ -803,11 +803,11 @@ void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(
 
     /* Invoke BEFORE DELETE trigger programs. */
     addrStart = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
-    sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, 
+    sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger,
         TK_DELETE, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE, pTab, iOld, onconf, iLabel
     );
 
-    /* If any BEFORE triggers were coded, then seek the cursor to the 
+    /* If any BEFORE triggers were coded, then seek the cursor to the
     ** row to be deleted again. It may be that the BEFORE triggers moved
     ** the cursor or already deleted the row that the cursor was
     ** pointing to.
@@ -824,21 +824,21 @@ void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(
     }
 
     /* Do FK processing. This call checks that any FK constraints that
-    ** refer to this table (i.e. constraints attached to other tables) 
+    ** refer to this table (i.e. constraints attached to other tables)
     ** are not violated by deleting this row.  */
     sqlite3FkCheck(pParse, pTab, iOld, 0, 0, 0);
   }
 
   /* Delete the index and table entries. Skip this step if pTab is really
   ** a view (in which case the only effect of the DELETE statement is to
-  ** fire the INSTEAD OF triggers).  
+  ** fire the INSTEAD OF triggers). 
   **
   ** If variable 'count' is non-zero, then this OP_Delete instruction should
   ** invoke the update-hook. The pre-update-hook, on the other hand should
   ** be invoked unless table pTab is a system table. The difference is that
-  ** the update-hook is not invoked for rows removed by REPLACE, but the 
+  ** the update-hook is not invoked for rows removed by REPLACE, but the
   ** pre-update-hook is.
-  */ 
+  */
   if( !IsView(pTab) ){
     u8 p5 = 0;
     sqlite3GenerateRowIndexDelete(pParse, pTab, iDataCur, iIdxCur,0,iIdxNoSeek);
@@ -858,16 +858,16 @@ void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(
 
   /* Do any ON CASCADE, SET NULL or SET DEFAULT operations required to
   ** handle rows (possibly in other tables) that refer via a foreign key
-  ** to the row just deleted. */ 
+  ** to the row just deleted. */
   sqlite3FkActions(pParse, pTab, 0, iOld, 0, 0);
 
   /* Invoke AFTER DELETE trigger programs. */
-  sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, 
+  sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger,
       TK_DELETE, 0, TRIGGER_AFTER, pTab, iOld, onconf, iLabel
   );
 
   /* Jump here if the row had already been deleted before any BEFORE
-  ** trigger programs were invoked. Or if a trigger program throws a 
+  ** trigger programs were invoked. Or if a trigger program throws a
   ** RAISE(IGNORE) exception.  */
   sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, iLabel);
   VdbeModuleComment((v, "END: GenRowDel()"));
@@ -952,7 +952,7 @@ void sqlite3GenerateRowIndexDelete(
 ** its key into the same sequence of registers and if pPrior and pIdx share
 ** a column in common, then the register corresponding to that column already
 ** holds the correct value and the loading of that register is skipped.
-** This optimization is helpful when doing a DELETE or an INTEGRITY_CHECK 
+** This optimization is helpful when doing a DELETE or an INTEGRITY_CHECK
 ** on a table with multiple indices, and especially with the ROWID or
 ** PRIMARY KEY columns of the index.
 */
@@ -975,7 +975,7 @@ int sqlite3GenerateIndexKey(
     if( pIdx->pPartIdxWhere ){
       *piPartIdxLabel = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse);
       pParse->iSelfTab = iDataCur + 1;
-      sqlite3ExprIfFalseDup(pParse, pIdx->pPartIdxWhere, *piPartIdxLabel, 
+      sqlite3ExprIfFalseDup(pParse, pIdx->pPartIdxWhere, *piPartIdxLabel,
                             SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL);
       pParse->iSelfTab = 0;
       pPrior = 0; /* Ticket a9efb42811fa41ee 2019-11-02;
diff --git a/src/expr.c b/src/expr.c
index f5d922f56..bca83aa0b 100644
--- a/src/expr.c
+++ b/src/expr.c
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ char sqlite3TableColumnAffinity(const Table *pTab, int iCol){
 ** Return the 'affinity' of the expression pExpr if any.
 **
 ** If pExpr is a column, a reference to a column via an 'AS' alias,
-** or a sub-select with a column as the return value, then the 
+** or a sub-select with a column as the return value, then the
 ** affinity of that column is returned. Otherwise, 0x00 is returned,
 ** indicating no affinity for the expression.
 **
@@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Expr *sqlite3ExprSkipCollate(Expr *pExpr){
   while( pExpr && ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_Skip) ){
     assert( pExpr->op==TK_COLLATE );
     pExpr = pExpr->pLeft;
-  }   
+  }  
   return pExpr;
 }
 
@@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Expr *sqlite3ExprSkipCollateAndLikely(Expr *pExpr){
       assert( pExpr->op==TK_COLLATE );
       pExpr = pExpr->pLeft;
     }
-  }   
+  }  
   return pExpr;
 }
 
@@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ CollSeq *sqlite3ExprCollSeq(Parse *pParse, const Expr *pExpr){
   while( p ){
     int op = p->op;
     if( op==TK_REGISTER ) op = p->op2;
-    if( (op==TK_AGG_COLUMN && p->y.pTab!=0) 
+    if( (op==TK_AGG_COLUMN && p->y.pTab!=0)
      || op==TK_COLUMN || op==TK_TRIGGER
     ){
       int j;
@@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ CollSeq *sqlite3ExprCollSeq(Parse *pParse, const Expr *pExpr){
       break;
     }
   }
-  if( sqlite3CheckCollSeq(pParse, pColl) ){ 
+  if( sqlite3CheckCollSeq(pParse, pColl) ){
     pColl = 0;
   }
   return pColl;
@@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ CollSeq *sqlite3ExprCollSeq(Parse *pParse, const Expr *pExpr){
 /*
 ** Return the collation sequence for the expression pExpr. If
 ** there is no defined collating sequence, return a pointer to the
-** defautl collation sequence.
+** default collation sequence.
 **
 ** See also: sqlite3ExprCollSeq()
 **
@@ -415,8 +415,8 @@ static u8 binaryCompareP5(
 ** it is not considered.
 */
 CollSeq *sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq(
-  Parse *pParse, 
-  const Expr *pLeft, 
+  Parse *pParse,
+  const Expr *pLeft,
   const Expr *pRight
 ){
   CollSeq *pColl;
@@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ CollSeq *sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq(
   return pColl;
 }
 
-/* Expresssion p is a comparison operator.  Return a collation sequence
+/* Expression p is a comparison operator.  Return a collation sequence
 ** appropriate for the comparison operator.
 **
 ** This is normally just a wrapper around sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq().
@@ -494,7 +494,7 @@ int sqlite3ExprIsVector(const Expr *pExpr){
 }
 
 /*
-** If the expression passed as the only argument is of type TK_VECTOR 
+** If the expression passed as the only argument is of type TK_VECTOR
 ** return the number of expressions in the vector. Or, if the expression
 ** is a sub-select, return the number of columns in the sub-select. For
 ** any other type of expression, return 1.
@@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ Expr *sqlite3VectorFieldSubexpr(Expr *pVector, int i){
 ** sqlite3ExprCode() will generate all necessary code to compute
 ** the iField-th column of the vector expression pVector.
 **
-** It is ok for pVector to be a scalar (as long as iField==0).  
+** It is ok for pVector to be a scalar (as long as iField==0). 
 ** In that case, this routine works like sqlite3ExprDup().
 **
 ** The caller owns the returned Expr object and is responsible for
@@ -614,7 +614,7 @@ Expr *sqlite3ExprForVectorField(
 
 /*
 ** If expression pExpr is of type TK_SELECT, generate code to evaluate
-** it. Return the register in which the result is stored (or, if the 
+** it. Return the register in which the result is stored (or, if the
 ** sub-select returns more than one column, the first in an array
 ** of registers in which the result is stored).
 **
@@ -636,10 +636,10 @@ static int exprCodeSubselect(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
 ** the register number of a register that contains the value of
 ** element iField of the vector.
 **
-** If pVector is a TK_SELECT expression, then code for it must have 
+** If pVector is a TK_SELECT expression, then code for it must have
 ** already been generated using the exprCodeSubselect() routine. In this
 ** case parameter regSelect should be the first in an array of registers
-** containing the results of the sub-select. 
+** containing the results of the sub-select.
 **
 ** If pVector is of type TK_VECTOR, then code for the requested field
 ** is generated. In this case (*pRegFree) may be set to the number of
@@ -711,10 +711,10 @@ static void codeVectorCompare(
     sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "row value misused");
     return;
   }
-  assert( pExpr->op==TK_EQ || pExpr->op==TK_NE 
-       || pExpr->op==TK_IS || pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT 
-       || pExpr->op==TK_LT || pExpr->op==TK_GT 
-       || pExpr->op==TK_LE || pExpr->op==TK_GE 
+  assert( pExpr->op==TK_EQ || pExpr->op==TK_NE
+       || pExpr->op==TK_IS || pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT
+       || pExpr->op==TK_LT || pExpr->op==TK_GT
+       || pExpr->op==TK_LE || pExpr->op==TK_GE
   );
   assert( pExpr->op==op || (pExpr->op==TK_IS && op==TK_EQ)
             || (pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT && op==TK_NE) );
@@ -731,7 +731,7 @@ static void codeVectorCompare(
   sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, 1, dest);
   for(i=0; 1 /*Loop exits by "break"*/; i++){
     int regFree1 = 0, regFree2 = 0;
-    Expr *pL = 0, *pR = 0; 
+    Expr *pL = 0, *pR = 0;
     int r1, r2;
     assert( i>=0 && i<nLeft );
     if( addrCmp ) sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrCmp);
@@ -785,7 +785,7 @@ int sqlite3ExprCheckHeight(Parse *pParse, int nHeight){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
   int mxHeight = pParse->db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_EXPR_DEPTH];
   if( nHeight>mxHeight ){
-    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
        "Expression tree is too large (maximum depth %d)", mxHeight
     );
     rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
@@ -830,10 +830,10 @@ static void heightOfSelect(const Select *pSelect, int *pnHeight){
 }
 
 /*
-** Set the Expr.nHeight variable in the structure passed as an 
-** argument. An expression with no children, Expr.pList or 
+** Set the Expr.nHeight variable in the structure passed as an
+** argument. An expression with no children, Expr.pList or
 ** Expr.pSelect member has a height of 1. Any other expression
-** has a height equal to the maximum height of any other 
+** has a height equal to the maximum height of any other
 ** referenced Expr plus one.
 **
 ** Also propagate EP_Propagate flags up from Expr.x.pList to Expr.flags,
@@ -859,7 +859,7 @@ static void exprSetHeight(Expr *p){
 ** leave an error in pParse.
 **
 ** Also propagate all EP_Propagate flags from the Expr.x.pList into
-** Expr.flags. 
+** Expr.flags.
 */
 void sqlite3ExprSetHeightAndFlags(Parse *pParse, Expr *p){
   if( pParse->nErr ) return;
@@ -879,7 +879,7 @@ int sqlite3SelectExprHeight(const Select *p){
 #else /* ABOVE:  Height enforcement enabled.  BELOW: Height enforcement off */
 /*
 ** Propagate all EP_Propagate flags from the Expr.x.pList into
-** Expr.flags. 
+** Expr.flags.
 */
 void sqlite3ExprSetHeightAndFlags(Parse *pParse, Expr *p){
   if( pParse->nErr ) return;
@@ -949,7 +949,7 @@ Expr *sqlite3ExprAlloc(
     }
 #if SQLITE_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH>0
     pNew->nHeight = 1;
-#endif  
+#endif 
   }
   return pNew;
 }
@@ -1055,7 +1055,7 @@ void sqlite3PExprAddSelect(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, Select *pSelect){
 /*
 ** Expression list pEList is a list of vector values. This function
 ** converts the contents of pEList to a VALUES(...) Select statement
-** returning 1 row for each element of the list. For example, the 
+** returning 1 row for each element of the list. For example, the
 ** expression list:
 **
 **   ( (1,2), (3,4) (5,6) )
@@ -1086,7 +1086,7 @@ Select *sqlite3ExprListToValues(Parse *pParse, int nElem, ExprList *pEList){
       nExprElem = 1;
     }
     if( nExprElem!=nElem ){
-      sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "IN(...) element has %d term%s - expected %d", 
+      sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "IN(...) element has %d term%s - expected %d",
           nExprElem, nExprElem>1?"s":"", nElem
       );
       break;
@@ -1126,7 +1126,7 @@ Expr *sqlite3ExprAnd(Parse *pParse, Expr *pLeft, Expr *pRight){
     return pLeft;
   }else{
     u32 f = pLeft->flags | pRight->flags;
-    if( (f&(EP_OuterON|EP_InnerON|EP_IsFalse))==EP_IsFalse 
+    if( (f&(EP_OuterON|EP_InnerON|EP_IsFalse))==EP_IsFalse
      && !IN_RENAME_OBJECT
     ){
       sqlite3ExprDeferredDelete(pParse, pLeft);
@@ -1158,7 +1158,7 @@ Expr *sqlite3ExprFunction(
   }
   assert( !ExprHasProperty(pNew, EP_InnerON|EP_OuterON) );
   pNew->w.iOfst = (int)(pToken->z - pParse->zTail);
-  if( pList 
+  if( pList
    && pList->nExpr > pParse->db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_FUNCTION_ARG]
    && !pParse->nested
   ){
@@ -1197,7 +1197,7 @@ void sqlite3ExprFunctionUsable(
       /* Functions prohibited in triggers and views if:
       **     (1) tagged with SQLITE_DIRECTONLY
       **     (2) not tagged with SQLITE_INNOCUOUS (which means it
-      **         is tagged with SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE) and 
+      **         is tagged with SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE) and
       **         SQLITE_DBCONFIG_TRUSTED_SCHEMA is off (meaning
       **         that the schema is possibly tainted).
       */
@@ -1208,7 +1208,7 @@ void sqlite3ExprFunctionUsable(
 
 /*
 ** Assign a variable number to an expression that encodes a wildcard
-** in the original SQL statement.  
+** in the original SQL statement. 
 **
 ** Wildcards consisting of a single "?" are assigned the next sequential
 ** variable number.
@@ -1350,7 +1350,7 @@ void sqlite3ClearOnOrUsing(sqlite3 *db, OnOrUsing *p){
 /*
 ** Arrange to cause pExpr to be deleted when the pParse is deleted.
 ** This is similar to sqlite3ExprDelete() except that the delete is
-** deferred untilthe pParse is deleted.
+** deferred until the pParse is deleted.
 **
 ** The pExpr might be deleted immediately on an OOM error.
 **
@@ -1376,7 +1376,7 @@ void sqlite3ExprUnmapAndDelete(Parse *pParse, Expr *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return the number of bytes allocated for the expression structure 
+** Return the number of bytes allocated for the expression structure
 ** passed as the first argument. This is always one of EXPR_FULLSIZE,
 ** EXPR_REDUCEDSIZE or EXPR_TOKENONLYSIZE.
 */
@@ -1391,14 +1391,14 @@ static int exprStructSize(const Expr *p){
 ** to store a copy of an expression or expression tree.  They differ in
 ** how much of the tree is measured.
 **
-**     dupedExprStructSize()     Size of only the Expr structure 
+**     dupedExprStructSize()     Size of only the Expr structure
 **     dupedExprNodeSize()       Size of Expr + space for token
 **     dupedExprSize()           Expr + token + subtree components
 **
 ***************************************************************************
 **
-** The dupedExprStructSize() function returns two values OR-ed together:  
-** (1) the space required for a copy of the Expr structure only and 
+** The dupedExprStructSize() function returns two values OR-ed together: 
+** (1) the space required for a copy of the Expr structure only and
 ** (2) the EP_xxx flags that indicate what the structure size should be.
 ** The return values is always one of:
 **
@@ -1425,7 +1425,7 @@ static int dupedExprStructSize(const Expr *p, int flags){
   assert( flags==EXPRDUP_REDUCE || flags==0 ); /* Only one flag value allowed */
   assert( EXPR_FULLSIZE<=0xfff );
   assert( (0xfff & (EP_Reduced|EP_TokenOnly))==0 );
-  if( 0==flags || p->op==TK_SELECT_COLUMN 
+  if( 0==flags || p->op==TK_SELECT_COLUMN
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC
    || ExprHasProperty(p, EP_WinFunc)
 #endif
@@ -1433,7 +1433,7 @@ static int dupedExprStructSize(const Expr *p, int flags){
     nSize = EXPR_FULLSIZE;
   }else{
     assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_TokenOnly|EP_Reduced) );
-    assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_OuterON) ); 
+    assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_OuterON) );
     assert( !ExprHasVVAProperty(p, EP_NoReduce) );
     if( p->pLeft || p->x.pList ){
       nSize = EXPR_REDUCEDSIZE | EP_Reduced;
@@ -1446,7 +1446,7 @@ static int dupedExprStructSize(const Expr *p, int flags){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function returns the space in bytes required to store the copy 
+** This function returns the space in bytes required to store the copy
 ** of the Expr structure and a copy of the Expr.u.zToken string (if that
 ** string is defined.)
 */
@@ -1459,16 +1459,16 @@ static int dupedExprNodeSize(const Expr *p, int flags){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return the number of bytes required to create a duplicate of the 
+** Return the number of bytes required to create a duplicate of the
 ** expression passed as the first argument. The second argument is a
 ** mask containing EXPRDUP_XXX flags.
 **
 ** The value returned includes space to create a copy of the Expr struct
 ** itself and the buffer referred to by Expr.u.zToken, if any.
 **
-** If the EXPRDUP_REDUCE flag is set, then the return value includes 
-** space to duplicate all Expr nodes in the tree formed by Expr.pLeft 
-** and Expr.pRight variables (but not for any structures pointed to or 
+** If the EXPRDUP_REDUCE flag is set, then the return value includes
+** space to duplicate all Expr nodes in the tree formed by Expr.pLeft
+** and Expr.pRight variables (but not for any structures pointed to or
 ** descended from the Expr.x.pList or Expr.x.pSelect variables).
 */
 static int dupedExprSize(const Expr *p, int flags){
@@ -1483,8 +1483,8 @@ static int dupedExprSize(const Expr *p, int flags){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is similar to sqlite3ExprDup(), except that if pzBuffer 
-** is not NULL then *pzBuffer is assumed to point to a buffer large enough 
+** This function is similar to sqlite3ExprDup(), except that if pzBuffer
+** is not NULL then *pzBuffer is assumed to point to a buffer large enough
 ** to store the copy of expression p, the copies of p->u.zToken
 ** (if applicable), and the copies of the p->pLeft and p->pRight expressions,
 ** if any. Before returning, *pzBuffer is set to the first byte past the
@@ -1531,7 +1531,7 @@ static Expr *exprDup(sqlite3 *db, const Expr *p, int dupFlags, u8 **pzBuffer){
     }else{
       u32 nSize = (u32)exprStructSize(p);
       memcpy(zAlloc, p, nSize);
-      if( nSize<EXPR_FULLSIZE ){ 
+      if( nSize<EXPR_FULLSIZE ){
         memset(&zAlloc[nSize], 0, EXPR_FULLSIZE-nSize);
       }
     }
@@ -1595,7 +1595,7 @@ static Expr *exprDup(sqlite3 *db, const Expr *p, int dupFlags, u8 **pzBuffer){
 }
 
 /*
-** Create and return a deep copy of the object passed as the second 
+** Create and return a deep copy of the object passed as the second
 ** argument. If an OOM condition is encountered, NULL is returned
 ** and the db->mallocFailed flag set.
 */
@@ -1662,7 +1662,7 @@ static void gatherSelectWindows(Select *p){
 ** without effecting the originals.
 **
 ** The expression list, ID, and source lists return by sqlite3ExprListDup(),
-** sqlite3IdListDup(), and sqlite3SrcListDup() can not be further expanded 
+** sqlite3IdListDup(), and sqlite3SrcListDup() can not be further expanded
 ** by subsequent calls to sqlite*ListAppend() routines.
 **
 ** Any tables that the SrcList might point to are not duplicated.
@@ -1695,9 +1695,9 @@ ExprList *sqlite3ExprListDup(sqlite3 *db, const ExprList *p, int flags){
     Expr *pOldExpr = pOldItem->pExpr;
     Expr *pNewExpr;
     pItem->pExpr = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pOldExpr, flags);
-    if( pOldExpr 
+    if( pOldExpr
      && pOldExpr->op==TK_SELECT_COLUMN
-     && (pNewExpr = pItem->pExpr)!=0 
+     && (pNewExpr = pItem->pExpr)!=0
     ){
       if( pNewExpr->pRight ){
         pPriorSelectColOld = pOldExpr->pRight;
@@ -1722,7 +1722,7 @@ ExprList *sqlite3ExprListDup(sqlite3 *db, const ExprList *p, int flags){
 
 /*
 ** If cursors, triggers, views and subqueries are all omitted from
-** the build, then none of the following routines, except for 
+** the build, then none of the following routines, except for
 ** sqlite3SelectDup(), can be called. sqlite3SelectDup() is sometimes
 ** called with a NULL argument.
 */
@@ -1758,7 +1758,7 @@ SrcList *sqlite3SrcListDup(sqlite3 *db, const SrcList *p, int flags){
       pNewItem->u2.pCteUse->nUse++;
     }
     if( pNewItem->fg.isTabFunc ){
-      pNewItem->u1.pFuncArg = 
+      pNewItem->u1.pFuncArg =
           sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pOldItem->u1.pFuncArg, flags);
     }
     pTab = pNewItem->pTab = pOldItem->pTab;
@@ -1893,7 +1893,7 @@ SQLITE_NOINLINE ExprList *sqlite3ExprListAppendGrow(
   struct ExprList_item *pItem;
   ExprList *pNew;
   pList->nAlloc *= 2;
-  pNew = sqlite3DbRealloc(db, pList, 
+  pNew = sqlite3DbRealloc(db, pList,
        sizeof(*pList)+(pList->nAlloc-1)*sizeof(pList->a[0]));
   if( pNew==0 ){
     sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pList);
@@ -1951,8 +1951,8 @@ ExprList *sqlite3ExprListAppendVector(
   if( NEVER(pColumns==0) ) goto vector_append_error;
   if( pExpr==0 ) goto vector_append_error;
 
-  /* If the RHS is a vector, then we can immediately check to see that 
-  ** the size of the RHS and LHS match.  But if the RHS is a SELECT, 
+  /* If the RHS is a vector, then we can immediately check to see that
+  ** the size of the RHS and LHS match.  But if the RHS is a SELECT,
   ** wildcards ("*") in the result set of the SELECT must be expanded before
   ** we can do the size check, so defer the size check until code generation.
   */
@@ -1978,7 +1978,7 @@ ExprList *sqlite3ExprListAppendVector(
     Expr *pFirst = pList->a[iFirst].pExpr;
     assert( pFirst!=0 );
     assert( pFirst->op==TK_SELECT_COLUMN );
-     
+    
     /* Store the SELECT statement in pRight so it will be deleted when
     ** sqlite3ExprListDelete() is called */
     pFirst->pRight = pExpr;
@@ -2004,13 +2004,13 @@ void sqlite3ExprListSetSortOrder(ExprList *p, int iSortOrder, int eNulls){
   assert( p->nExpr>0 );
 
   assert( SQLITE_SO_UNDEFINED<0 && SQLITE_SO_ASC==0 && SQLITE_SO_DESC>0 );
-  assert( iSortOrder==SQLITE_SO_UNDEFINED 
-       || iSortOrder==SQLITE_SO_ASC 
-       || iSortOrder==SQLITE_SO_DESC 
+  assert( iSortOrder==SQLITE_SO_UNDEFINED
+       || iSortOrder==SQLITE_SO_ASC
+       || iSortOrder==SQLITE_SO_DESC
   );
-  assert( eNulls==SQLITE_SO_UNDEFINED 
-       || eNulls==SQLITE_SO_ASC 
-       || eNulls==SQLITE_SO_DESC 
+  assert( eNulls==SQLITE_SO_UNDEFINED
+       || eNulls==SQLITE_SO_ASC
+       || eNulls==SQLITE_SO_DESC
   );
 
   pItem = &p->a[p->nExpr-1];
@@ -2249,7 +2249,7 @@ Expr *sqlite3ExprSimplifiedAndOr(Expr *pExpr){
 ** when parsing an existing schema out of the sqlite_schema table and 4
 ** when processing a new CREATE TABLE statement.  A bound parameter raises
 ** an error for new statements, but is silently converted
-** to NULL for existing schemas.  This allows sqlite_schema tables that 
+** to NULL for existing schemas.  This allows sqlite_schema tables that
 ** contain a bound parameter because they were generated by older versions
 ** of SQLite to be parsed by newer versions of SQLite without raising a
 ** malformed schema error.
@@ -2481,7 +2481,7 @@ static int exprNodeIsConstantOrGroupBy(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
 
 /*
 ** Walk the expression tree passed as the first argument. Return non-zero
-** if the expression consists entirely of constants or copies of terms 
+** if the expression consists entirely of constants or copies of terms
 ** in pGroupBy that sort with the BINARY collation sequence.
 **
 ** This routine is used to determine if a term of the HAVING clause can
@@ -2511,7 +2511,7 @@ int sqlite3ExprIsConstantOrGroupBy(Parse *pParse, Expr *p, ExprList *pGroupBy){
 
 /*
 ** Walk an expression tree for the DEFAULT field of a column definition
-** in a CREATE TABLE statement.  Return non-zero if the expression is 
+** in a CREATE TABLE statement.  Return non-zero if the expression is
 ** acceptable for use as a DEFAULT.  That is to say, return non-zero if
 ** the expression is constant or a function call with constant arguments.
 ** Return and 0 if there are any variables.
@@ -2595,7 +2595,7 @@ int sqlite3ExprIsInteger(const Expr *p, int *pValue){
 ** Return FALSE if there is no chance that the expression can be NULL.
 **
 ** If the expression might be NULL or if the expression is too complex
-** to tell return TRUE.  
+** to tell return TRUE. 
 **
 ** This routine is used as an optimization, to skip OP_IsNull opcodes
 ** when we know that a value cannot be NULL.  Hence, a false positive
@@ -2686,7 +2686,7 @@ int sqlite3IsRowid(const char *z){
 }
 
 /*
-** pX is the RHS of an IN operator.  If pX is a SELECT statement 
+** pX is the RHS of an IN operator.  If pX is a SELECT statement
 ** that can be simplified to a direct table access, then return
 ** a pointer to the SELECT statement.  If pX is not a SELECT statement,
 ** or if the SELECT statement needs to be materialized into a transient
@@ -2752,7 +2752,7 @@ static void sqlite3SetHasNullFlag(Vdbe *v, int iCur, int regHasNull){
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY
 /*
-** The argument is an IN operator with a list (not a subquery) on the 
+** The argument is an IN operator with a list (not a subquery) on the
 ** right-hand side.  Return TRUE if that list is constant.
 */
 static int sqlite3InRhsIsConstant(Expr *pIn){
@@ -2798,7 +2798,7 @@ static int sqlite3InRhsIsConstant(Expr *pIn){
 ** an ephemeral table might need to be generated from the RHS and then
 ** pX->iTable made to point to the ephemeral table instead of an
 ** existing table.  In this case, the creation and initialization of the
-** ephmeral table might be put inside of a subroutine, the EP_Subrtn flag
+** ephemeral table might be put inside of a subroutine, the EP_Subrtn flag
 ** will be set on pX and the pX->y.sub fields will be set to show where
 ** the subroutine is coded.
 **
@@ -2814,9 +2814,9 @@ static int sqlite3InRhsIsConstant(Expr *pIn){
 ** to be unique - either because it is an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY or due to
 ** a UNIQUE constraint or index.
 **
-** When IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP is used (and the b-tree will be used 
-** for fast set membership tests) then an epheremal table must 
-** be used unless <columns> is a single INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column or an 
+** When IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP is used (and the b-tree will be used
+** for fast set membership tests) then an epheremal table must
+** be used unless <columns> is a single INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column or an
 ** index can be found with the specified <columns> as its left-most.
 **
 ** If the IN_INDEX_NOOP_OK and IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP are both set and
@@ -2828,7 +2828,7 @@ static int sqlite3InRhsIsConstant(Expr *pIn){
 **
 ** When the b-tree is being used for membership tests, the calling function
 ** might need to know whether or not the RHS side of the IN operator
-** contains a NULL.  If prRhsHasNull is not a NULL pointer and 
+** contains a NULL.  If prRhsHasNull is not a NULL pointer and
 ** if there is any chance that the (...) might contain a NULL value at
 ** runtime, then a register is allocated and the register number written
 ** to *prRhsHasNull. If there is no chance that the (...) contains a
@@ -2869,9 +2869,9 @@ int sqlite3FindInIndex(
   mustBeUnique = (inFlags & IN_INDEX_LOOP)!=0;
   iTab = pParse->nTab++;
 
-  /* If the RHS of this IN(...) operator is a SELECT, and if it matters 
+  /* If the RHS of this IN(...) operator is a SELECT, and if it matters
   ** whether or not the SELECT result contains NULL values, check whether
-  ** or not NULL is actually possible (it may not be, for example, due 
+  ** or not NULL is actually possible (it may not be, for example, due
   ** to NOT NULL constraints in the schema). If no NULL values are possible,
   ** set prRhsHasNull to 0 before continuing.  */
   if( prRhsHasNull && ExprUseXSelect(pX) ){
@@ -2886,7 +2886,7 @@ int sqlite3FindInIndex(
   }
 
   /* Check to see if an existing table or index can be used to
-  ** satisfy the query.  This is preferable to generating a new 
+  ** satisfy the query.  This is preferable to generating a new
   ** ephemeral table.  */
   if( pParse->nErr==0 && (p = isCandidateForInOpt(pX))!=0 ){
     sqlite3 *db = pParse->db;              /* Database connection */
@@ -2922,7 +2922,7 @@ int sqlite3FindInIndex(
       int affinity_ok = 1;
       int i;
 
-      /* Check that the affinity that will be used to perform each 
+      /* Check that the affinity that will be used to perform each
       ** comparison is the same as the affinity of each column in table
       ** on the RHS of the IN operator.  If it not, it is not possible to
       ** use any index of the RHS table.  */
@@ -2967,14 +2967,14 @@ int sqlite3FindInIndex(
               continue;  /* This index is not unique over the IN RHS columns */
             }
           }
-  
+ 
           colUsed = 0;   /* Columns of index used so far */
           for(i=0; i<nExpr; i++){
             Expr *pLhs = sqlite3VectorFieldSubexpr(pX->pLeft, i);
             Expr *pRhs = pEList->a[i].pExpr;
             CollSeq *pReq = sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq(pParse, pLhs, pRhs);
             int j;
-  
+ 
             for(j=0; j<nExpr; j++){
               if( pIdx->aiColumn[j]!=pRhs->iColumn ) continue;
               assert( pIdx->azColl[j] );
@@ -2989,7 +2989,7 @@ int sqlite3FindInIndex(
             colUsed |= mCol;
             if( aiMap ) aiMap[i] = j;
           }
-  
+ 
           assert( i==nExpr || colUsed!=(MASKBIT(nExpr)-1) );
           if( colUsed==(MASKBIT(nExpr)-1) ){
             /* If we reach this point, that means the index pIdx is usable */
@@ -3001,11 +3001,11 @@ int sqlite3FindInIndex(
             VdbeComment((v, "%s", pIdx->zName));
             assert( IN_INDEX_INDEX_DESC == IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC+1 );
             eType = IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC + pIdx->aSortOrder[0];
-  
+ 
             if( prRhsHasNull ){
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_USED_MASK
               i64 mask = (1<<nExpr)-1;
-              sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Dup8(v, OP_ColumnsUsed, 
+              sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Dup8(v, OP_ColumnsUsed,
                   iTab, 0, 0, (u8*)&mask, P4_INT64);
 #endif
               *prRhsHasNull = ++pParse->nMem;
@@ -3069,8 +3069,8 @@ int sqlite3FindInIndex(
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY
 /*
-** Argument pExpr is an (?, ?...) IN(...) expression. This 
-** function allocates and returns a nul-terminated string containing 
+** Argument pExpr is an (?, ?...) IN(...) expression. This
+** function allocates and returns a nul-terminated string containing
 ** the affinities to be used for each column of the comparison.
 **
 ** It is the responsibility of the caller to ensure that the returned
@@ -3103,11 +3103,11 @@ static char *exprINAffinity(Parse *pParse, const Expr *pExpr){
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY
 /*
-** Load the Parse object passed as the first argument with an error 
+** Load the Parse object passed as the first argument with an error
 ** message of the form:
 **
 **   "sub-select returns N columns - expected M"
-*/   
+*/  
 void sqlite3SubselectError(Parse *pParse, int nActual, int nExpect){
   if( pParse->nErr==0 ){
     const char *zFmt = "sub-select returns %d columns - expected %d";
@@ -3118,7 +3118,7 @@ void sqlite3SubselectError(Parse *pParse, int nActual, int nExpect){
 
 /*
 ** Expression pExpr is a vector that has been used in a context where
-** it is not permitted. If pExpr is a sub-select vector, this routine 
+** it is not permitted. If pExpr is a sub-select vector, this routine
 ** loads the Parse object with a message of the form:
 **
 **   "sub-select returns N columns - expected 1"
@@ -3126,7 +3126,7 @@ void sqlite3SubselectError(Parse *pParse, int nActual, int nExpect){
 ** Or, if it is a regular scalar vector:
 **
 **   "row value misused"
-*/   
+*/  
 void sqlite3VectorErrorMsg(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY
   if( ExprUseXSelect(pExpr) ){
@@ -3148,7 +3148,7 @@ void sqlite3VectorErrorMsg(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
 **     x IN (SELECT a FROM b)     -- IN operator with subquery on the right
 **
 ** The pExpr parameter is the IN operator.  The cursor number for the
-** constructed ephermeral table is returned.  The first time the ephemeral
+** constructed ephemeral table is returned.  The first time the ephemeral
 ** table is computed, the cursor number is also stored in pExpr->iTable,
 ** however the cursor number returned might not be the same, as it might
 ** have been duplicated using OP_OpenDup.
@@ -3189,7 +3189,7 @@ void sqlite3CodeRhsOfIN(
   if( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_VarSelect) && pParse->iSelfTab==0 ){
     /* Reuse of the RHS is allowed */
     /* If this routine has already been coded, but the previous code
-    ** might not have been invoked yet, so invoke it now as a subroutine. 
+    ** might not have been invoked yet, so invoke it now as a subroutine.
     */
     if( ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_Subrtn) ){
       addrOnce = sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Once); VdbeCoverage(v);
@@ -3266,7 +3266,7 @@ void sqlite3CodeRhsOfIN(
       if( rc ){
         sqlite3KeyInfoUnref(pKeyInfo);
         return;
-      }      
+      }     
       assert( pKeyInfo!=0 ); /* OOM will cause exit after sqlite3Select() */
       assert( pEList!=0 );
       assert( pEList->nExpr>0 );
@@ -3355,7 +3355,7 @@ void sqlite3CodeRhsOfIN(
 **
 ** The pExpr parameter is the SELECT or EXISTS operator to be coded.
 **
-** Return the register that holds the result.  For a multi-column SELECT, 
+** Return the register that holds the result.  For a multi-column SELECT,
 ** the result is stored in a contiguous array of registers and the
 ** return value is the register of the left-most result column.
 ** Return 0 if an error occurs.
@@ -3412,7 +3412,7 @@ int sqlite3CodeSubselect(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
   if( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_VarSelect) ){
     addrOnce = sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Once); VdbeCoverage(v);
   }
-  
+ 
   /* For a SELECT, generate code to put the values for all columns of
   ** the first row into an array of registers and return the index of
   ** the first register.
@@ -3420,7 +3420,7 @@ int sqlite3CodeSubselect(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
   ** If this is an EXISTS, write an integer 0 (not exists) or 1 (exists)
   ** into a register and return that register number.
   **
-  ** In both cases, the query is augmented with "LIMIT 1".  Any 
+  ** In both cases, the query is augmented with "LIMIT 1".  Any
   ** preexisting limit is discarded in place of the new LIMIT 1.
   */
   ExplainQueryPlan2(addrExplain, (pParse, 1, "%sSCALAR SUBQUERY %d",
@@ -3484,9 +3484,9 @@ int sqlite3CodeSubselect(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY
 /*
-** Expr pIn is an IN(...) expression. This function checks that the 
-** sub-select on the RHS of the IN() operator has the same number of 
-** columns as the vector on the LHS. Or, if the RHS of the IN() is not 
+** Expr pIn is an IN(...) expression. This function checks that the
+** sub-select on the RHS of the IN() operator has the same number of
+** columns as the vector on the LHS. Or, if the RHS of the IN() is not
 ** a sub-query, that the LHS is a vector of size 1.
 */
 int sqlite3ExprCheckIN(Parse *pParse, Expr *pIn){
@@ -3511,18 +3511,18 @@ int sqlite3ExprCheckIN(Parse *pParse, Expr *pIn){
 **      x IN (SELECT ...)
 **      x IN (value, value, ...)
 **
-** The left-hand side (LHS) is a scalar or vector expression.  The 
+** The left-hand side (LHS) is a scalar or vector expression.  The
 ** right-hand side (RHS) is an array of zero or more scalar values, or a
 ** subquery.  If the RHS is a subquery, the number of result columns must
 ** match the number of columns in the vector on the LHS.  If the RHS is
-** a list of values, the LHS must be a scalar. 
+** a list of values, the LHS must be a scalar.
 **
 ** The IN operator is true if the LHS value is contained within the RHS.
-** The result is false if the LHS is definitely not in the RHS.  The 
-** result is NULL if the presence of the LHS in the RHS cannot be 
+** The result is false if the LHS is definitely not in the RHS.  The
+** result is NULL if the presence of the LHS in the RHS cannot be
 ** determined due to NULLs.
 **
-** This routine generates code that jumps to destIfFalse if the LHS is not 
+** This routine generates code that jumps to destIfFalse if the LHS is not
 ** contained within the RHS.  If due to NULLs we cannot determine if the LHS
 ** is contained in the RHS then jump to destIfNull.  If the LHS is contained
 ** within the RHS then fall through.
@@ -3551,7 +3551,7 @@ static void sqlite3ExprCodeIN(
   int destStep6 = 0;    /* Start of code for Step 6 */
   int addrTruthOp;      /* Address of opcode that determines the IN is true */
   int destNotNull;      /* Jump here if a comparison is not true in step 6 */
-  int addrTop;          /* Top of the step-6 loop */ 
+  int addrTop;          /* Top of the step-6 loop */
   int iTab = 0;         /* Index to use */
   u8 okConstFactor = pParse->okConstFactor;
 
@@ -3578,7 +3578,7 @@ static void sqlite3ExprCodeIN(
                              aiMap, &iTab);
 
   assert( pParse->nErr || nVector==1 || eType==IN_INDEX_EPH
-       || eType==IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC || eType==IN_INDEX_INDEX_DESC 
+       || eType==IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC || eType==IN_INDEX_INDEX_DESC
   );
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
   /* Confirm that aiMap[] contains nVector integer values between 0 and
@@ -3590,8 +3590,8 @@ static void sqlite3ExprCodeIN(
   }
 #endif
 
-  /* Code the LHS, the <expr> from "<expr> IN (...)". If the LHS is a 
-  ** vector, then it is stored in an array of nVector registers starting 
+  /* Code the LHS, the <expr> from "<expr> IN (...)". If the LHS is a
+  ** vector, then it is stored in an array of nVector registers starting
   ** at r1.
   **
   ** sqlite3FindInIndex() might have reordered the fields of the LHS vector
@@ -3723,7 +3723,7 @@ static void sqlite3ExprCodeIN(
   }
 
   /* Step 5.  If we do not care about the difference between NULL and
-  ** FALSE, then just return false. 
+  ** FALSE, then just return false.
   */
   if( destIfFalse==destIfNull ) sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, destIfFalse);
 
@@ -3784,7 +3784,7 @@ sqlite3ExprCodeIN_oom_error:
 ** Generate an instruction that will put the floating point
 ** value described by z[0..n-1] into register iMem.
 **
-** The z[] string will probably not be zero-terminated.  But the 
+** The z[] string will probably not be zero-terminated.  But the
 ** z[n] character is guaranteed to be something that does not look
 ** like the continuation of the number.
 */
@@ -3949,7 +3949,7 @@ void sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnOfTable(
 
 /*
 ** Generate code that will extract the iColumn-th column from
-** table pTab and store the column value in register iReg. 
+** table pTab and store the column value in register iReg.
 **
 ** There must be an open cursor to pTab in iTable when this routine
 ** is called.  If iColumn<0 then code is generated that extracts the rowid.
@@ -3995,7 +3995,7 @@ static void exprToRegister(Expr *pExpr, int iReg){
 
 /*
 ** Evaluate an expression (either a vector or a scalar expression) and store
-** the result in continguous temporary registers.  Return the index of
+** the result in contiguous temporary registers.  Return the index of
 ** the first register used to store the result.
 **
 ** If the returned result register is a temporary scalar, then also write
@@ -4035,7 +4035,7 @@ static int exprCodeVector(Parse *pParse, Expr *p, int *piFreeable){
 */
 static void setDoNotMergeFlagOnCopy(Vdbe *v){
   if( sqlite3VdbeGetLastOp(v)->opcode==OP_Copy ){
-    sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, 1);  /* Tag trailing OP_Copy as not mergable */
+    sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, 1);  /* Tag trailing OP_Copy as not mergeable */
   }
 }
 
@@ -4092,7 +4092,7 @@ static int exprCodeInlineFunction(
       break;
     }
 #endif
-    default: {   
+    default: {  
       /* The UNLIKELY() function is a no-op.  The result is the value
       ** of the first argument.
       */
@@ -4109,7 +4109,7 @@ static int exprCodeInlineFunction(
     case INLINEFUNC_expr_compare: {
       /* Compare two expressions using sqlite3ExprCompare() */
       assert( nFarg==2 );
-      sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, 
+      sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer,
          sqlite3ExprCompare(0,pFarg->a[0].pExpr, pFarg->a[1].pExpr,-1),
          target);
       break;
@@ -4118,19 +4118,19 @@ static int exprCodeInlineFunction(
     case INLINEFUNC_expr_implies_expr: {
       /* Compare two expressions using sqlite3ExprImpliesExpr() */
       assert( nFarg==2 );
-      sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, 
+      sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer,
          sqlite3ExprImpliesExpr(pParse,pFarg->a[0].pExpr, pFarg->a[1].pExpr,-1),
          target);
       break;
     }
 
     case INLINEFUNC_implies_nonnull_row: {
-      /* REsult of sqlite3ExprImpliesNonNullRow() */
+      /* Result of sqlite3ExprImpliesNonNullRow() */
       Expr *pA1;
       assert( nFarg==2 );
       pA1 = pFarg->a[1].pExpr;
       if( pA1->op==TK_COLUMN ){
-        sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, 
+        sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer,
            sqlite3ExprImpliesNonNullRow(pFarg->a[0].pExpr,pA1->iTable,1),
            target);
       }else{
@@ -4246,7 +4246,7 @@ int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target){
 expr_code_doover:
   if( pExpr==0 ){
     op = TK_NULL;
-  }else if( pParse->pIdxEpr!=0 
+  }else if( pParse->pIdxEpr!=0
    && !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_Leaf)
    && (r1 = sqlite3IndexedExprLookup(pParse, pExpr, target))>=0
   ){
@@ -4285,7 +4285,7 @@ expr_code_doover:
         }else if( pCol->iColumn<0 ){
           VdbeComment((v,"%s.rowid",pTab->zName));
         }else{
-          VdbeComment((v,"%s.%s", 
+          VdbeComment((v,"%s.%s",
               pTab->zName, pTab->aCol[pCol->iColumn].zCnName));
           if( pTab->aCol[pCol->iColumn].affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL ){
             sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_RealAffinity, target);
@@ -4502,7 +4502,7 @@ expr_code_doover:
     case TK_BITOR:
     case TK_SLASH:
     case TK_LSHIFT:
-    case TK_RSHIFT: 
+    case TK_RSHIFT:
     case TK_CONCAT: {
       assert( TK_AND==OP_And );            testcase( op==TK_AND );
       assert( TK_OR==OP_Or );              testcase( op==TK_OR );
@@ -4673,7 +4673,7 @@ expr_code_doover:
             assert( SQLITE_FUNC_LENGTH==OPFLAG_LENGTHARG );
             assert( SQLITE_FUNC_TYPEOF==OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG );
             testcase( pDef->funcFlags & OPFLAG_LENGTHARG );
-            pFarg->a[0].pExpr->op2 = 
+            pFarg->a[0].pExpr->op2 =
                   pDef->funcFlags & (OPFLAG_LENGTHARG|OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG);
           }
         }
@@ -4692,7 +4692,7 @@ expr_code_doover:
       ** see if it is a column in a virtual table.  This is done because
       ** the left operand of infix functions (the operand we want to
       ** control overloading) ends up as the second argument to the
-      ** function.  The expression "A glob B" is equivalent to 
+      ** function.  The expression "A glob B" is equivalent to
       ** "glob(B,A).  We want to use the A in "A glob B" to test
       ** for function overloading.  But we use the B term in "glob(B,A)".
       */
@@ -4703,7 +4703,7 @@ expr_code_doover:
       }
 #endif
       if( pDef->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL ){
-        if( !pColl ) pColl = db->pDfltColl; 
+        if( !pColl ) pColl = db->pDfltColl;
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_CollSeq, 0, 0, 0, (char *)pColl, P4_COLLSEQ);
       }
       sqlite3VdbeAddFunctionCall(pParse, constMask, r1, target, nFarg,
@@ -4811,7 +4811,7 @@ expr_code_doover:
       **
       ** The expression is implemented using an OP_Param opcode. The p1
       ** parameter is set to 0 for an old.rowid reference, or to (i+1)
-      ** to reference another column of the old.* pseudo-table, where 
+      ** to reference another column of the old.* pseudo-table, where
       ** i is the index of the column. For a new.rowid reference, p1 is
       ** set to (n+1), where n is the number of columns in each pseudo-table.
       ** For a reference to any other column in the new.* pseudo-table, p1
@@ -4825,7 +4825,7 @@ expr_code_doover:
       **
       **   p1==0   ->    old.rowid     p1==3   ->    new.rowid
       **   p1==1   ->    old.a         p1==4   ->    new.a
-      **   p1==2   ->    old.b         p1==5   ->    new.b       
+      **   p1==2   ->    old.b         p1==5   ->    new.b      
       */
       Table *pTab;
       int iCol;
@@ -4834,7 +4834,7 @@ expr_code_doover:
       assert( ExprUseYTab(pExpr) );
       pTab = pExpr->y.pTab;
       iCol = pExpr->iColumn;
-      p1 = pExpr->iTable * (pTab->nCol+1) + 1 
+      p1 = pExpr->iTable * (pTab->nCol+1) + 1
                      + sqlite3TableColumnToStorage(pTab, iCol);
 
       assert( pExpr->iTable==0 || pExpr->iTable==1 );
@@ -4992,7 +4992,7 @@ expr_code_doover:
     }
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
     case TK_RAISE: {
-      assert( pExpr->affExpr==OE_Rollback 
+      assert( pExpr->affExpr==OE_Rollback
            || pExpr->affExpr==OE_Abort
            || pExpr->affExpr==OE_Fail
            || pExpr->affExpr==OE_Ignore
@@ -5035,8 +5035,8 @@ expr_code_doover:
 ** the end of the prepared statement in the initialization section.
 **
 ** If regDest>=0 then the result is always stored in that register and the
-** result is not reusable.  If regDest<0 then this routine is free to 
-** store the value whereever it wants.  The register where the expression 
+** result is not reusable.  If regDest<0 then this routine is free to
+** store the value wherever it wants.  The register where the expression
 ** is stored is returned.  When regDest<0, two identical expressions might
 ** code to the same register, if they do not contain function calls and hence
 ** are factored out into the initialization section at the end of the
@@ -5256,7 +5256,7 @@ int sqlite3ExprCodeExprList(
 **
 **    x BETWEEN y AND z
 **
-** The above is equivalent to 
+** The above is equivalent to
 **
 **    x>=y AND x<=z
 **
@@ -5474,7 +5474,7 @@ void sqlite3ExprIfTrue(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int dest, int jumpIfNull){
     }
   }
   sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree1);
-  sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree2);  
+  sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree2); 
 }
 
 /*
@@ -5635,7 +5635,7 @@ void sqlite3ExprIfFalse(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int dest, int jumpIfNull){
     }
 #endif
     default: {
-    default_expr: 
+    default_expr:
       if( ExprAlwaysFalse(pExpr) ){
         sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, dest);
       }else if( ExprAlwaysTrue(pExpr) ){
@@ -5689,7 +5689,7 @@ static int exprCompareVariable(
   int res = 0;
   int iVar;
   sqlite3_value *pL, *pR = 0;
-  
+ 
   sqlite3ValueFromExpr(pParse->db, pExpr, SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_AFF_BLOB, &pR);
   if( pR ){
     iVar = pVar->iColumn;
@@ -5731,9 +5731,9 @@ static int exprCompareVariable(
 ** an incorrect 0 or 1 could lead to a malfunction.
 **
 ** If pParse is not NULL then TK_VARIABLE terms in pA with bindings in
-** pParse->pReprepare can be matched against literals in pB.  The 
+** pParse->pReprepare can be matched against literals in pB.  The
 ** pParse->pVdbe->expmask bitmask is updated for each variable referenced.
-** If pParse is NULL (the normal case) then any TK_VARIABLE term in 
+** If pParse is NULL (the normal case) then any TK_VARIABLE term in
 ** Argument pParse should normally be NULL. If it is not NULL and pA or
 ** pB causes a return value of 2.
 */
@@ -5764,7 +5764,7 @@ int sqlite3ExprCompare(
     if( pB->op==TK_COLLATE && sqlite3ExprCompare(pParse, pA,pB->pLeft,iTab)<2 ){
       return 1;
     }
-    if( pA->op==TK_AGG_COLUMN && pB->op==TK_COLUMN 
+    if( pA->op==TK_AGG_COLUMN && pB->op==TK_COLUMN
      && pB->iTable<0 && pA->iTable==iTab
     ){
       /* fall through */
@@ -5792,7 +5792,7 @@ int sqlite3ExprCompare(
       return 0;
     }else if( pA->op==TK_COLLATE ){
       if( sqlite3_stricmp(pA->u.zToken,pB->u.zToken)!=0 ) return 2;
-    }else 
+    }else
     if( pB->u.zToken!=0
      && pA->op!=TK_COLUMN
      && pA->op!=TK_AGG_COLUMN
@@ -5825,7 +5825,7 @@ int sqlite3ExprCompare(
 
 /*
 ** Compare two ExprList objects.  Return 0 if they are identical, 1
-** if they are certainly different, or 2 if it is not possible to 
+** if they are certainly different, or 2 if it is not possible to
 ** determine if they are identical or not.
 **
 ** If any subelement of pB has Expr.iTable==(-1) then it is allowed
@@ -5913,8 +5913,8 @@ static int exprImpliesNotNull(
     case TK_MINUS:
     case TK_BITOR:
     case TK_LSHIFT:
-    case TK_RSHIFT: 
-    case TK_CONCAT: 
+    case TK_RSHIFT:
+    case TK_CONCAT:
       seenNot = 1;
       /* no break */ deliberate_fall_through
     case TK_STAR:
@@ -5954,14 +5954,14 @@ static int exprImpliesNotNull(
 **     pE1: x!=123     pE2: x IS NOT NULL    Result: true
 **     pE1: x!=?1      pE2: x IS NOT NULL    Result: true
 **     pE1: x IS NULL  pE2: x IS NOT NULL    Result: false
-**     pE1: x IS ?2    pE2: x IS NOT NULL    Reuslt: false
+**     pE1: x IS ?2    pE2: x IS NOT NULL    Result: false
 **
 ** When comparing TK_COLUMN nodes between pE1 and pE2, if pE2 has
 ** Expr.iTable<0 then assume a table number given by iTab.
 **
-** If pParse is not NULL, then the values of bound variables in pE1 are 
+** If pParse is not NULL, then the values of bound variables in pE1 are
 ** compared against literal values in pE2 and pParse->pVdbe->expmask is
-** modified to record which bound variables are referenced.  If pParse 
+** modified to record which bound variables are referenced.  If pParse
 ** is NULL, then false will be returned if pE1 contains any bound variables.
 **
 ** When in doubt, return false.  Returning true might give a performance
@@ -6012,7 +6012,7 @@ static void bothImplyNotNullRow(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pE1, Expr *pE2){
 **
 ** pWalker->mWFlags is non-zero if this inquiry is being undertaking on
 ** behalf of a RIGHT JOIN (or FULL JOIN).  That makes a difference when
-** evaluting terms in the ON claue of an inner join.
+** evaluating terms in the ON clause of an inner join.
 **
 ** This routine controls an optimization.  False positives (setting
 ** pWalker->eCode to 1 when it should not be) are deadly, but false-negatives
@@ -6069,7 +6069,7 @@ static int impliesNotNullRow(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
       testcase( pExpr->op==TK_AND );
       bothImplyNotNullRow(pWalker, pExpr->pLeft, pExpr->pRight);
       return WRC_Prune;
-        
+       
     case TK_IN:
       /* Beware of "x NOT IN ()" and "x NOT IN (SELECT 1 WHERE false)",
       ** both of which can be true.  But apart from these cases, if
@@ -6184,7 +6184,7 @@ struct IdxCover {
 };
 
 /*
-** Check to see if there are references to columns in table 
+** Check to see if there are references to columns in table
 ** pWalker->u.pIdxCover->iCur can be satisfied using the index
 ** pWalker->u.pIdxCover->pIdx.
 */
@@ -6226,7 +6226,7 @@ int sqlite3ExprCoveredByIndex(
 }
 
 
-/* Structure used to pass information throught the Walker in order to
+/* Structure used to pass information throughout the Walker in order to
 ** implement sqlite3ReferencesSrcList().
 */
 struct RefSrcList {
@@ -6274,7 +6274,7 @@ static void selectRefLeave(Walker *pWalker, Select *pSelect){
 }
 
 /* This is the Walker EXPR callback for sqlite3ReferencesSrcList().
-** 
+**
 ** Set the 0x01 bit of pWalker->eCode if there is a reference to any
 ** of the tables shown in RefSrcList.pRef.
 **
@@ -6419,7 +6419,7 @@ static int addAggInfoColumn(sqlite3 *db, AggInfo *pInfo){
        &i
   );
   return i;
-}    
+}   
 
 /*
 ** Add a new element to the pAggInfo->aFunc[] array.  Return the index of
@@ -6428,7 +6428,7 @@ static int addAggInfoColumn(sqlite3 *db, AggInfo *pInfo){
 static int addAggInfoFunc(sqlite3 *db, AggInfo *pInfo){
   int i;
   pInfo->aFunc = sqlite3ArrayAllocate(
-       db, 
+       db,
        pInfo->aFunc,
        sizeof(pInfo->aFunc[0]),
        &pInfo->nFunc,
@@ -6439,10 +6439,10 @@ static int addAggInfoFunc(sqlite3 *db, AggInfo *pInfo){
 
 /*
 ** Search the AggInfo object for an aCol[] entry that has iTable and iColumn.
-** Return the index in aCol[] of the entry that describes that column. 
+** Return the index in aCol[] of the entry that describes that column.
 **
 ** If no prior entry is found, create a new one and return -1.  The
-** new column will have an idex of pAggInfo->nColumn-1.
+** new column will have an index of pAggInfo->nColumn-1.
 */
 static void findOrCreateAggInfoColumn(
   Parse *pParse,       /* Parsing context */
@@ -6581,7 +6581,7 @@ static int analyzeAggregate(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
       if( (pNC->ncFlags & NC_InAggFunc)==0
        && pWalker->walkerDepth==pExpr->op2
       ){
-        /* Check to see if pExpr is a duplicate of another aggregate 
+        /* Check to see if pExpr is a duplicate of another aggregate
         ** function that is already in the pAggInfo structure
         */
         struct AggInfo_func *pItem = pAggInfo->aFunc;
@@ -6602,7 +6602,7 @@ static int analyzeAggregate(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
             pItem->pFExpr = pExpr;
             assert( ExprUseUToken(pExpr) );
             pItem->pFunc = sqlite3FindFunction(pParse->db,
-                   pExpr->u.zToken, 
+                   pExpr->u.zToken,
                    pExpr->x.pList ? pExpr->x.pList->nExpr : 0, enc, 0);
             if( pExpr->flags & EP_Distinct ){
               pItem->iDistinct = pParse->nTab++;
diff --git a/src/func.c b/src/func.c
index 4d0da5ded..1d47a24b8 100644
--- a/src/func.c
+++ b/src/func.c
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ static void lengthFunc(
 ** Implementation of the abs() function.
 **
 ** IMP: R-23979-26855 The abs(X) function returns the absolute value of
-** the numeric argument X. 
+** the numeric argument X.
 */
 static void absFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
   assert( argc==1 );
@@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ static void absFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
           return;
         }
         iVal = -iVal;
-      } 
+      }
       sqlite3_result_int64(context, iVal);
       break;
     }
@@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ static void roundFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
   */
   if( r<-4503599627370496.0 || r>+4503599627370496.0 ){
     /* The value has no fractional part so there is nothing to round */
-  }else if( n==0 ){  
+  }else if( n==0 ){ 
     r = (double)((sqlite_int64)(r+(r<0?-0.5:+0.5)));
   }else{
     zBuf = sqlite3_mprintf("%.*f",n,r);
@@ -515,7 +515,7 @@ static void lowerFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
 #define noopFunc versionFunc   /* Substitute function - never called */
 
 /*
-** Implementation of random().  Return a random integer.  
+** Implementation of random().  Return a random integer. 
 */
 static void randomFunc(
   sqlite3_context *context,
@@ -526,11 +526,11 @@ static void randomFunc(
   UNUSED_PARAMETER2(NotUsed, NotUsed2);
   sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(r), &r);
   if( r<0 ){
-    /* We need to prevent a random number of 0x8000000000000000 
+    /* We need to prevent a random number of 0x8000000000000000
     ** (or -9223372036854775808) since when you do abs() of that
     ** number of you get the same value back again.  To do this
     ** in a way that is testable, mask the sign bit off of negative
-    ** values, resulting in a positive value.  Then take the 
+    ** values, resulting in a positive value.  Then take the
     ** 2s complement of that positive value.  The end result can
     ** therefore be no less than -9223372036854775807.
     */
@@ -568,8 +568,8 @@ static void randomBlob(
 ** value is the same as the sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() API function.
 */
 static void last_insert_rowid(
-  sqlite3_context *context, 
-  int NotUsed, 
+  sqlite3_context *context,
+  int NotUsed,
   sqlite3_value **NotUsed2
 ){
   sqlite3 *db = sqlite3_context_db_handle(context);
@@ -625,7 +625,7 @@ struct compareInfo {
 
 /*
 ** For LIKE and GLOB matching on EBCDIC machines, assume that every
-** character is exactly one byte in size.  Also, provde the Utf8Read()
+** character is exactly one byte in size.  Also, provide the Utf8Read()
 ** macro for fast reading of the next character in the common case where
 ** the next character is ASCII.
 */
@@ -677,7 +677,7 @@ static const struct compareInfo likeInfoAlt = { '%', '_',   0, 0 };
 ** it the last character in the list.
 **
 ** Like matching rules:
-** 
+**
 **      '%'       Matches any sequence of zero or more characters
 **
 ***     '_'       Matches any one character
@@ -700,13 +700,13 @@ static int patternCompare(
   u32 matchAll = pInfo->matchAll;  /* "*" or "%" */
   u8 noCase = pInfo->noCase;       /* True if uppercase==lowercase */
   const u8 *zEscaped = 0;          /* One past the last escaped input char */
-  
+ 
   while( (c = Utf8Read(zPattern))!=0 ){
     if( c==matchAll ){  /* Match "*" */
       /* Skip over multiple "*" characters in the pattern.  If there
       ** are also "?" characters, skip those as well, but consume a
       ** single character of the input string for each "?" skipped */
-      while( (c=Utf8Read(zPattern)) == matchAll 
+      while( (c=Utf8Read(zPattern)) == matchAll
              || (c == matchOne && matchOne!=0) ){
         if( c==matchOne && sqlite3Utf8Read(&zString)==0 ){
           return SQLITE_NOWILDCARDMATCH;
@@ -869,8 +869,8 @@ int sqlite3_like_count = 0;
 ** the GLOB operator.
 */
 static void likeFunc(
-  sqlite3_context *context, 
-  int argc, 
+  sqlite3_context *context,
+  int argc,
   sqlite3_value **argv
 ){
   const unsigned char *zA, *zB;
@@ -909,7 +909,7 @@ static void likeFunc(
     const unsigned char *zEsc = sqlite3_value_text(argv[2]);
     if( zEsc==0 ) return;
     if( sqlite3Utf8CharLen((char*)zEsc, -1)!=1 ){
-      sqlite3_result_error(context, 
+      sqlite3_result_error(context,
           "ESCAPE expression must be a single character", -1);
       return;
     }
@@ -1022,8 +1022,8 @@ static void compileoptionusedFunc(
 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_COMPILEOPTION_DIAGS */
 
 /*
-** Implementation of the sqlite_compileoption_get() function. 
-** The result is a string that identifies the compiler options 
+** Implementation of the sqlite_compileoption_get() function.
+** The result is a string that identifies the compiler options
 ** used to build SQLite.
 */
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_COMPILEOPTION_DIAGS
@@ -1047,7 +1047,7 @@ static void compileoptiongetFunc(
 ** digits. */
 static const char hexdigits[] = {
   '0', '1', '2', '3', '4', '5', '6', '7',
-  '8', '9', 'A', 'B', 'C', 'D', 'E', 'F' 
+  '8', '9', 'A', 'B', 'C', 'D', 'E', 'F'
 };
 
 /*
@@ -1114,7 +1114,7 @@ void sqlite3QuoteValue(StrAccum *pStr, sqlite3_value *pValue){
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementation of the QUOTE() function.  
+** Implementation of the QUOTE() function. 
 **
 ** The quote(X) function returns the text of an SQL literal which is the
 ** value of its argument suitable for inclusion into an SQL statement.
@@ -1140,7 +1140,7 @@ static void quoteFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
 
 /*
 ** The unicode() function.  Return the integer unicode code-point value
-** for the first character of the input string. 
+** for the first character of the input string.
 */
 static void unicodeFunc(
   sqlite3_context *context,
@@ -1249,7 +1249,7 @@ static int strContainsChar(const u8 *zStr, int nStr, u32 ch){
 ** Or, if there is a second argument, then any character that appears in
 ** the second argument is also allowed to appear between pairs of hexadecimal
 ** digits in the first argument. If any other character appears in the
-** first argument, or if one of the allowed characters appears between 
+** first argument, or if one of the allowed characters appears between
 ** two hexadecimal digits that make up a single byte, NULL is returned.
 **
 ** The following expressions are all true:
@@ -1386,7 +1386,7 @@ static void replaceFunc(
   if( zOut==0 ){
     return;
   }
-  loopLimit = nStr - nPattern;  
+  loopLimit = nStr - nPattern; 
   cntExpand = 0;
   for(i=j=0; i<=loopLimit; i++){
     if( zStr[i]!=zPattern[0] || memcmp(&zStr[i], zPattern, nPattern) ){
@@ -1468,7 +1468,7 @@ static void trimFunc(
       SQLITE_SKIP_UTF8(z);
     }
     if( nChar>0 ){
-      azChar = contextMalloc(context, 
+      azChar = contextMalloc(context,
                      ((i64)nChar)*(sizeof(char*)+sizeof(unsigned)));
       if( azChar==0 ){
         return;
@@ -1546,7 +1546,7 @@ static void unknownFunc(
 ** Compute the soundex encoding of a word.
 **
 ** IMP: R-59782-00072 The soundex(X) function returns a string that is the
-** soundex encoding of the string X. 
+** soundex encoding of the string X.
 */
 static void soundexFunc(
   sqlite3_context *context,
@@ -1635,7 +1635,7 @@ static void loadExt(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
 typedef struct SumCtx SumCtx;
 struct SumCtx {
   double rSum;      /* Floating point sum */
-  i64 iSum;         /* Integer sum */   
+  i64 iSum;         /* Integer sum */  
   i64 cnt;          /* Number of elements summed */
   u8 overflow;      /* True if integer overflow seen */
   u8 approx;        /* True if non-integer value was input to the sum */
@@ -1749,13 +1749,13 @@ static void countStep(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED
   /* The sqlite3_aggregate_count() function is deprecated.  But just to make
-  ** sure it still operates correctly, verify that its count agrees with our 
+  ** sure it still operates correctly, verify that its count agrees with our
   ** internal count when using count(*) and when the total count can be
   ** expressed as a 32-bit integer. */
   assert( argc==1 || p==0 || p->n>0x7fffffff || p->bInverse
           || p->n==sqlite3_aggregate_count(context) );
 #endif
-}   
+}  
 static void countFinalize(sqlite3_context *context){
   CountCtx *p;
   p = sqlite3_aggregate_context(context, 0);
@@ -1772,7 +1772,7 @@ static void countInverse(sqlite3_context *ctx, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
     p->bInverse = 1;
 #endif
   }
-}   
+}  
 #else
 # define countInverse 0
 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC */
@@ -1781,8 +1781,8 @@ static void countInverse(sqlite3_context *ctx, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
 ** Routines to implement min() and max() aggregate functions.
 */
 static void minmaxStep(
-  sqlite3_context *context, 
-  int NotUsed, 
+  sqlite3_context *context,
+  int NotUsed,
   sqlite3_value **argv
 ){
   Mem *pArg  = (Mem *)argv[0];
@@ -1944,7 +1944,7 @@ static void groupConcatInverse(
   if( sqlite3_value_type(argv[0])==SQLITE_NULL ) return;
   pGCC = (GroupConcatCtx*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(context, sizeof(*pGCC));
   /* pGCC is always non-NULL since groupConcatStep() will have always
-  ** run frist to initialize it */
+  ** run first to initialize it */
   if( ALWAYS(pGCC) ){
     int nVS;
     /* Must call sqlite3_value_text() to convert the argument into text prior
@@ -1999,7 +1999,7 @@ static void groupConcatValue(sqlite3_context *context){
       sqlite3_result_error_toobig(context);
     }else if( pAccum->accError==SQLITE_NOMEM ){
       sqlite3_result_error_nomem(context);
-    }else{    
+    }else{   
       const char *zText = sqlite3_str_value(pAccum);
       sqlite3_result_text(context, zText, pAccum->nChar, SQLITE_TRANSIENT);
     }
@@ -2047,7 +2047,7 @@ void sqlite3RegisterLikeFunctions(sqlite3 *db, int caseSensitive){
 ** pExpr points to an expression which implements a function.  If
 ** it is appropriate to apply the LIKE optimization to that function
 ** then set aWc[0] through aWc[2] to the wildcard characters and the
-** escape character and then return TRUE.  If the function is not a 
+** escape character and then return TRUE.  If the function is not a
 ** LIKE-style function then return FALSE.
 **
 ** The expression "a LIKE b ESCAPE c" is only considered a valid LIKE
@@ -2411,16 +2411,16 @@ void sqlite3RegisterBuiltinFunctions(void){
     WAGGREGATE(sum,   1,0,0, sumStep, sumFinalize, sumFinalize, sumInverse, 0),
     WAGGREGATE(total, 1,0,0, sumStep,totalFinalize,totalFinalize,sumInverse, 0),
     WAGGREGATE(avg,   1,0,0, sumStep, avgFinalize, avgFinalize, sumInverse, 0),
-    WAGGREGATE(count, 0,0,0, countStep, 
+    WAGGREGATE(count, 0,0,0, countStep,
         countFinalize, countFinalize, countInverse,
         SQLITE_FUNC_COUNT|SQLITE_FUNC_ANYORDER  ),
-    WAGGREGATE(count, 1,0,0, countStep, 
+    WAGGREGATE(count, 1,0,0, countStep,
         countFinalize, countFinalize, countInverse, SQLITE_FUNC_ANYORDER ),
-    WAGGREGATE(group_concat, 1, 0, 0, groupConcatStep, 
+    WAGGREGATE(group_concat, 1, 0, 0, groupConcatStep,
         groupConcatFinalize, groupConcatValue, groupConcatInverse, 0),
-    WAGGREGATE(group_concat, 2, 0, 0, groupConcatStep, 
+    WAGGREGATE(group_concat, 2, 0, 0, groupConcatStep,
         groupConcatFinalize, groupConcatValue, groupConcatInverse, 0),
-  
+ 
     LIKEFUNC(glob, 2, &globInfo, SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE|SQLITE_FUNC_CASE),
 #ifdef SQLITE_CASE_SENSITIVE_LIKE
     LIKEFUNC(like, 2, &likeInfoAlt, SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE|SQLITE_FUNC_CASE),
diff --git a/src/hash.c b/src/hash.c
index 1f0062a8f..8ec043f11 100644
--- a/src/hash.c
+++ b/src/hash.c
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ static void insertElement(
 }
 
 
-/* Resize the hash table so that it cantains "new_size" buckets.
+/* Resize the hash table so that it contains "new_size" buckets.
 **
 ** The hash table might fail to resize if sqlite3_malloc() fails or
 ** if the new size is the same as the prior size.
diff --git a/src/hwtime.h b/src/hwtime.h
index d27204a69..f808fa40e 100644
--- a/src/hwtime.h
+++ b/src/hwtime.h
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
 #define SQLITE_HWTIME_H
 
 /*
-** The following routine only works on pentium-class (or newer) processors.
+** The following routine only works on Pentium-class (or newer) processors.
 ** It uses the RDTSC opcode to read the cycle count value out of the
 ** processor and returns that value.  This can be used for high-res
 ** profiling.
diff --git a/src/insert.c b/src/insert.c
index 423af7723..b9bfb1fed 100644
--- a/src/insert.c
+++ b/src/insert.c
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
 #include "sqliteInt.h"
 
 /*
-** Generate code that will 
+** Generate code that will
 **
 **   (1) acquire a lock for table pTab then
 **   (2) open pTab as cursor iCur.
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ void sqlite3OpenTable(
   assert( pParse->pVdbe!=0 );
   v = pParse->pVdbe;
   assert( opcode==OP_OpenWrite || opcode==OP_OpenRead );
-  sqlite3TableLock(pParse, iDb, pTab->tnum, 
+  sqlite3TableLock(pParse, iDb, pTab->tnum,
                    (opcode==OP_OpenWrite)?1:0, pTab->zName);
   if( HasRowid(pTab) ){
     sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, opcode, iCur, pTab->tnum, iDb, pTab->nNVCol);
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ void sqlite3OpenTable(
 
 /*
 ** Return a pointer to the column affinity string associated with index
-** pIdx. A column affinity string has one character for each column in 
+** pIdx. A column affinity string has one character for each column in
 ** the table, according to the affinity of the column:
 **
 **  Character      Column affinity
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ char *sqlite3TableAffinityStr(sqlite3 *db, const Table *pTab){
       zColAff[j--] = 0;
     }while( j>=0 && zColAff[j]<=SQLITE_AFF_BLOB );
   }
-  return zColAff;  
+  return zColAff; 
 }
 
 /*
@@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ char *sqlite3TableAffinityStr(sqlite3 *db, const Table *pTab){
 ** For STRICT tables:
 ** ------------------
 **
-** Generate an appropropriate OP_TypeCheck opcode that will verify the
+** Generate an appropriate OP_TypeCheck opcode that will verify the
 ** datatypes against the column definitions in pTab.  If iReg==0, that
 ** means an OP_MakeRecord opcode has already been generated and should be
 ** the last opcode generated.  The new OP_TypeCheck needs to be inserted
@@ -220,9 +220,9 @@ void sqlite3TableAffinity(Vdbe *v, Table *pTab, int iReg){
 
 /*
 ** Return non-zero if the table pTab in database iDb or any of its indices
-** have been opened at any point in the VDBE program. This is used to see if 
-** a statement of the form  "INSERT INTO <iDb, pTab> SELECT ..." can 
-** run without using a temporary table for the results of the SELECT. 
+** have been opened at any point in the VDBE program. This is used to see if
+** a statement of the form  "INSERT INTO <iDb, pTab> SELECT ..." can
+** run without using a temporary table for the results of the SELECT.
 */
 static int readsTable(Parse *p, int iDb, Table *pTab){
   Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(p);
@@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ static int autoIncBegin(
 
 /*
 ** This routine generates code that will initialize all of the
-** register used by the autoincrement tracker.  
+** register used by the autoincrement tracker. 
 */
 void sqlite3AutoincrementBegin(Parse *pParse){
   AutoincInfo *p;            /* Information about an AUTOINCREMENT */
@@ -479,7 +479,7 @@ void sqlite3AutoincrementBegin(Parse *pParse){
       /* 8  */ {OP_Goto,    0, 11, 0},
       /* 9  */ {OP_Next,    0,  2, 0},
       /* 10 */ {OP_Integer, 0,  0, 0},
-      /* 11 */ {OP_Close,   0,  0, 0} 
+      /* 11 */ {OP_Close,   0,  0, 0}
     };
     VdbeOp *aOp;
     pDb = &db->aDb[p->iDb];
@@ -817,7 +817,7 @@ void sqlite3Insert(
   **
   ** This is the 2nd template.
   */
-  if( pColumn==0 
+  if( pColumn==0
    && pSelect!=0
    && pTrigger==0
    && xferOptimization(pParse, pTab, pSelect, onError, iDb)
@@ -845,7 +845,7 @@ void sqlite3Insert(
   regData = regRowid+1;
 
   /* If the INSERT statement included an IDLIST term, then make sure
-  ** all elements of the IDLIST really are columns of the table and 
+  ** all elements of the IDLIST really are columns of the table and
   ** remember the column indices.
   **
   ** If the table has an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column and that column
@@ -880,7 +880,7 @@ void sqlite3Insert(
           }
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS
           if( pTab->aCol[j].colFlags & (COLFLAG_STORED|COLFLAG_VIRTUAL) ){
-            sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+            sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
                "cannot INSERT into generated column \"%s\"",
                pTab->aCol[j].zCnName);
             goto insert_cleanup;
@@ -937,7 +937,7 @@ void sqlite3Insert(
     ** the destination table (template 3).
     **
     ** A temp table must be used if the table being updated is also one
-    ** of the tables being read by the SELECT statement.  Also use a 
+    ** of the tables being read by the SELECT statement.  Also use a
     ** temp table in the case of row triggers.
     */
     if( pTrigger || readsTable(pParse, iDb, pTab) ){
@@ -973,7 +973,7 @@ void sqlite3Insert(
       sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regTempRowid);
     }
   }else{
-    /* This is the case if the data for the INSERT is coming from a 
+    /* This is the case if the data for the INSERT is coming from a
     ** single-row VALUES clause
     */
     NameContext sNC;
@@ -992,7 +992,7 @@ void sqlite3Insert(
   }
 
   /* If there is no IDLIST term but the table has an integer primary
-  ** key, the set the ipkColumn variable to the integer primary key 
+  ** key, the set the ipkColumn variable to the integer primary key
   ** column index in the original table definition.
   */
   if( pColumn==0 && nColumn>0 ){
@@ -1023,7 +1023,7 @@ void sqlite3Insert(
       }
     }
     if( nColumn!=(pTab->nCol-nHidden) ){
-      sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+      sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
          "table %S has %d columns but %d values were supplied",
          pTabList->a, pTab->nCol-nHidden, nColumn);
      goto insert_cleanup;
@@ -1033,7 +1033,7 @@ void sqlite3Insert(
     sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "%d values for %d columns", nColumn, pColumn->nId);
     goto insert_cleanup;
   }
-    
+   
   /* Initialize the count of rows to be inserted
   */
   if( (db->flags & SQLITE_CountRows)!=0
@@ -1168,7 +1168,7 @@ void sqlite3Insert(
       }else if( pColumn==0 ){
         /* Hidden columns that are not explicitly named in the INSERT
         ** get there default value */
-        sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(pParse, 
+        sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(pParse,
             sqlite3ColumnExpr(pTab, &pTab->aCol[i]),
             iRegStore);
         continue;
@@ -1180,7 +1180,7 @@ void sqlite3Insert(
       if( j>=pColumn->nId ){
         /* A column not named in the insert column list gets its
         ** default value */
-        sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(pParse, 
+        sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(pParse,
             sqlite3ColumnExpr(pTab, &pTab->aCol[i]),
             iRegStore);
         continue;
@@ -1188,7 +1188,7 @@ void sqlite3Insert(
       k = j;
     }else if( nColumn==0 ){
       /* This is INSERT INTO ... DEFAULT VALUES.  Load the default value. */
-      sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(pParse, 
+      sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(pParse,
           sqlite3ColumnExpr(pTab, &pTab->aCol[i]),
           iRegStore);
       continue;
@@ -1197,7 +1197,7 @@ void sqlite3Insert(
     }
 
     if( useTempTable ){
-      sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, k, iRegStore); 
+      sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, k, iRegStore);
     }else if( pSelect ){
       if( regFromSelect!=regData ){
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SCopy, regFromSelect+k, iRegStore);
@@ -1268,7 +1268,7 @@ void sqlite3Insert(
     }
 
     /* Fire BEFORE or INSTEAD OF triggers */
-    sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE, 
+    sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE,
         pTab, regCols-pTab->nCol-1, onError, endOfLoop);
 
     sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, regCols, pTab->nCol+1);
@@ -1353,7 +1353,7 @@ void sqlite3Insert(
       ** constraints or (b) there are no triggers and this table is not a
       ** parent table in a foreign key constraint. It is safe to set the
       ** flag in the second case as if any REPLACE constraint is hit, an
-      ** OP_Delete or OP_IdxDelete instruction will be executed on each 
+      ** OP_Delete or OP_IdxDelete instruction will be executed on each
       ** cursor that is disturbed. And these instructions both clear the
       ** VdbeCursor.seekResult variable, disabling the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT
       ** functionality.  */
@@ -1379,7 +1379,7 @@ void sqlite3Insert(
 
   if( pTrigger ){
     /* Code AFTER triggers */
-    sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_AFTER, 
+    sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_AFTER,
         pTab, regData-2-pTab->nCol, onError, endOfLoop);
   }
 
@@ -1417,7 +1417,7 @@ insert_end:
   }
 
   /*
-  ** Return the number of rows inserted. If this routine is 
+  ** Return the number of rows inserted. If this routine is
   ** generating code because of a call to sqlite3NestedParse(), do not
   ** invoke the callback function.
   */
@@ -1448,7 +1448,7 @@ insert_cleanup:
 #endif
 
 /*
-** Meanings of bits in of pWalker->eCode for 
+** Meanings of bits in of pWalker->eCode for
 ** sqlite3ExprReferencesUpdatedColumn()
 */
 #define CKCNSTRNT_COLUMN   0x01    /* CHECK constraint uses a changing column */
@@ -1457,7 +1457,7 @@ insert_cleanup:
 /* This is the Walker callback from sqlite3ExprReferencesUpdatedColumn().
 *  Set bit 0x01 of pWalker->eCode if pWalker->eCode to 0 and if this
 ** expression node references any of the
-** columns that are being modifed by an UPDATE statement.
+** columns that are being modified by an UPDATE statement.
 */
 static int checkConstraintExprNode(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
   if( pExpr->op==TK_COLUMN ){
@@ -1529,7 +1529,7 @@ struct IndexIterator {
   union {
     struct {    /* Use this object for eType==0: A Index.pNext list */
       Index *pIdx;   /* The current Index */
-    } lx;      
+    } lx;     
     struct {    /* Use this object for eType==1; Array of IndexListTerm */
       int nIdx;               /* Size of the array */
       IndexListTerm *aIdx;    /* Array of IndexListTerms */
@@ -1573,7 +1573,7 @@ static Index *indexIteratorNext(IndexIterator *pIter, int *pIx){
     return pIter->u.lx.pIdx;
   }
 }
-  
+ 
 /*
 ** Generate code to do constraint checks prior to an INSERT or an UPDATE
 ** on table pTab.
@@ -1680,7 +1680,7 @@ void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
   int *aiChng,         /* column i is unchanged if aiChng[i]<0 */
   Upsert *pUpsert      /* ON CONFLICT clauses, if any.  NULL otherwise */
 ){
-  Vdbe *v;             /* VDBE under constrution */
+  Vdbe *v;             /* VDBE under construction */
   Index *pIdx;         /* Pointer to one of the indices */
   Index *pPk = 0;      /* The PRIMARY KEY index for WITHOUT ROWID tables */
   sqlite3 *db;         /* Database connection */
@@ -1712,9 +1712,9 @@ void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
   assert( v!=0 );
   assert( !IsView(pTab) );  /* This table is not a VIEW */
   nCol = pTab->nCol;
-  
+ 
   /* pPk is the PRIMARY KEY index for WITHOUT ROWID tables and NULL for
-  ** normal rowid tables.  nPkField is the number of key fields in the 
+  ** normal rowid tables.  nPkField is the number of key fields in the
   ** pPk index or 1 for a rowid table.  In other words, nPkField is the
   ** number of fields in the true primary key of the table. */
   if( HasRowid(pTab) ){
@@ -2091,10 +2091,10 @@ void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
         ** the triggers and remove both the table and index b-tree entries.
         **
         ** Otherwise, if there are no triggers or the recursive-triggers
-        ** flag is not set, but the table has one or more indexes, call 
-        ** GenerateRowIndexDelete(). This removes the index b-tree entries 
-        ** only. The table b-tree entry will be replaced by the new entry 
-        ** when it is inserted.  
+        ** flag is not set, but the table has one or more indexes, call
+        ** GenerateRowIndexDelete(). This removes the index b-tree entries
+        ** only. The table b-tree entry will be replaced by the new entry
+        ** when it is inserted. 
         **
         ** If either GenerateRowDelete() or GenerateRowIndexDelete() is called,
         ** also invoke MultiWrite() to indicate that this VDBE may require
@@ -2163,7 +2163,7 @@ void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
       pIdx;
       pIdx = indexIteratorNext(&sIdxIter, &ix)
   ){
-    int regIdx;          /* Range of registers hold conent for pIdx */
+    int regIdx;          /* Range of registers holding content for pIdx */
     int regR;            /* Range of registers holding conflicting PK */
     int iThisCur;        /* Cursor for this UNIQUE index */
     int addrUniqueOk;    /* Jump here if the UNIQUE constraint is satisfied */
@@ -2226,7 +2226,7 @@ void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
 #endif
     sqlite3VdbeReleaseRegisters(pParse, regIdx, pIdx->nColumn, 0, 0);
 
-    /* In an UPDATE operation, if this index is the PRIMARY KEY index 
+    /* In an UPDATE operation, if this index is the PRIMARY KEY index
     ** of a WITHOUT ROWID table and there has been no change the
     ** primary key, then no collision is possible.  The collision detection
     ** logic below can all be skipped. */
@@ -2237,7 +2237,7 @@ void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
 
     /* Find out what action to take in case there is a uniqueness conflict */
     onError = pIdx->onError;
-    if( onError==OE_None ){ 
+    if( onError==OE_None ){
       sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrUniqueOk);
       continue;  /* pIdx is not a UNIQUE index */
     }
@@ -2283,7 +2283,7 @@ void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
 
     /* Check to see if the new index entry will be unique */
     sqlite3VdbeVerifyAbortable(v, onError);
-    addrConflictCk = 
+    addrConflictCk =
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_NoConflict, iThisCur, addrUniqueOk,
                            regIdx, pIdx->nKeyCol); VdbeCoverage(v);
 
@@ -2313,7 +2313,7 @@ void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
           }
         }
         if( isUpdate ){
-          /* If currently processing the PRIMARY KEY of a WITHOUT ROWID 
+          /* If currently processing the PRIMARY KEY of a WITHOUT ROWID
           ** table, only conflict if the new PRIMARY KEY values are actually
           ** different from the old.  See TH3 withoutrowid04.test.
           **
@@ -2323,7 +2323,7 @@ void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
           int addrJump = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+pPk->nKeyCol;
           int op = OP_Ne;
           int regCmp = (IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ? regIdx : regR);
-  
+ 
           for(i=0; i<pPk->nKeyCol; i++){
             char *p4 = (char*)sqlite3LocateCollSeq(pParse, pPk->azColl[i]);
             x = pPk->aiColumn[i];
@@ -2333,7 +2333,7 @@ void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
               op = OP_Eq;
             }
             x = sqlite3TableColumnToStorage(pTab, x);
-            sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, op, 
+            sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, op,
                 regOldData+1+x, addrJump, regCmp+i, p4, P4_COLLSEQ
             );
             sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, SQLITE_NOTNULL);
@@ -2443,7 +2443,7 @@ void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
     }
     sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrUniqueOk);
     if( regR!=regIdx ) sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, regR, nPkField);
-    if( pUpsertClause 
+    if( pUpsertClause
      && upsertIpkReturn
      && sqlite3UpsertNextIsIPK(pUpsertClause)
     ){
@@ -2760,7 +2760,7 @@ static int xferCompatibleIndex(Index *pDest, Index *pSrc){
 **
 **     INSERT INTO tab1 SELECT * FROM tab2;
 **
-** The xfer optimization transfers raw records from tab2 over to tab1.  
+** The xfer optimization transfers raw records from tab2 over to tab1. 
 ** Columns are not decoded and reassembled, which greatly improves
 ** performance.  Raw index records are transferred in the same way.
 **
@@ -2888,8 +2888,8 @@ static int xferOptimization(
     Column *pDestCol = &pDest->aCol[i];
     Column *pSrcCol = &pSrc->aCol[i];
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_HIDDEN_COLUMNS
-    if( (db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_Vacuum)==0 
-     && (pDestCol->colFlags | pSrcCol->colFlags) & COLFLAG_HIDDEN 
+    if( (db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_Vacuum)==0
+     && (pDestCol->colFlags | pSrcCol->colFlags) & COLFLAG_HIDDEN
     ){
       return 0;    /* Neither table may have __hidden__ columns */
     }
@@ -2906,7 +2906,7 @@ static int xferOptimization(
     **
     ** Nevertheless, this is a useful notational shorthand to tell SQLite
     ** to do a bulk transfer all of the content from t1 over to t2.
-    ** 
+    **
     ** We could, in theory, disable this (except for internal use by the
     ** VACUUM command where it is actually needed).  But why do that?  It
     ** seems harmless enough, and provides a useful service.
@@ -2932,7 +2932,7 @@ static int xferOptimization(
     if( pDestCol->affinity!=pSrcCol->affinity ){
       return 0;    /* Affinity must be the same on all columns */
     }
-    if( sqlite3_stricmp(sqlite3ColumnColl(pDestCol), 
+    if( sqlite3_stricmp(sqlite3ColumnColl(pDestCol),
                         sqlite3ColumnColl(pSrcCol))!=0 ){
       return 0;    /* Collating sequence must be the same on all columns */
     }
@@ -2947,7 +2947,7 @@ static int xferOptimization(
       assert( pDestExpr==0 || !ExprHasProperty(pDestExpr, EP_IntValue) );
       assert( pSrcExpr==0 || pSrcExpr->op==TK_SPAN );
       assert( pSrcExpr==0 || !ExprHasProperty(pSrcExpr, EP_IntValue) );
-      if( (pDestExpr==0)!=(pSrcExpr==0) 
+      if( (pDestExpr==0)!=(pSrcExpr==0)
        || (pDestExpr!=0 && strcmp(pDestExpr->u.zToken,
                                        pSrcExpr->u.zToken)!=0)
       ){
@@ -2979,9 +2979,9 @@ static int xferOptimization(
   }
 #endif
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY
-  /* Disallow the transfer optimization if the destination table constains
+  /* Disallow the transfer optimization if the destination table contains
   ** any foreign key constraints.  This is more restrictive than necessary.
-  ** But the main beneficiary of the transfer optimization is the VACUUM 
+  ** But the main beneficiary of the transfer optimization is the VACUUM
   ** command, and the VACUUM command disables foreign key constraints.  So
   ** the extra complication to make this rule less restrictive is probably
   ** not worth the effort.  Ticket [6284df89debdfa61db8073e062908af0c9b6118e]
@@ -3030,7 +3030,7 @@ static int xferOptimization(
     **     (If the destination is not initially empty, the rowid fields
     **     of index entries might need to change.)
     **
-    ** (2) The destination has a unique index.  (The xfer optimization 
+    ** (2) The destination has a unique index.  (The xfer optimization
     **     is unable to test uniqueness.)
     **
     ** (3) onError is something other than OE_Abort and OE_Rollback.
@@ -3106,14 +3106,14 @@ static int xferOptimization(
       /* This INSERT command is part of a VACUUM operation, which guarantees
       ** that the destination table is empty. If all indexed columns use
       ** collation sequence BINARY, then it can also be assumed that the
-      ** index will be populated by inserting keys in strictly sorted 
+      ** index will be populated by inserting keys in strictly sorted
       ** order. In this case, instead of seeking within the b-tree as part
       ** of every OP_IdxInsert opcode, an OP_SeekEnd is added before the
-      ** OP_IdxInsert to seek to the point within the b-tree where each key 
+      ** OP_IdxInsert to seek to the point within the b-tree where each key
       ** should be inserted. This is faster.
       **
       ** If any of the indexed columns use a collation sequence other than
-      ** BINARY, this optimization is disabled. This is because the user 
+      ** BINARY, this optimization is disabled. This is because the user
       ** might change the definition of a collation sequence and then run
       ** a VACUUM command. In that case keys may not be written in strictly
       ** sorted order.  */
@@ -3131,9 +3131,9 @@ static int xferOptimization(
     }
     if( idxInsFlags!=(OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT|OPFLAG_PREFORMAT) ){
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_RowData, iSrc, regData, 1);
-      if( (db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_Vacuum)==0 
-       && !HasRowid(pDest) 
-       && IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pDestIdx) 
+      if( (db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_Vacuum)==0
+       && !HasRowid(pDest)
+       && IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pDestIdx)
       ){
         codeWithoutRowidPreupdate(pParse, pDest, iDest, regData);
       }
diff --git a/src/json.c b/src/json.c
index 8735634c8..8a36136d5 100644
--- a/src/json.c
+++ b/src/json.c
@@ -628,7 +628,7 @@ static void jsonRenderNode(
 }
 
 /*
-** Return a JsonNode and all its descendents as a JSON string.
+** Return a JsonNode and all its descendants as a JSON string.
 */
 static void jsonReturnJson(
   JsonNode *pNode,            /* Node to return */
diff --git a/src/main.c b/src/main.c
index a617dcea5..aa6525e33 100644
--- a/src/main.c
+++ b/src/main.c
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ const char sqlite3_version[] = SQLITE_VERSION;
 #endif
 
 /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-53536-42575 The sqlite3_libversion() function returns
-** a pointer to the to the sqlite3_version[] string constant. 
+** a pointer to the to the sqlite3_version[] string constant.
 */
 const char *sqlite3_libversion(void){ return sqlite3_version; }
 
@@ -167,13 +167,13 @@ char *sqlite3_temp_directory = 0;
 char *sqlite3_data_directory = 0;
 
 /*
-** Initialize SQLite.  
+** Initialize SQLite. 
 **
 ** This routine must be called to initialize the memory allocation,
 ** VFS, and mutex subsystems prior to doing any serious work with
 ** SQLite.  But as long as you do not compile with SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINIT
 ** this routine will be called automatically by key routines such as
-** sqlite3_open().  
+** sqlite3_open(). 
 **
 ** This routine is a no-op except on its very first call for the process,
 ** or for the first call after a call to sqlite3_shutdown.
@@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ int sqlite3_initialize(void){
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }
 
-  /* Make sure the mutex subsystem is initialized.  If unable to 
+  /* Make sure the mutex subsystem is initialized.  If unable to
   ** initialize the mutex subsystem, return early with the error.
   ** If the system is so sick that we are unable to allocate a mutex,
   ** there is not much SQLite is going to be able to do.
@@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ int sqlite3_initialize(void){
     }
 #endif
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-      sqlite3PCacheBufferSetup( sqlite3GlobalConfig.pPage, 
+      sqlite3PCacheBufferSetup( sqlite3GlobalConfig.pPage,
           sqlite3GlobalConfig.szPage, sqlite3GlobalConfig.nPage);
       sqlite3MemoryBarrier();
       sqlite3GlobalConfig.isInit = 1;
@@ -539,7 +539,7 @@ int sqlite3_config(int op, ...){
       ** a single parameter which is a pointer to an integer and writes into
       ** that integer the number of extra bytes per page required for each page
       ** in SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE. */
-      *va_arg(ap, int*) = 
+      *va_arg(ap, int*) =
           sqlite3HeaderSizeBtree() +
           sqlite3HeaderSizePcache() +
           sqlite3HeaderSizePcache1();
@@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ int sqlite3_config(int op, ...){
       sqlite3GlobalConfig.nLookaside = va_arg(ap, int);
       break;
     }
-    
+   
     /* Record a pointer to the logger function and its first argument.
     ** The default is NULL.  Logging is disabled if the function pointer is
     ** NULL.
@@ -751,7 +751,7 @@ int sqlite3_config(int op, ...){
 
 /*
 ** Set up the lookaside buffers for a database connection.
-** Return SQLITE_OK on success.  
+** Return SQLITE_OK on success. 
 ** If lookaside is already active, return SQLITE_BUSY.
 **
 ** The sz parameter is the number of bytes in each lookaside slot.
@@ -766,12 +766,12 @@ static int setupLookaside(sqlite3 *db, void *pBuf, int sz, int cnt){
   sqlite3_int64 szAlloc = sz*(sqlite3_int64)cnt;
   int nBig;   /* Number of full-size slots */
   int nSm;    /* Number smaller LOOKASIDE_SMALL-byte slots */
-  
+ 
   if( sqlite3LookasideUsed(db,0)>0 ){
     return SQLITE_BUSY;
   }
   /* Free any existing lookaside buffer for this handle before
-  ** allocating a new one so we don't have to have space for 
+  ** allocating a new one so we don't have to have space for
   ** both at the same time.
   */
   if( db->lookaside.bMalloced ){
@@ -1051,7 +1051,7 @@ int sqlite3IsBinary(const CollSeq *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** Another built-in collating sequence: NOCASE. 
+** Another built-in collating sequence: NOCASE.
 **
 ** This collating sequence is intended to be used for "case independent
 ** comparison". SQLite's knowledge of upper and lower case equivalents
@@ -1201,7 +1201,7 @@ static void disconnectAllVtab(sqlite3 *db){
 
 /*
 ** Return TRUE if database connection db has unfinalized prepared
-** statements or unfinished sqlite3_backup objects.  
+** statements or unfinished sqlite3_backup objects. 
 */
 static int connectionIsBusy(sqlite3 *db){
   int j;
@@ -1417,7 +1417,7 @@ void sqlite3LeaveMutexAndCloseZombie(sqlite3 *db){
   /* The temp-database schema is allocated differently from the other schema
   ** objects (using sqliteMalloc() directly, instead of sqlite3BtreeSchema()).
   ** So it needs to be freed here. Todo: Why not roll the temp schema into
-  ** the same sqliteMalloc() as the one that allocates the database 
+  ** the same sqliteMalloc() as the one that allocates the database
   ** structure?
   */
   sqlite3DbFree(db, db->aDb[1].pSchema);
@@ -1448,7 +1448,7 @@ void sqlite3RollbackAll(sqlite3 *db, int tripCode){
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
   sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc();
 
-  /* Obtain all b-tree mutexes before making any calls to BtreeRollback(). 
+  /* Obtain all b-tree mutexes before making any calls to BtreeRollback().
   ** This is important in case the transaction being rolled back has
   ** modified the database schema. If the b-tree mutexes are not taken
   ** here, then another shared-cache connection might sneak in between
@@ -1734,7 +1734,7 @@ int sqlite3InvokeBusyHandler(BusyHandler *p){
   }else{
     p->nBusy++;
   }
-  return rc; 
+  return rc;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1765,9 +1765,9 @@ int sqlite3_busy_handler(
 ** be invoked every nOps opcodes.
 */
 void sqlite3_progress_handler(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
   int nOps,
-  int (*xProgress)(void*), 
+  int (*xProgress)(void*),
   void *pArg
 ){
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
@@ -1844,7 +1844,7 @@ int sqlite3_is_interrupted(sqlite3 *db){
 ** This function is exactly the same as sqlite3_create_function(), except
 ** that it is designed to be called by internal code. The difference is
 ** that if a malloc() fails in sqlite3_create_function(), an error code
-** is returned and the mallocFailed flag cleared. 
+** is returned and the mallocFailed flag cleared.
 */
 int sqlite3CreateFunc(
   sqlite3 *db,
@@ -1885,7 +1885,7 @@ int sqlite3CreateFunc(
   assert( SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE==SQLITE_INNOCUOUS );
   extraFlags ^= SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE;  /* tag-20230109-1 */
 
-  
+ 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
   /* If SQLITE_UTF16 is specified as the encoding type, transform this
   ** to one of SQLITE_UTF16LE or SQLITE_UTF16BE using the
@@ -1925,7 +1925,7 @@ int sqlite3CreateFunc(
 #else
   enc = SQLITE_UTF8;
 #endif
-  
+ 
   /* Check if an existing function is being overridden or deleted. If so,
   ** and there are active VMs, then return SQLITE_BUSY. If a function
   ** is being overridden/deleted but there are no active VMs, allow the
@@ -1934,7 +1934,7 @@ int sqlite3CreateFunc(
   p = sqlite3FindFunction(db, zFunctionName, nArg, (u8)enc, 0);
   if( p && (p->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_ENCMASK)==(u32)enc && p->nArg==nArg ){
     if( db->nVdbeActive ){
-      sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY, 
+      sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY,
         "unable to delete/modify user-function due to active statements");
       assert( !db->mallocFailed );
       return SQLITE_BUSY;
@@ -2013,7 +2013,7 @@ static int createFunctionApi(
     pArg->xDestroy = xDestroy;
     pArg->pUserData = p;
   }
-  rc = sqlite3CreateFunc(db, zFunc, nArg, enc, p, 
+  rc = sqlite3CreateFunc(db, zFunc, nArg, enc, p,
       xSFunc, xStep, xFinal, xValue, xInverse, pArg
   );
   if( pArg && pArg->nRef==0 ){
@@ -2130,7 +2130,7 @@ static void sqlite3InvalidFunction(
 **
 ** If the function already exists as a regular global function, then
 ** this routine is a no-op.  If the function does not exist, then create
-** a new one that always throws a run-time error.  
+** a new one that always throws a run-time error. 
 **
 ** When virtual tables intend to provide an overloaded function, they
 ** should call this routine to make sure the global function exists.
@@ -2163,7 +2163,7 @@ int sqlite3_overload_function(
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE
 /*
 ** Register a trace function.  The pArg from the previously registered trace
-** is returned.  
+** is returned. 
 **
 ** A NULL trace function means that no tracing is executes.  A non-NULL
 ** trace is a pointer to a function that is invoked at the start of each
@@ -2214,8 +2214,8 @@ int sqlite3_trace_v2(
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED
 /*
-** Register a profile function.  The pArg from the previously registered 
-** profile function is returned.  
+** Register a profile function.  The pArg from the previously registered
+** profile function is returned. 
 **
 ** A NULL profile function means that no profiling is executes.  A non-NULL
 ** profile is a pointer to a function that is invoked at the conclusion of
@@ -2349,7 +2349,7 @@ void *sqlite3_preupdate_hook(
 */
 int sqlite3_autovacuum_pages(
   sqlite3 *db,                 /* Attach the hook to this database */
-  unsigned int (*xCallback)(void*,const char*,u32,u32,u32), 
+  unsigned int (*xCallback)(void*,const char*,u32,u32,u32),
   void *pArg,                  /* Argument to the function */
   void (*xDestructor)(void*)   /* Destructor for pArg */
 ){
@@ -2377,7 +2377,7 @@ int sqlite3_autovacuum_pages(
 ** Invoke sqlite3_wal_checkpoint if the number of frames in the log file
 ** is greater than sqlite3.pWalArg cast to an integer (the value configured by
 ** wal_autocheckpoint()).
-*/ 
+*/
 int sqlite3WalDefaultHook(
   void *pClientData,     /* Argument */
   sqlite3 *db,           /* Connection */
@@ -2513,7 +2513,7 @@ int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint_v2(
 
 /*
 ** Checkpoint database zDb. If zDb is NULL, or if the buffer zDb points
-** to contains a zero-length string, all attached databases are 
+** to contains a zero-length string, all attached databases are
 ** checkpointed.
 */
 int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){
@@ -2527,9 +2527,9 @@ int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){
 ** Run a checkpoint on database iDb. This is a no-op if database iDb is
 ** not currently open in WAL mode.
 **
-** If a transaction is open on the database being checkpointed, this 
-** function returns SQLITE_LOCKED and a checkpoint is not attempted. If 
-** an error occurs while running the checkpoint, an SQLite error code is 
+** If a transaction is open on the database being checkpointed, this
+** function returns SQLITE_LOCKED and a checkpoint is not attempted. If
+** an error occurs while running the checkpoint, an SQLite error code is
 ** returned (i.e. SQLITE_IOERR). Otherwise, SQLITE_OK.
 **
 ** The mutex on database handle db should be held by the caller. The mutex
@@ -2713,7 +2713,7 @@ int sqlite3_extended_errcode(sqlite3 *db){
 }
 int sqlite3_system_errno(sqlite3 *db){
   return db ? db->iSysErrno : 0;
-}  
+} 
 
 /*
 ** Return a string that describes the kind of error specified in the
@@ -2730,7 +2730,7 @@ const char *sqlite3_errstr(int rc){
 */
 static int createCollation(
   sqlite3* db,
-  const char *zName, 
+  const char *zName,
   u8 enc,
   void* pCtx,
   int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*),
@@ -2738,7 +2738,7 @@ static int createCollation(
 ){
   CollSeq *pColl;
   int enc2;
-  
+ 
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
 
   /* If SQLITE_UTF16 is specified as the encoding type, transform this
@@ -2755,14 +2755,14 @@ static int createCollation(
     return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
   }
 
-  /* Check if this call is removing or replacing an existing collation 
+  /* Check if this call is removing or replacing an existing collation
   ** sequence. If so, and there are active VMs, return busy. If there
   ** are no active VMs, invalidate any pre-compiled statements.
   */
   pColl = sqlite3FindCollSeq(db, (u8)enc2, zName, 0);
   if( pColl && pColl->xCmp ){
     if( db->nVdbeActive ){
-      sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY, 
+      sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY,
         "unable to delete/modify collation sequence due to active statements");
       return SQLITE_BUSY;
     }
@@ -2773,7 +2773,7 @@ static int createCollation(
     ** then any copies made by synthCollSeq() need to be invalidated.
     ** Also, collation destructor - CollSeq.xDel() - function may need
     ** to be called.
-    */ 
+    */
     if( (pColl->enc & ~SQLITE_UTF16_ALIGNED)==enc2 ){
       CollSeq *aColl = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aCollSeq, zName);
       int j;
@@ -2924,7 +2924,7 @@ int sqlite3_limit(sqlite3 *db, int limitId, int newLimit){
 ** query parameter. The second argument contains the URI (or non-URI filename)
 ** itself. When this function is called the *pFlags variable should contain
 ** the default flags to open the database handle with. The value stored in
-** *pFlags may be updated before returning if the URI filename contains 
+** *pFlags may be updated before returning if the URI filename contains
 ** "cache=xxx" or "mode=xxx" query parameters.
 **
 ** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. In this case *ppVfs is set to point to
@@ -2936,7 +2936,7 @@ int sqlite3_limit(sqlite3 *db, int limitId, int newLimit){
 ** the value returned in *pzFile to avoid a memory leak.
 **
 ** If an error occurs, then an SQLite error code is returned and *pzErrMsg
-** may be set to point to a buffer containing an English language error 
+** may be set to point to a buffer containing an English language error
 ** message. It is the responsibility of the caller to eventually release
 ** this buffer by calling sqlite3_free().
 */
@@ -2944,7 +2944,7 @@ int sqlite3ParseUri(
   const char *zDefaultVfs,        /* VFS to use if no "vfs=xxx" query option */
   const char *zUri,               /* Nul-terminated URI to parse */
   unsigned int *pFlags,           /* IN/OUT: SQLITE_OPEN_XXX flags */
-  sqlite3_vfs **ppVfs,            /* OUT: VFS to use */ 
+  sqlite3_vfs **ppVfs,            /* OUT: VFS to use */
   char **pzFile,                  /* OUT: Filename component of URI */
   char **pzErrMsg                 /* OUT: Error message (if rc!=SQLITE_OK) */
 ){
@@ -2967,7 +2967,7 @@ int sqlite3ParseUri(
     int iOut = 0;                 /* Output character index */
     u64 nByte = nUri+8;           /* Bytes of space to allocate */
 
-    /* Make sure the SQLITE_OPEN_URI flag is set to indicate to the VFS xOpen 
+    /* Make sure the SQLITE_OPEN_URI flag is set to indicate to the VFS xOpen
     ** method that there may be extra parameters following the file-name.  */
     flags |= SQLITE_OPEN_URI;
 
@@ -2985,7 +2985,7 @@ int sqlite3ParseUri(
       /* The following condition causes URIs with five leading / characters
       ** like file://///host/path to be converted into UNCs like //host/path.
       ** The correct URI for that UNC has only two or four leading / characters
-      ** file://host/path or file:////host/path.  But 5 leading slashes is a 
+      ** file://host/path or file:////host/path.  But 5 leading slashes is a
       ** common error, we are told, so we handle it as a special case. */
       if( strncmp(zUri+7, "///", 3)==0 ){ iIn++; }
     }else if( strncmp(zUri+5, "//localhost/", 12)==0 ){
@@ -2997,7 +2997,7 @@ int sqlite3ParseUri(
       iIn = 7;
       while( zUri[iIn] && zUri[iIn]!='/' ) iIn++;
       if( iIn!=7 && (iIn!=16 || memcmp("localhost", &zUri[7], 9)) ){
-        *pzErrMsg = sqlite3_mprintf("invalid uri authority: %.*s", 
+        *pzErrMsg = sqlite3_mprintf("invalid uri authority: %.*s",
             iIn-7, &zUri[7]);
         rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
         goto parse_uri_out;
@@ -3005,8 +3005,8 @@ int sqlite3ParseUri(
     }
 #endif
 
-    /* Copy the filename and any query parameters into the zFile buffer. 
-    ** Decode %HH escape codes along the way. 
+    /* Copy the filename and any query parameters into the zFile buffer.
+    ** Decode %HH escape codes along the way.
     **
     ** Within this loop, variable eState may be set to 0, 1 or 2, depending
     ** on the parsing context. As follows:
@@ -3018,9 +3018,9 @@ int sqlite3ParseUri(
     eState = 0;
     while( (c = zUri[iIn])!=0 && c!='#' ){
       iIn++;
-      if( c=='%' 
-       && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn]) 
-       && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn+1]) 
+      if( c=='%'
+       && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn])
+       && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn+1])
       ){
         int octet = (sqlite3HexToInt(zUri[iIn++]) << 4);
         octet += sqlite3HexToInt(zUri[iIn++]);
@@ -3032,7 +3032,7 @@ int sqlite3ParseUri(
           ** case we ignore all text in the remainder of the path, name or
           ** value currently being parsed. So ignore the current character
           ** and skip to the next "?", "=" or "&", as appropriate. */
-          while( (c = zUri[iIn])!=0 && c!='#' 
+          while( (c = zUri[iIn])!=0 && c!='#'
               && (eState!=0 || c!='?')
               && (eState!=1 || (c!='=' && c!='&'))
               && (eState!=2 || c!='&')
@@ -3069,7 +3069,7 @@ int sqlite3ParseUri(
     if( eState==1 ) zFile[iOut++] = '\0';
     memset(zFile+iOut, 0, 4); /* end-of-options + empty journal filenames */
 
-    /* Check if there were any options specified that should be interpreted 
+    /* Check if there were any options specified that should be interpreted
     ** here. Options that are interpreted here include "vfs" and those that
     ** correspond to flags that may be passed to the sqlite3_open_v2()
     ** method. */
@@ -3105,7 +3105,7 @@ int sqlite3ParseUri(
         if( nOpt==4 && memcmp("mode", zOpt, 4)==0 ){
           static struct OpenMode aOpenMode[] = {
             { "ro",  SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY },
-            { "rw",  SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE }, 
+            { "rw",  SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE },
             { "rwc", SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE },
             { "memory", SQLITE_OPEN_MEMORY },
             { 0, 0 }
@@ -3192,7 +3192,7 @@ static const char *uriParameter(const char *zFilename, const char *zParam){
 
 /*
 ** This routine does the work of opening a database on behalf of
-** sqlite3_open() and sqlite3_open16(). The database filename "zFilename"  
+** sqlite3_open() and sqlite3_open16(). The database filename "zFilename" 
 ** is UTF-8 encoded.
 */
 static int openDatabase(
@@ -3245,11 +3245,11 @@ static int openDatabase(
   flags &=  ~( SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE |
                SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE |
                SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB |
-               SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB | 
-               SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB | 
-               SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL | 
-               SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL | 
-               SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL | 
+               SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB |
+               SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB |
+               SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL |
+               SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL |
+               SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL |
                SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL |
                SQLITE_OPEN_NOMUTEX |
                SQLITE_OPEN_FULLMUTEX |
@@ -3259,7 +3259,7 @@ static int openDatabase(
   /* Allocate the sqlite data structure */
   db = sqlite3MallocZero( sizeof(sqlite3) );
   if( db==0 ) goto opendb_out;
-  if( isThreadsafe 
+  if( isThreadsafe
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_MULTITHREADED_CHECKS
    || sqlite3GlobalConfig.bCoreMutex
 #endif
@@ -3291,7 +3291,7 @@ static int openDatabase(
   db->nextPagesize = 0;
   db->init.azInit = sqlite3StdType; /* Any array of string ptrs will do */
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SORTER_MMAP
-  /* Beginning with version 3.37.0, using the VFS xFetch() API to memory-map 
+  /* Beginning with version 3.37.0, using the VFS xFetch() API to memory-map
   ** the temporary files used to do external sorts (see code in vdbesort.c)
   ** is disabled. It can still be used either by defining
   ** SQLITE_ENABLE_SORTER_MMAP at compile time or by using the
@@ -3310,14 +3310,14 @@ static int openDatabase(
 **
 **    SQLITE_DQS     SQLITE_DBCONFIG_DQS_DDL    SQLITE_DBCONFIG_DQS_DML
 **    ----------     -----------------------    -----------------------
-**     undefined               on                          on   
+**     undefined               on                          on
 **         3                   on                          on
 **         2                   on                         off
 **         1                  off                          on
 **         0                  off                         off
 **
 ** Legacy behavior is 3 (double-quoted string literals are allowed anywhere)
-** and so that is the default.  But developers are encouranged to use
+** and so that is the default.  But developers are encouraged to use
 ** -DSQLITE_DQS=0 (best) or -DSQLITE_DQS=1 (second choice) if possible.
 */
 #if !defined(SQLITE_DQS)
@@ -3406,7 +3406,7 @@ static int openDatabase(
 
   /* Parse the filename/URI argument
   **
-  ** Only allow sensible combinations of bits in the flags argument.  
+  ** Only allow sensible combinations of bits in the flags argument. 
   ** Throw an error if any non-sense combination is used.  If we
   ** do not block illegal combinations here, it could trigger
   ** assert() statements in deeper layers.  Sensible combinations
@@ -3460,7 +3460,7 @@ static int openDatabase(
   db->aDb[1].pSchema = sqlite3SchemaGet(db, 0);
 
   /* The default safety_level for the main database is FULL; for the temp
-  ** database it is OFF. This matches the pager layer defaults.  
+  ** database it is OFF. This matches the pager layer defaults. 
   */
   db->aDb[0].zDbSName = "main";
   db->aDb[0].safety_level = SQLITE_DEFAULT_SYNCHRONOUS+1;
@@ -3499,7 +3499,7 @@ static int openDatabase(
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_INTERNAL_FUNCTIONS
   /* Testing use only!!! The -DSQLITE_ENABLE_INTERNAL_FUNCTIONS=1 compile-time
-  ** option gives access to internal functions by default.  
+  ** option gives access to internal functions by default. 
   ** Testing use only!!! */
   db->mDbFlags |= DBFLAG_InternalFunc;
 #endif
@@ -3553,8 +3553,8 @@ opendb_out:
 ** Open a new database handle.
 */
 int sqlite3_open(
-  const char *zFilename, 
-  sqlite3 **ppDb 
+  const char *zFilename,
+  sqlite3 **ppDb
 ){
   return openDatabase(zFilename, ppDb,
                       SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE, 0);
@@ -3573,7 +3573,7 @@ int sqlite3_open_v2(
 ** Open a new database handle.
 */
 int sqlite3_open16(
-  const void *zFilename, 
+  const void *zFilename,
   sqlite3 **ppDb
 ){
   char const *zFilename8;   /* zFilename encoded in UTF-8 instead of UTF-16 */
@@ -3612,9 +3612,9 @@ int sqlite3_open16(
 ** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db.
 */
 int sqlite3_create_collation(
-  sqlite3* db, 
-  const char *zName, 
-  int enc, 
+  sqlite3* db,
+  const char *zName,
+  int enc,
   void* pCtx,
   int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*)
 ){
@@ -3625,9 +3625,9 @@ int sqlite3_create_collation(
 ** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db.
 */
 int sqlite3_create_collation_v2(
-  sqlite3* db, 
-  const char *zName, 
-  int enc, 
+  sqlite3* db,
+  const char *zName,
+  int enc,
   void* pCtx,
   int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*),
   void(*xDel)(void*)
@@ -3650,9 +3650,9 @@ int sqlite3_create_collation_v2(
 ** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db.
 */
 int sqlite3_create_collation16(
-  sqlite3* db, 
+  sqlite3* db,
   const void *zName,
-  int enc, 
+  int enc,
   void* pCtx,
   int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*)
 ){
@@ -3680,8 +3680,8 @@ int sqlite3_create_collation16(
 ** db. Replace any previously installed collation sequence factory.
 */
 int sqlite3_collation_needed(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
-  void *pCollNeededArg, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
+  void *pCollNeededArg,
   void(*xCollNeeded)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const char*)
 ){
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
@@ -3701,8 +3701,8 @@ int sqlite3_collation_needed(
 ** db. Replace any previously installed collation sequence factory.
 */
 int sqlite3_collation_needed16(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
-  void *pCollNeededArg, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
+  void *pCollNeededArg,
   void(*xCollNeeded16)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const void*)
 ){
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
@@ -3852,7 +3852,7 @@ int sqlite3_table_column_metadata(
 
   /* Find the column for which info is requested */
   if( zColumnName==0 ){
-    /* Query for existance of table only */
+    /* Query for existence of table only */
   }else{
     for(iCol=0; iCol<pTab->nCol; iCol++){
       pCol = &pTab->aCol[iCol];
@@ -3874,13 +3874,13 @@ int sqlite3_table_column_metadata(
   /* The following block stores the meta information that will be returned
   ** to the caller in local variables zDataType, zCollSeq, notnull, primarykey
   ** and autoinc. At this point there are two possibilities:
-  ** 
-  **     1. The specified column name was rowid", "oid" or "_rowid_" 
-  **        and there is no explicitly declared IPK column. 
   **
-  **     2. The table is not a view and the column name identified an 
+  **     1. The specified column name was rowid", "oid" or "_rowid_"
+  **        and there is no explicitly declared IPK column.
+  **
+  **     2. The table is not a view and the column name identified an
   **        explicitly declared column. Copy meta information from *pCol.
-  */ 
+  */
   if( pCol ){
     zDataType = sqlite3ColumnType(pCol,0);
     zCollSeq = sqlite3ColumnColl(pCol);
@@ -3930,7 +3930,7 @@ int sqlite3_sleep(int ms){
   pVfs = sqlite3_vfs_find(0);
   if( pVfs==0 ) return 0;
 
-  /* This function works in milliseconds, but the underlying OsSleep() 
+  /* This function works in milliseconds, but the underlying OsSleep()
   ** API uses microseconds. Hence the 1000's.
   */
   rc = (sqlite3OsSleep(pVfs, ms<0 ? 0 : 1000*ms)/1000);
@@ -4110,7 +4110,7 @@ int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
     /*
     **  sqlite3_test_control(BENIGN_MALLOC_HOOKS, xBegin, xEnd)
     **
-    ** Register hooks to call to indicate which malloc() failures 
+    ** Register hooks to call to indicate which malloc() failures
     ** are benign.
     */
     case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_BENIGN_MALLOC_HOOKS: {
@@ -4230,7 +4230,7 @@ int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
     **      10     little-endian, determined at run-time
     **  432101     big-endian,    determined at compile-time
     **  123410     little-endian, determined at compile-time
-    */ 
+    */
     case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_BYTEORDER: {
       rc = SQLITE_BYTEORDER*100 + SQLITE_LITTLEENDIAN*10 + SQLITE_BIGENDIAN;
       break;
@@ -4238,7 +4238,7 @@ int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
 
     /*  sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_OPTIMIZATIONS, sqlite3 *db, int N)
     **
-    ** Enable or disable various optimizations for testing purposes.  The 
+    ** Enable or disable various optimizations for testing purposes.  The
     ** argument N is a bitmask of optimizations to be disabled.  For normal
     ** operation N should be 0.  The idea is that a test program (like the
     ** SQL Logic Test or SLT test module) can run the same SQL multiple times
@@ -4292,7 +4292,7 @@ int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
     ** formed and never corrupt.  This flag is clear by default, indicating that
     ** database files might have arbitrary corruption.  Setting the flag during
     ** testing causes certain assert() statements in the code to be activated
-    ** that demonstrat invariants on well-formed database files.
+    ** that demonstrate invariants on well-formed database files.
     */
     case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_NEVER_CORRUPT: {
       sqlite3GlobalConfig.neverCorrupt = va_arg(ap, int);
@@ -4328,7 +4328,7 @@ int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
 
     /*   sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_VDBE_COVERAGE, xCallback, ptr);
     **
-    ** Set the VDBE coverage callback function to xCallback with context 
+    ** Set the VDBE coverage callback function to xCallback with context
     ** pointer ptr.
     */
     case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_VDBE_COVERAGE: {
@@ -4442,7 +4442,7 @@ int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
 
     /*  sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_TRACEFLAGS, op, ptr)
     **
-    **  "ptr" is a pointer to a u32.  
+    **  "ptr" is a pointer to a u32. 
     **
     **   op==0       Store the current sqlite3TreeTrace in *ptr
     **   op==1       Set sqlite3TreeTrace to the value *ptr
@@ -4481,7 +4481,7 @@ int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
       *pI2 = sqlite3LogEst(*pU64);
       break;
     }
- 
+
 
 #if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_WSD)
     /* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_TUNE, id, *piValue)
@@ -4597,7 +4597,7 @@ void sqlite3_free_filename(const char *p){
 
 /*
 ** This is a utility routine, useful to VFS implementations, that checks
-** to see if a database file was a URI that contained a specific query 
+** to see if a database file was a URI that contained a specific query
 ** parameter, and if so obtains the value of the query parameter.
 **
 ** The zFilename argument is the filename pointer passed into the xOpen()
@@ -4745,11 +4745,11 @@ int sqlite3_db_readonly(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDbName){
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SNAPSHOT
 /*
-** Obtain a snapshot handle for the snapshot of database zDb currently 
+** Obtain a snapshot handle for the snapshot of database zDb currently
 ** being read by handle db.
 */
 int sqlite3_snapshot_get(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
   const char *zDb,
   sqlite3_snapshot **ppSnapshot
 ){
@@ -4782,11 +4782,11 @@ int sqlite3_snapshot_get(
 }
 
 /*
-** Open a read-transaction on the snapshot idendified by pSnapshot.
+** Open a read-transaction on the snapshot identified by pSnapshot.
 */
 int sqlite3_snapshot_open(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
-  const char *zDb, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
+  const char *zDb,
   sqlite3_snapshot *pSnapshot
 ){
   int rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
@@ -4888,7 +4888,7 @@ int sqlite3_compileoption_used(const char *zOptName){
   int i, n;
   int nOpt;
   const char **azCompileOpt;
- 
+
 #if SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
   if( zOptName==0 ){
     (void)SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
@@ -4901,7 +4901,7 @@ int sqlite3_compileoption_used(const char *zOptName){
   if( sqlite3StrNICmp(zOptName, "SQLITE_", 7)==0 ) zOptName += 7;
   n = sqlite3Strlen30(zOptName);
 
-  /* Since nOpt is normally in single digits, a linear search is 
+  /* Since nOpt is normally in single digits, a linear search is
   ** adequate. No need for a binary search. */
   for(i=0; i<nOpt; i++){
     if( sqlite3StrNICmp(zOptName, azCompileOpt[i], n)==0
diff --git a/src/mem1.c b/src/mem1.c
index 512ab3747..12f96beae 100644
--- a/src/mem1.c
+++ b/src/mem1.c
@@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ static void *sqlite3MemMalloc(int nByte){
 ** or sqlite3MemRealloc().
 **
 ** For this low-level routine, we already know that pPrior!=0 since
-** cases where pPrior==0 will have been intecepted and dealt with
+** cases where pPrior==0 will have been intercepted and dealt with
 ** by higher-level routines.
 */
 static void sqlite3MemFree(void *pPrior){
@@ -244,13 +244,13 @@ static int sqlite3MemInit(void *NotUsed){
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }
   len = sizeof(cpuCount);
-  /* One usually wants to use hw.acctivecpu for MT decisions, but not here */
+  /* One usually wants to use hw.activecpu for MT decisions, but not here */
   sysctlbyname("hw.ncpu", &cpuCount, &len, NULL, 0);
   if( cpuCount>1 ){
     /* defer MT decisions to system malloc */
     _sqliteZone_ = malloc_default_zone();
   }else{
-    /* only 1 core, use our own zone to contention over global locks, 
+    /* only 1 core, use our own zone to contention over global locks,
     ** e.g. we have our own dedicated locks */
     _sqliteZone_ = malloc_create_zone(4096, 0);
     malloc_set_zone_name(_sqliteZone_, "Sqlite_Heap");
diff --git a/src/mutex_unix.c b/src/mutex_unix.c
index 2afaddec6..ac4331a67 100644
--- a/src/mutex_unix.c
+++ b/src/mutex_unix.c
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
 
 /*
 ** The sqlite3_mutex.id, sqlite3_mutex.nRef, and sqlite3_mutex.owner fields
-** are necessary under two condidtions:  (1) Debug builds and (2) using
+** are necessary under two conditions:  (1) Debug builds and (2) using
 ** home-grown mutexes.  Encapsulate these conditions into a single #define.
 */
 #if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) || defined(SQLITE_HOMEGROWN_RECURSIVE_MUTEX)
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mutex {
 ** there might be race conditions that can cause these routines to
 ** deliver incorrect results.  In particular, if pthread_equal() is
 ** not an atomic operation, then these routines might delivery
-** incorrect results.  On most platforms, pthread_equal() is a 
+** incorrect results.  On most platforms, pthread_equal() is a
 ** comparison of two integers and is therefore atomic.  But we are
 ** told that HPUX is not such a platform.  If so, then these routines
 ** will not always work correctly on HPUX.
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ static int pthreadMutexEnd(void){ return SQLITE_OK; }
 **
 ** Note that if one of the dynamic mutex parameters (SQLITE_MUTEX_FAST
 ** or SQLITE_MUTEX_RECURSIVE) is used then sqlite3_mutex_alloc()
-** returns a different mutex on every call.  But for the static 
+** returns a different mutex on every call.  But for the static
 ** mutex types, the same mutex is returned on every call that has
 ** the same type number.
 */
@@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ static void pthreadMutexEnter(sqlite3_mutex *p){
   ** is atomic - that it cannot be deceived into thinking self
   ** and p->owner are equal if p->owner changes between two values
   ** that are not equal to self while the comparison is taking place.
-  ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that 
+  ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that
   ** separate processes cannot read different values from the same
   ** address at the same time.  If either of these two conditions
   ** are not met, then the mutexes will fail and problems will result.
@@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ static int pthreadMutexTry(sqlite3_mutex *p){
   ** is atomic - that it cannot be deceived into thinking self
   ** and p->owner are equal if p->owner changes between two values
   ** that are not equal to self while the comparison is taking place.
-  ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that 
+  ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that
   ** separate processes cannot read different values from the same
   ** address at the same time.  If either of these two conditions
   ** are not met, then the mutexes will fail and problems will result.
diff --git a/src/mutex_w32.c b/src/mutex_w32.c
index 09deda409..e0e0dfb06 100644
--- a/src/mutex_w32.c
+++ b/src/mutex_w32.c
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mutex {
   CRITICAL_SECTION mutex;    /* Mutex controlling the lock */
   int id;                    /* Mutex type */
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
-  volatile int nRef;         /* Number of enterances */
+  volatile int nRef;         /* Number of entrances */
   volatile DWORD owner;      /* Thread holding this mutex */
   volatile LONG trace;       /* True to trace changes */
 #endif
diff --git a/src/os.c b/src/os.c
index e2914e03c..a9fc732e7 100644
--- a/src/os.c
+++ b/src/os.c
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ int sqlite3OsFileControl(sqlite3_file *id, int op, void *pArg){
     /* Faults are not injected into COMMIT_PHASETWO because, assuming SQLite
     ** is using a regular VFS, it is called after the corresponding
     ** transaction has been committed. Injecting a fault at this point
-    ** confuses the test scripts - the COMMIT comand returns SQLITE_NOMEM
+    ** confuses the test scripts - the COMMIT command returns SQLITE_NOMEM
     ** but the transaction is committed anyway.
     **
     ** The core must call OsFileControl() though, not OsFileControlHint(),
@@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ int sqlite3OsRandomness(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, int nByte, char *zBufOut){
   }else{
     return pVfs->xRandomness(pVfs, nByte, zBufOut);
   }
-  
+
 }
 int sqlite3OsSleep(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, int nMicro){
   return pVfs->xSleep(pVfs, nMicro);
diff --git a/src/os_unix.c b/src/os_unix.c
index d0ebb86b9..aed4ac213 100644
--- a/src/os_unix.c
+++ b/src/os_unix.c
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
 ** This source file is organized into divisions where the logic for various
 ** subfunctions is contained within the appropriate division.  PLEASE
 ** KEEP THE STRUCTURE OF THIS FILE INTACT.  New code should be placed
-** in the correct division and should be clearly labeled.
+** in the correct division and should be clearly labelled.
 **
 ** The layout of divisions is as follows:
 **
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@
 ** Styles 4, 5, and 7 are only available of SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
 ** is defined to 1.  The SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE also enables automatic
 ** selection of the appropriate locking style based on the filesystem
-** where the database is located.  
+** where the database is located.
 */
 #if !defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE)
 #  if defined(__APPLE__)
@@ -226,7 +226,7 @@
 #endif
 
 /*
-** Only set the lastErrno if the error code is a real error and not 
+** Only set the lastErrno if the error code is a real error and not
 ** a normal expected return code of SQLITE_BUSY or SQLITE_OK
 */
 #define IS_LOCK_ERROR(x)  ((x != SQLITE_OK) && (x != SQLITE_BUSY))
@@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ struct unixFile {
   ** whenever any part of the database changes.  An assertion fault will
   ** occur if a file is updated without also updating the transaction
   ** counter.  This test is made to avoid new problems similar to the
-  ** one described by ticket #3584. 
+  ** one described by ticket #3584.
   */
   unsigned char transCntrChng;   /* True if the transaction counter changed */
   unsigned char dbUpdate;        /* True if any part of database file changed */
@@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ struct unixFile {
 #endif
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST
-  /* In test mode, increase the size of this structure a bit so that 
+  /* In test mode, increase the size of this structure a bit so that
   ** it is larger than the struct CrashFile defined in test6.c.
   */
   char aPadding[32];
@@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ static struct unix_syscall {
 #ifdef __DJGPP__
   { "fstat",        0,                 0  },
 #define osFstat(a,b,c)    0
-#else     
+#else   
   { "fstat",        (sqlite3_syscall_ptr)fstat,      0  },
 #define osFstat     ((int(*)(int,struct stat*))aSyscall[5].pCurrent)
 #endif
@@ -609,7 +609,7 @@ static int robustFchown(int fd, uid_t uid, gid_t gid){
 
 /*
 ** This is the xSetSystemCall() method of sqlite3_vfs for all of the
-** "unix" VFSes.  Return SQLITE_OK opon successfully updating the
+** "unix" VFSes.  Return SQLITE_OK upon successfully updating the
 ** system call pointer, or SQLITE_NOTFOUND if there is no configurable
 ** system call named zName.
 */
@@ -692,7 +692,7 @@ static const char *unixNextSystemCall(sqlite3_vfs *p, const char *zName){
 
 /*
 ** Do not accept any file descriptor less than this value, in order to avoid
-** opening database file using file descriptors that are commonly used for 
+** opening database file using file descriptors that are commonly used for
 ** standard input, output, and error.
 */
 #ifndef SQLITE_MINIMUM_FILE_DESCRIPTOR
@@ -734,7 +734,7 @@ static int robust_open(const char *z, int f, mode_t m){
       (void)osUnlink(z);
     }
     osClose(fd);
-    sqlite3_log(SQLITE_WARNING, 
+    sqlite3_log(SQLITE_WARNING,
                 "attempt to open \"%s\" as file descriptor %d", z, fd);
     fd = -1;
     if( osOpen("/dev/null", O_RDONLY, m)<0 ) break;
@@ -742,9 +742,9 @@ static int robust_open(const char *z, int f, mode_t m){
   if( fd>=0 ){
     if( m!=0 ){
       struct stat statbuf;
-      if( osFstat(fd, &statbuf)==0 
+      if( osFstat(fd, &statbuf)==0
        && statbuf.st_size==0
-       && (statbuf.st_mode&0777)!=m 
+       && (statbuf.st_mode&0777)!=m
       ){
         osFchmod(fd, m);
       }
@@ -759,11 +759,11 @@ static int robust_open(const char *z, int f, mode_t m){
 /*
 ** Helper functions to obtain and relinquish the global mutex. The
 ** global mutex is used to protect the unixInodeInfo and
-** vxworksFileId objects used by this file, all of which may be 
+** vxworksFileId objects used by this file, all of which may be
 ** shared by multiple threads.
 **
-** Function unixMutexHeld() is used to assert() that the global mutex 
-** is held when required. This function is only used as part of assert() 
+** Function unixMutexHeld() is used to assert() that the global mutex
+** is held when required. This function is only used as part of assert()
 ** statements. e.g.
 **
 **   unixEnterMutex()
@@ -885,7 +885,7 @@ static int lockTrace(int fd, int op, struct flock *p){
 static int robust_ftruncate(int h, sqlite3_int64 sz){
   int rc;
 #ifdef __ANDROID__
-  /* On Android, ftruncate() always uses 32-bit offsets, even if 
+  /* On Android, ftruncate() always uses 32-bit offsets, even if
   ** _FILE_OFFSET_BITS=64 is defined. This means it is unsafe to attempt to
   ** truncate a file to any size larger than 2GiB. Silently ignore any
   ** such attempts.  */
@@ -901,32 +901,32 @@ static int robust_ftruncate(int h, sqlite3_int64 sz){
 ** This routine translates a standard POSIX errno code into something
 ** useful to the clients of the sqlite3 functions.  Specifically, it is
 ** intended to translate a variety of "try again" errors into SQLITE_BUSY
-** and a variety of "please close the file descriptor NOW" errors into 
+** and a variety of "please close the file descriptor NOW" errors into
 ** SQLITE_IOERR
-** 
+**
 ** Errors during initialization of locks, or file system support for locks,
 ** should handle ENOLCK, ENOTSUP, EOPNOTSUPP separately.
 */
 static int sqliteErrorFromPosixError(int posixError, int sqliteIOErr) {
-  assert( (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK) || 
-          (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK) || 
+  assert( (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK) ||
+          (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK) ||
           (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_RDLOCK) ||
           (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK) );
   switch (posixError) {
-  case EACCES: 
+  case EACCES:
   case EAGAIN:
   case ETIMEDOUT:
   case EBUSY:
   case EINTR:
-  case ENOLCK:  
-    /* random NFS retry error, unless during file system support 
+  case ENOLCK:
+    /* random NFS retry error, unless during file system support
      * introspection, in which it actually means what it says */
     return SQLITE_BUSY;
-    
-  case EPERM: 
+  
+  case EPERM:
     return SQLITE_PERM;
-    
-  default: 
+  
+  default:
     return sqliteIOErr;
   }
 }
@@ -941,7 +941,7 @@ static int sqliteErrorFromPosixError(int posixError, int sqliteIOErr) {
 **
 ** A pointer to an instance of the following structure can be used as a
 ** unique file ID in VxWorks.  Each instance of this structure contains
-** a copy of the canonical filename.  There is also a reference count.  
+** a copy of the canonical filename.  There is also a reference count.
 ** The structure is reclaimed when the number of pointers to it drops to
 ** zero.
 **
@@ -957,7 +957,7 @@ struct vxworksFileId {
 };
 
 #if OS_VXWORKS
-/* 
+/*
 ** All unique filenames are held on a linked list headed by this
 ** variable:
 */
@@ -1029,7 +1029,7 @@ static struct vxworksFileId *vxworksFindFileId(const char *zAbsoluteName){
   */
   unixEnterMutex();
   for(pCandidate=vxworksFileList; pCandidate; pCandidate=pCandidate->pNext){
-    if( pCandidate->nName==n 
+    if( pCandidate->nName==n
      && memcmp(pCandidate->zCanonicalName, pNew->zCanonicalName, n)==0
     ){
        sqlite3_free(pNew);
@@ -1122,7 +1122,7 @@ static void vxworksReleaseFileId(struct vxworksFileId *pId){
 ** cnt>0 means there are cnt shared locks on the file.
 **
 ** Any attempt to lock or unlock a file first checks the locking
-** structure.  The fcntl() system call is only invoked to set a 
+** structure.  The fcntl() system call is only invoked to set a
 ** POSIX lock if the internal lock structure transitions between
 ** a locked and an unlocked state.
 **
@@ -1131,7 +1131,7 @@ static void vxworksReleaseFileId(struct vxworksFileId *pId){
 ** If you close a file descriptor that points to a file that has locks,
 ** all locks on that file that are owned by the current process are
 ** released.  To work around this problem, each unixInodeInfo object
-** maintains a count of the number of pending locks on tha inode.
+** maintains a count of the number of pending locks on the inode.
 ** When an attempt is made to close an unixFile, if there are
 ** other unixFile open on the same inode that are holding locks, the call
 ** to close() the file descriptor is deferred until all of the locks clear.
@@ -1145,7 +1145,7 @@ static void vxworksReleaseFileId(struct vxworksFileId *pId){
 ** not posix compliant.  Under LinuxThreads, a lock created by thread
 ** A cannot be modified or overridden by a different thread B.
 ** Only thread A can modify the lock.  Locking behavior is correct
-** if the appliation uses the newer Native Posix Thread Library (NPTL)
+** if the application uses the newer Native Posix Thread Library (NPTL)
 ** on linux - with NPTL a lock created by thread A can override locks
 ** in thread B.  But there is no way to know at compile-time which
 ** threading library is being used.  So there is no way to know at
@@ -1155,7 +1155,7 @@ static void vxworksReleaseFileId(struct vxworksFileId *pId){
 **
 ** SQLite used to support LinuxThreads.  But support for LinuxThreads
 ** was dropped beginning with version 3.7.0.  SQLite will still work with
-** LinuxThreads provided that (1) there is no more than one connection 
+** LinuxThreads provided that (1) there is no more than one connection
 ** per database file in the same process and (2) database connections
 ** do not move across threads.
 */
@@ -1172,7 +1172,7 @@ struct unixFileId {
   /* We are told that some versions of Android contain a bug that
   ** sizes ino_t at only 32-bits instead of 64-bits. (See
   ** https://android-review.googlesource.com/#/c/115351/3/dist/sqlite3.c)
-  ** To work around this, always allocate 64-bits for the inode number.  
+  ** To work around this, always allocate 64-bits for the inode number.
   ** On small machines that only have 32-bit inodes, this wastes 4 bytes,
   ** but that should not be a big deal. */
   /* WAS:  ino_t ino;   */
@@ -1260,7 +1260,7 @@ int unixFileMutexNotheld(unixFile *pFile){
 ** strerror_r().
 **
 ** The first argument passed to the macro should be the error code that
-** will be returned to SQLite (e.g. SQLITE_IOERR_DELETE, SQLITE_CANTOPEN). 
+** will be returned to SQLite (e.g. SQLITE_IOERR_DELETE, SQLITE_CANTOPEN).
 ** The two subsequent arguments should be the name of the OS function that
 ** failed (e.g. "unlink", "open") and the associated file-system path,
 ** if any.
@@ -1278,7 +1278,7 @@ static int unixLogErrorAtLine(
   /* If this is not a threadsafe build (SQLITE_THREADSAFE==0), then use
   ** the strerror() function to obtain the human-readable error message
   ** equivalent to errno. Otherwise, use strerror_r().
-  */ 
+  */
 #if SQLITE_THREADSAFE && defined(HAVE_STRERROR_R)
   char aErr[80];
   memset(aErr, 0, sizeof(aErr));
@@ -1286,18 +1286,18 @@ static int unixLogErrorAtLine(
 
   /* If STRERROR_R_CHAR_P (set by autoconf scripts) or __USE_GNU is defined,
   ** assume that the system provides the GNU version of strerror_r() that
-  ** returns a pointer to a buffer containing the error message. That pointer 
-  ** may point to aErr[], or it may point to some static storage somewhere. 
-  ** Otherwise, assume that the system provides the POSIX version of 
+  ** returns a pointer to a buffer containing the error message. That pointer
+  ** may point to aErr[], or it may point to some static storage somewhere.
+  ** Otherwise, assume that the system provides the POSIX version of
   ** strerror_r(), which always writes an error message into aErr[].
   **
   ** If the code incorrectly assumes that it is the POSIX version that is
   ** available, the error message will often be an empty string. Not a
-  ** huge problem. Incorrectly concluding that the GNU version is available 
+  ** huge problem. Incorrectly concluding that the GNU version is available
   ** could lead to a segfault though.
   */
 #if defined(STRERROR_R_CHAR_P) || defined(__USE_GNU)
-  zErr = 
+  zErr =
 # endif
   strerror_r(iErrno, aErr, sizeof(aErr)-1);
 
@@ -1347,8 +1347,8 @@ static void storeLastErrno(unixFile *pFile, int error){
 }
 
 /*
-** Close all file descriptors accumuated in the unixInodeInfo->pUnused list.
-*/ 
+** Close all file descriptors accumulated in the unixInodeInfo->pUnused list.
+*/
 static void closePendingFds(unixFile *pFile){
   unixInodeInfo *pInode = pFile->pInode;
   UnixUnusedFd *p;
@@ -1503,7 +1503,7 @@ static int fileHasMoved(unixFile *pFile){
 #else
   struct stat buf;
   return pFile->pInode!=0 &&
-      (osStat(pFile->zPath, &buf)!=0 
+      (osStat(pFile->zPath, &buf)!=0
          || (u64)buf.st_ino!=pFile->pInode->fileId.ino);
 #endif
 }
@@ -1584,7 +1584,7 @@ static int unixCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
     }
   }
 #endif
-  
+
   sqlite3_mutex_leave(pFile->pInode->pLockMutex);
   OSTRACE(("TEST WR-LOCK %d %d %d (unix)\n", pFile->h, rc, reserved));
 
@@ -1634,7 +1634,7 @@ static int osSetPosixAdvisoryLock(
 
 
 /*
-** Attempt to set a system-lock on the file pFile.  The lock is 
+** Attempt to set a system-lock on the file pFile.  The lock is
 ** described by pLock.
 **
 ** If the pFile was opened read/write from unix-excl, then the only lock
@@ -1710,7 +1710,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
   ** slightly in order to be compatible with Windows95 systems simultaneously
   ** accessing the same database file, in case that is ever required.
   **
-  ** Symbols defined in os.h indentify the 'pending byte' and the 'reserved
+  ** Symbols defined in os.h identify the 'pending byte' and the 'reserved
   ** byte', each single bytes at well known offsets, and the 'shared byte
   ** range', a range of 510 bytes at a well known offset.
   **
@@ -1718,7 +1718,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
   ** byte'.  If this is successful, 'shared byte range' is read-locked
   ** and the lock on the 'pending byte' released.  (Legacy note:  When
   ** SQLite was first developed, Windows95 systems were still very common,
-  ** and Widnows95 lacks a shared-lock capability.  So on Windows95, a
+  ** and Windows95 lacks a shared-lock capability.  So on Windows95, a
   ** single randomly selected by from the 'shared byte range' is locked.
   ** Windows95 is now pretty much extinct, but this work-around for the
   ** lack of shared-locks on Windows95 lives on, for backwards
@@ -1726,20 +1726,20 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
   **
   ** A process may only obtain a RESERVED lock after it has a SHARED lock.
   ** A RESERVED lock is implemented by grabbing a write-lock on the
-  ** 'reserved byte'. 
+  ** 'reserved byte'.
   **
   ** An EXCLUSIVE lock may only be requested after either a SHARED or
-  ** RESERVED lock is held. An EXCLUSIVE lock is implemented by obtaining 
-  ** a write-lock on the entire 'shared byte range'. Since all other locks 
-  ** require a read-lock on one of the bytes within this range, this ensures 
-  ** that no other locks are held on the database. 
+  ** RESERVED lock is held. An EXCLUSIVE lock is implemented by obtaining
+  ** a write-lock on the entire 'shared byte range'. Since all other locks
+  ** require a read-lock on one of the bytes within this range, this ensures
+  ** that no other locks are held on the database.
   **
   ** If a process that holds a RESERVED lock requests an EXCLUSIVE, then
-  ** a PENDING lock is obtained first. A PENDING lock is implemented by 
-  ** obtaining a write-lock on the 'pending byte'. This ensures that no new 
-  ** SHARED locks can be obtained, but existing SHARED locks are allowed to 
+  ** a PENDING lock is obtained first. A PENDING lock is implemented by
+  ** obtaining a write-lock on the 'pending byte'. This ensures that no new
+  ** SHARED locks can be obtained, but existing SHARED locks are allowed to
   ** persist. If the call to this function fails to obtain the EXCLUSIVE
-  ** lock in this case, it holds the PENDING lock intead. The client may
+  ** lock in this case, it holds the PENDING lock instead. The client may
   ** then re-attempt the EXCLUSIVE lock later on, after existing SHARED
   ** locks have cleared.
   */
@@ -1767,7 +1767,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
 
   /* Make sure the locking sequence is correct.
   **  (1) We never move from unlocked to anything higher than shared lock.
-  **  (2) SQLite never explicitly requests a pendig lock.
+  **  (2) SQLite never explicitly requests a pending lock.
   **  (3) A shared lock is always held when a reserve lock is requested.
   */
   assert( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK || eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK );
@@ -1782,7 +1782,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
   /* If some thread using this PID has a lock via a different unixFile*
   ** handle that precludes the requested lock, return BUSY.
   */
-  if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock && 
+  if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock &&
           (pInode->eFileLock>=PENDING_LOCK || eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK))
   ){
     rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
@@ -1793,7 +1793,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
   ** has a SHARED or RESERVED lock, then increment reference counts and
   ** return SQLITE_OK.
   */
-  if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK && 
+  if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK &&
       (pInode->eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->eFileLock==RESERVED_LOCK) ){
     assert( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK );
     assert( pFile->eFileLock==0 );
@@ -1811,7 +1811,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
   */
   lock.l_len = 1L;
   lock.l_whence = SEEK_SET;
-  if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK 
+  if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK
    || (eFileLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK && pFile->eFileLock==RESERVED_LOCK)
   ){
     lock.l_type = (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK?F_RDLCK:F_WRLCK);
@@ -1853,7 +1853,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
     if( unixFileLock(pFile, &lock) && rc==SQLITE_OK ){
       /* This could happen with a network mount */
       tErrno = errno;
-      rc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK; 
+      rc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK;
     }
 
     if( rc ){
@@ -1895,7 +1895,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
       }
     }
   }
-  
+
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
   /* Set up the transaction-counter change checking flags when
@@ -1920,7 +1920,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
 
 end_lock:
   sqlite3_mutex_leave(pInode->pLockMutex);
-  OSTRACE(("LOCK    %d %s %s (unix)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock), 
+  OSTRACE(("LOCK    %d %s %s (unix)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock),
       rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed"));
   return rc;
 }
@@ -1945,11 +1945,11 @@ static void setPendingFd(unixFile *pFile){
 **
 ** If the locking level of the file descriptor is already at or below
 ** the requested locking level, this routine is a no-op.
-** 
+**
 ** If handleNFSUnlock is true, then on downgrading an EXCLUSIVE_LOCK to SHARED
 ** the byte range is divided into 2 parts and the first part is unlocked then
-** set to a read lock, then the other part is simply unlocked.  This works 
-** around a bug in BSD NFS lockd (also seen on MacOSX 10.3+) that fails to 
+** set to a read lock, then the other part is simply unlocked.  This works
+** around a bug in BSD NFS lockd (also seen on MacOSX 10.3+) that fails to
 ** remove the write lock on a region when a read lock is set.
 */
 static int posixUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock, int handleNFSUnlock){
@@ -1987,7 +1987,7 @@ static int posixUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock, int handleNFSUnlock){
 
     /* downgrading to a shared lock on NFS involves clearing the write lock
     ** before establishing the readlock - to avoid a race condition we downgrade
-    ** the lock in 2 blocks, so that part of the range will be covered by a 
+    ** the lock in 2 blocks, so that part of the range will be covered by a
     ** write lock until the rest is covered by a read lock:
     **  1:   [WWWWW]
     **  2:   [....W]
@@ -2003,7 +2003,7 @@ static int posixUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock, int handleNFSUnlock){
       if( handleNFSUnlock ){
         int tErrno;               /* Error code from system call errors */
         off_t divSize = SHARED_SIZE - 1;
-        
+      
         lock.l_type = F_UNLCK;
         lock.l_whence = SEEK_SET;
         lock.l_start = SHARED_FIRST;
@@ -2045,11 +2045,11 @@ static int posixUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock, int handleNFSUnlock){
         lock.l_len = SHARED_SIZE;
         if( unixFileLock(pFile, &lock) ){
           /* In theory, the call to unixFileLock() cannot fail because another
-          ** process is holding an incompatible lock. If it does, this 
+          ** process is holding an incompatible lock. If it does, this
           ** indicates that the other process is not following the locking
           ** protocol. If this happens, return SQLITE_IOERR_RDLOCK. Returning
-          ** SQLITE_BUSY would confuse the upper layer (in practice it causes 
-          ** an assert to fail). */ 
+          ** SQLITE_BUSY would confuse the upper layer (in practice it causes
+          ** an assert to fail). */
           rc = SQLITE_IOERR_RDLOCK;
           storeLastErrno(pFile, errno);
           goto end_unlock;
@@ -2125,7 +2125,7 @@ static void unixUnmapfile(unixFile *pFd);
 #endif
 
 /*
-** This function performs the parts of the "close file" operation 
+** This function performs the parts of the "close file" operation
 ** common to all locking schemes. It closes the directory and file
 ** handles, if they are valid, and sets all fields of the unixFile
 ** structure to 0.
@@ -2188,7 +2188,7 @@ static int unixClose(sqlite3_file *id){
   if( pInode->nLock ){
     /* If there are outstanding locks, do not actually close the file just
     ** yet because that would clear those locks.  Instead, add the file
-    ** descriptor to pInode->pUnused list.  It will be automatically closed 
+    ** descriptor to pInode->pUnused list.  It will be automatically closed
     ** when the last lock is cleared.
     */
     setPendingFd(pFile);
@@ -2289,7 +2289,7 @@ static int dotlockCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut) {
   unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
 
   SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; );
-  
+
   assert( pFile );
   reserved = osAccess((const char*)pFile->lockingContext, 0)==0;
   OSTRACE(("TEST WR-LOCK %d %d %d (dotlock)\n", pFile->h, rc, reserved));
@@ -2343,7 +2343,7 @@ static int dotlockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
 #endif
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }
-  
+
   /* grab an exclusive lock */
   rc = osMkdir(zLockFile, 0777);
   if( rc<0 ){
@@ -2358,8 +2358,8 @@ static int dotlockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
       }
     }
     return rc;
-  } 
-  
+  }
+
   /* got it, set the type and return ok */
   pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
   return rc;
@@ -2383,7 +2383,7 @@ static int dotlockUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
   OSTRACE(("UNLOCK  %d %d was %d pid=%d (dotlock)\n", pFile->h, eFileLock,
            pFile->eFileLock, osGetpid(0)));
   assert( eFileLock<=SHARED_LOCK );
-  
+
   /* no-op if possible */
   if( pFile->eFileLock==eFileLock ){
     return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -2396,7 +2396,7 @@ static int dotlockUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
     pFile->eFileLock = SHARED_LOCK;
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }
-  
+
   /* To fully unlock the database, delete the lock file */
   assert( eFileLock==NO_LOCK );
   rc = osRmdir(zLockFile);
@@ -2408,7 +2408,7 @@ static int dotlockUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
       rc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK;
       storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno);
     }
-    return rc; 
+    return rc;
   }
   pFile->eFileLock = NO_LOCK;
   return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -2455,7 +2455,7 @@ static int robust_flock(int fd, int op){
 #else
 # define robust_flock(a,b) flock(a,b)
 #endif
-     
+   
 
 /*
 ** This routine checks if there is a RESERVED lock held on the specified
@@ -2467,16 +2467,16 @@ static int flockCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
   int reserved = 0;
   unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
-  
+
   SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; );
-  
+
   assert( pFile );
-  
+
   /* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */
   if( pFile->eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK ){
     reserved = 1;
   }
-  
+
   /* Otherwise see if some other process holds it. */
   if( !reserved ){
     /* attempt to get the lock */
@@ -2487,7 +2487,7 @@ static int flockCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
       if ( lrc ) {
         int tErrno = errno;
         /* unlock failed with an error */
-        lrc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK; 
+        lrc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK;
         storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno);
         rc = lrc;
       }
@@ -2495,7 +2495,7 @@ static int flockCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
       int tErrno = errno;
       reserved = 1;
       /* someone else might have it reserved */
-      lrc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK); 
+      lrc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK);
       if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc) ){
         storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno);
         rc = lrc;
@@ -2549,15 +2549,15 @@ static int flockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
 
   assert( pFile );
 
-  /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive.  
+  /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive.
   ** Just adjust level and punt on outta here. */
   if (pFile->eFileLock > NO_LOCK) {
     pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }
-  
+
   /* grab an exclusive lock */
-  
+
   if (robust_flock(pFile->h, LOCK_EX | LOCK_NB)) {
     int tErrno = errno;
     /* didn't get, must be busy */
@@ -2569,7 +2569,7 @@ static int flockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
     /* got it, set the type and return ok */
     pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
   }
-  OSTRACE(("LOCK    %d %s %s (flock)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock), 
+  OSTRACE(("LOCK    %d %s %s (flock)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock),
            rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed"));
 #ifdef SQLITE_IGNORE_FLOCK_LOCK_ERRORS
   if( (rc & 0xff) == SQLITE_IOERR ){
@@ -2589,23 +2589,23 @@ static int flockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
 */
 static int flockUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
   unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
-  
+
   assert( pFile );
   OSTRACE(("UNLOCK  %d %d was %d pid=%d (flock)\n", pFile->h, eFileLock,
            pFile->eFileLock, osGetpid(0)));
   assert( eFileLock<=SHARED_LOCK );
-  
+
   /* no-op if possible */
   if( pFile->eFileLock==eFileLock ){
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }
-  
+
   /* shared can just be set because we always have an exclusive */
   if (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK) {
     pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }
-  
+
   /* no, really, unlock. */
   if( robust_flock(pFile->h, LOCK_UN) ){
 #ifdef SQLITE_IGNORE_FLOCK_LOCK_ERRORS
@@ -2656,14 +2656,14 @@ static int semXCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut) {
   unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
 
   SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; );
-  
+
   assert( pFile );
 
   /* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */
   if( pFile->eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK ){
     reserved = 1;
   }
-  
+
   /* Otherwise see if some other process holds it. */
   if( !reserved ){
     sem_t *pSem = pFile->pInode->pSem;
@@ -2722,14 +2722,14 @@ static int semXLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
   sem_t *pSem = pFile->pInode->pSem;
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
 
-  /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive.  
+  /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive.
   ** Just adjust level and punt on outta here. */
   if (pFile->eFileLock > NO_LOCK) {
     pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
     rc = SQLITE_OK;
     goto sem_end_lock;
   }
-  
+
   /* lock semaphore now but bail out when already locked. */
   if( sem_trywait(pSem)==-1 ){
     rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
@@ -2759,18 +2759,18 @@ static int semXUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
   OSTRACE(("UNLOCK  %d %d was %d pid=%d (sem)\n", pFile->h, eFileLock,
            pFile->eFileLock, osGetpid(0)));
   assert( eFileLock<=SHARED_LOCK );
-  
+
   /* no-op if possible */
   if( pFile->eFileLock==eFileLock ){
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }
-  
+
   /* shared can just be set because we always have an exclusive */
   if (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK) {
     pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }
-  
+
   /* no, really unlock. */
   if ( sem_post(pSem)==-1 ) {
     int rc, tErrno = errno;
@@ -2778,7 +2778,7 @@ static int semXUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
     if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(rc) ){
       storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno);
     }
-    return rc; 
+    return rc;
   }
   pFile->eFileLock = NO_LOCK;
   return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -2844,7 +2844,7 @@ struct ByteRangeLockPB2
 /*
 ** This is a utility for setting or clearing a bit-range lock on an
 ** AFP filesystem.
-** 
+**
 ** Return SQLITE_OK on success, SQLITE_BUSY on failure.
 */
 static int afpSetLock(
@@ -2856,14 +2856,14 @@ static int afpSetLock(
 ){
   struct ByteRangeLockPB2 pb;
   int err;
-  
+
   pb.unLockFlag = setLockFlag ? 0 : 1;
   pb.startEndFlag = 0;
   pb.offset = offset;
-  pb.length = length; 
+  pb.length = length;
   pb.fd = pFile->h;
-  
-  OSTRACE(("AFPSETLOCK [%s] for %d%s in range %llx:%llx\n", 
+
+  OSTRACE(("AFPSETLOCK [%s] for %d%s in range %llx:%llx\n",
     (setLockFlag?"ON":"OFF"), pFile->h, (pb.fd==-1?"[testval-1]":""),
     offset, length));
   err = fsctl(path, afpfsByteRangeLock2FSCTL, &pb, 0);
@@ -2898,9 +2898,9 @@ static int afpCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
   int reserved = 0;
   unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
   afpLockingContext *context;
-  
+
   SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; );
-  
+
   assert( pFile );
   context = (afpLockingContext *) pFile->lockingContext;
   if( context->reserved ){
@@ -2912,12 +2912,12 @@ static int afpCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
   if( pFile->pInode->eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK ){
     reserved = 1;
   }
-  
+
   /* Otherwise see if some other process holds it.
    */
   if( !reserved ){
     /* lock the RESERVED byte */
-    int lrc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1,1);  
+    int lrc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1,1);
     if( SQLITE_OK==lrc ){
       /* if we succeeded in taking the reserved lock, unlock it to restore
       ** the original state */
@@ -2930,10 +2930,10 @@ static int afpCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
       rc=lrc;
     }
   }
-  
+
   sqlite3_mutex_leave(pFile->pInode->pLockMutex);
   OSTRACE(("TEST WR-LOCK %d %d %d (afp)\n", pFile->h, rc, reserved));
-  
+
   *pResOut = reserved;
   return rc;
 }
@@ -2967,7 +2967,7 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
   unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
   unixInodeInfo *pInode = pFile->pInode;
   afpLockingContext *context = (afpLockingContext *) pFile->lockingContext;
-  
+
   assert( pFile );
   OSTRACE(("LOCK    %d %s was %s(%s,%d) pid=%d (afp)\n", pFile->h,
            azFileLock(eFileLock), azFileLock(pFile->eFileLock),
@@ -2985,13 +2985,13 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
 
   /* Make sure the locking sequence is correct
   **  (1) We never move from unlocked to anything higher than shared lock.
-  **  (2) SQLite never explicitly requests a pendig lock.
+  **  (2) SQLite never explicitly requests a pending lock.
   **  (3) A shared lock is always held when a reserve lock is requested.
   */
   assert( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK || eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK );
   assert( eFileLock!=PENDING_LOCK );
   assert( eFileLock!=RESERVED_LOCK || pFile->eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK );
-  
+
   /* This mutex is needed because pFile->pInode is shared across threads
   */
   pInode = pFile->pInode;
@@ -3000,18 +3000,18 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
   /* If some thread using this PID has a lock via a different unixFile*
   ** handle that precludes the requested lock, return BUSY.
   */
-  if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock && 
+  if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock &&
        (pInode->eFileLock>=PENDING_LOCK || eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK))
      ){
     rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
     goto afp_end_lock;
   }
-  
+
   /* If a SHARED lock is requested, and some thread using this PID already
   ** has a SHARED or RESERVED lock, then increment reference counts and
   ** return SQLITE_OK.
   */
-  if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK && 
+  if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK &&
      (pInode->eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->eFileLock==RESERVED_LOCK) ){
     assert( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK );
     assert( pFile->eFileLock==0 );
@@ -3021,12 +3021,12 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
     pInode->nLock++;
     goto afp_end_lock;
   }
-    
+  
   /* A PENDING lock is needed before acquiring a SHARED lock and before
   ** acquiring an EXCLUSIVE lock.  For the SHARED lock, the PENDING will
   ** be released.
   */
-  if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK 
+  if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK
       || (eFileLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK && pFile->eFileLock<PENDING_LOCK)
   ){
     int failed;
@@ -3036,30 +3036,30 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
       goto afp_end_lock;
     }
   }
-  
+
   /* If control gets to this point, then actually go ahead and make
   ** operating system calls for the specified lock.
   */
   if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK ){
     int lrc1, lrc2, lrc1Errno = 0;
     long lk, mask;
-    
+  
     assert( pInode->nShared==0 );
     assert( pInode->eFileLock==0 );
-        
+      
     mask = (sizeof(long)==8) ? LARGEST_INT64 : 0x7fffffff;
     /* Now get the read-lock SHARED_LOCK */
     /* note that the quality of the randomness doesn't matter that much */
-    lk = random(); 
+    lk = random();
     pInode->sharedByte = (lk & mask)%(SHARED_SIZE - 1);
-    lrc1 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, 
+    lrc1 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile,
           SHARED_FIRST+pInode->sharedByte, 1, 1);
     if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc1) ){
       lrc1Errno = pFile->lastErrno;
     }
     /* Drop the temporary PENDING lock */
     lrc2 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, PENDING_BYTE, 1, 0);
-    
+  
     if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc1) ) {
       storeLastErrno(pFile, lrc1Errno);
       rc = lrc1;
@@ -3094,34 +3094,34 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
     }
     if (!failed && eFileLock == EXCLUSIVE_LOCK) {
       /* Acquire an EXCLUSIVE lock */
-        
-      /* Remove the shared lock before trying the range.  we'll need to 
+
+      /* Remove the shared lock before trying the range.  we'll need to
       ** reestablish the shared lock if we can't get the  afpUnlock
       */
       if( !(failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST +
                          pInode->sharedByte, 1, 0)) ){
         int failed2 = SQLITE_OK;
-        /* now attemmpt to get the exclusive lock range */
-        failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST, 
+        /* now attempt to get the exclusive lock range */
+        failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST,
                                SHARED_SIZE, 1);
-        if( failed && (failed2 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, 
+        if( failed && (failed2 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile,
                        SHARED_FIRST + pInode->sharedByte, 1, 1)) ){
           /* Can't reestablish the shared lock.  Sqlite can't deal, this is
           ** a critical I/O error
           */
-          rc = ((failed & 0xff) == SQLITE_IOERR) ? failed2 : 
+          rc = ((failed & 0xff) == SQLITE_IOERR) ? failed2 :
                SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK;
           goto afp_end_lock;
-        } 
+        }
       }else{
-        rc = failed; 
+        rc = failed;
       }
     }
     if( failed ){
       rc = failed;
     }
   }
-  
+
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
     pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
     pInode->eFileLock = eFileLock;
@@ -3129,10 +3129,10 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
     pFile->eFileLock = PENDING_LOCK;
     pInode->eFileLock = PENDING_LOCK;
   }
-  
+
 afp_end_lock:
   sqlite3_mutex_leave(pInode->pLockMutex);
-  OSTRACE(("LOCK    %d %s %s (afp)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock), 
+  OSTRACE(("LOCK    %d %s %s (afp)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock),
          rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed"));
   return rc;
 }
@@ -3171,7 +3171,7 @@ static int afpUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
     SimulateIOErrorBenign(1);
     SimulateIOError( h=(-1) )
     SimulateIOErrorBenign(0);
-    
+  
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
     /* When reducing a lock such that other processes can start
     ** reading the database file again, make sure that the
@@ -3186,7 +3186,7 @@ static int afpUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
            || pFile->transCntrChng==1 );
     pFile->inNormalWrite = 0;
 #endif
-    
+  
     if( pFile->eFileLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ){
       rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST, SHARED_SIZE, 0);
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->nShared>1) ){
@@ -3199,11 +3199,11 @@ static int afpUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
     }
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->eFileLock>=PENDING_LOCK ){
       rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, PENDING_BYTE, 1, 0);
-    } 
+    }
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->eFileLock>=RESERVED_LOCK && context->reserved ){
       rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1, 0);
-      if( !rc ){ 
-        context->reserved = 0; 
+      if( !rc ){
+        context->reserved = 0;
       }
     }
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->nShared>1)){
@@ -3236,7 +3236,7 @@ static int afpUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
       if( pInode->nLock==0 ) closePendingFds(pFile);
     }
   }
-  
+
   sqlite3_mutex_leave(pInode->pLockMutex);
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
     pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
@@ -3245,7 +3245,7 @@ static int afpUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
 }
 
 /*
-** Close a file & cleanup AFP specific locking context 
+** Close a file & cleanup AFP specific locking context
 */
 static int afpClose(sqlite3_file *id) {
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -3303,7 +3303,7 @@ static int nfsUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
 /*
 ** The code above is the NFS lock implementation.  The code is specific
 ** to MacOSX and does not work on other unix platforms.  No alternative
-** is available.  
+** is available.
 **
 ********************* End of the NFS lock implementation **********************
 ******************************************************************************/
@@ -3311,7 +3311,7 @@ static int nfsUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
 /******************************************************************************
 **************** Non-locking sqlite3_file methods *****************************
 **
-** The next division contains implementations for all methods of the 
+** The next division contains implementations for all methods of the
 ** sqlite3_file object other than the locking methods.  The locking
 ** methods were defined in divisions above (one locking method per
 ** division).  Those methods that are common to all locking modes
@@ -3319,7 +3319,7 @@ static int nfsUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
 */
 
 /*
-** Seek to the offset passed as the second argument, then read cnt 
+** Seek to the offset passed as the second argument, then read cnt
 ** bytes into pBuf. Return the number of bytes actually read.
 **
 ** To avoid stomping the errno value on a failed read the lastErrno value
@@ -3375,8 +3375,8 @@ static int seekAndRead(unixFile *id, sqlite3_int64 offset, void *pBuf, int cnt){
 ** wrong.
 */
 static int unixRead(
-  sqlite3_file *id, 
-  void *pBuf, 
+  sqlite3_file *id,
+  void *pBuf,
   int amt,
   sqlite3_int64 offset
 ){
@@ -3391,12 +3391,12 @@ static int unixRead(
 #if 0
   assert( pFile->pPreallocatedUnused==0
        || offset>=PENDING_BYTE+512
-       || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE 
+       || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE
   );
 #endif
 
 #if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0
-  /* Deal with as much of this read request as possible by transfering
+  /* Deal with as much of this read request as possible by transferring
   ** data from the memory mapping using memcpy().  */
   if( offset<pFile->mmapSize ){
     if( offset+amt <= pFile->mmapSize ){
@@ -3446,7 +3446,7 @@ static int unixRead(
 /*
 ** Attempt to seek the file-descriptor passed as the first argument to
 ** absolute offset iOff, then attempt to write nBuf bytes of data from
-** pBuf to it. If an error occurs, return -1 and set *piErrno. Otherwise, 
+** pBuf to it. If an error occurs, return -1 and set *piErrno. Otherwise,
 ** return the actual number of bytes written (which may be less than
 ** nBuf).
 */
@@ -3506,10 +3506,10 @@ static int seekAndWrite(unixFile *id, i64 offset, const void *pBuf, int cnt){
 ** or some other error code on failure.
 */
 static int unixWrite(
-  sqlite3_file *id, 
-  const void *pBuf, 
+  sqlite3_file *id,
+  const void *pBuf,
   int amt,
-  sqlite3_int64 offset 
+  sqlite3_int64 offset
 ){
   unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
   int wrote = 0;
@@ -3521,7 +3521,7 @@ static int unixWrite(
 #if 0
   assert( pFile->pPreallocatedUnused==0
        || offset>=PENDING_BYTE+512
-       || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE 
+       || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE
   );
 #endif
 
@@ -3548,7 +3548,7 @@ static int unixWrite(
 #endif
 
 #if defined(SQLITE_MMAP_READWRITE) && SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0
-  /* Deal with as much of this write request as possible by transfering
+  /* Deal with as much of this write request as possible by transferring
   ** data from the memory mapping using memcpy().  */
   if( offset<pFile->mmapSize ){
     if( offset+amt <= pFile->mmapSize ){
@@ -3563,7 +3563,7 @@ static int unixWrite(
     }
   }
 #endif
- 
+
   while( (wrote = seekAndWrite(pFile, offset, pBuf, amt))<amt && wrote>0 ){
     amt -= wrote;
     offset += wrote;
@@ -3629,8 +3629,8 @@ int sqlite3_fullsync_count = 0;
 **
 ** SQLite sets the dataOnly flag if the size of the file is unchanged.
 ** The idea behind dataOnly is that it should only write the file content
-** to disk, not the inode.  We only set dataOnly if the file size is 
-** unchanged since the file size is part of the inode.  However, 
+** to disk, not the inode.  We only set dataOnly if the file size is
+** unchanged since the file size is part of the inode.  However,
 ** Ted Ts'o tells us that fdatasync() will also write the inode if the
 ** file size has changed.  The only real difference between fdatasync()
 ** and fsync(), Ted tells us, is that fdatasync() will not flush the
@@ -3644,7 +3644,7 @@ static int full_fsync(int fd, int fullSync, int dataOnly){
   int rc;
 
   /* The following "ifdef/elif/else/" block has the same structure as
-  ** the one below. It is replicated here solely to avoid cluttering 
+  ** the one below. It is replicated here solely to avoid cluttering
   ** up the real code with the UNUSED_PARAMETER() macros.
   */
 #ifdef SQLITE_NO_SYNC
@@ -3658,7 +3658,7 @@ static int full_fsync(int fd, int fullSync, int dataOnly){
   UNUSED_PARAMETER(dataOnly);
 #endif
 
-  /* Record the number of times that we do a normal fsync() and 
+  /* Record the number of times that we do a normal fsync() and
   ** FULLSYNC.  This is used during testing to verify that this procedure
   ** gets called with the correct arguments.
   */
@@ -3670,7 +3670,7 @@ static int full_fsync(int fd, int fullSync, int dataOnly){
   /* If we compiled with the SQLITE_NO_SYNC flag, then syncing is a
   ** no-op.  But go ahead and call fstat() to validate the file
   ** descriptor as we need a method to provoke a failure during
-  ** coverate testing.
+  ** coverage testing.
   */
 #ifdef SQLITE_NO_SYNC
   {
@@ -3684,11 +3684,11 @@ static int full_fsync(int fd, int fullSync, int dataOnly){
     rc = 1;
   }
   /* If the FULLFSYNC failed, fall back to attempting an fsync().
-  ** It shouldn't be possible for fullfsync to fail on the local 
+  ** It shouldn't be possible for fullfsync to fail on the local
   ** file system (on OSX), so failure indicates that FULLFSYNC
-  ** isn't supported for this file system. So, attempt an fsync 
-  ** and (for now) ignore the overhead of a superfluous fcntl call.  
-  ** It'd be better to detect fullfsync support once and avoid 
+  ** isn't supported for this file system. So, attempt an fsync
+  ** and (for now) ignore the overhead of a superfluous fcntl call.
+  ** It'd be better to detect fullfsync support once and avoid
   ** the fcntl call every time sync is called.
   */
   if( rc ) rc = fsync(fd);
@@ -3698,7 +3698,7 @@ static int full_fsync(int fd, int fullSync, int dataOnly){
   ** so currently we default to the macro that redefines fdatasync to fsync
   */
   rc = fsync(fd);
-#else 
+#else
   rc = fdatasync(fd);
 #if OS_VXWORKS
   if( rc==-1 && errno==ENOTSUP ){
@@ -3859,7 +3859,7 @@ static int unixTruncate(sqlite3_file *id, i64 nByte){
 #if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0
     /* If the file was just truncated to a size smaller than the currently
     ** mapped region, reduce the effective mapping size as well. SQLite will
-    ** use read() and write() to access data beyond this point from now on.  
+    ** use read() and write() to access data beyond this point from now on.
     */
     if( nByte<pFile->mmapSize ){
       pFile->mmapSize = nByte;
@@ -3905,8 +3905,8 @@ static int unixFileSize(sqlite3_file *id, i64 *pSize){
 static int proxyFileControl(sqlite3_file*,int,void*);
 #endif
 
-/* 
-** This function is called to handle the SQLITE_FCNTL_SIZE_HINT 
+/*
+** This function is called to handle the SQLITE_FCNTL_SIZE_HINT
 ** file-control operation.  Enlarge the database to nBytes in size
 ** (rounded up to the next chunk-size).  If the database is already
 ** nBytes or larger, this routine is a no-op.
@@ -3915,7 +3915,7 @@ static int fcntlSizeHint(unixFile *pFile, i64 nByte){
   if( pFile->szChunk>0 ){
     i64 nSize;                    /* Required file size */
     struct stat buf;              /* Used to hold return values of fstat() */
-   
+ 
     if( osFstat(pFile->h, &buf) ){
       return SQLITE_IOERR_FSTAT;
     }
@@ -3924,8 +3924,8 @@ static int fcntlSizeHint(unixFile *pFile, i64 nByte){
     if( nSize>(i64)buf.st_size ){
 
 #if defined(HAVE_POSIX_FALLOCATE) && HAVE_POSIX_FALLOCATE
-      /* The code below is handling the return value of osFallocate() 
-      ** correctly. posix_fallocate() is defined to "returns zero on success, 
+      /* The code below is handling the return value of osFallocate()
+      ** correctly. posix_fallocate() is defined to "returns zero on success,
       ** or an error number on  failure". See the manpage for details. */
       int err;
       do{
@@ -3933,7 +3933,7 @@ static int fcntlSizeHint(unixFile *pFile, i64 nByte){
       }while( err==EINTR );
       if( err && err!=EINVAL ) return SQLITE_IOERR_WRITE;
 #else
-      /* If the OS does not have posix_fallocate(), fake it. Write a 
+      /* If the OS does not have posix_fallocate(), fake it. Write a
       ** single byte to the last byte in each block that falls entirely
       ** within the extended region. Then, if required, a single byte
       ** at offset (nSize-1), to set the size of the file correctly.
@@ -4126,9 +4126,9 @@ static int unixFileControl(sqlite3_file *id, int op, void *pArg){
 
 /*
 ** If pFd->sectorSize is non-zero when this function is called, it is a
-** no-op. Otherwise, the values of pFd->sectorSize and 
-** pFd->deviceCharacteristics are set according to the file-system 
-** characteristics. 
+** no-op. Otherwise, the values of pFd->sectorSize and
+** pFd->deviceCharacteristics are set according to the file-system
+** characteristics.
 **
 ** There are two versions of this function. One for QNX and one for all
 ** other systems.
@@ -4162,7 +4162,7 @@ static void setDeviceCharacteristics(unixFile *pFd){
 static void setDeviceCharacteristics(unixFile *pFile){
   if( pFile->sectorSize == 0 ){
     struct statvfs fsInfo;
-       
+     
     /* Set defaults for non-supported filesystems */
     pFile->sectorSize = SQLITE_DEFAULT_SECTOR_SIZE;
     pFile->deviceCharacteristics = 0;
@@ -4271,7 +4271,7 @@ static int unixDeviceCharacteristics(sqlite3_file *id){
 /*
 ** Return the system page size.
 **
-** This function should not be called directly by other code in this file. 
+** This function should not be called directly by other code in this file.
 ** Instead, it should be called via macro osGetpagesize().
 */
 static int unixGetpagesize(void){
@@ -4289,7 +4289,7 @@ static int unixGetpagesize(void){
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL
 
 /*
-** Object used to represent an shared memory buffer.  
+** Object used to represent an shared memory buffer.
 **
 ** When multiple threads all reference the same wal-index, each thread
 ** has its own unixShm object, but they all point to a single instance
@@ -4309,7 +4309,7 @@ static int unixGetpagesize(void){
 **      nRef
 **
 ** The following fields are read-only after the object is created:
-** 
+**
 **      hShm
 **      zFilename
 **
@@ -4368,7 +4368,7 @@ struct unixShm {
 /*
 ** Use F_GETLK to check whether or not there are any readers with open
 ** wal-mode transactions in other processes on database file pFile. If
-** no error occurs, return SQLITE_OK and set (*piOut) to 1 if there are 
+** no error occurs, return SQLITE_OK and set (*piOut) to 1 if there are
 ** such transactions, or 0 otherwise. If an error occurs, return an
 ** SQLite error code. The final value of *piOut is undefined in this
 ** case.
@@ -4478,7 +4478,7 @@ static int unixShmSystemLock(
   }
 #endif
 
-  return rc;        
+  return rc;      
 }
 
 /*
@@ -4534,7 +4534,7 @@ static void unixShmPurge(unixFile *pFd){
 ** take it now. Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error
 ** code otherwise.
 **
-** If the DMS cannot be locked because this is a readonly_shm=1 
+** If the DMS cannot be locked because this is a readonly_shm=1
 ** connection and no other process already holds a lock, return
 ** SQLITE_READONLY_CANTINIT and set pShmNode->isUnlocked=1.
 */
@@ -4545,7 +4545,7 @@ static int unixLockSharedMemory(unixFile *pDbFd, unixShmNode *pShmNode){
   /* Use F_GETLK to determine the locks other processes are holding
   ** on the DMS byte. If it indicates that another process is holding
   ** a SHARED lock, then this process may also take a SHARED lock
-  ** and proceed with opening the *-shm file. 
+  ** and proceed with opening the *-shm file.
   **
   ** Or, if no other process is holding any lock, then this process
   ** is the first to open it. In this case take an EXCLUSIVE lock on the
@@ -4593,20 +4593,20 @@ static int unixLockSharedMemory(unixFile *pDbFd, unixShmNode *pShmNode){
 }
 
 /*
-** Open a shared-memory area associated with open database file pDbFd.  
+** Open a shared-memory area associated with open database file pDbFd.
 ** This particular implementation uses mmapped files.
 **
 ** The file used to implement shared-memory is in the same directory
 ** as the open database file and has the same name as the open database
 ** file with the "-shm" suffix added.  For example, if the database file
 ** is "/home/user1/config.db" then the file that is created and mmapped
-** for shared memory will be called "/home/user1/config.db-shm".  
+** for shared memory will be called "/home/user1/config.db-shm".
 **
 ** Another approach to is to use files in /dev/shm or /dev/tmp or an
 ** some other tmpfs mount. But if a file in a different directory
 ** from the database file is used, then differing access permissions
 ** or a chroot() might cause two different processes on the same
-** database to end up using different files for shared memory - 
+** database to end up using different files for shared memory -
 ** meaning that their memory would not really be shared - resulting
 ** in database corruption.  Nevertheless, this tmpfs file usage
 ** can be enabled at compile-time using -DSQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY="/dev/shm"
@@ -4676,7 +4676,7 @@ static int unixOpenSharedMemory(unixFile *pDbFd){
     memset(pShmNode, 0, sizeof(*pShmNode)+nShmFilename);
     zShm = pShmNode->zFilename = (char*)&pShmNode[1];
 #ifdef SQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY
-    sqlite3_snprintf(nShmFilename, zShm, 
+    sqlite3_snprintf(nShmFilename, zShm,
                      SQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY "/sqlite-shm-%x-%x",
                      (u32)sStat.st_ino, (u32)sStat.st_dev);
 #else
@@ -4751,22 +4751,22 @@ shm_open_err:
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is called to obtain a pointer to region iRegion of the 
-** shared-memory associated with the database file fd. Shared-memory regions 
-** are numbered starting from zero. Each shared-memory region is szRegion 
+** This function is called to obtain a pointer to region iRegion of the
+** shared-memory associated with the database file fd. Shared-memory regions
+** are numbered starting from zero. Each shared-memory region is szRegion
 ** bytes in size.
 **
 ** If an error occurs, an error code is returned and *pp is set to NULL.
 **
 ** Otherwise, if the bExtend parameter is 0 and the requested shared-memory
 ** region has not been allocated (by any client, including one running in a
-** separate process), then *pp is set to NULL and SQLITE_OK returned. If 
-** bExtend is non-zero and the requested shared-memory region has not yet 
+** separate process), then *pp is set to NULL and SQLITE_OK returned. If
+** bExtend is non-zero and the requested shared-memory region has not yet
 ** been allocated, it is allocated by this function.
 **
 ** If the shared-memory region has already been allocated or is allocated by
-** this call as described above, then it is mapped into this processes 
-** address space (if it is not already), *pp is set to point to the mapped 
+** this call as described above, then it is mapped into this processes
+** address space (if it is not already), *pp is set to point to the mapped
 ** memory and SQLITE_OK returned.
 */
 static int unixShmMap(
@@ -4821,7 +4821,7 @@ static int unixShmMap(
         rc = SQLITE_IOERR_SHMSIZE;
         goto shmpage_out;
       }
-  
+
       if( sStat.st_size<nByte ){
         /* The requested memory region does not exist. If bExtend is set to
         ** false, exit early. *pp will be set to NULL and SQLITE_OK returned.
@@ -4870,7 +4870,7 @@ static int unixShmMap(
       void *pMem;
       if( pShmNode->hShm>=0 ){
         pMem = osMmap(0, nMap,
-            pShmNode->isReadonly ? PROT_READ : PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, 
+            pShmNode->isReadonly ? PROT_READ : PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE,
             MAP_SHARED, pShmNode->hShm, szRegion*(i64)pShmNode->nRegion
         );
         if( pMem==MAP_FAILED ){
@@ -4984,7 +4984,7 @@ static int unixShmLock(
   **
   ** In other words, if this is a blocking lock, none of the locks that
   ** occur later in the above list than the lock being obtained may be
-  ** held.  
+  ** held.
   **
   ** It is not permitted to block on the RECOVER lock.
   */
@@ -5026,7 +5026,7 @@ static int unixShmLock(
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
         p->exclMask &= ~mask;
         p->sharedMask &= ~mask;
-      } 
+      }
     }
   }else if( flags & SQLITE_SHM_SHARED ){
     assert( n==1 );
@@ -5077,7 +5077,7 @@ static int unixShmLock(
 }
 
 /*
-** Implement a memory barrier or memory fence on shared memory.  
+** Implement a memory barrier or memory fence on shared memory.
 **
 ** All loads and stores begun before the barrier must complete before
 ** any load or store begun after the barrier.
@@ -5087,15 +5087,15 @@ static void unixShmBarrier(
 ){
   UNUSED_PARAMETER(fd);
   sqlite3MemoryBarrier();         /* compiler-defined memory barrier */
-  assert( fd->pMethods->xLock==nolockLock 
-       || unixFileMutexNotheld((unixFile*)fd) 
+  assert( fd->pMethods->xLock==nolockLock
+       || unixFileMutexNotheld((unixFile*)fd)
   );
   unixEnterMutex();               /* Also mutex, for redundancy */
   unixLeaveMutex();
 }
 
 /*
-** Close a connection to shared-memory.  Delete the underlying 
+** Close a connection to shared-memory.  Delete the underlying
 ** storage if deleteFlag is true.
 **
 ** If there is no shared memory associated with the connection then this
@@ -5169,7 +5169,7 @@ static void unixUnmapfile(unixFile *pFd){
 }
 
 /*
-** Attempt to set the size of the memory mapping maintained by file 
+** Attempt to set the size of the memory mapping maintained by file
 ** descriptor pFd to nNew bytes. Any existing mapping is discarded.
 **
 ** If successful, this function sets the following variables:
@@ -5261,14 +5261,14 @@ static void unixRemapfile(
 
 /*
 ** Memory map or remap the file opened by file-descriptor pFd (if the file
-** is already mapped, the existing mapping is replaced by the new). Or, if 
-** there already exists a mapping for this file, and there are still 
+** is already mapped, the existing mapping is replaced by the new). Or, if
+** there already exists a mapping for this file, and there are still
 ** outstanding xFetch() references to it, this function is a no-op.
 **
-** If parameter nByte is non-negative, then it is the requested size of 
-** the mapping to create. Otherwise, if nByte is less than zero, then the 
+** If parameter nByte is non-negative, then it is the requested size of
+** the mapping to create. Otherwise, if nByte is less than zero, then the
 ** requested size is the size of the file on disk. The actual size of the
-** created mapping is either the requested size or the value configured 
+** created mapping is either the requested size or the value configured
 ** using SQLITE_FCNTL_MMAP_LIMIT, whichever is smaller.
 **
 ** SQLITE_OK is returned if no error occurs (even if the mapping is not
@@ -5309,7 +5309,7 @@ static int unixMapfile(unixFile *pFd, i64 nMap){
 ** Finally, if an error does occur, return an SQLite error code. The final
 ** value of *pp is undefined in this case.
 **
-** If this function does return a pointer, the caller must eventually 
+** If this function does return a pointer, the caller must eventually
 ** release the reference by calling unixUnfetch().
 */
 static int unixFetch(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 iOff, int nAmt, void **pp){
@@ -5334,13 +5334,13 @@ static int unixFetch(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 iOff, int nAmt, void **pp){
 }
 
 /*
-** If the third argument is non-NULL, then this function releases a 
+** If the third argument is non-NULL, then this function releases a
 ** reference obtained by an earlier call to unixFetch(). The second
 ** argument passed to this function must be the same as the corresponding
-** argument that was passed to the unixFetch() invocation. 
+** argument that was passed to the unixFetch() invocation.
 **
-** Or, if the third argument is NULL, then this function is being called 
-** to inform the VFS layer that, according to POSIX, any existing mapping 
+** Or, if the third argument is NULL, then this function is being called
+** to inform the VFS layer that, according to POSIX, any existing mapping
 ** may now be invalid and should be unmapped.
 */
 static int unixUnfetch(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 iOff, void *p){
@@ -5348,7 +5348,7 @@ static int unixUnfetch(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 iOff, void *p){
   unixFile *pFd = (unixFile *)fd;   /* The underlying database file */
   UNUSED_PARAMETER(iOff);
 
-  /* If p==0 (unmap the entire file) then there must be no outstanding 
+  /* If p==0 (unmap the entire file) then there must be no outstanding
   ** xFetch references. Or, if p!=0 (meaning it is an xFetch reference),
   ** then there must be at least one outstanding.  */
   assert( (p==0)==(pFd->nFetchOut==0) );
@@ -5556,8 +5556,8 @@ IOMETHODS(
 #endif
 
 #if defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
-/* 
-** This "finder" function attempts to determine the best locking strategy 
+/*
+** This "finder" function attempts to determine the best locking strategy
 ** for the database file "filePath".  It then returns the sqlite3_io_methods
 ** object that implements that strategy.
 **
@@ -5599,8 +5599,8 @@ static const sqlite3_io_methods *autolockIoFinderImpl(
   }
 
   /* Default case. Handles, amongst others, "nfs".
-  ** Test byte-range lock using fcntl(). If the call succeeds, 
-  ** assume that the file-system supports POSIX style locks. 
+  ** Test byte-range lock using fcntl(). If the call succeeds,
+  ** assume that the file-system supports POSIX style locks.
   */
   lockInfo.l_len = 1;
   lockInfo.l_start = 0;
@@ -5616,7 +5616,7 @@ static const sqlite3_io_methods *autolockIoFinderImpl(
     return &dotlockIoMethods;
   }
 }
-static const sqlite3_io_methods 
+static const sqlite3_io_methods
   *(*const autolockIoFinder)(const char*,unixFile*) = autolockIoFinderImpl;
 
 #endif /* defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */
@@ -5652,7 +5652,7 @@ static const sqlite3_io_methods *vxworksIoFinderImpl(
     return &semIoMethods;
   }
 }
-static const sqlite3_io_methods 
+static const sqlite3_io_methods
   *(*const vxworksIoFinder)(const char*,unixFile*) = vxworksIoFinderImpl;
 
 #endif /* OS_VXWORKS */
@@ -5780,14 +5780,14 @@ static int fillInUnixFile(
         robust_close(pNew, h, __LINE__);
         h = -1;
       }
-      unixLeaveMutex();        
+      unixLeaveMutex();      
     }
   }
 #endif
 
   else if( pLockingStyle == &dotlockIoMethods ){
     /* Dotfile locking uses the file path so it needs to be included in
-    ** the dotlockLockingContext 
+    ** the dotlockLockingContext
     */
     char *zLockFile;
     int nFilename;
@@ -5825,7 +5825,7 @@ static int fillInUnixFile(
     unixLeaveMutex();
   }
 #endif
-  
+
   storeLastErrno(pNew, 0);
 #if OS_VXWORKS
   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -5900,7 +5900,7 @@ static int unixGetTempname(int nBuf, char *zBuf){
 
   /* It's odd to simulate an io-error here, but really this is just
   ** using the io-error infrastructure to test that SQLite handles this
-  ** function failing. 
+  ** function failing.
   */
   zBuf[0] = 0;
   SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR );
@@ -5937,7 +5937,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile*, const char*);
 #endif
 
 /*
-** Search for an unused file descriptor that was opened on the database 
+** Search for an unused file descriptor that was opened on the database
 ** file (not a journal or super-journal file) identified by pathname
 ** zPath with SQLITE_OPEN_XXX flags matching those passed as the second
 ** argument to this function.
@@ -5946,7 +5946,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile*, const char*);
 ** but the associated file descriptor could not be closed because some
 ** other file descriptor open on the same file is holding a file-lock.
 ** Refer to comments in the unixClose() function and the lengthy comment
-** describing "Posix Advisory Locking" at the start of this file for 
+** describing "Posix Advisory Locking" at the start of this file for
 ** further details. Also, ticket #4018.
 **
 ** If a suitable file descriptor is found, then it is returned. If no
@@ -5957,8 +5957,8 @@ static UnixUnusedFd *findReusableFd(const char *zPath, int flags){
 
   /* Do not search for an unused file descriptor on vxworks. Not because
   ** vxworks would not benefit from the change (it might, we're not sure),
-  ** but because no way to test it is currently available. It is better 
-  ** not to risk breaking vxworks support for the sake of such an obscure 
+  ** but because no way to test it is currently available. It is better
+  ** not to risk breaking vxworks support for the sake of such an obscure
   ** feature.  */
 #if !OS_VXWORKS
   struct stat sStat;                   /* Results of stat() call */
@@ -6000,7 +6000,7 @@ static UnixUnusedFd *findReusableFd(const char *zPath, int flags){
 }
 
 /*
-** Find the mode, uid and gid of file zFile. 
+** Find the mode, uid and gid of file zFile.
 */
 static int getFileMode(
   const char *zFile,              /* File name */
@@ -6024,16 +6024,16 @@ static int getFileMode(
 ** This function is called by unixOpen() to determine the unix permissions
 ** to create new files with. If no error occurs, then SQLITE_OK is returned
 ** and a value suitable for passing as the third argument to open(2) is
-** written to *pMode. If an IO error occurs, an SQLite error code is 
+** written to *pMode. If an IO error occurs, an SQLite error code is
 ** returned and the value of *pMode is not modified.
 **
 ** In most cases, this routine sets *pMode to 0, which will become
 ** an indication to robust_open() to create the file using
 ** SQLITE_DEFAULT_FILE_PERMISSIONS adjusted by the umask.
-** But if the file being opened is a WAL or regular journal file, then 
-** this function queries the file-system for the permissions on the 
-** corresponding database file and sets *pMode to this value. Whenever 
-** possible, WAL and journal files are created using the same permissions 
+** But if the file being opened is a WAL or regular journal file, then
+** this function queries the file-system for the permissions on the
+** corresponding database file and sets *pMode to this value. Whenever
+** possible, WAL and journal files are created using the same permissions
 ** as the associated database file.
 **
 ** If the SQLITE_ENABLE_8_3_NAMES option is enabled, then the
@@ -6065,7 +6065,7 @@ static int findCreateFileMode(
     **   "<path to db>-journalNN"
     **   "<path to db>-walNN"
     **
-    ** where NN is a decimal number. The NN naming schemes are 
+    ** where NN is a decimal number. The NN naming schemes are
     ** used by the test_multiplex.c module.
     **
     ** In normal operation, the journal file name will always contain
@@ -6101,7 +6101,7 @@ static int findCreateFileMode(
 
 /*
 ** Open the file zPath.
-** 
+**
 ** Previously, the SQLite OS layer used three functions in place of this
 ** one:
 **
@@ -6112,13 +6112,13 @@ static int findCreateFileMode(
 ** These calls correspond to the following combinations of flags:
 **
 **     ReadWrite() ->     (READWRITE | CREATE)
-**     ReadOnly()  ->     (READONLY) 
+**     ReadOnly()  ->     (READONLY)
 **     OpenExclusive() -> (READWRITE | CREATE | EXCLUSIVE)
 **
 ** The old OpenExclusive() accepted a boolean argument - "delFlag". If
 ** true, the file was configured to be automatically deleted when the
-** file handle closed. To achieve the same effect using this new 
-** interface, add the DELETEONCLOSE flag to those specified above for 
+** file handle closed. To achieve the same effect using this new
+** interface, add the DELETEONCLOSE flag to those specified above for
 ** OpenExclusive().
 */
 static int unixOpen(
@@ -6153,8 +6153,8 @@ static int unixOpen(
   ** is called the directory file descriptor will be fsync()ed and close()d.
   */
   int isNewJrnl = (isCreate && (
-        eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL 
-     || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL 
+        eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL
+     || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL
      || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_WAL
   ));
 
@@ -6164,9 +6164,9 @@ static int unixOpen(
   char zTmpname[MAX_PATHNAME+2];
   const char *zName = zPath;
 
-  /* Check the following statements are true: 
+  /* Check the following statements are true:
   **
-  **   (a) Exactly one of the READWRITE and READONLY flags must be set, and 
+  **   (a) Exactly one of the READWRITE and READONLY flags must be set, and
   **   (b) if CREATE is set, then READWRITE must also be set, and
   **   (c) if EXCLUSIVE is set, then CREATE must also be set.
   **   (d) if DELETEONCLOSE is set, then CREATE must also be set.
@@ -6176,7 +6176,7 @@ static int unixOpen(
   assert(isExclusive==0 || isCreate);
   assert(isDelete==0 || isCreate);
 
-  /* The main DB, main journal, WAL file and super-journal are never 
+  /* The main DB, main journal, WAL file and super-journal are never
   ** automatically deleted. Nor are they ever temporary files.  */
   assert( (!isDelete && zName) || eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB );
   assert( (!isDelete && zName) || eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL );
@@ -6184,9 +6184,9 @@ static int unixOpen(
   assert( (!isDelete && zName) || eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_WAL );
 
   /* Assert that the upper layer has set one of the "file-type" flags. */
-  assert( eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB      || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB 
-       || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL 
-       || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL   || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL 
+  assert( eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB      || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB
+       || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL
+       || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL   || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL
        || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_WAL
   );
 
@@ -6240,7 +6240,7 @@ static int unixOpen(
 
   /* Determine the value of the flags parameter passed to POSIX function
   ** open(). These must be calculated even if open() is not called, as
-  ** they may be stored as part of the file handle and used by the 
+  ** they may be stored as part of the file handle and used by the
   ** 'conch file' locking functions later on.  */
   if( isReadonly )  openFlags |= O_RDONLY;
   if( isReadWrite ) openFlags |= O_RDWR;
@@ -6305,7 +6305,7 @@ static int unixOpen(
 
   if( p->pPreallocatedUnused ){
     p->pPreallocatedUnused->fd = fd;
-    p->pPreallocatedUnused->flags = 
+    p->pPreallocatedUnused->flags =
                           flags & (SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY|SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE);
   }
 
@@ -6327,7 +6327,7 @@ static int unixOpen(
     p->openFlags = openFlags;
   }
 #endif
-  
+
 #if defined(__APPLE__) || SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
   if( fstatfs(fd, &fsInfo) == -1 ){
     storeLastErrno(p, errno);
@@ -6358,7 +6358,7 @@ static int unixOpen(
     char *envforce = getenv("SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING");
     int useProxy = 0;
 
-    /* SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING==1 means force always use proxy, 0 means 
+    /* SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING==1 means force always use proxy, 0 means
     ** never use proxy, NULL means use proxy for non-local files only.  */
     if( envforce!=NULL ){
       useProxy = atoi(envforce)>0;
@@ -6370,9 +6370,9 @@ static int unixOpen(
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
         rc = proxyTransformUnixFile((unixFile*)pFile, ":auto:");
         if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
-          /* Use unixClose to clean up the resources added in fillInUnixFile 
-          ** and clear all the structure's references.  Specifically, 
-          ** pFile->pMethods will be NULL so sqlite3OsClose will be a no-op 
+          /* Use unixClose to clean up the resources added in fillInUnixFile
+          ** and clear all the structure's references.  Specifically,
+          ** pFile->pMethods will be NULL so sqlite3OsClose will be a no-op
           */
           unixClose(pFile);
           return rc;
@@ -6382,9 +6382,9 @@ static int unixOpen(
     }
   }
 #endif
-  
-  assert( zPath==0 || zPath[0]=='/' 
-      || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL 
+
+  assert( zPath==0 || zPath[0]=='/'
+      || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL
   );
   rc = fillInUnixFile(pVfs, fd, pFile, zPath, ctrlFlags);
 
@@ -6569,9 +6569,9 @@ static void appendAllPathElements(
 /*
 ** Turn a relative pathname into a full pathname. The relative path
 ** is stored as a nul-terminated string in the buffer pointed to by
-** zPath. 
+** zPath.
 **
-** zOut points to a buffer of at least sqlite3_vfs.mxPathname bytes 
+** zOut points to a buffer of at least sqlite3_vfs.mxPathname bytes
 ** (in this case, MAX_PATHNAME bytes). The full-path is written to
 ** this buffer before returning.
 */
@@ -6631,7 +6631,7 @@ static void unixDlError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int nBuf, char *zBufOut){
   unixLeaveMutex();
 }
 static void (*unixDlSym(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, void *p, const char*zSym))(void){
-  /* 
+  /*
   ** GCC with -pedantic-errors says that C90 does not allow a void* to be
   ** cast into a pointer to a function.  And yet the library dlsym() routine
   ** returns a void* which is really a pointer to a function.  So how do we
@@ -6641,7 +6641,7 @@ static void (*unixDlSym(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, void *p, const char*zSym))(void){
   ** parameters void* and const char* and returning a pointer to a function.
   ** We initialize x by assigning it a pointer to the dlsym() function.
   ** (That assignment requires a cast.)  Then we call the function that
-  ** x points to.  
+  ** x points to.
   **
   ** This work-around is unlikely to work correctly on any system where
   ** you really cannot cast a function pointer into void*.  But then, on the
@@ -6684,7 +6684,7 @@ static int unixRandomness(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int nBuf, char *zBuf){
   ** tests repeatable.
   */
   memset(zBuf, 0, nBuf);
-  randomnessPid = osGetpid(0);  
+  randomnessPid = osGetpid(0);
 #if !defined(SQLITE_TEST) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_RANDOMNESS)
   {
     int fd, got;
@@ -6752,7 +6752,7 @@ int sqlite3_current_time = 0;  /* Fake system time in seconds since 1970. */
 ** epoch of noon in Greenwich on November 24, 4714 B.C according to the
 ** proleptic Gregorian calendar.
 **
-** On success, return SQLITE_OK.  Return SQLITE_ERROR if the time and date 
+** On success, return SQLITE_OK.  Return SQLITE_ERROR if the time and date
 ** cannot be found.
 */
 static int unixCurrentTimeInt64(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, sqlite3_int64 *piNow){
@@ -6859,7 +6859,7 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){
 ** To address the performance and cache coherency issues, proxy file locking
 ** changes the way database access is controlled by limiting access to a
 ** single host at a time and moving file locks off of the database file
-** and onto a proxy file on the local file system.  
+** and onto a proxy file on the local file system.
 **
 **
 ** Using proxy locks
@@ -6885,19 +6885,19 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){
 ** actual proxy file name is generated from the name and path of the
 ** database file.  For example:
 **
-**       For database path "/Users/me/foo.db" 
+**       For database path "/Users/me/foo.db"
 **       The lock path will be "<tmpdir>/sqliteplocks/_Users_me_foo.db:auto:")
 **
 ** Once a lock proxy is configured for a database connection, it can not
 ** be removed, however it may be switched to a different proxy path via
 ** the above APIs (assuming the conch file is not being held by another
-** connection or process). 
+** connection or process).
 **
 **
 ** How proxy locking works
 ** -----------------------
 **
-** Proxy file locking relies primarily on two new supporting files: 
+** Proxy file locking relies primarily on two new supporting files:
 **
 **   *  conch file to limit access to the database file to a single host
 **      at a time
@@ -6924,11 +6924,11 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){
 ** host (the conch ensures that they all use the same local lock file).
 **
 ** Requesting the lock proxy does not immediately take the conch, it is
-** only taken when the first request to lock database file is made.  
+** only taken when the first request to lock database file is made.
 ** This matches the semantics of the traditional locking behavior, where
 ** opening a connection to a database file does not take a lock on it.
-** The shared lock and an open file descriptor are maintained until 
-** the connection to the database is closed. 
+** The shared lock and an open file descriptor are maintained until
+** the connection to the database is closed.
 **
 ** The proxy file and the lock file are never deleted so they only need
 ** to be created the first time they are used.
@@ -6942,7 +6942,7 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){
 **       automatically configured for proxy locking, lock files are
 **       named automatically using the same logic as
 **       PRAGMA lock_proxy_file=":auto:"
-**    
+**  
 **  SQLITE_PROXY_DEBUG
 **
 **       Enables the logging of error messages during host id file
@@ -6957,8 +6957,8 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){
 **
 **       Permissions to use when creating a directory for storing the
 **       lock proxy files, only used when LOCKPROXYDIR is not set.
-**    
-**    
+**  
+**  
 ** As mentioned above, when compiled with SQLITE_PREFER_PROXY_LOCKING,
 ** setting the environment variable SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING to 1 will
 ** force proxy locking to be used for every database file opened, and 0
@@ -6968,12 +6968,12 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){
 */
 
 /*
-** Proxy locking is only available on MacOSX 
+** Proxy locking is only available on MacOSX
 */
 #if defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
 
 /*
-** The proxyLockingContext has the path and file structures for the remote 
+** The proxyLockingContext has the path and file structures for the remote
 ** and local proxy files in it
 */
 typedef struct proxyLockingContext proxyLockingContext;
@@ -6989,10 +6989,10 @@ struct proxyLockingContext {
   sqlite3_io_methods const *pOldMethod;     /* Original I/O methods for close */
 };
 
-/* 
-** The proxy lock file path for the database at dbPath is written into lPath, 
+/*
+** The proxy lock file path for the database at dbPath is written into lPath,
 ** which must point to valid, writable memory large enough for a maxLen length
-** file path. 
+** file path.
 */
 static int proxyGetLockPath(const char *dbPath, char *lPath, size_t maxLen){
   int len;
@@ -7009,7 +7009,7 @@ static int proxyGetLockPath(const char *dbPath, char *lPath, size_t maxLen){
                lPath, errno, osGetpid(0)));
       return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK;
     }
-    len = strlcat(lPath, "sqliteplocks", maxLen);    
+    len = strlcat(lPath, "sqliteplocks", maxLen);  
   }
 # else
   len = strlcpy(lPath, "/tmp/", maxLen);
@@ -7019,7 +7019,7 @@ static int proxyGetLockPath(const char *dbPath, char *lPath, size_t maxLen){
   if( lPath[len-1]!='/' ){
     len = strlcat(lPath, "/", maxLen);
   }
-  
+
   /* transform the db path to a unique cache name */
   dbLen = (int)strlen(dbPath);
   for( i=0; i<dbLen && (i+len+7)<(int)maxLen; i++){
@@ -7032,14 +7032,14 @@ static int proxyGetLockPath(const char *dbPath, char *lPath, size_t maxLen){
   return SQLITE_OK;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
  ** Creates the lock file and any missing directories in lockPath
  */
 static int proxyCreateLockPath(const char *lockPath){
   int i, len;
   char buf[MAXPATHLEN];
   int start = 0;
-  
+
   assert(lockPath!=NULL);
   /* try to create all the intermediate directories */
   len = (int)strlen(lockPath);
@@ -7047,7 +7047,7 @@ static int proxyCreateLockPath(const char *lockPath){
   for( i=1; i<len; i++ ){
     if( lockPath[i] == '/' && (i - start > 0) ){
       /* only mkdir if leaf dir != "." or "/" or ".." */
-      if( i-start>2 || (i-start==1 && buf[start] != '.' && buf[start] != '/') 
+      if( i-start>2 || (i-start==1 && buf[start] != '.' && buf[start] != '/')
          || (i-start==2 && buf[start] != '.' && buf[start+1] != '.') ){
         buf[i]='\0';
         if( osMkdir(buf, SQLITE_DEFAULT_PROXYDIR_PERMISSIONS) ){
@@ -7124,13 +7124,13 @@ static int proxyCreateUnixFile(
     switch (terrno) {
       case EACCES:
         return SQLITE_PERM;
-      case EIO: 
+      case EIO:
         return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK; /* even though it is the conch */
       default:
         return SQLITE_CANTOPEN_BKPT;
     }
   }
-  
+
   pNew = (unixFile *)sqlite3_malloc64(sizeof(*pNew));
   if( pNew==NULL ){
     rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
@@ -7144,13 +7144,13 @@ static int proxyCreateUnixFile(
   pUnused->fd = fd;
   pUnused->flags = openFlags;
   pNew->pPreallocatedUnused = pUnused;
-  
+
   rc = fillInUnixFile(&dummyVfs, fd, (sqlite3_file*)pNew, path, 0);
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
     *ppFile = pNew;
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }
-end_create_proxy:    
+end_create_proxy:  
   robust_close(pNew, fd, __LINE__);
   sqlite3_free(pNew);
   sqlite3_free(pUnused);
@@ -7169,7 +7169,7 @@ int sqlite3_hostid_num = 0;
 extern int gethostuuid(uuid_t id, const struct timespec *wait);
 #endif
 
-/* get the host ID via gethostuuid(), pHostID must point to PROXY_HOSTIDLEN 
+/* get the host ID via gethostuuid(), pHostID must point to PROXY_HOSTIDLEN
 ** bytes of writable memory.
 */
 static int proxyGetHostID(unsigned char *pHostID, int *pError){
@@ -7195,7 +7195,7 @@ static int proxyGetHostID(unsigned char *pHostID, int *pError){
     pHostID[0] = (char)(pHostID[0] + (char)(sqlite3_hostid_num & 0xFF));
   }
 #endif
-  
+
   return SQLITE_OK;
 }
 
@@ -7206,14 +7206,14 @@ static int proxyGetHostID(unsigned char *pHostID, int *pError){
 #define PROXY_PATHINDEX    (PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN)
 #define PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN  (PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN+MAXPATHLEN)
 
-/* 
-** Takes an open conch file, copies the contents to a new path and then moves 
+/*
+** Takes an open conch file, copies the contents to a new path and then moves
 ** it back.  The newly created file's file descriptor is assigned to the
-** conch file structure and finally the original conch file descriptor is 
+** conch file structure and finally the original conch file descriptor is
 ** closed.  Returns zero if successful.
 */
 static int proxyBreakConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID){
-  proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext; 
+  proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
   unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile;
   char tPath[MAXPATHLEN];
   char buf[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN];
@@ -7227,7 +7227,7 @@ static int proxyBreakConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID){
 
   /* create a new path by replace the trailing '-conch' with '-break' */
   pathLen = strlcpy(tPath, cPath, MAXPATHLEN);
-  if( pathLen>MAXPATHLEN || pathLen<6 || 
+  if( pathLen>MAXPATHLEN || pathLen<6 ||
      (strlcpy(&tPath[pathLen-5], "break", 6) != 5) ){
     sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(errmsg),errmsg,"path error (len %d)",(int)pathLen);
     goto end_breaklock;
@@ -7269,24 +7269,24 @@ end_breaklock:
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* Take the requested lock on the conch file and break a stale lock if the 
+/* Take the requested lock on the conch file and break a stale lock if the
 ** host id matches.
 */
 static int proxyConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID, int lockType){
-  proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext; 
+  proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
   unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile;
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
   int nTries = 0;
   struct timespec conchModTime;
-  
+
   memset(&conchModTime, 0, sizeof(conchModTime));
   do {
     rc = conchFile->pMethod->xLock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, lockType);
     nTries ++;
     if( rc==SQLITE_BUSY ){
       /* If the lock failed (busy):
-       * 1st try: get the mod time of the conch, wait 0.5s and try again. 
-       * 2nd try: fail if the mod time changed or host id is different, wait 
+       * 1st try: get the mod time of the conch, wait 0.5s and try again.
+       * 2nd try: fail if the mod time changed or host id is different, wait
        *           10 sec and try again
        * 3rd try: break the lock unless the mod time has changed.
        */
@@ -7295,20 +7295,20 @@ static int proxyConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID, int lockType){
         storeLastErrno(pFile, errno);
         return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK;
       }
-      
+    
       if( nTries==1 ){
         conchModTime = buf.st_mtimespec;
         unixSleep(0,500000); /* wait 0.5 sec and try the lock again*/
-        continue;  
+        continue;
       }
 
       assert( nTries>1 );
-      if( conchModTime.tv_sec != buf.st_mtimespec.tv_sec || 
+      if( conchModTime.tv_sec != buf.st_mtimespec.tv_sec ||
          conchModTime.tv_nsec != buf.st_mtimespec.tv_nsec ){
         return SQLITE_BUSY;
       }
-      
-      if( nTries==2 ){  
+    
+      if( nTries==2 ){
         char tBuf[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN];
         int len = osPread(conchFile->h, tBuf, PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN, 0);
         if( len<0 ){
@@ -7325,9 +7325,9 @@ static int proxyConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID, int lockType){
           return SQLITE_BUSY;
         }
         unixSleep(0,10000000); /* wait 10 sec and try the lock again */
-        continue; 
+        continue;
       }
-      
+    
       assert( nTries==3 );
       if( 0==proxyBreakConchLock(pFile, myHostID) ){
         rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -7340,19 +7340,19 @@ static int proxyConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID, int lockType){
       }
     }
   } while( rc==SQLITE_BUSY && nTries<3 );
-  
+
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* Takes the conch by taking a shared lock and read the contents conch, if 
-** lockPath is non-NULL, the host ID and lock file path must match.  A NULL 
-** lockPath means that the lockPath in the conch file will be used if the 
-** host IDs match, or a new lock path will be generated automatically 
+/* Takes the conch by taking a shared lock and read the contents conch, if
+** lockPath is non-NULL, the host ID and lock file path must match.  A NULL
+** lockPath means that the lockPath in the conch file will be used if the
+** host IDs match, or a new lock path will be generated automatically
 ** and written to the conch file.
 */
 static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
-  proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext; 
-  
+  proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
+
   if( pCtx->conchHeld!=0 ){
     return SQLITE_OK;
   }else{
@@ -7368,7 +7368,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
     int readLen = 0;
     int tryOldLockPath = 0;
     int forceNewLockPath = 0;
-    
+  
     OSTRACE(("TAKECONCH  %d for %s pid=%d\n", conchFile->h,
              (pCtx->lockProxyPath ? pCtx->lockProxyPath : ":auto:"),
              osGetpid(0)));
@@ -7389,21 +7389,21 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
       storeLastErrno(pFile, conchFile->lastErrno);
       rc = SQLITE_IOERR_READ;
       goto end_takeconch;
-    }else if( readLen<=(PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN) || 
+    }else if( readLen<=(PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN) ||
              readBuf[0]!=(char)PROXY_CONCHVERSION ){
-      /* a short read or version format mismatch means we need to create a new 
-      ** conch file. 
+      /* a short read or version format mismatch means we need to create a new
+      ** conch file.
       */
       createConch = 1;
     }
     /* if the host id matches and the lock path already exists in the conch
-    ** we'll try to use the path there, if we can't open that path, we'll 
-    ** retry with a new auto-generated path 
+    ** we'll try to use the path there, if we can't open that path, we'll
+    ** retry with a new auto-generated path
     */
     do { /* in case we need to try again for an :auto: named lock file */
 
       if( !createConch && !forceNewLockPath ){
-        hostIdMatch = !memcmp(&readBuf[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID, 
+        hostIdMatch = !memcmp(&readBuf[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID,
                                   PROXY_HOSTIDLEN);
         /* if the conch has data compare the contents */
         if( !pCtx->lockProxyPath ){
@@ -7412,7 +7412,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
            */
           if( hostIdMatch ){
             size_t pathLen = (readLen - PROXY_PATHINDEX);
-            
+          
             if( pathLen>=MAXPATHLEN ){
               pathLen=MAXPATHLEN-1;
             }
@@ -7428,23 +7428,23 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
                            readLen-PROXY_PATHINDEX)
         ){
           /* conch host and lock path match */
-          goto end_takeconch; 
+          goto end_takeconch;
         }
       }
-      
+    
       /* if the conch isn't writable and doesn't match, we can't take it */
       if( (conchFile->openFlags&O_RDWR) == 0 ){
         rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
         goto end_takeconch;
       }
-      
+    
       /* either the conch didn't match or we need to create a new one */
       if( !pCtx->lockProxyPath ){
         proxyGetLockPath(pCtx->dbPath, lockPath, MAXPATHLEN);
         tempLockPath = lockPath;
         /* create a copy of the lock path _only_ if the conch is taken */
       }
-      
+    
       /* update conch with host and path (this will fail if other process
       ** has a shared lock already), if the host id matches, use the big
       ** stick.
@@ -7455,7 +7455,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
           /* We are trying for an exclusive lock but another thread in this
            ** same process is still holding a shared lock. */
           rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
-        } else {          
+        } else {        
           rc = proxyConchLock(pFile, myHostID, EXCLUSIVE_LOCK);
         }
       }else{
@@ -7464,7 +7464,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
         char writeBuffer[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN];
         int writeSize = 0;
-        
+      
         writeBuffer[0] = (char)PROXY_CONCHVERSION;
         memcpy(&writeBuffer[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID, PROXY_HOSTIDLEN);
         if( pCtx->lockProxyPath!=NULL ){
@@ -7477,8 +7477,8 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
         robust_ftruncate(conchFile->h, writeSize);
         rc = unixWrite((sqlite3_file *)conchFile, writeBuffer, writeSize, 0);
         full_fsync(conchFile->h,0,0);
-        /* If we created a new conch file (not just updated the contents of a 
-         ** valid conch file), try to match the permissions of the database 
+        /* If we created a new conch file (not just updated the contents of a
+         ** valid conch file), try to match the permissions of the database
          */
         if( rc==SQLITE_OK && createConch ){
           struct stat buf;
@@ -7502,14 +7502,14 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
             }
           }else{
             int code = errno;
-            fprintf(stderr, "STAT FAILED[%d] with %d %s\n", 
+            fprintf(stderr, "STAT FAILED[%d] with %d %s\n",
                     err, code, strerror(code));
 #endif
           }
         }
       }
       conchFile->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, SHARED_LOCK);
-      
+    
     end_takeconch:
       OSTRACE(("TRANSPROXY: CLOSE  %d\n", pFile->h));
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->openFlags ){
@@ -7532,7 +7532,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
         rc = proxyCreateUnixFile(path, &pCtx->lockProxy, 1);
         if( rc!=SQLITE_OK && rc!=SQLITE_NOMEM && tryOldLockPath ){
           /* we couldn't create the proxy lock file with the old lock file path
-           ** so try again via auto-naming 
+           ** so try again via auto-naming
            */
           forceNewLockPath = 1;
           tryOldLockPath = 0;
@@ -7552,7 +7552,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
       }
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
         pCtx->conchHeld = 1;
-        
+      
         if( pCtx->lockProxy->pMethod == &afpIoMethods ){
           afpLockingContext *afpCtx;
           afpCtx = (afpLockingContext *)pCtx->lockProxy->lockingContext;
@@ -7564,7 +7564,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
       OSTRACE(("TAKECONCH  %d %s\n", conchFile->h,
                rc==SQLITE_OK?"ok":"failed"));
       return rc;
-    } while (1); /* in case we need to retry the :auto: lock file - 
+    } while (1); /* in case we need to retry the :auto: lock file -
                  ** we should never get here except via the 'continue' call. */
   }
 }
@@ -7580,7 +7580,7 @@ static int proxyReleaseConch(unixFile *pFile){
   pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
   conchFile = pCtx->conchFile;
   OSTRACE(("RELEASECONCH  %d for %s pid=%d\n", conchFile->h,
-           (pCtx->lockProxyPath ? pCtx->lockProxyPath : ":auto:"), 
+           (pCtx->lockProxyPath ? pCtx->lockProxyPath : ":auto:"),
            osGetpid(0)));
   if( pCtx->conchHeld>0 ){
     rc = conchFile->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, NO_LOCK);
@@ -7608,13 +7608,13 @@ static int proxyCreateConchPathname(char *dbPath, char **pConchPath){
   char *conchPath;              /* buffer in which to construct conch name */
 
   /* Allocate space for the conch filename and initialize the name to
-  ** the name of the original database file. */  
+  ** the name of the original database file. */
   *pConchPath = conchPath = (char *)sqlite3_malloc64(len + 8);
   if( conchPath==0 ){
     return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
   }
   memcpy(conchPath, dbPath, len+1);
-  
+
   /* now insert a "." before the last / character */
   for( i=(len-1); i>=0; i-- ){
     if( conchPath[i]=='/' ){
@@ -7637,7 +7637,7 @@ static int proxyCreateConchPathname(char *dbPath, char **pConchPath){
 
 
 /* Takes a fully configured proxy locking-style unix file and switches
-** the local lock file path 
+** the local lock file path
 */
 static int switchLockProxyPath(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
   proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext*)pFile->lockingContext;
@@ -7646,7 +7646,7 @@ static int switchLockProxyPath(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
 
   if( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK ){
     return SQLITE_BUSY;
-  }  
+  }
 
   /* nothing to do if the path is NULL, :auto: or matches the existing path */
   if( !path || path[0]=='\0' || !strcmp(path, ":auto:") ||
@@ -7664,7 +7664,7 @@ static int switchLockProxyPath(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
     sqlite3_free(oldPath);
     pCtx->lockProxyPath = sqlite3DbStrDup(0, path);
   }
-  
+
   return rc;
 }
 
@@ -7678,7 +7678,7 @@ static int switchLockProxyPath(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
 static int proxyGetDbPathForUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, char *dbPath){
 #if defined(__APPLE__)
   if( pFile->pMethod == &afpIoMethods ){
-    /* afp style keeps a reference to the db path in the filePath field 
+    /* afp style keeps a reference to the db path in the filePath field
     ** of the struct */
     assert( (int)strlen((char*)pFile->lockingContext)<=MAXPATHLEN );
     strlcpy(dbPath, ((afpLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext)->dbPath,
@@ -7699,9 +7699,9 @@ static int proxyGetDbPathForUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, char *dbPath){
 }
 
 /*
-** Takes an already filled in unix file and alters it so all file locking 
+** Takes an already filled in unix file and alters it so all file locking
 ** will be performed on the local proxy lock file.  The following fields
-** are preserved in the locking context so that they can be restored and 
+** are preserved in the locking context so that they can be restored and
 ** the unix structure properly cleaned up at close time:
 **  ->lockingContext
 **  ->pMethod
@@ -7711,7 +7711,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
   char dbPath[MAXPATHLEN+1];       /* Name of the database file */
   char *lockPath=NULL;
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
-  
+
   if( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK ){
     return SQLITE_BUSY;
   }
@@ -7721,7 +7721,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
   }else{
     lockPath=(char *)path;
   }
-  
+
   OSTRACE(("TRANSPROXY  %d for %s pid=%d\n", pFile->h,
            (lockPath ? lockPath : ":auto:"), osGetpid(0)));
 
@@ -7755,7 +7755,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
         rc = SQLITE_OK;
       }
     }
-  }  
+  }
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && lockPath ){
     pCtx->lockProxyPath = sqlite3DbStrDup(0, lockPath);
   }
@@ -7767,7 +7767,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
     }
   }
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-    /* all memory is allocated, proxys are created and assigned, 
+    /* all memory is allocated, proxys are created and assigned,
     ** switch the locking context and pMethod then return.
     */
     pCtx->oldLockingContext = pFile->lockingContext;
@@ -7775,12 +7775,12 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
     pCtx->pOldMethod = pFile->pMethod;
     pFile->pMethod = &proxyIoMethods;
   }else{
-    if( pCtx->conchFile ){ 
+    if( pCtx->conchFile ){
       pCtx->conchFile->pMethod->xClose((sqlite3_file *)pCtx->conchFile);
       sqlite3_free(pCtx->conchFile);
     }
     sqlite3DbFree(0, pCtx->lockProxyPath);
-    sqlite3_free(pCtx->conchFilePath); 
+    sqlite3_free(pCtx->conchFilePath);
     sqlite3_free(pCtx);
   }
   OSTRACE(("TRANSPROXY  %d %s\n", pFile->h,
@@ -7818,7 +7818,7 @@ static int proxyFileControl(sqlite3_file *id, int op, void *pArg){
         if( isProxyStyle ){
           /* turn off proxy locking - not supported.  If support is added for
           ** switching proxy locking mode off then it will need to fail if
-          ** the journal mode is WAL mode. 
+          ** the journal mode is WAL mode.
           */
           rc = SQLITE_ERROR /*SQLITE_PROTOCOL? SQLITE_MISUSE?*/;
         }else{
@@ -7828,9 +7828,9 @@ static int proxyFileControl(sqlite3_file *id, int op, void *pArg){
       }else{
         const char *proxyPath = (const char *)pArg;
         if( isProxyStyle ){
-          proxyLockingContext *pCtx = 
+          proxyLockingContext *pCtx =
             (proxyLockingContext*)pFile->lockingContext;
-          if( !strcmp(pArg, ":auto:") 
+          if( !strcmp(pArg, ":auto:")
            || (pCtx->lockProxyPath &&
                !strncmp(pCtx->lockProxyPath, proxyPath, MAXPATHLEN))
           ){
@@ -7955,7 +7955,7 @@ static int proxyClose(sqlite3_file *id) {
     unixFile *lockProxy = pCtx->lockProxy;
     unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile;
     int rc = SQLITE_OK;
-    
+
     if( lockProxy ){
       rc = lockProxy->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)lockProxy, NO_LOCK);
       if( rc ) return rc;
@@ -7992,7 +7992,7 @@ static int proxyClose(sqlite3_file *id) {
 ** The proxy locking style is intended for use with AFP filesystems.
 ** And since AFP is only supported on MacOSX, the proxy locking is also
 ** restricted to MacOSX.
-** 
+**
 **
 ******************* End of the proxy lock implementation **********************
 ******************************************************************************/
@@ -8010,8 +8010,8 @@ static int proxyClose(sqlite3_file *id) {
 ** necessarily been initialized when this routine is called, and so they
 ** should not be used.
 */
-int sqlite3_os_init(void){ 
-  /* 
+int sqlite3_os_init(void){
+  /*
   ** The following macro defines an initializer for an sqlite3_vfs object.
   ** The name of the VFS is NAME.  The pAppData is a pointer to a pointer
   ** to the "finder" function.  (pAppData is a pointer to a pointer because
@@ -8027,7 +8027,7 @@ int sqlite3_os_init(void){
   **
   ** Most finders simply return a pointer to a fixed sqlite3_io_methods
   ** object.  But the "autolockIoFinder" available on MacOSX does a little
-  ** more than that; it looks at the filesystem type that hosts the 
+  ** more than that; it looks at the filesystem type that hosts the
   ** database file and tries to choose an locking method appropriate for
   ** that filesystem time.
   */
@@ -8130,7 +8130,7 @@ int sqlite3_os_init(void){
   /* Initialize temp file dir array. */
   unixTempFileInit();
 
-  return SQLITE_OK; 
+  return SQLITE_OK;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -8140,9 +8140,9 @@ int sqlite3_os_init(void){
 ** to release dynamically allocated objects.  But not on unix.
 ** This routine is a no-op for unix.
 */
-int sqlite3_os_end(void){ 
+int sqlite3_os_end(void){
   unixBigLock = 0;
-  return SQLITE_OK; 
+  return SQLITE_OK;
 }
- 
+
 #endif /* SQLITE_OS_UNIX */
diff --git a/src/os_win.c b/src/os_win.c
index b7b689745..069cfc18e 100644
--- a/src/os_win.c
+++ b/src/os_win.c
@@ -1159,7 +1159,7 @@ static struct win_syscall {
 
 /*
 ** This is the xSetSystemCall() method of sqlite3_vfs for all of the
-** "win32" VFSes.  Return SQLITE_OK opon successfully updating the
+** "win32" VFSes.  Return SQLITE_OK upon successfully updating the
 ** system call pointer, or SQLITE_NOTFOUND if there is no configurable
 ** system call named zName.
 */
@@ -2739,7 +2739,7 @@ static int winRead(
            pFile->h, pBuf, amt, offset, pFile->locktype));
 
 #if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0
-  /* Deal with as much of this read request as possible by transfering
+  /* Deal with as much of this read request as possible by transferring
   ** data from the memory mapping using memcpy().  */
   if( offset<pFile->mmapSize ){
     if( offset+amt <= pFile->mmapSize ){
@@ -2817,7 +2817,7 @@ static int winWrite(
            pFile->h, pBuf, amt, offset, pFile->locktype));
 
 #if defined(SQLITE_MMAP_READWRITE) && SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0
-  /* Deal with as much of this write request as possible by transfering
+  /* Deal with as much of this write request as possible by transferring
   ** data from the memory mapping using memcpy().  */
   if( offset<pFile->mmapSize ){
     if( offset+amt <= pFile->mmapSize ){
@@ -2927,7 +2927,7 @@ static int winTruncate(sqlite3_file *id, sqlite3_int64 nByte){
     ** all references to memory-mapped content are closed.  That is doable,
     ** but involves adding a few branches in the common write code path which
     ** could slow down normal operations slightly.  Hence, we have decided for
-    ** now to simply make trancations a no-op if there are pending reads.  We
+    ** now to simply make transactions a no-op if there are pending reads.  We
     ** can maybe revisit this decision in the future.
     */
     return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -2986,7 +2986,7 @@ static int winTruncate(sqlite3_file *id, sqlite3_int64 nByte){
 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST
 /*
 ** Count the number of fullsyncs and normal syncs.  This is used to test
-** that syncs and fullsyncs are occuring at the right times.
+** that syncs and fullsyncs are occurring at the right times.
 */
 int sqlite3_sync_count = 0;
 int sqlite3_fullsync_count = 0;
diff --git a/src/pager.c b/src/pager.c
index 44384de5c..840c1818f 100644
--- a/src/pager.c
+++ b/src/pager.c
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
 **
 *************************************************************************
 ** This is the implementation of the page cache subsystem or "pager".
-** 
+**
 ** The pager is used to access a database disk file.  It implements
 ** atomic commit and rollback through the use of a journal file that
 ** is separate from the database file.  The pager also implements file
@@ -36,60 +36,60 @@
 **
 ** Definition:  A page of the database file is said to be "overwriteable" if
 ** one or more of the following are true about the page:
-** 
+**
 **     (a)  The original content of the page as it was at the beginning of
 **          the transaction has been written into the rollback journal and
 **          synced.
-** 
+**
 **     (b)  The page was a freelist leaf page at the start of the transaction.
-** 
+**
 **     (c)  The page number is greater than the largest page that existed in
 **          the database file at the start of the transaction.
-** 
+**
 ** (1) A page of the database file is never overwritten unless one of the
 **     following are true:
-** 
+**
 **     (a) The page and all other pages on the same sector are overwriteable.
-** 
+**
 **     (b) The atomic page write optimization is enabled, and the entire
 **         transaction other than the update of the transaction sequence
 **         number consists of a single page change.
-** 
+**
 ** (2) The content of a page written into the rollback journal exactly matches
 **     both the content in the database when the rollback journal was written
 **     and the content in the database at the beginning of the current
 **     transaction.
-** 
+**
 ** (3) Writes to the database file are an integer multiple of the page size
 **     in length and are aligned on a page boundary.
-** 
+**
 ** (4) Reads from the database file are either aligned on a page boundary and
 **     an integer multiple of the page size in length or are taken from the
 **     first 100 bytes of the database file.
-** 
+**
 ** (5) All writes to the database file are synced prior to the rollback journal
 **     being deleted, truncated, or zeroed.
-** 
+**
 ** (6) If a super-journal file is used, then all writes to the database file
 **     are synced prior to the super-journal being deleted.
-** 
+**
 ** Definition: Two databases (or the same database at two points it time)
 ** are said to be "logically equivalent" if they give the same answer to
 ** all queries.  Note in particular the content of freelist leaf
 ** pages can be changed arbitrarily without affecting the logical equivalence
 ** of the database.
-** 
+**
 ** (7) At any time, if any subset, including the empty set and the total set,
-**     of the unsynced changes to a rollback journal are removed and the 
+**     of the unsynced changes to a rollback journal are removed and the
 **     journal is rolled back, the resulting database file will be logically
 **     equivalent to the database file at the beginning of the transaction.
-** 
+**
 ** (8) When a transaction is rolled back, the xTruncate method of the VFS
 **     is called to restore the database file to the same size it was at
 **     the beginning of the transaction.  (In some VFSes, the xTruncate
 **     method is a no-op, but that does not change the fact the SQLite will
 **     invoke it.)
-** 
+**
 ** (9) Whenever the database file is modified, at least one bit in the range
 **     of bytes from 24 through 39 inclusive will be changed prior to releasing
 **     the EXCLUSIVE lock, thus signaling other connections on the same
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 
 /*
 ** The following two macros are used within the PAGERTRACE() macros above
-** to print out file-descriptors. 
+** to print out file-descriptors.
 **
 ** PAGERID() takes a pointer to a Pager struct as its argument. The
 ** associated file-descriptor is returned. FILEHANDLEID() takes an sqlite3_file
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **               |              |                |
 **               |              V                |
 **               |<-------WRITER_LOCKED------> ERROR
-**               |              |                ^  
+**               |              |                ^ 
 **               |              V                |
 **               |<------WRITER_CACHEMOD-------->|
 **               |              |                |
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **
 **
 ** List of state transitions and the C [function] that performs each:
-** 
+**
 **   OPEN              -> READER              [sqlite3PagerSharedLock]
 **   READER            -> OPEN                [pager_unlock]
 **
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **
 **   WRITER_***        -> ERROR               [pager_error]
 **   ERROR             -> OPEN                [pager_unlock]
-** 
+**
 **
 **  OPEN:
 **
@@ -181,9 +181,9 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **
 **  READER:
 **
-**    In this state all the requirements for reading the database in 
+**    In this state all the requirements for reading the database in
 **    rollback (non-WAL) mode are met. Unless the pager is (or recently
-**    was) in exclusive-locking mode, a user-level read transaction is 
+**    was) in exclusive-locking mode, a user-level read transaction is
 **    open. The database size is known in this state.
 **
 **    A connection running with locking_mode=normal enters this state when
@@ -193,28 +193,28 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **    this state even after the read-transaction is closed. The only way
 **    a locking_mode=exclusive connection can transition from READER to OPEN
 **    is via the ERROR state (see below).
-** 
+**
 **    * A read transaction may be active (but a write-transaction cannot).
 **    * A SHARED or greater lock is held on the database file.
-**    * The dbSize variable may be trusted (even if a user-level read 
+**    * The dbSize variable may be trusted (even if a user-level read
 **      transaction is not active). The dbOrigSize and dbFileSize variables
 **      may not be trusted at this point.
 **    * If the database is a WAL database, then the WAL connection is open.
-**    * Even if a read-transaction is not open, it is guaranteed that 
+**    * Even if a read-transaction is not open, it is guaranteed that
 **      there is no hot-journal in the file-system.
 **
 **  WRITER_LOCKED:
 **
 **    The pager moves to this state from READER when a write-transaction
-**    is first opened on the database. In WRITER_LOCKED state, all locks 
-**    required to start a write-transaction are held, but no actual 
+**    is first opened on the database. In WRITER_LOCKED state, all locks
+**    required to start a write-transaction are held, but no actual
 **    modifications to the cache or database have taken place.
 **
-**    In rollback mode, a RESERVED or (if the transaction was opened with 
+**    In rollback mode, a RESERVED or (if the transaction was opened with
 **    BEGIN EXCLUSIVE) EXCLUSIVE lock is obtained on the database file when
-**    moving to this state, but the journal file is not written to or opened 
-**    to in this state. If the transaction is committed or rolled back while 
-**    in WRITER_LOCKED state, all that is required is to unlock the database 
+**    moving to this state, but the journal file is not written to or opened
+**    to in this state. If the transaction is committed or rolled back while
+**    in WRITER_LOCKED state, all that is required is to unlock the database
 **    file.
 **
 **    IN WAL mode, WalBeginWriteTransaction() is called to lock the log file.
@@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **    is made to obtain an EXCLUSIVE lock on the database file.
 **
 **    * A write transaction is active.
-**    * If the connection is open in rollback-mode, a RESERVED or greater 
+**    * If the connection is open in rollback-mode, a RESERVED or greater
 **      lock is held on the database file.
 **    * If the connection is open in WAL-mode, a WAL write transaction
 **      is open (i.e. sqlite3WalBeginWriteTransaction() has been successfully
@@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **
 **    * A write transaction is active.
 **    * A RESERVED or greater lock is held on the database file.
-**    * The journal file is open and the first header has been written 
+**    * The journal file is open and the first header has been written
 **      to it, but the header has not been synced to disk.
 **    * The contents of the page cache have been modified.
 **
@@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **
 **    * A write transaction is active.
 **    * An EXCLUSIVE or greater lock is held on the database file.
-**    * The journal file is open and the first header has been written 
+**    * The journal file is open and the first header has been written
 **      and synced to disk.
 **    * The contents of the page cache have been modified (and possibly
 **      written to disk).
@@ -266,8 +266,8 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **    A rollback-mode pager changes to WRITER_FINISHED state from WRITER_DBMOD
 **    state after the entire transaction has been successfully written into the
 **    database file. In this state the transaction may be committed simply
-**    by finalizing the journal file. Once in WRITER_FINISHED state, it is 
-**    not possible to modify the database further. At this point, the upper 
+**    by finalizing the journal file. Once in WRITER_FINISHED state, it is
+**    not possible to modify the database further. At this point, the upper
 **    layer must either commit or rollback the transaction.
 **
 **    * A write transaction is active.
@@ -275,19 +275,19 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **    * All writing and syncing of journal and database data has finished.
 **      If no error occurred, all that remains is to finalize the journal to
 **      commit the transaction. If an error did occur, the caller will need
-**      to rollback the transaction. 
+**      to rollback the transaction.
 **
 **  ERROR:
 **
 **    The ERROR state is entered when an IO or disk-full error (including
-**    SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM) occurs at a point in the code that makes it 
-**    difficult to be sure that the in-memory pager state (cache contents, 
+**    SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM) occurs at a point in the code that makes it
+**    difficult to be sure that the in-memory pager state (cache contents,
 **    db size etc.) are consistent with the contents of the file-system.
 **
 **    Temporary pager files may enter the ERROR state, but in-memory pagers
 **    cannot.
 **
-**    For example, if an IO error occurs while performing a rollback, 
+**    For example, if an IO error occurs while performing a rollback,
 **    the contents of the page-cache may be left in an inconsistent state.
 **    At this point it would be dangerous to change back to READER state
 **    (as usually happens after a rollback). Any subsequent readers might
@@ -297,13 +297,13 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **    instead of READER following such an error.
 **
 **    Once it has entered the ERROR state, any attempt to use the pager
-**    to read or write data returns an error. Eventually, once all 
+**    to read or write data returns an error. Eventually, once all
 **    outstanding transactions have been abandoned, the pager is able to
-**    transition back to OPEN state, discarding the contents of the 
+**    transition back to OPEN state, discarding the contents of the
 **    page-cache and any other in-memory state at the same time. Everything
-**    is reloaded from disk (and, if necessary, hot-journal rollback peformed)
+**    is reloaded from disk (and, if necessary, hot-journal rollback performed)
 **    when a read-transaction is next opened on the pager (transitioning
-**    the pager into READER state). At that point the system has recovered 
+**    the pager into READER state). At that point the system has recovered
 **    from the error.
 **
 **    Specifically, the pager jumps into the ERROR state if:
@@ -319,21 +319,21 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **         memory.
 **
 **    In other cases, the error is returned to the b-tree layer. The b-tree
-**    layer then attempts a rollback operation. If the error condition 
+**    layer then attempts a rollback operation. If the error condition
 **    persists, the pager enters the ERROR state via condition (1) above.
 **
 **    Condition (3) is necessary because it can be triggered by a read-only
 **    statement executed within a transaction. In this case, if the error
 **    code were simply returned to the user, the b-tree layer would not
 **    automatically attempt a rollback, as it assumes that an error in a
-**    read-only statement cannot leave the pager in an internally inconsistent 
+**    read-only statement cannot leave the pager in an internally inconsistent
 **    state.
 **
 **    * The Pager.errCode variable is set to something other than SQLITE_OK.
 **    * There are one or more outstanding references to pages (after the
 **      last reference is dropped the pager should move back to OPEN state).
 **    * The pager is not an in-memory pager.
-**    
+**   
 **
 ** Notes:
 **
@@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **
 **   * Normally, a connection open in exclusive mode is never in PAGER_OPEN
 **     state. There are two exceptions: immediately after exclusive-mode has
-**     been turned on (and before any read or write transactions are 
+**     been turned on (and before any read or write transactions are
 **     executed), and when the pager is leaving the "error state".
 **
 **   * See also: assert_pager_state().
@@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 #define PAGER_ERROR                 6
 
 /*
-** The Pager.eLock variable is almost always set to one of the 
+** The Pager.eLock variable is almost always set to one of the
 ** following locking-states, according to the lock currently held on
 ** the database file: NO_LOCK, SHARED_LOCK, RESERVED_LOCK or EXCLUSIVE_LOCK.
 ** This variable is kept up to date as locks are taken and released by
@@ -372,20 +372,20 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 ** to a less exclusive (lower) value than the lock that is actually held
 ** at the system level, but it is never set to a more exclusive value.
 **
-** This is usually safe. If an xUnlock fails or appears to fail, there may 
+** This is usually safe. If an xUnlock fails or appears to fail, there may
 ** be a few redundant xLock() calls or a lock may be held for longer than
 ** required, but nothing really goes wrong.
 **
 ** The exception is when the database file is unlocked as the pager moves
-** from ERROR to OPEN state. At this point there may be a hot-journal file 
+** from ERROR to OPEN state. At this point there may be a hot-journal file
 ** in the file-system that needs to be rolled back (as part of an OPEN->SHARED
 ** transition, by the same pager or any other). If the call to xUnlock()
 ** fails at this point and the pager is left holding an EXCLUSIVE lock, this
 ** can confuse the call to xCheckReservedLock() call made later as part
 ** of hot-journal detection.
 **
-** xCheckReservedLock() is defined as returning true "if there is a RESERVED 
-** lock held by this process or any others". So xCheckReservedLock may 
+** xCheckReservedLock() is defined as returning true "if there is a RESERVED
+** lock held by this process or any others". So xCheckReservedLock may
 ** return true because the caller itself is holding an EXCLUSIVE lock (but
 ** doesn't know it because of a previous error in xUnlock). If this happens
 ** a hot-journal may be mistaken for a journal being created by an active
@@ -396,18 +396,18 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 ** database in the ERROR state, Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK. It
 ** is only changed back to a real locking state after a successful call
 ** to xLock(EXCLUSIVE). Also, the code to do the OPEN->SHARED state transition
-** omits the check for a hot-journal if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK 
+** omits the check for a hot-journal if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK
 ** lock. Instead, it assumes a hot-journal exists and obtains an EXCLUSIVE
 ** lock on the database file before attempting to roll it back. See function
 ** PagerSharedLock() for more detail.
 **
-** Pager.eLock may only be set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when the pager is in 
+** Pager.eLock may only be set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when the pager is in
 ** PAGER_OPEN state.
 */
 #define UNKNOWN_LOCK                (EXCLUSIVE_LOCK+1)
 
 /*
-** The maximum allowed sector size. 64KiB. If the xSectorsize() method 
+** The maximum allowed sector size. 64KiB. If the xSectorsize() method
 ** returns a value larger than this, then MAX_SECTOR_SIZE is used instead.
 ** This could conceivably cause corruption following a power failure on
 ** such a system. This is currently an undocumented limit.
@@ -423,7 +423,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1;  /* True to enable tracing */
 **
 ** When a savepoint is created, the PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset field is
 ** set to 0. If a journal-header is written into the main journal while
-** the savepoint is active, then iHdrOffset is set to the byte offset 
+** the savepoint is active, then iHdrOffset is set to the byte offset
 ** immediately following the last journal record written into the main
 ** journal before the journal-header. This is required during savepoint
 ** rollback (see pagerPlaybackSavepoint()).
@@ -474,34 +474,34 @@ struct PagerSavepoint {
 **
 ** changeCountDone
 **
-**   This boolean variable is used to make sure that the change-counter 
-**   (the 4-byte header field at byte offset 24 of the database file) is 
-**   not updated more often than necessary. 
+**   This boolean variable is used to make sure that the change-counter
+**   (the 4-byte header field at byte offset 24 of the database file) is
+**   not updated more often than necessary.
 **
-**   It is set to true when the change-counter field is updated, which 
+**   It is set to true when the change-counter field is updated, which
 **   can only happen if an exclusive lock is held on the database file.
-**   It is cleared (set to false) whenever an exclusive lock is 
+**   It is cleared (set to false) whenever an exclusive lock is
 **   relinquished on the database file. Each time a transaction is committed,
 **   The changeCountDone flag is inspected. If it is true, the work of
 **   updating the change-counter is omitted for the current transaction.
 **
-**   This mechanism means that when running in exclusive mode, a connection 
+**   This mechanism means that when running in exclusive mode, a connection
 **   need only update the change-counter once, for the first transaction
 **   committed.
 **
 ** setSuper
 **
 **   When PagerCommitPhaseOne() is called to commit a transaction, it may
-**   (or may not) specify a super-journal name to be written into the 
+**   (or may not) specify a super-journal name to be written into the
 **   journal file before it is synced to disk.
 **
-**   Whether or not a journal file contains a super-journal pointer affects 
-**   the way in which the journal file is finalized after the transaction is 
+**   Whether or not a journal file contains a super-journal pointer affects
+**   the way in which the journal file is finalized after the transaction is
 **   committed or rolled back when running in "journal_mode=PERSIST" mode.
 **   If a journal file does not contain a super-journal pointer, it is
 **   finalized by overwriting the first journal header with zeroes. If
-**   it does contain a super-journal pointer the journal file is finalized 
-**   by truncating it to zero bytes, just as if the connection were 
+**   it does contain a super-journal pointer the journal file is finalized
+**   by truncating it to zero bytes, just as if the connection were
 **   running in "journal_mode=truncate" mode.
 **
 **   Journal files that contain super-journal pointers cannot be finalized
@@ -527,12 +527,12 @@ struct PagerSavepoint {
 **   to allocate a new page to prevent the journal file from being written
 **   while it is being traversed by code in pager_playback().  The SPILLFLAG_OFF
 **   case is a user preference.
-** 
+**
 **   If the SPILLFLAG_NOSYNC bit is set, writing to the database from
 **   pagerStress() is permitted, but syncing the journal file is not.
 **   This flag is set by sqlite3PagerWrite() when the file-system sector-size
 **   is larger than the database page-size in order to prevent a journal sync
-**   from happening in between the journalling of two pages on the same sector. 
+**   from happening in between the journalling of two pages on the same sector.
 **
 ** subjInMemory
 **
@@ -540,16 +540,16 @@ struct PagerSavepoint {
 **   is opened as an in-memory journal file. If false, then in-memory
 **   sub-journals are only used for in-memory pager files.
 **
-**   This variable is updated by the upper layer each time a new 
+**   This variable is updated by the upper layer each time a new
 **   write-transaction is opened.
 **
 ** dbSize, dbOrigSize, dbFileSize
 **
 **   Variable dbSize is set to the number of pages in the database file.
 **   It is valid in PAGER_READER and higher states (all states except for
-**   OPEN and ERROR). 
+**   OPEN and ERROR).
 **
-**   dbSize is set based on the size of the database file, which may be 
+**   dbSize is set based on the size of the database file, which may be
 **   larger than the size of the database (the value stored at offset
 **   28 of the database header by the btree). If the size of the file
 **   is not an integer multiple of the page-size, the value stored in
@@ -560,10 +560,10 @@ struct PagerSavepoint {
 **
 **   During a write-transaction, if pages with page-numbers greater than
 **   dbSize are modified in the cache, dbSize is updated accordingly.
-**   Similarly, if the database is truncated using PagerTruncateImage(), 
+**   Similarly, if the database is truncated using PagerTruncateImage(),
 **   dbSize is updated.
 **
-**   Variables dbOrigSize and dbFileSize are valid in states 
+**   Variables dbOrigSize and dbFileSize are valid in states
 **   PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED and higher. dbOrigSize is a copy of the dbSize
 **   variable at the start of the transaction. It is used during rollback,
 **   and to determine whether or not pages need to be journalled before
@@ -572,12 +572,12 @@ struct PagerSavepoint {
 **   Throughout a write-transaction, dbFileSize contains the size of
 **   the file on disk in pages. It is set to a copy of dbSize when the
 **   write-transaction is first opened, and updated when VFS calls are made
-**   to write or truncate the database file on disk. 
+**   to write or truncate the database file on disk.
 **
-**   The only reason the dbFileSize variable is required is to suppress 
-**   unnecessary calls to xTruncate() after committing a transaction. If, 
-**   when a transaction is committed, the dbFileSize variable indicates 
-**   that the database file is larger than the database image (Pager.dbSize), 
+**   The only reason the dbFileSize variable is required is to suppress
+**   unnecessary calls to xTruncate() after committing a transaction. If,
+**   when a transaction is committed, the dbFileSize variable indicates
+**   that the database file is larger than the database image (Pager.dbSize),
 **   pager_truncate() is called. The pager_truncate() call uses xFilesize()
 **   to measure the database file on disk, and then truncates it if required.
 **   dbFileSize is not used when rolling back a transaction. In this case
@@ -588,20 +588,20 @@ struct PagerSavepoint {
 ** dbHintSize
 **
 **   The dbHintSize variable is used to limit the number of calls made to
-**   the VFS xFileControl(FCNTL_SIZE_HINT) method. 
+**   the VFS xFileControl(FCNTL_SIZE_HINT) method.
 **
 **   dbHintSize is set to a copy of the dbSize variable when a
 **   write-transaction is opened (at the same time as dbFileSize and
 **   dbOrigSize). If the xFileControl(FCNTL_SIZE_HINT) method is called,
 **   dbHintSize is increased to the number of pages that correspond to the
-**   size-hint passed to the method call. See pager_write_pagelist() for 
+**   size-hint passed to the method call. See pager_write_pagelist() for
 **   details.
 **
 ** errCode
 **
 **   The Pager.errCode variable is only ever used in PAGER_ERROR state. It
-**   is set to zero in all other states. In PAGER_ERROR state, Pager.errCode 
-**   is always set to SQLITE_FULL, SQLITE_IOERR or one of the SQLITE_IOERR_XXX 
+**   is set to zero in all other states. In PAGER_ERROR state, Pager.errCode
+**   is always set to SQLITE_FULL, SQLITE_IOERR or one of the SQLITE_IOERR_XXX
 **   sub-codes.
 **
 ** syncFlags, walSyncFlags
@@ -704,7 +704,7 @@ struct Pager {
 
 /*
 ** Indexes for use with Pager.aStat[]. The Pager.aStat[] array contains
-** the values accessed by passing SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT, CACHE_MISS 
+** the values accessed by passing SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT, CACHE_MISS
 ** or CACHE_WRITE to sqlite3_db_status().
 */
 #define PAGER_STAT_HIT   0
@@ -762,7 +762,7 @@ static const unsigned char aJournalMagic[] = {
 #define JOURNAL_PG_SZ(pPager)  ((pPager->pageSize) + 8)
 
 /*
-** The journal header size for this pager. This is usually the same 
+** The journal header size for this pager. This is usually the same
 ** size as a single disk sector. See also setSectorSize().
 */
 #define JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager) (pPager->sectorSize)
@@ -837,7 +837,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerDirectReadOk(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno){
 # define pagerBeginReadTransaction(z) SQLITE_OK
 #endif
 
-#ifndef NDEBUG 
+#ifndef NDEBUG
 /*
 ** Usage:
 **
@@ -866,25 +866,25 @@ static int assert_pager_state(Pager *p){
   assert( p->tempFile==0 || p->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK );
   assert( p->tempFile==0 || pPager->changeCountDone );
 
-  /* If the useJournal flag is clear, the journal-mode must be "OFF". 
+  /* If the useJournal flag is clear, the journal-mode must be "OFF".
   ** And if the journal-mode is "OFF", the journal file must not be open.
   */
   assert( p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF || p->useJournal );
   assert( p->journalMode!=PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF || !isOpen(p->jfd) );
 
-  /* Check that MEMDB implies noSync. And an in-memory journal. Since 
-  ** this means an in-memory pager performs no IO at all, it cannot encounter 
-  ** either SQLITE_IOERR or SQLITE_FULL during rollback or while finalizing 
-  ** a journal file. (although the in-memory journal implementation may 
-  ** return SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM while the journal file is being written). It 
-  ** is therefore not possible for an in-memory pager to enter the ERROR 
+  /* Check that MEMDB implies noSync. And an in-memory journal. Since
+  ** this means an in-memory pager performs no IO at all, it cannot encounter
+  ** either SQLITE_IOERR or SQLITE_FULL during rollback or while finalizing
+  ** a journal file. (although the in-memory journal implementation may
+  ** return SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM while the journal file is being written). It
+  ** is therefore not possible for an in-memory pager to enter the ERROR
   ** state.
   */
   if( MEMDB ){
     assert( !isOpen(p->fd) );
     assert( p->noSync );
-    assert( p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF 
-         || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY 
+    assert( p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+         || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
     );
     assert( p->eState!=PAGER_ERROR && p->eState!=PAGER_OPEN );
     assert( pagerUseWal(p)==0 );
@@ -931,9 +931,9 @@ static int assert_pager_state(Pager *p){
         ** to journal_mode=wal.
         */
         assert( p->eLock>=RESERVED_LOCK );
-        assert( isOpen(p->jfd) 
-             || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF 
-             || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL 
+        assert( isOpen(p->jfd)
+             || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+             || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
         );
       }
       assert( pPager->dbOrigSize==pPager->dbFileSize );
@@ -945,9 +945,9 @@ static int assert_pager_state(Pager *p){
       assert( pPager->errCode==SQLITE_OK );
       assert( !pagerUseWal(pPager) );
       assert( p->eLock>=EXCLUSIVE_LOCK );
-      assert( isOpen(p->jfd) 
-           || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF 
-           || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL 
+      assert( isOpen(p->jfd)
+           || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+           || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
            || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(p->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_BATCH_ATOMIC)
       );
       assert( pPager->dbOrigSize<=pPager->dbHintSize );
@@ -957,9 +957,9 @@ static int assert_pager_state(Pager *p){
       assert( p->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK );
       assert( pPager->errCode==SQLITE_OK );
       assert( !pagerUseWal(pPager) );
-      assert( isOpen(p->jfd) 
-           || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF 
-           || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL 
+      assert( isOpen(p->jfd)
+           || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+           || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
            || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(p->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_BATCH_ATOMIC)
       );
       break;
@@ -978,7 +978,7 @@ static int assert_pager_state(Pager *p){
 }
 #endif /* ifndef NDEBUG */
 
-#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 
+#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
 /*
 ** Return a pointer to a human readable string in a static buffer
 ** containing the state of the Pager object passed as an argument. This
@@ -1129,7 +1129,7 @@ static int write32bits(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 offset, u32 val){
 ** succeeds, set the Pager.eLock variable to match the (attempted) new lock.
 **
 ** Except, if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when this function is
-** called, do not modify it. See the comment above the #define of 
+** called, do not modify it. See the comment above the #define of
 ** UNKNOWN_LOCK for an explanation of this.
 */
 static int pagerUnlockDb(Pager *pPager, int eLock){
@@ -1153,11 +1153,11 @@ static int pagerUnlockDb(Pager *pPager, int eLock){
 /*
 ** Lock the database file to level eLock, which must be either SHARED_LOCK,
 ** RESERVED_LOCK or EXCLUSIVE_LOCK. If the caller is successful, set the
-** Pager.eLock variable to the new locking state. 
+** Pager.eLock variable to the new locking state.
 **
-** Except, if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when this function is 
-** called, do not modify it unless the new locking state is EXCLUSIVE_LOCK. 
-** See the comment above the #define of UNKNOWN_LOCK for an explanation 
+** Except, if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when this function is
+** called, do not modify it unless the new locking state is EXCLUSIVE_LOCK.
+** See the comment above the #define of UNKNOWN_LOCK for an explanation
 ** of this.
 */
 static int pagerLockDb(Pager *pPager, int eLock){
@@ -1184,7 +1184,7 @@ static int pagerLockDb(Pager *pPager, int eLock){
 **  (b) the value returned by OsSectorSize() is less than or equal
 **      to the page size.
 **
-** If it can be used, then the value returned is the size of the journal 
+** If it can be used, then the value returned is the size of the journal
 ** file when it contains rollback data for exactly one page.
 **
 ** The atomic-batch-write optimization can be used if OsDeviceCharacteristics()
@@ -1275,8 +1275,8 @@ static void checkPage(PgHdr *pPg){
 
 /*
 ** When this is called the journal file for pager pPager must be open.
-** This function attempts to read a super-journal file name from the 
-** end of the file and, if successful, copies it into memory supplied 
+** This function attempts to read a super-journal file name from the
+** end of the file and, if successful, copies it into memory supplied
 ** by the caller. See comments above writeSuperJournal() for the format
 ** used to store a super-journal file name at the end of a journal file.
 **
@@ -1292,7 +1292,7 @@ static void checkPage(PgHdr *pPg){
 ** nul-terminator byte is appended to the buffer following the
 ** super-journal file name.
 **
-** If it is determined that no super-journal file name is present 
+** If it is determined that no super-journal file name is present
 ** zSuper[0] is set to 0 and SQLITE_OK returned.
 **
 ** If an error occurs while reading from the journal file, an SQLite
@@ -1310,9 +1310,9 @@ static int readSuperJournal(sqlite3_file *pJrnl, char *zSuper, u32 nSuper){
   if( SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3OsFileSize(pJrnl, &szJ))
    || szJ<16
    || SQLITE_OK!=(rc = read32bits(pJrnl, szJ-16, &len))
-   || len>=nSuper 
+   || len>=nSuper
    || len>szJ-16
-   || len==0 
+   || len==0
    || SQLITE_OK!=(rc = read32bits(pJrnl, szJ-12, &cksum))
    || SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3OsRead(pJrnl, aMagic, 8, szJ-8))
    || memcmp(aMagic, aJournalMagic, 8)
@@ -1335,13 +1335,13 @@ static int readSuperJournal(sqlite3_file *pJrnl, char *zSuper, u32 nSuper){
   }
   zSuper[len] = '\0';
   zSuper[len+1] = '\0';
-   
+  
   return SQLITE_OK;
 }
 
 /*
-** Return the offset of the sector boundary at or immediately 
-** following the value in pPager->journalOff, assuming a sector 
+** Return the offset of the sector boundary at or immediately
+** following the value in pPager->journalOff, assuming a sector
 ** size of pPager->sectorSize bytes.
 **
 ** i.e for a sector size of 512:
@@ -1352,7 +1352,7 @@ static int readSuperJournal(sqlite3_file *pJrnl, char *zSuper, u32 nSuper){
 **   512                       512
 **   100                       512
 **   2000                      2048
-** 
+**
 */
 static i64 journalHdrOffset(Pager *pPager){
   i64 offset = 0;
@@ -1374,12 +1374,12 @@ static i64 journalHdrOffset(Pager *pPager){
 **
 ** If doTruncate is non-zero or the Pager.journalSizeLimit variable is
 ** set to 0, then truncate the journal file to zero bytes in size. Otherwise,
-** zero the 28-byte header at the start of the journal file. In either case, 
-** if the pager is not in no-sync mode, sync the journal file immediately 
+** zero the 28-byte header at the start of the journal file. In either case,
+** if the pager is not in no-sync mode, sync the journal file immediately
 ** after writing or truncating it.
 **
 ** If Pager.journalSizeLimit is set to a positive, non-zero value, and
-** following the truncation or zeroing described above the size of the 
+** following the truncation or zeroing described above the size of the
 ** journal file in bytes is larger than this value, then truncate the
 ** journal file to Pager.journalSizeLimit bytes. The journal file does
 ** not need to be synced following this operation.
@@ -1405,8 +1405,8 @@ static int zeroJournalHdr(Pager *pPager, int doTruncate){
       rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, SQLITE_SYNC_DATAONLY|pPager->syncFlags);
     }
 
-    /* At this point the transaction is committed but the write lock 
-    ** is still held on the file. If there is a size limit configured for 
+    /* At this point the transaction is committed but the write lock
+    ** is still held on the file. If there is a size limit configured for
     ** the persistent journal and the journal file currently consumes more
     ** space than that limit allows for, truncate it now. There is no need
     ** to sync the file following this operation.
@@ -1434,7 +1434,7 @@ static int zeroJournalHdr(Pager *pPager, int doTruncate){
 ** - 4 bytes: Initial database page count.
 ** - 4 bytes: Sector size used by the process that wrote this journal.
 ** - 4 bytes: Database page size.
-** 
+**
 ** Followed by (JOURNAL_HDR_SZ - 28) bytes of unused space.
 */
 static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){
@@ -1450,8 +1450,8 @@ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){
     nHeader = JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager);
   }
 
-  /* If there are active savepoints and any of them were created 
-  ** since the most recent journal header was written, update the 
+  /* If there are active savepoints and any of them were created
+  ** since the most recent journal header was written, update the
   ** PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset fields now.
   */
   for(ii=0; ii<pPager->nSavepoint; ii++){
@@ -1462,10 +1462,10 @@ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){
 
   pPager->journalHdr = pPager->journalOff = journalHdrOffset(pPager);
 
-  /* 
+  /*
   ** Write the nRec Field - the number of page records that follow this
   ** journal header. Normally, zero is written to this value at this time.
-  ** After the records are added to the journal (and the journal synced, 
+  ** After the records are added to the journal (and the journal synced,
   ** if in full-sync mode), the zero is overwritten with the true number
   ** of records (see syncJournal()).
   **
@@ -1484,7 +1484,7 @@ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){
   */
   assert( isOpen(pPager->fd) || pPager->noSync );
   if( pPager->noSync || (pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY)
-   || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_SAFE_APPEND) 
+   || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_SAFE_APPEND)
   ){
     memcpy(zHeader, aJournalMagic, sizeof(aJournalMagic));
     put32bits(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)], 0xffffffff);
@@ -1492,7 +1492,7 @@ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){
     memset(zHeader, 0, sizeof(aJournalMagic)+4);
   }
 
-  /* The random check-hash initializer */ 
+  /* The random check-hash initializer */
   sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(pPager->cksumInit), &pPager->cksumInit);
   put32bits(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)+4], pPager->cksumInit);
   /* The initial database size */
@@ -1511,23 +1511,23 @@ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){
   memset(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)+20], 0,
          nHeader-(sizeof(aJournalMagic)+20));
 
-  /* In theory, it is only necessary to write the 28 bytes that the 
-  ** journal header consumes to the journal file here. Then increment the 
-  ** Pager.journalOff variable by JOURNAL_HDR_SZ so that the next 
+  /* In theory, it is only necessary to write the 28 bytes that the
+  ** journal header consumes to the journal file here. Then increment the
+  ** Pager.journalOff variable by JOURNAL_HDR_SZ so that the next
   ** record is written to the following sector (leaving a gap in the file
   ** that will be implicitly filled in by the OS).
   **
-  ** However it has been discovered that on some systems this pattern can 
+  ** However it has been discovered that on some systems this pattern can
   ** be significantly slower than contiguously writing data to the file,
-  ** even if that means explicitly writing data to the block of 
+  ** even if that means explicitly writing data to the block of
   ** (JOURNAL_HDR_SZ - 28) bytes that will not be used. So that is what
-  ** is done. 
+  ** is done.
   **
-  ** The loop is required here in case the sector-size is larger than the 
+  ** The loop is required here in case the sector-size is larger than the
   ** database page size. Since the zHeader buffer is only Pager.pageSize
   ** bytes in size, more than one call to sqlite3OsWrite() may be required
   ** to populate the entire journal header sector.
-  */ 
+  */
   for(nWrite=0; rc==SQLITE_OK&&nWrite<JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager); nWrite+=nHeader){
     IOTRACE(("JHDR %p %lld %d\n", pPager, pPager->journalHdr, nHeader))
     rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pPager->jfd, zHeader, nHeader, pPager->journalOff);
@@ -1625,29 +1625,29 @@ static int readJournalHdr(
 
     /* Check that the values read from the page-size and sector-size fields
     ** are within range. To be 'in range', both values need to be a power
-    ** of two greater than or equal to 512 or 32, and not greater than their 
+    ** of two greater than or equal to 512 or 32, and not greater than their
     ** respective compile time maximum limits.
     */
     if( iPageSize<512                  || iSectorSize<32
      || iPageSize>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE || iSectorSize>MAX_SECTOR_SIZE
-     || ((iPageSize-1)&iPageSize)!=0   || ((iSectorSize-1)&iSectorSize)!=0 
+     || ((iPageSize-1)&iPageSize)!=0   || ((iSectorSize-1)&iSectorSize)!=0
     ){
-      /* If the either the page-size or sector-size in the journal-header is 
-      ** invalid, then the process that wrote the journal-header must have 
-      ** crashed before the header was synced. In this case stop reading 
+      /* If the either the page-size or sector-size in the journal-header is
+      ** invalid, then the process that wrote the journal-header must have
+      ** crashed before the header was synced. In this case stop reading
       ** the journal file here.
       */
       return SQLITE_DONE;
     }
 
-    /* Update the page-size to match the value read from the journal. 
-    ** Use a testcase() macro to make sure that malloc failure within 
+    /* Update the page-size to match the value read from the journal.
+    ** Use a testcase() macro to make sure that malloc failure within
     ** PagerSetPagesize() is tested.
     */
     rc = sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(pPager, &iPageSize, -1);
     testcase( rc!=SQLITE_OK );
 
-    /* Update the assumed sector-size to match the value used by 
+    /* Update the assumed sector-size to match the value used by
     ** the process that created this journal. If this journal was
     ** created by a process other than this one, then this routine
     ** is being called from within pager_playback(). The local value
@@ -1674,10 +1674,10 @@ static int readJournalHdr(
 **   + 4 bytes: super-journal name checksum.
 **   + 8 bytes: aJournalMagic[].
 **
-** The super-journal page checksum is the sum of the bytes in thesuper-journal
+** The super-journal page checksum is the sum of the bytes in the super-journal
 ** name, where each byte is interpreted as a signed 8-bit integer.
 **
-** If zSuper is a NULL pointer (occurs for a single database transaction), 
+** If zSuper is a NULL pointer (occurs for a single database transaction),
 ** this call is a no-op.
 */
 static int writeSuperJournal(Pager *pPager, const char *zSuper){
@@ -1690,8 +1690,8 @@ static int writeSuperJournal(Pager *pPager, const char *zSuper){
   assert( pPager->setSuper==0 );
   assert( !pagerUseWal(pPager) );
 
-  if( !zSuper 
-   || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY 
+  if( !zSuper
+   || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
    || !isOpen(pPager->jfd)
   ){
     return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -1727,16 +1727,16 @@ static int writeSuperJournal(Pager *pPager, const char *zSuper){
   }
   pPager->journalOff += (nSuper+20);
 
-  /* If the pager is in peristent-journal mode, then the physical 
+  /* If the pager is in persistent-journal mode, then the physical
   ** journal-file may extend past the end of the super-journal name
-  ** and 8 bytes of magic data just written to the file. This is 
+  ** and 8 bytes of magic data just written to the file. This is
   ** dangerous because the code to rollback a hot-journal file
-  ** will not be able to find the super-journal name to determine 
-  ** whether or not the journal is hot. 
+  ** will not be able to find the super-journal name to determine
+  ** whether or not the journal is hot.
   **
-  ** Easiest thing to do in this scenario is to truncate the journal 
+  ** Easiest thing to do in this scenario is to truncate the journal
   ** file to the required size.
-  */ 
+  */
   if( SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3OsFileSize(pPager->jfd, &jrnlSize))
    && jrnlSize>pPager->journalOff
   ){
@@ -1781,7 +1781,7 @@ static void releaseAllSavepoints(Pager *pPager){
 }
 
 /*
-** Set the bit number pgno in the PagerSavepoint.pInSavepoint 
+** Set the bit number pgno in the PagerSavepoint.pInSavepoint
 ** bitvecs of all open savepoints. Return SQLITE_OK if successful
 ** or SQLITE_NOMEM if a malloc failure occurs.
 */
@@ -1810,8 +1810,8 @@ static int addToSavepointBitvecs(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno){
 ** not exhibit the UNDELETABLE_WHEN_OPEN property, the journal file is
 ** closed (if it is open).
 **
-** If the pager is in ERROR state when this function is called, the 
-** contents of the pager cache are discarded before switching back to 
+** If the pager is in ERROR state when this function is called, the
+** contents of the pager cache are discarded before switching back to
 ** the OPEN state. Regardless of whether the pager is in exclusive-mode
 ** or not, any journal file left in the file-system will be treated
 ** as a hot-journal and rolled back the next time a read-transaction
@@ -1819,9 +1819,9 @@ static int addToSavepointBitvecs(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno){
 */
 static void pager_unlock(Pager *pPager){
 
-  assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_READER 
-       || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN 
-       || pPager->eState==PAGER_ERROR 
+  assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_READER
+       || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN
+       || pPager->eState==PAGER_ERROR
   );
 
   sqlite3BitvecDestroy(pPager->pInJournal);
@@ -1897,18 +1897,18 @@ static void pager_unlock(Pager *pPager){
 
 /*
 ** This function is called whenever an IOERR or FULL error that requires
-** the pager to transition into the ERROR state may ahve occurred.
-** The first argument is a pointer to the pager structure, the second 
-** the error-code about to be returned by a pager API function. The 
-** value returned is a copy of the second argument to this function. 
+** the pager to transition into the ERROR state may have occurred.
+** The first argument is a pointer to the pager structure, the second
+** the error-code about to be returned by a pager API function. The
+** value returned is a copy of the second argument to this function.
 **
 ** If the second argument is SQLITE_FULL, SQLITE_IOERR or one of the
 ** IOERR sub-codes, the pager enters the ERROR state and the error code
 ** is stored in Pager.errCode. While the pager remains in the ERROR state,
 ** all major API calls on the Pager will immediately return Pager.errCode.
 **
-** The ERROR state indicates that the contents of the pager-cache 
-** cannot be trusted. This state can be cleared by completely discarding 
+** The ERROR state indicates that the contents of the pager-cache
+** cannot be trusted. This state can be cleared by completely discarding
 ** the contents of the pager-cache. If a transaction was active when
 ** the persistent error occurred, then the rollback journal may need
 ** to be replayed to restore the contents of the database file (as if
@@ -1956,27 +1956,27 @@ static int pagerFlushOnCommit(Pager *pPager, int bCommit){
 }
 
 /*
-** This routine ends a transaction. A transaction is usually ended by 
-** either a COMMIT or a ROLLBACK operation. This routine may be called 
+** This routine ends a transaction. A transaction is usually ended by
+** either a COMMIT or a ROLLBACK operation. This routine may be called
 ** after rollback of a hot-journal, or if an error occurs while opening
 ** the journal file or writing the very first journal-header of a
 ** database transaction.
-** 
+**
 ** This routine is never called in PAGER_ERROR state. If it is called
 ** in PAGER_NONE or PAGER_SHARED state and the lock held is less
 ** exclusive than a RESERVED lock, it is a no-op.
 **
 ** Otherwise, any active savepoints are released.
 **
-** If the journal file is open, then it is "finalized". Once a journal 
-** file has been finalized it is not possible to use it to roll back a 
+** If the journal file is open, then it is "finalized". Once a journal
+** file has been finalized it is not possible to use it to roll back a
 ** transaction. Nor will it be considered to be a hot-journal by this
 ** or any other database connection. Exactly how a journal is finalized
 ** depends on whether or not the pager is running in exclusive mode and
 ** the current journal-mode (Pager.journalMode value), as follows:
 **
 **   journalMode==MEMORY
-**     Journal file descriptor is simply closed. This destroys an 
+**     Journal file descriptor is simply closed. This destroys an
 **     in-memory journal.
 **
 **   journalMode==TRUNCATE
@@ -1996,12 +1996,12 @@ static int pagerFlushOnCommit(Pager *pPager, int bCommit){
 **     journalMode==PERSIST is used instead.
 **
 ** After the journal is finalized, the pager moves to PAGER_READER state.
-** If running in non-exclusive rollback mode, the lock on the file is 
+** If running in non-exclusive rollback mode, the lock on the file is
 ** downgraded to a SHARED_LOCK.
 **
 ** SQLITE_OK is returned if no error occurs. If an error occurs during
 ** any of the IO operations to finalize the journal file or unlock the
-** database then the IO error code is returned to the user. If the 
+** database then the IO error code is returned to the user. If the
 ** operation to finalize the journal file fails, then the code still
 ** tries to unlock the database file if not in exclusive mode. If the
 ** unlock operation fails as well, then the first error code related
@@ -2020,9 +2020,9 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasSuper, int bCommit){
   **   1. After a successful hot-journal rollback, it is called with
   **      eState==PAGER_NONE and eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK.
   **
-  **   2. If a connection with locking_mode=exclusive holding an EXCLUSIVE 
+  **   2. If a connection with locking_mode=exclusive holding an EXCLUSIVE
   **      lock switches back to locking_mode=normal and then executes a
-  **      read-transaction, this function is called with eState==PAGER_READER 
+  **      read-transaction, this function is called with eState==PAGER_READER
   **      and eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK when the read-transaction is closed.
   */
   assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
@@ -2032,7 +2032,7 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasSuper, int bCommit){
   }
 
   releaseAllSavepoints(pPager);
-  assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd) || pPager->pInJournal==0 
+  assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd) || pPager->pInJournal==0
       || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_BATCH_ATOMIC)
   );
   if( isOpen(pPager->jfd) ){
@@ -2070,9 +2070,9 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasSuper, int bCommit){
       */
       int bDelete = !pPager->tempFile;
       assert( sqlite3JournalIsInMemory(pPager->jfd)==0 );
-      assert( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE 
-           || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY 
-           || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL 
+      assert( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE
+           || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
+           || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
       );
       sqlite3OsClose(pPager->jfd);
       if( bDelete ){
@@ -2105,8 +2105,8 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasSuper, int bCommit){
   }
 
   if( pagerUseWal(pPager) ){
-    /* Drop the WAL write-lock, if any. Also, if the connection was in 
-    ** locking_mode=exclusive mode but is no longer, drop the EXCLUSIVE 
+    /* Drop the WAL write-lock, if any. Also, if the connection was in
+    ** locking_mode=exclusive mode but is no longer, drop the EXCLUSIVE
     ** lock held on the database file.
     */
     rc2 = sqlite3WalEndWriteTransaction(pPager->pWal);
@@ -2114,7 +2114,7 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasSuper, int bCommit){
   }else if( rc==SQLITE_OK && bCommit && pPager->dbFileSize>pPager->dbSize ){
     /* This branch is taken when committing a transaction in rollback-journal
     ** mode if the database file on disk is larger than the database image.
-    ** At this point the journal has been finalized and the transaction 
+    ** At this point the journal has been finalized and the transaction
     ** successfully committed, but the EXCLUSIVE lock is still held on the
     ** file. So it is safe to truncate the database file to its minimum
     ** required size.  */
@@ -2127,7 +2127,7 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasSuper, int bCommit){
     if( rc==SQLITE_NOTFOUND ) rc = SQLITE_OK;
   }
 
-  if( !pPager->exclusiveMode 
+  if( !pPager->exclusiveMode
    && (!pagerUseWal(pPager) || sqlite3WalExclusiveMode(pPager->pWal, 0))
   ){
     rc2 = pagerUnlockDb(pPager, SHARED_LOCK);
@@ -2139,19 +2139,19 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasSuper, int bCommit){
 }
 
 /*
-** Execute a rollback if a transaction is active and unlock the 
-** database file. 
+** Execute a rollback if a transaction is active and unlock the
+** database file.
 **
-** If the pager has already entered the ERROR state, do not attempt 
+** If the pager has already entered the ERROR state, do not attempt
 ** the rollback at this time. Instead, pager_unlock() is called. The
 ** call to pager_unlock() will discard all in-memory pages, unlock
-** the database file and move the pager back to OPEN state. If this 
-** means that there is a hot-journal left in the file-system, the next 
-** connection to obtain a shared lock on the pager (which may be this one) 
+** the database file and move the pager back to OPEN state. If this
+** means that there is a hot-journal left in the file-system, the next
+** connection to obtain a shared lock on the pager (which may be this one)
 ** will roll it back.
 **
 ** If the pager has not already entered the ERROR state, but an IO or
-** malloc error occurs during a rollback, then this will itself cause 
+** malloc error occurs during a rollback, then this will itself cause
 ** the pager to enter the ERROR state. Which will be cleared by the
 ** call to pager_unlock(), as described above.
 */
@@ -2172,10 +2172,10 @@ static void pagerUnlockAndRollback(Pager *pPager){
 
 /*
 ** Parameter aData must point to a buffer of pPager->pageSize bytes
-** of data. Compute and return a checksum based ont the contents of the 
+** of data. Compute and return a checksum based on the contents of the
 ** page of data and the current value of pPager->cksumInit.
 **
-** This is not a real checksum. It is really just the sum of the 
+** This is not a real checksum. It is really just the sum of the
 ** random initial value (pPager->cksumInit) and every 200th byte
 ** of the page data, starting with byte offset (pPager->pageSize%200).
 ** Each byte is interpreted as an 8-bit unsigned integer.
@@ -2183,8 +2183,8 @@ static void pagerUnlockAndRollback(Pager *pPager){
 ** Changing the formula used to compute this checksum results in an
 ** incompatible journal file format.
 **
-** If journal corruption occurs due to a power failure, the most likely 
-** scenario is that one end or the other of the record will be changed. 
+** If journal corruption occurs due to a power failure, the most likely
+** scenario is that one end or the other of the record will be changed.
 ** It is much less likely that the two ends of the journal record will be
 ** correct and the middle be corrupt.  Thus, this "checksum" scheme,
 ** though fast and simple, catches the mostly likely kind of corruption.
@@ -2205,7 +2205,7 @@ static u32 pager_cksum(Pager *pPager, const u8 *aData){
 ** The page begins at offset *pOffset into the file. The *pOffset
 ** value is increased to the start of the next page in the journal.
 **
-** The main rollback journal uses checksums - the statement journal does 
+** The main rollback journal uses checksums - the statement journal does
 ** not.
 **
 ** If the page number of the page record read from the (sub-)journal file
@@ -2225,7 +2225,7 @@ static u32 pager_cksum(Pager *pPager, const u8 *aData){
 ** is successfully read from the (sub-)journal file but appears to be
 ** corrupted, SQLITE_DONE is returned. Data is considered corrupted in
 ** two circumstances:
-** 
+**
 **   * If the record page-number is illegal (0 or PAGER_SJ_PGNO), or
 **   * If the record is being rolled back from the main journal file
 **     and the checksum field does not match the record content.
@@ -2260,7 +2260,7 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page(
   assert( aData );         /* Temp storage must have already been allocated */
   assert( pagerUseWal(pPager)==0 || (!isMainJrnl && isSavepnt) );
 
-  /* Either the state is greater than PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD (a transaction 
+  /* Either the state is greater than PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD (a transaction
   ** or savepoint rollback done at the request of the caller) or this is
   ** a hot-journal rollback. If it is a hot-journal rollback, the pager
   ** is in state OPEN and holds an EXCLUSIVE lock. Hot-journal rollback
@@ -2326,7 +2326,7 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page(
   ** assert()able.
   **
   ** If in WRITER_DBMOD, WRITER_FINISHED or OPEN state, then we update the
-  ** pager cache if it exists and the main file. The page is then marked 
+  ** pager cache if it exists and the main file. The page is then marked
   ** not dirty. Since this code is only executed in PAGER_OPEN state for
   ** a hot-journal rollback, it is guaranteed that the page-cache is empty
   ** if the pager is in OPEN state.
@@ -2390,18 +2390,18 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page(
   }else if( !isMainJrnl && pPg==0 ){
     /* If this is a rollback of a savepoint and data was not written to
     ** the database and the page is not in-memory, there is a potential
-    ** problem. When the page is next fetched by the b-tree layer, it 
-    ** will be read from the database file, which may or may not be 
-    ** current. 
+    ** problem. When the page is next fetched by the b-tree layer, it
+    ** will be read from the database file, which may or may not be
+    ** current.
     **
     ** There are a couple of different ways this can happen. All are quite
-    ** obscure. When running in synchronous mode, this can only happen 
+    ** obscure. When running in synchronous mode, this can only happen
     ** if the page is on the free-list at the start of the transaction, then
     ** populated, then moved using sqlite3PagerMovepage().
     **
     ** The solution is to add an in-memory page to the cache containing
-    ** the data just read from the sub-journal. Mark the page as dirty 
-    ** and if the pager requires a journal-sync, then mark the page as 
+    ** the data just read from the sub-journal. Mark the page as dirty
+    ** and if the pager requires a journal-sync, then mark the page as
     ** requiring a journal-sync before it is written.
     */
     assert( isSavepnt );
@@ -2446,26 +2446,26 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page(
 ** This routine checks if it is possible to delete the super-journal file,
 ** and does so if it is.
 **
-** Argument zSuper may point to Pager.pTmpSpace. So that buffer is not 
+** Argument zSuper may point to Pager.pTmpSpace. So that buffer is not
 ** available for use within this function.
 **
-** When a super-journal file is created, it is populated with the names 
-** of all of its child journals, one after another, formatted as utf-8 
-** encoded text. The end of each child journal file is marked with a 
+** When a super-journal file is created, it is populated with the names
+** of all of its child journals, one after another, formatted as utf-8
+** encoded text. The end of each child journal file is marked with a
 ** nul-terminator byte (0x00). i.e. the entire contents of a super-journal
 ** file for a transaction involving two databases might be:
 **
 **   "/home/bill/a.db-journal\x00/home/bill/b.db-journal\x00"
 **
-** A super-journal file may only be deleted once all of its child 
+** A super-journal file may only be deleted once all of its child
 ** journals have been rolled back.
 **
-** This function reads the contents of the super-journal file into 
+** This function reads the contents of the super-journal file into
 ** memory and loops through each of the child journal names. For
 ** each child journal, it checks if:
 **
 **   * if the child journal exists, and if so
-**   * if the child journal contains a reference to super-journal 
+**   * if the child journal contains a reference to super-journal
 **     file zSuper
 **
 ** If a child journal can be found that matches both of the criteria
@@ -2475,12 +2475,12 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page(
 **
 ** If an IO error within this function, an error code is returned. This
 ** function allocates memory by calling sqlite3Malloc(). If an allocation
-** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. Otherwise, if no IO or malloc errors 
+** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. Otherwise, if no IO or malloc errors
 ** occur, SQLITE_OK is returned.
 **
 ** TODO: This function allocates a single block of memory to load
 ** the entire contents of the super-journal file. This could be
-** a couple of kilobytes or so - potentially larger than the page 
+** a couple of kilobytes or so - potentially larger than the page
 ** size.
 */
 static int pager_delsuper(Pager *pPager, const char *zSuper){
@@ -2541,7 +2541,7 @@ static int pager_delsuper(Pager *pPager, const char *zSuper){
       /* One of the journals pointed to by the super-journal exists.
       ** Open it and check if it points at the super-journal. If
       ** so, return without deleting the super-journal file.
-      ** NB:  zJournal is really a MAIN_JOURNAL.  But call it a 
+      ** NB:  zJournal is really a MAIN_JOURNAL.  But call it a
       ** SUPER_JOURNAL here so that the VFS will not send the zJournal
       ** name into sqlite3_database_file_object().
       */
@@ -2566,7 +2566,7 @@ static int pager_delsuper(Pager *pPager, const char *zSuper){
     }
     zJournal += (sqlite3Strlen30(zJournal)+1);
   }
- 
+
   sqlite3OsClose(pSuper);
   rc = sqlite3OsDelete(pVfs, zSuper, 0);
 
@@ -2582,20 +2582,20 @@ delsuper_out:
 
 
 /*
-** This function is used to change the actual size of the database 
+** This function is used to change the actual size of the database
 ** file in the file-system. This only happens when committing a transaction,
 ** or rolling back a transaction (including rolling back a hot-journal).
 **
 ** If the main database file is not open, or the pager is not in either
-** DBMOD or OPEN state, this function is a no-op. Otherwise, the size 
-** of the file is changed to nPage pages (nPage*pPager->pageSize bytes). 
+** DBMOD or OPEN state, this function is a no-op. Otherwise, the size
+** of the file is changed to nPage pages (nPage*pPager->pageSize bytes).
 ** If the file on disk is currently larger than nPage pages, then use the VFS
 ** xTruncate() method to truncate it.
 **
-** Or, it might be the case that the file on disk is smaller than 
-** nPage pages. Some operating system implementations can get confused if 
-** you try to truncate a file to some size that is larger than it 
-** currently is, so detect this case and write a single zero byte to 
+** Or, it might be the case that the file on disk is smaller than
+** nPage pages. Some operating system implementations can get confused if
+** you try to truncate a file to some size that is larger than it
+** currently is, so detect this case and write a single zero byte to
 ** the end of the new file instead.
 **
 ** If successful, return SQLITE_OK. If an IO error occurs while modifying
@@ -2607,9 +2607,9 @@ static int pager_truncate(Pager *pPager, Pgno nPage){
   assert( pPager->eState!=PAGER_READER );
   PAGERTRACE(("Truncate %d npage %u\n", PAGERID(pPager), nPage));
 
-  
-  if( isOpen(pPager->fd) 
-   && (pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN) 
+ 
+  if( isOpen(pPager->fd)
+   && (pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN)
   ){
     i64 currentSize, newSize;
     int szPage = pPager->pageSize;
@@ -2654,8 +2654,8 @@ int sqlite3SectorSize(sqlite3_file *pFile){
 /*
 ** Set the value of the Pager.sectorSize variable for the given
 ** pager based on the value returned by the xSectorSize method
-** of the open database file. The sector size will be used 
-** to determine the size and alignment of journal header and 
+** of the open database file. The sector size will be used
+** to determine the size and alignment of journal header and
 ** super-journal pointers within created journal files.
 **
 ** For temporary files the effective sector size is always 512 bytes.
@@ -2678,7 +2678,7 @@ static void setSectorSize(Pager *pPager){
   assert( isOpen(pPager->fd) || pPager->tempFile );
 
   if( pPager->tempFile
-   || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd) & 
+   || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd) &
               SQLITE_IOCAP_POWERSAFE_OVERWRITE)!=0
   ){
     /* Sector size doesn't matter for temporary files. Also, the file
@@ -2692,15 +2692,15 @@ static void setSectorSize(Pager *pPager){
 
 /*
 ** Playback the journal and thus restore the database file to
-** the state it was in before we started making changes.  
+** the state it was in before we started making changes. 
 **
-** The journal file format is as follows: 
+** The journal file format is as follows:
 **
 **  (1)  8 byte prefix.  A copy of aJournalMagic[].
 **  (2)  4 byte big-endian integer which is the number of valid page records
 **       in the journal.  If this value is 0xffffffff, then compute the
 **       number of page records from the journal size.
-**  (3)  4 byte big-endian integer which is the initial value for the 
+**  (3)  4 byte big-endian integer which is the initial value for the
 **       sanity checksum.
 **  (4)  4 byte integer which is the number of pages to truncate the
 **       database to during a rollback.
@@ -2729,7 +2729,7 @@ static void setSectorSize(Pager *pPager){
 ** from the file size.  This value is used when the user selects the
 ** no-sync option for the journal.  A power failure could lead to corruption
 ** in this case.  But for things like temporary table (which will be
-** deleted when the power is restored) we don't care.  
+** deleted when the power is restored) we don't care. 
 **
 ** If the file opened as the journal file is not a well-formed
 ** journal file then all pages up to the first corrupted page are rolled
@@ -2741,7 +2741,7 @@ static void setSectorSize(Pager *pPager){
 ** and an error code is returned.
 **
 ** The isHot parameter indicates that we are trying to rollback a journal
-** that might be a hot journal.  Or, it could be that the journal is 
+** that might be a hot journal.  Or, it could be that the journal is
 ** preserved because of JOURNALMODE_PERSIST or JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE.
 ** If the journal really is hot, reset the pager cache prior rolling
 ** back any content.  If the journal is merely persistent, no reset is
@@ -2792,9 +2792,9 @@ static int pager_playback(Pager *pPager, int isHot){
   pPager->journalOff = 0;
   needPagerReset = isHot;
 
-  /* This loop terminates either when a readJournalHdr() or 
-  ** pager_playback_one_page() call returns SQLITE_DONE or an IO error 
-  ** occurs. 
+  /* This loop terminates either when a readJournalHdr() or
+  ** pager_playback_one_page() call returns SQLITE_DONE or an IO error
+  ** occurs.
   */
   while( 1 ){
     /* Read the next journal header from the journal file.  If there are
@@ -2803,7 +2803,7 @@ static int pager_playback(Pager *pPager, int isHot){
     ** This indicates nothing more needs to be rolled back.
     */
     rc = readJournalHdr(pPager, isHot, szJ, &nRec, &mxPg);
-    if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ 
+    if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
       if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ){
         rc = SQLITE_OK;
       }
@@ -2831,7 +2831,7 @@ static int pager_playback(Pager *pPager, int isHot){
     ** chunk of the journal contains zero pages to be rolled back.  But
     ** when doing a ROLLBACK and the nRec==0 chunk is the last chunk in
     ** the journal, it means that the journal might contain additional
-    ** pages that need to be rolled back and that the number of pages 
+    ** pages that need to be rolled back and that the number of pages
     ** should be computed based on the journal file size.
     */
     if( nRec==0 && !isHot &&
@@ -2853,7 +2853,7 @@ static int pager_playback(Pager *pPager, int isHot){
       }
     }
 
-    /* Copy original pages out of the journal and back into the 
+    /* Copy original pages out of the journal and back into the
     ** database file and/or page cache.
     */
     for(u=0; u<nRec; u++){
@@ -2903,10 +2903,10 @@ end_playback:
   sqlite3OsFileControlHint(pPager->fd,SQLITE_FCNTL_DB_UNCHANGED,0);
 #endif
 
-  /* If this playback is happening automatically as a result of an IO or 
-  ** malloc error that occurred after the change-counter was updated but 
-  ** before the transaction was committed, then the change-counter 
-  ** modification may just have been reverted. If this happens in exclusive 
+  /* If this playback is happening automatically as a result of an IO or
+  ** malloc error that occurred after the change-counter was updated but
+  ** before the transaction was committed, then the change-counter
+  ** modification may just have been reverted. If this happens in exclusive
   ** mode, then subsequent transactions performed by the connection will not
   ** update the change-counter at all. This may lead to cache inconsistency
   ** problems for other processes at some point in the future. So, just
@@ -2957,7 +2957,7 @@ end_playback:
 
 /*
 ** Read the content for page pPg out of the database file (or out of
-** the WAL if that is where the most recent copy if found) into 
+** the WAL if that is where the most recent copy if found) into
 ** pPg->pData. A shared lock or greater must be held on the database
 ** file before this function is called.
 **
@@ -3047,15 +3047,15 @@ static void pager_write_changecounter(PgHdr *pPg){
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL
 /*
-** This function is invoked once for each page that has already been 
+** This function is invoked once for each page that has already been
 ** written into the log file when a WAL transaction is rolled back.
-** Parameter iPg is the page number of said page. The pCtx argument 
+** Parameter iPg is the page number of said page. The pCtx argument
 ** is actually a pointer to the Pager structure.
 **
 ** If page iPg is present in the cache, and has no outstanding references,
 ** it is discarded. Otherwise, if there are one or more outstanding
 ** references, the page content is reloaded from the database. If the
-** attempt to reload content from the database is required and fails, 
+** attempt to reload content from the database is required and fails,
 ** return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK.
 */
 static int pagerUndoCallback(void *pCtx, Pgno iPg){
@@ -3081,7 +3081,7 @@ static int pagerUndoCallback(void *pCtx, Pgno iPg){
   ** updated as data is copied out of the rollback journal and into the
   ** database. This is not generally possible with a WAL database, as
   ** rollback involves simply truncating the log file. Therefore, if one
-  ** or more frames have already been written to the log (and therefore 
+  ** or more frames have already been written to the log (and therefore
   ** also copied into the backup databases) as part of this transaction,
   ** the backups must be restarted.
   */
@@ -3098,7 +3098,7 @@ static int pagerRollbackWal(Pager *pPager){
   PgHdr *pList;                   /* List of dirty pages to revert */
 
   /* For all pages in the cache that are currently dirty or have already
-  ** been written (but not committed) to the log file, do one of the 
+  ** been written (but not committed) to the log file, do one of the
   ** following:
   **
   **   + Discard the cached page (if refcount==0), or
@@ -3120,11 +3120,11 @@ static int pagerRollbackWal(Pager *pPager){
 ** This function is a wrapper around sqlite3WalFrames(). As well as logging
 ** the contents of the list of pages headed by pList (connected by pDirty),
 ** this function notifies any active backup processes that the pages have
-** changed. 
+** changed.
 **
 ** The list of pages passed into this routine is always sorted by page number.
 ** Hence, if page 1 appears anywhere on the list, it will be the first page.
-*/ 
+*/
 static int pagerWalFrames(
   Pager *pPager,                  /* Pager object */
   PgHdr *pList,                   /* List of frames to log */
@@ -3138,7 +3138,7 @@ static int pagerWalFrames(
   assert( pPager->pWal );
   assert( pList );
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
-  /* Verify that the page list is in accending order */
+  /* Verify that the page list is in ascending order */
   for(p=pList; p && p->pDirty; p=p->pDirty){
     assert( p->pgno < p->pDirty->pgno );
   }
@@ -3165,7 +3165,7 @@ static int pagerWalFrames(
   pPager->aStat[PAGER_STAT_WRITE] += nList;
 
   if( pList->pgno==1 ) pager_write_changecounter(pList);
-  rc = sqlite3WalFrames(pPager->pWal, 
+  rc = sqlite3WalFrames(pPager->pWal,
       pPager->pageSize, pList, nTruncate, isCommit, pPager->walSyncFlags
   );
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pPager->pBackup ){
@@ -3269,7 +3269,7 @@ static int pagerPagecount(Pager *pPager, Pgno *pnPage){
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL
 /*
 ** Check if the *-wal file that corresponds to the database opened by pPager
-** exists if the database is not empy, or verify that the *-wal file does
+** exists if the database is not empty, or verify that the *-wal file does
 ** not exist (by deleting it) if the database file is empty.
 **
 ** If the database is not empty and the *-wal file exists, open the pager
@@ -3280,9 +3280,9 @@ static int pagerPagecount(Pager *pPager, Pgno *pnPage){
 ** Return SQLITE_OK or an error code.
 **
 ** The caller must hold a SHARED lock on the database file to call this
-** function. Because an EXCLUSIVE lock on the db file is required to delete 
-** a WAL on a none-empty database, this ensures there is no race condition 
-** between the xAccess() below and an xDelete() being executed by some 
+** function. Because an EXCLUSIVE lock on the db file is required to delete
+** a WAL on a none-empty database, this ensures there is no race condition
+** between the xAccess() below and an xDelete() being executed by some
 ** other connection.
 */
 static int pagerOpenWalIfPresent(Pager *pPager){
@@ -3318,21 +3318,21 @@ static int pagerOpenWalIfPresent(Pager *pPager){
 
 /*
 ** Playback savepoint pSavepoint. Or, if pSavepoint==NULL, then playback
-** the entire super-journal file. The case pSavepoint==NULL occurs when 
-** a ROLLBACK TO command is invoked on a SAVEPOINT that is a transaction 
+** the entire super-journal file. The case pSavepoint==NULL occurs when
+** a ROLLBACK TO command is invoked on a SAVEPOINT that is a transaction
 ** savepoint.
 **
-** When pSavepoint is not NULL (meaning a non-transaction savepoint is 
+** When pSavepoint is not NULL (meaning a non-transaction savepoint is
 ** being rolled back), then the rollback consists of up to three stages,
 ** performed in the order specified:
 **
 **   * Pages are played back from the main journal starting at byte
-**     offset PagerSavepoint.iOffset and continuing to 
+**     offset PagerSavepoint.iOffset and continuing to
 **     PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset, or to the end of the main journal
 **     file if PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset is zero.
 **
 **   * If PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset is not zero, then pages are played
-**     back starting from the journal header immediately following 
+**     back starting from the journal header immediately following
 **     PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset to the end of the main journal file.
 **
 **   * Pages are then played back from the sub-journal file, starting
@@ -3348,7 +3348,7 @@ static int pagerOpenWalIfPresent(Pager *pPager){
 ** journal file. There is no need for a bitvec in this case.
 **
 ** In either case, before playback commences the Pager.dbSize variable
-** is reset to the value that it held at the start of the savepoint 
+** is reset to the value that it held at the start of the savepoint
 ** (or transaction). No page with a page-number greater than this value
 ** is played back. If one is encountered it is simply skipped.
 */
@@ -3369,7 +3369,7 @@ static int pagerPlaybackSavepoint(Pager *pPager, PagerSavepoint *pSavepoint){
     }
   }
 
-  /* Set the database size back to the value it was before the savepoint 
+  /* Set the database size back to the value it was before the savepoint
   ** being reverted was opened.
   */
   pPager->dbSize = pSavepoint ? pSavepoint->nOrig : pPager->dbOrigSize;
@@ -3422,7 +3422,7 @@ static int pagerPlaybackSavepoint(Pager *pPager, PagerSavepoint *pSavepoint){
     ** test is related to ticket #2565.  See the discussion in the
     ** pager_playback() function for additional information.
     */
-    if( nJRec==0 
+    if( nJRec==0
      && pPager->journalHdr+JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager)==pPager->journalOff
     ){
       nJRec = (u32)((szJ - pPager->journalOff)/JOURNAL_PG_SZ(pPager));
@@ -3596,7 +3596,7 @@ void sqlite3PagerSetFlags(
 /*
 ** The following global variable is incremented whenever the library
 ** attempts to open a temporary file.  This information is used for
-** testing and analysis only.  
+** testing and analysis only. 
 */
 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST
 int sqlite3_opentemp_count = 0;
@@ -3605,8 +3605,8 @@ int sqlite3_opentemp_count = 0;
 /*
 ** Open a temporary file.
 **
-** Write the file descriptor into *pFile. Return SQLITE_OK on success 
-** or some other error code if we fail. The OS will automatically 
+** Write the file descriptor into *pFile. Return SQLITE_OK on success
+** or some other error code if we fail. The OS will automatically
 ** delete the temporary file when it is closed.
 **
 ** The flags passed to the VFS layer xOpen() call are those specified
@@ -3638,9 +3638,9 @@ static int pagerOpentemp(
 /*
 ** Set the busy handler function.
 **
-** The pager invokes the busy-handler if sqlite3OsLock() returns 
+** The pager invokes the busy-handler if sqlite3OsLock() returns
 ** SQLITE_BUSY when trying to upgrade from no-lock to a SHARED lock,
-** or when trying to upgrade from a RESERVED lock to an EXCLUSIVE 
+** or when trying to upgrade from a RESERVED lock to an EXCLUSIVE
 ** lock. It does *not* invoke the busy handler when upgrading from
 ** SHARED to RESERVED, or when upgrading from SHARED to EXCLUSIVE
 ** (which occurs during hot-journal rollback). Summary:
@@ -3652,7 +3652,7 @@ static int pagerOpentemp(
 **   SHARED_LOCK   -> EXCLUSIVE_LOCK   | No
 **   RESERVED_LOCK -> EXCLUSIVE_LOCK   | Yes
 **
-** If the busy-handler callback returns non-zero, the lock is 
+** If the busy-handler callback returns non-zero, the lock is
 ** retried. If it returns zero, then the SQLITE_BUSY error is
 ** returned to the caller of the pager API function.
 */
@@ -3671,16 +3671,16 @@ void sqlite3PagerSetBusyHandler(
 }
 
 /*
-** Change the page size used by the Pager object. The new page size 
+** Change the page size used by the Pager object. The new page size
 ** is passed in *pPageSize.
 **
 ** If the pager is in the error state when this function is called, it
-** is a no-op. The value returned is the error state error code (i.e. 
+** is a no-op. The value returned is the error state error code (i.e.
 ** one of SQLITE_IOERR, an SQLITE_IOERR_xxx sub-code or SQLITE_FULL).
 **
 ** Otherwise, if all of the following are true:
 **
-**   * the new page size (value of *pPageSize) is valid (a power 
+**   * the new page size (value of *pPageSize) is valid (a power
 **     of two between 512 and SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, inclusive), and
 **
 **   * there are no outstanding page references, and
@@ -3690,14 +3690,14 @@ void sqlite3PagerSetBusyHandler(
 **
 ** then the pager object page size is set to *pPageSize.
 **
-** If the page size is changed, then this function uses sqlite3PagerMalloc() 
-** to obtain a new Pager.pTmpSpace buffer. If this allocation attempt 
-** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned and the page size remains unchanged. 
+** If the page size is changed, then this function uses sqlite3PagerMalloc()
+** to obtain a new Pager.pTmpSpace buffer. If this allocation attempt
+** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned and the page size remains unchanged.
 ** In all other cases, SQLITE_OK is returned.
 **
 ** If the page size is not changed, either because one of the enumerated
 ** conditions above is not true, the pager was in error state when this
-** function was called, or because the memory allocation attempt failed, 
+** function was called, or because the memory allocation attempt failed,
 ** then *pPageSize is set to the old, retained page size before returning.
 */
 int sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(Pager *pPager, u32 *pPageSize, int nReserve){
@@ -3707,7 +3707,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(Pager *pPager, u32 *pPageSize, int nReserve){
   ** function may be called from within PagerOpen(), before the state
   ** of the Pager object is internally consistent.
   **
-  ** At one point this function returned an error if the pager was in 
+  ** At one point this function returned an error if the pager was in
   ** PAGER_ERROR state. But since PAGER_ERROR state guarantees that
   ** there is at least one outstanding page reference, this function
   ** is a no-op for that case anyhow.
@@ -3716,8 +3716,8 @@ int sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(Pager *pPager, u32 *pPageSize, int nReserve){
   u32 pageSize = *pPageSize;
   assert( pageSize==0 || (pageSize>=512 && pageSize<=SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE) );
   if( (pPager->memDb==0 || pPager->dbSize==0)
-   && sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0 
-   && pageSize && pageSize!=(u32)pPager->pageSize 
+   && sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0
+   && pageSize && pageSize!=(u32)pPager->pageSize
   ){
     char *pNew = NULL;             /* New temp space */
     i64 nByte = 0;
@@ -3774,7 +3774,7 @@ void *sqlite3PagerTempSpace(Pager *pPager){
 }
 
 /*
-** Attempt to set the maximum database page count if mxPage is positive. 
+** Attempt to set the maximum database page count if mxPage is positive.
 ** Make no changes if mxPage is zero or negative.  And never reduce the
 ** maximum page count below the current size of the database.
 **
@@ -3818,11 +3818,11 @@ void enable_simulated_io_errors(void){
 
 /*
 ** Read the first N bytes from the beginning of the file into memory
-** that pDest points to. 
+** that pDest points to.
 **
 ** If the pager was opened on a transient file (zFilename==""), or
 ** opened on a file less than N bytes in size, the output buffer is
-** zeroed and SQLITE_OK returned. The rationale for this is that this 
+** zeroed and SQLITE_OK returned. The rationale for this is that this
 ** function is used to read database headers, and a new transient or
 ** zero sized database has a header than consists entirely of zeroes.
 **
@@ -3855,7 +3855,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerReadFileheader(Pager *pPager, int N, unsigned char *pDest){
 ** This function may only be called when a read-transaction is open on
 ** the pager. It returns the total number of pages in the database.
 **
-** However, if the file is between 1 and <page-size> bytes in size, then 
+** However, if the file is between 1 and <page-size> bytes in size, then
 ** this is considered a 1 page file.
 */
 void sqlite3PagerPagecount(Pager *pPager, int *pnPage){
@@ -3870,19 +3870,19 @@ void sqlite3PagerPagecount(Pager *pPager, int *pnPage){
 ** a similar or greater lock is already held, this function is a no-op
 ** (returning SQLITE_OK immediately).
 **
-** Otherwise, attempt to obtain the lock using sqlite3OsLock(). Invoke 
-** the busy callback if the lock is currently not available. Repeat 
-** until the busy callback returns false or until the attempt to 
+** Otherwise, attempt to obtain the lock using sqlite3OsLock(). Invoke
+** the busy callback if the lock is currently not available. Repeat
+** until the busy callback returns false or until the attempt to
 ** obtain the lock succeeds.
 **
 ** Return SQLITE_OK on success and an error code if we cannot obtain
-** the lock. If the lock is obtained successfully, set the Pager.state 
+** the lock. If the lock is obtained successfully, set the Pager.state
 ** variable to locktype before returning.
 */
 static int pager_wait_on_lock(Pager *pPager, int locktype){
   int rc;                              /* Return code */
 
-  /* Check that this is either a no-op (because the requested lock is 
+  /* Check that this is either a no-op (because the requested lock is
   ** already held), or one of the transitions that the busy-handler
   ** may be invoked during, according to the comment above
   ** sqlite3PagerSetBusyhandler().
@@ -3899,10 +3899,10 @@ static int pager_wait_on_lock(Pager *pPager, int locktype){
 }
 
 /*
-** Function assertTruncateConstraint(pPager) checks that one of the 
+** Function assertTruncateConstraint(pPager) checks that one of the
 ** following is true for all dirty pages currently in the page-cache:
 **
-**   a) The page number is less than or equal to the size of the 
+**   a) The page number is less than or equal to the size of the
 **      current database image, in pages, OR
 **
 **   b) if the page content were written at this time, it would not
@@ -3914,9 +3914,9 @@ static int pager_wait_on_lock(Pager *pPager, int locktype){
 ** the database file. If a savepoint transaction were rolled back after
 ** this happened, the correct behavior would be to restore the current
 ** content of the page. However, since this content is not present in either
-** the database file or the portion of the rollback journal and 
+** the database file or the portion of the rollback journal and
 ** sub-journal rolled back the content could not be restored and the
-** database image would become corrupt. It is therefore fortunate that 
+** database image would become corrupt. It is therefore fortunate that
 ** this circumstance cannot arise.
 */
 #if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
@@ -3940,9 +3940,9 @@ static void assertTruncateConstraint(Pager *pPager){
 #endif
 
 /*
-** Truncate the in-memory database file image to nPage pages. This 
-** function does not actually modify the database file on disk. It 
-** just sets the internal state of the pager object so that the 
+** Truncate the in-memory database file image to nPage pages. This
+** function does not actually modify the database file on disk. It
+** just sets the internal state of the pager object so that the
 ** truncation will be done when the current transaction is committed.
 **
 ** This function is only called right before committing a transaction.
@@ -3957,11 +3957,11 @@ void sqlite3PagerTruncateImage(Pager *pPager, Pgno nPage){
 
   /* At one point the code here called assertTruncateConstraint() to
   ** ensure that all pages being truncated away by this operation are,
-  ** if one or more savepoints are open, present in the savepoint 
+  ** if one or more savepoints are open, present in the savepoint
   ** journal so that they can be restored if the savepoint is rolled
   ** back. This is no longer necessary as this function is now only
-  ** called right before committing a transaction. So although the 
-  ** Pager object may still have open savepoints (Pager.nSavepoint!=0), 
+  ** called right before committing a transaction. So although the
+  ** Pager object may still have open savepoints (Pager.nSavepoint!=0),
   ** they cannot be rolled back. So the assertTruncateConstraint() call
   ** is no longer correct. */
 }
@@ -3973,12 +3973,12 @@ void sqlite3PagerTruncateImage(Pager *pPager, Pgno nPage){
 ** size of the journal file so that the pager_playback() routine knows
 ** that the entire journal file has been synced.
 **
-** Syncing a hot-journal to disk before attempting to roll it back ensures 
+** Syncing a hot-journal to disk before attempting to roll it back ensures
 ** that if a power-failure occurs during the rollback, the process that
 ** attempts rollback following system recovery sees the same journal
 ** content as this process.
 **
-** If everything goes as planned, SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise, 
+** If everything goes as planned, SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise,
 ** an SQLite error code.
 */
 static int pagerSyncHotJournal(Pager *pPager){
@@ -3994,7 +3994,7 @@ static int pagerSyncHotJournal(Pager *pPager){
 
 #if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0
 /*
-** Obtain a reference to a memory mapped page object for page number pgno. 
+** Obtain a reference to a memory mapped page object for page number pgno.
 ** The new object will use the pointer pData, obtained from xFetch().
 ** If successful, set *ppPage to point to the new page reference
 ** and return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise, return an SQLite error code and set
@@ -4010,7 +4010,7 @@ static int pagerAcquireMapPage(
   PgHdr **ppPage                  /* OUT: Acquired page object */
 ){
   PgHdr *p;                       /* Memory mapped page to return */
-  
+ 
   if( pPager->pMmapFreelist ){
     *ppPage = p = pPager->pMmapFreelist;
     pPager->pMmapFreelist = p->pDirty;
@@ -4044,7 +4044,7 @@ static int pagerAcquireMapPage(
 #endif
 
 /*
-** Release a reference to page pPg. pPg must have been returned by an 
+** Release a reference to page pPg. pPg must have been returned by an
 ** earlier call to pagerAcquireMapPage().
 */
 static void pagerReleaseMapPage(PgHdr *pPg){
@@ -4104,7 +4104,7 @@ static int databaseIsUnmoved(Pager *pPager){
 ** result in a coredump.
 **
 ** This function always succeeds. If a transaction is active an attempt
-** is made to roll it back. If an error occurs during the rollback 
+** is made to roll it back. If an error occurs during the rollback
 ** a hot journal may be left in the filesystem but no error is returned
 ** to the caller.
 */
@@ -4121,7 +4121,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerClose(Pager *pPager, sqlite3 *db){
   {
     u8 *a = 0;
     assert( db || pPager->pWal==0 );
-    if( db && 0==(db->flags & SQLITE_NoCkptOnClose) 
+    if( db && 0==(db->flags & SQLITE_NoCkptOnClose)
      && SQLITE_OK==databaseIsUnmoved(pPager)
     ){
       a = pTmp;
@@ -4135,8 +4135,8 @@ int sqlite3PagerClose(Pager *pPager, sqlite3 *db){
     pager_unlock(pPager);
   }else{
     /* If it is open, sync the journal file before calling UnlockAndRollback.
-    ** If this is not done, then an unsynced portion of the open journal 
-    ** file may be played back into the database. If a power failure occurs 
+    ** If this is not done, then an unsynced portion of the open journal
+    ** file may be played back into the database. If a power failure occurs
     ** while this is happening, the database could become corrupt.
     **
     ** If an error occurs while trying to sync the journal, shift the pager
@@ -4187,7 +4187,7 @@ void sqlite3PagerRef(DbPage *pPg){
 ** disk and can be restored in the event of a hot-journal rollback.
 **
 ** If the Pager.noSync flag is set, then this function is a no-op.
-** Otherwise, the actions required depend on the journal-mode and the 
+** Otherwise, the actions required depend on the journal-mode and the
 ** device characteristics of the file-system, as follows:
 **
 **   * If the journal file is an in-memory journal file, no action need
@@ -4199,7 +4199,7 @@ void sqlite3PagerRef(DbPage *pPg){
 **     been written following it. If the pager is operating in full-sync
 **     mode, then the journal file is synced before this field is updated.
 **
-**   * If the device does not support the SEQUENTIAL property, then 
+**   * If the device does not support the SEQUENTIAL property, then
 **     journal file is synced.
 **
 ** Or, in pseudo-code:
@@ -4208,11 +4208,11 @@ void sqlite3PagerRef(DbPage *pPg){
 **     if( NOT SAFE_APPEND ){
 **       if( <full-sync mode> ) xSync(<journal file>);
 **       <update nRec field>
-**     } 
+**     }
 **     if( NOT SEQUENTIAL ) xSync(<journal file>);
 **   }
 **
-** If successful, this routine clears the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag of every 
+** If successful, this routine clears the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag of every
 ** page currently held in memory before returning SQLITE_OK. If an IO
 ** error is encountered, then the IO error code is returned to the caller.
 */
@@ -4240,10 +4240,10 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
         ** mode, then the journal file may at this point actually be larger
         ** than Pager.journalOff bytes. If the next thing in the journal
         ** file happens to be a journal-header (written as part of the
-        ** previous connection's transaction), and a crash or power-failure 
-        ** occurs after nRec is updated but before this connection writes 
-        ** anything else to the journal file (or commits/rolls back its 
-        ** transaction), then SQLite may become confused when doing the 
+        ** previous connection's transaction), and a crash or power-failure
+        ** occurs after nRec is updated but before this connection writes
+        ** anything else to the journal file (or commits/rolls back its
+        ** transaction), then SQLite may become confused when doing the
         ** hot-journal rollback following recovery. It may roll back all
         ** of this connections data, then proceed to rolling back the old,
         ** out-of-date data that follows it. Database corruption.
@@ -4253,7 +4253,7 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
         ** byte to the start of it to prevent it from being recognized.
         **
         ** Variable iNextHdrOffset is set to the offset at which this
-        ** problematic header will occur, if it exists. aMagic is used 
+        ** problematic header will occur, if it exists. aMagic is used
         ** as a temporary buffer to inspect the first couple of bytes of
         ** the potential journal header.
         */
@@ -4280,7 +4280,7 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
         ** it as a candidate for rollback.
         **
         ** This is not required if the persistent media supports the
-        ** SAFE_APPEND property. Because in this case it is not possible 
+        ** SAFE_APPEND property. Because in this case it is not possible
         ** for garbage data to be appended to the file, the nRec field
         ** is populated with 0xFFFFFFFF when the journal header is written
         ** and never needs to be updated.
@@ -4300,7 +4300,7 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
       if( 0==(iDc&SQLITE_IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL) ){
         PAGERTRACE(("SYNC journal of %d\n", PAGERID(pPager)));
         IOTRACE(("JSYNC %p\n", pPager))
-        rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, pPager->syncFlags| 
+        rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, pPager->syncFlags|
           (pPager->syncFlags==SQLITE_SYNC_FULL?SQLITE_SYNC_DATAONLY:0)
         );
         if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
@@ -4317,8 +4317,8 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
     }
   }
 
-  /* Unless the pager is in noSync mode, the journal file was just 
-  ** successfully synced. Either way, clear the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag on 
+  /* Unless the pager is in noSync mode, the journal file was just
+  ** successfully synced. Either way, clear the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag on
   ** all pages.
   */
   sqlite3PcacheClearSyncFlags(pPager->pPCache);
@@ -4338,9 +4338,9 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
 ** is called. Before writing anything to the database file, this lock
 ** is upgraded to an EXCLUSIVE lock. If the lock cannot be obtained,
 ** SQLITE_BUSY is returned and no data is written to the database file.
-** 
+**
 ** If the pager is a temp-file pager and the actual file-system file
-** is not yet open, it is created and opened before any data is 
+** is not yet open, it is created and opened before any data is
 ** written out.
 **
 ** Once the lock has been upgraded and, if necessary, the file opened,
@@ -4355,7 +4355,7 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
 ** in Pager.dbFileVers[] is updated to match the new value stored in
 ** the database file.
 **
-** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error 
+** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error
 ** occurs, an IO error code is returned. Or, if the EXCLUSIVE lock cannot
 ** be obtained, SQLITE_BUSY is returned.
 */
@@ -4381,7 +4381,7 @@ static int pager_write_pagelist(Pager *pPager, PgHdr *pList){
   ** file size will be.
   */
   assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || isOpen(pPager->fd) );
-  if( rc==SQLITE_OK 
+  if( rc==SQLITE_OK
    && pPager->dbHintSize<pPager->dbSize
    && (pList->pDirty || pList->pgno>pPager->dbHintSize)
   ){
@@ -4403,7 +4403,7 @@ static int pager_write_pagelist(Pager *pPager, PgHdr *pList){
     */
     if( pgno<=pPager->dbSize && 0==(pList->flags&PGHDR_DONT_WRITE) ){
       i64 offset = (pgno-1)*(i64)pPager->pageSize;   /* Offset to write */
-      char *pData;                                   /* Data to write */    
+      char *pData;                                   /* Data to write */   
 
       assert( (pList->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)==0 );
       if( pList->pgno==1 ) pager_write_changecounter(pList);
@@ -4414,8 +4414,8 @@ static int pager_write_pagelist(Pager *pPager, PgHdr *pList){
       rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pPager->fd, pData, pPager->pageSize, offset);
 
       /* If page 1 was just written, update Pager.dbFileVers to match
-      ** the value now stored in the database file. If writing this 
-      ** page caused the database file to grow, update dbFileSize. 
+      ** the value now stored in the database file. If writing this
+      ** page caused the database file to grow, update dbFileSize.
       */
       if( pgno==1 ){
         memcpy(&pPager->dbFileVers, &pData[24], sizeof(pPager->dbFileVers));
@@ -4443,18 +4443,18 @@ static int pager_write_pagelist(Pager *pPager, PgHdr *pList){
 }
 
 /*
-** Ensure that the sub-journal file is open. If it is already open, this 
+** Ensure that the sub-journal file is open. If it is already open, this
 ** function is a no-op.
 **
-** SQLITE_OK is returned if everything goes according to plan. An 
-** SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned if a call to sqlite3OsOpen() 
+** SQLITE_OK is returned if everything goes according to plan. An
+** SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned if a call to sqlite3OsOpen()
 ** fails.
 */
 static int openSubJournal(Pager *pPager){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
   if( !isOpen(pPager->sjfd) ){
-    const int flags =  SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL | SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE 
-      | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE | SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE 
+    const int flags =  SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL | SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE
+      | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE | SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE
       | SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE;
     int nStmtSpill = sqlite3Config.nStmtSpill;
     if( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY || pPager->subjInMemory ){
@@ -4466,13 +4466,13 @@ static int openSubJournal(Pager *pPager){
 }
 
 /*
-** Append a record of the current state of page pPg to the sub-journal. 
+** Append a record of the current state of page pPg to the sub-journal.
 **
 ** If successful, set the bit corresponding to pPg->pgno in the bitvecs
 ** for all open savepoints before returning.
 **
 ** This function returns SQLITE_OK if everything is successful, an IO
-** error code if the attempt to write to the sub-journal fails, or 
+** error code if the attempt to write to the sub-journal fails, or
 ** SQLITE_NOMEM if a malloc fails while setting a bit in a savepoint
 ** bitvec.
 */
@@ -4485,9 +4485,9 @@ static int subjournalPage(PgHdr *pPg){
     assert( pPager->useJournal );
     assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd) || pagerUseWal(pPager) );
     assert( isOpen(pPager->sjfd) || pPager->nSubRec==0 );
-    assert( pagerUseWal(pPager) 
-         || pageInJournal(pPager, pPg) 
-         || pPg->pgno>pPager->dbOrigSize 
+    assert( pagerUseWal(pPager)
+         || pageInJournal(pPager, pPg)
+         || pPg->pgno>pPager->dbOrigSize
     );
     rc = openSubJournal(pPager);
 
@@ -4524,14 +4524,14 @@ static int subjournalPageIfRequired(PgHdr *pPg){
 ** This function is called by the pcache layer when it has reached some
 ** soft memory limit. The first argument is a pointer to a Pager object
 ** (cast as a void*). The pager is always 'purgeable' (not an in-memory
-** database). The second argument is a reference to a page that is 
+** database). The second argument is a reference to a page that is
 ** currently dirty but has no outstanding references. The page
-** is always associated with the Pager object passed as the first 
+** is always associated with the Pager object passed as the first
 ** argument.
 **
 ** The job of this function is to make pPg clean by writing its contents
 ** out to the database file, if possible. This may involve syncing the
-** journal file. 
+** journal file.
 **
 ** If successful, sqlite3PcacheMakeClean() is called on the page and
 ** SQLITE_OK returned. If an IO error occurs while trying to make the
@@ -4556,7 +4556,7 @@ static int pagerStress(void *p, PgHdr *pPg){
   ** a rollback or by user request, respectively.
   **
   ** Spilling is also prohibited when in an error state since that could
-  ** lead to database corruption.   In the current implementation it 
+  ** lead to database corruption.   In the current implementation it
   ** is impossible for sqlite3PcacheFetch() to be called with createFlag==3
   ** while in the error state, hence it is impossible for this routine to
   ** be called in the error state.  Nevertheless, we include a NEVER()
@@ -4577,26 +4577,26 @@ static int pagerStress(void *p, PgHdr *pPg){
   pPg->pDirty = 0;
   if( pagerUseWal(pPager) ){
     /* Write a single frame for this page to the log. */
-    rc = subjournalPageIfRequired(pPg); 
+    rc = subjournalPageIfRequired(pPg);
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
       rc = pagerWalFrames(pPager, pPg, 0, 0);
     }
   }else{
-    
+   
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_BATCH_ATOMIC_WRITE
     if( pPager->tempFile==0 ){
       rc = sqlite3JournalCreate(pPager->jfd);
       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return pager_error(pPager, rc);
     }
 #endif
-  
+ 
     /* Sync the journal file if required. */
-    if( pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC 
+    if( pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC
      || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD
     ){
       rc = syncJournal(pPager, 1);
     }
-  
+ 
     /* Write the contents of the page out to the database file. */
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
       assert( (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)==0 );
@@ -4610,7 +4610,7 @@ static int pagerStress(void *p, PgHdr *pPg){
     sqlite3PcacheMakeClean(pPg);
   }
 
-  return pager_error(pPager, rc); 
+  return pager_error(pPager, rc);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -4641,8 +4641,8 @@ int sqlite3PagerFlush(Pager *pPager){
 ** The zFilename argument is the path to the database file to open.
 ** If zFilename is NULL then a randomly-named temporary file is created
 ** and used as the file to be cached. Temporary files are be deleted
-** automatically when they are closed. If zFilename is ":memory:" then 
-** all information is held in cache. It is never written to disk. 
+** automatically when they are closed. If zFilename is ":memory:" then
+** all information is held in cache. It is never written to disk.
 ** This can be used to implement an in-memory database.
 **
 ** The nExtra parameter specifies the number of bytes of space allocated
@@ -4656,13 +4656,13 @@ int sqlite3PagerFlush(Pager *pPager){
 ** of the PAGER_* flags.
 **
 ** The vfsFlags parameter is a bitmask to pass to the flags parameter
-** of the xOpen() method of the supplied VFS when opening files. 
+** of the xOpen() method of the supplied VFS when opening files.
 **
-** If the pager object is allocated and the specified file opened 
+** If the pager object is allocated and the specified file opened
 ** successfully, SQLITE_OK is returned and *ppPager set to point to
 ** the new pager object. If an error occurs, *ppPager is set to NULL
 ** and error code returned. This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM
-** (sqlite3Malloc() is used to allocate memory), SQLITE_CANTOPEN or 
+** (sqlite3Malloc() is used to allocate memory), SQLITE_CANTOPEN or
 ** various SQLITE_IO_XXX errors.
 */
 int sqlite3PagerOpen(
@@ -4759,7 +4759,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerOpen(
   }
 
   /* Allocate memory for the Pager structure, PCache object, the
-  ** three file descriptors, the database file name and the journal 
+  ** three file descriptors, the database file name and the journal
   ** file name. The layout in memory is as follows:
   **
   **     Pager object                    (sizeof(Pager) bytes)
@@ -4938,7 +4938,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerOpen(
     ** disk and uses an in-memory rollback journal.
     **
     ** This branch also runs for files marked as immutable.
-    */ 
+    */
 act_like_temp_file:
     tempFile = 1;
     pPager->eState = PAGER_READER;     /* Pretend we already have a lock */
@@ -4947,7 +4947,7 @@ act_like_temp_file:
     readOnly = (vfsFlags&SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY);
   }
 
-  /* The following call to PagerSetPagesize() serves to set the value of 
+  /* The following call to PagerSetPagesize() serves to set the value of
   ** Pager.pageSize and to allocate the Pager.pTmpSpace buffer.
   */
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -4987,10 +4987,10 @@ act_like_temp_file:
   /* pPager->state = PAGER_UNLOCK; */
   /* pPager->errMask = 0; */
   pPager->tempFile = (u8)tempFile;
-  assert( tempFile==PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL 
+  assert( tempFile==PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL
           || tempFile==PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE );
   assert( PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE==1 );
-  pPager->exclusiveMode = (u8)tempFile; 
+  pPager->exclusiveMode = (u8)tempFile;
   pPager->changeCountDone = pPager->tempFile;
   pPager->memDb = (u8)memDb;
   pPager->readOnly = (u8)readOnly;
@@ -5037,7 +5037,7 @@ sqlite3_file *sqlite3_database_file_object(const char *zName){
 /*
 ** This function is called after transitioning from PAGER_UNLOCK to
 ** PAGER_SHARED state. It tests if there is a hot journal present in
-** the file-system for the given pager. A hot journal is one that 
+** the file-system for the given pager. A hot journal is one that
 ** needs to be played back. According to this function, a hot-journal
 ** file exists if the following criteria are met:
 **
@@ -5056,10 +5056,10 @@ sqlite3_file *sqlite3_database_file_object(const char *zName){
 ** at the end of the file. If there is, and that super-journal file
 ** does not exist, then the journal file is not really hot. In this
 ** case this routine will return a false-positive. The pager_playback()
-** routine will discover that the journal file is not really hot and 
-** will not roll it back. 
+** routine will discover that the journal file is not really hot and
+** will not roll it back.
 **
-** If a hot-journal file is found to exist, *pExists is set to 1 and 
+** If a hot-journal file is found to exist, *pExists is set to 1 and
 ** SQLITE_OK returned. If no hot-journal file is present, *pExists is
 ** set to 0 and SQLITE_OK returned. If an IO error occurs while trying
 ** to determine whether or not a hot-journal file exists, the IO error
@@ -5087,7 +5087,7 @@ static int hasHotJournal(Pager *pPager, int *pExists){
     int locked = 0;             /* True if some process holds a RESERVED lock */
 
     /* Race condition here:  Another process might have been holding the
-    ** the RESERVED lock and have a journal open at the sqlite3OsAccess() 
+    ** the RESERVED lock and have a journal open at the sqlite3OsAccess()
     ** call above, but then delete the journal and drop the lock before
     ** we get to the following sqlite3OsCheckReservedLock() call.  If that
     ** is the case, this routine might think there is a hot journal when
@@ -5120,7 +5120,7 @@ static int hasHotJournal(Pager *pPager, int *pExists){
           /* The journal file exists and no other connection has a reserved
           ** or greater lock on the database file. Now check that there is
           ** at least one non-zero bytes at the start of the journal file.
-          ** If there is, then we consider this journal to be hot. If not, 
+          ** If there is, then we consider this journal to be hot. If not,
           ** it can be ignored.
           */
           if( !jrnlOpen ){
@@ -5170,7 +5170,7 @@ static int hasHotJournal(Pager *pPager, int *pExists){
 **      on the database file), then an attempt is made to obtain a
 **      SHARED lock on the database file. Immediately after obtaining
 **      the SHARED lock, the file-system is checked for a hot-journal,
-**      which is played back if present. Following any hot-journal 
+**      which is played back if present. Following any hot-journal
 **      rollback, the contents of the cache are validated by checking
 **      the 'change-counter' field of the database file header and
 **      discarded if they are found to be invalid.
@@ -5181,8 +5181,8 @@ static int hasHotJournal(Pager *pPager, int *pExists){
 **      the contents of the page cache and rolling back any open journal
 **      file.
 **
-** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error 
-** occurs while locking the database, checking for a hot-journal file or 
+** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error
+** occurs while locking the database, checking for a hot-journal file or
 ** rolling back a journal file, the IO error code is returned.
 */
 int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
@@ -5190,7 +5190,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
 
   /* This routine is only called from b-tree and only when there are no
   ** outstanding pages. This implies that the pager state should either
-  ** be OPEN or READER. READER is only possible if the pager is or was in 
+  ** be OPEN or READER. READER is only possible if the pager is or was in
   ** exclusive access mode.  */
   assert( sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0 );
   assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
@@ -5228,12 +5228,12 @@ int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
       ** important that a RESERVED lock is not obtained on the way to the
       ** EXCLUSIVE lock. If it were, another process might open the
       ** database file, detect the RESERVED lock, and conclude that the
-      ** database is safe to read while this process is still rolling the 
+      ** database is safe to read while this process is still rolling the
       ** hot-journal back.
-      ** 
+      **
       ** Because the intermediate RESERVED lock is not requested, any
-      ** other process attempting to access the database file will get to 
-      ** this point in the code and fail to obtain its own EXCLUSIVE lock 
+      ** other process attempting to access the database file will get to
+      ** this point in the code and fail to obtain its own EXCLUSIVE lock
       ** on the database file.
       **
       ** Unless the pager is in locking_mode=exclusive mode, the lock is
@@ -5243,17 +5243,17 @@ int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
         goto failed;
       }
- 
-      /* If it is not already open and the file exists on disk, open the 
-      ** journal for read/write access. Write access is required because 
-      ** in exclusive-access mode the file descriptor will be kept open 
-      ** and possibly used for a transaction later on. Also, write-access 
-      ** is usually required to finalize the journal in journal_mode=persist 
+
+      /* If it is not already open and the file exists on disk, open the
+      ** journal for read/write access. Write access is required because
+      ** in exclusive-access mode the file descriptor will be kept open
+      ** and possibly used for a transaction later on. Also, write-access
+      ** is usually required to finalize the journal in journal_mode=persist
       ** mode (and also for journal_mode=truncate on some systems).
       **
-      ** If the journal does not exist, it usually means that some 
-      ** other connection managed to get in and roll it back before 
-      ** this connection obtained the exclusive lock above. Or, it 
+      ** If the journal does not exist, it usually means that some
+      ** other connection managed to get in and roll it back before
+      ** this connection obtained the exclusive lock above. Or, it
       ** may mean that the pager was in the error-state when this
       ** function was called and the journal file does not exist.
       */
@@ -5274,7 +5274,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
           }
         }
       }
- 
+
       /* Playback and delete the journal.  Drop the database write
       ** lock and reacquire the read lock. Purge the cache before
       ** playing back the hot-journal so that we don't end up with
@@ -5299,8 +5299,8 @@ int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
         ** or roll back a hot-journal while holding an EXCLUSIVE lock. The
         ** pager_unlock() routine will be called before returning to unlock
         ** the file. If the unlock attempt fails, then Pager.eLock must be
-        ** set to UNKNOWN_LOCK (see the comment above the #define for 
-        ** UNKNOWN_LOCK above for an explanation). 
+        ** set to UNKNOWN_LOCK (see the comment above the #define for
+        ** UNKNOWN_LOCK above for an explanation).
         **
         ** In order to get pager_unlock() to do this, set Pager.eState to
         ** PAGER_ERROR now. This is not actually counted as a transition
@@ -5308,7 +5308,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
         ** since we know that the same call to pager_unlock() will very
         ** shortly transition the pager object to the OPEN state. Calling
         ** assert_pager_state() would fail now, as it should not be possible
-        ** to be in ERROR state when there are zero outstanding page 
+        ** to be in ERROR state when there are zero outstanding page
         ** references.
         */
         pager_error(pPager, rc);
@@ -5333,8 +5333,8 @@ int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
       ** a 32-bit counter that is incremented with each change.  The
       ** other bytes change randomly with each file change when
       ** a codec is in use.
-      ** 
-      ** There is a vanishingly small chance that a change will not be 
+      **
+      ** There is a vanishingly small chance that a change will not be
       ** detected.  The chance of an undetected change is so small that
       ** it can be neglected.
       */
@@ -5401,7 +5401,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
 ** Except, in locking_mode=EXCLUSIVE when there is nothing to in
 ** the rollback journal, the unlock is not performed and there is
 ** nothing to rollback, so this routine is a no-op.
-*/ 
+*/
 static void pagerUnlockIfUnused(Pager *pPager){
   if( sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0 ){
     assert( pPager->nMmapOut==0 ); /* because page1 is never memory mapped */
@@ -5411,7 +5411,7 @@ static void pagerUnlockIfUnused(Pager *pPager){
 
 /*
 ** The page getter methods each try to acquire a reference to a
-** page with page number pgno. If the requested reference is 
+** page with page number pgno. If the requested reference is
 ** successfully obtained, it is copied to *ppPage and SQLITE_OK returned.
 **
 ** There are different implementations of the getter method depending
@@ -5421,22 +5421,22 @@ static void pagerUnlockIfUnused(Pager *pPager){
 **     getPageError()          --  Used if the pager is in an error state
 **     getPageMmap()           --  Used if memory-mapped I/O is enabled
 **
-** If the requested page is already in the cache, it is returned. 
+** If the requested page is already in the cache, it is returned.
 ** Otherwise, a new page object is allocated and populated with data
 ** read from the database file. In some cases, the pcache module may
 ** choose not to allocate a new page object and may reuse an existing
 ** object with no outstanding references.
 **
-** The extra data appended to a page is always initialized to zeros the 
-** first time a page is loaded into memory. If the page requested is 
+** The extra data appended to a page is always initialized to zeros the
+** first time a page is loaded into memory. If the page requested is
 ** already in the cache when this function is called, then the extra
 ** data is left as it was when the page object was last used.
 **
-** If the database image is smaller than the requested page or if 
-** the flags parameter contains the PAGER_GET_NOCONTENT bit and the 
-** requested page is not already stored in the cache, then no 
-** actual disk read occurs. In this case the memory image of the 
-** page is initialized to all zeros. 
+** If the database image is smaller than the requested page or if
+** the flags parameter contains the PAGER_GET_NOCONTENT bit and the
+** requested page is not already stored in the cache, then no
+** actual disk read occurs. In this case the memory image of the
+** page is initialized to all zeros.
 **
 ** If PAGER_GET_NOCONTENT is true, it means that we do not care about
 ** the contents of the page. This occurs in two scenarios:
@@ -5507,7 +5507,7 @@ static int getPageNormal(
     return SQLITE_OK;
 
   }else{
-    /* The pager cache has created a new page. Its content needs to 
+    /* The pager cache has created a new page. Its content needs to
     ** be initialized. But first some error checks:
     **
     ** (*) obsolete.  Was: maximum page number is 2^31
@@ -5532,9 +5532,9 @@ static int getPageNormal(
       }
       if( noContent ){
         /* Failure to set the bits in the InJournal bit-vectors is benign.
-        ** It merely means that we might do some extra work to journal a 
-        ** page that does not need to be journaled.  Nevertheless, be sure 
-        ** to test the case where a malloc error occurs while trying to set 
+        ** It merely means that we might do some extra work to journal a
+        ** page that does not need to be journaled.  Nevertheless, be sure
+        ** to test the case where a malloc error occurs while trying to set
         ** a bit in a bit vector.
         */
         sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc();
@@ -5584,7 +5584,7 @@ static int getPageMMap(
 
   /* It is acceptable to use a read-only (mmap) page for any page except
   ** page 1 if there is no write-transaction open or the ACQUIRE_READONLY
-  ** flag was specified by the caller. And so long as the db is not a 
+  ** flag was specified by the caller. And so long as the db is not a
   ** temporary or in-memory database.  */
   const int bMmapOk = (pgno>1
    && (pPager->eState==PAGER_READER || (flags & PAGER_GET_READONLY))
@@ -5613,7 +5613,7 @@ static int getPageMMap(
   }
   if( bMmapOk && iFrame==0 ){
     void *pData = 0;
-    rc = sqlite3OsFetch(pPager->fd, 
+    rc = sqlite3OsFetch(pPager->fd,
         (i64)(pgno-1) * pPager->pageSize, pPager->pageSize, &pData
     );
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pData ){
@@ -5670,12 +5670,12 @@ int sqlite3PagerGet(
 /*
 ** Acquire a page if it is already in the in-memory cache.  Do
 ** not read the page from disk.  Return a pointer to the page,
-** or 0 if the page is not in cache. 
+** or 0 if the page is not in cache.
 **
 ** See also sqlite3PagerGet().  The difference between this routine
 ** and sqlite3PagerGet() is that _get() will go to the disk and read
 ** in the page if the page is not already in cache.  This routine
-** returns NULL if the page is not in cache or if a disk I/O error 
+** returns NULL if the page is not in cache or if a disk I/O error
 ** has ever happened.
 */
 DbPage *sqlite3PagerLookup(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno){
@@ -5730,24 +5730,24 @@ void sqlite3PagerUnrefPageOne(DbPage *pPg){
 
 /*
 ** This function is called at the start of every write transaction.
-** There must already be a RESERVED or EXCLUSIVE lock on the database 
+** There must already be a RESERVED or EXCLUSIVE lock on the database
 ** file when this routine is called.
 **
 ** Open the journal file for pager pPager and write a journal header
 ** to the start of it. If there are active savepoints, open the sub-journal
-** as well. This function is only used when the journal file is being 
-** opened to write a rollback log for a transaction. It is not used 
+** as well. This function is only used when the journal file is being
+** opened to write a rollback log for a transaction. It is not used
 ** when opening a hot journal file to roll it back.
 **
 ** If the journal file is already open (as it may be in exclusive mode),
 ** then this function just writes a journal header to the start of the
-** already open file. 
+** already open file.
 **
 ** Whether or not the journal file is opened by this function, the
 ** Pager.pInJournal bitvec structure is allocated.
 **
-** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful. Otherwise, return 
-** SQLITE_NOMEM if the attempt to allocate Pager.pInJournal fails, or 
+** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful. Otherwise, return
+** SQLITE_NOMEM if the attempt to allocate Pager.pInJournal fails, or
 ** an IO error code if opening or writing the journal file fails.
 */
 static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
@@ -5757,7 +5757,7 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
   assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED );
   assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
   assert( pPager->pInJournal==0 );
-  
+ 
   /* If already in the error state, this function is a no-op.  But on
   ** the other hand, this routine is never called if we are already in
   ** an error state. */
@@ -5768,7 +5768,7 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
     if( pPager->pInJournal==0 ){
       return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
     }
-  
+ 
     /* Open the journal file if it is not already open. */
     if( !isOpen(pPager->jfd) ){
       if( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY ){
@@ -5785,7 +5785,7 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
           flags |= SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL;
           nSpill = jrnlBufferSize(pPager);
         }
-          
+         
         /* Verify that the database still has the same name as it did when
         ** it was originally opened. */
         rc = databaseIsUnmoved(pPager);
@@ -5797,9 +5797,9 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
       }
       assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || isOpen(pPager->jfd) );
     }
-  
-  
-    /* Write the first journal header to the journal file and open 
+ 
+ 
+    /* Write the first journal header to the journal file and open
     ** the sub-journal if necessary.
     */
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -5825,12 +5825,12 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
 }
 
 /*
-** Begin a write-transaction on the specified pager object. If a 
+** Begin a write-transaction on the specified pager object. If a
 ** write-transaction has already been opened, this function is a no-op.
 **
 ** If the exFlag argument is false, then acquire at least a RESERVED
 ** lock on the database file. If exFlag is true, then acquire at least
-** an EXCLUSIVE lock. If such a lock is already held, no locking 
+** an EXCLUSIVE lock. If such a lock is already held, no locking
 ** functions need be called.
 **
 ** If the subjInMemory argument is non-zero, then any sub-journal opened
@@ -5838,7 +5838,7 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
 ** has no effect if the sub-journal is already opened (as it may be when
 ** running in exclusive mode) or if the transaction does not require a
 ** sub-journal. If the subjInMemory argument is zero, then any required
-** sub-journal is implemented in-memory if pPager is an in-memory database, 
+** sub-journal is implemented in-memory if pPager is an in-memory database,
 ** or using a temporary file otherwise.
 */
 int sqlite3PagerBegin(Pager *pPager, int exFlag, int subjInMemory){
@@ -5886,9 +5886,9 @@ int sqlite3PagerBegin(Pager *pPager, int exFlag, int subjInMemory){
       **
       ** WAL mode sets Pager.eState to PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED or CACHEMOD
       ** when it has an open transaction, but never to DBMOD or FINISHED.
-      ** This is because in those states the code to roll back savepoint 
-      ** transactions may copy data from the sub-journal into the database 
-      ** file as well as into the page cache. Which would be incorrect in 
+      ** This is because in those states the code to roll back savepoint
+      ** transactions may copy data from the sub-journal into the database
+      ** file as well as into the page cache. Which would be incorrect in
       ** WAL mode.
       */
       pPager->eState = PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED;
@@ -5942,11 +5942,11 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int pagerAddPageToRollbackJournal(PgHdr *pPg){
   rc = write32bits(pPager->jfd, iOff+pPager->pageSize+4, cksum);
   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
 
-  IOTRACE(("JOUT %p %d %lld %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno, 
+  IOTRACE(("JOUT %p %d %lld %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno,
            pPager->journalOff, pPager->pageSize));
   PAGER_INCR(sqlite3_pager_writej_count);
   PAGERTRACE(("JOURNAL %d page %d needSync=%d hash(%08x)\n",
-       PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno, 
+       PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno,
        ((pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)?1:0), pager_pagehash(pPg)));
 
   pPager->journalOff += 8 + pPager->pageSize;
@@ -5961,9 +5961,9 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int pagerAddPageToRollbackJournal(PgHdr *pPg){
 }
 
 /*
-** Mark a single data page as writeable. The page is written into the 
+** Mark a single data page as writeable. The page is written into the
 ** main journal or sub-journal as required. If the page is written into
-** one of the journals, the corresponding bit is set in the 
+** one of the journals, the corresponding bit is set in the
 ** Pager.pInJournal bitvec and the PagerSavepoint.pInSavepoint bitvecs
 ** of any open savepoints as appropriate.
 */
@@ -5971,7 +5971,7 @@ static int pager_write(PgHdr *pPg){
   Pager *pPager = pPg->pPager;
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
 
-  /* This routine is not called unless a write-transaction has already 
+  /* This routine is not called unless a write-transaction has already
   ** been started. The journal file may or may not be open at this point.
   ** It is never called in the ERROR state.
   */
@@ -5988,7 +5988,7 @@ static int pager_write(PgHdr *pPg){
   ** obtained the necessary locks to begin the write-transaction, but the
   ** rollback journal might not yet be open. Open it now if this is the case.
   **
-  ** This is done before calling sqlite3PcacheMakeDirty() on the page. 
+  ** This is done before calling sqlite3PcacheMakeDirty() on the page.
   ** Otherwise, if it were done after calling sqlite3PcacheMakeDirty(), then
   ** an error might occur and the pager would end up in WRITER_LOCKED state
   ** with pages marked as dirty in the cache.
@@ -6033,7 +6033,7 @@ static int pager_write(PgHdr *pPg){
   ** PGHDR_WRITEABLE bit that indicates that the page can be safely modified.
   */
   pPg->flags |= PGHDR_WRITEABLE;
-  
+ 
   /* If the statement journal is open and the page is not in it,
   ** then write the page into the statement journal.
   */
@@ -6117,7 +6117,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int pagerWriteLargeSector(PgHdr *pPg){
     }
   }
 
-  /* If the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag is set for any of the nPage pages 
+  /* If the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag is set for any of the nPage pages
   ** starting at pg1, then it needs to be set for all of them. Because
   ** writing to any of these nPage pages may damage the others, the
   ** journal file must contain sync()ed copies of all of them
@@ -6140,9 +6140,9 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int pagerWriteLargeSector(PgHdr *pPg){
 }
 
 /*
-** Mark a data page as writeable. This routine must be called before 
-** making changes to a page. The caller must check the return value 
-** of this function and be careful not to change any page data unless 
+** Mark a data page as writeable. This routine must be called before
+** making changes to a page. The caller must check the return value
+** of this function and be careful not to change any page data unless
 ** this routine returns SQLITE_OK.
 **
 ** The difference between this function and pager_write() is that this
@@ -6193,13 +6193,13 @@ int sqlite3PagerIswriteable(DbPage *pPg){
 ** on the given page is unused. The pager marks the page as clean so
 ** that it does not get written to disk.
 **
-** Tests show that this optimization can quadruple the speed of large 
+** Tests show that this optimization can quadruple the speed of large
 ** DELETE operations.
 **
 ** This optimization cannot be used with a temp-file, as the page may
 ** have been dirty at the start of the transaction. In that case, if
-** memory pressure forces page pPg out of the cache, the data does need 
-** to be written out to disk so that it may be read back in if the 
+** memory pressure forces page pPg out of the cache, the data does need
+** to be written out to disk so that it may be read back in if the
 ** current transaction is rolled back.
 */
 void sqlite3PagerDontWrite(PgHdr *pPg){
@@ -6215,17 +6215,17 @@ void sqlite3PagerDontWrite(PgHdr *pPg){
 }
 
 /*
-** This routine is called to increment the value of the database file 
-** change-counter, stored as a 4-byte big-endian integer starting at 
+** This routine is called to increment the value of the database file
+** change-counter, stored as a 4-byte big-endian integer starting at
 ** byte offset 24 of the pager file.  The secondary change counter at
 ** 92 is also updated, as is the SQLite version number at offset 96.
 **
 ** But this only happens if the pPager->changeCountDone flag is false.
 ** To avoid excess churning of page 1, the update only happens once.
-** See also the pager_write_changecounter() routine that does an 
+** See also the pager_write_changecounter() routine that does an
 ** unconditional update of the change counters.
 **
-** If the isDirectMode flag is zero, then this is done by calling 
+** If the isDirectMode flag is zero, then this is done by calling
 ** sqlite3PagerWrite() on page 1, then modifying the contents of the
 ** page data. In this case the file will be updated when the current
 ** transaction is committed.
@@ -6233,7 +6233,7 @@ void sqlite3PagerDontWrite(PgHdr *pPg){
 ** The isDirectMode flag may only be non-zero if the library was compiled
 ** with the SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE macro defined. In this case,
 ** if isDirect is non-zero, then the database file is updated directly
-** by writing an updated version of page 1 using a call to the 
+** by writing an updated version of page 1 using a call to the
 ** sqlite3OsWrite() function.
 */
 static int pager_incr_changecounter(Pager *pPager, int isDirectMode){
@@ -6272,7 +6272,7 @@ static int pager_incr_changecounter(Pager *pPager, int isDirectMode){
     assert( pPgHdr==0 || rc==SQLITE_OK );
 
     /* If page one was fetched successfully, and this function is not
-    ** operating in direct-mode, make page 1 writable.  When not in 
+    ** operating in direct-mode, make page 1 writable.  When not in
     ** direct mode, page 1 is always held in cache and hence the PagerGet()
     ** above is always successful - hence the ALWAYS on rc==SQLITE_OK.
     */
@@ -6333,22 +6333,22 @@ int sqlite3PagerSync(Pager *pPager, const char *zSuper){
 
 /*
 ** This function may only be called while a write-transaction is active in
-** rollback. If the connection is in WAL mode, this call is a no-op. 
-** Otherwise, if the connection does not already have an EXCLUSIVE lock on 
+** rollback. If the connection is in WAL mode, this call is a no-op.
+** Otherwise, if the connection does not already have an EXCLUSIVE lock on
 ** the database file, an attempt is made to obtain one.
 **
 ** If the EXCLUSIVE lock is already held or the attempt to obtain it is
 ** successful, or the connection is in WAL mode, SQLITE_OK is returned.
-** Otherwise, either SQLITE_BUSY or an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is 
+** Otherwise, either SQLITE_BUSY or an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is
 ** returned.
 */
 int sqlite3PagerExclusiveLock(Pager *pPager){
   int rc = pPager->errCode;
   assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
-    assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD 
-         || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD 
-         || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED 
+    assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD
+         || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD
+         || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED
     );
     assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
     if( 0==pagerUseWal(pPager) ){
@@ -6361,19 +6361,19 @@ int sqlite3PagerExclusiveLock(Pager *pPager){
 /*
 ** Sync the database file for the pager pPager. zSuper points to the name
 ** of a super-journal file that should be written into the individual
-** journal file. zSuper may be NULL, which is interpreted as no 
+** journal file. zSuper may be NULL, which is interpreted as no
 ** super-journal (a single database transaction).
 **
 ** This routine ensures that:
 **
 **   * The database file change-counter is updated,
 **   * the journal is synced (unless the atomic-write optimization is used),
-**   * all dirty pages are written to the database file, 
+**   * all dirty pages are written to the database file,
 **   * the database file is truncated (if required), and
-**   * the database file synced. 
+**   * the database file synced.
 **
-** The only thing that remains to commit the transaction is to finalize 
-** (delete, truncate or zero the first part of) the journal file (or 
+** The only thing that remains to commit the transaction is to finalize
+** (delete, truncate or zero the first part of) the journal file (or
 ** delete the super-journal file if specified).
 **
 ** Note that if zSuper==NULL, this does not overwrite a previous value
@@ -6404,7 +6404,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
   /* Provide the ability to easily simulate an I/O error during testing */
   if( sqlite3FaultSim(400) ) return SQLITE_IOERR;
 
-  PAGERTRACE(("DATABASE SYNC: File=%s zSuper=%s nSize=%d\n", 
+  PAGERTRACE(("DATABASE SYNC: File=%s zSuper=%s nSize=%d\n",
       pPager->zFilename, zSuper, pPager->dbSize));
 
   /* If no database changes have been made, return early. */
@@ -6455,11 +6455,11 @@ int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE
       /* The following block updates the change-counter. Exactly how it
       ** does this depends on whether or not the atomic-update optimization
-      ** was enabled at compile time, and if this transaction meets the 
-      ** runtime criteria to use the operation: 
+      ** was enabled at compile time, and if this transaction meets the
+      ** runtime criteria to use the operation:
       **
       **    * The file-system supports the atomic-write property for
-      **      blocks of size page-size, and 
+      **      blocks of size page-size, and
       **    * This commit is not part of a multi-file transaction, and
       **    * Exactly one page has been modified and store in the journal file.
       **
@@ -6469,7 +6469,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
       ** is not applicable to this transaction, call sqlite3JournalCreate()
       ** to make sure the journal file has actually been created, then call
       ** pager_incr_changecounter() to update the change-counter in indirect
-      ** mode. 
+      ** mode.
       **
       ** Otherwise, if the optimization is both enabled and applicable,
       ** then call pager_incr_changecounter() to update the change-counter
@@ -6478,19 +6478,19 @@ int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
       */
       if( bBatch==0 ){
         PgHdr *pPg;
-        assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd) 
-            || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF 
-            || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL 
+        assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd)
+            || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+            || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
             );
-        if( !zSuper && isOpen(pPager->jfd) 
-         && pPager->journalOff==jrnlBufferSize(pPager) 
+        if( !zSuper && isOpen(pPager->jfd)
+         && pPager->journalOff==jrnlBufferSize(pPager)
          && pPager->dbSize>=pPager->dbOrigSize
          && (!(pPg = sqlite3PcacheDirtyList(pPager->pPCache)) || 0==pPg->pDirty)
         ){
-          /* Update the db file change counter via the direct-write method. The 
-          ** following call will modify the in-memory representation of page 1 
-          ** to include the updated change counter and then write page 1 
-          ** directly to the database file. Because of the atomic-write 
+          /* Update the db file change counter via the direct-write method. The
+          ** following call will modify the in-memory representation of page 1
+          ** to include the updated change counter and then write page 1
+          ** directly to the database file. Because of the atomic-write
           ** property of the host file-system, this is safe.
           */
           rc = pager_incr_changecounter(pPager, 1);
@@ -6512,24 +6512,24 @@ int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
       rc = pager_incr_changecounter(pPager, 0);
 #endif /* !SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE */
       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit;
-  
+ 
       /* Write the super-journal name into the journal file. If a
-      ** super-journal file name has already been written to the journal file, 
+      ** super-journal file name has already been written to the journal file,
       ** or if zSuper is NULL (no super-journal), then this call is a no-op.
       */
       rc = writeSuperJournal(pPager, zSuper);
       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit;
-  
+ 
       /* Sync the journal file and write all dirty pages to the database.
-      ** If the atomic-update optimization is being used, this sync will not 
+      ** If the atomic-update optimization is being used, this sync will not
       ** create the journal file or perform any real IO.
       **
       ** Because the change-counter page was just modified, unless the
       ** atomic-update optimization is used it is almost certain that the
       ** journal requires a sync here. However, in locking_mode=exclusive
-      ** on a system under memory pressure it is just possible that this is 
+      ** on a system under memory pressure it is just possible that this is
       ** not the case. In this case it is likely enough that the redundant
-      ** xSync() call will be changed to a no-op by the OS anyhow. 
+      ** xSync() call will be changed to a no-op by the OS anyhow.
       */
       rc = syncJournal(pPager, 0);
       if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit;
@@ -6570,7 +6570,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
       }
       sqlite3PcacheCleanAll(pPager->pPCache);
 
-      /* If the file on disk is smaller than the database image, use 
+      /* If the file on disk is smaller than the database image, use
       ** pager_truncate to grow the file here. This can happen if the database
       ** image was extended as part of the current transaction and then the
       ** last page in the db image moved to the free-list. In this case the
@@ -6582,7 +6582,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
         rc = pager_truncate(pPager, nNew);
         if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit;
       }
-  
+ 
       /* Finally, sync the database file. */
       if( !noSync ){
         rc = sqlite3PagerSync(pPager, zSuper);
@@ -6602,12 +6602,12 @@ commit_phase_one_exit:
 /*
 ** When this function is called, the database file has been completely
 ** updated to reflect the changes made by the current transaction and
-** synced to disk. The journal file still exists in the file-system 
+** synced to disk. The journal file still exists in the file-system
 ** though, and if a failure occurs at this point it will eventually
 ** be used as a hot-journal and the current transaction rolled back.
 **
-** This function finalizes the journal file, either by deleting, 
-** truncating or partially zeroing it, so that it cannot be used 
+** This function finalizes the journal file, either by deleting,
+** truncating or partially zeroing it, so that it cannot be used
 ** for hot-journal rollback. Once this is done the transaction is
 ** irrevocably committed.
 **
@@ -6633,15 +6633,15 @@ int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseTwo(Pager *pPager){
   ** this transaction, the pager is running in exclusive-mode and is
   ** using persistent journals, then this function is a no-op.
   **
-  ** The start of the journal file currently contains a single journal 
+  ** The start of the journal file currently contains a single journal
   ** header with the nRec field set to 0. If such a journal is used as
   ** a hot-journal during hot-journal rollback, 0 changes will be made
-  ** to the database file. So there is no need to zero the journal 
+  ** to the database file. So there is no need to zero the journal
   ** header. Since the pager is in exclusive mode, there is no need
   ** to drop any locks either.
   */
-  if( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED 
-   && pPager->exclusiveMode 
+  if( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED
+   && pPager->exclusiveMode
    && pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST
   ){
     assert( pPager->journalOff==JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager) || !pPager->journalOff );
@@ -6655,7 +6655,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseTwo(Pager *pPager){
 }
 
 /*
-** If a write transaction is open, then all changes made within the 
+** If a write transaction is open, then all changes made within the
 ** transaction are reverted and the current write-transaction is closed.
 ** The pager falls back to PAGER_READER state if successful, or PAGER_ERROR
 ** state if an error occurs.
@@ -6665,14 +6665,14 @@ int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseTwo(Pager *pPager){
 **
 ** Otherwise, in rollback mode, this function performs two functions:
 **
-**   1) It rolls back the journal file, restoring all database file and 
+**   1) It rolls back the journal file, restoring all database file and
 **      in-memory cache pages to the state they were in when the transaction
 **      was opened, and
 **
 **   2) It finalizes the journal file, so that it is not used for hot
 **      rollback at any point in the future.
 **
-** Finalization of the journal file (task 2) is only performed if the 
+** Finalization of the journal file (task 2) is only performed if the
 ** rollback is successful.
 **
 ** In WAL mode, all cache-entries containing data modified within the
@@ -6685,7 +6685,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerRollback(Pager *pPager){
   PAGERTRACE(("ROLLBACK %d\n", PAGERID(pPager)));
 
   /* PagerRollback() is a no-op if called in READER or OPEN state. If
-  ** the pager is already in the ERROR state, the rollback is not 
+  ** the pager is already in the ERROR state, the rollback is not
   ** attempted here. Instead, the error code is returned to the caller.
   */
   assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
@@ -6701,7 +6701,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerRollback(Pager *pPager){
     int eState = pPager->eState;
     rc = pager_end_transaction(pPager, 0, 0);
     if( !MEMDB && eState>PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED ){
-      /* This can happen using journal_mode=off. Move the pager to the error 
+      /* This can happen using journal_mode=off. Move the pager to the error
       ** state to indicate that the contents of the cache may not be trusted.
       ** Any active readers will get SQLITE_ABORT.
       */
@@ -6716,7 +6716,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerRollback(Pager *pPager){
 
   assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_READER || rc!=SQLITE_OK );
   assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || rc==SQLITE_FULL || rc==SQLITE_CORRUPT
-          || rc==SQLITE_NOMEM || (rc&0xFF)==SQLITE_IOERR 
+          || rc==SQLITE_NOMEM || (rc&0xFF)==SQLITE_IOERR
           || rc==SQLITE_CANTOPEN
   );
 
@@ -6790,8 +6790,8 @@ int *sqlite3PagerStats(Pager *pPager){
 ** it was added later.
 **
 ** Before returning, *pnVal is incremented by the
-** current cache hit or miss count, according to the value of eStat. If the 
-** reset parameter is non-zero, the cache hit or miss count is zeroed before 
+** current cache hit or miss count, according to the value of eStat. If the
+** reset parameter is non-zero, the cache hit or miss count is zeroed before
 ** returning.
 */
 void sqlite3PagerCacheStat(Pager *pPager, int eStat, int reset, int *pnVal){
@@ -6827,7 +6827,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerIsMemdb(Pager *pPager){
 ** to make up the difference. If the number of savepoints is already
 ** equal to nSavepoint, then this function is a no-op.
 **
-** If a memory allocation fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. If an error 
+** If a memory allocation fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. If an error
 ** occurs while opening the sub-journal file, then an IO error code is
 ** returned. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK.
 */
@@ -6842,7 +6842,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int pagerOpenSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int nSavepoint){
   assert( nSavepoint>nCurrent && pPager->useJournal );
 
   /* Grow the Pager.aSavepoint array using realloc(). Return SQLITE_NOMEM
-  ** if the allocation fails. Otherwise, zero the new portion in case a 
+  ** if the allocation fails. Otherwise, zero the new portion in case a
   ** malloc failure occurs while populating it in the for(...) loop below.
   */
   aNew = (PagerSavepoint *)sqlite3Realloc(
@@ -6891,7 +6891,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerOpenSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int nSavepoint){
 
 /*
 ** This function is called to rollback or release (commit) a savepoint.
-** The savepoint to release or rollback need not be the most recently 
+** The savepoint to release or rollback need not be the most recently
 ** created savepoint.
 **
 ** Parameter op is always either SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK or SAVEPOINT_RELEASE.
@@ -6899,29 +6899,29 @@ int sqlite3PagerOpenSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int nSavepoint){
 ** index iSavepoint. If it is SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then rollback all changes
 ** that have occurred since the specified savepoint was created.
 **
-** The savepoint to rollback or release is identified by parameter 
+** The savepoint to rollback or release is identified by parameter
 ** iSavepoint. A value of 0 means to operate on the outermost savepoint
 ** (the first created). A value of (Pager.nSavepoint-1) means operate
 ** on the most recently created savepoint. If iSavepoint is greater than
 ** (Pager.nSavepoint-1), then this function is a no-op.
 **
 ** If a negative value is passed to this function, then the current
-** transaction is rolled back. This is different to calling 
+** transaction is rolled back. This is different to calling
 ** sqlite3PagerRollback() because this function does not terminate
-** the transaction or unlock the database, it just restores the 
-** contents of the database to its original state. 
+** the transaction or unlock the database, it just restores the
+** contents of the database to its original state.
 **
-** In any case, all savepoints with an index greater than iSavepoint 
+** In any case, all savepoints with an index greater than iSavepoint
 ** are destroyed. If this is a release operation (op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE),
 ** then savepoint iSavepoint is also destroyed.
 **
 ** This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM if a memory allocation fails,
-** or an IO error code if an IO error occurs while rolling back a 
+** or an IO error code if an IO error occurs while rolling back a
 ** savepoint. If no errors occur, SQLITE_OK is returned.
-*/ 
+*/
 int sqlite3PagerSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int op, int iSavepoint){
   int rc = pPager->errCode;
-  
+ 
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ZIPVFS
   if( op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ) rc = SQLITE_OK;
 #endif
@@ -6934,7 +6934,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int op, int iSavepoint){
     int nNew;          /* Number of remaining savepoints after this op. */
 
     /* Figure out how many savepoints will still be active after this
-    ** operation. Store this value in nNew. Then free resources associated 
+    ** operation. Store this value in nNew. Then free resources associated
     ** with any savepoints that are destroyed by this operation.
     */
     nNew = iSavepoint + (( op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ) ? 0 : 1);
@@ -6967,14 +6967,14 @@ int sqlite3PagerSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int op, int iSavepoint){
       rc = pagerPlaybackSavepoint(pPager, pSavepoint);
       assert(rc!=SQLITE_DONE);
     }
-    
+   
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ZIPVFS
-    /* If the cache has been modified but the savepoint cannot be rolled 
+    /* If the cache has been modified but the savepoint cannot be rolled
     ** back journal_mode=off, put the pager in the error state. This way,
     ** if the VFS used by this pager includes ZipVFS, the entire transaction
     ** can be rolled back at the ZipVFS level.  */
-    else if( 
-        pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF 
+    else if(
+        pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
      && pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD
     ){
       pPager->errCode = SQLITE_ABORT;
@@ -7063,8 +7063,8 @@ const char *sqlite3PagerJournalname(Pager *pPager){
 ** transaction is active).
 **
 ** If the fourth argument, isCommit, is non-zero, then this page is being
-** moved as part of a database reorganization just before the transaction 
-** is being committed. In this case, it is guaranteed that the database page 
+** moved as part of a database reorganization just before the transaction
+** is being committed. In this case, it is guaranteed that the database page
 ** pPg refers to will not be written to again within this transaction.
 **
 ** This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM or an IO error code if an error
@@ -7092,7 +7092,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, int isCommit){
   }
 
   /* If the page being moved is dirty and has not been saved by the latest
-  ** savepoint, then save the current contents of the page into the 
+  ** savepoint, then save the current contents of the page into the
   ** sub-journal now. This is required to handle the following scenario:
   **
   **   BEGIN;
@@ -7115,7 +7115,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, int isCommit){
     return rc;
   }
 
-  PAGERTRACE(("MOVE %d page %d (needSync=%d) moves to %d\n", 
+  PAGERTRACE(("MOVE %d page %d (needSync=%d) moves to %d\n",
       PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno, (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)?1:0, pgno));
   IOTRACE(("MOVE %p %d %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno, pgno))
 
@@ -7123,7 +7123,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, int isCommit){
   ** be written to, store pPg->pgno in local variable needSyncPgno.
   **
   ** If the isCommit flag is set, there is no need to remember that
-  ** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pPg->pgno 
+  ** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pPg->pgno
   ** can be written to. The caller has already promised not to write to it.
   */
   if( (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC) && !isCommit ){
@@ -7134,8 +7134,8 @@ int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, int isCommit){
   }
 
   /* If the cache contains a page with page-number pgno, remove it
-  ** from its hash chain. Also, if the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag was set for 
-  ** page pgno before the 'move' operation, it needs to be retained 
+  ** from its hash chain. Also, if the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag was set for
+  ** page pgno before the 'move' operation, it needs to be retained
   ** for the page moved there.
   */
   pPg->flags &= ~PGHDR_NEED_SYNC;
@@ -7170,9 +7170,9 @@ int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, int isCommit){
   }
 
   if( needSyncPgno ){
-    /* If needSyncPgno is non-zero, then the journal file needs to be 
+    /* If needSyncPgno is non-zero, then the journal file needs to be
     ** sync()ed before any data is written to database file page needSyncPgno.
-    ** Currently, no such page exists in the page-cache and the 
+    ** Currently, no such page exists in the page-cache and the
     ** "is journaled" bitvec flag has been set. This needs to be remedied by
     ** loading the page into the pager-cache and setting the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC
     ** flag.
@@ -7203,9 +7203,9 @@ int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, int isCommit){
 #endif
 
 /*
-** The page handle passed as the first argument refers to a dirty page 
-** with a page number other than iNew. This function changes the page's 
-** page number to iNew and sets the value of the PgHdr.flags field to 
+** The page handle passed as the first argument refers to a dirty page
+** with a page number other than iNew. This function changes the page's
+** page number to iNew and sets the value of the PgHdr.flags field to
 ** the value passed as the third parameter.
 */
 void sqlite3PagerRekey(DbPage *pPg, Pgno iNew, u16 flags){
@@ -7223,7 +7223,7 @@ void *sqlite3PagerGetData(DbPage *pPg){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return a pointer to the Pager.nExtra bytes of "extra" space 
+** Return a pointer to the Pager.nExtra bytes of "extra" space
 ** allocated along with the specified page.
 */
 void *sqlite3PagerGetExtra(DbPage *pPg){
@@ -7232,7 +7232,7 @@ void *sqlite3PagerGetExtra(DbPage *pPg){
 
 /*
 ** Get/set the locking-mode for this pager. Parameter eMode must be one
-** of PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_QUERY, PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL or 
+** of PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_QUERY, PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL or
 ** PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE. If the parameter is not _QUERY, then
 ** the locking-mode is set to the value specified.
 **
@@ -7306,7 +7306,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(Pager *pPager, int eMode){
     assert( pPager->eState!=PAGER_ERROR );
     pPager->journalMode = (u8)eMode;
 
-    /* When transistioning from TRUNCATE or PERSIST to any other journal
+    /* When transitioning from TRUNCATE or PERSIST to any other journal
     ** mode except WAL, unless the pager is in locking_mode=exclusive mode,
     ** delete the journal file.
     */
@@ -7479,7 +7479,7 @@ static int pagerExclusiveLock(Pager *pPager){
   eOrigLock = pPager->eLock;
   rc = pagerLockDb(pPager, EXCLUSIVE_LOCK);
   if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
-    /* If the attempt to grab the exclusive lock failed, release the 
+    /* If the attempt to grab the exclusive lock failed, release the
     ** pending lock that may have been obtained instead.  */
     pagerUnlockDb(pPager, eOrigLock);
   }
@@ -7488,7 +7488,7 @@ static int pagerExclusiveLock(Pager *pPager){
 }
 
 /*
-** Call sqlite3WalOpen() to open the WAL handle. If the pager is in 
+** Call sqlite3WalOpen() to open the WAL handle. If the pager is in
 ** exclusive-locking mode when this function is called, take an EXCLUSIVE
 ** lock on the database file and use heap-memory to store the wal-index
 ** in. Otherwise, use the normal shared-memory.
@@ -7499,8 +7499,8 @@ static int pagerOpenWal(Pager *pPager){
   assert( pPager->pWal==0 && pPager->tempFile==0 );
   assert( pPager->eLock==SHARED_LOCK || pPager->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK );
 
-  /* If the pager is already in exclusive-mode, the WAL module will use 
-  ** heap-memory for the wal-index instead of the VFS shared-memory 
+  /* If the pager is already in exclusive-mode, the WAL module will use
+  ** heap-memory for the wal-index instead of the VFS shared-memory
   ** implementation. Take the exclusive lock now, before opening the WAL
   ** file, to make sure this is safe.
   */
@@ -7508,7 +7508,7 @@ static int pagerOpenWal(Pager *pPager){
     rc = pagerExclusiveLock(pPager);
   }
 
-  /* Open the connection to the log file. If this operation fails, 
+  /* Open the connection to the log file. If this operation fails,
   ** (e.g. due to malloc() failure), return an error code.
   */
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -7530,7 +7530,7 @@ static int pagerOpenWal(Pager *pPager){
 ** If the pager passed as the first argument is open on a real database
 ** file (not a temp file or an in-memory database), and the WAL file
 ** is not already open, make an attempt to open it now. If successful,
-** return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs or the VFS used by the pager does 
+** return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs or the VFS used by the pager does
 ** not support the xShmXXX() methods, return an error code. *pbOpen is
 ** not modified in either case.
 **
@@ -7572,7 +7572,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerOpenWal(
 ** This function is called to close the connection to the log file prior
 ** to switching from WAL to rollback mode.
 **
-** Before closing the log file, this function attempts to take an 
+** Before closing the log file, this function attempts to take an
 ** EXCLUSIVE lock on the database file. If this cannot be obtained, an
 ** error (SQLITE_BUSY) is returned and the log connection is not closed.
 ** If successful, the EXCLUSIVE lock is not released before returning.
@@ -7598,7 +7598,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerCloseWal(Pager *pPager, sqlite3 *db){
       rc = pagerOpenWal(pPager);
     }
   }
-    
+   
   /* Checkpoint and close the log. Because an EXCLUSIVE lock is held on
   ** the database file, the log and log-summary files will be deleted.
   */
@@ -7618,7 +7618,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerCloseWal(Pager *pPager, sqlite3 *db){
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SETLK_TIMEOUT
 /*
 ** If pager pPager is a wal-mode database not in exclusive locking mode,
-** invoke the sqlite3WalWriteLock() function on the associated Wal object 
+** invoke the sqlite3WalWriteLock() function on the associated Wal object
 ** with the same db and bLock parameters as were passed to this function.
 ** Return an SQLite error code if an error occurs, or SQLITE_OK otherwise.
 */
@@ -7631,7 +7631,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerWalWriteLock(Pager *pPager, int bLock){
 }
 
 /*
-** Set the database handle used by the wal layer to determine if 
+** Set the database handle used by the wal layer to determine if
 ** blocking locks are required.
 */
 void sqlite3PagerWalDb(Pager *pPager, sqlite3 *db){
@@ -7656,11 +7656,11 @@ int sqlite3PagerSnapshotGet(Pager *pPager, sqlite3_snapshot **ppSnapshot){
 
 /*
 ** If this is a WAL database, store a pointer to pSnapshot. Next time a
-** read transaction is opened, attempt to read from the snapshot it 
+** read transaction is opened, attempt to read from the snapshot it
 ** identifies. If this is not a WAL database, return an error.
 */
 int sqlite3PagerSnapshotOpen(
-  Pager *pPager, 
+  Pager *pPager,
   sqlite3_snapshot *pSnapshot
 ){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -7673,7 +7673,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerSnapshotOpen(
 }
 
 /*
-** If this is a WAL database, call sqlite3WalSnapshotRecover(). If this 
+** If this is a WAL database, call sqlite3WalSnapshotRecover(). If this
 ** is not a WAL database, return an error.
 */
 int sqlite3PagerSnapshotRecover(Pager *pPager){
@@ -7690,7 +7690,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerSnapshotRecover(Pager *pPager){
 ** The caller currently has a read transaction open on the database.
 ** If this is not a WAL database, SQLITE_ERROR is returned. Otherwise,
 ** this function takes a SHARED lock on the CHECKPOINTER slot and then
-** checks if the snapshot passed as the second argument is still 
+** checks if the snapshot passed as the second argument is still
 ** available. If so, SQLITE_OK is returned.
 **
 ** If the snapshot is not available, SQLITE_ERROR is returned. Or, if
diff --git a/src/pcache.c b/src/pcache.c
index 8a96cbeae..42f22b703 100644
--- a/src/pcache.c
+++ b/src/pcache.c
@@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ static int numberOfCachePages(PCache *p){
     return p->szCache;
   }else{
     i64 n;
-    /* IMPLEMANTATION-OF: R-59858-46238 If the argument N is negative, then the
+    /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-59858-46238 If the argument N is negative, then the
     ** number of cache pages is adjusted to be a number of pages that would
     ** use approximately abs(N*1024) bytes of memory based on the current
     ** page size. */
@@ -759,7 +759,7 @@ static PgHdr *pcacheMergeDirtyList(PgHdr *pA, PgHdr *pB){
 }
 
 /*
-** Sort the list of pages in accending order by pgno.  Pages are
+** Sort the list of pages in ascending order by pgno.  Pages are
 ** connected by pDirty pointers.  The pDirtyPrev pointers are
 ** corrupted by this sort.
 **
diff --git a/src/pcache1.c b/src/pcache1.c
index adbe95395..1591f014c 100644
--- a/src/pcache1.c
+++ b/src/pcache1.c
@@ -64,14 +64,14 @@
 **
 ** The third case is a chunk of heap memory (defaulting to 100 pages worth)
 ** that is allocated when the page cache is created.  The size of the local
-** bulk allocation can be adjusted using 
+** bulk allocation can be adjusted using
 **
 **     sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE, (void*)0, 0, N).
 **
 ** If N is positive, then N pages worth of memory are allocated using a single
 ** sqlite3Malloc() call and that memory is used for the first N pages allocated.
 ** Or if N is negative, then -1024*N bytes of memory are allocated and used
-** for as many pages as can be accomodated.
+** for as many pages as can be accommodated.
 **
 ** Only one of (2) or (3) can be used.  Once the memory available to (2) or
 ** (3) is exhausted, subsequent allocations fail over to the general-purpose
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ typedef struct PgFreeslot PgFreeslot;
 typedef struct PGroup PGroup;
 
 /*
-** Each cache entry is represented by an instance of the following 
+** Each cache entry is represented by an instance of the following
 ** structure. A buffer of PgHdr1.pCache->szPage bytes is allocated
 ** directly before this structure and is used to cache the page content.
 **
@@ -100,12 +100,12 @@ typedef struct PGroup PGroup;
 ** overrun area, so that overreads are harmless.
 **
 ** Variables isBulkLocal and isAnchor were once type "u8". That works,
-** but causes a 2-byte gap in the structure for most architectures (since 
+** but causes a 2-byte gap in the structure for most architectures (since
 ** pointers must be either 4 or 8-byte aligned). As this structure is located
 ** in memory directly after the associated page data, if the database is
-** corrupt, code at the b-tree layer may overread the page buffer and 
+** corrupt, code at the b-tree layer may overread the page buffer and
 ** read part of this structure before the corruption is detected. This
-** can cause a valgrind error if the unitialized gap is accessed. Using u16
+** can cause a valgrind error if the uninitialized gap is accessed. Using u16
 ** ensures there is no such gap, and therefore no bytes of uninitialized
 ** memory in the structure.
 **
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ struct PgHdr1 {
 #define PAGE_IS_PINNED(p)    ((p)->pLruNext==0)
 #define PAGE_IS_UNPINNED(p)  ((p)->pLruNext!=0)
 
-/* Each page cache (or PCache) belongs to a PGroup.  A PGroup is a set 
+/* Each page cache (or PCache) belongs to a PGroup.  A PGroup is a set
 ** of one or more PCaches that are able to recycle each other's unpinned
 ** pages when they are under memory pressure.  A PGroup is an instance of
 ** the following object.
@@ -169,13 +169,13 @@ struct PGroup {
 ** temporary or transient database) has a single page cache which
 ** is an instance of this object.
 **
-** Pointers to structures of this type are cast and returned as 
+** Pointers to structures of this type are cast and returned as
 ** opaque sqlite3_pcache* handles.
 */
 struct PCache1 {
   /* Cache configuration parameters. Page size (szPage) and the purgeable
   ** flag (bPurgeable) and the pnPurgeable pointer are all set when the
-  ** cache is created and are never changed thereafter. nMax may be 
+  ** cache is created and are never changed thereafter. nMax may be
   ** modified at any time by a call to the pcache1Cachesize() method.
   ** The PGroup mutex must be held when accessing nMax.
   */
@@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ static SQLITE_WSD struct PCacheGlobal {
   */
   int isInit;                    /* True if initialized */
   int separateCache;             /* Use a new PGroup for each PCache */
-  int nInitPage;                 /* Initial bulk allocation size */   
+  int nInitPage;                 /* Initial bulk allocation size */
   int szSlot;                    /* Size of each free slot */
   int nSlot;                     /* The number of pcache slots */
   int nReserve;                  /* Try to keep nFreeSlot above this */
@@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ static SQLITE_WSD struct PCacheGlobal {
 
 
 /*
-** This function is called during initialization if a static buffer is 
+** This function is called during initialization if a static buffer is
 ** supplied to use for the page-cache by passing the SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE
 ** verb to sqlite3_config(). Parameter pBuf points to an allocation large
 ** enough to contain 'n' buffers of 'sz' bytes each.
@@ -334,8 +334,8 @@ static int pcache1InitBulk(PCache1 *pCache){
 
 /*
 ** Malloc function used within this file to allocate space from the buffer
-** configured using sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE) option. If no 
-** such buffer exists or there is no space left in it, this function falls 
+** configured using sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE) option. If no
+** such buffer exists or there is no space left in it, this function falls
 ** back to sqlite3Malloc().
 **
 ** Multiple threads can run this routine at the same time.  Global variables
@@ -442,7 +442,7 @@ static PgHdr1 *pcache1AllocPage(PCache1 *pCache, int benignMalloc){
   }else{
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_MEMORY_MANAGEMENT
     /* The group mutex must be released before pcache1Alloc() is called. This
-    ** is because it might call sqlite3_release_memory(), which assumes that 
+    ** is because it might call sqlite3_release_memory(), which assumes that
     ** this mutex is not held. */
     assert( pcache1.separateCache==0 );
     assert( pCache->pGroup==&pcache1.grp );
@@ -569,7 +569,7 @@ static void pcache1ResizeHash(PCache1 *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is used internally to remove the page pPage from the 
+** This function is used internally to remove the page pPage from the
 ** PGroup LRU list, if is part of it. If pPage is not part of the PGroup
 ** LRU list, then this function is a no-op.
 **
@@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ static PgHdr1 *pcache1PinPage(PgHdr1 *pPage){
 
 
 /*
-** Remove the page supplied as an argument from the hash table 
+** Remove the page supplied as an argument from the hash table
 ** (PCache1.apHash structure) that it is currently stored in.
 ** Also free the page if freePage is true.
 **
@@ -637,8 +637,8 @@ static void pcache1EnforceMaxPage(PCache1 *pCache){
 }
 
 /*
-** Discard all pages from cache pCache with a page number (key value) 
-** greater than or equal to iLimit. Any pinned pages that meet this 
+** Discard all pages from cache pCache with a page number (key value)
+** greater than or equal to iLimit. Any pinned pages that meet this
 ** criteria are unpinned before they are discarded.
 **
 ** The PCache mutex must be held when this function is called.
@@ -670,7 +670,7 @@ static void pcache1TruncateUnsafe(
     PgHdr1 **pp;
     PgHdr1 *pPage;
     assert( h<pCache->nHash );
-    pp = &pCache->apHash[h]; 
+    pp = &pCache->apHash[h];
     while( (pPage = *pp)!=0 ){
       if( pPage->iKey>=iLimit ){
         pCache->nPage--;
@@ -709,7 +709,7 @@ static int pcache1Init(void *NotUsed){
   **
   **   *  Use a unified cache in single-threaded applications that have
   **      configured a start-time buffer for use as page-cache memory using
-  **      sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE, pBuf, sz, N) with non-NULL 
+  **      sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE, pBuf, sz, N) with non-NULL
   **      pBuf argument.
   **
   **   *  Otherwise use separate caches (mode-1)
@@ -744,7 +744,7 @@ static int pcache1Init(void *NotUsed){
 
 /*
 ** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xShutdown method.
-** Note that the static mutex allocated in xInit does 
+** Note that the static mutex allocated in xInit does
 ** not need to be freed.
 */
 static void pcache1Shutdown(void *NotUsed){
@@ -807,7 +807,7 @@ static sqlite3_pcache *pcache1Create(int szPage, int szExtra, int bPurgeable){
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xCachesize method. 
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xCachesize method.
 **
 ** Configure the cache_size limit for a cache.
 */
@@ -832,7 +832,7 @@ static void pcache1Cachesize(sqlite3_pcache *p, int nMax){
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xShrink method. 
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xShrink method.
 **
 ** Free up as much memory as possible.
 */
@@ -851,7 +851,7 @@ static void pcache1Shrink(sqlite3_pcache *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xPagecount method. 
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xPagecount method.
 */
 static int pcache1Pagecount(sqlite3_pcache *p){
   int n;
@@ -872,8 +872,8 @@ static int pcache1Pagecount(sqlite3_pcache *p){
 ** for these steps, the main pcache1Fetch() procedure can run faster.
 */
 static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
-  PCache1 *pCache, 
-  unsigned int iKey, 
+  PCache1 *pCache,
+  unsigned int iKey,
   int createFlag
 ){
   unsigned int nPinned;
@@ -915,8 +915,8 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
     }
   }
 
-  /* Step 5. If a usable page buffer has still not been found, 
-  ** attempt to allocate a new one. 
+  /* Step 5. If a usable page buffer has still not been found,
+  ** attempt to allocate a new one.
   */
   if( !pPage ){
     pPage = pcache1AllocPage(pCache, createFlag==1);
@@ -941,13 +941,13 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xFetch method. 
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xFetch method.
 **
 ** Fetch a page by key value.
 **
 ** Whether or not a new page may be allocated by this function depends on
 ** the value of the createFlag argument.  0 means do not allocate a new
-** page.  1 means allocate a new page if space is easily available.  2 
+** page.  1 means allocate a new page if space is easily available.  2
 ** means to try really hard to allocate a new page.
 **
 ** For a non-purgeable cache (a cache used as the storage for an in-memory
@@ -958,7 +958,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
 ** There are three different approaches to obtaining space for a page,
 ** depending on the value of parameter createFlag (which may be 0, 1 or 2).
 **
-**   1. Regardless of the value of createFlag, the cache is searched for a 
+**   1. Regardless of the value of createFlag, the cache is searched for a
 **      copy of the requested page. If one is found, it is returned.
 **
 **   2. If createFlag==0 and the page is not already in the cache, NULL is
@@ -972,13 +972,13 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
 **           PCache1.nMax, or
 **
 **       (b) the number of pages pinned by the cache is greater than
-**           the sum of nMax for all purgeable caches, less the sum of 
+**           the sum of nMax for all purgeable caches, less the sum of
 **           nMin for all other purgeable caches, or
 **
 **   4. If none of the first three conditions apply and the cache is marked
 **      as purgeable, and if one of the following is true:
 **
-**       (a) The number of pages allocated for the cache is already 
+**       (a) The number of pages allocated for the cache is already
 **           PCache1.nMax, or
 **
 **       (b) The number of pages allocated for all purgeable caches is
@@ -990,7 +990,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
 **
 **      then attempt to recycle a page from the LRU list. If it is the right
 **      size, return the recycled buffer. Otherwise, free the buffer and
-**      proceed to step 5. 
+**      proceed to step 5.
 **
 **   5. Otherwise, allocate and return a new page buffer.
 **
@@ -1000,8 +1000,8 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
 ** invokes the appropriate routine.
 */
 static PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchNoMutex(
-  sqlite3_pcache *p, 
-  unsigned int iKey, 
+  sqlite3_pcache *p,
+  unsigned int iKey,
   int createFlag
 ){
   PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p;
@@ -1030,8 +1030,8 @@ static PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchNoMutex(
 }
 #if PCACHE1_MIGHT_USE_GROUP_MUTEX
 static PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchWithMutex(
-  sqlite3_pcache *p, 
-  unsigned int iKey, 
+  sqlite3_pcache *p,
+  unsigned int iKey,
   int createFlag
 ){
   PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p;
@@ -1045,8 +1045,8 @@ static PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchWithMutex(
 }
 #endif
 static sqlite3_pcache_page *pcache1Fetch(
-  sqlite3_pcache *p, 
-  unsigned int iKey, 
+  sqlite3_pcache *p,
+  unsigned int iKey,
   int createFlag
 ){
 #if PCACHE1_MIGHT_USE_GROUP_MUTEX || defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
@@ -1076,18 +1076,18 @@ static sqlite3_pcache_page *pcache1Fetch(
 ** Mark a page as unpinned (eligible for asynchronous recycling).
 */
 static void pcache1Unpin(
-  sqlite3_pcache *p, 
-  sqlite3_pcache_page *pPg, 
+  sqlite3_pcache *p,
+  sqlite3_pcache_page *pPg,
   int reuseUnlikely
 ){
   PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p;
   PgHdr1 *pPage = (PgHdr1 *)pPg;
   PGroup *pGroup = pCache->pGroup;
- 
+
   assert( pPage->pCache==pCache );
   pcache1EnterMutex(pGroup);
 
-  /* It is an error to call this function if the page is already 
+  /* It is an error to call this function if the page is already
   ** part of the PGroup LRU list.
   */
   assert( pPage->pLruNext==0 );
@@ -1108,7 +1108,7 @@ static void pcache1Unpin(
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xRekey method. 
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xRekey method.
 */
 static void pcache1Rekey(
   sqlite3_pcache *p,
@@ -1119,7 +1119,7 @@ static void pcache1Rekey(
   PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p;
   PgHdr1 *pPage = (PgHdr1 *)pPg;
   PgHdr1 **pp;
-  unsigned int hOld, hNew; 
+  unsigned int hOld, hNew;
   assert( pPage->iKey==iOld );
   assert( pPage->pCache==pCache );
   assert( iOld!=iNew );               /* The page number really is changing */
@@ -1147,7 +1147,7 @@ static void pcache1Rekey(
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xTruncate method. 
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xTruncate method.
 **
 ** Discard all unpinned pages in the cache with a page number equal to
 ** or greater than parameter iLimit. Any pinned pages with a page number
@@ -1164,7 +1164,7 @@ static void pcache1Truncate(sqlite3_pcache *p, unsigned int iLimit){
 }
 
 /*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xDestroy method. 
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xDestroy method.
 **
 ** Destroy a cache allocated using pcache1Create().
 */
@@ -1230,7 +1230,7 @@ sqlite3_mutex *sqlite3Pcache1Mutex(void){
 ** by the current thread may be sqlite3_free()ed.
 **
 ** nReq is the number of bytes of memory required. Once this much has
-** been released, the function returns. The return value is the total number 
+** been released, the function returns. The return value is the total number
 ** of bytes of memory released.
 */
 int sqlite3PcacheReleaseMemory(int nReq){
diff --git a/src/pragma.c b/src/pragma.c
index 68a153185..9c4d7475e 100644
--- a/src/pragma.c
+++ b/src/pragma.c
@@ -26,13 +26,13 @@
 ** that includes the PragType_XXXX macro definitions and the aPragmaName[]
 ** object.  This ensures that the aPragmaName[] table is arranged in
 ** lexicographical order to facility a binary search of the pragma name.
-** Do not edit pragma.h directly.  Edit and rerun the script in at 
+** Do not edit pragma.h directly.  Edit and rerun the script in at
 ** ../tool/mkpragmatab.tcl. */
 #include "pragma.h"
 
 /*
 ** Interpret the given string as a safety level.  Return 0 for OFF,
-** 1 for ON or NORMAL, 2 for FULL, and 3 for EXTRA.  Return 1 for an empty or 
+** 1 for ON or NORMAL, 2 for FULL, and 3 for EXTRA.  Return 1 for an empty or
 ** unrecognized string argument.  The FULL and EXTRA option is disallowed
 ** if the omitFull parameter it 1.
 **
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ static int getLockingMode(const char *z){
 /*
 ** Interpret the given string as an auto-vacuum mode value.
 **
-** The following strings, "none", "full" and "incremental" are 
+** The following strings, "none", "full" and "incremental" are
 ** acceptable, as are their numeric equivalents: 0, 1 and 2 respectively.
 */
 static int getAutoVacuum(const char *z){
@@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ static const char *actionName(u8 action){
     case OE_SetDflt:  zName = "SET DEFAULT";     break;
     case OE_Cascade:  zName = "CASCADE";         break;
     case OE_Restrict: zName = "RESTRICT";        break;
-    default:          zName = "NO ACTION";  
+    default:          zName = "NO ACTION"; 
                       assert( action==OE_None ); break;
   }
   return zName;
@@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ static void pragmaFunclistLine(
   int isBuiltin,         /* True if this is a built-in function */
   int showInternFuncs    /* True if showing internal functions */
 ){
-  u32 mask = 
+  u32 mask =
       SQLITE_DETERMINISTIC |
       SQLITE_DIRECTONLY |
       SQLITE_SUBTYPE |
@@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ static void pragmaFunclistLine(
      && showInternFuncs==0
     ){
       continue;
-    }    
+    }   
     if( p->xValue!=0 ){
       zType = "w";
     }else if( p->xFinalize!=0 ){
@@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ static int integrityCheckResultRow(Vdbe *v){
 }
 
 /*
-** Process a pragma statement.  
+** Process a pragma statement. 
 **
 ** Pragmas are of this form:
 **
@@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ static int integrityCheckResultRow(Vdbe *v){
 ** id and pId2 is any empty string.
 */
 void sqlite3Pragma(
-  Parse *pParse, 
+  Parse *pParse,
   Token *pId1,        /* First part of [schema.]id field */
   Token *pId2,        /* Second part of [schema.]id field, or NULL */
   Token *pValue,      /* Token for <value>, or NULL */
@@ -407,8 +407,8 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
   if( iDb<0 ) return;
   pDb = &db->aDb[iDb];
 
-  /* If the temp database has been explicitly named as part of the 
-  ** pragma, make sure it is open. 
+  /* If the temp database has been explicitly named as part of the
+  ** pragma, make sure it is open.
   */
   if( iDb==1 && sqlite3OpenTempDatabase(pParse) ){
     return;
@@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
   }
 
   /* Register the result column names for pragmas that return results */
-  if( (pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NoColumns)==0 
+  if( (pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NoColumns)==0
    && ((pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NoColumns1)==0 || zRight==0)
   ){
     setPragmaResultColumnNames(v, pPragma);
@@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
 
   /* Jump to the appropriate pragma handler */
   switch( pPragma->ePragTyp ){
-  
+ 
 #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_PAGER_PRAGMAS) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED)
   /*
   **  PRAGMA [schema.]default_cache_size
@@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
   **  PRAGMA [schema.]max_page_count=N
   **
   ** The first form reports the current setting for the
-  ** maximum number of pages in the database file.  The 
+  ** maximum number of pages in the database file.  The
   ** second form attempts to change this setting.  Both
   ** forms return the current setting.
   **
@@ -771,7 +771,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
       */
       rc = sqlite3BtreeSetAutoVacuum(pBt, eAuto);
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (eAuto==1 || eAuto==2) ){
-        /* When setting the auto_vacuum mode to either "full" or 
+        /* When setting the auto_vacuum mode to either "full" or
         ** "incremental", write the value of meta[6] in the database
         ** file. Before writing to meta[6], check that meta[3] indicates
         ** that this really is an auto-vacuum capable database.
@@ -854,7 +854,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
   **
   ** The first form reports the current local setting for the
   ** page cache spill size. The second form turns cache spill on
-  ** or off.  When turnning cache spill on, the size is set to the
+  ** or off.  When turning cache spill on, the size is set to the
   ** current cache_size.  The third form sets a spill size that
   ** may be different form the cache size.
   ** If N is positive then that is the
@@ -873,7 +873,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
     assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, iDb, 0) );
     if( !zRight ){
       returnSingleInt(v,
-         (db->flags & SQLITE_CacheSpill)==0 ? 0 : 
+         (db->flags & SQLITE_CacheSpill)==0 ? 0 :
             sqlite3BtreeSetSpillSize(pDb->pBt,0));
     }else{
       int size = 1;
@@ -1053,7 +1053,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
       Pager *pPager = sqlite3BtreePager(pDb->pBt);
       char *proxy_file_path = NULL;
       sqlite3_file *pFile = sqlite3PagerFile(pPager);
-      sqlite3OsFileControlHint(pFile, SQLITE_GET_LOCKPROXYFILE, 
+      sqlite3OsFileControlHint(pFile, SQLITE_GET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
                            &proxy_file_path);
       returnSingleText(v, proxy_file_path);
     }else{
@@ -1061,10 +1061,10 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
       sqlite3_file *pFile = sqlite3PagerFile(pPager);
       int res;
       if( zRight[0] ){
-        res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE, 
+        res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
                                      zRight);
       } else {
-        res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE, 
+        res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
                                      NULL);
       }
       if( res!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -1074,8 +1074,8 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
     }
     break;
   }
-#endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */      
-    
+#endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */     
+   
   /*
   **   PRAGMA [schema.]synchronous
   **   PRAGMA [schema.]synchronous=OFF|ON|NORMAL|FULL|EXTRA
@@ -1090,7 +1090,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
       returnSingleInt(v, pDb->safety_level-1);
     }else{
       if( !db->autoCommit ){
-        sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+        sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
             "Safety level may not be changed inside a transaction");
       }else if( iDb!=1 ){
         int iLevel = (getSafetyLevel(zRight,0,1)+1) & PAGER_SYNCHRONOUS_MASK;
@@ -1138,7 +1138,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
         }
       }
 
-      /* Many of the flag-pragmas modify the code generated by the SQL 
+      /* Many of the flag-pragmas modify the code generated by the SQL
       ** compiler (eg. count_changes). So add an opcode to expire all
       ** compiled SQL statements after modifying a pragma value.
       */
@@ -1465,7 +1465,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
       pFK = pTab->u.tab.pFKey;
       if( pFK ){
         int iTabDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema);
-        int i = 0; 
+        int i = 0;
         pParse->nMem = 8;
         sqlite3CodeVerifySchema(pParse, iTabDb);
         while(pFK){
@@ -1562,8 +1562,8 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
         addrOk = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse);
 
         /* Generate code to read the child key values into registers
-        ** regRow..regRow+n. If any of the child key values are NULL, this 
-        ** row cannot cause an FK violation. Jump directly to addrOk in 
+        ** regRow..regRow+n. If any of the child key values are NULL, this
+        ** row cannot cause an FK violation. Jump directly to addrOk in
         ** this case. */
         sqlite3TouchRegister(pParse, regRow + pFK->nCol);
         for(j=0; j<pFK->nCol; j++){
@@ -1629,12 +1629,12 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
   **
   ** Verify the integrity of the database.
   **
-  ** The "quick_check" is reduced version of 
+  ** The "quick_check" is reduced version of
   ** integrity_check designed to detect most database corruption
   ** without the overhead of cross-checking indexes.  Quick_check
   ** is linear time wherease integrity_check is O(NlogN).
   **
-  ** The maximum nubmer of errors is 100 by default.  A different default
+  ** The maximum number of errors is 100 by default.  A different default
   ** can be specified using a numeric parameter N.
   **
   ** Or, the parameter N can be the name of a table.  In that case, only
@@ -1770,7 +1770,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
         sqlite3OpenTableAndIndices(pParse, pTab, OP_OpenRead, 0,
                                    1, 0, &iDataCur, &iIdxCur);
         /* reg[7] counts the number of entries in the table.
-        ** reg[8+i] counts the number of entries in the i-th index 
+        ** reg[8+i] counts the number of entries in the i-th index
         */
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, 0, 7);
         for(j=0, pIdx=pTab->pIndex; pIdx; pIdx=pIdx->pNext, j++){
@@ -1795,7 +1795,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
           if( mxCol==pTab->iPKey ) mxCol--;
         }else{
           /* COLFLAG_VIRTUAL columns are not included in the WITHOUT ROWID
-          ** PK index column-count, so there is no need to account for them 
+          ** PK index column-count, so there is no need to account for them
           ** in this case. */
           mxCol = sqlite3PrimaryKeyIndex(pTab)->nColumn-1;
         }
@@ -1895,7 +1895,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
               sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, p1, p3, 3);
               jmp3 = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_NotNull, 3, labelOk);
               VdbeCoverage(v);
-            }            
+            }           
             zErr = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "NULL value in %s.%s", pTab->zName,
                                 pCol->zCnName);
             sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_String8, 0, 3, 0, zErr, P4_DYNAMIC);
@@ -1967,7 +1967,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
             for(k=pCheck->nExpr-1; k>0; k--){
               sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pParse, pCheck->a[k].pExpr, addrCkFault, 0);
             }
-            sqlite3ExprIfTrue(pParse, pCheck->a[0].pExpr, addrCkOk, 
+            sqlite3ExprIfTrue(pParse, pCheck->a[0].pExpr, addrCkOk,
                 SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL);
             sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrCkFault);
             pParse->iSelfTab = 0;
@@ -2037,7 +2037,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
               sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, jmp5-1);
               sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, jmp6);
             }
-              
+             
             /* For UNIQUE indexes, verify that only one entry exists with the
             ** current key.  The entry is unique if (1) any column is NULL
             ** or (2) the next entry has a different key */
@@ -2082,7 +2082,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
             sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, r2, pPk->nKeyCol);
           }
         }
-      } 
+      }
     }
     {
       static const int iLn = VDBE_OFFSET_LINENO(2);
@@ -2124,7 +2124,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
   ** encoding that will be used for the main database file if a new file
   ** is created. If an existing main database file is opened, then the
   ** default text encoding for the existing database is used.
-  ** 
+  **
   ** In all cases new databases created using the ATTACH command are
   ** created to use the same default text encoding as the main database. If
   ** the main database has not been initialized and/or created when ATTACH
@@ -2312,8 +2312,8 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
     if( zRight ){
       sqlite3_wal_autocheckpoint(db, sqlite3Atoi(zRight));
     }
-    returnSingleInt(v, 
-       db->xWalCallback==sqlite3WalDefaultHook ? 
+    returnSingleInt(v,
+       db->xWalCallback==sqlite3WalDefaultHook ?
            SQLITE_PTR_TO_INT(db->pWalArg) : 0);
   }
   break;
@@ -2353,7 +2353,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
   **    0x0002    Run ANALYZE on tables that might benefit.  On by default.
   **              See below for additional information.
   **
-  **    0x0004    (Not yet implemented) Record usage and performance 
+  **    0x0004    (Not yet implemented) Record usage and performance
   **              information from the current session in the
   **              database file so that it will be available to "optimize"
   **              pragmas run by future database connections.
@@ -2364,7 +2364,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
   ** The default MASK is and always shall be 0xfffe.  0xfffe means perform all
   ** of the optimizations listed above except Debug Mode, including new
   ** optimizations that have not yet been invented.  If new optimizations are
-  ** ever added that should be off by default, those off-by-default 
+  ** ever added that should be off by default, those off-by-default
   ** optimizations will have bitmasks of 0x10000 or larger.
   **
   ** DETERMINATION OF WHEN TO RUN ANALYZE
@@ -2392,7 +2392,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
     Schema *pSchema;       /* The current schema */
     Table *pTab;           /* A table in the schema */
     Index *pIdx;           /* An index of the table */
-    LogEst szThreshold;    /* Size threshold above which reanalysis is needd */
+    LogEst szThreshold;    /* Size threshold above which reanalysis needed */
     char *zSubSql;         /* SQL statement for the OP_SqlExec opcode */
     u32 opMask;            /* Mask of operations to perform */
 
@@ -2425,7 +2425,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
         }
         if( szThreshold ){
           sqlite3OpenTable(pParse, iTabCur, iDb, pTab, OP_OpenRead);
-          sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_IfSmaller, iTabCur, 
+          sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_IfSmaller, iTabCur,
                          sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+2+(opMask&1), szThreshold);
           VdbeCoverage(v);
         }
@@ -2559,7 +2559,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
       pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
       if( pBt==0 || sqlite3BtreePager(pBt)==0 ){
         zState = "closed";
-      }else if( sqlite3_file_control(db, i ? db->aDb[i].zDbSName : 0, 
+      }else if( sqlite3_file_control(db, i ? db->aDb[i].zDbSName : 0,
                                      SQLITE_FCNTL_LOCKSTATE, &j)==SQLITE_OK ){
          zState = azLockName[j];
       }
@@ -2583,7 +2583,7 @@ void sqlite3Pragma(
   /* The following block is a no-op unless SQLITE_DEBUG is defined. Its only
   ** purpose is to execute assert() statements to verify that if the
   ** PragFlg_NoColumns1 flag is set and the caller specified an argument
-  ** to the PRAGMA, the implementation has not added any OP_ResultRow 
+  ** to the PRAGMA, the implementation has not added any OP_ResultRow
   ** instructions to the VM.  */
   if( (pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NoColumns1) && zRight ){
     sqlite3VdbeVerifyNoResultRow(v);
@@ -2614,7 +2614,7 @@ struct PragmaVtabCursor {
   char *azArg[2];           /* Value of the argument and schema */
 };
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Pragma virtual table module xConnect method.
 */
 static int pragmaVtabConnect(
@@ -2676,7 +2676,7 @@ static int pragmaVtabConnect(
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Pragma virtual table module xDisconnect method.
 */
 static int pragmaVtabDisconnect(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
@@ -2774,11 +2774,11 @@ static int pragmaVtabNext(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor){
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Pragma virtual table module xFilter method.
 */
 static int pragmaVtabFilter(
-  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, 
+  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor,
   int idxNum, const char *idxStr,
   int argc, sqlite3_value **argv
 ){
@@ -2833,11 +2833,11 @@ static int pragmaVtabEof(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor){
 }
 
 /* The xColumn method simply returns the corresponding column from
-** the PRAGMA.  
+** the PRAGMA. 
 */
 static int pragmaVtabColumn(
-  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, 
-  sqlite3_context *ctx, 
+  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor,
+  sqlite3_context *ctx,
   int i
 ){
   PragmaVtabCursor *pCsr = (PragmaVtabCursor*)pVtabCursor;
@@ -2850,7 +2850,7 @@ static int pragmaVtabColumn(
   return SQLITE_OK;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Pragma virtual table module xRowid method.
 */
 static int pragmaVtabRowid(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, sqlite_int64 *p){
diff --git a/src/prepare.c b/src/prepare.c
index ff4826502..39e8dcf65 100644
--- a/src/prepare.c
+++ b/src/prepare.c
@@ -608,7 +608,7 @@ void sqlite3ParseObjectReset(Parse *pParse){
 ** immediately.
 **
 ** Use this mechanism for uncommon cleanups.  There is a higher setup
-** cost for this mechansim (an extra malloc), so it should not be used
+** cost for this mechanism (an extra malloc), so it should not be used
 ** for common cleanups that happen on most calls.  But for less
 ** common cleanups, we save a single NULL-pointer comparison in
 ** sqlite3ParseObjectReset(), which reduces the total CPU cycle count.
diff --git a/src/resolve.c b/src/resolve.c
index adfcc8dbe..5ed66ccce 100644
--- a/src/resolve.c
+++ b/src/resolve.c
@@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Bitmask sqlite3ExprColUsed(Expr *pExpr){
   pExTab = pExpr->y.pTab;
   assert( pExTab!=0 );
   if( (pExTab->tabFlags & TF_HasGenerated)!=0
-   && (pExTab->aCol[n].colFlags & COLFLAG_GENERATED)!=0 
+   && (pExTab->aCol[n].colFlags & COLFLAG_GENERATED)!=0
   ){
     testcase( pExTab->nCol==BMS-1 );
     testcase( pExTab->nCol==BMS );
@@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int isValidSchemaTableName(
 
 /*
 ** Given the name of a column of the form X.Y.Z or Y.Z or just Z, look up
-** that name in the set of source tables in pSrcList and make the pExpr 
+** that name in the set of source tables in pSrcList and make the pExpr
 ** expression node refer back to that source column.  The following changes
 ** are made to pExpr:
 **
@@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ static int lookupName(
     } /* if( pSrcList ) */
 
 #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER) || !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_UPSERT)
-    /* If we have not already resolved the name, then maybe 
+    /* If we have not already resolved the name, then maybe
     ** it is a new.* or old.* trigger argument reference.  Or
     ** maybe it is an excluded.* from an upsert.  Or maybe it is
     ** a reference in the RETURNING clause to a table being modified.
@@ -492,7 +492,7 @@ static int lookupName(
       }
 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_UPSERT */
 
-      if( pTab ){ 
+      if( pTab ){
         int iCol;
         u8 hCol = sqlite3StrIHash(zCol);
         pSchema = pTab->pSchema;
@@ -633,7 +633,7 @@ static int lookupName(
           }
           goto lookupname_end;
         }
-      } 
+      }
     }
 
     /* Advance to the next name context.  The loop will exit when either
@@ -824,7 +824,7 @@ Expr *sqlite3CreateColumnExpr(sqlite3 *db, SrcList *pSrc, int iSrc, int iCol){
 **
 ** static void notValid(
 **   Parse *pParse,       // Leave error message here
-**   NameContext *pNC,    // The name context 
+**   NameContext *pNC,    // The name context
 **   const char *zMsg,    // Type of error
 **   int validMask,       // Set of contexts for which prohibited
 **   Expr *pExpr          // Invalidate this expression on error
@@ -905,7 +905,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
 
     /* The special operator TK_ROW means use the rowid for the first
     ** column in the FROM clause.  This is used by the LIMIT and ORDER BY
-    ** clause processing on UPDATE and DELETE statements, and by 
+    ** clause processing on UPDATE and DELETE statements, and by
     ** UPDATE ... FROM statement processing.
     */
     case TK_ROW: {
@@ -941,7 +941,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
       int anRef[8];
       NameContext *p;
       int i;
-      for(i=0, p=pNC; p && i<ArraySize(anRef); p=p->pNext, i++){ 
+      for(i=0, p=pNC; p && i<ArraySize(anRef); p=p->pNext, i++){
         anRef[i] = p->nRef;
       }
       sqlite3WalkExpr(pWalker, pExpr->pLeft);
@@ -966,7 +966,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
     ** Or a database, table and column:  ID.ID.ID
     **
     ** The TK_ID and TK_OUT cases are combined so that there will only
-    ** be one call to lookupName().  Then the compiler will in-line 
+    ** be one call to lookupName().  Then the compiler will in-line
     ** lookupName() for a size reduction and performance increase.
     */
     case TK_ID:
@@ -1057,7 +1057,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
             ** to likelihood(X,0.9375). */
             /* TUNING: unlikely() probability is 0.0625.  likely() is 0.9375 */
             pExpr->iTable = pDef->zName[0]=='u' ? 8388608 : 125829120;
-          }             
+          }            
         }
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION
         {
@@ -1119,11 +1119,11 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
           || (pDef->xValue && pDef->xInverse && pDef->xSFunc && pDef->xFinalize)
         );
         if( pDef && pDef->xValue==0 && pWin ){
-          sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+          sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
               "%#T() may not be used as a window function", pExpr
           );
           pNC->nNcErr++;
-        }else if( 
+        }else if(
               (is_agg && (pNC->ncFlags & NC_AllowAgg)==0)
            || (is_agg && (pDef->funcFlags&SQLITE_FUNC_WINDOW) && !pWin)
            || (is_agg && pWin && (pNC->ncFlags & NC_AllowWin)==0)
@@ -1159,7 +1159,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
         }
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC
         else if( is_agg==0 && ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_WinFunc) ){
-          sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+          sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
               "FILTER may not be used with non-aggregate %#T()",
               pExpr
           );
@@ -1209,7 +1209,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
           }
 #endif
           pNC2 = pNC;
-          while( pNC2 
+          while( pNC2
               && sqlite3ReferencesSrcList(pParse, pExpr, pNC2->pSrcList)==0
           ){
             pExpr->op2++;
@@ -1221,7 +1221,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
             assert( SQLITE_FUNC_ANYORDER==NC_OrderAgg );
             testcase( (pDef->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_MINMAX)!=0 );
             testcase( (pDef->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_ANYORDER)!=0 );
-            pNC2->ncFlags |= NC_HasAgg 
+            pNC2->ncFlags |= NC_HasAgg
               | ((pDef->funcFlags^SQLITE_FUNC_ANYORDER)
                   & (SQLITE_FUNC_MINMAX|SQLITE_FUNC_ANYORDER));
           }
@@ -1229,7 +1229,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
         pNC->ncFlags |= savedAllowFlags;
       }
       /* FIX ME:  Compute pExpr->affinity based on the expected return
-      ** type of the function 
+      ** type of the function
       */
       return WRC_Prune;
     }
@@ -1318,7 +1318,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
         sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "row value misused");
         sqlite3RecordErrorOffsetOfExpr(pParse->db, pExpr);
       }
-      break; 
+      break;
     }
   }
   assert( pParse->db->mallocFailed==0 || pParse->nErr!=0 );
@@ -1433,7 +1433,7 @@ static void resolveOutOfRangeError(
   int mx,                /* Largest permissible value of i */
   Expr *pError           /* Associate the error with the expression */
 ){
-  sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+  sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
     "%r %s BY term out of range - should be "
     "between 1 and %d", i, zType, mx);
   sqlite3RecordErrorOffsetOfExpr(pParse->db, pError);
@@ -1499,7 +1499,7 @@ static int resolveCompoundOrderBy(
         iCol = resolveAsName(pParse, pEList, pE);
         if( iCol==0 ){
           /* Now test if expression pE matches one of the values returned
-          ** by pSelect. In the usual case this is done by duplicating the 
+          ** by pSelect. In the usual case this is done by duplicating the
           ** expression, resolving any symbols in it, and then comparing
           ** it against each expression returned by the SELECT statement.
           ** Once the comparisons are finished, the duplicate expression
@@ -1694,7 +1694,7 @@ static int resolveOrderGroupBy(
     }
     for(j=0; j<pSelect->pEList->nExpr; j++){
       if( sqlite3ExprCompare(0, pE, pSelect->pEList->a[j].pExpr, -1)==0 ){
-        /* Since this expresion is being changed into a reference
+        /* Since this expression is being changed into a reference
         ** to an identical expression in the result set, remove all Window
         ** objects belonging to the expression from the Select.pWin list. */
         windowRemoveExprFromSelect(pSelect, pE);
@@ -1718,7 +1718,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
   ExprList *pGroupBy;     /* The GROUP BY clause */
   Select *pLeftmost;      /* Left-most of SELECT of a compound */
   sqlite3 *db;            /* Database connection */
-  
+ 
 
   assert( p!=0 );
   if( p->selFlags & SF_Resolved ){
@@ -1774,7 +1774,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
       pSub->pOrderBy = p->pOrderBy;
       p->pOrderBy = 0;
     }
-  
+ 
     /* Recursively resolve names in all subqueries in the FROM clause
     */
     for(i=0; i<p->pSrc->nSrc; i++){
@@ -1801,19 +1801,19 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
         }
       }
     }
-  
+ 
     /* Set up the local name-context to pass to sqlite3ResolveExprNames() to
     ** resolve the result-set expression list.
     */
     sNC.ncFlags = NC_AllowAgg|NC_AllowWin;
     sNC.pSrcList = p->pSrc;
     sNC.pNext = pOuterNC;
-  
+ 
     /* Resolve names in the result set. */
     if( sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(&sNC, p->pEList) ) return WRC_Abort;
     sNC.ncFlags &= ~NC_AllowWin;
-  
-    /* If there are no aggregate functions in the result-set, and no GROUP BY 
+ 
+    /* If there are no aggregate functions in the result-set, and no GROUP BY
     ** expression, do not allow aggregates in any of the other expressions.
     */
     assert( (p->selFlags & SF_Aggregate)==0 );
@@ -1825,7 +1825,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
     }else{
       sNC.ncFlags &= ~NC_AllowAgg;
     }
-  
+ 
     /* Add the output column list to the name-context before parsing the
     ** other expressions in the SELECT statement. This is so that
     ** expressions in the WHERE clause (etc.) can refer to expressions by
@@ -1850,7 +1850,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
     for(i=0; i<p->pSrc->nSrc; i++){
       SrcItem *pItem = &p->pSrc->a[i];
       if( pItem->fg.isTabFunc
-       && sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(&sNC, pItem->u1.pFuncArg) 
+       && sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(&sNC, pItem->u1.pFuncArg)
       ){
         return WRC_Abort;
       }
@@ -1870,12 +1870,12 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
 #endif
 
     /* The ORDER BY and GROUP BY clauses may not refer to terms in
-    ** outer queries 
+    ** outer queries
     */
     sNC.pNext = 0;
     sNC.ncFlags |= NC_AllowAgg|NC_AllowWin;
 
-    /* If this is a converted compound query, move the ORDER BY clause from 
+    /* If this is a converted compound query, move the ORDER BY clause from
     ** the sub-query back to the parent query. At this point each term
     ** within the ORDER BY clause has been transformed to an integer value.
     ** These integers will be replaced by copies of the corresponding result
@@ -1906,13 +1906,13 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
       return WRC_Abort;
     }
     sNC.ncFlags &= ~NC_AllowWin;
-  
-    /* Resolve the GROUP BY clause.  At the same time, make sure 
+ 
+    /* Resolve the GROUP BY clause.  At the same time, make sure
     ** the GROUP BY clause does not contain aggregate functions.
     */
     if( pGroupBy ){
       struct ExprList_item *pItem;
-    
+   
       if( resolveOrderGroupBy(&sNC, p, pGroupBy, "GROUP") || db->mallocFailed ){
         return WRC_Abort;
       }
@@ -1954,7 +1954,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
 ** checking on function usage and set a flag if any aggregate functions
 ** are seen.
 **
-** To resolve table columns references we look for nodes (or subtrees) of the 
+** To resolve table columns references we look for nodes (or subtrees) of the
 ** form X.Y.Z or Y.Z or just Z where
 **
 **      X:   The name of a database.  Ex:  "main" or "temp" or
@@ -1986,7 +1986,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
 **
 **      SELECT a+b AS x, c+d AS y FROM t1 ORDER BY a+b;
 **
-** Function calls are checked to make sure that the function is 
+** Function calls are checked to make sure that the function is
 ** defined and that the correct number of arguments are specified.
 ** If the function is an aggregate function, then the NC_HasAgg flag is
 ** set and the opcode is changed from TK_FUNCTION to TK_AGG_FUNCTION.
@@ -1996,7 +1996,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
 ** An error message is left in pParse if anything is amiss.  The number
 ** if errors is returned.
 */
-int sqlite3ResolveExprNames( 
+int sqlite3ResolveExprNames(
   NameContext *pNC,       /* Namespace to resolve expressions in. */
   Expr *pExpr             /* The expression to be analyzed. */
 ){
@@ -2035,7 +2035,7 @@ int sqlite3ResolveExprNames(
 ** just like sqlite3ResolveExprNames() except that it works for an expression
 ** list rather than a single expression.
 */
-int sqlite3ResolveExprListNames( 
+int sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(
   NameContext *pNC,       /* Namespace to resolve expressions in. */
   ExprList *pList         /* The expression list to be analyzed. */
 ){
@@ -2081,7 +2081,7 @@ int sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(
 
 /*
 ** Resolve all names in all expressions of a SELECT and in all
-** decendents of the SELECT, including compounds off of p->pPrior,
+** descendants of the SELECT, including compounds off of p->pPrior,
 ** subqueries in expressions, and subqueries used as FROM clause
 ** terms.
 **
diff --git a/src/rowset.c b/src/rowset.c
index 0562320ab..5956cb2ad 100644
--- a/src/rowset.c
+++ b/src/rowset.c
@@ -35,14 +35,14 @@
 ** extracts the least value from the RowSet.
 **
 ** The INSERT primitive might allocate additional memory.  Memory is
-** allocated in chunks so most INSERTs do no allocation.  There is an 
+** allocated in chunks so most INSERTs do no allocation.  There is an
 ** upper bound on the size of allocated memory.  No memory is freed
 ** until DESTROY.
 **
 ** The TEST primitive includes a "batch" number.  The TEST primitive
 ** will only see elements that were inserted before the last change
 ** in the batch number.  In other words, if an INSERT occurs between
-** two TESTs where the TESTs have the same batch nubmer, then the
+** two TESTs where the TESTs have the same batch number, then the
 ** value added by the INSERT will not be visible to the second TEST.
 ** The initial batch number is zero, so if the very first TEST contains
 ** a non-zero batch number, it will see all prior INSERTs.
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@
 ** in the list, pLeft points to the tree, and v is unused.  The
 ** RowSet.pForest value points to the head of this forest list.
 */
-struct RowSetEntry {            
+struct RowSetEntry {           
   i64 v;                        /* ROWID value for this entry */
   struct RowSetEntry *pRight;   /* Right subtree (larger entries) or list */
   struct RowSetEntry *pLeft;    /* Left subtree (smaller entries) */
@@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ void sqlite3RowSetInsert(RowSet *p, i64 rowid){
 /*
 ** Merge two lists of RowSetEntry objects.  Remove duplicates.
 **
-** The input lists are connected via pRight pointers and are 
+** The input lists are connected via pRight pointers and are
 ** assumed to each already be in sorted order.
 */
 static struct RowSetEntry *rowSetEntryMerge(
@@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ static struct RowSetEntry *rowSetEntryMerge(
 /*
 ** Sort all elements on the list of RowSetEntry objects into order of
 ** increasing v.
-*/ 
+*/
 static struct RowSetEntry *rowSetEntrySort(struct RowSetEntry *pIn){
   unsigned int i;
   struct RowSetEntry *pNext, *aBucket[40];
@@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ static struct RowSetEntry *rowSetNDeepTree(
   struct RowSetEntry *pLeft;     /* Left subtree */
   if( *ppList==0 ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-TRUE*/
     /* Prevent unnecessary deep recursion when we run out of entries */
-    return 0; 
+    return 0;
   }
   if( iDepth>1 ){   /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-TRUE*/
     /* This branch causes a *balanced* tree to be generated.  A valid tree
diff --git a/src/select.c b/src/select.c
index 4e7870365..388c856a8 100644
--- a/src/select.c
+++ b/src/select.c
@@ -231,8 +231,8 @@ static Select *findRightmost(Select *p){
 **     NATURAL  FULL       -                 JT_NATURAL|JT_LEFT|JT_RIGHT
 **     NATURAL  FULL     OUTER               JT_NATRUAL|JT_LEFT|JT_RIGHT
 **
-** To preserve historical compatibly, SQLite also accepts a variety 
-** of other non-standard and in many cases non-sensical join types.
+** To preserve historical compatibly, SQLite also accepts a variety
+** of other non-standard and in many cases nonsensical join types.
 ** This routine makes as much sense at it can from the nonsense join
 ** type and returns a result.  Examples of accepted nonsense join types
 ** include but are not limited to:
@@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ int sqlite3JoinType(Parse *pParse, Token *pA, Token *pB, Token *pC){
   for(i=0; i<3 && apAll[i]; i++){
     p = apAll[i];
     for(j=0; j<ArraySize(aKeyword); j++){
-      if( p->n==aKeyword[j].nChar 
+      if( p->n==aKeyword[j].nChar
           && sqlite3StrNICmp((char*)p->z, &zKeyText[aKeyword[j].i], p->n)==0 ){
         jointype |= aKeyword[j].code;
         break;
@@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ static int tableAndColumnIndex(
 
   for(i=iStart; i<=iEnd; i++){
     iCol = sqlite3ColumnIndex(pSrc->a[i].pTab, zCol);
-    if( iCol>=0 
+    if( iCol>=0
      && (bIgnoreHidden==0 || IsHiddenColumn(&pSrc->a[i].pTab->aCol[iCol])==0)
     ){
       if( piTab ){
@@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ void sqlite3SetJoinExpr(Expr *p, int iTable, u32 joinFlag){
     }
     sqlite3SetJoinExpr(p->pLeft, iTable, joinFlag);
     p = p->pRight;
-  } 
+  }
 }
 
 /* Undo the work of sqlite3SetJoinExpr().  This is used when a LEFT JOIN
@@ -463,7 +463,7 @@ static void unsetJoinExpr(Expr *p, int iTable, int nullable){
     }
     unsetJoinExpr(p->pLeft, iTable, nullable);
     p = p->pRight;
-  } 
+  }
 }
 
 /*
@@ -503,7 +503,7 @@ static int sqlite3ProcessJoin(Parse *pParse, Select *p){
     if( NEVER(pLeft->pTab==0 || pRightTab==0) ) continue;
     joinType = (pRight->fg.jointype & JT_OUTER)!=0 ? EP_OuterON : EP_InnerON;
 
-    /* If this is a NATURAL join, synthesize an approprate USING clause
+    /* If this is a NATURAL join, synthesize an appropriate USING clause
     ** to specify which columns should be joined.
     */
     if( pRight->fg.jointype & JT_NATURAL ){
@@ -536,7 +536,7 @@ static int sqlite3ProcessJoin(Parse *pParse, Select *p){
     }
 
     /* Create extra terms on the WHERE clause for each column named
-    ** in the USING clause.  Example: If the two tables to be joined are 
+    ** in the USING clause.  Example: If the two tables to be joined are
     ** A and B and the USING clause names X, Y, and Z, then add this
     ** to the WHERE clause:    A.X=B.X AND A.Y=B.Y AND A.Z=B.Z
     ** Report an error if any column mentioned in the USING clause is
@@ -718,8 +718,8 @@ static void pushOntoSorter(
   **       case regData==regOrigData.
   **   (3) Some output columns are omitted from the sort record due to
   **       the SQLITE_ENABLE_SORTER_REFERENCES optimization, or due to the
-  **       SQLITE_ECEL_OMITREF optimization, or due to the 
-  **       SortCtx.pDeferredRowLoad optimiation.  In any of these cases
+  **       SQLITE_ECEL_OMITREF optimization, or due to the
+  **       SortCtx.pDeferredRowLoad optimization.  In any of these cases
   **       regOrigData is 0 to prevent this routine from trying to copy
   **       values that might not yet exist.
   */
@@ -760,7 +760,7 @@ static void pushOntoSorter(
     pParse->nMem += pSort->nOBSat;
     nKey = nExpr - pSort->nOBSat + bSeq;
     if( bSeq ){
-      addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_IfNot, regBase+nExpr); 
+      addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_IfNot, regBase+nExpr);
     }else{
       addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_SequenceTest, pSort->iECursor);
     }
@@ -775,7 +775,7 @@ static void pushOntoSorter(
     testcase( pKI->nAllField > pKI->nKeyField+2 );
     pOp->p4.pKeyInfo = sqlite3KeyInfoFromExprList(pParse,pSort->pOrderBy,nOBSat,
                                            pKI->nAllField-pKI->nKeyField-1);
-    pOp = 0; /* Ensure pOp not used after sqltie3VdbeAddOp3() */
+    pOp = 0; /* Ensure pOp not used after sqlite3VdbeAddOp3() */
     addrJmp = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
     sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Jump, addrJmp+1, 0, addrJmp+1); VdbeCoverage(v);
     pSort->labelBkOut = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse);
@@ -794,10 +794,10 @@ static void pushOntoSorter(
     /* At this point the values for the new sorter entry are stored
     ** in an array of registers. They need to be composed into a record
     ** and inserted into the sorter if either (a) there are currently
-    ** less than LIMIT+OFFSET items or (b) the new record is smaller than 
+    ** less than LIMIT+OFFSET items or (b) the new record is smaller than
     ** the largest record currently in the sorter. If (b) is true and there
     ** are already LIMIT+OFFSET items in the sorter, delete the largest
-    ** entry before inserting the new one. This way there are never more 
+    ** entry before inserting the new one. This way there are never more
     ** than LIMIT+OFFSET items in the sorter.
     **
     ** If the new record does not need to be inserted into the sorter,
@@ -885,10 +885,10 @@ static void codeOffset(
 **     In this case it has already been determined that the rows are distinct.
 **     No special action is required. The return value is zero.
 **
-** Parameter pEList is the list of expressions used to generated the 
-** contents of each row. It is used by this routine to determine (a) 
-** how many elements there are in the array of registers and (b) the 
-** collation sequences that should be used for the comparisons if 
+** Parameter pEList is the list of expressions used to generated the
+** contents of each row. It is used by this routine to determine (a)
+** how many elements there are in the array of registers and (b) the
+** collation sequences that should be used for the comparisons if
 ** eTnctType is WHERE_DISTINCT_ORDERED.
 */
 static int codeDistinct(
@@ -990,7 +990,7 @@ static void fixDistinctOpenEph(
       sqlite3VdbeChangeToNoop(v, iOpenEphAddr+1);
     }
     if( eTnctType==WHERE_DISTINCT_ORDERED ){
-      /* Change the OP_OpenEphemeral to an OP_Null that sets the MEM_Cleared 
+      /* Change the OP_OpenEphemeral to an OP_Null that sets the MEM_Cleared
       ** bit on the first register of the previous value.  This will cause the
       ** OP_Ne added in codeDistinct() to always fail on the first iteration of
       ** the loop even if the first row is all NULLs.  */
@@ -1005,8 +1005,8 @@ static void fixDistinctOpenEph(
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SORTER_REFERENCES
 /*
 ** This function is called as part of inner-loop generation for a SELECT
-** statement with an ORDER BY that is not optimized by an index. It 
-** determines the expressions, if any, that the sorter-reference 
+** statement with an ORDER BY that is not optimized by an index. It
+** determines the expressions, if any, that the sorter-reference
 ** optimization should be used for. The sorter-reference optimization
 ** is used for SELECT queries like:
 **
@@ -1016,11 +1016,11 @@ static void fixDistinctOpenEph(
 ** storing values read from that column in the sorter records, the PK of
 ** the row from table t1 is stored instead. Then, as records are extracted from
 ** the sorter to return to the user, the required value of bigblob is
-** retrieved directly from table t1. If the values are very large, this 
+** retrieved directly from table t1. If the values are very large, this
 ** can be more efficient than storing them directly in the sorter records.
 **
-** The ExprList_item.fg.bSorterRef flag is set for each expression in pEList 
-** for which the sorter-reference optimization should be enabled. 
+** The ExprList_item.fg.bSorterRef flag is set for each expression in pEList
+** for which the sorter-reference optimization should be enabled.
 ** Additionally, the pSort->aDefer[] array is populated with entries
 ** for all cursors required to evaluate all selected expressions. Finally.
 ** output variable (*ppExtra) is set to an expression list containing
@@ -1094,7 +1094,7 @@ static void selectExprDefer(
 **
 ** If srcTab is negative, then the p->pEList expressions
 ** are evaluated in order to get the data for this row.  If srcTab is
-** zero or more, then data is pulled from srcTab and p->pEList is used only 
+** zero or more, then data is pulled from srcTab and p->pEList is used only
 ** to get the number of columns and the collation sequence for each column.
 */
 static void selectInnerLoop(
@@ -1176,8 +1176,8 @@ static void selectInnerLoop(
     }
     if( pSort && hasDistinct==0 && eDest!=SRT_EphemTab && eDest!=SRT_Table ){
       /* For each expression in p->pEList that is a copy of an expression in
-      ** the ORDER BY clause (pSort->pOrderBy), set the associated 
-      ** iOrderByCol value to one more than the index of the ORDER BY 
+      ** the ORDER BY clause (pSort->pOrderBy), set the associated
+      ** iOrderByCol value to one more than the index of the ORDER BY
       ** expression within the sort-key that pushOntoSorter() will generate.
       ** This allows the p->pEList field to be omitted from the sorted record,
       ** saving space and CPU cycles.  */
@@ -1193,7 +1193,7 @@ static void selectInnerLoop(
       selectExprDefer(pParse, pSort, p->pEList, &pExtra);
       if( pExtra && pParse->db->mallocFailed==0 ){
         /* If there are any extra PK columns to add to the sorter records,
-        ** allocate extra memory cells and adjust the OpenEphemeral 
+        ** allocate extra memory cells and adjust the OpenEphemeral
         ** instruction to account for the larger records. This is only
         ** required if there are one or more WITHOUT ROWID tables with
         ** composite primary keys in the SortCtx.aDefer[] array.  */
@@ -1223,7 +1223,7 @@ static void selectInnerLoop(
       testcase( eDest==SRT_Mem );
       testcase( eDest==SRT_Coroutine );
       testcase( eDest==SRT_Output );
-      assert( eDest==SRT_Set || eDest==SRT_Mem 
+      assert( eDest==SRT_Set || eDest==SRT_Mem
            || eDest==SRT_Coroutine || eDest==SRT_Output
            || eDest==SRT_Upfrom );
     }
@@ -1235,7 +1235,7 @@ static void selectInnerLoop(
     if( pExtra ) nResultCol += pExtra->nExpr;
 #endif
     if( p->iLimit
-     && (ecelFlags & SQLITE_ECEL_OMITREF)!=0 
+     && (ecelFlags & SQLITE_ECEL_OMITREF)!=0
      && nPrefixReg>0
     ){
       assert( pSort!=0 );
@@ -1366,7 +1366,7 @@ static void selectInnerLoop(
       }else{
         int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
         assert( sqlite3Strlen30(pDest->zAffSdst)==nResultCol );
-        sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, regResult, nResultCol, 
+        sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, regResult, nResultCol,
             r1, pDest->zAffSdst, nResultCol);
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_IdxInsert, iParm, r1, regResult, nResultCol);
         sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, r1);
@@ -1384,7 +1384,7 @@ static void selectInnerLoop(
     }
 
     /* If this is a scalar select that is part of an expression, then
-    ** store the results in the appropriate memory cell or array of 
+    ** store the results in the appropriate memory cell or array of
     ** memory cells and break out of the scan loop.
     */
     case SRT_Mem: {
@@ -1439,7 +1439,7 @@ static void selectInnerLoop(
         /* If the destination is DistQueue, then cursor (iParm+1) is open
         ** on a second ephemeral index that holds all values every previously
         ** added to the queue. */
-        addrTest = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, iParm+1, 0, 
+        addrTest = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, iParm+1, 0,
                                         regResult, nResultCol);
         VdbeCoverage(v);
       }
@@ -1659,7 +1659,7 @@ static void generateSortTail(
   int addrExplain;                /* Address of OP_Explain instruction */
 #endif
 
-  ExplainQueryPlan2(addrExplain, (pParse, 0, 
+  ExplainQueryPlan2(addrExplain, (pParse, 0,
         "USE TEMP B-TREE FOR %sORDER BY", pSort->nOBSat>0?"RIGHT PART OF ":"")
   );
   sqlite3VdbeScanStatusRange(v, addrExplain,pSort->addrPush,pSort->addrPushEnd);
@@ -1706,7 +1706,7 @@ static void generateSortTail(
     if( pSort->labelBkOut ){
       addrOnce = sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Once); VdbeCoverage(v);
     }
-    sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_OpenPseudo, iSortTab, regSortOut, 
+    sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_OpenPseudo, iSortTab, regSortOut,
         nKey+1+nColumn+nRefKey);
     if( addrOnce ) sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrOnce);
     addr = 1 + sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SorterSort, iTab, addrBreak);
@@ -1742,7 +1742,7 @@ static void generateSortTail(
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_NullRow, iCsr);
       if( HasRowid(pTab) ){
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, iSortTab, iKey++, regKey);
-        sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SeekRowid, iCsr, 
+        sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SeekRowid, iCsr,
             sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+1, regKey);
       }else{
         int k;
@@ -1812,7 +1812,7 @@ static void generateSortTail(
       break;
     }
     default: {
-      assert( eDest==SRT_Output || eDest==SRT_Coroutine ); 
+      assert( eDest==SRT_Output || eDest==SRT_Coroutine );
       testcase( eDest==SRT_Output );
       testcase( eDest==SRT_Coroutine );
       if( eDest==SRT_Output ){
@@ -1852,14 +1852,14 @@ static void generateSortTail(
 ** original CREATE TABLE statement if the expression is a column. The
 ** declaration type for a ROWID field is INTEGER. Exactly when an expression
 ** is considered a column can be complex in the presence of subqueries. The
-** result-set expression in all of the following SELECT statements is 
+** result-set expression in all of the following SELECT statements is
 ** considered a column by this function.
 **
 **   SELECT col FROM tbl;
 **   SELECT (SELECT col FROM tbl;
 **   SELECT (SELECT col FROM tbl);
 **   SELECT abc FROM (SELECT col AS abc FROM tbl);
-** 
+**
 ** The declaration type for any expression other than a column is NULL.
 **
 ** This routine has either 3 or 6 parameters depending on whether or not
@@ -1871,7 +1871,7 @@ static void generateSortTail(
 # define columnType(A,B,C,D,E) columnTypeImpl(A,B)
 #endif
 static const char *columnTypeImpl(
-  NameContext *pNC, 
+  NameContext *pNC,
 #ifndef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA
   Expr *pExpr
 #else
@@ -1914,19 +1914,19 @@ static const char *columnTypeImpl(
       if( pTab==0 ){
         /* At one time, code such as "SELECT new.x" within a trigger would
         ** cause this condition to run.  Since then, we have restructured how
-        ** trigger code is generated and so this condition is no longer 
+        ** trigger code is generated and so this condition is no longer
         ** possible. However, it can still be true for statements like
         ** the following:
         **
         **   CREATE TABLE t1(col INTEGER);
         **   SELECT (SELECT t1.col) FROM FROM t1;
         **
-        ** when columnType() is called on the expression "t1.col" in the 
+        ** when columnType() is called on the expression "t1.col" in the
         ** sub-select. In this case, set the column type to NULL, even
         ** though it should really be "INTEGER".
         **
         ** This is not a problem, as the column type of "t1.col" is never
-        ** used. When columnType() is called on the expression 
+        ** used. When columnType() is called on the expression
         ** "(SELECT t1.col)", the correct type is returned (see the TK_SELECT
         ** branch below.  */
         break;
@@ -1944,9 +1944,9 @@ static const char *columnTypeImpl(
 #else
          && ALWAYS(iCol>=0)
 #endif
-        ){ 
+        ){
           /* If iCol is less than zero, then the expression requests the
-          ** rowid of the sub-select or view. This expression is legal (see 
+          ** rowid of the sub-select or view. This expression is legal (see
           ** test case misc2.2.2) - it always evaluates to NULL.
           */
           NameContext sNC;
@@ -1954,7 +1954,7 @@ static const char *columnTypeImpl(
           sNC.pSrcList = pS->pSrc;
           sNC.pNext = pNC;
           sNC.pParse = pNC->pParse;
-          zType = columnType(&sNC, p,&zOrigDb,&zOrigTab,&zOrigCol); 
+          zType = columnType(&sNC, p,&zOrigDb,&zOrigTab,&zOrigCol);
         }
       }else{
         /* A real table or a CTE table */
@@ -2000,13 +2000,13 @@ static const char *columnTypeImpl(
       sNC.pSrcList = pS->pSrc;
       sNC.pNext = pNC;
       sNC.pParse = pNC->pParse;
-      zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOrigDb, &zOrigTab, &zOrigCol); 
+      zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOrigDb, &zOrigTab, &zOrigCol);
       break;
     }
 #endif
   }
 
-#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA  
+#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA 
   if( pzOrigDb ){
     assert( pzOrigTab && pzOrigCol );
     *pzOrigDb = zOrigDb;
@@ -2042,7 +2042,7 @@ static void generateColumnTypes(
     const char *zOrigCol = 0;
     zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOrigDb, &zOrigTab, &zOrigCol);
 
-    /* The vdbe must make its own copy of the column-type and other 
+    /* The vdbe must make its own copy of the column-type and other
     ** column specific strings, in case the schema is reset before this
     ** virtual machine is deleted.
     */
@@ -2294,7 +2294,7 @@ int sqlite3ColumnsFromExprList(
 ** kind (maybe a parenthesized subquery in the FROM clause of a larger
 ** query, or a VIEW, or a CTE).  This routine computes type information
 ** for that Table object based on the Select object that implements the
-** subquery.  For the purposes of this routine, "type infomation" means:
+** subquery.  For the purposes of this routine, "type information" means:
 **
 **    *   The datatype name, as it might appear in a CREATE TABLE statement
 **    *   Which collating sequence to use for the column
@@ -2438,9 +2438,9 @@ Vdbe *sqlite3GetVdbe(Parse *pParse){
 ** Compute the iLimit and iOffset fields of the SELECT based on the
 ** pLimit expressions.  pLimit->pLeft and pLimit->pRight hold the expressions
 ** that appear in the original SQL statement after the LIMIT and OFFSET
-** keywords.  Or NULL if those keywords are omitted. iLimit and iOffset 
-** are the integer memory register numbers for counters used to compute 
-** the limit and offset.  If there is no limit and/or offset, then 
+** keywords.  Or NULL if those keywords are omitted. iLimit and iOffset
+** are the integer memory register numbers for counters used to compute
+** the limit and offset.  If there is no limit and/or offset, then
 ** iLimit and iOffset are negative.
 **
 ** This routine changes the values of iLimit and iOffset only if
@@ -2466,7 +2466,7 @@ static void computeLimitRegisters(Parse *pParse, Select *p, int iBreak){
 
   if( p->iLimit ) return;
 
-  /* 
+  /*
   ** "LIMIT -1" always shows all rows.  There is some
   ** controversy about what the correct behavior should be.
   ** The current implementation interprets "LIMIT 0" to mean
@@ -2594,7 +2594,7 @@ static KeyInfo *multiSelectOrderByKeyInfo(Parse *pParse, Select *p, int nExtra){
 ** inserted into the Queue table.  The iDistinct table keeps a copy of all rows
 ** that have ever been inserted into Queue and causes duplicates to be
 ** discarded.  If the operator is UNION ALL, then duplicates are allowed.
-** 
+**
 ** If the query has an ORDER BY, then entries in the Queue table are kept in
 ** ORDER BY order and the first entry is extracted for each cycle.  Without
 ** an ORDER BY, the Queue table is just a FIFO.
@@ -2623,7 +2623,7 @@ static void generateWithRecursiveQuery(
   int iQueue;                   /* The Queue table */
   int iDistinct = 0;            /* To ensure unique results if UNION */
   int eDest = SRT_Fifo;         /* How to write to Queue */
-  SelectDest destQueue;         /* SelectDest targetting the Queue table */
+  SelectDest destQueue;         /* SelectDest targeting the Queue table */
   int i;                        /* Loop counter */
   int rc;                       /* Result code */
   ExprList *pOrderBy;           /* The ORDER BY clause */
@@ -2831,7 +2831,7 @@ static int hasAnchor(Select *p){
 **
 ** "p" points to the right-most of the two queries.  the query on the
 ** left is p->pPrior.  The left query could also be a compound query
-** in which case this routine will be called recursively. 
+** in which case this routine will be called recursively.
 **
 ** The results of the total query are to be written into a destination
 ** of type eDest with parameter iParm.
@@ -2959,7 +2959,7 @@ static int multiSelect(
         p->nSelectRow = sqlite3LogEstAdd(p->nSelectRow, pPrior->nSelectRow);
         if( p->pLimit
          && sqlite3ExprIsInteger(p->pLimit->pLeft, &nLimit)
-         && nLimit>0 && p->nSelectRow > sqlite3LogEst((u64)nLimit) 
+         && nLimit>0 && p->nSelectRow > sqlite3LogEst((u64)nLimit)
         ){
           p->nSelectRow = sqlite3LogEst((u64)nLimit);
         }
@@ -2976,7 +2976,7 @@ static int multiSelect(
         Expr *pLimit;    /* Saved values of p->nLimit  */
         int addr;
         SelectDest uniondest;
-  
+ 
         testcase( p->op==TK_EXCEPT );
         testcase( p->op==TK_UNION );
         priorOp = SRT_Union;
@@ -2998,8 +2998,8 @@ static int multiSelect(
           findRightmost(p)->selFlags |= SF_UsesEphemeral;
           assert( p->pEList );
         }
-          
-  
+         
+ 
         /* Code the SELECT statements to our left
         */
         assert( !pPrior->pOrderBy );
@@ -3009,7 +3009,7 @@ static int multiSelect(
         if( rc ){
           goto multi_select_end;
         }
-  
+ 
         /* Code the current SELECT statement
         */
         if( p->op==TK_EXCEPT ){
@@ -3038,7 +3038,7 @@ static int multiSelect(
         p->pLimit = pLimit;
         p->iLimit = 0;
         p->iOffset = 0;
-  
+ 
         /* Convert the data in the temporary table into whatever form
         ** it is that we currently need.
         */
@@ -3067,7 +3067,7 @@ static int multiSelect(
         int addr;
         SelectDest intersectdest;
         int r1;
-  
+ 
         /* INTERSECT is different from the others since it requires
         ** two temporary tables.  Hence it has its own case.  Begin
         ** by allocating the tables we will need.
@@ -3075,13 +3075,13 @@ static int multiSelect(
         tab1 = pParse->nTab++;
         tab2 = pParse->nTab++;
         assert( p->pOrderBy==0 );
-  
+ 
         addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, tab1, 0);
         assert( p->addrOpenEphm[0] == -1 );
         p->addrOpenEphm[0] = addr;
         findRightmost(p)->selFlags |= SF_UsesEphemeral;
         assert( p->pEList );
-  
+ 
         /* Code the SELECTs to our left into temporary table "tab1".
         */
         sqlite3SelectDestInit(&intersectdest, SRT_Union, tab1);
@@ -3090,7 +3090,7 @@ static int multiSelect(
         if( rc ){
           goto multi_select_end;
         }
-  
+ 
         /* Code the current SELECT into temporary table "tab2"
         */
         addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, tab2, 0);
@@ -3112,7 +3112,7 @@ static int multiSelect(
         }
         sqlite3ExprDelete(db, p->pLimit);
         p->pLimit = pLimit;
-  
+ 
         /* Generate code to take the intersection of the two temporary
         ** tables.
         */
@@ -3137,7 +3137,7 @@ static int multiSelect(
         break;
       }
     }
-  
+ 
   #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_EXPLAIN
     if( p->pNext==0 ){
       ExplainQueryPlanPop(pParse);
@@ -3145,8 +3145,8 @@ static int multiSelect(
   #endif
   }
   if( pParse->nErr ) goto multi_select_end;
-  
-  /* Compute collating sequences used by 
+ 
+  /* Compute collating sequences used by
   ** temporary tables needed to implement the compound select.
   ** Attach the KeyInfo structure to all temporary tables.
   **
@@ -3223,7 +3223,7 @@ void sqlite3SelectWrongNumTermsError(Parse *pParse, Select *p){
 
 /*
 ** Code an output subroutine for a coroutine implementation of a
-** SELECT statment.
+** SELECT statement.
 **
 ** The data to be output is contained in pIn->iSdst.  There are
 ** pIn->nSdst columns to be output.  pDest is where the output should
@@ -3258,7 +3258,7 @@ static int generateOutputSubroutine(
   addr = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
   iContinue = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse);
 
-  /* Suppress duplicates for UNION, EXCEPT, and INTERSECT 
+  /* Suppress duplicates for UNION, EXCEPT, and INTERSECT
   */
   if( regPrev ){
     int addr1, addr2;
@@ -3300,7 +3300,7 @@ static int generateOutputSubroutine(
       int r1;
       testcase( pIn->nSdst>1 );
       r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
-      sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, pIn->iSdst, pIn->nSdst, 
+      sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, pIn->iSdst, pIn->nSdst,
           r1, pDest->zAffSdst, pIn->nSdst);
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_IdxInsert, pDest->iSDParm, r1,
                            pIn->iSdst, pIn->nSdst);
@@ -3338,7 +3338,7 @@ static int generateOutputSubroutine(
     ** SRT_Output.  This routine is never called with any other
     ** destination other than the ones handled above or SRT_Output.
     **
-    ** For SRT_Output, results are stored in a sequence of registers.  
+    ** For SRT_Output, results are stored in a sequence of registers. 
     ** Then the OP_ResultRow opcode is used to cause sqlite3_step() to
     ** return the next row of result.
     */
@@ -3395,7 +3395,7 @@ static int generateOutputSubroutine(
 **
 **    EofB:    Called when data is exhausted from selectB.
 **
-** The implementation of the latter five subroutines depend on which 
+** The implementation of the latter five subroutines depend on which
 ** <operator> is used:
 **
 **
@@ -3445,7 +3445,7 @@ static int generateOutputSubroutine(
 **
 ** We call AltB, AeqB, AgtB, EofA, and EofB "subroutines" but they are not
 ** actually called using Gosub and they do not Return.  EofA and EofB loop
-** until all data is exhausted then jump to the "end" labe.  AltB, AeqB,
+** until all data is exhausted then jump to the "end" label.  AltB, AeqB,
 ** and AgtB jump to either L2 or to one of EofA or EofB.
 */
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_COMPOUND_SELECT
@@ -3482,7 +3482,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
   int savedOffset;      /* Saved value of p->iOffset */
   int labelCmpr;        /* Label for the start of the merge algorithm */
   int labelEnd;         /* Label for the end of the overall SELECT stmt */
-  int addr1;            /* Jump instructions that get retargetted */
+  int addr1;            /* Jump instructions that get retargeted */
   int op;               /* One of TK_ALL, TK_UNION, TK_EXCEPT, TK_INTERSECT */
   KeyInfo *pKeyDup = 0; /* Comparison information for duplicate removal */
   KeyInfo *pKeyMerge;   /* Comparison information for merging rows */
@@ -3502,7 +3502,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
 
   /* Patch up the ORDER BY clause
   */
-  op = p->op;  
+  op = p->op; 
   assert( p->pPrior->pOrderBy==0 );
   pOrderBy = p->pOrderBy;
   assert( pOrderBy );
@@ -3574,7 +3574,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
       }
     }
   }
- 
+
   /* Separate the left and the right query from one another
   */
   nSelect = 1;
@@ -3637,7 +3637,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
   sqlite3VdbeEndCoroutine(v, regAddrA);
   sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr1);
 
-  /* Generate a coroutine to evaluate the SELECT statement on 
+  /* Generate a coroutine to evaluate the SELECT statement on
   ** the right - the "B" select
   */
   addrSelectB = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v) + 1;
@@ -3646,7 +3646,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
   savedLimit = p->iLimit;
   savedOffset = p->iOffset;
   p->iLimit = regLimitB;
-  p->iOffset = 0;  
+  p->iOffset = 0; 
   ExplainQueryPlan((pParse, 1, "RIGHT"));
   sqlite3Select(pParse, p, &destB);
   p->iLimit = savedLimit;
@@ -3660,7 +3660,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
   addrOutA = generateOutputSubroutine(pParse,
                  p, &destA, pDest, regOutA,
                  regPrev, pKeyDup, labelEnd);
-  
+ 
   /* Generate a subroutine that outputs the current row of the B
   ** select as the next output row of the compound select.
   */
@@ -3677,7 +3677,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
   */
   if( op==TK_EXCEPT || op==TK_INTERSECT ){
     addrEofA_noB = addrEofA = labelEnd;
-  }else{  
+  }else{ 
     VdbeNoopComment((v, "eof-A subroutine"));
     addrEofA = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, regOutB, addrOutB);
     addrEofA_noB = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Yield, regAddrB, labelEnd);
@@ -3692,7 +3692,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
   if( op==TK_INTERSECT ){
     addrEofB = addrEofA;
     if( p->nSelectRow > pPrior->nSelectRow ) p->nSelectRow = pPrior->nSelectRow;
-  }else{  
+  }else{ 
     VdbeNoopComment((v, "eof-B subroutine"));
     addrEofB = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, regOutA, addrOutA);
     sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Yield, regAddrA, labelEnd); VdbeCoverage(v);
@@ -3752,7 +3752,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
   /* Make arrangements to free the 2nd and subsequent arms of the compound
   ** after the parse has finished */
   if( pSplit->pPrior ){
-    sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pParse, 
+    sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pParse,
        (void(*)(sqlite3*,void*))sqlite3SelectDelete, pSplit->pPrior);
   }
   pSplit->pPrior = pPrior;
@@ -3819,13 +3819,13 @@ static void substSelect(SubstContext*, Select*, int);
 /*
 ** Scan through the expression pExpr.  Replace every reference to
 ** a column in table number iTable with a copy of the iColumn-th
-** entry in pEList.  (But leave references to the ROWID column 
+** entry in pEList.  (But leave references to the ROWID column
 ** unchanged.)
 **
 ** This routine is part of the flattening procedure.  A subquery
 ** whose result set is defined by pEList appears as entry in the
 ** FROM clause of a SELECT such that the VDBE cursor assigned to that
-** FORM clause entry is iTable.  This routine makes the necessary 
+** FORM clause entry is iTable.  This routine makes the necessary
 ** changes to pExpr so that it refers directly to the source table
 ** of the subquery rather the result set of the subquery.
 */
@@ -4005,7 +4005,7 @@ static void recomputeColumnsUsed(
 #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY) || !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW)
 /*
 ** Assign new cursor numbers to each of the items in pSrc. For each
-** new cursor number assigned, set an entry in the aCsrMap[] array 
+** new cursor number assigned, set an entry in the aCsrMap[] array
 ** to map the old cursor number to the new:
 **
 **     aCsrMap[iOld+1] = iNew;
@@ -4067,10 +4067,10 @@ static int renumberCursorsCb(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
 
 /*
 ** Assign a new cursor number to each cursor in the FROM clause (Select.pSrc)
-** of the SELECT statement passed as the second argument, and to each 
+** of the SELECT statement passed as the second argument, and to each
 ** cursor in the FROM clause of any FROM clause sub-selects, recursively.
 ** Except, do not assign a new cursor number to the iExcept'th element in
-** the FROM clause of (*p). Update all expressions and other references 
+** the FROM clause of (*p). Update all expressions and other references
 ** to refer to the new cursor numbers.
 **
 ** Argument aCsrMap is an array that may be used for temporary working
@@ -4079,8 +4079,8 @@ static int renumberCursorsCb(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
 **   * the array is larger than the largest cursor number used within the
 **     select statement passed as an argument, and
 **
-**   * the array entries for all cursor numbers that do *not* appear in 
-**     FROM clauses of the select statement as described above are 
+**   * the array entries for all cursor numbers that do *not* appear in
+**     FROM clauses of the select statement as described above are
 **     initialized to zero.
 */
 static void renumberCursors(
@@ -4162,7 +4162,7 @@ static int compoundHasDifferentAffinities(Select *p){
 **     SELECT x+y AS a FROM t1 WHERE z<100 AND a>5
 **
 ** The code generated for this simplification gives the same result
-** but only has to scan the data once.  And because indices might 
+** but only has to scan the data once.  And because indices might
 ** exist on the table t1, a complete scan of the data might be
 ** avoided.
 **
@@ -4191,7 +4191,7 @@ static int compoundHasDifferentAffinities(Select *p){
 **   (4)  The subquery can not be DISTINCT.
 **
 **  (**)  At one point restrictions (4) and (5) defined a subset of DISTINCT
-**        sub-queries that were excluded from this optimization. Restriction 
+**        sub-queries that were excluded from this optimization. Restriction
 **        (4) has since been expanded to exclude all DISTINCT subqueries.
 **
 **  (**)  We no longer attempt to flatten aggregate subqueries.  Was:
@@ -4207,8 +4207,8 @@ static int compoundHasDifferentAffinities(Select *p){
 **   (9)  If the subquery uses LIMIT then the outer query may not be aggregate.
 **
 **  (**)  Restriction (10) was removed from the code on 2005-02-05 but we
-**        accidently carried the comment forward until 2014-09-15.  Original
-**        constraint: "If the subquery is aggregate then the outer query 
+**        accidentally carried the comment forward until 2014-09-15.  Original
+**        constraint: "If the subquery is aggregate then the outer query
 **        may not use LIMIT."
 **
 **  (11)  The subquery and the outer query may not both have ORDER BY clauses.
@@ -4226,7 +4226,7 @@ static int compoundHasDifferentAffinities(Select *p){
 **
 **  (16)  If the outer query is aggregate, then the subquery may not
 **        use ORDER BY.  (Ticket #2942)  This used to not matter
-**        until we introduced the group_concat() function.  
+**        until we introduced the group_concat() function. 
 **
 **  (17)  If the subquery is a compound select, then
 **        (17a) all compound operators must be a UNION ALL, and
@@ -4281,7 +4281,7 @@ static int compoundHasDifferentAffinities(Select *p){
 **        recursive queries in multiSelect().
 **
 **  (**)  We no longer attempt to flatten aggregate subqueries.  Was:
-**        The subquery may not be an aggregate that uses the built-in min() or 
+**        The subquery may not be an aggregate that uses the built-in min() or
 **        or max() functions.  (Without this restriction, a query like:
 **        "SELECT x FROM (SELECT max(y), x FROM t1)" would not necessarily
 **        return the value X for which Y was maximal.)
@@ -4326,7 +4326,7 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
   SrcList *pSubSrc;   /* The FROM clause of the subquery */
   int iParent;        /* VDBE cursor number of the pSub result set temp table */
   int iNewParent = -1;/* Replacement table for iParent */
-  int isOuterJoin = 0; /* True if pSub is the right side of a LEFT JOIN */    
+  int isOuterJoin = 0; /* True if pSub is the right side of a LEFT JOIN */   
   int i;              /* Loop counter */
   Expr *pWhere;                    /* The WHERE clause */
   SrcItem *pSubitem;               /* The subquery */
@@ -4481,7 +4481,7 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
   testcase( i==SQLITE_DENY );
   pParse->zAuthContext = zSavedAuthContext;
 
-  /* Delete the transient structures associated with thesubquery */
+  /* Delete the transient structures associated with the subquery */
   pSub1 = pSubitem->pSelect;
   sqlite3DbFree(db, pSubitem->zDatabase);
   sqlite3DbFree(db, pSubitem->zName);
@@ -4493,13 +4493,13 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
   assert( pSubitem->fg.isUsing!=0 || pSubitem->u3.pOn==0 );
 
   /* If the sub-query is a compound SELECT statement, then (by restrictions
-  ** 17 and 18 above) it must be a UNION ALL and the parent query must 
+  ** 17 and 18 above) it must be a UNION ALL and the parent query must
   ** be of the form:
   **
-  **     SELECT <expr-list> FROM (<sub-query>) <where-clause> 
+  **     SELECT <expr-list> FROM (<sub-query>) <where-clause>
   **
   ** followed by any ORDER BY, LIMIT and/or OFFSET clauses. This block
-  ** creates N-1 copies of the parent query without any ORDER BY, LIMIT or 
+  ** creates N-1 copies of the parent query without any ORDER BY, LIMIT or
   ** OFFSET clauses and joins them to the left-hand-side of the original
   ** using UNION ALL operators. In this case N is the number of simple
   ** select statements in the compound sub-query.
@@ -4573,7 +4573,7 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
     Table *pTabToDel = pSubitem->pTab;
     if( pTabToDel->nTabRef==1 ){
       Parse *pToplevel = sqlite3ParseToplevel(pParse);
-      sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pToplevel, 
+      sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pToplevel,
          (void(*)(sqlite3*,void*))sqlite3DeleteTable,
          pTabToDel);
       testcase( pToplevel->earlyCleanup );
@@ -4609,7 +4609,7 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
     if( pParent==p ){
       jointype = pSubitem->fg.jointype;     /* First time through the loop */
     }
-    
+   
     /* The subquery uses a single slot of the FROM clause of the outer
     ** query.  If the subquery has more than one element in its FROM clause,
     ** then expand the outer query to make space for it to hold all elements
@@ -4645,10 +4645,10 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
     }
     pSrc->a[iFrom].fg.jointype &= JT_LTORJ;
     pSrc->a[iFrom].fg.jointype |= jointype | ltorj;
-  
-    /* Now begin substituting subquery result set expressions for 
+ 
+    /* Now begin substituting subquery result set expressions for
     ** references to the iParent in the outer query.
-    ** 
+    **
     ** Example:
     **
     **   SELECT a+5, b*10 FROM (SELECT x*3 AS a, y+10 AS b FROM t1) WHERE a>b;
@@ -4663,7 +4663,7 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
       ** ORDER BY column expression is identical to the iOrderByCol'th
       ** expression returned by SELECT statement pSub. Since these values
       ** do not necessarily correspond to columns in SELECT statement pParent,
-      ** zero them before transfering the ORDER BY clause.
+      ** zero them before transferring the ORDER BY clause.
       **
       ** Not doing this may cause an error if a subsequent call to this
       ** function attempts to flatten a compound sub-query into pParent
@@ -4699,12 +4699,12 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
       x.pCList = findLeftmostExprlist(pSub);
       substSelect(&x, pParent, 0);
     }
-  
+ 
     /* The flattened query is a compound if either the inner or the
     ** outer query is a compound. */
     pParent->selFlags |= pSub->selFlags & SF_Compound;
     assert( (pSub->selFlags & SF_Distinct)==0 ); /* restriction (17b) */
-  
+ 
     /*
     ** SELECT ... FROM (SELECT ... LIMIT a OFFSET b) LIMIT x OFFSET y;
     **
@@ -4759,7 +4759,7 @@ struct WhereConst {
 
 /*
 ** Add a new entry to the pConst object.  Except, do not add duplicate
-** pColumn entires.  Also, do not add if doing so would not be appropriate.
+** pColumn entries.  Also, do not add if doing so would not be appropriate.
 **
 ** The caller guarantees the pColumn is a column and pValue is a constant.
 ** This routine has to do some additional checks before completing the
@@ -4842,15 +4842,15 @@ static void findConstInWhere(WhereConst *pConst, Expr *pExpr){
 /*
 ** This is a helper function for Walker callback propagateConstantExprRewrite().
 **
-** Argument pExpr is a candidate expression to be replaced by a value. If 
-** pExpr is equivalent to one of the columns named in pWalker->u.pConst, 
+** Argument pExpr is a candidate expression to be replaced by a value. If
+** pExpr is equivalent to one of the columns named in pWalker->u.pConst,
 ** then overwrite it with the corresponding value. Except, do not do so
 ** if argument bIgnoreAffBlob is non-zero and the affinity of pExpr
 ** is SQLITE_AFF_BLOB.
 */
 static int propagateConstantExprRewriteOne(
   WhereConst *pConst,
-  Expr *pExpr, 
+  Expr *pExpr,
   int bIgnoreAffBlob
 ){
   int i;
@@ -4895,7 +4895,7 @@ static int propagateConstantExprRewriteOne(
 **
 **   + pExpr is a binary comparison operator (=, <=, >=, <, >) that
 **     uses an affinity other than TEXT and one of its immediate
-**     children is a column that matches one of the columns in 
+**     children is a column that matches one of the columns in
 **     pWalker->u.pConst.
 */
 static int propagateConstantExprRewrite(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
@@ -4945,7 +4945,7 @@ static int propagateConstantExprRewrite(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
 **    SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE a=123 AND b=123;
 **
 ** The two SELECT statements above should return different answers.  b=a
-** is alway true because the comparison uses numeric affinity, but b=123
+** is always true because the comparison uses numeric affinity, but b=123
 ** is false because it uses text affinity and '0123' is not the same as '123'.
 ** To work around this, the expression tree is not actually changed from
 ** "b=a" to "b=123" but rather the "a" in "b=a" is tagged with EP_FixedCol
@@ -5007,7 +5007,7 @@ static int propagateConstants(
       sqlite3DbFree(x.pParse->db, x.apExpr);
       nChng += x.nChng;
     }
-  }while( x.nChng );  
+  }while( x.nChng ); 
   return nChng;
 }
 
@@ -5017,19 +5017,19 @@ static int propagateConstants(
 ** This function is called to determine whether or not it is safe to
 ** push WHERE clause expression pExpr down to FROM clause sub-query
 ** pSubq, which contains at least one window function. Return 1
-** if it is safe and the expression should be pushed down, or 0 
+** if it is safe and the expression should be pushed down, or 0
 ** otherwise.
 **
-** It is only safe to push the expression down if it consists only 
+** It is only safe to push the expression down if it consists only
 ** of constants and copies of expressions that appear in the PARTITION
 ** BY clause of all window function used by the sub-query. It is safe
 ** to filter out entire partitions, but not rows within partitions, as
 ** this may change the results of the window functions.
 **
-** At the time this function is called it is guaranteed that 
+** At the time this function is called it is guaranteed that
 **
-**   * the sub-query uses only one distinct window frame, and 
-**   * that the window frame has a PARTITION BY clase.
+**   * the sub-query uses only one distinct window frame, and
+**   * that the window frame has a PARTITION BY clause.
 */
 static int pushDownWindowCheck(Parse *pParse, Select *pSubq, Expr *pExpr){
   assert( pSubq->pWin->pPartition );
@@ -5087,19 +5087,19 @@ static int pushDownWindowCheck(Parse *pParse, Select *pSubq, Expr *pExpr){
 **       But if the (b2=2) term were to be pushed down into the bb subquery,
 **       then the (1,1,NULL) row would be suppressed.
 **
-**   (6) Window functions make things tricky as changes to the WHERE clause 
-**       of the inner query could change the window over which window 
+**   (6) Window functions make things tricky as changes to the WHERE clause
+**       of the inner query could change the window over which window
 **       functions are calculated. Therefore, do not attempt the optimization
 **       if:
 **
 **     (6a) The inner query uses multiple incompatible window partitions.
 **
-**     (6b) The inner query is a compound and uses window-functions. 
+**     (6b) The inner query is a compound and uses window-functions.
 **
 **     (6c) The WHERE clause does not consist entirely of constants and
 **          copies of expressions found in the PARTITION BY clause of
 **          all window-functions used by the sub-query. It is safe to
-**          filter out entire partitions, as this does not change the 
+**          filter out entire partitions, as this does not change the
 **          window over which any window-function is calculated.
 **
 **   (7) The inner query is a Common Table Expression (CTE) that should
@@ -5156,7 +5156,7 @@ static int pushDownWhereTerms(
     int notUnionAll = 0;
     for(pSel=pSubq; pSel; pSel=pSel->pPrior){
       u8 op = pSel->op;
-      assert( op==TK_ALL || op==TK_SELECT 
+      assert( op==TK_ALL || op==TK_SELECT
            || op==TK_UNION || op==TK_INTERSECT || op==TK_EXCEPT );
       if( op!=TK_ALL && op!=TK_SELECT ){
         notUnionAll = 1;
@@ -5193,7 +5193,7 @@ static int pushDownWhereTerms(
   ** in the future.
   */
   {
-    Select *pX;  
+    Select *pX; 
     for(pX=pSubq; pX; pX=pX->pPrior){
       assert( (pX->selFlags & (SF_Recursive))==0 );
     }
@@ -5233,7 +5233,7 @@ static int pushDownWhereTerms(
     return 0; /* restriction (4) */
   }
   if( ExprHasProperty(pWhere,EP_OuterON)
-   && pWhere->w.iJoin!=iCursor 
+   && pWhere->w.iJoin!=iCursor
   ){
     return 0; /* restriction (5) */
   }
@@ -5347,7 +5347,7 @@ static int disableUnusedSubqueryResultColumns(SrcItem *pItem){
 
 /*
 ** The pFunc is the only aggregate function in the query.  Check to see
-** if the query is a candidate for the min/max optimization. 
+** if the query is a candidate for the min/max optimization.
 **
 ** If the query is a candidate for the min/max optimization, then set
 ** *ppMinMax to be an ORDER BY clause to be used for the optimization
@@ -5373,7 +5373,7 @@ static u8 minMaxQuery(sqlite3 *db, Expr *pFunc, ExprList **ppMinMax){
   assert( !IsWindowFunc(pFunc) );
   assert( ExprUseXList(pFunc) );
   pEList = pFunc->x.pList;
-  if( pEList==0 
+  if( pEList==0
    || pEList->nExpr!=1
    || ExprHasProperty(pFunc, EP_WinFunc)
    || OptimizationDisabled(db, SQLITE_MinMaxOpt)
@@ -5401,7 +5401,7 @@ static u8 minMaxQuery(sqlite3 *db, Expr *pFunc, ExprList **ppMinMax){
 
 /*
 ** The select statement passed as the first argument is an aggregate query.
-** The second argument is the associated aggregate-info object. This 
+** The second argument is the associated aggregate-info object. This
 ** function tests if the SELECT is of the form:
 **
 **   SELECT count(*) FROM <tbl>
@@ -5422,8 +5422,8 @@ static Table *isSimpleCount(Select *p, AggInfo *pAggInfo){
 
   assert( !p->pGroupBy );
 
-  if( p->pWhere 
-   || p->pEList->nExpr!=1 
+  if( p->pWhere
+   || p->pEList->nExpr!=1
    || p->pSrc->nSrc!=1
    || p->pSrc->a[0].pSelect
    || pAggInfo->nFunc!=1
@@ -5451,8 +5451,8 @@ static Table *isSimpleCount(Select *p, AggInfo *pAggInfo){
 /*
 ** If the source-list item passed as an argument was augmented with an
 ** INDEXED BY clause, then try to locate the specified index. If there
-** was such a clause and the named index cannot be found, return 
-** SQLITE_ERROR and leave an error in pParse. Otherwise, populate 
+** was such a clause and the named index cannot be found, return
+** SQLITE_ERROR and leave an error in pParse. Otherwise, populate
 ** pFrom->pIndex and return SQLITE_OK.
 */
 int sqlite3IndexedByLookup(Parse *pParse, SrcItem *pFrom){
@@ -5462,8 +5462,8 @@ int sqlite3IndexedByLookup(Parse *pParse, SrcItem *pFrom){
   assert( pTab!=0 );
   assert( pFrom->fg.isIndexedBy!=0 );
 
-  for(pIdx=pTab->pIndex; 
-      pIdx && sqlite3StrICmp(pIdx->zName, zIndexedBy); 
+  for(pIdx=pTab->pIndex;
+      pIdx && sqlite3StrICmp(pIdx->zName, zIndexedBy);
       pIdx=pIdx->pNext
   );
   if( !pIdx ){
@@ -5477,7 +5477,7 @@ int sqlite3IndexedByLookup(Parse *pParse, SrcItem *pFrom){
 }
 
 /*
-** Detect compound SELECT statements that use an ORDER BY clause with 
+** Detect compound SELECT statements that use an ORDER BY clause with
 ** an alternative collating sequence.
 **
 **    SELECT ... FROM t1 EXCEPT SELECT ... FROM t2 ORDER BY .. COLLATE ...
@@ -5572,9 +5572,9 @@ static int cannotBeFunction(Parse *pParse, SrcItem *pFrom){
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CTE
 /*
-** Argument pWith (which may be NULL) points to a linked list of nested 
-** WITH contexts, from inner to outermost. If the table identified by 
-** FROM clause element pItem is really a common-table-expression (CTE) 
+** Argument pWith (which may be NULL) points to a linked list of nested
+** WITH contexts, from inner to outermost. If the table identified by
+** FROM clause element pItem is really a common-table-expression (CTE)
 ** then return a pointer to the CTE definition for that table. Otherwise
 ** return NULL.
 **
@@ -5610,7 +5610,7 @@ static struct Cte *searchWith(
 ** onto the top of the stack. If argument bFree is true, then this
 ** WITH clause will never be popped from the stack but should instead
 ** be freed along with the Parse object. In other cases, when
-** bFree==0, the With object will be freed along with the SELECT 
+** bFree==0, the With object will be freed along with the SELECT
 ** statement with which it is associated.
 **
 ** This routine returns a copy of pWith.  Or, if bFree is true and
@@ -5623,7 +5623,7 @@ static struct Cte *searchWith(
 With *sqlite3WithPush(Parse *pParse, With *pWith, u8 bFree){
   if( pWith ){
     if( bFree ){
-      pWith = (With*)sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pParse, 
+      pWith = (With*)sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pParse,
                       (void(*)(sqlite3*,void*))sqlite3WithDelete,
                       pWith);
       if( pWith==0 ) return 0;
@@ -5638,7 +5638,7 @@ With *sqlite3WithPush(Parse *pParse, With *pWith, u8 bFree){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function checks if argument pFrom refers to a CTE declared by 
+** This function checks if argument pFrom refers to a CTE declared by
 ** a WITH clause on the stack currently maintained by the parser (on the
 ** pParse->pWith linked list).  And if currently processing a CTE
 ** CTE expression, through routine checks to see if the reference is
@@ -5647,7 +5647,7 @@ With *sqlite3WithPush(Parse *pParse, With *pWith, u8 bFree){
 ** If pFrom matches a CTE according to either of these two above, pFrom->pTab
 ** and other fields are populated accordingly.
 **
-** Return 0 if no match is found. 
+** Return 0 if no match is found.
 ** Return 1 if a match is found.
 ** Return 2 if an error condition is detected.
 */
@@ -5746,8 +5746,8 @@ static int resolveFromTermToCte(
       assert( pRecTerm->pPrior!=0 );
       for(i=0; i<pSrc->nSrc; i++){
         SrcItem *pItem = &pSrc->a[i];
-        if( pItem->zDatabase==0 
-         && pItem->zName!=0 
+        if( pItem->zDatabase==0
+         && pItem->zName!=0
          && 0==sqlite3StrICmp(pItem->zName, pCte->zName)
         ){
           pItem->pTab = pTab;
@@ -5825,12 +5825,12 @@ static int resolveFromTermToCte(
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CTE
 /*
-** If the SELECT passed as the second argument has an associated WITH 
+** If the SELECT passed as the second argument has an associated WITH
 ** clause, pop it from the stack stored as part of the Parse object.
 **
 ** This function is used as the xSelectCallback2() callback by
 ** sqlite3SelectExpand() when walking a SELECT tree to resolve table
-** names and other FROM clause elements. 
+** names and other FROM clause elements.
 */
 void sqlite3SelectPopWith(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
   Parse *pParse = pWalker->pParse;
@@ -5910,7 +5910,7 @@ static int inAnyUsingClause(
 **    (1)  Make sure VDBE cursor numbers have been assigned to every
 **         element of the FROM clause.
 **
-**    (2)  Fill in the pTabList->a[].pTab fields in the SrcList that 
+**    (2)  Fill in the pTabList->a[].pTab fields in the SrcList that
 **         defines FROM clause.  When views appear in the FROM clause,
 **         fill pTabList->a[].pSelect with a copy of the SELECT statement
 **         that implements the view.  A copy is made of the view's SELECT
@@ -6178,7 +6178,7 @@ static int selectExpander(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
             ** bit set.
             */
             if( (p->selFlags & SF_IncludeHidden)==0
-             && IsHiddenColumn(&pTab->aCol[j]) 
+             && IsHiddenColumn(&pTab->aCol[j])
             ){
               continue;
             }
@@ -6420,9 +6420,9 @@ static void printAggInfo(AggInfo *pAggInfo){
     sqlite3DebugPrintf(
        "agg-column[%d] pTab=%s iTable=%d iColumn=%d iMem=%d"
        " iSorterColumn=%d %s\n",
-       ii, pCol->pTab ? pCol->pTab->zName : "NULL", 
+       ii, pCol->pTab ? pCol->pTab->zName : "NULL",
        pCol->iTable, pCol->iColumn, pAggInfo->iFirstReg+ii,
-       pCol->iSorterColumn, 
+       pCol->iSorterColumn,
        ii>=pAggInfo->nAccumulator ? "" : " Accumulator");
     sqlite3TreeViewExpr(0, pAggInfo->aCol[ii].pCExpr, 0);
   }
@@ -6568,7 +6568,7 @@ static void aggregateConvertIndexedExprRefToColumn(AggInfo *pAggInfo){
 **     *  The aCol[] and aFunc[] arrays may be modified
 **     *  The AggInfoColumnReg() and AggInfoFuncReg() macros may not be used
 **
-** After clling this routine:
+** After calling this routine:
 **
 **     *  The aCol[] and aFunc[] arrays are fixed
 **     *  The AggInfoColumnReg() and AggInfoFuncReg() macros may be used
@@ -6611,7 +6611,7 @@ static void resetAccumulator(Parse *pParse, AggInfo *pAggInfo){
         pFunc->iDistinct = -1;
       }else{
         KeyInfo *pKeyInfo = sqlite3KeyInfoFromExprList(pParse, pE->x.pList,0,0);
-        pFunc->iDistAddr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, 
+        pFunc->iDistAddr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenEphemeral,
             pFunc->iDistinct, 0, 0, (char*)pKeyInfo, P4_KEYINFO);
         ExplainQueryPlan((pParse, 0, "USE TEMP B-TREE FOR %s(DISTINCT)",
                           pFunc->pFunc->zName));
@@ -6649,8 +6649,8 @@ static void finalizeAggFunctions(Parse *pParse, AggInfo *pAggInfo){
 ** of setting and clearing regAcc.
 */
 static void updateAccumulator(
-  Parse *pParse, 
-  int regAcc, 
+  Parse *pParse,
+  int regAcc,
   AggInfo *pAggInfo,
   int eDistinctType
 ){
@@ -6674,8 +6674,8 @@ static void updateAccumulator(
     pList = pF->pFExpr->x.pList;
     if( ExprHasProperty(pF->pFExpr, EP_WinFunc) ){
       Expr *pFilter = pF->pFExpr->y.pWin->pFilter;
-      if( pAggInfo->nAccumulator 
-       && (pF->pFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL) 
+      if( pAggInfo->nAccumulator
+       && (pF->pFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL)
        && regAcc
       ){
         /* If regAcc==0, there there exists some min() or max() function
@@ -6684,7 +6684,7 @@ static void updateAccumulator(
         if( regHit==0 ) regHit = ++pParse->nMem;
         /* If this is the first row of the group (regAcc contains 0), clear the
         ** "magnet" register regHit so that the accumulator registers
-        ** are populated if the FILTER clause jumps over the the 
+        ** are populated if the FILTER clause jumps over the the
         ** invocation of min() or max() altogether. Or, if this is not
         ** the first row (regAcc contains 1), set the magnet register so that
         ** the accumulators are not populated unless the min()/max() is invoked
@@ -6703,10 +6703,10 @@ static void updateAccumulator(
       regAgg = 0;
     }
     if( pF->iDistinct>=0 && pList ){
-      if( addrNext==0 ){ 
+      if( addrNext==0 ){
         addrNext = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse);
       }
-      pF->iDistinct = codeDistinct(pParse, eDistinctType, 
+      pF->iDistinct = codeDistinct(pParse, eDistinctType,
           pF->iDistinct, addrNext, pList, regAgg);
     }
     if( pF->pFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL ){
@@ -6773,10 +6773,10 @@ static void explainSimpleCount(
 /*
 ** sqlite3WalkExpr() callback used by havingToWhere().
 **
-** If the node passed to the callback is a TK_AND node, return 
+** If the node passed to the callback is a TK_AND node, return
 ** WRC_Continue to tell sqlite3WalkExpr() to iterate through child nodes.
 **
-** Otherwise, return WRC_Prune. In this case, also check if the 
+** Otherwise, return WRC_Prune. In this case, also check if the
 ** sub-expression matches the criteria for being moved to the WHERE
 ** clause. If so, add it to the WHERE clause and replace the sub-expression
 ** within the HAVING expression with a constant "1".
@@ -6791,7 +6791,7 @@ static int havingToWhereExprCb(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
     ** belongs to an outer query. Do not move the expression to the WHERE
     ** clause in this obscure case, as doing so may corrupt the outer Select
     ** statements AggInfo structure.  */
-    if( sqlite3ExprIsConstantOrGroupBy(pWalker->pParse, pExpr, pS->pGroupBy) 
+    if( sqlite3ExprIsConstantOrGroupBy(pWalker->pParse, pExpr, pS->pGroupBy)
      && ExprAlwaysFalse(pExpr)==0
      && pExpr->pAggInfo==0
     ){
@@ -7069,7 +7069,7 @@ static int fromClauseTermCanBeCoroutine(
 }
 
 /*
-** Generate code for the SELECT statement given in the p argument.  
+** Generate code for the SELECT statement given in the p argument. 
 **
 ** The results are returned according to the SelectDest structure.
 ** See comments in sqliteInt.h for further information.
@@ -7128,7 +7128,7 @@ int sqlite3Select(
   assert( p->pOrderBy==0 || pDest->eDest!=SRT_DistQueue );
   assert( p->pOrderBy==0 || pDest->eDest!=SRT_Queue );
   if( IgnorableDistinct(pDest) ){
-    assert(pDest->eDest==SRT_Exists     || pDest->eDest==SRT_Union || 
+    assert(pDest->eDest==SRT_Exists     || pDest->eDest==SRT_Union ||
            pDest->eDest==SRT_Except     || pDest->eDest==SRT_Discard ||
            pDest->eDest==SRT_DistQueue  || pDest->eDest==SRT_DistFifo );
     /* All of these destinations are also able to ignore the ORDER BY clause */
@@ -7138,7 +7138,7 @@ int sqlite3Select(
       if( sqlite3TreeTrace & 0x800 ){
         sqlite3TreeViewExprList(0, p->pOrderBy, 0, "ORDERBY");
       }
-#endif    
+#endif   
       sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pParse,
         (void(*)(sqlite3*,void*))sqlite3ExprListDelete,
         p->pOrderBy);
@@ -7163,18 +7163,18 @@ int sqlite3Select(
 
   /* If the SF_UFSrcCheck flag is set, then this function is being called
   ** as part of populating the temp table for an UPDATE...FROM statement.
-  ** In this case, it is an error if the target object (pSrc->a[0]) name 
-  ** or alias is duplicated within FROM clause (pSrc->a[1..n]).  
+  ** In this case, it is an error if the target object (pSrc->a[0]) name
+  ** or alias is duplicated within FROM clause (pSrc->a[1..n]). 
   **
-  ** Postgres disallows this case too. The reason is that some other 
-  ** systems handle this case differently, and not all the same way, 
+  ** Postgres disallows this case too. The reason is that some other
+  ** systems handle this case differently, and not all the same way,
   ** which is just confusing. To avoid this, we follow PG's lead and
   ** disallow it altogether.  */
   if( p->selFlags & SF_UFSrcCheck ){
     SrcItem *p0 = &p->pSrc->a[0];
     if( sameSrcAlias(p0, p->pSrc) ){
-      sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
-          "target object/alias may not appear in FROM clause: %s", 
+      sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+          "target object/alias may not appear in FROM clause: %s",
           p0->zAlias ? p0->zAlias : p0->pTab->zName
       );
       goto select_end;
@@ -7274,7 +7274,7 @@ int sqlite3Select(
                     pTabList->a[0].fg.jointype & JT_LTORJ);
     }
 
-    /* No futher action if this term of the FROM clause is not a subquery */
+    /* No further action if this term of the FROM clause is not a subquery */
     if( pSub==0 ) continue;
 
     /* Catch mismatch in the declared columns of a view and the number of
@@ -7324,7 +7324,7 @@ int sqlite3Select(
     ){
       TREETRACE(0x800,pParse,p,
                 ("omit superfluous ORDER BY on %r FROM-clause subquery\n",i+1));
-      sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pParse, 
+      sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pParse,
          (void(*)(sqlite3*,void*))sqlite3ExprListDelete,
          pSub->pOrderBy);
       pSub->pOrderBy = 0;
@@ -7469,7 +7469,7 @@ int sqlite3Select(
     ** inside the subquery.  This can help the subquery to run more efficiently.
     */
     if( OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_PushDown)
-     && (pItem->fg.isCte==0 
+     && (pItem->fg.isCte==0
          || (pItem->u2.pCteUse->eM10d!=M10d_Yes && pItem->u2.pCteUse->nUse<2))
      && pushDownWhereTerms(pParse, pSub, p->pWhere, pTabList, i)
     ){
@@ -7511,7 +7511,7 @@ int sqlite3Select(
       ** set on each invocation.
       */
       int addrTop = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+1;
-     
+    
       pItem->regReturn = ++pParse->nMem;
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_InitCoroutine, pItem->regReturn, 0, addrTop);
       VdbeComment((v, "%!S", pItem));
@@ -7528,7 +7528,7 @@ int sqlite3Select(
     }else if( pItem->fg.isCte && pItem->u2.pCteUse->addrM9e>0 ){
       /* This is a CTE for which materialization code has already been
       ** generated.  Invoke the subroutine to compute the materialization,
-      ** the make the pItem->iCursor be a copy of the ephemerial table that
+      ** the make the pItem->iCursor be a copy of the ephemeral table that
       ** holds the result of the materialization. */
       CteUse *pCteUse = pItem->u2.pCteUse;
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, pCteUse->regRtn, pCteUse->addrM9e);
@@ -7608,7 +7608,7 @@ int sqlite3Select(
   }
 #endif
 
-  /* If the query is DISTINCT with an ORDER BY but is not an aggregate, and 
+  /* If the query is DISTINCT with an ORDER BY but is not an aggregate, and
   ** if the select-list is the same as the ORDER BY list, then this query
   ** can be rewritten as a GROUP BY. In other words, this:
   **
@@ -7618,12 +7618,12 @@ int sqlite3Select(
   **
   **     SELECT xyz FROM ... GROUP BY xyz ORDER BY xyz
   **
-  ** The second form is preferred as a single index (or temp-table) may be 
-  ** used for both the ORDER BY and DISTINCT processing. As originally 
-  ** written the query must use a temp-table for at least one of the ORDER 
+  ** The second form is preferred as a single index (or temp-table) may be
+  ** used for both the ORDER BY and DISTINCT processing. As originally
+  ** written the query must use a temp-table for at least one of the ORDER
   ** BY and DISTINCT, and an index or separate temp-table for the other.
   */
-  if( (p->selFlags & (SF_Distinct|SF_Aggregate))==SF_Distinct 
+  if( (p->selFlags & (SF_Distinct|SF_Aggregate))==SF_Distinct
    && sqlite3ExprListCompare(sSort.pOrderBy, pEList, -1)==0
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC
    && p->pWin==0
@@ -7745,7 +7745,7 @@ int sqlite3Select(
     }
     TREETRACE(0x2,pParse,p,("WhereBegin returns\n"));
 
-    /* If sorting index that was created by a prior OP_OpenEphemeral 
+    /* If sorting index that was created by a prior OP_OpenEphemeral
     ** instruction ended up not being needed, then change the OP_OpenEphemeral
     ** into an OP_Noop.
     */
@@ -7818,8 +7818,8 @@ int sqlite3Select(
       if( p->nSelectRow>66 ) p->nSelectRow = 66;
 
       /* If there is both a GROUP BY and an ORDER BY clause and they are
-      ** identical, then it may be possible to disable the ORDER BY clause 
-      ** on the grounds that the GROUP BY will cause elements to come out 
+      ** identical, then it may be possible to disable the ORDER BY clause
+      ** on the grounds that the GROUP BY will cause elements to come out
       ** in the correct order. It also may not - the GROUP BY might use a
       ** database index that causes rows to be grouped together as required
       ** but not actually sorted. Either way, record the fact that the
@@ -7829,8 +7829,8 @@ int sqlite3Select(
         int ii;
         /* The GROUP BY processing doesn't care whether rows are delivered in
         ** ASC or DESC order - only that each group is returned contiguously.
-        ** So set the ASC/DESC flags in the GROUP BY to match those in the 
-        ** ORDER BY to maximize the chances of rows being delivered in an 
+        ** So set the ASC/DESC flags in the GROUP BY to match those in the
+        ** ORDER BY to maximize the chances of rows being delivered in an
         ** order that makes the ORDER BY redundant.  */
         for(ii=0; ii<pGroupBy->nExpr; ii++){
           u8 sortFlags;
@@ -7911,7 +7911,7 @@ int sqlite3Select(
     */
     if( pGroupBy ){
       KeyInfo *pKeyInfo;  /* Keying information for the group by clause */
-      int addr1;          /* A-vs-B comparision jump */
+      int addr1;          /* A-vs-B comparison jump */
       int addrOutputRow;  /* Start of subroutine that outputs a result row */
       int regOutputRow;   /* Return address register for output subroutine */
       int addrSetAbort;   /* Set the abort flag and return */
@@ -7923,7 +7923,7 @@ int sqlite3Select(
       u16 distFlag = 0;
       int eDist = WHERE_DISTINCT_NOOP;
 
-      if( pAggInfo->nFunc==1 
+      if( pAggInfo->nFunc==1
        && pAggInfo->aFunc[0].iDistinct>=0
        && ALWAYS(pAggInfo->aFunc[0].pFExpr!=0)
        && ALWAYS(ExprUseXList(pAggInfo->aFunc[0].pFExpr))
@@ -7939,13 +7939,13 @@ int sqlite3Select(
       /* If there is a GROUP BY clause we might need a sorting index to
       ** implement it.  Allocate that sorting index now.  If it turns out
       ** that we do not need it after all, the OP_SorterOpen instruction
-      ** will be converted into a Noop.  
+      ** will be converted into a Noop. 
       */
       pAggInfo->sortingIdx = pParse->nTab++;
       pKeyInfo = sqlite3KeyInfoFromExprList(pParse, pGroupBy,
                                             0, pAggInfo->nColumn);
-      addrSortingIdx = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_SorterOpen, 
-          pAggInfo->sortingIdx, pAggInfo->nSortingColumn, 
+      addrSortingIdx = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_SorterOpen,
+          pAggInfo->sortingIdx, pAggInfo->nSortingColumn,
           0, (char*)pKeyInfo, P4_KEYINFO);
 
       /* Initialize memory locations used by GROUP BY aggregate processing
@@ -7972,7 +7972,7 @@ int sqlite3Select(
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, regReset, addrReset);
       TREETRACE(0x2,pParse,p,("WhereBegin\n"));
       pWInfo = sqlite3WhereBegin(pParse, pTabList, pWhere, pGroupBy, pDistinct,
-          p, (sDistinct.isTnct==2 ? WHERE_DISTINCTBY : WHERE_GROUPBY) 
+          p, (sDistinct.isTnct==2 ? WHERE_DISTINCTBY : WHERE_GROUPBY)
           |  (orderByGrp ? WHERE_SORTBYGROUP : 0) | distFlag, 0
       );
       if( pWInfo==0 ){
@@ -8002,7 +8002,7 @@ int sqlite3Select(
         int nCol;
         int nGroupBy;
 
-        explainTempTable(pParse, 
+        explainTempTable(pParse,
             (sDistinct.isTnct && (p->selFlags&SF_Distinct)==0) ?
                     "DISTINCT" : "GROUP BY");
 
@@ -8065,9 +8065,9 @@ int sqlite3Select(
       ** clause, cancel the ephemeral table open coded earlier.
       **
       ** This is an optimization - the correct answer should result regardless.
-      ** Use the SQLITE_GroupByOrder flag with SQLITE_TESTCTRL_OPTIMIZER to 
+      ** Use the SQLITE_GroupByOrder flag with SQLITE_TESTCTRL_OPTIMIZER to
       ** disable this optimization for testing purposes.  */
-      if( orderByGrp && OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_GroupByOrder) 
+      if( orderByGrp && OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_GroupByOrder)
        && (groupBySort || sqlite3WhereIsSorted(pWInfo))
       ){
         sSort.pOrderBy = 0;
@@ -8213,7 +8213,7 @@ int sqlite3Select(
         **
         ** (2013-10-03) Do not count the entries in a partial index.
         **
-        ** In practice the KeyInfo structure will not be used. It is only 
+        ** In practice the KeyInfo structure will not be used. It is only
         ** passed to keep OP_OpenRead happy.
         */
         if( !HasRowid(pTab) ) pBest = sqlite3PrimaryKeyIndex(pTab);
@@ -8255,7 +8255,7 @@ int sqlite3Select(
         ** that the accumulator registers are (a) updated only once if
         ** there are no min() or max functions or (b) always updated for the
         ** first row visited by the aggregate, so that they are updated at
-        ** least once even if the FILTER clause means the min() or max() 
+        ** least once even if the FILTER clause means the min() or max()
         ** function visits zero rows.  */
         if( pAggInfo->nAccumulator ){
           for(i=0; i<pAggInfo->nFunc; i++){
@@ -8319,11 +8319,11 @@ int sqlite3Select(
 
       sSort.pOrderBy = 0;
       sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pParse, pHaving, addrEnd, SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL);
-      selectInnerLoop(pParse, p, -1, 0, 0, 
+      selectInnerLoop(pParse, p, -1, 0, 0,
                       pDest, addrEnd, addrEnd);
     }
     sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrEnd);
-    
+
   } /* endif aggregate query */
 
   if( sDistinct.eTnctType==WHERE_DISTINCT_UNORDERED ){
diff --git a/src/shell.c.in b/src/shell.c.in
index d119eb4f8..f894fe28b 100644
--- a/src/shell.c.in
+++ b/src/shell.c.in
@@ -1412,7 +1412,7 @@ typedef struct ShellState ShellState;
 struct ShellState {
   sqlite3 *db;           /* The database */
   u8 autoExplain;        /* Automatically turn on .explain mode */
-  u8 autoEQP;            /* Run EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN prior to seach SQL stmt */
+  u8 autoEQP;            /* Run EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN prior to each SQL stmt */
   u8 autoEQPtest;        /* autoEQP is in test mode */
   u8 autoEQPtrace;       /* autoEQP is in trace mode */
   u8 scanstatsOn;        /* True to display scan stats before each finalize */
@@ -1475,7 +1475,7 @@ struct ShellState {
   int *aiIndent;         /* Array of indents used in MODE_Explain */
   int nIndent;           /* Size of array aiIndent[] */
   int iIndent;           /* Index of current op in aiIndent[] */
-  char *zNonce;          /* Nonce for temporary safe-mode excapes */
+  char *zNonce;          /* Nonce for temporary safe-mode escapes */
   EQPGraph sGraph;       /* Information for the graphical EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN */
   ExpertInfo expert;     /* Valid if previous command was ".expert OPT..." */
 #ifdef SQLITE_SHELL_FIDDLE
@@ -1517,7 +1517,7 @@ static ShellState shellState;
 
 /* Bits in the ShellState.flgProgress variable */
 #define SHELL_PROGRESS_QUIET 0x01  /* Omit announcing every progress callback */
-#define SHELL_PROGRESS_RESET 0x02  /* Reset the count when the progres
+#define SHELL_PROGRESS_RESET 0x02  /* Reset the count when the progress
                                    ** callback limit is reached, and for each
                                    ** top-level SQL statement */
 #define SHELL_PROGRESS_ONCE  0x04  /* Cancel the --limit after firing once */
@@ -3031,7 +3031,7 @@ static int run_table_dump_query(
 */
 static char *save_err_msg(
   sqlite3 *db,           /* Database to query */
-  const char *zPhase,    /* When the error occcurs */
+  const char *zPhase,    /* When the error occurs */
   int rc,                /* Error code returned from API */
   const char *zSql       /* SQL string, or NULL */
 ){
@@ -3797,7 +3797,7 @@ static char *quoted_column(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i){
 */
 static void exec_prepared_stmt_columnar(
   ShellState *p,                        /* Pointer to ShellState */
-  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt                   /* Statment to run */
+  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt                   /* Statement to run */
 ){
   sqlite3_int64 nRow = 0;
   int nColumn = 0;
@@ -4330,7 +4330,7 @@ static int shell_exec(
         }
         if( pArg->autoEQP>=AUTOEQP_trigger && triggerEQP==0 ){
           sqlite3_db_config(db, SQLITE_DBCONFIG_TRIGGER_EQP, 0, 0);
-          /* Reprepare pStmt before reactiving trace modes */
+          /* Reprepare pStmt before reactivating trace modes */
           sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
           sqlite3_prepare_v2(db, zSql, -1, &pStmt, 0);
           if( pArg ) pArg->pStmt = pStmt;
@@ -4467,7 +4467,7 @@ static char **tableColumnList(ShellState *p, const char *zTab){
   */
   if( preserveRowid && isIPK ){
     /* If a single PRIMARY KEY column with type INTEGER was seen, then it
-    ** might be an alise for the ROWID.  But it might also be a WITHOUT ROWID
+    ** might be an alias for the ROWID.  But it might also be a WITHOUT ROWID
     ** table or a INTEGER PRIMARY KEY DESC column, neither of which are
     ** ROWID aliases.  To distinguish these cases, check to see if
     ** there is a "pk" entry in "PRAGMA index_list".  There will be
@@ -5444,7 +5444,7 @@ static void open_db(ShellState *p, int openFlags){
     /* Let custom-included extensions get their ..._init() called.
      * The WHATEVER_INIT( db, pzErrorMsg, pApi ) macro should cause
      * the extension's sqlite3_*_init( db, pzErrorMsg, pApi )
-     * inititialization routine to be called.
+     * initialization routine to be called.
      */
     {
       int irc = SHELL_SUBMACRO(SQLITE_SHELL_EXTFUNCS, INIT)(p->db);
@@ -5521,7 +5521,7 @@ static void open_db(ShellState *p, int openFlags){
 }
 
 /*
-** Attempt to close the databaes connection.  Report errors.
+** Attempt to close the database connection.  Report errors.
 */
 void close_db(sqlite3 *db){
   int rc = sqlite3_close(db);
@@ -12093,7 +12093,7 @@ int SQLITE_CDECL wmain(int argc, wchar_t **wargv){
       if( data.aAuxDb->zDbFilename==0 ){
         data.aAuxDb->zDbFilename = z;
       }else{
-        /* Excesss arguments are interpreted as SQL (or dot-commands) and
+        /* Excess arguments are interpreted as SQL (or dot-commands) and
         ** mean that nothing is read from stdin */
         readStdin = 0;
         nCmd++;
diff --git a/src/sqlite.h.in b/src/sqlite.h.in
index 78af06843..6d01c0389 100644
--- a/src/sqlite.h.in
+++ b/src/sqlite.h.in
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ extern "C" {
 ** be held constant and Z will be incremented or else Y will be incremented
 ** and Z will be reset to zero.
 **
-** Since [version 3.6.18] ([dateof:3.6.18]), 
+** Since [version 3.6.18] ([dateof:3.6.18]),
 ** SQLite source code has been stored in the
 ** <a href="http://www.fossil-scm.org/">Fossil configuration management
 ** system</a>.  ^The SQLITE_SOURCE_ID macro evaluates to
@@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ int sqlite3_exec(
 /*
 ** CAPI3REF: OS Interface Open File Handle
 **
-** An [sqlite3_file] object represents an open file in the 
+** An [sqlite3_file] object represents an open file in the
 ** [sqlite3_vfs | OS interface layer].  Individual OS interface
 ** implementations will
 ** want to subclass this object by appending additional fields
@@ -738,7 +738,7 @@ struct sqlite3_file {
 ** This object defines the methods used to perform various operations
 ** against the open file represented by the [sqlite3_file] object.
 **
-** If the [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen] method sets the sqlite3_file.pMethods element 
+** If the [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen] method sets the sqlite3_file.pMethods element
 ** to a non-NULL pointer, then the sqlite3_io_methods.xClose method
 ** may be invoked even if the [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen] reported that it failed.  The
 ** only way to prevent a call to xClose following a failed [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen]
@@ -982,13 +982,13 @@ struct sqlite3_io_methods {
 ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_OVERWRITE]]
 ** ^The [SQLITE_FCNTL_OVERWRITE] opcode is invoked by SQLite after opening
 ** a write transaction to indicate that, unless it is rolled back for some
-** reason, the entire database file will be overwritten by the current 
+** reason, the entire database file will be overwritten by the current
 ** transaction. This is used by VACUUM operations.
 **
 ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_VFSNAME]]
 ** ^The [SQLITE_FCNTL_VFSNAME] opcode can be used to obtain the names of
 ** all [VFSes] in the VFS stack.  The names are of all VFS shims and the
-** final bottom-level VFS are written into memory obtained from 
+** final bottom-level VFS are written into memory obtained from
 ** [sqlite3_malloc()] and the result is stored in the char* variable
 ** that the fourth parameter of [sqlite3_file_control()] points to.
 ** The caller is responsible for freeing the memory when done.  As with
@@ -1179,22 +1179,22 @@ struct sqlite3_io_methods {
 **
 ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_EXTERNAL_READER]]
 ** The EXPERIMENTAL [SQLITE_FCNTL_EXTERNAL_READER] opcode is used to detect
-** whether or not there is a database client in another process with a wal-mode 
+** whether or not there is a database client in another process with a wal-mode
 ** transaction open on the database or not. It is only available on unix.The
 ** (void*) argument passed with this file-control should be a pointer to a
 ** value of type (int). The integer value is set to 1 if the database is a wal
 ** mode database and there exists at least one client in another process that
-** currently has an SQL transaction open on the database. It is set to 0 if 
+** currently has an SQL transaction open on the database. It is set to 0 if
 ** the database is not a wal-mode db, or if there is no such connection in any
 ** other process. This opcode cannot be used to detect transactions opened
 ** by clients within the current process, only within other processes.
 **
 ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_CKSM_FILE]]
-** The [SQLITE_FCNTL_CKSM_FILE] opcode is for use interally by the
+** The [SQLITE_FCNTL_CKSM_FILE] opcode is for use internally by the
 ** [checksum VFS shim] only.
 **
 ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_RESET_CACHE]]
-** If there is currently no transaction open on the database, and the 
+** If there is currently no transaction open on the database, and the
 ** database is not a temp db, then the [SQLITE_FCNTL_RESET_CACHE] file-control
 ** purges the contents of the in-memory page cache. If there is an open
 ** transaction, or if the db is a temp-db, this opcode is a no-op, not an error.
@@ -1496,7 +1496,7 @@ struct sqlite3_vfs {
   /*
   ** The methods above are in versions 1 through 3 of the sqlite_vfs object.
   ** New fields may be appended in future versions.  The iVersion
-  ** value will increment whenever this happens. 
+  ** value will increment whenever this happens.
   */
 };
 
@@ -1688,7 +1688,7 @@ int sqlite3_config(int, ...);
 ** [database connection] (specified in the first argument).
 **
 ** The second argument to sqlite3_db_config(D,V,...)  is the
-** [SQLITE_DBCONFIG_LOOKASIDE | configuration verb] - an integer code 
+** [SQLITE_DBCONFIG_LOOKASIDE | configuration verb] - an integer code
 ** that indicates what aspect of the [database connection] is being configured.
 ** Subsequent arguments vary depending on the configuration verb.
 **
@@ -1736,7 +1736,7 @@ int sqlite3_db_config(sqlite3*, int op, ...);
 ** allocators round up memory allocations at least to the next multiple
 ** of 8.  Some allocators round up to a larger multiple or to a power of 2.
 ** Every memory allocation request coming in through [sqlite3_malloc()]
-** or [sqlite3_realloc()] first calls xRoundup.  If xRoundup returns 0, 
+** or [sqlite3_realloc()] first calls xRoundup.  If xRoundup returns 0,
 ** that causes the corresponding memory allocation to fail.
 **
 ** The xInit method initializes the memory allocator.  For example,
@@ -1811,7 +1811,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 ** by a single thread.   ^If SQLite is compiled with
 ** the [SQLITE_THREADSAFE | SQLITE_THREADSAFE=0] compile-time option then
 ** it is not possible to change the [threading mode] from its default
-** value of Single-thread and so [sqlite3_config()] will return 
+** value of Single-thread and so [sqlite3_config()] will return
 ** [SQLITE_ERROR] if called with the SQLITE_CONFIG_SINGLETHREAD
 ** configuration option.</dd>
 **
@@ -2295,11 +2295,11 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 ** until after the database connection closes.
 ** </dd>
 **
-** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_NO_CKPT_ON_CLOSE]] 
+** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_NO_CKPT_ON_CLOSE]]
 ** <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_NO_CKPT_ON_CLOSE</dt>
-** <dd> Usually, when a database in wal mode is closed or detached from a 
-** database handle, SQLite checks if this will mean that there are now no 
-** connections at all to the database. If so, it performs a checkpoint 
+** <dd> Usually, when a database in wal mode is closed or detached from a
+** database handle, SQLite checks if this will mean that there are now no
+** connections at all to the database. If so, it performs a checkpoint
 ** operation before closing the connection. This option may be used to
 ** override this behaviour. The first parameter passed to this operation
 ** is an integer - positive to disable checkpoints-on-close, or zero (the
@@ -2318,7 +2318,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 ** slower.  But the QPSG has the advantage of more predictable behavior.  With
 ** the QPSG active, SQLite will always use the same query plan in the field as
 ** was used during testing in the lab.
-** The first argument to this setting is an integer which is 0 to disable 
+** The first argument to this setting is an integer which is 0 to disable
 ** the QPSG, positive to enable QPSG, or negative to leave the setting
 ** unchanged. The second parameter is a pointer to an integer into which
 ** is written 0 or 1 to indicate whether the QPSG is disabled or enabled
@@ -2326,15 +2326,15 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 ** </dd>
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_TRIGGER_EQP]] <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_TRIGGER_EQP</dt>
-** <dd> By default, the output of EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN commands does not 
+** <dd> By default, the output of EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN commands does not
 ** include output for any operations performed by trigger programs. This
 ** option is used to set or clear (the default) a flag that governs this
 ** behavior. The first parameter passed to this operation is an integer -
 ** positive to enable output for trigger programs, or zero to disable it,
 ** or negative to leave the setting unchanged.
-** The second parameter is a pointer to an integer into which is written 
-** 0 or 1 to indicate whether output-for-triggers has been disabled - 0 if 
-** it is not disabled, 1 if it is.  
+** The second parameter is a pointer to an integer into which is written
+** 0 or 1 to indicate whether output-for-triggers has been disabled - 0 if
+** it is not disabled, 1 if it is. 
 ** </dd>
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_RESET_DATABASE]] <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_RESET_DATABASE</dt>
@@ -2348,7 +2348,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 **      database, or calling sqlite3_table_column_metadata(), ignoring any
 **      errors.  This step is only necessary if the application desires to keep
 **      the database in WAL mode after the reset if it was in WAL mode before
-**      the reset.  
+**      the reset. 
 ** <li> sqlite3_db_config(db, SQLITE_DBCONFIG_RESET_DATABASE, 1, 0);
 ** <li> [sqlite3_exec](db, "[VACUUM]", 0, 0, 0);
 ** <li> sqlite3_db_config(db, SQLITE_DBCONFIG_RESET_DATABASE, 0, 0);
@@ -2364,7 +2364,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 ** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_DEFENSIVE]] <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_DEFENSIVE</dt>
 ** <dd>The SQLITE_DBCONFIG_DEFENSIVE option activates or deactivates the
 ** "defensive" flag for a database connection.  When the defensive
-** flag is enabled, language features that allow ordinary SQL to 
+** flag is enabled, language features that allow ordinary SQL to
 ** deliberately corrupt the database file are disabled.  The disabled
 ** features include but are not limited to the following:
 ** <ul>
@@ -2380,7 +2380,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 ** <dd>The SQLITE_DBCONFIG_WRITABLE_SCHEMA option activates or deactivates the
 ** "writable_schema" flag. This has the same effect and is logically equivalent
 ** to setting [PRAGMA writable_schema=ON] or [PRAGMA writable_schema=OFF].
-** The first argument to this setting is an integer which is 0 to disable 
+** The first argument to this setting is an integer which is 0 to disable
 ** the writable_schema, positive to enable writable_schema, or negative to
 ** leave the setting unchanged. The second parameter is a pointer to an
 ** integer into which is written 0 or 1 to indicate whether the writable_schema
@@ -2424,7 +2424,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 ** including:
 ** <ul>
 ** <li> Prohibit the use of SQL functions inside triggers, views,
-** CHECK constraints, DEFAULT clauses, expression indexes, 
+** CHECK constraints, DEFAULT clauses, expression indexes,
 ** partial indexes, or generated columns
 ** unless those functions are tagged with [SQLITE_INNOCUOUS].
 ** <li> Prohibit the use of virtual tables inside of triggers or views
@@ -2445,7 +2445,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 ** any SQLite version back to 3.0.0 ([dateof:3.0.0]).  Without this setting,
 ** newly created databases are generally not understandable by SQLite versions
 ** prior to 3.3.0 ([dateof:3.3.0]).  As these words are written, there
-** is now scarcely any need to generate database files that are compatible 
+** is now scarcely any need to generate database files that are compatible
 ** all the way back to version 3.0.0, and so this setting is of little
 ** practical use, but is provided so that SQLite can continue to claim the
 ** ability to generate new database files that are compatible with  version
@@ -2454,7 +2454,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 ** the [VACUUM] command will fail with an obscure error when attempting to
 ** process a table with generated columns and a descending index.  This is
 ** not considered a bug since SQLite versions 3.3.0 and earlier do not support
-** either generated columns or decending indexes.
+** either generated columns or descending indexes.
 ** </dd>
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_STMT_SCANSTATUS]]
@@ -2463,7 +2463,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods {
 ** SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS builds. In this case, it sets or clears
 ** a flag that enables collection of the sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus_v2()
 ** statistics. For statistics to be collected, the flag must be set on
-** the database handle both when the SQL statement is prepared and when it 
+** the database handle both when the SQL statement is prepared and when it
 ** is stepped. The flag is set (collection of statistics is enabled)
 ** by default.  This option takes two arguments: an integer and a pointer to
 ** an integer..  The first argument is 1, 0, or -1 to enable, disable, or
@@ -2537,8 +2537,8 @@ int sqlite3_extended_result_codes(sqlite3*, int onoff);
 ** ^The sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) interface usually returns the [rowid] of
 ** the most recent successful [INSERT] into a rowid table or [virtual table]
 ** on database connection D. ^Inserts into [WITHOUT ROWID] tables are not
-** recorded. ^If no successful [INSERT]s into rowid tables have ever occurred 
-** on the database connection D, then sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) returns 
+** recorded. ^If no successful [INSERT]s into rowid tables have ever occurred
+** on the database connection D, then sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) returns
 ** zero.
 **
 ** As well as being set automatically as rows are inserted into database
@@ -2548,15 +2548,15 @@ int sqlite3_extended_result_codes(sqlite3*, int onoff);
 ** Some virtual table implementations may INSERT rows into rowid tables as
 ** part of committing a transaction (e.g. to flush data accumulated in memory
 ** to disk). In this case subsequent calls to this function return the rowid
-** associated with these internal INSERT operations, which leads to 
+** associated with these internal INSERT operations, which leads to
 ** unintuitive results. Virtual table implementations that do write to rowid
-** tables in this way can avoid this problem by restoring the original 
-** rowid value using [sqlite3_set_last_insert_rowid()] before returning 
+** tables in this way can avoid this problem by restoring the original
+** rowid value using [sqlite3_set_last_insert_rowid()] before returning
 ** control to the user.
 **
-** ^(If an [INSERT] occurs within a trigger then this routine will 
-** return the [rowid] of the inserted row as long as the trigger is 
-** running. Once the trigger program ends, the value returned 
+** ^(If an [INSERT] occurs within a trigger then this routine will
+** return the [rowid] of the inserted row as long as the trigger is
+** running. Once the trigger program ends, the value returned
 ** by this routine reverts to what it was before the trigger was fired.)^
 **
 ** ^An [INSERT] that fails due to a constraint violation is not a
@@ -2589,7 +2589,7 @@ sqlite3_int64 sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(sqlite3*);
 ** METHOD: sqlite3
 **
 ** The sqlite3_set_last_insert_rowid(D, R) method allows the application to
-** set the value returned by calling sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) to R 
+** set the value returned by calling sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) to R
 ** without inserting a row into the database.
 */
 void sqlite3_set_last_insert_rowid(sqlite3*,sqlite3_int64);
@@ -2602,43 +2602,43 @@ void sqlite3_set_last_insert_rowid(sqlite3*,sqlite3_int64);
 ** deleted by the most recently completed INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE
 ** statement on the database connection specified by the only parameter.
 ** The two functions are identical except for the type of the return value
-** and that if the number of rows modified by the most recent INSERT, UPDATE 
+** and that if the number of rows modified by the most recent INSERT, UPDATE
 ** or DELETE is greater than the maximum value supported by type "int", then
 ** the return value of sqlite3_changes() is undefined. ^Executing any other
 ** type of SQL statement does not modify the value returned by these functions.
 **
 ** ^Only changes made directly by the INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE statement are
-** considered - auxiliary changes caused by [CREATE TRIGGER | triggers], 
+** considered - auxiliary changes caused by [CREATE TRIGGER | triggers],
 ** [foreign key actions] or [REPLACE] constraint resolution are not counted.
-** 
-** Changes to a view that are intercepted by 
-** [INSTEAD OF trigger | INSTEAD OF triggers] are not counted. ^The value 
-** returned by sqlite3_changes() immediately after an INSERT, UPDATE or 
-** DELETE statement run on a view is always zero. Only changes made to real 
+**
+** Changes to a view that are intercepted by
+** [INSTEAD OF trigger | INSTEAD OF triggers] are not counted. ^The value
+** returned by sqlite3_changes() immediately after an INSERT, UPDATE or
+** DELETE statement run on a view is always zero. Only changes made to real
 ** tables are counted.
 **
 ** Things are more complicated if the sqlite3_changes() function is
 ** executed while a trigger program is running. This may happen if the
 ** program uses the [changes() SQL function], or if some other callback
 ** function invokes sqlite3_changes() directly. Essentially:
-** 
+**
 ** <ul>
 **   <li> ^(Before entering a trigger program the value returned by
-**        sqlite3_changes() function is saved. After the trigger program 
+**        sqlite3_changes() function is saved. After the trigger program
 **        has finished, the original value is restored.)^
-** 
-**   <li> ^(Within a trigger program each INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE 
-**        statement sets the value returned by sqlite3_changes() 
-**        upon completion as normal. Of course, this value will not include 
-**        any changes performed by sub-triggers, as the sqlite3_changes() 
+**
+**   <li> ^(Within a trigger program each INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE
+**        statement sets the value returned by sqlite3_changes()
+**        upon completion as normal. Of course, this value will not include
+**        any changes performed by sub-triggers, as the sqlite3_changes()
 **        value will be saved and restored after each sub-trigger has run.)^
 ** </ul>
-** 
+**
 ** ^This means that if the changes() SQL function (or similar) is used
-** by the first INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE statement within a trigger, it 
+** by the first INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE statement within a trigger, it
 ** returns the value as set when the calling statement began executing.
-** ^If it is used by the second or subsequent such statement within a trigger 
-** program, the value returned reflects the number of rows modified by the 
+** ^If it is used by the second or subsequent such statement within a trigger
+** program, the value returned reflects the number of rows modified by the
 ** previous INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE statement within the same trigger.
 **
 ** If a separate thread makes changes on the same database connection
@@ -2663,16 +2663,16 @@ sqlite3_int64 sqlite3_changes64(sqlite3*);
 ** ^These functions return the total number of rows inserted, modified or
 ** deleted by all [INSERT], [UPDATE] or [DELETE] statements completed
 ** since the database connection was opened, including those executed as
-** part of trigger programs. The two functions are identical except for the 
-** type of the return value and that if the number of rows modified by the 
+** part of trigger programs. The two functions are identical except for the
+** type of the return value and that if the number of rows modified by the
 ** connection exceeds the maximum value supported by type "int", then
-** the return value of sqlite3_total_changes() is undefined. ^Executing 
-** any other type of SQL statement does not affect the value returned by 
+** the return value of sqlite3_total_changes() is undefined. ^Executing
+** any other type of SQL statement does not affect the value returned by
 ** sqlite3_total_changes().
-** 
+**
 ** ^Changes made as part of [foreign key actions] are included in the
 ** count, but those made as part of REPLACE constraint resolution are
-** not. ^Changes to a view that are intercepted by INSTEAD OF triggers 
+** not. ^Changes to a view that are intercepted by INSTEAD OF triggers
 ** are not counted.
 **
 ** The [sqlite3_total_changes(D)] interface only reports the number
@@ -2681,7 +2681,7 @@ sqlite3_int64 sqlite3_changes64(sqlite3*);
 ** To detect changes against a database file from other database
 ** connections use the [PRAGMA data_version] command or the
 ** [SQLITE_FCNTL_DATA_VERSION] [file control].
-** 
+**
 ** If a separate thread makes changes on the same database connection
 ** while [sqlite3_total_changes()] is running then the value
 ** returned is unpredictable and not meaningful.
@@ -2724,7 +2724,7 @@ sqlite3_int64 sqlite3_total_changes64(sqlite3*);
 **
 ** ^The sqlite3_interrupt(D) call is in effect until all currently running
 ** SQL statements on [database connection] D complete.  ^Any new SQL statements
-** that are started after the sqlite3_interrupt() call and before the 
+** that are started after the sqlite3_interrupt() call and before the
 ** running statement count reaches zero are interrupted as if they had been
 ** running prior to the sqlite3_interrupt() call.  ^New SQL statements
 ** that are started after the running statement count reaches zero are
@@ -2761,7 +2761,7 @@ int sqlite3_is_interrupted(sqlite3*);
 ** ^These routines do not parse the SQL statements thus
 ** will not detect syntactically incorrect SQL.
 **
-** ^(If SQLite has not been initialized using [sqlite3_initialize()] prior 
+** ^(If SQLite has not been initialized using [sqlite3_initialize()] prior
 ** to invoking sqlite3_complete16() then sqlite3_initialize() is invoked
 ** automatically by sqlite3_complete16().  If that initialization fails,
 ** then the return value from sqlite3_complete16() will be non-zero
@@ -2806,7 +2806,7 @@ int sqlite3_complete16(const void *sql);
 ** The presence of a busy handler does not guarantee that it will be invoked
 ** when there is lock contention. ^If SQLite determines that invoking the busy
 ** handler could result in a deadlock, it will go ahead and return [SQLITE_BUSY]
-** to the application instead of invoking the 
+** to the application instead of invoking the
 ** busy handler.
 ** Consider a scenario where one process is holding a read lock that
 ** it is trying to promote to a reserved lock and
@@ -2831,7 +2831,7 @@ int sqlite3_complete16(const void *sql);
 ** database connection that invoked the busy handler.  In other words,
 ** the busy handler is not reentrant.  Any such actions
 ** result in undefined behavior.
-** 
+**
 ** A busy handler must not close the database connection
 ** or [prepared statement] that invoked the busy handler.
 */
@@ -2949,7 +2949,7 @@ void sqlite3_free_table(char **result);
 ** These routines are work-alikes of the "printf()" family of functions
 ** from the standard C library.
 ** These routines understand most of the common formatting options from
-** the standard library printf() 
+** the standard library printf()
 ** plus some additional non-standard formats ([%q], [%Q], [%w], and [%z]).
 ** See the [built-in printf()] documentation for details.
 **
@@ -3145,7 +3145,7 @@ void sqlite3_randomness(int N, void *P);
 ** requested is ok.  ^When the callback returns [SQLITE_DENY], the
 ** [sqlite3_prepare_v2()] or equivalent call that triggered the
 ** authorizer will fail with an error message explaining that
-** access is denied. 
+** access is denied.
 **
 ** ^The first parameter to the authorizer callback is a copy of the third
 ** parameter to the sqlite3_set_authorizer() interface. ^The second parameter
@@ -3198,7 +3198,7 @@ void sqlite3_randomness(int N, void *P);
 ** database connections for the meaning of "modify" in this paragraph.
 **
 ** ^When [sqlite3_prepare_v2()] is used to prepare a statement, the
-** statement might be re-prepared during [sqlite3_step()] due to a 
+** statement might be re-prepared during [sqlite3_step()] due to a
 ** schema change.  Hence, the application should ensure that the
 ** correct authorizer callback remains in place during the [sqlite3_step()].
 **
@@ -3394,7 +3394,7 @@ SQLITE_DEPRECATED void *sqlite3_profile(sqlite3*,
 ** sqlite3_trace_v2(D,M,X,P) for the [database connection] D.  Each
 ** database connection may have at most one trace callback.
 **
-** ^The X callback is invoked whenever any of the events identified by 
+** ^The X callback is invoked whenever any of the events identified by
 ** mask M occur.  ^The integer return value from the callback is currently
 ** ignored, though this may change in future releases.  Callback
 ** implementations should return zero to ensure future compatibility.
@@ -3426,8 +3426,8 @@ int sqlite3_trace_v2(
 ** database connection D.  An example use for this
 ** interface is to keep a GUI updated during a large query.
 **
-** ^The parameter P is passed through as the only parameter to the 
-** callback function X.  ^The parameter N is the approximate number of 
+** ^The parameter P is passed through as the only parameter to the
+** callback function X.  ^The parameter N is the approximate number of
 ** [virtual machine instructions] that are evaluated between successive
 ** invocations of the callback X.  ^If N is less than one then the progress
 ** handler is disabled.
@@ -3604,17 +3604,17 @@ void sqlite3_progress_handler(sqlite3*, int, int(*)(void*), void*);
 ** information.
 **
 ** URI filenames are parsed according to RFC 3986. ^If the URI contains an
-** authority, then it must be either an empty string or the string 
-** "localhost". ^If the authority is not an empty string or "localhost", an 
-** error is returned to the caller. ^The fragment component of a URI, if 
+** authority, then it must be either an empty string or the string
+** "localhost". ^If the authority is not an empty string or "localhost", an
+** error is returned to the caller. ^The fragment component of a URI, if
 ** present, is ignored.
 **
 ** ^SQLite uses the path component of the URI as the name of the disk file
-** which contains the database. ^If the path begins with a '/' character, 
-** then it is interpreted as an absolute path. ^If the path does not begin 
+** which contains the database. ^If the path begins with a '/' character,
+** then it is interpreted as an absolute path. ^If the path does not begin
 ** with a '/' (meaning that the authority section is omitted from the URI)
-** then the path is interpreted as a relative path. 
-** ^(On windows, the first component of an absolute path 
+** then the path is interpreted as a relative path.
+** ^(On windows, the first component of an absolute path
 ** is a drive specification (e.g. "C:").)^
 **
 ** [[core URI query parameters]]
@@ -3634,13 +3634,13 @@ void sqlite3_progress_handler(sqlite3*, int, int(*)(void*), void*);
 **
 **   <li> <b>mode</b>: ^(The mode parameter may be set to either "ro", "rw",
 **     "rwc", or "memory". Attempting to set it to any other value is
-**     an error)^. 
-**     ^If "ro" is specified, then the database is opened for read-only 
-**     access, just as if the [SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY] flag had been set in the 
-**     third argument to sqlite3_open_v2(). ^If the mode option is set to 
-**     "rw", then the database is opened for read-write (but not create) 
-**     access, as if SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE (but not SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE) had 
-**     been set. ^Value "rwc" is equivalent to setting both 
+**     an error)^.
+**     ^If "ro" is specified, then the database is opened for read-only
+**     access, just as if the [SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY] flag had been set in the
+**     third argument to sqlite3_open_v2(). ^If the mode option is set to
+**     "rw", then the database is opened for read-write (but not create)
+**     access, as if SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE (but not SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE) had
+**     been set. ^Value "rwc" is equivalent to setting both
 **     SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE and SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE.  ^If the mode option is
 **     set to "memory" then a pure [in-memory database] that never reads
 **     or writes from disk is used. ^It is an error to specify a value for
@@ -3650,7 +3650,7 @@ void sqlite3_progress_handler(sqlite3*, int, int(*)(void*), void*);
 **   <li> <b>cache</b>: ^The cache parameter may be set to either "shared" or
 **     "private". ^Setting it to "shared" is equivalent to setting the
 **     SQLITE_OPEN_SHAREDCACHE bit in the flags argument passed to
-**     sqlite3_open_v2(). ^Setting the cache parameter to "private" is 
+**     sqlite3_open_v2(). ^Setting the cache parameter to "private" is
 **     equivalent to setting the SQLITE_OPEN_PRIVATECACHE bit.
 **     ^If sqlite3_open_v2() is used and the "cache" parameter is present in
 **     a URI filename, its value overrides any behavior requested by setting
@@ -3676,7 +3676,7 @@ void sqlite3_progress_handler(sqlite3*, int, int(*)(void*), void*);
 **     property on a database file that does in fact change can result
 **     in incorrect query results and/or [SQLITE_CORRUPT] errors.
 **     See also: [SQLITE_IOCAP_IMMUTABLE].
-**       
+**      
 ** </ul>
 **
 ** ^Specifying an unknown parameter in the query component of a URI is not an
@@ -3688,37 +3688,37 @@ void sqlite3_progress_handler(sqlite3*, int, int(*)(void*), void*);
 **
 ** <table border="1" align=center cellpadding=5>
 ** <tr><th> URI filenames <th> Results
-** <tr><td> file:data.db <td> 
+** <tr><td> file:data.db <td>
 **          Open the file "data.db" in the current directory.
 ** <tr><td> file:/home/fred/data.db<br>
-**          file:///home/fred/data.db <br> 
-**          file://localhost/home/fred/data.db <br> <td> 
+**          file:///home/fred/data.db <br>
+**          file://localhost/home/fred/data.db <br> <td>
 **          Open the database file "/home/fred/data.db".
-** <tr><td> file://darkstar/home/fred/data.db <td> 
+** <tr><td> file://darkstar/home/fred/data.db <td>
 **          An error. "darkstar" is not a recognized authority.
-** <tr><td style="white-space:nowrap"> 
+** <tr><td style="white-space:nowrap">
 **          file:///C:/Documents%20and%20Settings/fred/Desktop/data.db
 **     <td> Windows only: Open the file "data.db" on fred's desktop on drive
-**          C:. Note that the %20 escaping in this example is not strictly 
+**          C:. Note that the %20 escaping in this example is not strictly
 **          necessary - space characters can be used literally
 **          in URI filenames.
-** <tr><td> file:data.db?mode=ro&cache=private <td> 
+** <tr><td> file:data.db?mode=ro&cache=private <td>
 **          Open file "data.db" in the current directory for read-only access.
 **          Regardless of whether or not shared-cache mode is enabled by
 **          default, use a private cache.
 ** <tr><td> file:/home/fred/data.db?vfs=unix-dotfile <td>
 **          Open file "/home/fred/data.db". Use the special VFS "unix-dotfile"
 **          that uses dot-files in place of posix advisory locking.
-** <tr><td> file:data.db?mode=readonly <td> 
+** <tr><td> file:data.db?mode=readonly <td>
 **          An error. "readonly" is not a valid option for the "mode" parameter.
 **          Use "ro" instead:  "file:data.db?mode=ro".
 ** </table>
 **
 ** ^URI hexadecimal escape sequences (%HH) are supported within the path and
 ** query components of a URI. A hexadecimal escape sequence consists of a
-** percent sign - "%" - followed by exactly two hexadecimal digits 
+** percent sign - "%" - followed by exactly two hexadecimal digits
 ** specifying an octet value. ^Before the path or query components of a
-** URI filename are interpreted, they are encoded using UTF-8 and all 
+** URI filename are interpreted, they are encoded using UTF-8 and all
 ** hexadecimal escape sequences replaced by a single byte containing the
 ** corresponding octet. If this process generates an invalid UTF-8 encoding,
 ** the results are undefined.
@@ -3754,14 +3754,14 @@ int sqlite3_open_v2(
 ** CAPI3REF: Obtain Values For URI Parameters
 **
 ** These are utility routines, useful to [VFS|custom VFS implementations],
-** that check if a database file was a URI that contained a specific query 
+** that check if a database file was a URI that contained a specific query
 ** parameter, and if so obtains the value of that query parameter.
 **
 ** The first parameter to these interfaces (hereafter referred to
 ** as F) must be one of:
 ** <ul>
 ** <li> A database filename pointer created by the SQLite core and
-** passed into the xOpen() method of a VFS implemention, or
+** passed into the xOpen() method of a VFS implementation, or
 ** <li> A filename obtained from [sqlite3_db_filename()], or
 ** <li> A new filename constructed using [sqlite3_create_filename()].
 ** </ul>
@@ -3772,7 +3772,7 @@ int sqlite3_open_v2(
 ** If F is a suitable filename (as described in the previous paragraph)
 ** and if P is the name of the query parameter, then
 ** sqlite3_uri_parameter(F,P) returns the value of the P
-** parameter if it exists or a NULL pointer if P does not appear as a 
+** parameter if it exists or a NULL pointer if P does not appear as a
 ** query parameter on F.  If P is a query parameter of F and it
 ** has no explicit value, then sqlite3_uri_parameter(F,P) returns
 ** a pointer to an empty string.
@@ -3781,7 +3781,7 @@ int sqlite3_open_v2(
 ** parameter and returns true (1) or false (0) according to the value
 ** of P.  The sqlite3_uri_boolean(F,P,B) routine returns true (1) if the
 ** value of query parameter P is one of "yes", "true", or "on" in any
-** case or if the value begins with a non-zero number.  The 
+** case or if the value begins with a non-zero number.  The
 ** sqlite3_uri_boolean(F,P,B) routines returns false (0) if the value of
 ** query parameter P is one of "no", "false", or "off" in any case or
 ** if the value begins with a numeric zero.  If P is not a query
@@ -3799,7 +3799,7 @@ int sqlite3_open_v2(
 ** parameters minus 1.  The N value is zero-based so N should be 0 to obtain
 ** the name of the first query parameter, 1 for the second parameter, and
 ** so forth.
-** 
+**
 ** If F is a NULL pointer, then sqlite3_uri_parameter(F,P) returns NULL and
 ** sqlite3_uri_boolean(F,P,B) returns B.  If F is not a NULL pointer and
 ** is not a database file pathname pointer that the SQLite core passed
@@ -3856,14 +3856,14 @@ const char *sqlite3_filename_wal(sqlite3_filename);
 ** CAPI3REF:  Database File Corresponding To A Journal
 **
 ** ^If X is the name of a rollback or WAL-mode journal file that is
-** passed into the xOpen method of [sqlite3_vfs], then 
+** passed into the xOpen method of [sqlite3_vfs], then
 ** sqlite3_database_file_object(X) returns a pointer to the [sqlite3_file]
 ** object that represents the main database file.
 **
 ** This routine is intended for use in custom [VFS] implementations
 ** only.  It is not a general-purpose interface.
 ** The argument sqlite3_file_object(X) must be a filename pointer that
-** has been passed into [sqlite3_vfs].xOpen method where the 
+** has been passed into [sqlite3_vfs].xOpen method where the
 ** flags parameter to xOpen contains one of the bits
 ** [SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL] or [SQLITE_OPEN_WAL].  Any other use
 ** of this routine results in undefined and probably undesirable
@@ -3874,7 +3874,7 @@ sqlite3_file *sqlite3_database_file_object(const char*);
 /*
 ** CAPI3REF: Create and Destroy VFS Filenames
 **
-** These interfces are provided for use by [VFS shim] implementations and
+** These interfaces are provided for use by [VFS shim] implementations and
 ** are not useful outside of that context.
 **
 ** The sqlite3_create_filename(D,J,W,N,P) allocates memory to hold a version of
@@ -3886,7 +3886,7 @@ sqlite3_file *sqlite3_database_file_object(const char*);
 ** <li> [sqlite3_uri_parameter()],
 ** <li> [sqlite3_uri_boolean()],
 ** <li> [sqlite3_uri_int64()],
-** <li> [sqlite3_uri_key()], 
+** <li> [sqlite3_uri_key()],
 ** <li> [sqlite3_filename_database()],
 ** <li> [sqlite3_filename_journal()], or
 ** <li> [sqlite3_filename_wal()].
@@ -3910,7 +3910,7 @@ sqlite3_file *sqlite3_database_file_object(const char*);
 ** If the Y parameter to sqlite3_free_filename(Y) is anything other
 ** than a NULL pointer or a pointer previously acquired from
 ** sqlite3_create_filename(), then bad things such as heap
-** corruption or segfaults may occur. The value Y should not be 
+** corruption or segfaults may occur. The value Y should not be
 ** used again after sqlite3_free_filename(Y) has been called.  This means
 ** that if the [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen()] method of a VFS has been called using Y,
 ** then the corresponding [sqlite3_module.xClose() method should also be
@@ -3929,12 +3929,12 @@ void sqlite3_free_filename(sqlite3_filename);
 ** CAPI3REF: Error Codes And Messages
 ** METHOD: sqlite3
 **
-** ^If the most recent sqlite3_* API call associated with 
+** ^If the most recent sqlite3_* API call associated with
 ** [database connection] D failed, then the sqlite3_errcode(D) interface
 ** returns the numeric [result code] or [extended result code] for that
 ** API call.
 ** ^The sqlite3_extended_errcode()
-** interface is the same except that it always returns the 
+** interface is the same except that it always returns the
 ** [extended result code] even when extended result codes are
 ** disabled.
 **
@@ -4000,7 +4000,7 @@ int sqlite3_error_offset(sqlite3 *db);
 ** has been compiled into binary form and is ready to be evaluated.
 **
 ** Think of each SQL statement as a separate computer program.  The
-** original SQL text is source code.  A prepared statement object 
+** original SQL text is source code.  A prepared statement object
 ** is the compiled object code.  All SQL must be converted into a
 ** prepared statement before it can be run.
 **
@@ -4030,7 +4030,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_stmt sqlite3_stmt;
 ** new limit for that construct.)^
 **
 ** ^If the new limit is a negative number, the limit is unchanged.
-** ^(For each limit category SQLITE_LIMIT_<i>NAME</i> there is a 
+** ^(For each limit category SQLITE_LIMIT_<i>NAME</i> there is a
 ** [limits | hard upper bound]
 ** set at compile-time by a C preprocessor macro called
 ** [limits | SQLITE_MAX_<i>NAME</i>].
@@ -4038,7 +4038,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_stmt sqlite3_stmt;
 ** ^Attempts to increase a limit above its hard upper bound are
 ** silently truncated to the hard upper bound.
 **
-** ^Regardless of whether or not the limit was changed, the 
+** ^Regardless of whether or not the limit was changed, the
 ** [sqlite3_limit()] interface returns the prior value of the limit.
 ** ^Hence, to find the current value of a limit without changing it,
 ** simply invoke this interface with the third parameter set to -1.
@@ -4143,7 +4143,7 @@ int sqlite3_limit(sqlite3*, int id, int newVal);
 ** <dd>The SQLITE_PREPARE_PERSISTENT flag is a hint to the query planner
 ** that the prepared statement will be retained for a long time and
 ** probably reused many times.)^ ^Without this flag, [sqlite3_prepare_v3()]
-** and [sqlite3_prepare16_v3()] assume that the prepared statement will 
+** and [sqlite3_prepare16_v3()] assume that the prepared statement will
 ** be used just once or at most a few times and then destroyed using
 ** [sqlite3_finalize()] relatively soon. The current implementation acts
 ** on this hint by avoiding the use of [lookaside memory] so as not to
@@ -4250,12 +4250,12 @@ int sqlite3_limit(sqlite3*, int id, int newVal);
 ** </li>
 **
 ** <li>
-** ^If the specific value bound to a [parameter | host parameter] in the 
+** ^If the specific value bound to a [parameter | host parameter] in the
 ** WHERE clause might influence the choice of query plan for a statement,
-** then the statement will be automatically recompiled, as if there had been 
+** then the statement will be automatically recompiled, as if there had been
 ** a schema change, on the first [sqlite3_step()] call following any change
-** to the [sqlite3_bind_text | bindings] of that [parameter]. 
-** ^The specific value of a WHERE-clause [parameter] might influence the 
+** to the [sqlite3_bind_text | bindings] of that [parameter].
+** ^The specific value of a WHERE-clause [parameter] might influence the
 ** choice of query plan if the parameter is the left-hand side of a [LIKE]
 ** or [GLOB] operator or if the parameter is compared to an indexed column
 ** and the [SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4] compile-time option is enabled.
@@ -4369,8 +4369,8 @@ const char *sqlite3_normalized_sql(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** the content of the database file.
 **
 ** Note that [application-defined SQL functions] or
-** [virtual tables] might change the database indirectly as a side effect.  
-** ^(For example, if an application defines a function "eval()" that 
+** [virtual tables] might change the database indirectly as a side effect. 
+** ^(For example, if an application defines a function "eval()" that
 ** calls [sqlite3_exec()], then the following SQL statement would
 ** change the database file through side-effects:
 **
@@ -4384,10 +4384,10 @@ const char *sqlite3_normalized_sql(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** ^Transaction control statements such as [BEGIN], [COMMIT], [ROLLBACK],
 ** [SAVEPOINT], and [RELEASE] cause sqlite3_stmt_readonly() to return true,
 ** since the statements themselves do not actually modify the database but
-** rather they control the timing of when other statements modify the 
+** rather they control the timing of when other statements modify the
 ** database.  ^The [ATTACH] and [DETACH] statements also cause
 ** sqlite3_stmt_readonly() to return true since, while those statements
-** change the configuration of a database connection, they do not make 
+** change the configuration of a database connection, they do not make
 ** changes to the content of the database files on disk.
 ** ^The sqlite3_stmt_readonly() interface returns true for [BEGIN] since
 ** [BEGIN] merely sets internal flags, but the [BEGIN|BEGIN IMMEDIATE] and
@@ -4400,7 +4400,7 @@ const char *sqlite3_normalized_sql(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** ^For example, an UPDATE statement might have a WHERE clause that
 ** makes it a no-op, but the sqlite3_stmt_readonly() result would still
 ** be false.  ^Similarly, a CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS statement is a
-** read-only no-op if the table already exists, but 
+** read-only no-op if the table already exists, but
 ** sqlite3_stmt_readonly() still returns false for such a statement.
 **
 ** ^If prepared statement X is an [EXPLAIN] or [EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN]
@@ -4426,18 +4426,18 @@ int sqlite3_stmt_isexplain(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** METHOD: sqlite3_stmt
 **
 ** ^The sqlite3_stmt_busy(S) interface returns true (non-zero) if the
-** [prepared statement] S has been stepped at least once using 
+** [prepared statement] S has been stepped at least once using
 ** [sqlite3_step(S)] but has neither run to completion (returned
 ** [SQLITE_DONE] from [sqlite3_step(S)]) nor
 ** been reset using [sqlite3_reset(S)].  ^The sqlite3_stmt_busy(S)
-** interface returns false if S is a NULL pointer.  If S is not a 
+** interface returns false if S is a NULL pointer.  If S is not a
 ** NULL pointer and is not a pointer to a valid [prepared statement]
 ** object, then the behavior is undefined and probably undesirable.
 **
 ** This interface can be used in combination [sqlite3_next_stmt()]
-** to locate all prepared statements associated with a database 
+** to locate all prepared statements associated with a database
 ** connection that are in need of being reset.  This can be used,
-** for example, in diagnostic routines to search for prepared 
+** for example, in diagnostic routines to search for prepared
 ** statements that are holding a transaction open.
 */
 int sqlite3_stmt_busy(sqlite3_stmt*);
@@ -4456,7 +4456,7 @@ int sqlite3_stmt_busy(sqlite3_stmt*);
 ** will accept either a protected or an unprotected sqlite3_value.
 ** Every interface that accepts sqlite3_value arguments specifies
 ** whether or not it requires a protected sqlite3_value.  The
-** [sqlite3_value_dup()] interface can be used to construct a new 
+** [sqlite3_value_dup()] interface can be used to construct a new
 ** protected sqlite3_value from an unprotected sqlite3_value.
 **
 ** The terms "protected" and "unprotected" refer to whether or not
@@ -4464,7 +4464,7 @@ int sqlite3_stmt_busy(sqlite3_stmt*);
 ** sqlite3_value object but no mutex is held for an unprotected
 ** sqlite3_value object.  If SQLite is compiled to be single-threaded
 ** (with [SQLITE_THREADSAFE=0] and with [sqlite3_threadsafe()] returning 0)
-** or if SQLite is run in one of reduced mutex modes 
+** or if SQLite is run in one of reduced mutex modes
 ** [SQLITE_CONFIG_SINGLETHREAD] or [SQLITE_CONFIG_MULTITHREAD]
 ** then there is no distinction between protected and unprotected
 ** sqlite3_value objects and they can be used interchangeably.  However,
@@ -4555,7 +4555,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_context sqlite3_context;
 ** found in first character, which is removed, or in the absence of a BOM
 ** the byte order is the native byte order of the host
 ** machine for sqlite3_bind_text16() or the byte order specified in
-** the 6th parameter for sqlite3_bind_text64().)^ 
+** the 6th parameter for sqlite3_bind_text64().)^
 ** ^If UTF16 input text contains invalid unicode
 ** characters, then SQLite might change those invalid characters
 ** into the unicode replacement character: U+FFFD.
@@ -4572,7 +4572,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_context sqlite3_context;
 ** or sqlite3_bind_text16() or sqlite3_bind_text64() then
 ** that parameter must be the byte offset
 ** where the NUL terminator would occur assuming the string were NUL
-** terminated.  If any NUL characters occurs at byte offsets less than 
+** terminated.  If any NUL characters occurs at byte offsets less than
 ** the value of the fourth parameter then the resulting string value will
 ** contain embedded NULs.  The result of expressions involving strings
 ** with embedded NULs is undefined.
@@ -4584,7 +4584,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_context sqlite3_context;
 ** with it may be passed. ^It is called to dispose of the BLOB or string even
 ** if the call to the bind API fails, except the destructor is not called if
 ** the third parameter is a NULL pointer or the fourth parameter is negative.
-** ^ (2) The special constant, [SQLITE_STATIC], may be passsed to indicate that
+** ^ (2) The special constant, [SQLITE_STATIC], may be passed to indicate that
 ** the application remains responsible for disposing of the object. ^In this
 ** case, the object and the provided pointer to it must remain valid until
 ** either the prepared statement is finalized or the same SQL parameter is
@@ -4738,7 +4738,7 @@ int sqlite3_clear_bindings(sqlite3_stmt*);
 ** METHOD: sqlite3_stmt
 **
 ** ^Return the number of columns in the result set returned by the
-** [prepared statement]. ^If this routine returns 0, that means the 
+** [prepared statement]. ^If this routine returns 0, that means the
 ** [prepared statement] returns no data (for example an [UPDATE]).
 ** ^However, just because this routine returns a positive number does not
 ** mean that one or more rows of data will be returned.  ^A SELECT statement
@@ -4920,7 +4920,7 @@ const void *sqlite3_column_decltype16(sqlite3_stmt*,int);
 ** For all versions of SQLite up to and including 3.6.23.1, a call to
 ** [sqlite3_reset()] was required after sqlite3_step() returned anything
 ** other than [SQLITE_ROW] before any subsequent invocation of
-** sqlite3_step().  Failure to reset the prepared statement using 
+** sqlite3_step().  Failure to reset the prepared statement using
 ** [sqlite3_reset()] would result in an [SQLITE_MISUSE] return from
 ** sqlite3_step().  But after [version 3.6.23.1] ([dateof:3.6.23.1],
 ** sqlite3_step() began
@@ -5011,7 +5011,7 @@ int sqlite3_data_count(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_int64</b><td>&rarr;<td>64-bit INTEGER result
 ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_text</b><td>&rarr;<td>UTF-8 TEXT result
 ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_text16</b><td>&rarr;<td>UTF-16 TEXT result
-** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_value</b><td>&rarr;<td>The result as an 
+** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_value</b><td>&rarr;<td>The result as an
 ** [sqlite3_value|unprotected sqlite3_value] object.
 ** <tr><td>&nbsp;<td>&nbsp;<td>&nbsp;
 ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_bytes</b><td>&rarr;<td>Size of a BLOB
@@ -5059,7 +5059,7 @@ int sqlite3_data_count(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** The return value of sqlite3_column_type() can be used to decide which
 ** of the first six interface should be used to extract the column value.
 ** The value returned by sqlite3_column_type() is only meaningful if no
-** automatic type conversions have occurred for the value in question.  
+** automatic type conversions have occurred for the value in question. 
 ** After a type conversion, the result of calling sqlite3_column_type()
 ** is undefined, though harmless.  Future
 ** versions of SQLite may change the behavior of sqlite3_column_type()
@@ -5087,7 +5087,7 @@ int sqlite3_data_count(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** the number of bytes in that string.
 ** ^If the result is NULL, then sqlite3_column_bytes16() returns zero.
 **
-** ^The values returned by [sqlite3_column_bytes()] and 
+** ^The values returned by [sqlite3_column_bytes()] and
 ** [sqlite3_column_bytes16()] do not include the zero terminators at the end
 ** of the string.  ^For clarity: the values returned by
 ** [sqlite3_column_bytes()] and [sqlite3_column_bytes16()] are the number of
@@ -5110,7 +5110,7 @@ int sqlite3_data_count(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** to routines like [sqlite3_value_int()], [sqlite3_value_text()],
 ** or [sqlite3_value_bytes()], the behavior is not threadsafe.
 ** Hence, the sqlite3_column_value() interface
-** is normally only useful within the implementation of 
+** is normally only useful within the implementation of
 ** [application-defined SQL functions] or [virtual tables], not within
 ** top-level application code.
 **
@@ -5297,8 +5297,8 @@ int sqlite3_reset(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** ^These functions (collectively known as "function creation routines")
 ** are used to add SQL functions or aggregates or to redefine the behavior
 ** of existing SQL functions or aggregates. The only differences between
-** the three "sqlite3_create_function*" routines are the text encoding 
-** expected for the second parameter (the name of the function being 
+** the three "sqlite3_create_function*" routines are the text encoding
+** expected for the second parameter (the name of the function being
 ** created) and the presence or absence of a destructor callback for
 ** the application data pointer. Function sqlite3_create_window_function()
 ** is similar, but allows the user to supply the extra callback functions
@@ -5312,7 +5312,7 @@ int sqlite3_reset(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** ^The second parameter is the name of the SQL function to be created or
 ** redefined.  ^The length of the name is limited to 255 bytes in a UTF-8
 ** representation, exclusive of the zero-terminator.  ^Note that the name
-** length limit is in UTF-8 bytes, not characters nor UTF-16 bytes.  
+** length limit is in UTF-8 bytes, not characters nor UTF-16 bytes. 
 ** ^Any attempt to create a function with a longer name
 ** will result in [SQLITE_MISUSE] being returned.
 **
@@ -5327,7 +5327,7 @@ int sqlite3_reset(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** ^The fourth parameter, eTextRep, specifies what
 ** [SQLITE_UTF8 | text encoding] this SQL function prefers for
 ** its parameters.  The application should set this parameter to
-** [SQLITE_UTF16LE] if the function implementation invokes 
+** [SQLITE_UTF16LE] if the function implementation invokes
 ** [sqlite3_value_text16le()] on an input, or [SQLITE_UTF16BE] if the
 ** implementation invokes [sqlite3_value_text16be()] on an input, or
 ** [SQLITE_UTF16] if [sqlite3_value_text16()] is used, or [SQLITE_UTF8]
@@ -5353,7 +5353,7 @@ int sqlite3_reset(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** For best security, the [SQLITE_DIRECTONLY] flag is recommended for
 ** all application-defined SQL functions that do not need to be
 ** used inside of triggers, view, CHECK constraints, or other elements of
-** the database schema.  This flags is especially recommended for SQL 
+** the database schema.  This flags is especially recommended for SQL
 ** functions that have side effects or reveal internal application state.
 ** Without this flag, an attacker might be able to modify the schema of
 ** a database file to include invocations of the function with parameters
@@ -5373,21 +5373,21 @@ int sqlite3_reset(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** SQL function or aggregate, pass NULL pointers for all three function
 ** callbacks.
 **
-** ^The sixth, seventh, eighth and ninth parameters (xStep, xFinal, xValue 
+** ^The sixth, seventh, eighth and ninth parameters (xStep, xFinal, xValue
 ** and xInverse) passed to sqlite3_create_window_function are pointers to
 ** C-language callbacks that implement the new function. xStep and xFinal
 ** must both be non-NULL. xValue and xInverse may either both be NULL, in
-** which case a regular aggregate function is created, or must both be 
+** which case a regular aggregate function is created, or must both be
 ** non-NULL, in which case the new function may be used as either an aggregate
 ** or aggregate window function. More details regarding the implementation
-** of aggregate window functions are 
+** of aggregate window functions are
 ** [user-defined window functions|available here].
 **
 ** ^(If the final parameter to sqlite3_create_function_v2() or
 ** sqlite3_create_window_function() is not NULL, then it is destructor for
-** the application data pointer. The destructor is invoked when the function 
-** is deleted, either by being overloaded or when the database connection 
-** closes.)^ ^The destructor is also invoked if the call to 
+** the application data pointer. The destructor is invoked when the function
+** is deleted, either by being overloaded or when the database connection
+** closes.)^ ^The destructor is also invoked if the call to
 ** sqlite3_create_function_v2() fails.  ^When the destructor callback is
 ** invoked, it is passed a single argument which is a copy of the application
 ** data pointer which was the fifth parameter to sqlite3_create_function_v2().
@@ -5400,7 +5400,7 @@ int sqlite3_reset(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt);
 ** nArg parameter is a better match than a function implementation with
 ** a negative nArg.  ^A function where the preferred text encoding
 ** matches the database encoding is a better
-** match than a function where the encoding is different.  
+** match than a function where the encoding is different. 
 ** ^A function where the encoding difference is between UTF16le and UTF16be
 ** is a closer match than a function where the encoding difference is
 ** between UTF8 and UTF16.
@@ -5472,7 +5472,7 @@ int sqlite3_create_window_function(
 /*
 ** CAPI3REF: Function Flags
 **
-** These constants may be ORed together with the 
+** These constants may be ORed together with the
 ** [SQLITE_UTF8 | preferred text encoding] as the fourth argument
 ** to [sqlite3_create_function()], [sqlite3_create_function16()], or
 ** [sqlite3_create_function_v2()].
@@ -5488,18 +5488,18 @@ int sqlite3_create_window_function(
 ** SQLite might also optimize deterministic functions by factoring them
 ** out of inner loops.
 ** </dd>
-** 
+**
 ** [[SQLITE_DIRECTONLY]] <dt>SQLITE_DIRECTONLY</dt><dd>
 ** The SQLITE_DIRECTONLY flag means that the function may only be invoked
-** from top-level SQL, and cannot be used in VIEWs or TRIGGERs nor in 
+** from top-level SQL, and cannot be used in VIEWs or TRIGGERs nor in
 ** schema structures such as [CHECK constraints], [DEFAULT clauses],
 ** [expression indexes], [partial indexes], or [generated columns].
 ** <p>
-** The SQLITE_DIRECTONLY flag is recommended for any 
+** The SQLITE_DIRECTONLY flag is recommended for any
 ** [application-defined SQL function]
 ** that has side-effects or that could potentially leak sensitive information.
 ** This will prevent attacks in which an application is tricked
-** into using a database file that has had its schema surreptiously
+** into using a database file that has had its schema surreptitiously
 ** modified to invoke the application-defined function in ways that are
 ** harmful.
 ** <p>
@@ -5555,7 +5555,7 @@ int sqlite3_create_window_function(
 ** DEPRECATED
 **
 ** These functions are [deprecated].  In order to maintain
-** backwards compatibility with older code, these functions continue 
+** backwards compatibility with older code, these functions continue
 ** to be supported.  However, new applications should avoid
 ** the use of these functions.  To encourage programmers to avoid
 ** these functions, we will not explain what they do.
@@ -5623,11 +5623,11 @@ SQLITE_DEPRECATED int sqlite3_memory_alarm(void(*)(void*,sqlite3_int64,int),
 ** sqlite3_value_text16be() and sqlite3_value_text16le() interfaces
 ** extract UTF-16 strings as big-endian and little-endian respectively.
 **
-** ^If [sqlite3_value] object V was initialized 
+** ^If [sqlite3_value] object V was initialized
 ** using [sqlite3_bind_pointer(S,I,P,X,D)] or [sqlite3_result_pointer(C,P,X,D)]
 ** and if X and Y are strings that compare equal according to strcmp(X,Y),
 ** then sqlite3_value_pointer(V,Y) will return the pointer P.  ^Otherwise,
-** sqlite3_value_pointer(V,Y) returns a NULL. The sqlite3_bind_pointer() 
+** sqlite3_value_pointer(V,Y) returns a NULL. The sqlite3_bind_pointer()
 ** routine is part of the [pointer passing interface] added for SQLite 3.20.0.
 **
 ** ^(The sqlite3_value_type(V) interface returns the
@@ -5773,7 +5773,7 @@ void sqlite3_value_free(sqlite3_value*);
 ** Implementations of aggregate SQL functions use this
 ** routine to allocate memory for storing their state.
 **
-** ^The first time the sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) routine is called 
+** ^The first time the sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) routine is called
 ** for a particular aggregate function, SQLite allocates
 ** N bytes of memory, zeroes out that memory, and returns a pointer
 ** to the new memory. ^On second and subsequent calls to
@@ -5786,7 +5786,7 @@ void sqlite3_value_free(sqlite3_value*);
 ** In those cases, sqlite3_aggregate_context() might be called for the
 ** first time from within xFinal().)^
 **
-** ^The sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) routine returns a NULL pointer 
+** ^The sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) routine returns a NULL pointer
 ** when first called if N is less than or equal to zero or if a memory
 ** allocation error occurs.
 **
@@ -5795,10 +5795,10 @@ void sqlite3_value_free(sqlite3_value*);
 ** value of N in any subsequent call to sqlite3_aggregate_context() within
 ** the same aggregate function instance will not resize the memory
 ** allocation.)^  Within the xFinal callback, it is customary to set
-** N=0 in calls to sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) so that no 
+** N=0 in calls to sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) so that no
 ** pointless memory allocations occur.
 **
-** ^SQLite automatically frees the memory allocated by 
+** ^SQLite automatically frees the memory allocated by
 ** sqlite3_aggregate_context() when the aggregate query concludes.
 **
 ** The first parameter must be a copy of the
@@ -5848,7 +5848,7 @@ sqlite3 *sqlite3_context_db_handle(sqlite3_context*);
 ** some circumstances the associated metadata may be preserved.  An example
 ** of where this might be useful is in a regular-expression matching
 ** function. The compiled version of the regular expression can be stored as
-** metadata associated with the pattern string.  
+** metadata associated with the pattern string. 
 ** Then as long as the pattern string remains the same,
 ** the compiled regular expression can be reused on multiple
 ** invocations of the same function.
@@ -5874,10 +5874,10 @@ sqlite3 *sqlite3_context_db_handle(sqlite3_context*);
 **      SQL statement)^, or
 ** <li> ^(when sqlite3_set_auxdata() is invoked again on the same
 **       parameter)^, or
-** <li> ^(during the original sqlite3_set_auxdata() call when a memory 
+** <li> ^(during the original sqlite3_set_auxdata() call when a memory
 **      allocation error occurs.)^ </ul>
 **
-** Note the last bullet in particular.  The destructor X in 
+** Note the last bullet in particular.  The destructor X in
 ** sqlite3_set_auxdata(C,N,P,X) might be called immediately, before the
 ** sqlite3_set_auxdata() interface even returns.  Hence sqlite3_set_auxdata()
 ** should be called near the end of the function implementation and the
@@ -6051,7 +6051,7 @@ typedef void (*sqlite3_destructor_type)(void*);
 **
 ** ^The sqlite3_result_pointer(C,P,T,D) interface sets the result to an
 ** SQL NULL value, just like [sqlite3_result_null(C)], except that it
-** also associates the host-language pointer P or type T with that 
+** also associates the host-language pointer P or type T with that
 ** NULL value such that the pointer can be retrieved within an
 ** [application-defined SQL function] using [sqlite3_value_pointer()].
 ** ^If the D parameter is not NULL, then it is a pointer to a destructor
@@ -6093,8 +6093,8 @@ int sqlite3_result_zeroblob64(sqlite3_context*, sqlite3_uint64 n);
 ** METHOD: sqlite3_context
 **
 ** The sqlite3_result_subtype(C,T) function causes the subtype of
-** the result from the [application-defined SQL function] with 
-** [sqlite3_context] C to be the value T.  Only the lower 8 bits 
+** the result from the [application-defined SQL function] with
+** [sqlite3_context] C to be the value T.  Only the lower 8 bits
 ** of the subtype T are preserved in current versions of SQLite;
 ** higher order bits are discarded.
 ** The number of subtype bytes preserved by SQLite might increase
@@ -6141,7 +6141,7 @@ void sqlite3_result_subtype(sqlite3_context*,unsigned int);
 ** deleted.  ^When all collating functions having the same name are deleted,
 ** that collation is no longer usable.
 **
-** ^The collating function callback is invoked with a copy of the pArg 
+** ^The collating function callback is invoked with a copy of the pArg
 ** application data pointer and with two strings in the encoding specified
 ** by the eTextRep argument.  The two integer parameters to the collating
 ** function callback are the length of the two strings, in bytes. The collating
@@ -6172,36 +6172,36 @@ void sqlite3_result_subtype(sqlite3_context*,unsigned int);
 ** calls to the collation creation functions or when the
 ** [database connection] is closed using [sqlite3_close()].
 **
-** ^The xDestroy callback is <u>not</u> called if the 
+** ^The xDestroy callback is <u>not</u> called if the
 ** sqlite3_create_collation_v2() function fails.  Applications that invoke
-** sqlite3_create_collation_v2() with a non-NULL xDestroy argument should 
+** sqlite3_create_collation_v2() with a non-NULL xDestroy argument should
 ** check the return code and dispose of the application data pointer
 ** themselves rather than expecting SQLite to deal with it for them.
-** This is different from every other SQLite interface.  The inconsistency 
-** is unfortunate but cannot be changed without breaking backwards 
+** This is different from every other SQLite interface.  The inconsistency
+** is unfortunate but cannot be changed without breaking backwards
 ** compatibility.
 **
 ** See also:  [sqlite3_collation_needed()] and [sqlite3_collation_needed16()].
 */
 int sqlite3_create_collation(
-  sqlite3*, 
-  const char *zName, 
-  int eTextRep, 
+  sqlite3*,
+  const char *zName,
+  int eTextRep,
   void *pArg,
   int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*)
 );
 int sqlite3_create_collation_v2(
-  sqlite3*, 
-  const char *zName, 
-  int eTextRep, 
+  sqlite3*,
+  const char *zName,
+  int eTextRep,
   void *pArg,
   int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*),
   void(*xDestroy)(void*)
 );
 int sqlite3_create_collation16(
-  sqlite3*, 
+  sqlite3*,
   const void *zName,
-  int eTextRep, 
+  int eTextRep,
   void *pArg,
   int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*)
 );
@@ -6234,19 +6234,19 @@ int sqlite3_create_collation16(
 ** [sqlite3_create_collation_v2()].
 */
 int sqlite3_collation_needed(
-  sqlite3*, 
-  void*, 
+  sqlite3*,
+  void*,
   void(*)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const char*)
 );
 int sqlite3_collation_needed16(
-  sqlite3*, 
+  sqlite3*,
   void*,
   void(*)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const void*)
 );
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_CEROD
 /*
-** Specify the activation key for a CEROD database.  Unless 
+** Specify the activation key for a CEROD database.  Unless
 ** activated, none of the CEROD routines will work.
 */
 void sqlite3_activate_cerod(
@@ -6309,7 +6309,7 @@ int sqlite3_sleep(int);
 ** ^The [temp_store_directory pragma] may modify this variable and cause
 ** it to point to memory obtained from [sqlite3_malloc].  ^Furthermore,
 ** the [temp_store_directory pragma] always assumes that any string
-** that this variable points to is held in memory obtained from 
+** that this variable points to is held in memory obtained from
 ** [sqlite3_malloc] and the pragma may attempt to free that memory
 ** using [sqlite3_free].
 ** Hence, if this variable is modified directly, either it should be
@@ -6366,7 +6366,7 @@ SQLITE_EXTERN char *sqlite3_temp_directory;
 ** ^The [data_store_directory pragma] may modify this variable and cause
 ** it to point to memory obtained from [sqlite3_malloc].  ^Furthermore,
 ** the [data_store_directory pragma] always assumes that any string
-** that this variable points to is held in memory obtained from 
+** that this variable points to is held in memory obtained from
 ** [sqlite3_malloc] and the pragma may attempt to free that memory
 ** using [sqlite3_free].
 ** Hence, if this variable is modified directly, either it should be
@@ -6632,7 +6632,7 @@ void *sqlite3_rollback_hook(sqlite3*, void(*)(void *), void*);
 ** CAPI3REF: Autovacuum Compaction Amount Callback
 ** METHOD: sqlite3
 **
-** ^The sqlite3_autovacuum_pages(D,C,P,X) interface registers a callback 
+** ^The sqlite3_autovacuum_pages(D,C,P,X) interface registers a callback
 ** function C that is invoked prior to each autovacuum of the database
 ** file.  ^The callback is passed a copy of the generic data pointer (P),
 ** the schema-name of the attached database that is being autovacuumed,
@@ -6744,7 +6744,7 @@ int sqlite3_autovacuum_pages(
 ** and [sqlite3_preupdate_hook()] interfaces.
 */
 void *sqlite3_update_hook(
-  sqlite3*, 
+  sqlite3*,
   void(*)(void *,int ,char const *,char const *,sqlite3_int64),
   void*
 );
@@ -6763,7 +6763,7 @@ void *sqlite3_update_hook(
 ** [use of shared cache mode is discouraged].
 **
 ** ^Cache sharing is enabled and disabled for an entire process.
-** This is a change as of SQLite [version 3.5.0] ([dateof:3.5.0]). 
+** This is a change as of SQLite [version 3.5.0] ([dateof:3.5.0]).
 ** In prior versions of SQLite,
 ** sharing was enabled or disabled for each thread separately.
 **
@@ -6784,8 +6784,8 @@ void *sqlite3_update_hook(
 ** with the [SQLITE_OPEN_SHAREDCACHE] flag.
 **
 ** Note: This method is disabled on MacOS X 10.7 and iOS version 5.0
-** and will always return SQLITE_MISUSE. On those systems, 
-** shared cache mode should be enabled per-database connection via 
+** and will always return SQLITE_MISUSE. On those systems,
+** shared cache mode should be enabled per-database connection via
 ** [sqlite3_open_v2()] with [SQLITE_OPEN_SHAREDCACHE].
 **
 ** This interface is threadsafe on processors where writing a
@@ -6838,7 +6838,7 @@ int sqlite3_db_release_memory(sqlite3*);
 ** as heap memory usages approaches the limit.
 ** ^The soft heap limit is "soft" because even though SQLite strives to stay
 ** below the limit, it will exceed the limit rather than generate
-** an [SQLITE_NOMEM] error.  In other words, the soft heap limit 
+** an [SQLITE_NOMEM] error.  In other words, the soft heap limit
 ** is advisory only.
 **
 ** ^The sqlite3_hard_heap_limit64(N) interface sets a hard upper bound of
@@ -6954,7 +6954,7 @@ SQLITE_DEPRECATED void sqlite3_soft_heap_limit(int N);
 **
 ** ^If the specified table is actually a view, an [error code] is returned.
 **
-** ^If the specified column is "rowid", "oid" or "_rowid_" and the table 
+** ^If the specified column is "rowid", "oid" or "_rowid_" and the table
 ** is not a [WITHOUT ROWID] table and an
 ** [INTEGER PRIMARY KEY] column has been explicitly declared, then the output
 ** parameters are set for the explicitly declared column. ^(If there is no
@@ -7020,7 +7020,7 @@ int sqlite3_table_column_metadata(
 ** prior to calling this API,
 ** otherwise an error will be returned.
 **
-** <b>Security warning:</b> It is recommended that the 
+** <b>Security warning:</b> It is recommended that the
 ** [SQLITE_DBCONFIG_ENABLE_LOAD_EXTENSION] method be used to enable only this
 ** interface.  The use of the [sqlite3_enable_load_extension()] interface
 ** should be avoided.  This will keep the SQL function [load_extension()]
@@ -7107,7 +7107,7 @@ int sqlite3_auto_extension(void(*xEntryPoint)(void));
 ** ^The [sqlite3_cancel_auto_extension(X)] interface unregisters the
 ** initialization routine X that was registered using a prior call to
 ** [sqlite3_auto_extension(X)].  ^The [sqlite3_cancel_auto_extension(X)]
-** routine returns 1 if initialization routine X was successfully 
+** routine returns 1 if initialization routine X was successfully
 ** unregistered and it returns 0 if X was not on the list of initialization
 ** routines.
 */
@@ -7133,8 +7133,8 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_module sqlite3_module;
 ** CAPI3REF: Virtual Table Object
 ** KEYWORDS: sqlite3_module {virtual table module}
 **
-** This structure, sometimes called a "virtual table module", 
-** defines the implementation of a [virtual table].  
+** This structure, sometimes called a "virtual table module",
+** defines the implementation of a [virtual table]. 
 ** This structure consists mostly of methods for the module.
 **
 ** ^A virtual table module is created by filling in a persistent
@@ -7173,7 +7173,7 @@ struct sqlite3_module {
                        void (**pxFunc)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value**),
                        void **ppArg);
   int (*xRename)(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab, const char *zNew);
-  /* The methods above are in version 1 of the sqlite_module object. Those 
+  /* The methods above are in version 1 of the sqlite_module object. Those
   ** below are for version 2 and greater. */
   int (*xSavepoint)(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, int);
   int (*xRelease)(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, int);
@@ -7223,7 +7223,7 @@ struct sqlite3_module {
 ** required by SQLite. If the table has at least 64 columns and any column
 ** to the right of the first 63 is required, then bit 63 of colUsed is also
 ** set. In other words, column iCol may be required if the expression
-** (colUsed & ((sqlite3_uint64)1 << (iCol>=63 ? 63 : iCol))) evaluates to 
+** (colUsed & ((sqlite3_uint64)1 << (iCol>=63 ? 63 : iCol))) evaluates to
 ** non-zero.
 **
 ** The [xBestIndex] method must fill aConstraintUsage[] with information
@@ -7250,17 +7250,17 @@ struct sqlite3_module {
 **
 ** ^The estimatedCost value is an estimate of the cost of a particular
 ** strategy. A cost of N indicates that the cost of the strategy is similar
-** to a linear scan of an SQLite table with N rows. A cost of log(N) 
+** to a linear scan of an SQLite table with N rows. A cost of log(N)
 ** indicates that the expense of the operation is similar to that of a
 ** binary search on a unique indexed field of an SQLite table with N rows.
 **
 ** ^The estimatedRows value is an estimate of the number of rows that
 ** will be returned by the strategy.
 **
-** The xBestIndex method may optionally populate the idxFlags field with a 
+** The xBestIndex method may optionally populate the idxFlags field with a
 ** mask of SQLITE_INDEX_SCAN_* flags. Currently there is only one such flag -
 ** SQLITE_INDEX_SCAN_UNIQUE. If the xBestIndex method sets this flag, SQLite
-** assumes that the strategy may visit at most one row. 
+** assumes that the strategy may visit at most one row.
 **
 ** Additionally, if xBestIndex sets the SQLITE_INDEX_SCAN_UNIQUE flag, then
 ** SQLite also assumes that if a call to the xUpdate() method is made as
@@ -7273,14 +7273,14 @@ struct sqlite3_module {
 ** the xUpdate method are automatically rolled back by SQLite.
 **
 ** IMPORTANT: The estimatedRows field was added to the sqlite3_index_info
-** structure for SQLite [version 3.8.2] ([dateof:3.8.2]). 
+** structure for SQLite [version 3.8.2] ([dateof:3.8.2]).
 ** If a virtual table extension is
-** used with an SQLite version earlier than 3.8.2, the results of attempting 
-** to read or write the estimatedRows field are undefined (but are likely 
+** used with an SQLite version earlier than 3.8.2, the results of attempting
+** to read or write the estimatedRows field are undefined (but are likely
 ** to include crashing the application). The estimatedRows field should
 ** therefore only be used if [sqlite3_libversion_number()] returns a
 ** value greater than or equal to 3008002. Similarly, the idxFlags field
-** was added for [version 3.9.0] ([dateof:3.9.0]). 
+** was added for [version 3.9.0] ([dateof:3.9.0]).
 ** It may therefore only be used if
 ** sqlite3_libversion_number() returns a value greater than or equal to
 ** 3009000.
@@ -7320,7 +7320,7 @@ struct sqlite3_index_info {
 /*
 ** CAPI3REF: Virtual Table Scan Flags
 **
-** Virtual table implementations are allowed to set the 
+** Virtual table implementations are allowed to set the
 ** [sqlite3_index_info].idxFlags field to some combination of
 ** these bits.
 */
@@ -7392,7 +7392,7 @@ struct sqlite3_index_info {
 ** preexisting [virtual table] for the module.
 **
 ** ^The module name is registered on the [database connection] specified
-** by the first parameter.  ^The name of the module is given by the 
+** by the first parameter.  ^The name of the module is given by the
 ** second parameter.  ^The third parameter is a pointer to
 ** the implementation of the [virtual table module].   ^The fourth
 ** parameter is an arbitrary client data pointer that is passed through
@@ -7507,7 +7507,7 @@ int sqlite3_declare_vtab(sqlite3*, const char *zSQL);
 ** METHOD: sqlite3
 **
 ** ^(Virtual tables can provide alternative implementations of functions
-** using the [xFindFunction] method of the [virtual table module].  
+** using the [xFindFunction] method of the [virtual table module]. 
 ** But global versions of those functions
 ** must exist in order to be overloaded.)^
 **
@@ -7548,7 +7548,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_blob sqlite3_blob;
 **     SELECT zColumn FROM zDb.zTable WHERE [rowid] = iRow;
 ** </pre>)^
 **
-** ^(Parameter zDb is not the filename that contains the database, but 
+** ^(Parameter zDb is not the filename that contains the database, but
 ** rather the symbolic name of the database. For attached databases, this is
 ** the name that appears after the AS keyword in the [ATTACH] statement.
 ** For the main database file, the database name is "main". For TEMP
@@ -7561,28 +7561,28 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_blob sqlite3_blob;
 ** ^(On success, [SQLITE_OK] is returned and the new [BLOB handle] is stored
 ** in *ppBlob. Otherwise an [error code] is returned and, unless the error
 ** code is SQLITE_MISUSE, *ppBlob is set to NULL.)^ ^This means that, provided
-** the API is not misused, it is always safe to call [sqlite3_blob_close()] 
+** the API is not misused, it is always safe to call [sqlite3_blob_close()]
 ** on *ppBlob after this function it returns.
 **
 ** This function fails with SQLITE_ERROR if any of the following are true:
 ** <ul>
-**   <li> ^(Database zDb does not exist)^, 
-**   <li> ^(Table zTable does not exist within database zDb)^, 
-**   <li> ^(Table zTable is a WITHOUT ROWID table)^, 
+**   <li> ^(Database zDb does not exist)^,
+**   <li> ^(Table zTable does not exist within database zDb)^,
+**   <li> ^(Table zTable is a WITHOUT ROWID table)^,
 **   <li> ^(Column zColumn does not exist)^,
 **   <li> ^(Row iRow is not present in the table)^,
 **   <li> ^(The specified column of row iRow contains a value that is not
 **         a TEXT or BLOB value)^,
-**   <li> ^(Column zColumn is part of an index, PRIMARY KEY or UNIQUE 
+**   <li> ^(Column zColumn is part of an index, PRIMARY KEY or UNIQUE
 **         constraint and the blob is being opened for read/write access)^,
-**   <li> ^([foreign key constraints | Foreign key constraints] are enabled, 
+**   <li> ^([foreign key constraints | Foreign key constraints] are enabled,
 **         column zColumn is part of a [child key] definition and the blob is
 **         being opened for read/write access)^.
 ** </ul>
 **
-** ^Unless it returns SQLITE_MISUSE, this function sets the 
-** [database connection] error code and message accessible via 
-** [sqlite3_errcode()] and [sqlite3_errmsg()] and related functions. 
+** ^Unless it returns SQLITE_MISUSE, this function sets the
+** [database connection] error code and message accessible via
+** [sqlite3_errcode()] and [sqlite3_errmsg()] and related functions.
 **
 ** A BLOB referenced by sqlite3_blob_open() may be read using the
 ** [sqlite3_blob_read()] interface and modified by using
@@ -7608,7 +7608,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_blob sqlite3_blob;
 ** blob.
 **
 ** ^The [sqlite3_bind_zeroblob()] and [sqlite3_result_zeroblob()] interfaces
-** and the built-in [zeroblob] SQL function may be used to create a 
+** and the built-in [zeroblob] SQL function may be used to create a
 ** zero-filled blob to read or write using the incremental-blob interface.
 **
 ** To avoid a resource leak, every open [BLOB handle] should eventually
@@ -7658,7 +7658,7 @@ int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *, sqlite3_int64);
 ** DESTRUCTOR: sqlite3_blob
 **
 ** ^This function closes an open [BLOB handle]. ^(The BLOB handle is closed
-** unconditionally.  Even if this routine returns an error code, the 
+** unconditionally.  Even if this routine returns an error code, the
 ** handle is still closed.)^
 **
 ** ^If the blob handle being closed was opened for read-write access, and if
@@ -7668,10 +7668,10 @@ int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *, sqlite3_int64);
 ** code is returned and the transaction rolled back.
 **
 ** Calling this function with an argument that is not a NULL pointer or an
-** open blob handle results in undefined behaviour. ^Calling this routine 
-** with a null pointer (such as would be returned by a failed call to 
+** open blob handle results in undefined behaviour. ^Calling this routine
+** with a null pointer (such as would be returned by a failed call to
 ** [sqlite3_blob_open()]) is a harmless no-op. ^Otherwise, if this function
-** is passed a valid open blob handle, the values returned by the 
+** is passed a valid open blob handle, the values returned by the
 ** sqlite3_errcode() and sqlite3_errmsg() functions are set before returning.
 */
 int sqlite3_blob_close(sqlite3_blob *);
@@ -7680,7 +7680,7 @@ int sqlite3_blob_close(sqlite3_blob *);
 ** CAPI3REF: Return The Size Of An Open BLOB
 ** METHOD: sqlite3_blob
 **
-** ^Returns the size in bytes of the BLOB accessible via the 
+** ^Returns the size in bytes of the BLOB accessible via the
 ** successfully opened [BLOB handle] in its only argument.  ^The
 ** incremental blob I/O routines can only read or overwriting existing
 ** blob content; they cannot change the size of a blob.
@@ -7731,9 +7731,9 @@ int sqlite3_blob_read(sqlite3_blob *, void *Z, int N, int iOffset);
 **
 ** ^(On success, sqlite3_blob_write() returns SQLITE_OK.
 ** Otherwise, an  [error code] or an [extended error code] is returned.)^
-** ^Unless SQLITE_MISUSE is returned, this function sets the 
-** [database connection] error code and message accessible via 
-** [sqlite3_errcode()] and [sqlite3_errmsg()] and related functions. 
+** ^Unless SQLITE_MISUSE is returned, this function sets the
+** [database connection] error code and message accessible via
+** [sqlite3_errcode()] and [sqlite3_errmsg()] and related functions.
 **
 ** ^If the [BLOB handle] passed as the first argument was not opened for
 ** writing (the flags parameter to [sqlite3_blob_open()] was zero),
@@ -7742,9 +7742,9 @@ int sqlite3_blob_read(sqlite3_blob *, void *Z, int N, int iOffset);
 ** This function may only modify the contents of the BLOB; it is
 ** not possible to increase the size of a BLOB using this API.
 ** ^If offset iOffset is less than N bytes from the end of the BLOB,
-** [SQLITE_ERROR] is returned and no data is written. The size of the 
-** BLOB (and hence the maximum value of N+iOffset) can be determined 
-** using the [sqlite3_blob_bytes()] interface. ^If N or iOffset are less 
+** [SQLITE_ERROR] is returned and no data is written. The size of the
+** BLOB (and hence the maximum value of N+iOffset) can be determined
+** using the [sqlite3_blob_bytes()] interface. ^If N or iOffset are less
 ** than zero [SQLITE_ERROR] is returned and no data is written.
 **
 ** ^An attempt to write to an expired [BLOB handle] fails with an
@@ -8063,7 +8063,7 @@ int sqlite3_mutex_notheld(sqlite3_mutex*);
 ** CAPI3REF: Retrieve the mutex for a database connection
 ** METHOD: sqlite3
 **
-** ^This interface returns a pointer the [sqlite3_mutex] object that 
+** ^This interface returns a pointer the [sqlite3_mutex] object that
 ** serializes access to the [database connection] given in the argument
 ** when the [threading mode] is Serialized.
 ** ^If the [threading mode] is Single-thread or Multi-thread then this
@@ -8090,7 +8090,7 @@ sqlite3_mutex *sqlite3_db_mutex(sqlite3*);
 ** method becomes the return value of this routine.
 **
 ** A few opcodes for [sqlite3_file_control()] are handled directly
-** by the SQLite core and never invoke the 
+** by the SQLite core and never invoke the
 ** sqlite3_io_methods.xFileControl method.
 ** ^The [SQLITE_FCNTL_FILE_POINTER] value for the op parameter causes
 ** a pointer to the underlying [sqlite3_file] object to be written into
@@ -8181,7 +8181,7 @@ int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...);
 /*
 ** CAPI3REF: SQL Keyword Checking
 **
-** These routines provide access to the set of SQL language keywords 
+** These routines provide access to the set of SQL language keywords
 ** recognized by SQLite.  Applications can uses these routines to determine
 ** whether or not a specific identifier needs to be escaped (for example,
 ** by enclosing in double-quotes) so as not to confuse the parser.
@@ -8253,14 +8253,14 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_str sqlite3_str;
 **
 ** ^The [sqlite3_str_new(D)] interface allocates and initializes
 ** a new [sqlite3_str] object.  To avoid memory leaks, the object returned by
-** [sqlite3_str_new()] must be freed by a subsequent call to 
+** [sqlite3_str_new()] must be freed by a subsequent call to
 ** [sqlite3_str_finish(X)].
 **
 ** ^The [sqlite3_str_new(D)] interface always returns a pointer to a
 ** valid [sqlite3_str] object, though in the event of an out-of-memory
 ** error the returned object might be a special singleton that will
-** silently reject new text, always return SQLITE_NOMEM from 
-** [sqlite3_str_errcode()], always return 0 for 
+** silently reject new text, always return SQLITE_NOMEM from
+** [sqlite3_str_errcode()], always return 0 for
 ** [sqlite3_str_length()], and always return NULL from
 ** [sqlite3_str_finish(X)].  It is always safe to use the value
 ** returned by [sqlite3_str_new(D)] as the sqlite3_str parameter
@@ -8296,9 +8296,9 @@ char *sqlite3_str_finish(sqlite3_str*);
 ** These interfaces add content to an sqlite3_str object previously obtained
 ** from [sqlite3_str_new()].
 **
-** ^The [sqlite3_str_appendf(X,F,...)] and 
+** ^The [sqlite3_str_appendf(X,F,...)] and
 ** [sqlite3_str_vappendf(X,F,V)] interfaces uses the [built-in printf]
-** functionality of SQLite to append formatted text onto the end of 
+** functionality of SQLite to append formatted text onto the end of
 ** [sqlite3_str] object X.
 **
 ** ^The [sqlite3_str_append(X,S,N)] method appends exactly N bytes from string S
@@ -8315,7 +8315,7 @@ char *sqlite3_str_finish(sqlite3_str*);
 ** ^This method can be used, for example, to add whitespace indentation.
 **
 ** ^The [sqlite3_str_reset(X)] method resets the string under construction
-** inside [sqlite3_str] object X back to zero bytes in length.  
+** inside [sqlite3_str] object X back to zero bytes in length. 
 **
 ** These methods do not return a result code.  ^If an error occurs, that fact
 ** is recorded in the [sqlite3_str] object and can be recovered by a
@@ -8417,7 +8417,7 @@ int sqlite3_status64(
 ** <dd>This parameter records the largest memory allocation request
 ** handed to [sqlite3_malloc()] or [sqlite3_realloc()] (or their
 ** internal equivalents).  Only the value returned in the
-** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest.  
+** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest. 
 ** The value written into the *pCurrent parameter is undefined.</dd>)^
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_MALLOC_COUNT]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_MALLOC_COUNT</dt>
@@ -8426,11 +8426,11 @@ int sqlite3_status64(
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_USED]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_USED</dt>
 ** <dd>This parameter returns the number of pages used out of the
-** [pagecache memory allocator] that was configured using 
+** [pagecache memory allocator] that was configured using
 ** [SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE].  The
 ** value returned is in pages, not in bytes.</dd>)^
 **
-** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_OVERFLOW]] 
+** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_OVERFLOW]]
 ** ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_OVERFLOW</dt>
 ** <dd>This parameter returns the number of bytes of page cache
 ** allocation which could not be satisfied by the [SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE]
@@ -8443,7 +8443,7 @@ int sqlite3_status64(
 ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_SIZE]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_SIZE</dt>
 ** <dd>This parameter records the largest memory allocation request
 ** handed to the [pagecache memory allocator].  Only the value returned in the
-** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest.  
+** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest. 
 ** The value written into the *pCurrent parameter is undefined.</dd>)^
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_SCRATCH_USED]] <dt>SQLITE_STATUS_SCRATCH_USED</dt>
@@ -8456,7 +8456,7 @@ int sqlite3_status64(
 ** <dd>No longer used.</dd>
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PARSER_STACK]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PARSER_STACK</dt>
-** <dd>The *pHighwater parameter records the deepest parser stack. 
+** <dd>The *pHighwater parameter records the deepest parser stack.
 ** The *pCurrent value is undefined.  The *pHighwater value is only
 ** meaningful if SQLite is compiled with [YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH].</dd>)^
 ** </dl>
@@ -8478,12 +8478,12 @@ int sqlite3_status64(
 ** CAPI3REF: Database Connection Status
 ** METHOD: sqlite3
 **
-** ^This interface is used to retrieve runtime status information 
+** ^This interface is used to retrieve runtime status information
 ** about a single [database connection].  ^The first argument is the
 ** database connection object to be interrogated.  ^The second argument
 ** is an integer constant, taken from the set of
 ** [SQLITE_DBSTATUS options], that
-** determines the parameter to interrogate.  The set of 
+** determines the parameter to interrogate.  The set of
 ** [SQLITE_DBSTATUS options] is likely
 ** to grow in future releases of SQLite.
 **
@@ -8518,7 +8518,7 @@ int sqlite3_db_status(sqlite3*, int op, int *pCur, int *pHiwtr, int resetFlg);
 ** checked out.</dd>)^
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_LOOKASIDE_HIT]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_LOOKASIDE_HIT</dt>
-** <dd>This parameter returns the number of malloc attempts that were 
+** <dd>This parameter returns the number of malloc attempts that were
 ** satisfied using lookaside memory. Only the high-water value is meaningful;
 ** the current value is always zero.)^
 **
@@ -8543,7 +8543,7 @@ int sqlite3_db_status(sqlite3*, int op, int *pCur, int *pHiwtr, int resetFlg);
 ** memory used by all pager caches associated with the database connection.)^
 ** ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED is always 0.
 **
-** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED_SHARED]] 
+** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED_SHARED]]
 ** ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED_SHARED</dt>
 ** <dd>This parameter is similar to DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED, except that if a
 ** pager cache is shared between two or more connections the bytes of heap
@@ -8558,7 +8558,7 @@ int sqlite3_db_status(sqlite3*, int op, int *pCur, int *pHiwtr, int resetFlg);
 ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_SCHEMA_USED]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_SCHEMA_USED</dt>
 ** <dd>This parameter returns the approximate number of bytes of heap
 ** memory used to store the schema for all databases associated
-** with the connection - main, temp, and any [ATTACH]-ed databases.)^ 
+** with the connection - main, temp, and any [ATTACH]-ed databases.)^
 ** ^The full amount of memory used by the schemas is reported, even if the
 ** schema memory is shared with other database connections due to
 ** [shared cache mode] being enabled.
@@ -8573,13 +8573,13 @@ int sqlite3_db_status(sqlite3*, int op, int *pCur, int *pHiwtr, int resetFlg);
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT</dt>
 ** <dd>This parameter returns the number of pager cache hits that have
-** occurred.)^ ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT 
+** occurred.)^ ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT
 ** is always 0.
 ** </dd>
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS</dt>
 ** <dd>This parameter returns the number of pager cache misses that have
-** occurred.)^ ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS 
+** occurred.)^ ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS
 ** is always 0.
 ** </dd>
 **
@@ -8637,7 +8637,7 @@ int sqlite3_db_status(sqlite3*, int op, int *pCur, int *pHiwtr, int resetFlg);
 ** statements.  For example, if the number of table steps greatly exceeds
 ** the number of table searches or result rows, that would tend to indicate
 ** that the prepared statement is using a full table scan rather than
-** an index.  
+** an index. 
 **
 ** ^(This interface is used to retrieve and reset counter values from
 ** a [prepared statement].  The first argument is the prepared statement
@@ -8664,7 +8664,7 @@ int sqlite3_stmt_status(sqlite3_stmt*, int op,int resetFlg);
 ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FULLSCAN_STEP]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FULLSCAN_STEP</dt>
 ** <dd>^This is the number of times that SQLite has stepped forward in
 ** a table as part of a full table scan.  Large numbers for this counter
-** may indicate opportunities for performance improvement through 
+** may indicate opportunities for performance improvement through
 ** careful use of indices.</dd>
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_SORT]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_SORT</dt>
@@ -8682,14 +8682,14 @@ int sqlite3_stmt_status(sqlite3_stmt*, int op,int resetFlg);
 ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP</dt>
 ** <dd>^This is the number of virtual machine operations executed
 ** by the prepared statement if that number is less than or equal
-** to 2147483647.  The number of virtual machine operations can be 
+** to 2147483647.  The number of virtual machine operations can be
 ** used as a proxy for the total work done by the prepared statement.
 ** If the number of virtual machine operations exceeds 2147483647
 ** then the value returned by this statement status code is undefined.
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_REPREPARE]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_REPREPARE</dt>
 ** <dd>^This is the number of times that the prepare statement has been
-** automatically regenerated due to schema changes or changes to 
+** automatically regenerated due to schema changes or changes to
 ** [bound parameters] that might affect the query plan.
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_RUN]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_RUN</dt>
@@ -8700,7 +8700,7 @@ int sqlite3_stmt_status(sqlite3_stmt*, int op,int resetFlg);
 ** cycle.
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FILTER_MISS]]
-** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FILTER HIT]] 
+** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FILTER HIT]]
 ** <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FILTER_HIT<br>
 ** SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FILTER_MISS</dt>
 ** <dd>^SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FILTER_HIT is the number of times that a join
@@ -8761,15 +8761,15 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_page {
 ** KEYWORDS: {page cache}
 **
 ** ^(The [sqlite3_config]([SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE2], ...) interface can
-** register an alternative page cache implementation by passing in an 
+** register an alternative page cache implementation by passing in an
 ** instance of the sqlite3_pcache_methods2 structure.)^
-** In many applications, most of the heap memory allocated by 
+** In many applications, most of the heap memory allocated by
 ** SQLite is used for the page cache.
-** By implementing a 
+** By implementing a
 ** custom page cache using this API, an application can better control
-** the amount of memory consumed by SQLite, the way in which 
-** that memory is allocated and released, and the policies used to 
-** determine exactly which parts of a database file are cached and for 
+** the amount of memory consumed by SQLite, the way in which
+** that memory is allocated and released, and the policies used to
+** determine exactly which parts of a database file are cached and for
 ** how long.
 **
 ** The alternative page cache mechanism is an
@@ -8782,19 +8782,19 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_page {
 ** [sqlite3_config()] returns.)^
 **
 ** [[the xInit() page cache method]]
-** ^(The xInit() method is called once for each effective 
+** ^(The xInit() method is called once for each effective
 ** call to [sqlite3_initialize()])^
 ** (usually only once during the lifetime of the process). ^(The xInit()
 ** method is passed a copy of the sqlite3_pcache_methods2.pArg value.)^
-** The intent of the xInit() method is to set up global data structures 
-** required by the custom page cache implementation. 
-** ^(If the xInit() method is NULL, then the 
+** The intent of the xInit() method is to set up global data structures
+** required by the custom page cache implementation.
+** ^(If the xInit() method is NULL, then the
 ** built-in default page cache is used instead of the application defined
 ** page cache.)^
 **
 ** [[the xShutdown() page cache method]]
 ** ^The xShutdown() method is called by [sqlite3_shutdown()].
-** It can be used to clean up 
+** It can be used to clean up
 ** any outstanding resources before process shutdown, if required.
 ** ^The xShutdown() method may be NULL.
 **
@@ -8813,7 +8813,7 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_page {
 ** though this is not guaranteed. ^The
 ** first parameter, szPage, is the size in bytes of the pages that must
 ** be allocated by the cache.  ^szPage will always a power of two.  ^The
-** second parameter szExtra is a number of bytes of extra storage 
+** second parameter szExtra is a number of bytes of extra storage
 ** associated with each page cache entry.  ^The szExtra parameter will
 ** a number less than 250.  SQLite will use the
 ** extra szExtra bytes on each page to store metadata about the underlying
@@ -8826,7 +8826,7 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_page {
 ** it is purely advisory.  ^On a cache where bPurgeable is false, SQLite will
 ** never invoke xUnpin() except to deliberately delete a page.
 ** ^In other words, calls to xUnpin() on a cache with bPurgeable set to
-** false will always have the "discard" flag set to true.  
+** false will always have the "discard" flag set to true. 
 ** ^Hence, a cache created with bPurgeable false will
 ** never contain any unpinned pages.
 **
@@ -8841,12 +8841,12 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_page {
 ** [[the xPagecount() page cache methods]]
 ** The xPagecount() method must return the number of pages currently
 ** stored in the cache, both pinned and unpinned.
-** 
+**
 ** [[the xFetch() page cache methods]]
-** The xFetch() method locates a page in the cache and returns a pointer to 
+** The xFetch() method locates a page in the cache and returns a pointer to
 ** an sqlite3_pcache_page object associated with that page, or a NULL pointer.
 ** The pBuf element of the returned sqlite3_pcache_page object will be a
-** pointer to a buffer of szPage bytes used to store the content of a 
+** pointer to a buffer of szPage bytes used to store the content of a
 ** single database page.  The pExtra element of sqlite3_pcache_page will be
 ** a pointer to the szExtra bytes of extra storage that SQLite has requested
 ** for each entry in the page cache.
@@ -8885,8 +8885,8 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_page {
 ** page cache implementation. ^The page cache implementation
 ** may choose to evict unpinned pages at any time.
 **
-** The cache must not perform any reference counting. A single 
-** call to xUnpin() unpins the page regardless of the number of prior calls 
+** The cache must not perform any reference counting. A single
+** call to xUnpin() unpins the page regardless of the number of prior calls
 ** to xFetch().
 **
 ** [[the xRekey() page cache methods]]
@@ -8926,7 +8926,7 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_methods2 {
   int (*xPagecount)(sqlite3_pcache*);
   sqlite3_pcache_page *(*xFetch)(sqlite3_pcache*, unsigned key, int createFlag);
   void (*xUnpin)(sqlite3_pcache*, sqlite3_pcache_page*, int discard);
-  void (*xRekey)(sqlite3_pcache*, sqlite3_pcache_page*, 
+  void (*xRekey)(sqlite3_pcache*, sqlite3_pcache_page*,
       unsigned oldKey, unsigned newKey);
   void (*xTruncate)(sqlite3_pcache*, unsigned iLimit);
   void (*xDestroy)(sqlite3_pcache*);
@@ -8971,7 +8971,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup;
 **
 ** The backup API copies the content of one database into another.
 ** It is useful either for creating backups of databases or
-** for copying in-memory databases to or from persistent files. 
+** for copying in-memory databases to or from persistent files.
 **
 ** See Also: [Using the SQLite Online Backup API]
 **
@@ -8982,36 +8982,36 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup;
 ** ^Thus, the backup may be performed on a live source database without
 ** preventing other database connections from
 ** reading or writing to the source database while the backup is underway.
-** 
-** ^(To perform a backup operation: 
+**
+** ^(To perform a backup operation:
 **   <ol>
 **     <li><b>sqlite3_backup_init()</b> is called once to initialize the
-**         backup, 
-**     <li><b>sqlite3_backup_step()</b> is called one or more times to transfer 
+**         backup,
+**     <li><b>sqlite3_backup_step()</b> is called one or more times to transfer
 **         the data between the two databases, and finally
-**     <li><b>sqlite3_backup_finish()</b> is called to release all resources 
-**         associated with the backup operation. 
+**     <li><b>sqlite3_backup_finish()</b> is called to release all resources
+**         associated with the backup operation.
 **   </ol>)^
 ** There should be exactly one call to sqlite3_backup_finish() for each
 ** successful call to sqlite3_backup_init().
 **
 ** [[sqlite3_backup_init()]] <b>sqlite3_backup_init()</b>
 **
-** ^The D and N arguments to sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) are the 
-** [database connection] associated with the destination database 
+** ^The D and N arguments to sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) are the
+** [database connection] associated with the destination database
 ** and the database name, respectively.
 ** ^The database name is "main" for the main database, "temp" for the
 ** temporary database, or the name specified after the AS keyword in
 ** an [ATTACH] statement for an attached database.
-** ^The S and M arguments passed to 
+** ^The S and M arguments passed to
 ** sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) identify the [database connection]
 ** and database name of the source database, respectively.
 ** ^The source and destination [database connections] (parameters S and D)
 ** must be different or else sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) will fail with
 ** an error.
 **
-** ^A call to sqlite3_backup_init() will fail, returning NULL, if 
-** there is already a read or read-write transaction open on the 
+** ^A call to sqlite3_backup_init() will fail, returning NULL, if
+** there is already a read or read-write transaction open on the
 ** destination database.
 **
 ** ^If an error occurs within sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M), then NULL is
@@ -9023,14 +9023,14 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup;
 ** ^A successful call to sqlite3_backup_init() returns a pointer to an
 ** [sqlite3_backup] object.
 ** ^The [sqlite3_backup] object may be used with the sqlite3_backup_step() and
-** sqlite3_backup_finish() functions to perform the specified backup 
+** sqlite3_backup_finish() functions to perform the specified backup
 ** operation.
 **
 ** [[sqlite3_backup_step()]] <b>sqlite3_backup_step()</b>
 **
-** ^Function sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) will copy up to N pages between 
+** ^Function sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) will copy up to N pages between
 ** the source and destination databases specified by [sqlite3_backup] object B.
-** ^If N is negative, all remaining source pages are copied. 
+** ^If N is negative, all remaining source pages are copied.
 ** ^If sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) successfully copies N pages and there
 ** are still more pages to be copied, then the function returns [SQLITE_OK].
 ** ^If sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) successfully finishes copying all pages
@@ -9052,8 +9052,8 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup;
 **
 ** ^If sqlite3_backup_step() cannot obtain a required file-system lock, then
 ** the [sqlite3_busy_handler | busy-handler function]
-** is invoked (if one is specified). ^If the 
-** busy-handler returns non-zero before the lock is available, then 
+** is invoked (if one is specified). ^If the
+** busy-handler returns non-zero before the lock is available, then
 ** [SQLITE_BUSY] is returned to the caller. ^In this case the call to
 ** sqlite3_backup_step() can be retried later. ^If the source
 ** [database connection]
@@ -9061,15 +9061,15 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup;
 ** is called, then [SQLITE_LOCKED] is returned immediately. ^Again, in this
 ** case the call to sqlite3_backup_step() can be retried later on. ^(If
 ** [SQLITE_IOERR_ACCESS | SQLITE_IOERR_XXX], [SQLITE_NOMEM], or
-** [SQLITE_READONLY] is returned, then 
-** there is no point in retrying the call to sqlite3_backup_step(). These 
-** errors are considered fatal.)^  The application must accept 
-** that the backup operation has failed and pass the backup operation handle 
+** [SQLITE_READONLY] is returned, then
+** there is no point in retrying the call to sqlite3_backup_step(). These
+** errors are considered fatal.)^  The application must accept
+** that the backup operation has failed and pass the backup operation handle
 ** to the sqlite3_backup_finish() to release associated resources.
 **
 ** ^The first call to sqlite3_backup_step() obtains an exclusive lock
-** on the destination file. ^The exclusive lock is not released until either 
-** sqlite3_backup_finish() is called or the backup operation is complete 
+** on the destination file. ^The exclusive lock is not released until either
+** sqlite3_backup_finish() is called or the backup operation is complete
 ** and sqlite3_backup_step() returns [SQLITE_DONE].  ^Every call to
 ** sqlite3_backup_step() obtains a [shared lock] on the source database that
 ** lasts for the duration of the sqlite3_backup_step() call.
@@ -9078,18 +9078,18 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup;
 ** through the backup process.  ^If the source database is modified by an
 ** external process or via a database connection other than the one being
 ** used by the backup operation, then the backup will be automatically
-** restarted by the next call to sqlite3_backup_step(). ^If the source 
+** restarted by the next call to sqlite3_backup_step(). ^If the source
 ** database is modified by the using the same database connection as is used
 ** by the backup operation, then the backup database is automatically
 ** updated at the same time.
 **
 ** [[sqlite3_backup_finish()]] <b>sqlite3_backup_finish()</b>
 **
-** When sqlite3_backup_step() has returned [SQLITE_DONE], or when the 
+** When sqlite3_backup_step() has returned [SQLITE_DONE], or when the
 ** application wishes to abandon the backup operation, the application
 ** should destroy the [sqlite3_backup] by passing it to sqlite3_backup_finish().
 ** ^The sqlite3_backup_finish() interfaces releases all
-** resources associated with the [sqlite3_backup] object. 
+** resources associated with the [sqlite3_backup] object.
 ** ^If sqlite3_backup_step() has not yet returned [SQLITE_DONE], then any
 ** active write-transaction on the destination database is rolled back.
 ** The [sqlite3_backup] object is invalid
@@ -9129,8 +9129,8 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup;
 ** connections, then the source database connection may be used concurrently
 ** from within other threads.
 **
-** However, the application must guarantee that the destination 
-** [database connection] is not passed to any other API (by any thread) after 
+** However, the application must guarantee that the destination
+** [database connection] is not passed to any other API (by any thread) after
 ** sqlite3_backup_init() is called and before the corresponding call to
 ** sqlite3_backup_finish().  SQLite does not currently check to see
 ** if the application incorrectly accesses the destination [database connection]
@@ -9141,11 +9141,11 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup;
 ** If running in [shared cache mode], the application must
 ** guarantee that the shared cache used by the destination database
 ** is not accessed while the backup is running. In practice this means
-** that the application must guarantee that the disk file being 
+** that the application must guarantee that the disk file being
 ** backed up to is not accessed by any connection within the process,
 ** not just the specific connection that was passed to sqlite3_backup_init().
 **
-** The [sqlite3_backup] object itself is partially threadsafe. Multiple 
+** The [sqlite3_backup] object itself is partially threadsafe. Multiple
 ** threads may safely make multiple concurrent calls to sqlite3_backup_step().
 ** However, the sqlite3_backup_remaining() and sqlite3_backup_pagecount()
 ** APIs are not strictly speaking threadsafe. If they are invoked at the
@@ -9170,8 +9170,8 @@ int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p);
 ** ^When running in shared-cache mode, a database operation may fail with
 ** an [SQLITE_LOCKED] error if the required locks on the shared-cache or
 ** individual tables within the shared-cache cannot be obtained. See
-** [SQLite Shared-Cache Mode] for a description of shared-cache locking. 
-** ^This API may be used to register a callback that SQLite will invoke 
+** [SQLite Shared-Cache Mode] for a description of shared-cache locking.
+** ^This API may be used to register a callback that SQLite will invoke
 ** when the connection currently holding the required lock relinquishes it.
 ** ^This API is only available if the library was compiled with the
 ** [SQLITE_ENABLE_UNLOCK_NOTIFY] C-preprocessor symbol defined.
@@ -9179,14 +9179,14 @@ int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p);
 ** See Also: [Using the SQLite Unlock Notification Feature].
 **
 ** ^Shared-cache locks are released when a database connection concludes
-** its current transaction, either by committing it or rolling it back. 
+** its current transaction, either by committing it or rolling it back.
 **
 ** ^When a connection (known as the blocked connection) fails to obtain a
 ** shared-cache lock and SQLITE_LOCKED is returned to the caller, the
 ** identity of the database connection (the blocking connection) that
-** has locked the required resource is stored internally. ^After an 
+** has locked the required resource is stored internally. ^After an
 ** application receives an SQLITE_LOCKED error, it may call the
-** sqlite3_unlock_notify() method with the blocked connection handle as 
+** sqlite3_unlock_notify() method with the blocked connection handle as
 ** the first argument to register for a callback that will be invoked
 ** when the blocking connections current transaction is concluded. ^The
 ** callback is invoked from within the [sqlite3_step] or [sqlite3_close]
@@ -9200,16 +9200,16 @@ int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p);
 **
 ** ^If the blocked connection is attempting to obtain a write-lock on a
 ** shared-cache table, and more than one other connection currently holds
-** a read-lock on the same table, then SQLite arbitrarily selects one of 
+** a read-lock on the same table, then SQLite arbitrarily selects one of
 ** the other connections to use as the blocking connection.
 **
-** ^(There may be at most one unlock-notify callback registered by a 
+** ^(There may be at most one unlock-notify callback registered by a
 ** blocked connection. If sqlite3_unlock_notify() is called when the
 ** blocked connection already has a registered unlock-notify callback,
 ** then the new callback replaces the old.)^ ^If sqlite3_unlock_notify() is
 ** called with a NULL pointer as its second argument, then any existing
-** unlock-notify callback is canceled. ^The blocked connections 
-** unlock-notify callback may also be canceled by closing the blocked
+** unlock-notify callback is cancelled. ^The blocked connections
+** unlock-notify callback may also be cancelled by closing the blocked
 ** connection using [sqlite3_close()].
 **
 ** The unlock-notify callback is not reentrant. If an application invokes
@@ -9221,7 +9221,7 @@ int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p);
 **
 ** <b>Callback Invocation Details</b>
 **
-** When an unlock-notify callback is registered, the application provides a 
+** When an unlock-notify callback is registered, the application provides a
 ** single void* pointer that is passed to the callback when it is invoked.
 ** However, the signature of the callback function allows SQLite to pass
 ** it an array of void* context pointers. The first argument passed to
@@ -9234,12 +9234,12 @@ int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p);
 ** same callback function, then instead of invoking the callback function
 ** multiple times, it is invoked once with the set of void* context pointers
 ** specified by the blocked connections bundled together into an array.
-** This gives the application an opportunity to prioritize any actions 
+** This gives the application an opportunity to prioritize any actions
 ** related to the set of unblocked database connections.
 **
 ** <b>Deadlock Detection</b>
 **
-** Assuming that after registering for an unlock-notify callback a 
+** Assuming that after registering for an unlock-notify callback a
 ** database waits for the callback to be issued before taking any further
 ** action (a reasonable assumption), then using this API may cause the
 ** application to deadlock. For example, if connection X is waiting for
@@ -9262,7 +9262,7 @@ int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p);
 **
 ** <b>The "DROP TABLE" Exception</b>
 **
-** When a call to [sqlite3_step()] returns SQLITE_LOCKED, it is almost 
+** When a call to [sqlite3_step()] returns SQLITE_LOCKED, it is almost
 ** always appropriate to call sqlite3_unlock_notify(). There is however,
 ** one exception. When executing a "DROP TABLE" or "DROP INDEX" statement,
 ** SQLite checks if there are any currently executing SELECT statements
@@ -9275,7 +9275,7 @@ int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p);
 ** One way around this problem is to check the extended error code returned
 ** by an sqlite3_step() call. ^(If there is a blocking connection, then the
 ** extended error code is set to SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE. Otherwise, in
-** the special "DROP TABLE/INDEX" case, the extended error code is just 
+** the special "DROP TABLE/INDEX" case, the extended error code is just
 ** SQLITE_LOCKED.)^
 */
 int sqlite3_unlock_notify(
@@ -9366,8 +9366,8 @@ void sqlite3_log(int iErrCode, const char *zFormat, ...);
 ** ^The [sqlite3_wal_hook()] function is used to register a callback that
 ** is invoked each time data is committed to a database in wal mode.
 **
-** ^(The callback is invoked by SQLite after the commit has taken place and 
-** the associated write-lock on the database released)^, so the implementation 
+** ^(The callback is invoked by SQLite after the commit has taken place and
+** the associated write-lock on the database released)^, so the implementation
 ** may read, write or [checkpoint] the database as required.
 **
 ** ^The first parameter passed to the callback function when it is invoked
@@ -9386,7 +9386,7 @@ void sqlite3_log(int iErrCode, const char *zFormat, ...);
 ** that does not correspond to any valid SQLite error code, the results
 ** are undefined.
 **
-** A single database handle may have at most a single write-ahead log callback 
+** A single database handle may have at most a single write-ahead log callback
 ** registered at one time. ^Calling [sqlite3_wal_hook()] replaces any
 ** previously registered write-ahead log callback. ^The return value is
 ** a copy of the third parameter from the previous call, if any, or 0.
@@ -9395,7 +9395,7 @@ void sqlite3_log(int iErrCode, const char *zFormat, ...);
 ** overwrite any prior [sqlite3_wal_hook()] settings.
 */
 void *sqlite3_wal_hook(
-  sqlite3*, 
+  sqlite3*,
   int(*)(void *,sqlite3*,const char*,int),
   void*
 );
@@ -9408,7 +9408,7 @@ void *sqlite3_wal_hook(
 ** [sqlite3_wal_hook()] that causes any database on [database connection] D
 ** to automatically [checkpoint]
 ** after committing a transaction if there are N or
-** more frames in the [write-ahead log] file.  ^Passing zero or 
+** more frames in the [write-ahead log] file.  ^Passing zero or
 ** a negative value as the nFrame parameter disables automatic
 ** checkpoints entirely.
 **
@@ -9438,7 +9438,7 @@ int sqlite3_wal_autocheckpoint(sqlite3 *db, int N);
 ** ^(The sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(D,X) is equivalent to
 ** [sqlite3_wal_checkpoint_v2](D,X,[SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE],0,0).)^
 **
-** In brief, sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(D,X) causes the content in the 
+** In brief, sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(D,X) causes the content in the
 ** [write-ahead log] for database X on [database connection] D to be
 ** transferred into the database file and for the write-ahead log to
 ** be reset.  See the [checkpointing] documentation for addition
@@ -9464,10 +9464,10 @@ int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb);
 **
 ** <dl>
 ** <dt>SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE<dd>
-**   ^Checkpoint as many frames as possible without waiting for any database 
-**   readers or writers to finish, then sync the database file if all frames 
+**   ^Checkpoint as many frames as possible without waiting for any database
+**   readers or writers to finish, then sync the database file if all frames
 **   in the log were checkpointed. ^The [busy-handler callback]
-**   is never invoked in the SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE mode.  
+**   is never invoked in the SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE mode. 
 **   ^On the other hand, passive mode might leave the checkpoint unfinished
 **   if there are concurrent readers or writers.
 **
@@ -9481,9 +9481,9 @@ int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb);
 **
 ** <dt>SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_RESTART<dd>
 **   ^This mode works the same way as SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL with the addition
-**   that after checkpointing the log file it blocks (calls the 
+**   that after checkpointing the log file it blocks (calls the
 **   [busy-handler callback])
-**   until all readers are reading from the database file only. ^This ensures 
+**   until all readers are reading from the database file only. ^This ensures
 **   that the next writer will restart the log file from the beginning.
 **   ^Like SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL, this mode blocks new
 **   database writer attempts while it is pending, but does not impede readers.
@@ -9505,31 +9505,31 @@ int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb);
 ** truncated to zero bytes and so both *pnLog and *pnCkpt will be set to zero.
 **
 ** ^All calls obtain an exclusive "checkpoint" lock on the database file. ^If
-** any other process is running a checkpoint operation at the same time, the 
-** lock cannot be obtained and SQLITE_BUSY is returned. ^Even if there is a 
+** any other process is running a checkpoint operation at the same time, the
+** lock cannot be obtained and SQLITE_BUSY is returned. ^Even if there is a
 ** busy-handler configured, it will not be invoked in this case.
 **
-** ^The SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL, RESTART and TRUNCATE modes also obtain the 
+** ^The SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL, RESTART and TRUNCATE modes also obtain the
 ** exclusive "writer" lock on the database file. ^If the writer lock cannot be
 ** obtained immediately, and a busy-handler is configured, it is invoked and
 ** the writer lock retried until either the busy-handler returns 0 or the lock
 ** is successfully obtained. ^The busy-handler is also invoked while waiting for
 ** database readers as described above. ^If the busy-handler returns 0 before
 ** the writer lock is obtained or while waiting for database readers, the
-** checkpoint operation proceeds from that point in the same way as 
-** SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE - checkpointing as many frames as possible 
+** checkpoint operation proceeds from that point in the same way as
+** SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE - checkpointing as many frames as possible
 ** without blocking any further. ^SQLITE_BUSY is returned in this case.
 **
 ** ^If parameter zDb is NULL or points to a zero length string, then the
-** specified operation is attempted on all WAL databases [attached] to 
+** specified operation is attempted on all WAL databases [attached] to
 ** [database connection] db.  In this case the
-** values written to output parameters *pnLog and *pnCkpt are undefined. ^If 
-** an SQLITE_BUSY error is encountered when processing one or more of the 
-** attached WAL databases, the operation is still attempted on any remaining 
-** attached databases and SQLITE_BUSY is returned at the end. ^If any other 
-** error occurs while processing an attached database, processing is abandoned 
-** and the error code is returned to the caller immediately. ^If no error 
-** (SQLITE_BUSY or otherwise) is encountered while processing the attached 
+** values written to output parameters *pnLog and *pnCkpt are undefined. ^If
+** an SQLITE_BUSY error is encountered when processing one or more of the
+** attached WAL databases, the operation is still attempted on any remaining
+** attached databases and SQLITE_BUSY is returned at the end. ^If any other
+** error occurs while processing an attached database, processing is abandoned
+** and the error code is returned to the caller immediately. ^If no error
+** (SQLITE_BUSY or otherwise) is encountered while processing the attached
 ** databases, SQLITE_OK is returned.
 **
 ** ^If database zDb is the name of an attached database that is not in WAL
@@ -9589,7 +9589,7 @@ int sqlite3_vtab_config(sqlite3*, int op, ...);
 
 /*
 ** CAPI3REF: Virtual Table Configuration Options
-** KEYWORDS: {virtual table configuration options} 
+** KEYWORDS: {virtual table configuration options}
 ** KEYWORDS: {virtual table configuration option}
 **
 ** These macros define the various options to the
@@ -9612,20 +9612,20 @@ int sqlite3_vtab_config(sqlite3*, int op, ...);
 ** If X is non-zero, then the virtual table implementation guarantees
 ** that if [xUpdate] returns [SQLITE_CONSTRAINT], it will do so before
 ** any modifications to internal or persistent data structures have been made.
-** If the [ON CONFLICT] mode is ABORT, FAIL, IGNORE or ROLLBACK, SQLite 
+** If the [ON CONFLICT] mode is ABORT, FAIL, IGNORE or ROLLBACK, SQLite
 ** is able to roll back a statement or database transaction, and abandon
-** or continue processing the current SQL statement as appropriate. 
+** or continue processing the current SQL statement as appropriate.
 ** If the ON CONFLICT mode is REPLACE and the [xUpdate] method returns
 ** [SQLITE_CONSTRAINT], SQLite handles this as if the ON CONFLICT mode
 ** had been ABORT.
 **
 ** Virtual table implementations that are required to handle OR REPLACE
-** must do so within the [xUpdate] method. If a call to the 
-** [sqlite3_vtab_on_conflict()] function indicates that the current ON 
-** CONFLICT policy is REPLACE, the virtual table implementation should 
+** must do so within the [xUpdate] method. If a call to the
+** [sqlite3_vtab_on_conflict()] function indicates that the current ON
+** CONFLICT policy is REPLACE, the virtual table implementation should
 ** silently replace the appropriate rows within the xUpdate callback and
 ** return SQLITE_OK. Or, if this is not possible, it may return
-** SQLITE_CONSTRAINT, in which case SQLite falls back to OR ABORT 
+** SQLITE_CONSTRAINT, in which case SQLite falls back to OR ABORT
 ** constraint handling.
 ** </dd>
 **
@@ -9812,7 +9812,7 @@ int sqlite3_vtab_distinct(sqlite3_index_info*);
 /*
 ** CAPI3REF: Identify and handle IN constraints in xBestIndex
 **
-** This interface may only be used from within an 
+** This interface may only be used from within an
 ** [xBestIndex|xBestIndex() method] of a [virtual table] implementation.
 ** The result of invoking this interface from any other context is
 ** undefined and probably harmful.
@@ -9822,7 +9822,7 @@ int sqlite3_vtab_distinct(sqlite3_index_info*);
 ** communicated to the xBestIndex method as a
 ** [SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ] constraint.)^  If xBestIndex wants to use
 ** this constraint, it must set the corresponding
-** aConstraintUsage[].argvIndex to a postive integer.  ^(Then, under
+** aConstraintUsage[].argvIndex to a positive integer.  ^(Then, under
 ** the usual mode of handling IN operators, SQLite generates [bytecode]
 ** that invokes the [xFilter|xFilter() method] once for each value
 ** on the right-hand side of the IN operator.)^  Thus the virtual table
@@ -9871,7 +9871,7 @@ int sqlite3_vtab_distinct(sqlite3_index_info*);
 ** <li><p> The last call to sqlite3_vtab_in(P,N,F) for which F was
 ** non-negative had F>=1.
 ** </ol>)^
-** 
+**
 ** ^If either or both of the conditions above are false, then SQLite uses
 ** the traditional one-at-a-time processing strategy for the IN constraint.
 ** ^If both conditions are true, then the argvIndex-th parameter to the
@@ -9946,7 +9946,7 @@ int sqlite3_vtab_in_next(sqlite3_value *pVal, sqlite3_value **ppOut);
 ** that constraint if the right-hand operand is known.  ^If the
 ** right-hand operand is not known, then *V is set to a NULL pointer.
 ** ^The sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value(P,J,V) interface returns SQLITE_OK if
-** and only if *V is set to a value.  ^The sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value(P,J,V) 
+** and only if *V is set to a value.  ^The sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value(P,J,V)
 ** inteface returns SQLITE_NOTFOUND if the right-hand side of the J-th
 ** constraint is not available.  ^The sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value() interface
 ** can return an result code other than SQLITE_OK or SQLITE_NOTFOUND if
@@ -10036,14 +10036,14 @@ int sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value(sqlite3_index_info*, int, sqlite3_value **ppVal);
 ** [[SQLITE_SCANSTAT_SELECTID]] <dt>SQLITE_SCANSTAT_SELECTID</dt>
 ** <dd>^The "int" variable pointed to by the V parameter will be set to the
 ** id for the X-th query plan element. The id value is unique within the
-** statement. The select-id is the same value as is output in the first 
+** statement. The select-id is the same value as is output in the first
 ** column of an [EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN] query.
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_SCANSTAT_PARENTID]] <dt>SQLITE_SCANSTAT_PARENTID</dt>
 ** <dd>The "int" variable pointed to by the V parameter will be set to the
 ** the id of the parent of the current query element, if applicable, or
 ** to zero if the query element has no parent. This is the same value as
-** returned in the second column of an [EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN] query. 
+** returned in the second column of an [EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN] query.
 **
 ** [[SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NCYCLE]] <dt>SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NCYCLE</dt>
 ** <dd>The sqlite3_int64 output value is set to the number of cycles,
@@ -10077,23 +10077,23 @@ int sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value(sqlite3_index_info*, int, sqlite3_value **ppVal);
 **
 ** The "iScanStatusOp" parameter determines which status information to return.
 ** The "iScanStatusOp" must be one of the [scanstatus options] or the behavior
-** of this interface is undefined. ^The requested measurement is written into 
+** of this interface is undefined. ^The requested measurement is written into
 ** a variable pointed to by the "pOut" parameter.
 **
 ** The "flags" parameter must be passed a mask of flags. At present only
 ** one flag is defined - SQLITE_SCANSTAT_COMPLEX. If SQLITE_SCANSTAT_COMPLEX
-** is specified, then status information is available for all elements 
+** is specified, then status information is available for all elements
 ** of a query plan that are reported by "EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN" output. If
 ** SQLITE_SCANSTAT_COMPLEX is not specified, then only query plan elements
 ** that correspond to query loops (the "SCAN..." and "SEARCH..." elements of
 ** the EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN output) are available. Invoking API
-** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() is equivalent to calling 
+** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() is equivalent to calling
 ** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus_v2() with a zeroed flags parameter.
-** 
+**
 ** Parameter "idx" identifies the specific query element to retrieve statistics
 ** for. Query elements are numbered starting from zero. A value of -1 may be
 ** to query for statistics regarding the entire query. ^If idx is out of range
-** - less than -1 or greater than or equal to the total number of query 
+** - less than -1 or greater than or equal to the total number of query
 ** elements used to implement the statement - a non-zero value is returned and
 ** the variable that pOut points to is unchanged.
 **
@@ -10104,14 +10104,14 @@ int sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus(
   int idx,                  /* Index of loop to report on */
   int iScanStatusOp,        /* Information desired.  SQLITE_SCANSTAT_* */
   void *pOut                /* Result written here */
-);     
+);    
 int sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus_v2(
   sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,      /* Prepared statement for which info desired */
   int idx,                  /* Index of loop to report on */
   int iScanStatusOp,        /* Information desired.  SQLITE_SCANSTAT_* */
   int flags,                /* Mask of flags defined below */
   void *pOut                /* Result written here */
-);     
+);    
 
 /*
 ** CAPI3REF: Prepared Statement Scan Status
@@ -10136,15 +10136,15 @@ void sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus_reset(sqlite3_stmt*);
 **
 ** ^If a write-transaction is open on [database connection] D when the
 ** [sqlite3_db_cacheflush(D)] interface invoked, any dirty
-** pages in the pager-cache that are not currently in use are written out 
+** pages in the pager-cache that are not currently in use are written out
 ** to disk. A dirty page may be in use if a database cursor created by an
 ** active SQL statement is reading from it, or if it is page 1 of a database
 ** file (page 1 is always "in use").  ^The [sqlite3_db_cacheflush(D)]
 ** interface flushes caches for all schemas - "main", "temp", and
 ** any [attached] databases.
 **
-** ^If this function needs to obtain extra database locks before dirty pages 
-** can be flushed to disk, it does so. ^If those locks cannot be obtained 
+** ^If this function needs to obtain extra database locks before dirty pages
+** can be flushed to disk, it does so. ^If those locks cannot be obtained
 ** immediately and there is a busy-handler callback configured, it is invoked
 ** in the usual manner. ^If the required lock still cannot be obtained, then
 ** the database is skipped and an attempt made to flush any dirty pages
@@ -10192,16 +10192,16 @@ int sqlite3_db_cacheflush(sqlite3*);
 ** kind of update operation that is about to occur.
 ** ^(The fourth parameter to the preupdate callback is the name of the
 ** database within the database connection that is being modified.  This
-** will be "main" for the main database or "temp" for TEMP tables or 
+** will be "main" for the main database or "temp" for TEMP tables or
 ** the name given after the AS keyword in the [ATTACH] statement for attached
 ** databases.)^
 ** ^The fifth parameter to the preupdate callback is the name of the
 ** table that is being modified.
 **
 ** For an UPDATE or DELETE operation on a [rowid table], the sixth
-** parameter passed to the preupdate callback is the initial [rowid] of the 
+** parameter passed to the preupdate callback is the initial [rowid] of the
 ** row being modified or deleted. For an INSERT operation on a rowid table,
-** or any operation on a WITHOUT ROWID table, the value of the sixth 
+** or any operation on a WITHOUT ROWID table, the value of the sixth
 ** parameter is undefined. For an INSERT or UPDATE on a rowid table the
 ** seventh parameter is the final rowid value of the row being inserted
 ** or updated. The value of the seventh parameter passed to the callback
@@ -10244,14 +10244,14 @@ int sqlite3_db_cacheflush(sqlite3*);
 **
 ** ^The [sqlite3_preupdate_depth(D)] interface returns 0 if the preupdate
 ** callback was invoked as a result of a direct insert, update, or delete
-** operation; or 1 for inserts, updates, or deletes invoked by top-level 
+** operation; or 1 for inserts, updates, or deletes invoked by top-level
 ** triggers; or 2 for changes resulting from triggers called by top-level
 ** triggers; and so forth.
 **
 ** When the [sqlite3_blob_write()] API is used to update a blob column,
 ** the pre-update hook is invoked with SQLITE_DELETE. This is because the
 ** in this case the new values are not available. In this case, when a
-** callback made with op==SQLITE_DELETE is actuall a write using the
+** callback made with op==SQLITE_DELETE is actually a write using the
 ** sqlite3_blob_write() API, the [sqlite3_preupdate_blobwrite()] returns
 ** the index of the column being written. In other cases, where the
 ** pre-update hook is being invoked for some other reason, including a
@@ -10289,7 +10289,7 @@ int sqlite3_preupdate_blobwrite(sqlite3 *);
 ** The return value is OS-dependent.  For example, on unix systems, after
 ** [sqlite3_open_v2()] returns [SQLITE_CANTOPEN], this interface could be
 ** called to get back the underlying "errno" that caused the problem, such
-** as ENOSPC, EAUTH, EISDIR, and so forth.  
+** as ENOSPC, EAUTH, EISDIR, and so forth. 
 */
 int sqlite3_system_errno(sqlite3*);
 
@@ -10327,12 +10327,12 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_snapshot {
 ** [sqlite3_snapshot_get(D,S,P)] interface writes a pointer to the newly
 ** created [sqlite3_snapshot] object into *P and returns SQLITE_OK.
 ** If there is not already a read-transaction open on schema S when
-** this function is called, one is opened automatically. 
+** this function is called, one is opened automatically.
 **
 ** The following must be true for this function to succeed. If any of
 ** the following statements are false when sqlite3_snapshot_get() is
 ** called, SQLITE_ERROR is returned. The final value of *P is undefined
-** in this case. 
+** in this case.
 **
 ** <ul>
 **   <li> The database handle must not be in [autocommit mode].
@@ -10344,13 +10344,13 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_snapshot {
 **
 **   <li> One or more transactions must have been written to the current wal
 **        file since it was created on disk (by any connection). This means
-**        that a snapshot cannot be taken on a wal mode database with no wal 
+**        that a snapshot cannot be taken on a wal mode database with no wal
 **        file immediately after it is first opened. At least one transaction
 **        must be written to it first.
 ** </ul>
 **
 ** This function may also return SQLITE_NOMEM.  If it is called with the
-** database handle in autocommit mode but fails for some other reason, 
+** database handle in autocommit mode but fails for some other reason,
 ** whether or not a read transaction is opened on schema S is undefined.
 **
 ** The [sqlite3_snapshot] object returned from a successful call to
@@ -10370,38 +10370,38 @@ SQLITE_EXPERIMENTAL int sqlite3_snapshot_get(
 ** CAPI3REF: Start a read transaction on an historical snapshot
 ** METHOD: sqlite3_snapshot
 **
-** ^The [sqlite3_snapshot_open(D,S,P)] interface either starts a new read 
-** transaction or upgrades an existing one for schema S of 
-** [database connection] D such that the read transaction refers to 
-** historical [snapshot] P, rather than the most recent change to the 
-** database. ^The [sqlite3_snapshot_open()] interface returns SQLITE_OK 
+** ^The [sqlite3_snapshot_open(D,S,P)] interface either starts a new read
+** transaction or upgrades an existing one for schema S of
+** [database connection] D such that the read transaction refers to
+** historical [snapshot] P, rather than the most recent change to the
+** database. ^The [sqlite3_snapshot_open()] interface returns SQLITE_OK
 ** on success or an appropriate [error code] if it fails.
 **
-** ^In order to succeed, the database connection must not be in 
+** ^In order to succeed, the database connection must not be in
 ** [autocommit mode] when [sqlite3_snapshot_open(D,S,P)] is called. If there
 ** is already a read transaction open on schema S, then the database handle
 ** must have no active statements (SELECT statements that have been passed
-** to sqlite3_step() but not sqlite3_reset() or sqlite3_finalize()). 
+** to sqlite3_step() but not sqlite3_reset() or sqlite3_finalize()).
 ** SQLITE_ERROR is returned if either of these conditions is violated, or
 ** if schema S does not exist, or if the snapshot object is invalid.
 **
 ** ^A call to sqlite3_snapshot_open() will fail to open if the specified
-** snapshot has been overwritten by a [checkpoint]. In this case 
+** snapshot has been overwritten by a [checkpoint]. In this case
 ** SQLITE_ERROR_SNAPSHOT is returned.
 **
-** If there is already a read transaction open when this function is 
+** If there is already a read transaction open when this function is
 ** invoked, then the same read transaction remains open (on the same
 ** database snapshot) if SQLITE_ERROR, SQLITE_BUSY or SQLITE_ERROR_SNAPSHOT
 ** is returned. If another error code - for example SQLITE_PROTOCOL or an
 ** SQLITE_IOERR error code - is returned, then the final state of the
-** read transaction is undefined. If SQLITE_OK is returned, then the 
+** read transaction is undefined. If SQLITE_OK is returned, then the
 ** read transaction is now open on database snapshot P.
 **
 ** ^(A call to [sqlite3_snapshot_open(D,S,P)] will fail if the
 ** database connection D does not know that the database file for
 ** schema S is in [WAL mode].  A database connection might not know
 ** that the database file is in [WAL mode] if there has been no prior
-** I/O on that database connection, or if the database entered [WAL mode] 
+** I/O on that database connection, or if the database entered [WAL mode]
 ** after the most recent I/O on the database connection.)^
 ** (Hint: Run "[PRAGMA application_id]" against a newly opened
 ** database connection in order to make it ready to use snapshots.)
@@ -10433,17 +10433,17 @@ SQLITE_EXPERIMENTAL void sqlite3_snapshot_free(sqlite3_snapshot*);
 ** METHOD: sqlite3_snapshot
 **
 ** The sqlite3_snapshot_cmp(P1, P2) interface is used to compare the ages
-** of two valid snapshot handles. 
+** of two valid snapshot handles.
 **
-** If the two snapshot handles are not associated with the same database 
-** file, the result of the comparison is undefined. 
+** If the two snapshot handles are not associated with the same database
+** file, the result of the comparison is undefined.
 **
 ** Additionally, the result of the comparison is only valid if both of the
 ** snapshot handles were obtained by calling sqlite3_snapshot_get() since the
 ** last time the wal file was deleted. The wal file is deleted when the
 ** database is changed back to rollback mode or when the number of database
-** clients drops to zero. If either snapshot handle was obtained before the 
-** wal file was last deleted, the value returned by this function 
+** clients drops to zero. If either snapshot handle was obtained before the
+** wal file was last deleted, the value returned by this function
 ** is undefined.
 **
 ** Otherwise, this API returns a negative value if P1 refers to an older
@@ -10508,7 +10508,7 @@ SQLITE_EXPERIMENTAL int sqlite3_snapshot_recover(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb);
 ** representation of the database will usually only exist if there has
 ** been a prior call to [sqlite3_deserialize(D,S,...)] with the same
 ** values of D and S.
-** The size of the database is written into *P even if the 
+** The size of the database is written into *P even if the
 ** SQLITE_SERIALIZE_NOCOPY bit is set but no contiguous copy
 ** of the database exists.
 **
@@ -10545,7 +10545,7 @@ unsigned char *sqlite3_serialize(
 /*
 ** CAPI3REF: Deserialize a database
 **
-** The sqlite3_deserialize(D,S,P,N,M,F) interface causes the 
+** The sqlite3_deserialize(D,S,P,N,M,F) interface causes the
 ** [database connection] D to disconnect from database S and then
 ** reopen S as an in-memory database based on the serialization contained
 ** in P.  The serialized database P is N bytes in size.  M is the size of
@@ -10568,7 +10568,7 @@ unsigned char *sqlite3_serialize(
 ** S argument to sqlite3_deserialize(D,S,P,N,M,F) is "temp" then the
 ** function returns SQLITE_ERROR.
 **
-** If sqlite3_deserialize(D,S,P,N,M,F) fails for any reason and if the 
+** If sqlite3_deserialize(D,S,P,N,M,F) fails for any reason and if the
 ** SQLITE_DESERIALIZE_FREEONCLOSE bit is set in argument F, then
 ** [sqlite3_free()] is invoked on argument P prior to returning.
 **
diff --git a/src/sqliteInt.h b/src/sqliteInt.h
index 1be14a5c9..d4e255ea2 100644
--- a/src/sqliteInt.h
+++ b/src/sqliteInt.h
@@ -25,20 +25,20 @@
 **                                  used on lines of code that actually
 **                                  implement parts of coverage testing.
 **
-**    OPTIMIZATION-IF-TRUE        - This branch is allowed to alway be false
+**    OPTIMIZATION-IF-TRUE        - This branch is allowed to always be false
 **                                  and the correct answer is still obtained,
 **                                  though perhaps more slowly.
 **
-**    OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE       - This branch is allowed to alway be true
+**    OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE       - This branch is allowed to always be true
 **                                  and the correct answer is still obtained,
 **                                  though perhaps more slowly.
 **
 **    PREVENTS-HARMLESS-OVERREAD  - This branch prevents a buffer overread
 **                                  that would be harmless and undetectable
-**                                  if it did occur.  
+**                                  if it did occur.
 **
 ** In all cases, the special comment must be enclosed in the usual
-** slash-asterisk...asterisk-slash comment marks, with no spaces between the 
+** slash-asterisk...asterisk-slash comment marks, with no spaces between the
 ** asterisks and the comment text.
 */
 
@@ -182,7 +182,7 @@
 #endif
 
 /* Optionally #include a user-defined header, whereby compilation options
-** may be set prior to where they take effect, but after platform setup. 
+** may be set prior to where they take effect, but after platform setup.
 ** If SQLITE_CUSTOM_INCLUDE=? is defined, its value names the #include
 ** file.
 */
@@ -230,7 +230,7 @@
 #ifndef __has_extension
 # define __has_extension(x) 0     /* compatibility with non-clang compilers */
 #endif
-#if GCC_VERSION>=4007000 || __has_extension(c_atomic) 
+#if GCC_VERSION>=4007000 || __has_extension(c_atomic)
 # define SQLITE_ATOMIC_INTRINSICS 1
 # define AtomicLoad(PTR)       __atomic_load_n((PTR),__ATOMIC_RELAXED)
 # define AtomicStore(PTR,VAL)  __atomic_store_n((PTR),(VAL),__ATOMIC_RELAXED)
@@ -722,7 +722,7 @@
 #endif
 
 /*
-** The compile-time options SQLITE_MMAP_READWRITE and 
+** The compile-time options SQLITE_MMAP_READWRITE and
 ** SQLITE_ENABLE_BATCH_ATOMIC_WRITE are not compatible with one another.
 ** You must choose one or the other (or neither) but not both.
 */
@@ -1124,7 +1124,7 @@ struct BusyHandler {
 /*
 ** Name of table that holds the database schema.
 **
-** The PREFERRED names are used whereever possible.  But LEGACY is also
+** The PREFERRED names are used wherever possible.  But LEGACY is also
 ** used for backwards compatibility.
 **
 **  1.  Queries can use either the PREFERRED or the LEGACY names
@@ -1342,7 +1342,7 @@ typedef int VList;
 /*
 ** Default synchronous levels.
 **
-** Note that (for historcal reasons) the PAGER_SYNCHRONOUS_* macros differ
+** Note that (for historical reasons) the PAGER_SYNCHRONOUS_* macros differ
 ** from the SQLITE_DEFAULT_SYNCHRONOUS value by 1.
 **
 **           PAGER_SYNCHRONOUS       DEFAULT_SYNCHRONOUS
@@ -1381,7 +1381,7 @@ struct Db {
 ** An instance of the following structure stores a database schema.
 **
 ** Most Schema objects are associated with a Btree.  The exception is
-** the Schema for the TEMP databaes (sqlite3.aDb[1]) which is free-standing.
+** the Schema for the TEMP database (sqlite3.aDb[1]) which is free-standing.
 ** In shared cache mode, a single Schema object can be shared by multiple
 ** Btrees that refer to the same underlying BtShared object.
 **
@@ -1492,7 +1492,7 @@ struct Lookaside {
   LookasideSlot *pInit;   /* List of buffers not previously used */
   LookasideSlot *pFree;   /* List of available buffers */
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TWOSIZE_LOOKASIDE
-  LookasideSlot *pSmallInit; /* List of small buffers not prediously used */
+  LookasideSlot *pSmallInit; /* List of small buffers not previously used */
   LookasideSlot *pSmallFree; /* List of available small buffers */
   void *pMiddle;          /* First byte past end of full-size buffers and
                           ** the first byte of LOOKASIDE_SMALL buffers */
@@ -1509,7 +1509,7 @@ struct LookasideSlot {
 #define EnableLookaside   db->lookaside.bDisable--;\
    db->lookaside.sz=db->lookaside.bDisable?0:db->lookaside.szTrue
 
-/* Size of the smaller allocations in two-size lookside */
+/* Size of the smaller allocations in two-size lookaside */
 #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_TWOSIZE_LOOKASIDE
 #  define LOOKASIDE_SMALL           0
 #else
@@ -1937,7 +1937,7 @@ struct FuncDestructor {
 **
 ** Note that even though SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE and SQLITE_INNOCUOUS have the
 ** same bit value, their meanings are inverted.  SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE is
-** used internally and if set means tha the function has side effects.
+** used internally and if set means that the function has side effects.
 ** SQLITE_INNOCUOUS is used by application code and means "not unsafe".
 ** See multiple instances of tag-20230109-1.
 */
@@ -1970,7 +1970,7 @@ struct FuncDestructor {
 #define INLINEFUNC_coalesce             0
 #define INLINEFUNC_implies_nonnull_row  1
 #define INLINEFUNC_expr_implies_expr    2
-#define INLINEFUNC_expr_compare         3      
+#define INLINEFUNC_expr_compare         3
 #define INLINEFUNC_affinity             4
 #define INLINEFUNC_iif                  5
 #define INLINEFUNC_sqlite_offset        6
@@ -2019,7 +2019,7 @@ struct FuncDestructor {
 **   PURE_DATE(zName, nArg, iArg, bNC, xFunc)
 **     Used for "pure" date/time functions, this macro is like DFUNCTION
 **     except that it does set the SQLITE_FUNC_CONSTANT flags.  iArg is
-**     ignored and the user-data for these functions is set to an 
+**     ignored and the user-data for these functions is set to an
 **     arbitrary non-NULL pointer.  The bNC parameter is not used.
 **
 **   AGGREGATE(zName, nArg, iArg, bNC, xStep, xFinal)
@@ -2527,7 +2527,7 @@ struct FKey {
 ** foreign key.
 **
 ** The OE_Default value is a place holder that means to use whatever
-** conflict resolution algorthm is required from context.
+** conflict resolution algorithm is required from context.
 **
 ** The following symbolic values are used to record which type
 ** of conflict resolution action to take.
@@ -2814,7 +2814,7 @@ struct AggInfo {
 /*
 ** Macros to compute aCol[] and aFunc[] register numbers.
 **
-** These macros should not be used prior to the call to 
+** These macros should not be used prior to the call to
 ** assignAggregateRegisters() that computes the value of pAggInfo->iFirstReg.
 ** The assert()s that are part of this macro verify that constraint.
 */
@@ -2941,7 +2941,7 @@ struct Expr {
                          ** TK_REGISTER: register number
                          ** TK_TRIGGER: 1 -> new, 0 -> old
                          ** EP_Unlikely:  134217728 times likelihood
-                         ** TK_IN: ephemerial table holding RHS
+                         ** TK_IN: ephemeral table holding RHS
                          ** TK_SELECT_COLUMN: Number of columns on the LHS
                          ** TK_SELECT: 1st register of result vector */
   ynVar iColumn;         /* TK_COLUMN: column index.  -1 for rowid.
@@ -3211,7 +3211,7 @@ struct SrcItem {
     unsigned notCte :1;        /* This item may not match a CTE */
     unsigned isUsing :1;       /* u3.pUsing is valid */
     unsigned isOn :1;          /* u3.pOn was once valid and non-NULL */
-    unsigned isSynthUsing :1;  /* u3.pUsing is synthensized from NATURAL */
+    unsigned isSynthUsing :1;  /* u3.pUsing is synthesized from NATURAL */
     unsigned isNestedFrom :1;  /* pSelect is a SF_NestedFrom subquery */
   } fg;
   int iCursor;      /* The VDBE cursor number used to access this table */
@@ -3376,7 +3376,7 @@ struct NameContext {
 ** conflict-target clause.)  The pUpsertTargetWhere is the optional
 ** WHERE clause used to identify partial unique indexes.
 **
-** pUpsertSet is the list of column=expr terms of the UPDATE statement. 
+** pUpsertSet is the list of column=expr terms of the UPDATE statement.
 ** The pUpsertSet field is NULL for a ON CONFLICT DO NOTHING.  The
 ** pUpsertWhere is the WHERE clause for the UPDATE and is NULL if the
 ** WHERE clause is omitted.
@@ -3897,7 +3897,7 @@ struct AuthContext {
 #define OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION  0x02    /* OP_Delete/Insert: save cursor pos */
 #define OPFLAG_AUXDELETE     0x04    /* OP_Delete: index in a DELETE op */
 #define OPFLAG_NOCHNG_MAGIC  0x6d    /* OP_MakeRecord: serialtype 10 is ok */
-#define OPFLAG_PREFORMAT     0x80    /* OP_Insert uses preformatted cell */ 
+#define OPFLAG_PREFORMAT     0x80    /* OP_Insert uses preformatted cell */
 
 /*
 ** Each trigger present in the database schema is stored as an instance of
@@ -4057,7 +4057,7 @@ typedef struct {
 /* Tuning parameters are set using SQLITE_TESTCTRL_TUNE and are controlled
 ** on debug-builds of the CLI using ".testctrl tune ID VALUE".  Tuning
 ** parameters are for temporary use during development, to help find
-** optimial values for parameters in the query planner.  The should not
+** optimal values for parameters in the query planner.  The should not
 ** be used on trunk check-ins.  They are a temporary mechanism available
 ** for transient development builds only.
 **
@@ -5228,10 +5228,10 @@ int sqlite3KeyInfoIsWriteable(KeyInfo*);
 #endif
 int sqlite3CreateFunc(sqlite3 *, const char *, int, int, void *,
   void (*)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value **),
-  void (*)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value **), 
+  void (*)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value **),
   void (*)(sqlite3_context*),
   void (*)(sqlite3_context*),
-  void (*)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value **), 
+  void (*)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value **),
   FuncDestructor *pDestructor
 );
 void sqlite3NoopDestructor(void*);
diff --git a/src/sqliteLimit.h b/src/sqliteLimit.h
index 08703cb73..bfb596da2 100644
--- a/src/sqliteLimit.h
+++ b/src/sqliteLimit.h
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
 **    May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
 **
 *************************************************************************
-** 
+**
 ** This file defines various limits of what SQLite can process.
 */
 
@@ -57,9 +57,9 @@
 #endif
 
 /*
-** The maximum depth of an expression tree. This is limited to 
-** some extent by SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH. But sometime you might 
-** want to place more severe limits on the complexity of an 
+** The maximum depth of an expression tree. This is limited to
+** some extent by SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH. But sometime you might
+** want to place more severe limits on the complexity of an
 ** expression. A value of 0 means that there is no limit.
 */
 #ifndef SQLITE_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@
 ** level of recursion for each term.  A stack overflow can result
 ** if the number of terms is too large.  In practice, most SQL
 ** never has more than 3 or 4 terms.  Use a value of 0 to disable
-** any limit on the number of terms in a compount SELECT.
+** any limit on the number of terms in a compound SELECT.
 */
 #ifndef SQLITE_MAX_COMPOUND_SELECT
 # define SQLITE_MAX_COMPOUND_SELECT 500
@@ -140,10 +140,10 @@
 **
 ** Earlier versions of SQLite allowed the user to change this value at
 ** compile time. This is no longer permitted, on the grounds that it creates
-** a library that is technically incompatible with an SQLite library 
-** compiled with a different limit. If a process operating on a database 
-** with a page-size of 65536 bytes crashes, then an instance of SQLite 
-** compiled with the default page-size limit will not be able to rollback 
+** a library that is technically incompatible with an SQLite library
+** compiled with a different limit. If a process operating on a database
+** with a page-size of 65536 bytes crashes, then an instance of SQLite
+** compiled with the default page-size limit will not be able to rollback
 ** the aborted transaction. This could lead to database corruption.
 */
 #ifdef SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE
@@ -202,7 +202,7 @@
 ** Maximum depth of recursion for triggers.
 **
 ** A value of 1 means that a trigger program will not be able to itself
-** fire any triggers. A value of 0 means that no trigger programs at all 
+** fire any triggers. A value of 0 means that no trigger programs at all
 ** may be executed.
 */
 #ifndef SQLITE_MAX_TRIGGER_DEPTH
diff --git a/src/tclsqlite.c b/src/tclsqlite.c
index c455c29f1..f7a04b699 100644
--- a/src/tclsqlite.c
+++ b/src/tclsqlite.c
@@ -1780,7 +1780,7 @@ static Tcl_Obj *dbEvalColumnValue(DbEvalContext *p, int iCol){
 
 /*
 ** If using Tcl version 8.6 or greater, use the NR functions to avoid
-** recursive evalution of scripts by the [db eval] and [db trans]
+** recursive evaluation of scripts by the [db eval] and [db trans]
 ** commands. Even if the headers used while compiling the extension
 ** are 8.6 or newer, the code still tests the Tcl version at runtime.
 ** This allows stubs-enabled builds to be used with older Tcl libraries.
@@ -2441,7 +2441,7 @@ static int SQLITE_TCLAPI DbObjCmd(
   **
   ** This command usage is equivalent to the sqlite2.x COPY statement,
   ** which imports file data into a table using the PostgreSQL COPY file format:
-  **   $db copy $conflit_algo $table_name $filename \t \\N
+  **   $db copy $conflict_algorithm $table_name $filename \t \\N
   */
   case DB_COPY: {
     char *zTable;               /* Insert data into this table */
@@ -3427,7 +3427,7 @@ deserialize_error:
   ** Start a new transaction (if we are not already in the midst of a
   ** transaction) and execute the TCL script SCRIPT.  After SCRIPT
   ** completes, either commit the transaction or roll it back if SCRIPT
-  ** throws an exception.  Or if no new transation was started, do nothing.
+  ** throws an exception.  Or if no new transaction was started, do nothing.
   ** pass the exception on up the stack.
   **
   ** This command was inspired by Dave Thomas's talk on Ruby at the
diff --git a/src/test1.c b/src/test1.c
index cc41bb3ce..2bc7a58a7 100644
--- a/src/test1.c
+++ b/src/test1.c
@@ -2736,7 +2736,7 @@ static int SQLITE_TCLAPI test_atomic_batch_write(
 /*
 ** Usage:  sqlite3_next_stmt  DB  STMT
 **
-** Return the next statment in sequence after STMT.
+** Return the next statement in sequence after STMT.
 */
 static int SQLITE_TCLAPI test_next_stmt(
   void * clientData,
@@ -6115,7 +6115,7 @@ static int SQLITE_TCLAPI vfs_unlink_test(
   assert( sqlite3_vfs_find("__two")==&two );
 
   /* Calling sqlite_vfs_register with non-zero second parameter changes the
-  ** default VFS, even if the 1st parameter is an existig VFS that is
+  ** default VFS, even if the 1st parameter is an existing VFS that is
   ** previously registered as the non-default.
   */
   sqlite3_vfs_register(&one, 1);
diff --git a/src/test3.c b/src/test3.c
index d1626b6ef..7fd766247 100644
--- a/src/test3.c
+++ b/src/test3.c
@@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ static int SQLITE_TCLAPI btree_payload_size(
 ** routines, both for accuracy and for speed.
 **
 ** An integer is written using putVarint() and read back with
-** getVarint() and varified to be unchanged.  This repeats COUNT
+** getVarint() and verified to be unchanged.  This repeats COUNT
 ** times.  The first integer is START*MULTIPLIER.  Each iteration
 ** increases the integer by INCREMENT.
 **
diff --git a/src/test6.c b/src/test6.c
index aa94b9b5e..5d8e6b9be 100644
--- a/src/test6.c
+++ b/src/test6.c
@@ -33,25 +33,25 @@ typedef struct WriteBuffer WriteBuffer;
 /*
 ** Method:
 **
-**   This layer is implemented as a wrapper around the "real" 
-**   sqlite3_file object for the host system. Each time data is 
+**   This layer is implemented as a wrapper around the "real"
+**   sqlite3_file object for the host system. Each time data is
 **   written to the file object, instead of being written to the
-**   underlying file, the write operation is stored in an in-memory 
+**   underlying file, the write operation is stored in an in-memory
 **   structure (type WriteBuffer). This structure is placed at the
 **   end of a global ordered list (the write-list).
 **
 **   When data is read from a file object, the requested region is
-**   first retrieved from the real file. The write-list is then 
-**   traversed and data copied from any overlapping WriteBuffer 
+**   first retrieved from the real file. The write-list is then
+**   traversed and data copied from any overlapping WriteBuffer
 **   structures to the output buffer. i.e. a read() operation following
 **   one or more write() operations works as expected, even if no
 **   data has actually been written out to the real file.
 **
-**   When a fsync() operation is performed, an operating system crash 
-**   may be simulated, in which case exit(-1) is called (the call to 
+**   When a fsync() operation is performed, an operating system crash
+**   may be simulated, in which case exit(-1) is called (the call to
 **   xSync() never returns). Whether or not a crash is simulated,
-**   the data associated with a subset of the WriteBuffer structures 
-**   stored in the write-list is written to the real underlying files 
+**   the data associated with a subset of the WriteBuffer structures
+**   stored in the write-list is written to the real underlying files
 **   and the entries removed from the write-list. If a crash is simulated,
 **   a subset of the buffers may be corrupted before the data is written.
 **
@@ -63,13 +63,13 @@ typedef struct WriteBuffer WriteBuffer;
 **   Normal mode is used when the simulated device has none of the
 **   SQLITE_IOCAP_XXX flags set.
 **
-**   In normal mode, if the fsync() is not a simulated crash, the 
+**   In normal mode, if the fsync() is not a simulated crash, the
 **   write-list is traversed from beginning to end. Each WriteBuffer
 **   structure associated with the file handle used to call xSync()
 **   is written to the real file and removed from the write-list.
 **
-**   If a crash is simulated, one of the following takes place for 
-**   each WriteBuffer in the write-list, regardless of which 
+**   If a crash is simulated, one of the following takes place for
+**   each WriteBuffer in the write-list, regardless of which
 **   file-handle it is associated with:
 **
 **     1. The buffer is correctly written to the file, just as if
@@ -77,14 +77,14 @@ typedef struct WriteBuffer WriteBuffer;
 **
 **     2. Nothing is done.
 **
-**     3. Garbage data is written to all sectors of the file that 
+**     3. Garbage data is written to all sectors of the file that
 **        overlap the region specified by the WriteBuffer. Or garbage
-**        data is written to some contiguous section within the 
+**        data is written to some contiguous section within the
 **        overlapped sectors.
 **
 ** Device Characteristic flag handling:
 **
-**   If the IOCAP_ATOMIC flag is set, then option (3) above is 
+**   If the IOCAP_ATOMIC flag is set, then option (3) above is
 **   never selected.
 **
 **   If the IOCAP_ATOMIC512 flag is set, and the WriteBuffer represents
@@ -96,11 +96,11 @@ typedef struct WriteBuffer WriteBuffer;
 **
 **   If either the IOCAP_SAFEAPPEND or IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL flags are set
 **   and a crash is being simulated, then an entry of the write-list is
-**   selected at random. Everything in the list after the selected entry 
+**   selected at random. Everything in the list after the selected entry
 **   is discarded before processing begins.
 **
-**   If IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL is set and a crash is being simulated, option 
-**   (1) is selected for all write-list entries except the last. If a 
+**   If IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL is set and a crash is being simulated, option
+**   (1) is selected for all write-list entries except the last. If a
 **   crash is not being simulated, then all entries in the write-list
 **   that occur before at least one write() on the file-handle specified
 **   as part of the xSync() are written to their associated real files.
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ typedef struct WriteBuffer WriteBuffer;
 ** Each write operation in the write-list is represented by an instance
 ** of the following structure.
 **
-** If zBuf is 0, then this structure represents a call to xTruncate(), 
+** If zBuf is 0, then this structure represents a call to xTruncate(),
 ** not xWrite(). In that case, iOffset is the size that the file is
 ** truncated to.
 */
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ struct CrashFile {
   char *zName;
   int flags;                           /* Flags the file was opened with */
 
-  /* Cache of the entire file. This is used to speed up OsRead() and 
+  /* Cache of the entire file. This is used to speed up OsRead() and
   ** OsFileSize() calls. Although both could be done by traversing the
   ** write-list, in practice this is impractically slow.
   */
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ struct CrashGlobal {
   int iDeviceCharacteristics;  /* Value of simulated device characteristics */
 
   int iCrash;                  /* Crash on the iCrash'th call to xSync() */
-  char zCrashFile[500];        /* Crash during an xSync() on this file */ 
+  char zCrashFile[500];        /* Crash during an xSync() on this file */
 };
 
 static CrashGlobal g = {0, 0, SQLITE_DEFAULT_SECTOR_SIZE, 0, 0};
@@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ static void *crash_realloc(void *p, int n){
 
 /*
 ** Wrapper around the sqlite3OsWrite() function that avoids writing to the
-** 512 byte block begining at offset PENDING_BYTE.
+** 512 byte block beginning at offset PENDING_BYTE.
 */
 static int writeDbFile(CrashFile *p, u8 *z, i64 iAmt, i64 iOff){
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ static int writeListSync(CrashFile *pFile, int isCrash){
   WriteBuffer *pWrite;
   WriteBuffer **ppPtr;
 
-  /* If this is not a crash simulation, set pFinal to point to the 
+  /* If this is not a crash simulation, set pFinal to point to the
   ** last element of the write-list that is associated with file handle
   ** pFile.
   **
@@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ static int writeListSync(CrashFile *pFile, int isCrash){
       char random;
       sqlite3_randomness(1, &random);
 
-      /* Do not select option 3 (sector trashing) if the IOCAP_ATOMIC flag 
+      /* Do not select option 3 (sector trashing) if the IOCAP_ATOMIC flag
       ** is set or this is an OsTruncate(), not an Oswrite().
       */
       if( (iDc&SQLITE_IOCAP_ATOMIC) || (pWrite->zBuf==0) ){
@@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ static int writeListSync(CrashFile *pFile, int isCrash){
         *ppPtr = pWrite->pNext;
 #ifdef TRACE_CRASHTEST
         if( isCrash ){
-          printf("Writing %d bytes @ %d (%s)\n", 
+          printf("Writing %d bytes @ %d (%s)\n",
             pWrite->nBuf, (int)pWrite->iOffset, pWrite->pFile->zName
           );
         }
@@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ static int writeListSync(CrashFile *pFile, int isCrash){
         ppPtr = &pWrite->pNext;
 #ifdef TRACE_CRASHTEST
         if( isCrash ){
-          printf("Omiting %d bytes @ %d (%s)\n", 
+          printf("Omiting %d bytes @ %d (%s)\n",
             pWrite->nBuf, (int)pWrite->iOffset, pWrite->pFile->zName
           );
         }
@@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ static int writeListSync(CrashFile *pFile, int isCrash){
         assert(pWrite->zBuf);
 
 #ifdef TRACE_CRASHTEST
-        printf("Trashing %d sectors (%d bytes) @ %lld (sector %d) (%s)\n", 
+        printf("Trashing %d sectors (%d bytes) @ %lld (sector %d) (%s)\n",
             1+iLast-iFirst, (1+iLast-iFirst)*g.iSectorSize,
             pWrite->iOffset, iFirst, pWrite->pFile->zName
         );
@@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ static int writeListSync(CrashFile *pFile, int isCrash){
         if( zGarbage ){
           sqlite3_int64 i;
           for(i=iFirst; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<=iLast; i++){
-            sqlite3_randomness(g.iSectorSize, zGarbage); 
+            sqlite3_randomness(g.iSectorSize, zGarbage);
             rc = writeDbFile(
               pWrite->pFile, zGarbage, g.iSectorSize, i*g.iSectorSize
             );
@@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ static int writeListAppend(
     g.pWriteList = pNew;
   }
   g.pWriteListEnd = pNew;
-  
+ 
   return SQLITE_OK;
 }
 
@@ -407,9 +407,9 @@ static int cfClose(sqlite3_file *pFile){
 ** Read data from a crash-file.
 */
 static int cfRead(
-  sqlite3_file *pFile, 
-  void *zBuf, 
-  int iAmt, 
+  sqlite3_file *pFile,
+  void *zBuf,
+  int iAmt,
   sqlite_int64 iOfst
 ){
   CrashFile *pCrash = (CrashFile *)pFile;
@@ -431,9 +431,9 @@ static int cfRead(
 ** Write data to a crash-file.
 */
 static int cfWrite(
-  sqlite3_file *pFile, 
-  const void *zBuf, 
-  int iAmt, 
+  sqlite3_file *pFile,
+  const void *zBuf,
+  int iAmt,
   sqlite_int64 iOfst
 ){
   CrashFile *pCrash = (CrashFile *)pFile;
@@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ struct crashAppData {
 **
 ** The caller will have allocated pVfs->szOsFile bytes of space
 ** at pFile. This file uses this space for the CrashFile structure
-** and allocates space for the "real" file structure using 
+** and allocates space for the "real" file structure using
 ** sqlite3_malloc(). The assumption here is (pVfs->szOsFile) is
 ** equal or greater than sizeof(CrashFile).
 */
@@ -667,17 +667,17 @@ static int cfDelete(sqlite3_vfs *pCfVfs, const char *zPath, int dirSync){
   return pVfs->xDelete(pVfs, zPath, dirSync);
 }
 static int cfAccess(
-  sqlite3_vfs *pCfVfs, 
-  const char *zPath, 
-  int flags, 
+  sqlite3_vfs *pCfVfs,
+  const char *zPath,
+  int flags,
   int *pResOut
 ){
   sqlite3_vfs *pVfs = (sqlite3_vfs *)pCfVfs->pAppData;
   return pVfs->xAccess(pVfs, zPath, flags, pResOut);
 }
 static int cfFullPathname(
-  sqlite3_vfs *pCfVfs, 
-  const char *zPath, 
+  sqlite3_vfs *pCfVfs,
+  const char *zPath,
   int nPathOut,
   char *zPathOut
 ){
@@ -754,11 +754,11 @@ static int processDevSymArgs(
     int nOpt;
     char *zOpt = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &nOpt);
 
-    if( (nOpt>11 || nOpt<2 || strncmp("-sectorsize", zOpt, nOpt)) 
+    if( (nOpt>11 || nOpt<2 || strncmp("-sectorsize", zOpt, nOpt))
      && (nOpt>16 || nOpt<2 || strncmp("-characteristics", zOpt, nOpt))
     ){
-      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, 
-        "Bad option: \"", zOpt, 
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+        "Bad option: \"", zOpt,
         "\" - must be \"-characteristics\" or \"-sectorsize\"", 0
       );
       return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -786,7 +786,7 @@ static int processDevSymArgs(
         Tcl_Obj *pFlag = Tcl_DuplicateObj(apObj[j]);
         Tcl_IncrRefCount(pFlag);
         Tcl_UtfToLower(Tcl_GetString(pFlag));
- 
+
         rc = Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct(
             interp, pFlag, aFlag, sizeof(aFlag[0]), "no such flag", 0, &iChoice
         );
@@ -814,7 +814,7 @@ static int processDevSymArgs(
 /*
 ** tclcmd:   sqlite3_crash_now
 **
-** Simulate a crash immediately. This function does not return 
+** Simulate a crash immediately. This function does not return
 ** (writeListSync() calls exit(-1)).
 */
 static int SQLITE_TCLAPI crashNowCmd(
@@ -853,7 +853,7 @@ static int SQLITE_TCLAPI crashEnableCmd(
     0,                  /* pNext */
     "crash",            /* zName */
     0,                  /* pAppData */
-  
+ 
     cfOpen,               /* xOpen */
     cfDelete,             /* xDelete */
     cfAccess,             /* xAccess */
@@ -909,7 +909,7 @@ static int SQLITE_TCLAPI crashEnableCmd(
 ** an argument. For -sectorsize, this is the simulated sector size in
 ** bytes. For -characteristics, the argument must be a list of io-capability
 ** flags to simulate. Valid flags are "atomic", "atomic512", "atomic1K",
-** "atomic2K", "atomic4K", "atomic8K", "atomic16K", "atomic32K", 
+** "atomic2K", "atomic4K", "atomic8K", "atomic16K", "atomic32K",
 ** "atomic64K", "sequential" and "safe_append".
 **
 ** Example:
@@ -1046,7 +1046,7 @@ static int SQLITE_TCLAPI jtObjCmd(
   zParent = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]);
   if( objc==3 ){
     if( strcmp(zParent, "-default") ){
-      Tcl_AppendResult(interp, 
+      Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
           "bad option \"", zParent, "\": must be -default", 0
       );
       return TCL_ERROR;
diff --git a/src/test8.c b/src/test8.c
index 7a532346e..f0f574310 100644
--- a/src/test8.c
+++ b/src/test8.c
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ typedef struct echo_cursor echo_cursor;
 
 /*
 ** The test module defined in this file uses four global Tcl variables to
-** commicate with test-scripts:
+** communicate with test-scripts:
 **
 **     $::echo_module
 **     $::echo_module_sync_fail
diff --git a/src/test_devsym.c b/src/test_devsym.c
index 7847bc300..86b78f15a 100644
--- a/src/test_devsym.c
+++ b/src/test_devsym.c
@@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ static int devsymDeviceCharacteristics(sqlite3_file *pFile){
 }
 
 /*
-** Shared-memory methods are all pass-thrus.
+** Shared-memory methods are all pass-throughs.
 */
 static int devsymShmLock(sqlite3_file *pFile, int ofst, int n, int flags){
   devsym_file *p = (devsym_file *)pFile;
diff --git a/src/test_init.c b/src/test_init.c
index 58465785d..400ab9a2b 100644
--- a/src/test_init.c
+++ b/src/test_init.c
@@ -38,12 +38,12 @@ static struct Wrapped {
   sqlite3_mem_methods     mem;
   sqlite3_mutex_methods   mutex;
 
-  int mem_init;                /* True if mem subsystem is initalized */
-  int mem_fail;                /* True to fail mem subsystem inialization */
-  int mutex_init;              /* True if mutex subsystem is initalized */
-  int mutex_fail;              /* True to fail mutex subsystem inialization */
-  int pcache_init;             /* True if pcache subsystem is initalized */
-  int pcache_fail;             /* True to fail pcache subsystem inialization */
+  int mem_init;              /* True if mem subsystem is initialized */
+  int mem_fail;              /* True to fail mem subsystem initialization */
+  int mutex_init;            /* True if mutex subsystem is initialized */
+  int mutex_fail;            /* True to fail mutex subsystem initialization */
+  int pcache_init;           /* True if pcache subsystem is initialized */
+  int pcache_fail;           /* True to fail pcache subsystem initialization */
 } wrapped;
 
 static int wrMemInit(void *pAppData){
diff --git a/src/test_intarray.h b/src/test_intarray.h
index 116e3bdc0..b68233b12 100644
--- a/src/test_intarray.h
+++ b/src/test_intarray.h
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@
 **
 **     SELECT * FROM table WHERE x IN (?,?,?,...,?);
 **
-** And then binding indivdual integers to each of ? slots, a C-language
+** And then binding individual integers to each of ? slots, a C-language
 ** application can create an intarray object (named "ex1" in the following
 ** example), prepare a statement like this:
 **
diff --git a/src/test_md5.c b/src/test_md5.c
index b67002686..7903797db 100644
--- a/src/test_md5.c
+++ b/src/test_md5.c
@@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ static void MD5DigestToBase16(unsigned char *digest, char *zBuf){
 
 
 /*
-** Convert a 128-bit MD5 digest into sequency of eight 5-digit integers
+** Convert a 128-bit MD5 digest into sequences of eight 5-digit integers
 ** each representing 16 bits of the digest and separated from each
 ** other by a "-" character.
 */
diff --git a/src/test_multiplex.c b/src/test_multiplex.c
index 226131f75..d06ed2f79 100644
--- a/src/test_multiplex.c
+++ b/src/test_multiplex.c
@@ -28,9 +28,9 @@
 **
 ** The procedure call above will create and register a new VFS shim named
 ** "multiplex".  The multiplex VFS will use the VFS named by zOrigVfsName to
-** do the actual disk I/O.  (The zOrigVfsName parameter may be NULL, in 
+** do the actual disk I/O.  (The zOrigVfsName parameter may be NULL, in
 ** which case the default VFS at the moment sqlite3_multiplex_initialize()
-** is called will be used as the underlying real VFS.)  
+** is called will be used as the underlying real VFS.)
 **
 ** If the makeDefault parameter is TRUE then multiplex becomes the new
 ** default VFS.  Otherwise, you can use the multiplex VFS by specifying
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 ** URI.
 **
 ** The multiplex VFS allows databases up to 32 GiB in size.  But it splits
-** the files up into smaller pieces, so that they will work even on 
+** the files up into smaller pieces, so that they will work even on
 ** filesystems that do not support large files.  The default chunk size
 ** is 2147418112 bytes (which is 64KiB less than 2GiB) but this can be
 ** changed at compile-time by defining the SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_CHUNK_SIZE
@@ -58,10 +58,10 @@
 #endif
 #include "sqlite3ext.h"
 
-/* 
-** These should be defined to be the same as the values in 
+/*
+** These should be defined to be the same as the values in
 ** sqliteInt.h.  They are defined separately here so that
-** the multiplex VFS shim can be built as a loadable 
+** the multiplex VFS shim can be built as a loadable
 ** module.
 */
 #define UNUSED_PARAMETER(x) (void)(x)
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@
 #endif
 
 /* This is the limit on the chunk size.  It may be changed by calling
-** the xFileControl() interface.  It will be rounded up to a 
+** the xFileControl() interface.  It will be rounded up to a
 ** multiple of MAX_PAGE_SIZE.  We default it here to 2GiB less 64KiB.
 */
 #ifndef SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_CHUNK_SIZE
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ struct multiplexGroup {
 
 /*
 ** An instance of the following object represents each open connection
-** to a file that is multiplex'ed.  This object is a 
+** to a file that is multiplex'ed.  This object is a
 ** subclass of sqlite3_file.  The sqlite3_file object for the underlying
 ** VFS is appended to this structure.
 */
@@ -157,11 +157,11 @@ static struct {
   */
   sqlite3_vfs sThisVfs;
 
-  /* The sIoMethods defines the methods used by sqlite3_file objects 
+  /* The sIoMethods defines the methods used by sqlite3_file objects
   ** associated with this shim.  It is initialized at start-time and does
   ** not require a mutex.
   **
-  ** When the underlying VFS is called to open a file, it might return 
+  ** When the underlying VFS is called to open a file, it might return
   ** either a version 1 or a version 2 sqlite3_file object.  This shim
   ** has to create a wrapper sqlite3_file of the same version.  Hence
   ** there are two I/O method structures, one for version 1 and the other
@@ -199,16 +199,16 @@ static int multiplexStrlen30(const char *z){
 ** nul-terminator.
 **
 ** If iChunk is 0 (or 400 - the number for the first journal file chunk),
-** the output is a copy of the input string. Otherwise, if 
+** the output is a copy of the input string. Otherwise, if
 ** SQLITE_ENABLE_8_3_NAMES is not defined or the input buffer does not contain
-** a "." character, then the output is a copy of the input string with the 
-** three-digit zero-padded decimal representation if iChunk appended to it. 
+** a "." character, then the output is a copy of the input string with the
+** three-digit zero-padded decimal representation if iChunk appended to it.
 ** For example:
 **
 **   zBase="test.db", iChunk=4  ->  zOut="test.db004"
 **
 ** Or, if SQLITE_ENABLE_8_3_NAMES is defined and the input buffer contains
-** a "." character, then everything after the "." is replaced by the 
+** a "." character, then everything after the "." is replaced by the
 ** three-digit representation of iChunk.
 **
 **   zBase="test.db", iChunk=4  ->  zOut="test.004"
@@ -232,12 +232,12 @@ static void multiplexFilename(
     if( i>=n-4 ) n = i+1;
     if( flags & SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL ){
       /* The extensions on overflow files for main databases are 001, 002,
-      ** 003 and so forth.  To avoid name collisions, add 400 to the 
+      ** 003 and so forth.  To avoid name collisions, add 400 to the
       ** extensions of journal files so that they are 401, 402, 403, ....
       */
       iChunk += SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_JOURNAL_8_3_OFFSET;
     }else if( flags & SQLITE_OPEN_WAL ){
-      /* To avoid name collisions, add 700 to the 
+      /* To avoid name collisions, add 700 to the
       ** extensions of WAL files so that they are 701, 702, 703, ....
       */
       iChunk += SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_WAL_8_3_OFFSET;
@@ -297,8 +297,8 @@ static sqlite3_file *multiplexSubOpen(
   sqlite3_vfs *pOrigVfs = gMultiplex.pOrigVfs;        /* Real VFS */
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_8_3_NAMES
-  /* If JOURNAL_8_3_OFFSET is set to (say) 400, then any overflow files are 
-  ** part of a database journal are named db.401, db.402, and so on. A 
+  /* If JOURNAL_8_3_OFFSET is set to (say) 400, then any overflow files are
+  ** part of a database journal are named db.401, db.402, and so on. A
   ** database may therefore not grow to larger than 400 chunks. Attempting
   ** to open chunk 401 indicates the database is full. */
   if( iChunk>=SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_JOURNAL_8_3_OFFSET ){
@@ -351,8 +351,8 @@ static sqlite3_file *multiplexSubOpen(
 
 /*
 ** Return the size, in bytes, of chunk number iChunk.  If that chunk
-** does not exist, then return 0.  This function does not distingish between
-** non-existant files and zero-length files.
+** does not exist, then return 0.  This function does not distinguish between
+** non-existent files and zero-length files.
 */
 static sqlite3_int64 multiplexSubSize(
   multiplexGroup *pGroup,    /* The multiplexor group */
@@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ static sqlite3_int64 multiplexSubSize(
   if( pSub==0 ) return 0;
   *rc = pSub->pMethods->xFileSize(pSub, &sz);
   return sz;
-}    
+}  
 
 /*
 ** This is the implementation of the multiplex_control() SQL function.
@@ -382,22 +382,22 @@ static void multiplexControlFunc(
   int op = 0;
   int iVal;
 
-  if( !db || argc!=2 ){ 
-    rc = SQLITE_ERROR; 
+  if( !db || argc!=2 ){
+    rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
   }else{
     /* extract params */
     op = sqlite3_value_int(argv[0]);
     iVal = sqlite3_value_int(argv[1]);
     /* map function op to file_control op */
     switch( op ){
-      case 1: 
-        op = MULTIPLEX_CTRL_ENABLE; 
+      case 1:
+        op = MULTIPLEX_CTRL_ENABLE;
         break;
-      case 2: 
-        op = MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_CHUNK_SIZE; 
+      case 2:
+        op = MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_CHUNK_SIZE;
         break;
-      case 3: 
-        op = MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_MAX_CHUNKS; 
+      case 3:
+        op = MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_MAX_CHUNKS;
         break;
       default:
         rc = SQLITE_NOTFOUND;
@@ -411,16 +411,16 @@ static void multiplexControlFunc(
 }
 
 /*
-** This is the entry point to register the auto-extension for the 
+** This is the entry point to register the auto-extension for the
 ** multiplex_control() function.
 */
 static int multiplexFuncInit(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
-  char **pzErrMsg, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
+  char **pzErrMsg,
   const sqlite3_api_routines *pApi
 ){
   int rc;
-  rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, "multiplex_control", 2, SQLITE_ANY, 
+  rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, "multiplex_control", 2, SQLITE_ANY,
       0, multiplexControlFunc, 0, 0);
   return rc;
 }
@@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ static int multiplexOpen(
     memset(pGroup, 0, sz);
     pMultiplexOpen->pGroup = pGroup;
     pGroup->bEnabled = (unsigned char)-1;
-    pGroup->bTruncate = (unsigned char)sqlite3_uri_boolean(zUri, "truncate", 
+    pGroup->bTruncate = (unsigned char)sqlite3_uri_boolean(zUri, "truncate",
                                    (flags & SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB)==0);
     pGroup->szChunk = (int)sqlite3_uri_int64(zUri, "chunksize",
                                         SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_CHUNK_SIZE);
@@ -551,11 +551,11 @@ static int multiplexOpen(
         if( sz64==0 ){
           if( flags & SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL ){
             /* If opening a main journal file and the first chunk is zero
-            ** bytes in size, delete any subsequent chunks from the 
+            ** bytes in size, delete any subsequent chunks from the
             ** file-system. */
             int iChunk = 1;
             do {
-              rc = pOrigVfs->xAccess(pOrigVfs, 
+              rc = pOrigVfs->xAccess(pOrigVfs,
                   pGroup->aReal[iChunk].z, SQLITE_ACCESS_EXISTS, &bExists
               );
               if( rc==SQLITE_OK && bExists ){
@@ -573,8 +573,8 @@ static int multiplexOpen(
           **
           ** Or, if the first overflow file does not exist and the main file is
           ** larger than the chunk size, that means the chunk size is too small.
-          ** But we have no way of determining the intended chunk size, so 
-          ** just disable the multiplexor all togethre.
+          ** But we have no way of determining the intended chunk size, so
+          ** just disable the multiplexor all together.
           */
           rc = pOrigVfs->xAccess(pOrigVfs, pGroup->aReal[1].z,
               SQLITE_ACCESS_EXISTS, &bExists);
@@ -618,7 +618,7 @@ static int multiplexDelete(
   rc = pOrigVfs->xDelete(pOrigVfs, zName, syncDir);
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
     /* If the main chunk was deleted successfully, also delete any subsequent
-    ** chunks - starting with the last (highest numbered). 
+    ** chunks - starting with the last (highest numbered).
     */
     int nName = (int)strlen(zName);
     char *z;
@@ -695,7 +695,7 @@ static int multiplexCurrentTimeInt64(sqlite3_vfs *a, sqlite3_int64 *b){
 
 /* xClose requests get passed through to the original VFS.
 ** We loop over all open chunk handles and close them.
-** The group structure for this file is unlinked from 
+** The group structure for this file is unlinked from
 ** our list of groups and freed.
 */
 static int multiplexClose(sqlite3_file *pConn){
@@ -1008,7 +1008,7 @@ static int multiplexFileControl(sqlite3_file *pConn, int op, void *pArg){
         /*
         ** PRAGMA multiplex_chunksize;
         **
-        ** Return the chunksize for the multiplexor, or no-op if the 
+        ** Return the chunksize for the multiplexor, or no-op if the
         ** multiplexor is not active.
         */
         if( sqlite3_stricmp(aFcntl[1],"multiplex_chunksize")==0
@@ -1138,8 +1138,8 @@ static int multiplexShmUnmap(sqlite3_file *pConn, int deleteFlag){
 /*
 ** CAPI: Initialize the multiplex VFS shim - sqlite3_multiplex_initialize()
 **
-** Use the VFS named zOrigVfsName as the VFS that does the actual work.  
-** Use the default if zOrigVfsName==NULL.  
+** Use the VFS named zOrigVfsName as the VFS that does the actual work.
+** Use the default if zOrigVfsName==NULL.
 **
 ** The multiplex VFS shim is named "multiplex".  It will become the default
 ** VFS if makeDefault is non-zero.
diff --git a/src/test_multiplex.h b/src/test_multiplex.h
index 790c778a3..065fac7ea 100644
--- a/src/test_multiplex.h
+++ b/src/test_multiplex.h
@@ -13,8 +13,8 @@
 ** This file contains a VFS "shim" - a layer that sits in between the
 ** pager and the real VFS.
 **
-** This particular shim enforces a multiplex system on DB files.  
-** This shim shards/partitions a single DB file into smaller 
+** This particular shim enforces a multiplex system on DB files. 
+** This shim shards/partitions a single DB file into smaller
 ** "chunks" such that the total DB file size may exceed the maximum
 ** file size of the underlying file system.
 **
@@ -33,14 +33,14 @@
 **   shim.
 **
 ** MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_CHUNK_SIZE:
-**   This file control is used to set the maximum allowed chunk 
-**   size for a multiplex file set.  The chunk size should be 
+**   This file control is used to set the maximum allowed chunk
+**   size for a multiplex file set.  The chunk size should be
 **   a multiple of SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, and will be rounded up
 **   if not.
 **
 ** MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_MAX_CHUNKS:
 **   This file control is used to set the maximum number of chunks
-**   allowed to be used for a mutliplex file set.
+**   allowed to be used for a multiplex file set.
 */
 #define MULTIPLEX_CTRL_ENABLE          214014
 #define MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_CHUNK_SIZE  214015
@@ -53,26 +53,26 @@ extern "C" {
 /*
 ** CAPI: Initialize the multiplex VFS shim - sqlite3_multiplex_initialize()
 **
-** Use the VFS named zOrigVfsName as the VFS that does the actual work.  
-** Use the default if zOrigVfsName==NULL.  
+** Use the VFS named zOrigVfsName as the VFS that does the actual work. 
+** Use the default if zOrigVfsName==NULL. 
 **
 ** The multiplex VFS shim is named "multiplex".  It will become the default
 ** VFS if makeDefault is non-zero.
 **
-** An auto-extension is registered which will make the function 
+** An auto-extension is registered which will make the function
 ** multiplex_control() available to database connections.  This
-** function gives access to the xFileControl interface of the 
+** function gives access to the xFileControl interface of the
 ** multiplex VFS shim.
 **
 ** SELECT multiplex_control(<op>,<val>);
-** 
+**
 **   <op>=1 MULTIPLEX_CTRL_ENABLE
 **   <val>=0 disable
 **   <val>=1 enable
-** 
+**
 **   <op>=2 MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_CHUNK_SIZE
 **   <val> int, chunk size
-** 
+**
 **   <op>=3 MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_MAX_CHUNKS
 **   <val> int, max chunks
 **
diff --git a/src/test_pcache.c b/src/test_pcache.c
index 8fcfe7e26..5266d6769 100644
--- a/src/test_pcache.c
+++ b/src/test_pcache.c
@@ -9,17 +9,17 @@
 **    May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
 **
 *************************************************************************
-** 
+**
 ** This file contains code used for testing the SQLite system.
 ** None of the code in this file goes into a deliverable build.
-** 
+**
 ** This file contains an application-defined pager cache
 ** implementation that can be plugged in in place of the
 ** default pcache.  This alternative pager cache will throw
 ** some errors that the default cache does not.
 **
 ** This pagecache implementation is designed for simplicity
-** not speed.  
+** not speed.
 */
 #include "sqlite3.h"
 #include <string.h>
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ struct testpcacheGlobalType {
   int nInstance;            /* Number of current instances */
   unsigned discardChance;   /* Chance of discarding on an unpin (0-100) */
   unsigned prngSeed;        /* Seed for the PRNG */
-  unsigned highStress;      /* Call xStress agressively */
+  unsigned highStress;      /* Call xStress aggressively */
 };
 static testpcacheGlobalType testpcacheGlobal;
 
@@ -131,8 +131,8 @@ static unsigned testpcacheRandom(testpcache *p){
 ** Allocate a new page cache instance.
 */
 static sqlite3_pcache *testpcacheCreate(
-  int szPage, 
-  int szExtra, 
+  int szPage,
+  int szExtra,
   int bPurgeable
 ){
   int nMem;
@@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ static sqlite3_pcache_page *testpcacheFetch(
     return 0;
   }
 
-  /* Do not allocate if highStress is enabled and createFlag is not 2.  
+  /* Do not allocate if highStress is enabled and createFlag is not 2.
   **
   ** The highStress setting causes pagerStress() to be called much more
   ** often, which exercises the pager logic more intensely.
@@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ void installTestPCache(
   int installFlag,            /* True to install.  False to uninstall. */
   unsigned discardChance,     /* 0-100.  Chance to discard on unpin */
   unsigned prngSeed,          /* Seed for the PRNG */
-  unsigned highStress         /* Call xStress agressively */
+  unsigned highStress         /* Call xStress aggressively */
 ){
   static const sqlite3_pcache_methods2 testPcache = {
     1,
diff --git a/src/test_quota.c b/src/test_quota.c
index e87e9772f..b436de466 100644
--- a/src/test_quota.c
+++ b/src/test_quota.c
@@ -999,7 +999,7 @@ size_t sqlite3_quota_fwrite(
   const void *pBuf,      /* Take content to write from here */
   size_t size,           /* Size of each element */
   size_t nmemb,          /* Number of elements */
-  quota_FILE *p          /* Write to this quota_FILE objecct */
+  quota_FILE *p          /* Write to this quota_FILE object */
 ){
   sqlite3_int64 iOfst;
   sqlite3_int64 iEnd;
@@ -1876,7 +1876,7 @@ static int SQLITE_TCLAPI test_quota_glob(
   Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]
 ){
   const char *zPattern;          /* The glob pattern */
-  const char *zText;             /* Text to compare agains the pattern */
+  const char *zText;             /* Text to compare against the pattern */
   int rc;
   if( objc!=3 ){
     Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "PATTERN TEXT");
diff --git a/src/test_vfstrace.c b/src/test_vfstrace.c
index d0bc29f0c..8b7d2fec7 100644
--- a/src/test_vfstrace.c
+++ b/src/test_vfstrace.c
@@ -787,7 +787,7 @@ static int vfstraceCurrentTimeInt64(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, sqlite3_int64 *pTimeOut){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return th3 emost recent error code and message
+** Return th3 most recent error code and message
 */
 static int vfstraceGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, int iErr, char *zErr){
   vfstrace_info *pInfo = (vfstrace_info*)pVfs->pAppData;
diff --git a/src/test_windirent.h b/src/test_windirent.h
index ada532253..28ce66778 100644
--- a/src/test_windirent.h
+++ b/src/test_windirent.h
@@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ struct DIR {
 #endif
 
 /*
-** Provide the function prototype for the POSIX compatiable getenv()
+** Provide the function prototype for the POSIX compatible getenv()
 ** function.  This function is not thread-safe.
 */
 
diff --git a/src/util.c b/src/util.c
index 3d4e01438..bed86a569 100644
--- a/src/util.c
+++ b/src/util.c
@@ -23,8 +23,8 @@
 
 /*
 ** Calls to sqlite3FaultSim() are used to simulate a failure during testing,
-** or to bypass normal error detection during testing in order to let 
-** execute proceed futher downstream.
+** or to bypass normal error detection during testing in order to let
+** execute proceed further downstream.
 **
 ** In deployment, sqlite3FaultSim() *always* return SQLITE_OK (0).  The
 ** sqlite3FaultSim() function only returns non-zero during testing.
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ int sqlite3Strlen30(const char *z){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return the declared type of a column.  Or return zDflt if the column 
+** Return the declared type of a column.  Or return zDflt if the column
 ** has no declared type.
 **
 ** The column type is an extra string stored after the zero-terminator on
@@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ static LONGDOUBLE_TYPE sqlite3Pow10(int E){
     if( E==0 ) break;
     x *= x;
   }
-  return r; 
+  return r;
 #endif
 }
 
@@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ static LONGDOUBLE_TYPE sqlite3Pow10(int E){
 **      1          =>  The input string is a pure integer
 **      2 or more  =>  The input has a decimal point or eNNN clause
 **      0 or less  =>  The input string is not a valid number
-**     -1          =>  Not a valid number, but has a valid prefix which 
+**     -1          =>  Not a valid number, but has a valid prefix which
 **                     includes a decimal point and/or an eNNN clause
 **
 ** Valid numbers are in one of these formats:
@@ -539,7 +539,7 @@ int sqlite3AtoF(const char *z, double *pResult, int length, u8 enc){
     eValid = 0;
     eType++;
 
-    /* This branch is needed to avoid a (harmless) buffer overread.  The 
+    /* This branch is needed to avoid a (harmless) buffer overread.  The
     ** special comment alerts the mutation tester that the correct answer
     ** is obtained even if the branch is omitted */
     if( z>=zEnd ) goto do_atof_calc;              /*PREVENTS-HARMLESS-OVERREAD*/
@@ -635,7 +635,7 @@ do_atof_calc:
   /* store the result */
   *pResult = result;
 
-  /* return true if number and no extra non-whitespace chracters after */
+  /* return true if number and no extra non-whitespace characters after */
   if( z==zEnd && nDigit>0 && eValid && eType>0 ){
     return eType;
   }else if( eType>=2 && (eType==3 || eValid) && nDigit>0 ){
@@ -771,7 +771,7 @@ int sqlite3Atoi64(const char *zNum, i64 *pNum, int length, u8 enc){
     /* This test and assignment is needed only to suppress UB warnings
     ** from clang and -fsanitize=undefined.  This test and assignment make
     ** the code a little larger and slower, and no harm comes from omitting
-    ** them, but we must appaise the undefined-behavior pharisees. */
+    ** them, but we must appease the undefined-behavior pharisees. */
     *pNum = neg ? SMALLEST_INT64 : LARGEST_INT64;
   }else if( neg ){
     *pNum = -(i64)u;
@@ -986,7 +986,7 @@ static int SQLITE_NOINLINE putVarint64(unsigned char *p, u64 v){
       v >>= 7;
     }
     return 9;
-  }    
+  }   
   n = 0;
   do{
     buf[n++] = (u8)((v & 0x7f) | 0x80);
@@ -1186,8 +1186,8 @@ u8 sqlite3GetVarint(const unsigned char *p, u64 *v){
 ** If the varint stored in p[0] is larger than can fit in a 32-bit unsigned
 ** integer, then set *v to 0xffffffff.
 **
-** A MACRO version, getVarint32, is provided which inlines the 
-** single-byte case.  All code should use the MACRO version as 
+** A MACRO version, getVarint32, is provided which inlines the
+** single-byte case.  All code should use the MACRO version as
 ** this function assumes the single-byte case has already been handled.
 */
 u8 sqlite3GetVarint32(const unsigned char *p, u32 *v){
@@ -1404,7 +1404,7 @@ void *sqlite3HexToBlob(sqlite3 *db, const char *z, int n){
 ** argument.  The zType is a word like "NULL" or "closed" or "invalid".
 */
 static void logBadConnection(const char *zType){
-  sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE, 
+  sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE,
      "API call with %s database connection pointer",
      zType
   );
@@ -1456,7 +1456,7 @@ int sqlite3SafetyCheckSickOrOk(sqlite3 *db){
 }
 
 /*
-** Attempt to add, substract, or multiply the 64-bit signed value iB against
+** Attempt to add, subtract, or multiply the 64-bit signed value iB against
 ** the other 64-bit signed integer at *pA and store the result in *pA.
 ** Return 0 on success.  Or if the operation would have resulted in an
 ** overflow, leave *pA unchanged and return 1.
@@ -1478,7 +1478,7 @@ int sqlite3AddInt64(i64 *pA, i64 iB){
     if( iA<0 && -(iA + LARGEST_INT64) > iB + 1 ) return 1;
   }
   *pA += iB;
-  return 0; 
+  return 0;
 #endif
 }
 int sqlite3SubInt64(i64 *pA, i64 iB){
@@ -1519,7 +1519,7 @@ int sqlite3MulInt64(i64 *pA, i64 iB){
 }
 
 /*
-** Compute the absolute value of a 32-bit signed integer, of possible.  Or 
+** Compute the absolute value of a 32-bit signed integer, of possible.  Or
 ** if the integer has a value of -2147483648, return +2147483647
 */
 int sqlite3AbsInt32(int x){
@@ -1559,11 +1559,11 @@ void sqlite3FileSuffix3(const char *zBaseFilename, char *z){
 }
 #endif
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Find (an approximate) sum of two LogEst values.  This computation is
 ** not a simple "+" operator because LogEst is stored as a logarithmic
 ** value.
-** 
+**
 */
 LogEst sqlite3LogEstAdd(LogEst a, LogEst b){
   static const unsigned char x[] = {
@@ -1661,8 +1661,8 @@ u64 sqlite3LogEstToInt(LogEst x){
 ** Conceptually:
 **
 **    struct VList {
-**      int nAlloc;   // Number of allocated slots 
-**      int nUsed;    // Number of used slots 
+**      int nAlloc;   // Number of allocated slots
+**      int nUsed;    // Number of used slots
 **      struct VListEntry {
 **        int iValue;    // Value for this entry
 **        int nSlot;     // Slots used by this entry
@@ -1671,7 +1671,7 @@ u64 sqlite3LogEstToInt(LogEst x){
 **    }
 **
 ** During code generation, pointers to the variable names within the
-** VList are taken.  When that happens, nAlloc is set to zero as an 
+** VList are taken.  When that happens, nAlloc is set to zero as an
 ** indication that the VList may never again be enlarged, since the
 ** accompanying realloc() would invalidate the pointers.
 */
@@ -1747,6 +1747,6 @@ int sqlite3VListNameToNum(VList *pIn, const char *zName, int nName){
 */
 #if defined(VDBE_PROFILE)  \
  || defined(SQLITE_PERFORMANCE_TRACE) \
- || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS) 
+ || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS)
 # include "hwtime.h"
 #endif
diff --git a/src/vacuum.c b/src/vacuum.c
index 9908cf142..c0ae4bc1e 100644
--- a/src/vacuum.c
+++ b/src/vacuum.c
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ SQLITE_NOINLINE int sqlite3RunVacuum(
   ** (possibly synchronous) transaction opened on the main database before
   ** sqlite3BtreeCopyFile() is called.
   **
-  ** An optimisation would be to use a non-journaled pager.
+  ** An optimization would be to use a non-journaled pager.
   ** (Later:) I tried setting "PRAGMA vacuum_db.journal_mode=OFF" but
   ** that actually made the VACUUM run slower.  Very little journalling
   ** actually occurs when doing a vacuum since the vacuum_db is initially
diff --git a/src/vdbe.c b/src/vdbe.c
index 2aa4e6df2..ebdd28ba9 100644
--- a/src/vdbe.c
+++ b/src/vdbe.c
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ static void test_trace_breakpoint(int pc, Op *pOp, Vdbe *v){
 **
 ** In other words, if M is 2, then I is either 0 (for fall-through) or
 ** 1 (for when the branch is taken).  If M is 3, the I is 0 for an
-** ordinary fall-through, I is 1 if the branch was taken, and I is 2 
+** ordinary fall-through, I is 1 if the branch was taken, and I is 2
 ** if the result of comparison is NULL.  For M=3, I=2 the jump may or
 ** may not be taken, depending on the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL flags in p5.
 ** When M is 4, that means that an OP_Jump is being run.  I is 0, 1, or 2
@@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ static VdbeCursor *allocateCursor(
   u8 eCurType           /* Type of the new cursor */
 ){
   /* Find the memory cell that will be used to store the blob of memory
-  ** required for this VdbeCursor structure. It is convenient to use a 
+  ** required for this VdbeCursor structure. It is convenient to use a
   ** vdbe memory cell to manage the memory allocation required for a
   ** VdbeCursor structure for the following reasons:
   **
@@ -268,8 +268,8 @@ static VdbeCursor *allocateCursor(
 
   int nByte;
   VdbeCursor *pCx = 0;
-  nByte = 
-      ROUND8P(sizeof(VdbeCursor)) + 2*sizeof(u32)*nField + 
+  nByte =
+      ROUND8P(sizeof(VdbeCursor)) + 2*sizeof(u32)*nField +
       (eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE?sqlite3BtreeCursorSize():0);
 
   assert( iCur>=0 && iCur<p->nCursor );
@@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ static void applyNumericAffinity(Mem *pRec, int bTryForInt){
 ** SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER:
 ** SQLITE_AFF_REAL:
 ** SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC:
-**    Try to convert pRec to an integer representation or a 
+**    Try to convert pRec to an integer representation or a
 **    floating-point representation if an integer representation
 **    is not possible.  Note that the integer representation is
 **    always preferred, even if the affinity is REAL, because
@@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ static void applyAffinity(
   }else if( affinity==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ){
     /* Only attempt the conversion to TEXT if there is an integer or real
     ** representation (blob and NULL do not get converted) but no string
-    ** representation.  It would be harmless to repeat the conversion if 
+    ** representation.  It would be harmless to repeat the conversion if
     ** there is already a string rep, but it is pointless to waste those
     ** CPU cycles. */
     if( 0==(pRec->flags&MEM_Str) ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/
@@ -435,12 +435,12 @@ int sqlite3_value_numeric_type(sqlite3_value *pVal){
 }
 
 /*
-** Exported version of applyAffinity(). This one works on sqlite3_value*, 
+** Exported version of applyAffinity(). This one works on sqlite3_value*,
 ** not the internal Mem* type.
 */
 void sqlite3ValueApplyAffinity(
-  sqlite3_value *pVal, 
-  u8 affinity, 
+  sqlite3_value *pVal,
+  u8 affinity,
   u8 enc
 ){
   applyAffinity((Mem *)pVal, affinity, enc);
@@ -478,7 +478,7 @@ static u16 SQLITE_NOINLINE computeNumericType(Mem *pMem){
 
 /*
 ** Return the numeric type for pMem, either MEM_Int or MEM_Real or both or
-** none.  
+** none. 
 **
 ** Unlike applyNumericAffinity(), this routine does not modify pMem->flags.
 ** But it does set pMem->u.r and pMem->u.i appropriately.
@@ -628,9 +628,9 @@ void sqlite3VdbeRegisterDump(Vdbe *v){
 /*
 ** This function is only called from within an assert() expression. It
 ** checks that the sqlite3.nTransaction variable is correctly set to
-** the number of non-transaction savepoints currently in the 
+** the number of non-transaction savepoints currently in the
 ** linked list starting at sqlite3.pSavepoint.
-** 
+**
 ** Usage:
 **
 **     assert( checkSavepointCount(db) );
@@ -708,7 +708,7 @@ static const char *vdbeMemTypeName(Mem *pMem){
 
 /*
 ** Execute as much of a VDBE program as we can.
-** This is the core of sqlite3_step().  
+** This is the core of sqlite3_step(). 
 */
 int sqlite3VdbeExec(
   Vdbe *p                    /* The VDBE */
@@ -822,7 +822,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeExec(
       test_trace_breakpoint((int)(pOp - aOp),pOp,p);
     }
 #endif
-      
+     
 
     /* Check to see if we need to simulate an interrupt.  This only happens
     ** if we have a special test build.
@@ -876,7 +876,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeExec(
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
     pOrigOp = pOp;
 #endif
-  
+ 
     switch( pOp->opcode ){
 
 /*****************************************************************************
@@ -917,7 +917,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeExec(
 /* Opcode:  Goto * P2 * * *
 **
 ** An unconditional jump to address P2.
-** The next instruction executed will be 
+** The next instruction executed will be
 ** the one at index P2 from the beginning of
 ** the program.
 **
@@ -929,8 +929,8 @@ int sqlite3VdbeExec(
 case OP_Goto: {             /* jump */
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
-  /* In debuggging mode, when the p5 flags is set on an OP_Goto, that
-  ** means we should really jump back to the preceeding OP_ReleaseReg
+  /* In debugging mode, when the p5 flags is set on an OP_Goto, that
+  ** means we should really jump back to the preceding OP_ReleaseReg
   ** instruction. */
   if( pOp->p5 ){
     assert( pOp->p2 < (int)(pOp - aOp) );
@@ -947,7 +947,7 @@ jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt:
   /* Opcodes that are used as the bottom of a loop (OP_Next, OP_Prev,
   ** OP_VNext, or OP_SorterNext) all jump here upon
   ** completion.  Check to see if sqlite3_interrupt() has been called
-  ** or if the progress callback needs to be invoked. 
+  ** or if the progress callback needs to be invoked.
   **
   ** This code uses unstructured "goto" statements and does not look clean.
   ** But that is not due to sloppy coding habits. The code is written this
@@ -973,7 +973,7 @@ check_for_interrupt:
     }
   }
 #endif
-  
+ 
   break;
 }
 
@@ -1131,14 +1131,14 @@ case OP_HaltIfNull: {      /* in3 */
 ** whether or not to rollback the current transaction.  Do not rollback
 ** if P2==OE_Fail. Do the rollback if P2==OE_Rollback.  If P2==OE_Abort,
 ** then back out all changes that have occurred during this execution of the
-** VDBE, but do not rollback the transaction. 
+** VDBE, but do not rollback the transaction.
 **
 ** If P4 is not null then it is an error message string.
 **
 ** P5 is a value between 0 and 4, inclusive, that modifies the P4 string.
 **
 **    0:  (no change)
-**    1:  NOT NULL contraint failed: P4
+**    1:  NOT NULL constraint failed: P4
 **    2:  UNIQUE constraint failed: P4
 **    3:  CHECK constraint failed: P4
 **    4:  FOREIGN KEY constraint failed: P4
@@ -1171,7 +1171,7 @@ case OP_Halt: {
     sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(db, p->nChange);
     pcx = sqlite3VdbeFrameRestore(pFrame);
     if( pOp->p2==OE_Ignore ){
-      /* Instruction pcx is the OP_Program that invoked the sub-program 
+      /* Instruction pcx is the OP_Program that invoked the sub-program
       ** currently being halted. If the p2 instruction of this OP_Halt
       ** instruction is set to OE_Ignore, then the sub-program is throwing
       ** an IGNORE exception. In this case jump to the address specified
@@ -1259,7 +1259,7 @@ case OP_Real: {            /* same as TK_FLOAT, out2 */
 /* Opcode: String8 * P2 * P4 *
 ** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4'
 **
-** P4 points to a nul terminated UTF-8 string. This opcode is transformed 
+** P4 points to a nul terminated UTF-8 string. This opcode is transformed
 ** into a String opcode before it is executed for the first time.  During
 ** this transformation, the length of string P4 is computed and stored
 ** as the P1 parameter.
@@ -1295,7 +1295,7 @@ case OP_String8: {         /* same as TK_STRING, out2 */
   /* Fall through to the next case, OP_String */
   /* no break */ deliberate_fall_through
 }
-  
+ 
 /* Opcode: String P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
 ** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4' (len=P1)
 **
@@ -1579,7 +1579,7 @@ case OP_IntCopy: {            /* out2 */
 **
 ** FK constraint violations are also checked when the prepared statement
 ** exits.  This opcode is used to raise foreign key constraint errors prior
-** to returning results such as a row change count or the result of a 
+** to returning results such as a row change count or the result of a
 ** RETURNING clause.
 */
 case OP_FkCheck: {
@@ -1727,15 +1727,15 @@ case OP_Concat: {           /* same as TK_CONCAT, in1, in2, out3 */
 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]/r[P1]
 **
 ** Divide the value in register P1 by the value in register P2
-** and store the result in register P3 (P3=P2/P1). If the value in 
-** register P1 is zero, then the result is NULL. If either input is 
+** and store the result in register P3 (P3=P2/P1). If the value in
+** register P1 is zero, then the result is NULL. If either input is
 ** NULL, the result is NULL.
 */
 /* Opcode: Remainder P1 P2 P3 * *
 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]%r[P1]
 **
-** Compute the remainder after integer register P2 is divided by 
-** register P1 and store the result in register P3. 
+** Compute the remainder after integer register P2 is divided by
+** register P1 and store the result in register P3.
 ** If the value in register P1 is zero the result is NULL.
 ** If either operand is NULL, the result is NULL.
 */
@@ -1932,7 +1932,7 @@ case OP_ShiftRight: {           /* same as TK_RSHIFT, in1, in2, out3 */
 
 /* Opcode: AddImm  P1 P2 * * *
 ** Synopsis: r[P1]=r[P1]+P2
-** 
+**
 ** Add the constant P2 to the value in register P1.
 ** The result is always an integer.
 **
@@ -1947,7 +1947,7 @@ case OP_AddImm: {            /* in1 */
 }
 
 /* Opcode: MustBeInt P1 P2 * * *
-** 
+**
 ** Force the value in register P1 to be an integer.  If the value
 ** in P1 is not an integer and cannot be converted into an integer
 ** without data loss, then jump immediately to P2, or if P2==0
@@ -1999,7 +1999,7 @@ case OP_RealAffinity: {                  /* in1 */
 ** Synopsis: affinity(r[P1])
 **
 ** Force the value in register P1 to be the type defined by P2.
-** 
+**
 ** <ul>
 ** <li> P2=='A' &rarr; BLOB
 ** <li> P2=='B' &rarr; TEXT
@@ -2033,17 +2033,17 @@ case OP_Cast: {                  /* in1 */
 ** Synopsis: IF r[P3]==r[P1]
 **
 ** Compare the values in register P1 and P3.  If reg(P3)==reg(P1) then
-** jump to address P2. 
+** jump to address P2.
 **
 ** The SQLITE_AFF_MASK portion of P5 must be an affinity character -
-** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made 
+** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made
 ** to coerce both inputs according to this affinity before the
 ** comparison is made. If the SQLITE_AFF_MASK is 0x00, then numeric
 ** affinity is used. Note that the affinity conversions are stored
 ** back into the input registers P1 and P3.  So this opcode can cause
 ** persistent changes to registers P1 and P3.
 **
-** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL, 
+** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL,
 ** the values are compared. If both values are blobs then memcmp() is
 ** used to determine the results of the comparison.  If both values
 ** are text, then the appropriate collating function specified in
@@ -2076,18 +2076,18 @@ case OP_Cast: {                  /* in1 */
 ** jump to address P2.
 **
 ** If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL bit of P5 is set and either reg(P1) or
-** reg(P3) is NULL then the take the jump.  If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL 
+** reg(P3) is NULL then the take the jump.  If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL
 ** bit is clear then fall through if either operand is NULL.
 **
 ** The SQLITE_AFF_MASK portion of P5 must be an affinity character -
-** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made 
+** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made
 ** to coerce both inputs according to this affinity before the
 ** comparison is made. If the SQLITE_AFF_MASK is 0x00, then numeric
 ** affinity is used. Note that the affinity conversions are stored
 ** back into the input registers P1 and P3.  So this opcode can cause
 ** persistent changes to registers P1 and P3.
 **
-** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL, 
+** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL,
 ** the values are compared. If both values are blobs then memcmp() is
 ** used to determine the results of the comparison.  If both values
 ** are text, then the appropriate collating function specified in
@@ -2267,7 +2267,7 @@ case OP_Ge: {             /* same as TK_GE, jump, in1, in3 */
 ** This opcode must follow an OP_Lt or OP_Gt comparison operator.  There
 ** can be zero or more OP_ReleaseReg opcodes intervening, but no other
 ** opcodes are allowed to occur between this instruction and the previous
-** OP_Lt or OP_Gt. 
+** OP_Lt or OP_Gt.
 **
 ** If result of an OP_Eq comparison on the same two operands as the
 ** prior OP_Lt or OP_Gt would have been true, then jump to P2.
@@ -2383,7 +2383,7 @@ case OP_Compare: {
     iCompare = sqlite3MemCompare(&aMem[p1+idx], &aMem[p2+idx], pColl);
     VVA_ONLY( iCompareIsInit = 1; )
     if( iCompare ){
-      if( (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[i] & KEYINFO_ORDER_BIGNULL) 
+      if( (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[i] & KEYINFO_ORDER_BIGNULL)
        && ((aMem[p1+idx].flags & MEM_Null) || (aMem[p2+idx].flags & MEM_Null))
       ){
         iCompare = -iCompare;
@@ -2468,13 +2468,13 @@ case OP_Or: {             /* same as TK_OR, in1, in2, out3 */
 ** IS NOT FALSE operators.
 **
 ** Interpret the value in register P1 as a boolean value.  Store that
-** boolean (a 0 or 1) in register P2.  Or if the value in register P1 is 
+** boolean (a 0 or 1) in register P2.  Or if the value in register P1 is
 ** NULL, then the P3 is stored in register P2.  Invert the answer if P4
 ** is 1.
 **
 ** The logic is summarized like this:
 **
-** <ul> 
+** <ul>
 ** <li> If P3==0 and P4==0  then  r[P2] := r[P1] IS TRUE
 ** <li> If P3==1 and P4==1  then  r[P2] := r[P1] IS FALSE
 ** <li> If P3==0 and P4==1  then  r[P2] := r[P1] IS NOT TRUE
@@ -2494,7 +2494,7 @@ case OP_IsTrue: {               /* in1, out2 */
 ** Synopsis: r[P2]= !r[P1]
 **
 ** Interpret the value in register P1 as a boolean value.  Store the
-** boolean complement in register P2.  If the value in register P1 is 
+** boolean complement in register P2.  If the value in register P1 is
 ** NULL, then a NULL is stored in P2.
 */
 case OP_Not: {                /* same as TK_NOT, in1, out2 */
@@ -2720,7 +2720,7 @@ case OP_ZeroOrNull: {            /* in1, in2, out2, in3 */
 /* Opcode: NotNull P1 P2 * * *
 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]!=NULL goto P2
 **
-** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is not NULL.  
+** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is not NULL. 
 */
 case OP_NotNull: {            /* same as TK_NOTNULL, jump, in1 */
   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
@@ -2796,7 +2796,7 @@ case OP_Offset: {          /* out3 */
 ** Interpret the data that cursor P1 points to as a structure built using
 ** the MakeRecord instruction.  (See the MakeRecord opcode for additional
 ** information about the format of the data.)  Extract the P2-th column
-** from this record.  If there are less than (P2+1) 
+** from this record.  If there are less than (P2+1)
 ** values in the record, extract a NULL.
 **
 ** The value extracted is stored in register P3.
@@ -2942,7 +2942,7 @@ op_column_restart:
   */
   if( pC->nHdrParsed<=p2 ){
     /* If there is more header available for parsing in the record, try
-    ** to extract additional fields up through the p2+1-th field 
+    ** to extract additional fields up through the p2+1-th field
     */
     if( pC->iHdrOffset<aOffset[0] ){
       /* Make sure zData points to enough of the record to cover the header. */
@@ -2954,7 +2954,7 @@ op_column_restart:
       }else{
         zData = pC->aRow;
       }
-  
+ 
       /* Fill in pC->aType[i] and aOffset[i] values through the p2-th field. */
     op_column_read_header:
       i = pC->nHdrParsed;
@@ -3067,7 +3067,7 @@ op_column_restart:
       **    2. the length(X) function if X is a blob, and
       **    3. if the content length is zero.
       ** So we might as well use bogus content rather than reading
-      ** content from disk. 
+      ** content from disk.
       **
       ** Although sqlite3VdbeSerialGet() may read at most 8 bytes from the
       ** buffer passed to it, debugging function VdbeMemPrettyPrint() may
@@ -3298,13 +3298,13 @@ case OP_MakeRecord: {
   ** like this:
   **
   ** ------------------------------------------------------------------------
-  ** | hdr-size | type 0 | type 1 | ... | type N-1 | data0 | ... | data N-1 | 
+  ** | hdr-size | type 0 | type 1 | ... | type N-1 | data0 | ... | data N-1 |
   ** ------------------------------------------------------------------------
   **
   ** Data(0) is taken from register P1.  Data(1) comes from register P1+1
   ** and so forth.
   **
-  ** Each type field is a varint representing the serial type of the 
+  ** Each type field is a varint representing the serial type of the
   ** corresponding data element (see sqlite3VdbeSerialType()). The
   ** hdr-size field is also a varint which is the offset from the beginning
   ** of the record to data0.
@@ -3494,7 +3494,7 @@ case OP_MakeRecord: {
   }
   nByte = nHdr+nData;
 
-  /* Make sure the output register has a buffer large enough to store 
+  /* Make sure the output register has a buffer large enough to store
   ** the new record. The output register (pOp->p3) is not allowed to
   ** be one of the input registers (because the following call to
   ** sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize() could clobber the value before it is used).
@@ -3589,12 +3589,12 @@ case OP_MakeRecord: {
 /* Opcode: Count P1 P2 P3 * *
 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=count()
 **
-** Store the number of entries (an integer value) in the table or index 
+** Store the number of entries (an integer value) in the table or index
 ** opened by cursor P1 in register P2.
 **
 ** If P3==0, then an exact count is obtained, which involves visiting
 ** every btree page of the table.  But if P3 is non-zero, an estimate
-** is returned based on the current cursor position.  
+** is returned based on the current cursor position. 
 */
 case OP_Count: {         /* out2 */
   i64 nEntry;
@@ -3636,7 +3636,7 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
   zName = pOp->p4.z;
 
   /* Assert that the p1 parameter is valid. Also that if there is no open
-  ** transaction, then there cannot be any savepoints. 
+  ** transaction, then there cannot be any savepoints.
   */
   assert( db->pSavepoint==0 || db->autoCommit==0 );
   assert( p1==SAVEPOINT_BEGIN||p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE||p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK );
@@ -3646,7 +3646,7 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
 
   if( p1==SAVEPOINT_BEGIN ){
     if( db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){
-      /* A new savepoint cannot be created if there are active write 
+      /* A new savepoint cannot be created if there are active write
       ** statements (i.e. open read/write incremental blob handles).
       */
       sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot open savepoint - SQL statements in progress");
@@ -3670,7 +3670,7 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
       if( pNew ){
         pNew->zName = (char *)&pNew[1];
         memcpy(pNew->zName, zName, nName+1);
-    
+   
         /* If there is no open transaction, then mark this as a special
         ** "transaction savepoint". */
         if( db->autoCommit ){
@@ -3694,7 +3694,7 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
     /* Find the named savepoint. If there is no such savepoint, then an
     ** an error is returned to the user.  */
     for(
-      pSavepoint = db->pSavepoint; 
+      pSavepoint = db->pSavepoint;
       pSavepoint && sqlite3StrICmp(pSavepoint->zName, zName);
       pSavepoint = pSavepoint->pNext
     ){
@@ -3704,7 +3704,7 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
       sqlite3VdbeError(p, "no such savepoint: %s", zName);
       rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
     }else if( db->nVdbeWrite>0 && p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){
-      /* It is not possible to release (commit) a savepoint if there are 
+      /* It is not possible to release (commit) a savepoint if there are
       ** active write statements.
       */
       sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot release savepoint - "
@@ -3713,8 +3713,8 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
     }else{
 
       /* Determine whether or not this is a transaction savepoint. If so,
-      ** and this is a RELEASE command, then the current transaction 
-      ** is committed. 
+      ** and this is a RELEASE command, then the current transaction
+      ** is committed.
       */
       int isTransaction = pSavepoint->pNext==0 && db->isTransactionSavepoint;
       if( isTransaction && p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){
@@ -3762,8 +3762,8 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
         }
       }
       if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
-  
-      /* Regardless of whether this is a RELEASE or ROLLBACK, destroy all 
+ 
+      /* Regardless of whether this is a RELEASE or ROLLBACK, destroy all
       ** savepoints nested inside of the savepoint being operated on. */
       while( db->pSavepoint!=pSavepoint ){
         pTmp = db->pSavepoint;
@@ -3772,8 +3772,8 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
         db->nSavepoint--;
       }
 
-      /* If it is a RELEASE, then destroy the savepoint being operated on 
-      ** too. If it is a ROLLBACK TO, then set the number of deferred 
+      /* If it is a RELEASE, then destroy the savepoint being operated on
+      ** too. If it is a ROLLBACK TO, then set the number of deferred
       ** constraint violations present in the database to the value stored
       ** when the savepoint was created.  */
       if( p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){
@@ -3830,7 +3830,7 @@ case OP_AutoCommit: {
       db->autoCommit = 1;
     }else if( desiredAutoCommit && db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){
       /* If this instruction implements a COMMIT and other VMs are writing
-      ** return an error indicating that the other VMs must complete first. 
+      ** return an error indicating that the other VMs must complete first.
       */
       sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot commit transaction - "
                           "SQL statements in progress");
@@ -3859,7 +3859,7 @@ case OP_AutoCommit: {
         (!desiredAutoCommit)?"cannot start a transaction within a transaction":(
         (iRollback)?"cannot rollback - no transaction is active":
                    "cannot commit - no transaction is active"));
-         
+        
     rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
     goto abort_due_to_error;
   }
@@ -3870,7 +3870,7 @@ case OP_AutoCommit: {
 **
 ** Begin a transaction on database P1 if a transaction is not already
 ** active.
-** If P2 is non-zero, then a write-transaction is started, or if a 
+** If P2 is non-zero, then a write-transaction is started, or if a
 ** read-transaction is already active, it is upgraded to a write-transaction.
 ** If P2 is zero, then a read-transaction is started.  If P2 is 2 or more
 ** then an exclusive transaction is started.
@@ -3941,12 +3941,12 @@ case OP_Transaction: {
 
     if( p->usesStmtJournal
      && pOp->p2
-     && (db->autoCommit==0 || db->nVdbeRead>1) 
+     && (db->autoCommit==0 || db->nVdbeRead>1)
     ){
       assert( sqlite3BtreeTxnState(pBt)==SQLITE_TXN_WRITE );
       if( p->iStatement==0 ){
         assert( db->nStatement>=0 && db->nSavepoint>=0 );
-        db->nStatement++; 
+        db->nStatement++;
         p->iStatement = db->nSavepoint + db->nStatement;
       }
 
@@ -3974,7 +3974,7 @@ case OP_Transaction: {
     */
     sqlite3DbFree(db, p->zErrMsg);
     p->zErrMsg = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, "database schema has changed");
-    /* If the schema-cookie from the database file matches the cookie 
+    /* If the schema-cookie from the database file matches the cookie
     ** stored with the in-memory representation of the schema, do
     ** not reload the schema from the database file.
     **
@@ -3984,7 +3984,7 @@ case OP_Transaction: {
     ** prepared queries. If such a query is out-of-date, we do not want to
     ** discard the database schema, as the user code implementing the
     ** v-table would have to be ready for the sqlite3_vtab structure itself
-    ** to be invalidated whenever sqlite3_step() is called from within 
+    ** to be invalidated whenever sqlite3_step() is called from within
     ** a v-table method.
     */
     if( db->aDb[pOp->p1].pSchema->schema_cookie!=iMeta ){
@@ -4037,8 +4037,8 @@ case OP_ReadCookie: {               /* out2 */
 **
 ** Write the integer value P3 into cookie number P2 of database P1.
 ** P2==1 is the schema version.  P2==2 is the database format.
-** P2==3 is the recommended pager cache 
-** size, and so forth.  P1==0 is the main database file and P1==1 is the 
+** P2==3 is the recommended pager cache
+** size, and so forth.  P1==0 is the main database file and P1==1 is the
 ** database file used to store temporary tables.
 **
 ** A transaction must be started before executing this opcode.
@@ -4084,8 +4084,8 @@ case OP_SetCookie: {
 ** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3
 **
 ** Open a read-only cursor for the database table whose root page is
-** P2 in a database file.  The database file is determined by P3. 
-** P3==0 means the main database, P3==1 means the database used for 
+** P2 in a database file.  The database file is determined by P3.
+** P3==0 means the main database, P3==1 means the database used for
 ** temporary tables, and P3>1 means used the corresponding attached
 ** database.  Give the new cursor an identifier of P1.  The P1
 ** values need not be contiguous but all P1 values should be small integers.
@@ -4099,10 +4099,10 @@ case OP_SetCookie: {
 ** </ul>
 **
 ** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to
-** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo 
+** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo
 ** object, then table being opened must be an [index b-tree] where the
-** KeyInfo object defines the content and collating 
-** sequence of that index b-tree. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer 
+** KeyInfo object defines the content and collating
+** sequence of that index b-tree. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer
 ** value, then the table being opened must be a [table b-tree] with a
 ** number of columns no less than the value of P4.
 **
@@ -4138,10 +4138,10 @@ case OP_SetCookie: {
 ** OPFLAG_P2ISREG bit is set in P5 - see below).
 **
 ** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to
-** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo 
+** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo
 ** object, then table being opened must be an [index b-tree] where the
-** KeyInfo object defines the content and collating 
-** sequence of that index b-tree. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer 
+** KeyInfo object defines the content and collating
+** sequence of that index b-tree. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer
 ** value, then the table being opened must be a [table b-tree] with a
 ** number of columns no less than the value of P4.
 **
@@ -4257,7 +4257,7 @@ case OP_OpenWrite:
   /* Set the VdbeCursor.isTable variable. Previous versions of
   ** SQLite used to check if the root-page flags were sane at this point
   ** and report database corruption if they were not, but this check has
-  ** since moved into the btree layer.  */  
+  ** since moved into the btree layer.  */ 
   pCur->isTable = pOp->p4type!=P4_KEYINFO;
 
 open_cursor_set_hints:
@@ -4298,7 +4298,7 @@ case OP_OpenDup: {           /* ncycle */
   pCx->ub.pBtx = pOrig->ub.pBtx;
   pCx->noReuse = 1;
   pOrig->noReuse = 1;
-  rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pCx->ub.pBtx, pCx->pgnoRoot, BTREE_WRCSR, 
+  rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pCx->ub.pBtx, pCx->pgnoRoot, BTREE_WRCSR,
                           pCx->pKeyInfo, pCx->uc.pCursor);
   /* The sqlite3BtreeCursor() routine can only fail for the first cursor
   ** opened for a database.  Since there is already an open cursor when this
@@ -4312,7 +4312,7 @@ case OP_OpenDup: {           /* ncycle */
 ** Synopsis: nColumn=P2
 **
 ** Open a new cursor P1 to a transient table.
-** The cursor is always opened read/write even if 
+** The cursor is always opened read/write even if
 ** the main database is read-only.  The ephemeral
 ** table is deleted automatically when the cursor is closed.
 **
@@ -4346,7 +4346,7 @@ case OP_OpenEphemeral: {     /* ncycle */
   VdbeCursor *pCx;
   KeyInfo *pKeyInfo;
 
-  static const int vfsFlags = 
+  static const int vfsFlags =
       SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE |
       SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE |
       SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE |
@@ -4365,7 +4365,7 @@ case OP_OpenEphemeral: {     /* ncycle */
   }
   pCx = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
   if( pCx && !pCx->noReuse &&  ALWAYS(pOp->p2<=pCx->nField) ){
-    /* If the ephermeral table is already open and has no duplicates from
+    /* If the ephemeral table is already open and has no duplicates from
     ** OP_OpenDup, then erase all existing content so that the table is
     ** empty again, rather than creating a new table. */
     assert( pCx->isEphemeral );
@@ -4376,7 +4376,7 @@ case OP_OpenEphemeral: {     /* ncycle */
     pCx = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, pOp->p2, CURTYPE_BTREE);
     if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem;
     pCx->isEphemeral = 1;
-    rc = sqlite3BtreeOpen(db->pVfs, 0, db, &pCx->ub.pBtx, 
+    rc = sqlite3BtreeOpen(db->pVfs, 0, db, &pCx->ub.pBtx,
                           BTREE_OMIT_JOURNAL | BTREE_SINGLE | pOp->p5,
                           vfsFlags);
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -4390,7 +4390,7 @@ case OP_OpenEphemeral: {     /* ncycle */
         if( (pCx->pKeyInfo = pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo)!=0 ){
           assert( pOp->p4type==P4_KEYINFO );
           rc = sqlite3BtreeCreateTable(pCx->ub.pBtx, &pCx->pgnoRoot,
-              BTREE_BLOBKEY | pOp->p5); 
+              BTREE_BLOBKEY | pOp->p5);
           if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
             assert( pCx->pgnoRoot==SCHEMA_ROOT+1 );
             assert( pKeyInfo->db==db );
@@ -4465,7 +4465,7 @@ case OP_SequenceTest: {
 **
 ** Open a new cursor that points to a fake table that contains a single
 ** row of data.  The content of that one row is the content of memory
-** register P2.  In other words, cursor P1 becomes an alias for the 
+** register P2.  In other words, cursor P1 becomes an alias for the
 ** MEM_Blob content contained in register P2.
 **
 ** A pseudo-table created by this opcode is used to hold a single
@@ -4530,13 +4530,13 @@ case OP_ColumnsUsed: {
 /* Opcode: SeekGE P1 P2 P3 P4 *
 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
 **
-** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), 
-** use the value in register P3 as the key.  If cursor P1 refers 
-** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers 
-** that are used as an unpacked index key. 
+** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
+** use the value in register P3 as the key.  If cursor P1 refers
+** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
+** that are used as an unpacked index key.
 **
-** Reposition cursor P1 so that  it points to the smallest entry that 
-** is greater than or equal to the key value. If there are no records 
+** Reposition cursor P1 so that  it points to the smallest entry that
+** is greater than or equal to the key value. If there are no records
 ** greater than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
 **
 ** If the cursor P1 was opened using the OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flag, then this
@@ -4544,7 +4544,7 @@ case OP_ColumnsUsed: {
 ** else it will cause a jump to P2.  When the cursor is OPFLAG_SEEKEQ,
 ** this opcode must be followed by an IdxLE opcode with the same arguments.
 ** The IdxGT opcode will be skipped if this opcode succeeds, but the
-** IdxGT opcode will be used on subsequent loop iterations.  The 
+** IdxGT opcode will be used on subsequent loop iterations.  The
 ** OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flags is a hint to the btree layer to say that this
 ** is an equality search.
 **
@@ -4557,13 +4557,13 @@ case OP_ColumnsUsed: {
 /* Opcode: SeekGT P1 P2 P3 P4 *
 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
 **
-** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), 
-** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers 
-** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers 
-** that are used as an unpacked index key. 
+** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
+** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
+** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
+** that are used as an unpacked index key.
 **
-** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that 
-** is greater than the key value. If there are no records greater than 
+** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that
+** is greater than the key value. If there are no records greater than
 ** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
 **
 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order,
@@ -4572,16 +4572,16 @@ case OP_ColumnsUsed: {
 **
 ** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekLt, SeekGe, SeekLe
 */
-/* Opcode: SeekLT P1 P2 P3 P4 * 
+/* Opcode: SeekLT P1 P2 P3 P4 *
 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
 **
-** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), 
-** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers 
-** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers 
-** that are used as an unpacked index key. 
+** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
+** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
+** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
+** that are used as an unpacked index key.
 **
-** Reposition cursor P1 so that  it points to the largest entry that 
-** is less than the key value. If there are no records less than 
+** Reposition cursor P1 so that  it points to the largest entry that
+** is less than the key value. If there are no records less than
 ** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
 **
 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order,
@@ -4593,13 +4593,13 @@ case OP_ColumnsUsed: {
 /* Opcode: SeekLE P1 P2 P3 P4 *
 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
 **
-** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), 
-** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers 
-** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers 
-** that are used as an unpacked index key. 
+** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
+** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
+** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
+** that are used as an unpacked index key.
 **
-** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that 
-** is less than or equal to the key value. If there are no records 
+** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that
+** is less than or equal to the key value. If there are no records
 ** less than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
 **
 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order,
@@ -4611,7 +4611,7 @@ case OP_ColumnsUsed: {
 ** else it will cause a jump to P2.  When the cursor is OPFLAG_SEEKEQ,
 ** this opcode must be followed by an IdxLE opcode with the same arguments.
 ** The IdxGE opcode will be skipped if this opcode succeeds, but the
-** IdxGE opcode will be used on subsequent loop iterations.  The 
+** IdxGE opcode will be used on subsequent loop iterations.  The
 ** OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flags is a hint to the btree layer to say that this
 ** is an equality search.
 **
@@ -4856,7 +4856,7 @@ seek_not_found:
 ** row.  If This.P5 is false (0) then a jump is made to SeekGE.P2.  If
 ** This.P5 is true (non-zero) then a jump is made to This.P2.  The P5==0
 ** case occurs when there are no inequality constraints to the right of
-** the IN constraing.  The jump to SeekGE.P2 ends the loop.  The P5!=0 case
+** the IN constraint.  The jump to SeekGE.P2 ends the loop.  The P5!=0 case
 ** occurs when there are inequality constraints to the right of the IN
 ** operator.  In that case, the This.P2 will point either directly to or
 ** to setup code prior to the OP_IdxGT or OP_IdxGE opcode that checks for
@@ -4864,7 +4864,7 @@ seek_not_found:
 **
 ** Possible outcomes from this opcode:<ol>
 **
-** <li> If the cursor is initally not pointed to any valid row, then
+** <li> If the cursor is initially not pointed to any valid row, then
 **      fall through into the subsequent OP_SeekGE opcode.
 **
 ** <li> If the cursor is left pointing to a row that is before the target
@@ -4881,7 +4881,7 @@ seek_not_found:
 **      (indicating that the target row definitely does not exist in the
 **      btree) then jump to SeekGE.P2, ending the loop.
 **
-** <li> If the cursor ends up on a valid row that is past the target row 
+** <li> If the cursor ends up on a valid row that is past the target row
 **      (indicating that the target row does not exist in the btree) then
 **      jump to SeekOP.P2 if This.P5==0 or to This.P2 if This.P5>0.
 ** </ol>
@@ -4904,7 +4904,7 @@ case OP_SeekScan: {          /* ncycle */
     assert( pOp[1].p1==aOp[pOp->p2-1].p1 );
     assert( pOp[1].p2==aOp[pOp->p2-1].p2 );
     assert( pOp[1].p3==aOp[pOp->p2-1].p3 );
-    assert( aOp[pOp->p2-1].opcode==OP_IdxGT 
+    assert( aOp[pOp->p2-1].opcode==OP_IdxGT
          || aOp[pOp->p2-1].opcode==OP_IdxGE );
     testcase( aOp[pOp->p2-1].opcode==OP_IdxGE );
   }else{
@@ -4923,7 +4923,7 @@ case OP_SeekScan: {          /* ncycle */
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
      if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){
        printf("... cursor not valid - fall through\n");
-     }        
+     }       
 #endif
     break;
   }
@@ -4952,7 +4952,7 @@ case OP_SeekScan: {          /* ncycle */
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
       if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){
         printf("... %d steps and then skip\n", pOp->p1 - nStep);
-      }        
+      }       
 #endif
       VdbeBranchTaken(1,3);
       pOp++;
@@ -4963,7 +4963,7 @@ case OP_SeekScan: {          /* ncycle */
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
       if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){
         printf("... %d steps and then success\n", pOp->p1 - nStep);
-      }        
+      }       
 #endif
       VdbeBranchTaken(2,3);
       goto jump_to_p2;
@@ -4973,7 +4973,7 @@ case OP_SeekScan: {          /* ncycle */
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
       if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){
         printf("... fall through after %d steps\n", pOp->p1);
-      }        
+      }       
 #endif
       VdbeBranchTaken(0,3);
       break;
@@ -4990,7 +4990,7 @@ case OP_SeekScan: {          /* ncycle */
       }
     }
   }
-  
+ 
   break;
 }
 
@@ -5019,14 +5019,14 @@ case OP_SeekHit: {           /* ncycle */
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
     if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){
       printf("seekHit changes from %d to %d\n", pC->seekHit, pOp->p2);
-    }        
+    }       
 #endif
     pC->seekHit = pOp->p2;
   }else if( pC->seekHit>pOp->p3 ){
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
     if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){
       printf("seekHit changes from %d to %d\n", pC->seekHit, pOp->p3);
-    }        
+    }       
 #endif
     pC->seekHit = pOp->p3;
   }
@@ -5074,9 +5074,9 @@ case OP_IfNotOpen: {        /* jump */
 ** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord.  If
 ** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked
 ** record.
-** 
+**
 ** Cursor P1 is on an index btree.  If the record identified by P3 and P4
-** is not the prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2.  If P1 
+** is not the prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2.  If P1
 ** does contain an entry whose prefix matches the P3/P4 record then control
 ** falls through to the next instruction and P1 is left pointing at the
 ** matching entry.
@@ -5124,7 +5124,7 @@ case OP_IfNotOpen: {        /* jump */
 ** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord.  If
 ** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked
 ** record.
-** 
+**
 ** Cursor P1 is on an index btree.  If the record identified by P3 and P4
 ** contains any NULL value, jump immediately to P2.  If all terms of the
 ** record are not-NULL then a check is done to determine if any row in the
@@ -5149,7 +5149,7 @@ case OP_IfNoHope: {     /* jump, in3, ncycle */
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
   if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){
     printf("seekHit is %d\n", pC->seekHit);
-  }        
+  }       
 #endif
   if( pC->seekHit>=pOp->p4.i ) break;
   /* Fall through into OP_NotFound */
@@ -5245,9 +5245,9 @@ case OP_Found: {        /* jump, in3, ncycle */
 **
 ** P1 is the index of a cursor open on an SQL table btree (with integer
 ** keys).  If register P3 does not contain an integer or if P1 does not
-** contain a record with rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2.  
+** contain a record with rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2. 
 ** Or, if P2 is 0, raise an SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain
-** a record with rowid P3 then 
+** a record with rowid P3 then
 ** leave the cursor pointing at that record and fall through to the next
 ** instruction.
 **
@@ -5270,7 +5270,7 @@ case OP_Found: {        /* jump, in3, ncycle */
 ** P1 is the index of a cursor open on an SQL table btree (with integer
 ** keys).  P3 is an integer rowid.  If P1 does not contain a record with
 ** rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2.  Or, if P2 is 0, raise an
-** SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain a record with rowid P3 then 
+** SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain a record with rowid P3 then
 ** leave the cursor pointing at that record and fall through to the next
 ** instruction.
 **
@@ -5354,7 +5354,7 @@ notExistsWithKey:
 ** Find the next available sequence number for cursor P1.
 ** Write the sequence number into register P2.
 ** The sequence number on the cursor is incremented after this
-** instruction.  
+** instruction. 
 */
 case OP_Sequence: {           /* out2 */
   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
@@ -5374,9 +5374,9 @@ case OP_Sequence: {           /* out2 */
 ** table that cursor P1 points to.  The new record number is written
 ** written to register P2.
 **
-** If P3>0 then P3 is a register in the root frame of this VDBE that holds 
+** If P3>0 then P3 is a register in the root frame of this VDBE that holds
 ** the largest previously generated record number. No new record numbers are
-** allowed to be less than this value. When this value reaches its maximum, 
+** allowed to be less than this value. When this value reaches its maximum,
 ** an SQLITE_FULL error is generated. The P3 register is updated with the '
 ** generated record number. This P3 mechanism is used to help implement the
 ** AUTOINCREMENT feature.
@@ -5527,8 +5527,8 @@ case OP_NewRowid: {           /* out2 */
 ** is part of an INSERT operation.  The difference is only important to
 ** the update hook.
 **
-** Parameter P4 may point to a Table structure, or may be NULL. If it is 
-** not NULL, then the update-hook (sqlite3.xUpdateCallback) is invoked 
+** Parameter P4 may point to a Table structure, or may be NULL. If it is
+** not NULL, then the update-hook (sqlite3.xUpdateCallback) is invoked
 ** following a successful insert.
 **
 ** (WARNING/TODO: If P1 is a pseudo-cursor and P2 is dynamically
@@ -5609,7 +5609,7 @@ case OP_Insert: {
   x.pKey = 0;
   assert( BTREE_PREFORMAT==OPFLAG_PREFORMAT );
   rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pC->uc.pCursor, &x,
-      (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_APPEND|OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION|OPFLAG_PREFORMAT)), 
+      (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_APPEND|OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION|OPFLAG_PREFORMAT)),
       seekResult
   );
   pC->deferredMoveto = 0;
@@ -5662,7 +5662,7 @@ case OP_RowCell: {
 ** the cursor will be left pointing at  either the next or the previous
 ** record in the table. If it is left pointing at the next record, then
 ** the next Next instruction will be a no-op. As a result, in this case
-** it is ok to delete a record from within a Next loop. If 
+** it is ok to delete a record from within a Next loop. If
 ** OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION bit of P5 is clear, then the cursor will be
 ** left in an undefined state.
 **
@@ -5678,11 +5678,11 @@ case OP_RowCell: {
 ** P1 must not be pseudo-table.  It has to be a real table with
 ** multiple rows.
 **
-** If P4 is not NULL then it points to a Table object. In this case either 
+** If P4 is not NULL then it points to a Table object. In this case either
 ** the update or pre-update hook, or both, may be invoked. The P1 cursor must
-** have been positioned using OP_NotFound prior to invoking this opcode in 
-** this case. Specifically, if one is configured, the pre-update hook is 
-** invoked if P4 is not NULL. The update-hook is invoked if one is configured, 
+** have been positioned using OP_NotFound prior to invoking this opcode in
+** this case. Specifically, if one is configured, the pre-update hook is
+** invoked if P4 is not NULL. The update-hook is invoked if one is configured,
 ** P4 is not NULL, and the OPFLAG_NCHANGE flag is set in P2.
 **
 ** If the OPFLAG_ISUPDATE flag is set in P2, then P3 contains the address
@@ -5721,7 +5721,7 @@ case OP_Delete: {
   /* If the update-hook or pre-update-hook will be invoked, set zDb to
   ** the name of the db to pass as to it. Also set local pTab to a copy
   ** of p4.pTab. Finally, if p5 is true, indicating that this cursor was
-  ** last moved with OP_Next or OP_Prev, not Seek or NotFound, set 
+  ** last moved with OP_Next or OP_Prev, not Seek or NotFound, set
   ** VdbeCursor.movetoTarget to the current rowid.  */
   if( pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE && HAS_UPDATE_HOOK(db) ){
     assert( pC->iDb>=0 );
@@ -5740,20 +5740,20 @@ case OP_Delete: {
   /* Invoke the pre-update-hook if required. */
   assert( db->xPreUpdateCallback==0 || pTab==pOp->p4.pTab );
   if( db->xPreUpdateCallback && pTab ){
-    assert( !(opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) 
-         || HasRowid(pTab)==0 
-         || (aMem[pOp->p3].flags & MEM_Int) 
+    assert( !(opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE)
+         || HasRowid(pTab)==0
+         || (aMem[pOp->p3].flags & MEM_Int)
     );
     sqlite3VdbePreUpdateHook(p, pC,
-        (opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) ? SQLITE_UPDATE : SQLITE_DELETE, 
+        (opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) ? SQLITE_UPDATE : SQLITE_DELETE,
         zDb, pTab, pC->movetoTarget,
         pOp->p3, -1
     );
   }
   if( opflags & OPFLAG_ISNOOP ) break;
 #endif
- 
-  /* Only flags that can be set are SAVEPOISTION and AUXDELETE */ 
+
+  /* Only flags that can be set are SAVEPOISTION and AUXDELETE */
   assert( (pOp->p5 & ~(OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION|OPFLAG_AUXDELETE))==0 );
   assert( OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION==BTREE_SAVEPOSITION );
   assert( OPFLAG_AUXDELETE==BTREE_AUXDELETE );
@@ -5806,7 +5806,7 @@ case OP_ResetCount: {
 ** Synopsis: if key(P1)!=trim(r[P3],P4) goto P2
 **
 ** P1 is a sorter cursor. This instruction compares a prefix of the
-** record blob in register P3 against a prefix of the entry that 
+** record blob in register P3 against a prefix of the entry that
 ** the sorter cursor currently points to.  Only the first P4 fields
 ** of r[P3] and the sorter record are compared.
 **
@@ -5864,10 +5864,10 @@ case OP_SorterData: {
 /* Opcode: RowData P1 P2 P3 * *
 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=data
 **
-** Write into register P2 the complete row content for the row at 
+** Write into register P2 the complete row content for the row at
 ** which cursor P1 is currently pointing.
-** There is no interpretation of the data.  
-** It is just copied onto the P2 register exactly as 
+** There is no interpretation of the data. 
+** It is just copied onto the P2 register exactly as
 ** it is found in the database file.
 **
 ** If cursor P1 is an index, then the content is the key of the row.
@@ -6028,7 +6028,7 @@ case OP_NullRow: {
 */
 /* Opcode: Last P1 P2 * * *
 **
-** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Prev instruction for P1 
+** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Prev instruction for P1
 ** will refer to the last entry in the database table or index.
 ** If the table or index is empty and P2>0, then jump immediately to P2.
 ** If P2 is 0 or if the table or index is not empty, fall through
@@ -6134,10 +6134,10 @@ case OP_Sort: {        /* jump */
 }
 /* Opcode: Rewind P1 P2 * * *
 **
-** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1 
+** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1
 ** will refer to the first entry in the database table or index.
 ** If the table or index is empty, jump immediately to P2.
-** If the table or index is not empty, fall through to the following 
+** If the table or index is not empty, fall through to the following
 ** instruction.
 **
 ** If P2 is zero, that is an assertion that the P1 table is never
@@ -6314,7 +6314,7 @@ next_tail:
 ** run faster by avoiding an unnecessary seek on cursor P1.  However,
 ** the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT flag must only be set if there have been no prior
 ** seeks on the cursor or if the most recent seek used a key equivalent
-** to P2. 
+** to P2.
 **
 ** This instruction only works for indices.  The equivalent instruction
 ** for tables is OP_Insert.
@@ -6340,7 +6340,7 @@ case OP_IdxInsert: {        /* in2 */
   x.aMem = aMem + pOp->p3;
   x.nMem = (u16)pOp->p4.i;
   rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pC->uc.pCursor, &x,
-       (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_APPEND|OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION|OPFLAG_PREFORMAT)), 
+       (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_APPEND|OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION|OPFLAG_PREFORMAT)),
       ((pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT) ? pC->seekResult : 0)
       );
   assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 );
@@ -6378,7 +6378,7 @@ case OP_SorterInsert: {     /* in2 */
 ** Synopsis: key=r[P2@P3]
 **
 ** The content of P3 registers starting at register P2 form
-** an unpacked index key. This opcode removes that entry from the 
+** an unpacked index key. This opcode removes that entry from the
 ** index opened by cursor P1.
 **
 ** If P5 is not zero, then raise an SQLITE_CORRUPT_INDEX error
@@ -6436,8 +6436,8 @@ case OP_IdxDelete: {
 **
 ** P4 may be an array of integers (type P4_INTARRAY) containing
 ** one entry for each column in the P3 table.  If array entry a(i)
-** is non-zero, then reading column a(i)-1 from cursor P3 is 
-** equivalent to performing the deferred seek and then reading column i 
+** is non-zero, then reading column a(i)-1 from cursor P3 is
+** equivalent to performing the deferred seek and then reading column i
 ** from P1.  This information is stored in P3 and used to redirect
 ** reads against P3 over to P1, thus possibly avoiding the need to
 ** seek and read cursor P3.
@@ -6509,7 +6509,7 @@ case OP_IdxRowid: {           /* out2, ncycle */
 }
 
 /* Opcode: FinishSeek P1 * * * *
-** 
+**
 ** If cursor P1 was previously moved via OP_DeferredSeek, complete that
 ** seek operation now, without further delay.  If the cursor seek has
 ** already occurred, this instruction is a no-op.
@@ -6529,9 +6529,9 @@ case OP_FinishSeek: {        /* ncycle */
 /* Opcode: IdxGE P1 P2 P3 P4 *
 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
 **
-** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index 
-** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY.  Compare this key value against the index 
-** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID 
+** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
+** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY.  Compare this key value against the index
+** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID
 ** fields at the end.
 **
 ** If the P1 index entry is greater than or equal to the key value
@@ -6540,9 +6540,9 @@ case OP_FinishSeek: {        /* ncycle */
 /* Opcode: IdxGT P1 P2 P3 P4 *
 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
 **
-** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index 
-** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY.  Compare this key value against the index 
-** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID 
+** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
+** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY.  Compare this key value against the index
+** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID
 ** fields at the end.
 **
 ** If the P1 index entry is greater than the key value
@@ -6551,7 +6551,7 @@ case OP_FinishSeek: {        /* ncycle */
 /* Opcode: IdxLT P1 P2 P3 P4 *
 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
 **
-** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index 
+** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
 ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID.  Compare this key value against
 ** the index that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or
 ** ROWID on the P1 index.
@@ -6562,7 +6562,7 @@ case OP_FinishSeek: {        /* ncycle */
 /* Opcode: IdxLE P1 P2 P3 P4 *
 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
 **
-** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index 
+** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
 ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID.  Compare this key value against
 ** the index that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or
 ** ROWID on the P1 index.
@@ -6658,15 +6658,15 @@ case OP_IdxGE:  {       /* jump, ncycle */
 ** root pages contiguous at the beginning of the database.  The former
 ** value of the root page that moved - its value before the move occurred -
 ** is stored in register P2. If no page movement was required (because the
-** table being dropped was already the last one in the database) then a 
-** zero is stored in register P2.  If AUTOVACUUM is disabled then a zero 
+** table being dropped was already the last one in the database) then a
+** zero is stored in register P2.  If AUTOVACUUM is disabled then a zero
 ** is stored in register P2.
 **
 ** This opcode throws an error if there are any active reader VMs when
-** it is invoked. This is done to avoid the difficulty associated with 
-** updating existing cursors when a root page is moved in an AUTOVACUUM 
-** database. This error is thrown even if the database is not an AUTOVACUUM 
-** db in order to avoid introducing an incompatibility between autovacuum 
+** it is invoked. This is done to avoid the difficulty associated with
+** updating existing cursors when a root page is moved in an AUTOVACUUM
+** database. This error is thrown even if the database is not an AUTOVACUUM
+** db in order to avoid introducing an incompatibility between autovacuum
 ** and non-autovacuum modes.
 **
 ** See also: Clear
@@ -6723,7 +6723,7 @@ case OP_Destroy: {     /* out2 */
 */
 case OP_Clear: {
   i64 nChange;
- 
+
   sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(p, 0);
   nChange = 0;
   assert( p->readOnly==0 );
@@ -6751,7 +6751,7 @@ case OP_Clear: {
 */
 case OP_ResetSorter: {
   VdbeCursor *pC;
- 
+
   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
   pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
   assert( pC!=0 );
@@ -6823,7 +6823,7 @@ case OP_ParseSchema: {
   InitData initData;
 
   /* Any prepared statement that invokes this opcode will hold mutexes
-  ** on every btree.  This is a prerequisite for invoking 
+  ** on every btree.  This is a prerequisite for invoking
   ** sqlite3InitCallback().
   */
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
@@ -6884,7 +6884,7 @@ case OP_ParseSchema: {
     }
     goto abort_due_to_error;
   }
-  break;  
+  break; 
 }
 
 #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE)
@@ -6898,7 +6898,7 @@ case OP_LoadAnalysis: {
   assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb );
   rc = sqlite3AnalysisLoad(db, pOp->p1);
   if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
-  break;  
+  break; 
 }
 #endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE) */
 
@@ -6906,7 +6906,7 @@ case OP_LoadAnalysis: {
 **
 ** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe
 ** the table named P4 in database P1.  This is called after a table
-** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep 
+** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep
 ** the internal representation of the
 ** schema consistent with what is on disk.
 */
@@ -6934,7 +6934,7 @@ case OP_DropIndex: {
 **
 ** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe
 ** the trigger named P4 in database P1.  This is called after a trigger
-** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep 
+** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep
 ** the internal representation of the
 ** schema consistent with what is on disk.
 */
@@ -6954,7 +6954,7 @@ case OP_DropTrigger: {
 **
 ** The register P3 contains one less than the maximum number of allowed errors.
 ** At most reg(P3) errors will be reported.
-** In other words, the analysis stops as soon as reg(P1) errors are 
+** In other words, the analysis stops as soon as reg(P1) errors are
 ** seen.  Reg(P1) is updated with the number of errors remaining.
 **
 ** The root page numbers of all tables in the database are integers
@@ -7035,7 +7035,7 @@ case OP_RowSetRead: {       /* jump, in1, out3 */
 
   pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
   assert( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Blob)==0 || sqlite3VdbeMemIsRowSet(pIn1) );
-  if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Blob)==0 
+  if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Blob)==0
    || sqlite3RowSetNext((RowSet*)pIn1->z, &val)==0
   ){
     /* The boolean index is empty */
@@ -7107,13 +7107,13 @@ case OP_RowSetTest: {                     /* jump, in1, in3 */
 
 /* Opcode: Program P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
 **
-** Execute the trigger program passed as P4 (type P4_SUBPROGRAM). 
+** Execute the trigger program passed as P4 (type P4_SUBPROGRAM).
 **
-** P1 contains the address of the memory cell that contains the first memory 
-** cell in an array of values used as arguments to the sub-program. P2 
-** contains the address to jump to if the sub-program throws an IGNORE 
-** exception using the RAISE() function. Register P3 contains the address 
-** of a memory cell in this (the parent) VM that is used to allocate the 
+** P1 contains the address of the memory cell that contains the first memory
+** cell in an array of values used as arguments to the sub-program. P2
+** contains the address to jump to if the sub-program throws an IGNORE
+** exception using the RAISE() function. Register P3 contains the address
+** of a memory cell in this (the parent) VM that is used to allocate the
 ** memory required by the sub-vdbe at runtime.
 **
 ** P4 is a pointer to the VM containing the trigger program.
@@ -7133,17 +7133,17 @@ case OP_Program: {        /* jump */
   pProgram = pOp->p4.pProgram;
   pRt = &aMem[pOp->p3];
   assert( pProgram->nOp>0 );
-  
-  /* If the p5 flag is clear, then recursive invocation of triggers is 
+ 
+  /* If the p5 flag is clear, then recursive invocation of triggers is
   ** disabled for backwards compatibility (p5 is set if this sub-program
   ** is really a trigger, not a foreign key action, and the flag set
   ** and cleared by the "PRAGMA recursive_triggers" command is clear).
-  ** 
-  ** It is recursive invocation of triggers, at the SQL level, that is 
-  ** disabled. In some cases a single trigger may generate more than one 
-  ** SubProgram (if the trigger may be executed with more than one different 
+  **
+  ** It is recursive invocation of triggers, at the SQL level, that is
+  ** disabled. In some cases a single trigger may generate more than one
+  ** SubProgram (if the trigger may be executed with more than one different
   ** ON CONFLICT algorithm). SubProgram structures associated with a
-  ** single trigger all have the same value for the SubProgram.token 
+  ** single trigger all have the same value for the SubProgram.token
   ** variable.  */
   if( pOp->p5 ){
     t = pProgram->token;
@@ -7159,10 +7159,10 @@ case OP_Program: {        /* jump */
 
   /* Register pRt is used to store the memory required to save the state
   ** of the current program, and the memory required at runtime to execute
-  ** the trigger program. If this trigger has been fired before, then pRt 
+  ** the trigger program. If this trigger has been fired before, then pRt
   ** is already allocated. Otherwise, it must be initialized.  */
   if( (pRt->flags&MEM_Blob)==0 ){
-    /* SubProgram.nMem is set to the number of memory cells used by the 
+    /* SubProgram.nMem is set to the number of memory cells used by the
     ** program stored in SubProgram.aOp. As well as these, one memory
     ** cell is required for each cursor used by the program. Set local
     ** variable nMem (and later, VdbeFrame.nChildMem) to this value.
@@ -7207,7 +7207,7 @@ case OP_Program: {        /* jump */
   }else{
     pFrame = (VdbeFrame*)pRt->z;
     assert( pRt->xDel==sqlite3VdbeFrameMemDel );
-    assert( pProgram->nMem+pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildMem 
+    assert( pProgram->nMem+pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildMem
         || (pProgram->nCsr==0 && pProgram->nMem+1==pFrame->nChildMem) );
     assert( pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildCsr );
     assert( (int)(pOp - aOp)==pFrame->pc );
@@ -7248,10 +7248,10 @@ case OP_Program: {        /* jump */
 
 /* Opcode: Param P1 P2 * * *
 **
-** This opcode is only ever present in sub-programs called via the 
-** OP_Program instruction. Copy a value currently stored in a memory 
-** cell of the calling (parent) frame to cell P2 in the current frames 
-** address space. This is used by trigger programs to access the new.* 
+** This opcode is only ever present in sub-programs called via the
+** OP_Program instruction. Copy a value currently stored in a memory
+** cell of the calling (parent) frame to cell P2 in the current frames
+** address space. This is used by trigger programs to access the new.*
 ** and old.* values.
 **
 ** The address of the cell in the parent frame is determined by adding
@@ -7263,7 +7263,7 @@ case OP_Param: {           /* out2 */
   Mem *pIn;
   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
   pFrame = p->pFrame;
-  pIn = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p1 + pFrame->aOp[pFrame->pc].p1];   
+  pIn = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p1 + pFrame->aOp[pFrame->pc].p1];  
   sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pIn, MEM_Ephem);
   break;
 }
@@ -7275,8 +7275,8 @@ case OP_Param: {           /* out2 */
 ** Synopsis: fkctr[P1]+=P2
 **
 ** Increment a "constraint counter" by P2 (P2 may be negative or positive).
-** If P1 is non-zero, the database constraint counter is incremented 
-** (deferred foreign key constraints). Otherwise, if P1 is zero, the 
+** If P1 is non-zero, the database constraint counter is incremented
+** (deferred foreign key constraints). Otherwise, if P1 is zero, the
 ** statement counter is incremented (immediate foreign key constraints).
 */
 case OP_FkCounter: {
@@ -7294,7 +7294,7 @@ case OP_FkCounter: {
 ** Synopsis: if fkctr[P1]==0 goto P2
 **
 ** This opcode tests if a foreign key constraint-counter is currently zero.
-** If so, jump to instruction P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next 
+** If so, jump to instruction P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next
 ** instruction.
 **
 ** If P1 is non-zero, then the jump is taken if the database constraint-counter
@@ -7320,7 +7320,7 @@ case OP_FkIfZero: {         /* jump */
 **
 ** P1 is a register in the root frame of this VM (the root frame is
 ** different from the current frame if this instruction is being executed
-** within a sub-program). Set the value of register P1 to the maximum of 
+** within a sub-program). Set the value of register P1 to the maximum of
 ** its current value and the value in register P2.
 **
 ** This instruction throws an error if the memory cell is not initially
@@ -7380,7 +7380,7 @@ case OP_IfPos: {        /* jump, in1 */
 ** and r[P2] is set to be the value of the LIMIT, r[P1].
 **
 ** if r[P1] is zero or negative, that means there is no LIMIT
-** and r[P2] is set to -1. 
+** and r[P2] is set to -1.
 **
 ** Otherwise, r[P2] is set to the sum of r[P1] and r[P3].
 */
@@ -7412,7 +7412,7 @@ case OP_OffsetLimit: {    /* in1, out2, in3 */
 **
 ** Register P1 must contain an integer.  If the content of register P1 is
 ** initially greater than zero, then decrement the value in register P1.
-** If it is non-zero (negative or positive) and then also jump to P2.  
+** If it is non-zero (negative or positive) and then also jump to P2. 
 ** If register P1 is initially zero, leave it unchanged and fall through.
 */
 case OP_IfNotZero: {        /* jump, in1 */
@@ -7446,7 +7446,7 @@ case OP_DecrJumpZero: {      /* jump, in1 */
 ** Synopsis: accum=r[P3] step(r[P2@P5])
 **
 ** Execute the xStep function for an aggregate.
-** The function has P5 arguments.  P4 is a pointer to the 
+** The function has P5 arguments.  P4 is a pointer to the
 ** FuncDef structure that specifies the function.  Register P3 is the
 ** accumulator.
 **
@@ -7457,7 +7457,7 @@ case OP_DecrJumpZero: {      /* jump, in1 */
 ** Synopsis: accum=r[P3] inverse(r[P2@P5])
 **
 ** Execute the xInverse function for an aggregate.
-** The function has P5 arguments.  P4 is a pointer to the 
+** The function has P5 arguments.  P4 is a pointer to the
 ** FuncDef structure that specifies the function.  Register P3 is the
 ** accumulator.
 **
@@ -7468,7 +7468,7 @@ case OP_DecrJumpZero: {      /* jump, in1 */
 ** Synopsis: accum=r[P3] step(r[P2@P5])
 **
 ** Execute the xStep (if P1==0) or xInverse (if P1!=0) function for an
-** aggregate.  The function has P5 arguments.  P4 is a pointer to the 
+** aggregate.  The function has P5 arguments.  P4 is a pointer to the
 ** FuncDef structure that specifies the function.  Register P3 is the
 ** accumulator.
 **
@@ -7537,7 +7537,7 @@ case OP_AggStep1: {
   /* If this function is inside of a trigger, the register array in aMem[]
   ** might change from one evaluation to the next.  The next block of code
   ** checks to see if the register array has changed, and if so it
-  ** reinitializes the relavant parts of the sqlite3_context object */
+  ** reinitializes the relevant parts of the sqlite3_context object */
   if( pCtx->pMem != pMem ){
     pCtx->pMem = pMem;
     for(i=pCtx->argc-1; i>=0; i--) pCtx->argv[i] = &aMem[pOp->p2+i];
@@ -7586,7 +7586,7 @@ case OP_AggStep1: {
 ** Synopsis: accum=r[P1] N=P2
 **
 ** P1 is the memory location that is the accumulator for an aggregate
-** or window function.  Execute the finalizer function 
+** or window function.  Execute the finalizer function
 ** for an aggregate and store the result in P1.
 **
 ** P2 is the number of arguments that the step function takes and
@@ -7625,7 +7625,7 @@ case OP_AggFinal: {
   {
     rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFinalize(pMem, pOp->p4.pFunc);
   }
-  
+ 
   if( rc ){
     sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3_value_text(pMem));
     goto abort_due_to_error;
@@ -7669,9 +7669,9 @@ case OP_Checkpoint: {
   }
   for(i=0, pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; i<3; i++, pMem++){
     sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem, (i64)aRes[i]);
-  }    
+  }   
   break;
-};  
+}; 
 #endif
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PRAGMA
@@ -7697,9 +7697,9 @@ case OP_JournalMode: {    /* out2 */
 
   pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
   eNew = pOp->p3;
-  assert( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE 
-       || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE 
-       || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST 
+  assert( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE
+       || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE
+       || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST
        || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
        || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
        || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
@@ -7719,7 +7719,7 @@ case OP_JournalMode: {    /* out2 */
   zFilename = sqlite3PagerFilename(pPager, 1);
 
   /* Do not allow a transition to journal_mode=WAL for a database
-  ** in temporary storage or if the VFS does not support shared memory 
+  ** in temporary storage or if the VFS does not support shared memory
   */
   if( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
    && (sqlite3Strlen30(zFilename)==0           /* Temp file */
@@ -7739,12 +7739,12 @@ case OP_JournalMode: {    /* out2 */
       );
       goto abort_due_to_error;
     }else{
- 
+
       if( eOld==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ){
         /* If leaving WAL mode, close the log file. If successful, the call
-        ** to PagerCloseWal() checkpoints and deletes the write-ahead-log 
-        ** file. An EXCLUSIVE lock may still be held on the database file 
-        ** after a successful return. 
+        ** to PagerCloseWal() checkpoints and deletes the write-ahead-log
+        ** file. An EXCLUSIVE lock may still be held on the database file
+        ** after a successful return.
         */
         rc = sqlite3PagerCloseWal(pPager, db);
         if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -7755,7 +7755,7 @@ case OP_JournalMode: {    /* out2 */
         ** as an intermediate */
         sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(pPager, PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF);
       }
-  
+ 
       /* Open a transaction on the database file. Regardless of the journal
       ** mode, this transaction always uses a rollback journal.
       */
@@ -7830,7 +7830,7 @@ case OP_IncrVacuum: {        /* jump */
 ** is executed using sqlite3_step() it will either automatically
 ** reprepare itself (if it was originally created using sqlite3_prepare_v2())
 ** or it will fail with SQLITE_SCHEMA.
-** 
+**
 ** If P1 is 0, then all SQL statements become expired. If P1 is non-zero,
 ** then only the currently executing statement is expired.
 **
@@ -7885,7 +7885,7 @@ case OP_CursorUnlock: {
 ** Synopsis: iDb=P1 root=P2 write=P3
 **
 ** Obtain a lock on a particular table. This instruction is only used when
-** the shared-cache feature is enabled. 
+** the shared-cache feature is enabled.
 **
 ** P1 is the index of the database in sqlite3.aDb[] of the database
 ** on which the lock is acquired.  A readlock is obtained if P3==0 or
@@ -7899,7 +7899,7 @@ case OP_CursorUnlock: {
 case OP_TableLock: {
   u8 isWriteLock = (u8)pOp->p3;
   if( isWriteLock || 0==(db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommit) ){
-    int p1 = pOp->p1; 
+    int p1 = pOp->p1;
     assert( p1>=0 && p1<db->nDb );
     assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, p1) );
     assert( isWriteLock==0 || isWriteLock==1 );
@@ -7919,7 +7919,7 @@ case OP_TableLock: {
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
 /* Opcode: VBegin * * * P4 *
 **
-** P4 may be a pointer to an sqlite3_vtab structure. If so, call the 
+** P4 may be a pointer to an sqlite3_vtab structure. If so, call the
 ** xBegin method for that table.
 **
 ** Also, whether or not P4 is set, check that this is not being called from
@@ -7939,7 +7939,7 @@ case OP_VBegin: {
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
 /* Opcode: VCreate P1 P2 * * *
 **
-** P2 is a register that holds the name of a virtual table in database 
+** P2 is a register that holds the name of a virtual table in database
 ** P1. Call the xCreate method for that table.
 */
 case OP_VCreate: {
@@ -8202,7 +8202,7 @@ case OP_VNext: {   /* jump, ncycle */
 
   /* Invoke the xNext() method of the module. There is no way for the
   ** underlying implementation to return an error if one occurs during
-  ** xNext(). Instead, if an error occurs, true is returned (indicating that 
+  ** xNext(). Instead, if an error occurs, true is returned (indicating that
   ** data is available) and the error code returned when xColumn or
   ** some other method is next invoked on the save virtual table cursor.
   */
@@ -8230,7 +8230,7 @@ case OP_VRename: {
   sqlite3_vtab *pVtab;
   Mem *pName;
   int isLegacy;
-  
+ 
   isLegacy = (db->flags & SQLITE_LegacyAlter);
   db->flags |= SQLITE_LegacyAlter;
   pVtab = pOp->p4.pVtab->pVtab;
@@ -8260,23 +8260,23 @@ case OP_VRename: {
 **
 ** P4 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure.
 ** This opcode invokes the corresponding xUpdate method. P2 values
-** are contiguous memory cells starting at P3 to pass to the xUpdate 
-** invocation. The value in register (P3+P2-1) corresponds to the 
+** are contiguous memory cells starting at P3 to pass to the xUpdate
+** invocation. The value in register (P3+P2-1) corresponds to the
 ** p2th element of the argv array passed to xUpdate.
 **
 ** The xUpdate method will do a DELETE or an INSERT or both.
 ** The argv[0] element (which corresponds to memory cell P3)
-** is the rowid of a row to delete.  If argv[0] is NULL then no 
-** deletion occurs.  The argv[1] element is the rowid of the new 
-** row.  This can be NULL to have the virtual table select the new 
-** rowid for itself.  The subsequent elements in the array are 
+** is the rowid of a row to delete.  If argv[0] is NULL then no
+** deletion occurs.  The argv[1] element is the rowid of the new
+** row.  This can be NULL to have the virtual table select the new
+** rowid for itself.  The subsequent elements in the array are
 ** the values of columns in the new row.
 **
 ** If P2==1 then no insert is performed.  argv[0] is the rowid of
 ** a row to delete.
 **
 ** P1 is a boolean flag. If it is set to true and the xUpdate call
-** is successful, then the value returned by sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() 
+** is successful, then the value returned by sqlite3_last_insert_rowid()
 ** is set to the value of the rowid for the row just inserted.
 **
 ** P5 is the error actions (OE_Replace, OE_Fail, OE_Ignore, etc) to
@@ -8291,7 +8291,7 @@ case OP_VUpdate: {
   Mem **apArg;
   Mem *pX;
 
-  assert( pOp->p2==1        || pOp->p5==OE_Fail   || pOp->p5==OE_Rollback 
+  assert( pOp->p2==1        || pOp->p5==OE_Fail   || pOp->p5==OE_Rollback
        || pOp->p5==OE_Abort || pOp->p5==OE_Ignore || pOp->p5==OE_Replace
   );
   assert( p->readOnly==0 );
@@ -8386,7 +8386,7 @@ case OP_MaxPgcnt: {            /* out2 */
 ** The result of the function is stored
 ** in register P3.  Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs.
 **
-** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the 
+** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the
 ** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first
 ** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine
 ** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the
@@ -8405,7 +8405,7 @@ case OP_MaxPgcnt: {            /* out2 */
 ** The result of the function is stored
 ** in register P3.  Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs.
 **
-** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the 
+** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the
 ** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first
 ** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine
 ** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the
@@ -8415,7 +8415,7 @@ case OP_MaxPgcnt: {            /* out2 */
 ** This opcode works exactly like OP_Function.  The only difference is in
 ** its name.  This opcode is used in places where the function must be
 ** purely non-deterministic.  Some built-in date/time functions can be
-** either determinitic of non-deterministic, depending on their arguments.
+** either deterministic of non-deterministic, depending on their arguments.
 ** When those function are used in a non-deterministic way, they will check
 ** to see if they were called using OP_PureFunc instead of OP_Function, and
 ** if they were, they throw an error.
@@ -8433,7 +8433,7 @@ case OP_Function: {            /* group */
   /* If this function is inside of a trigger, the register array in aMem[]
   ** might change from one evaluation to the next.  The next block of code
   ** checks to see if the register array has changed, and if so it
-  ** reinitializes the relavant parts of the sqlite3_context object */
+  ** reinitializes the relevant parts of the sqlite3_context object */
   pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3];
   if( pCtx->pOut != pOut ){
     pCtx->pVdbe = p;
@@ -8465,7 +8465,7 @@ case OP_Function: {            /* group */
     if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
   }
 
-  assert( (pOut->flags&MEM_Str)==0 
+  assert( (pOut->flags&MEM_Str)==0
        || pOut->enc==encoding
        || db->mallocFailed );
   assert( !sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pOut) );
@@ -8797,7 +8797,7 @@ default: {          /* This is really OP_Noop, OP_Explain */
       }
       if( opProperty==0xff ){
         /* Never happens.  This code exists to avoid a harmless linkage
-        ** warning aboud sqlite3VdbeRegisterDump() being defined but not
+        ** warning about sqlite3VdbeRegisterDump() being defined but not
         ** used. */
         sqlite3VdbeRegisterDump(p);
       }
@@ -8834,7 +8834,7 @@ abort_due_to_error:
   p->rc = rc;
   sqlite3SystemError(db, rc);
   testcase( sqlite3GlobalConfig.xLog!=0 );
-  sqlite3_log(rc, "statement aborts at %d: [%s] %s", 
+  sqlite3_log(rc, "statement aborts at %d: [%s] %s",
                    (int)(pOp - aOp), p->zSql, p->zErrMsg);
   if( p->eVdbeState==VDBE_RUN_STATE ) sqlite3VdbeHalt(p);
   if( rc==SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ) sqlite3OomFault(db);
@@ -8876,8 +8876,8 @@ vdbe_return:
   if( DbMaskNonZero(p->lockMask) ){
     sqlite3VdbeLeave(p);
   }
-  assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || nExtraDelete==0 
-       || sqlite3_strlike("DELETE%",p->zSql,0)!=0 
+  assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || nExtraDelete==0
+       || sqlite3_strlike("DELETE%",p->zSql,0)!=0
   );
   return rc;
 
diff --git a/src/vdbe.h b/src/vdbe.h
index d28837f94..f44f24f93 100644
--- a/src/vdbe.h
+++ b/src/vdbe.h
@@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeBytecodeVtabInit(sqlite3*);
 ** The VdbeCoverage macros are used to set a coverage testing point
 ** for VDBE branch instructions.  The coverage testing points are line
 ** numbers in the sqlite3.c source file.  VDBE branch coverage testing
-** only works with an amalagmation build.  That's ok since a VDBE branch
+** only works with an amalgamation build.  That's ok since a VDBE branch
 ** coverage build designed for testing the test suite only.  No application
 ** should ever ship with VDBE branch coverage measuring turned on.
 **
@@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeBytecodeVtabInit(sqlite3*);
 **                                     // NULL option is not possible
 **
 **    VdbeCoverageEqNe(v)              // Previous OP_Jump is only interested
-**                                     // in distingishing equal and not-equal.
+**                                     // in distinguishing equal and not-equal.
 **
 ** Every VDBE branch operation must be tagged with one of the macros above.
 ** If not, then when "make test" is run with -DSQLITE_VDBE_COVERAGE and
@@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeBytecodeVtabInit(sqlite3*);
 ** During testing, the test application will invoke
 ** sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_VDBE_COVERAGE,...) to set a callback
 ** routine that is invoked as each bytecode branch is taken.  The callback
-** contains the sqlite3.c source line number ov the VdbeCoverage macro and
+** contains the sqlite3.c source line number of the VdbeCoverage macro and
 ** flags to indicate whether or not the branch was taken.  The test application
 ** is responsible for keeping track of this and reporting byte-code branches
 ** that are never taken.
diff --git a/src/vdbeInt.h b/src/vdbeInt.h
index b901a0180..4c3394716 100644
--- a/src/vdbeInt.h
+++ b/src/vdbeInt.h
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ struct VdbeCursor {
 ** When a sub-program is executed (OP_Program), a structure of this type
 ** is allocated to store the current value of the program counter, as
 ** well as the current memory cell array and various other frame specific
-** values stored in the Vdbe struct. When the sub-program is finished, 
+** values stored in the Vdbe struct. When the sub-program is finished,
 ** these values are copied back to the Vdbe from the VdbeFrame structure,
 ** restoring the state of the VM to as it was before the sub-program
 ** began executing.
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ struct sqlite3_value {
 **
 **  *  MEM_Blob|MEM_Zero       A blob in Mem.z of length Mem.n plus
 **                             MEM.u.i extra 0x00 bytes at the end.
-**                                       
+**
 **  *  MEM_Int                 Integer stored in Mem.u.i.
 **
 **  *  MEM_Real                Real stored in Mem.u.r.
@@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ struct sqlite3_value {
 ** If the MEM_Str flag is set then Mem.z points at a string representation.
 ** Usually this is encoded in the same unicode encoding as the main
 ** database (see below for exceptions). If the MEM_Term flag is also
-** set, then the string is nul terminated. The MEM_Int and MEM_Real 
+** set, then the string is nul terminated. The MEM_Int and MEM_Real
 ** flags may coexist with the MEM_Str flag.
 */
 #define MEM_Undefined 0x0000   /* Value is undefined */
@@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ struct sqlite3_value {
 ** Return true if a memory cell has been initialized and is valid.
 ** is for use inside assert() statements only.
 **
-** A Memory cell is initialized if at least one of the 
+** A Memory cell is initialized if at least one of the
 ** MEM_Null, MEM_Str, MEM_Int, MEM_Real, MEM_Blob, or MEM_IntReal bits
 ** is set.  It is "undefined" if all those bits are zero.
 */
@@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ struct sqlite3_value {
 #endif
 
 /*
-** Each auxiliary data pointer stored by a user defined function 
+** Each auxiliary data pointer stored by a user defined function
 ** implementation calling sqlite3_set_auxdata() is stored in an instance
 ** of this structure. All such structures associated with a single VM
 ** are stored in a linked list headed at Vdbe.pAuxData. All are destroyed
@@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ typedef unsigned bft;  /* Bit Field Type */
 ** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() interface.
 **
 ** aAddrRange[]:
-**   This array is used by ScanStatus elements associated with EQP 
+**   This array is used by ScanStatus elements associated with EQP
 **   notes that make an SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NCYCLE value available. It is
 **   an array of up to 3 ranges of VM addresses for which the Vdbe.anCycle[]
 **   values should be summed to calculate the NCYCLE value. Each pair of
@@ -505,7 +505,7 @@ struct Vdbe {
 #define VDBE_HALT_STATE     3   /* Finished.  Need reset() or finalize() */
 
 /*
-** Structure used to store the context required by the 
+** Structure used to store the context required by the
 ** sqlite3_preupdate_*() API functions.
 */
 struct PreUpdate {
@@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ struct PreUpdate {
   i64 iKey1;                      /* First key value passed to hook */
   i64 iKey2;                      /* Second key value passed to hook */
   Mem *aNew;                      /* Array of new.* values */
-  Table *pTab;                    /* Schema object being upated */          
+  Table *pTab;                    /* Schema object being updated */
   Index *pPk;                     /* PK index if pTab is WITHOUT ROWID */
 };
 
@@ -667,7 +667,7 @@ void sqlite3VdbeValueListFree(void*);
 # define sqlite3VdbeAssertAbortable(V)
 #endif
 
-#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE) 
+#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE)
   void sqlite3VdbeEnter(Vdbe*);
 #else
 # define sqlite3VdbeEnter(X)
diff --git a/src/vdbeapi.c b/src/vdbeapi.c
index d8fcda96d..920780a89 100644
--- a/src/vdbeapi.c
+++ b/src/vdbeapi.c
@@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ sqlite3_value *sqlite3_value_dup(const sqlite3_value *pOrig){
 void sqlite3_value_free(sqlite3_value *pOld){
   sqlite3ValueFree(pOld);
 }
-  
+ 
 
 /**************************** sqlite3_result_  *******************************
 ** The following routines are used by user-defined functions to specify
@@ -419,9 +419,9 @@ static int invokeValueDestructor(
   return SQLITE_TOOBIG;
 }
 void sqlite3_result_blob(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
-  const void *z, 
-  int n, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+  const void *z,
+  int n,
   void (*xDel)(void *)
 ){
   assert( n>=0 );
@@ -429,8 +429,8 @@ void sqlite3_result_blob(
   setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n, 0, xDel);
 }
 void sqlite3_result_blob64(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
-  const void *z, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+  const void *z,
   sqlite3_uint64 n,
   void (*xDel)(void *)
 ){
@@ -489,8 +489,8 @@ void sqlite3_result_subtype(sqlite3_context *pCtx, unsigned int eSubtype){
   pOut->flags |= MEM_Subtype;
 }
 void sqlite3_result_text(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
-  const char *z, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+  const char *z,
   int n,
   void (*xDel)(void *)
 ){
@@ -498,8 +498,8 @@ void sqlite3_result_text(
   setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n, SQLITE_UTF8, xDel);
 }
 void sqlite3_result_text64(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
-  const char *z, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+  const char *z,
   sqlite3_uint64 n,
   void (*xDel)(void *),
   unsigned char enc
@@ -518,27 +518,27 @@ void sqlite3_result_text64(
 }
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
 void sqlite3_result_text16(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
-  const void *z, 
-  int n, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+  const void *z,
+  int n,
   void (*xDel)(void *)
 ){
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) );
   setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n & ~(u64)1, SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE, xDel);
 }
 void sqlite3_result_text16be(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
-  const void *z, 
-  int n, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+  const void *z,
+  int n,
   void (*xDel)(void *)
 ){
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) );
   setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n & ~(u64)1, SQLITE_UTF16BE, xDel);
 }
 void sqlite3_result_text16le(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
-  const void *z, 
-  int n, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+  const void *z,
+  int n,
   void (*xDel)(void *)
 ){
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) );
@@ -586,7 +586,7 @@ void sqlite3_result_error_code(sqlite3_context *pCtx, int errCode){
 void sqlite3_result_error_toobig(sqlite3_context *pCtx){
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) );
   pCtx->isError = SQLITE_TOOBIG;
-  sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pCtx->pOut, "string or blob too big", -1, 
+  sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pCtx->pOut, "string or blob too big", -1,
                        SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_STATIC);
 }
 
@@ -603,7 +603,7 @@ void sqlite3_result_error_nomem(sqlite3_context *pCtx){
 ** a MEM_IntReal value.  See the SQLITE_TESTCTRL_RESULT_INTREAL
 ** test-control.
 */
-void sqlite3ResultIntReal(sqlite3_context *pCtx){ 
+void sqlite3ResultIntReal(sqlite3_context *pCtx){
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) );
   if( pCtx->pOut->flags & MEM_Int ){
     pCtx->pOut->flags &= ~MEM_Int;
@@ -614,7 +614,7 @@ void sqlite3ResultIntReal(sqlite3_context *pCtx){
 
 
 /*
-** This function is called after a transaction has been committed. It 
+** This function is called after a transaction has been committed. It
 ** invokes callbacks registered with sqlite3_wal_hook() as required.
 */
 static int doWalCallbacks(sqlite3 *db){
@@ -643,7 +643,7 @@ static int doWalCallbacks(sqlite3 *db){
 ** statement is completely executed or an error occurs.
 **
 ** This routine implements the bulk of the logic behind the sqlite_step()
-** API.  The only thing omitted is the automatic recompile if a 
+** API.  The only thing omitted is the automatic recompile if a
 ** schema change has occurred.  That detail is handled by the
 ** outer sqlite3_step() wrapper procedure.
 */
@@ -660,11 +660,11 @@ static int sqlite3Step(Vdbe *p){
         p->rc = SQLITE_SCHEMA;
         rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
         if( (p->prepFlags & SQLITE_PREPARE_SAVESQL)!=0 ){
-          /* If this statement was prepared using saved SQL and an 
+          /* If this statement was prepared using saved SQL and an
           ** error has occurred, then return the error code in p->rc to the
           ** caller. Set the error code in the database handle to the same
           ** value.
-          */ 
+          */
           rc = sqlite3VdbeTransferError(p);
         }
         goto end_of_step;
@@ -678,7 +678,7 @@ static int sqlite3Step(Vdbe *p){
         AtomicStore(&db->u1.isInterrupted, 0);
       }
 
-      assert( db->nVdbeWrite>0 || db->autoCommit==0 
+      assert( db->nVdbeWrite>0 || db->autoCommit==0
           || (db->nDeferredCons==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0)
       );
 
@@ -703,15 +703,15 @@ static int sqlite3Step(Vdbe *p){
       ** sqlite3_step() after any error or after SQLITE_DONE.  But beginning
       ** with version 3.7.0, we changed this so that sqlite3_reset() would
       ** be called automatically instead of throwing the SQLITE_MISUSE error.
-      ** This "automatic-reset" change is not technically an incompatibility, 
+      ** This "automatic-reset" change is not technically an incompatibility,
       ** since any application that receives an SQLITE_MISUSE is broken by
       ** definition.
       **
       ** Nevertheless, some published applications that were originally written
-      ** for version 3.6.23 or earlier do in fact depend on SQLITE_MISUSE 
+      ** for version 3.6.23 or earlier do in fact depend on SQLITE_MISUSE
       ** returns, and those were broken by the automatic-reset change.  As a
       ** a work-around, the SQLITE_OMIT_AUTORESET compile-time restores the
-      ** legacy behavior of returning SQLITE_MISUSE for cases where the 
+      ** legacy behavior of returning SQLITE_MISUSE for cases where the
       ** previous sqlite3_step() returned something other than a SQLITE_LOCKED
       ** or SQLITE_BUSY error.
       */
@@ -761,10 +761,10 @@ static int sqlite3Step(Vdbe *p){
         rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
       }
     }else if( rc!=SQLITE_DONE && (p->prepFlags & SQLITE_PREPARE_SAVESQL)!=0 ){
-      /* If this statement was prepared using saved SQL and an 
+      /* If this statement was prepared using saved SQL and an
       ** error has occurred, then return the error code in p->rc to the
       ** caller. Set the error code in the database handle to the same value.
-      */ 
+      */
       rc = sqlite3VdbeTransferError(p);
     }
   }
@@ -778,7 +778,7 @@ end_of_step:
   /* There are only a limited number of result codes allowed from the
   ** statements prepared using the legacy sqlite3_prepare() interface */
   assert( (p->prepFlags & SQLITE_PREPARE_SAVESQL)!=0
-       || rc==SQLITE_ROW  || rc==SQLITE_DONE   || rc==SQLITE_ERROR 
+       || rc==SQLITE_ROW  || rc==SQLITE_DONE   || rc==SQLITE_ERROR
        || (rc&0xff)==SQLITE_BUSY || rc==SQLITE_MISUSE
   );
   return (rc&db->errMask);
@@ -805,15 +805,15 @@ int sqlite3_step(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt){
     int savedPc = v->pc;
     rc = sqlite3Reprepare(v);
     if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
-      /* This case occurs after failing to recompile an sql statement. 
-      ** The error message from the SQL compiler has already been loaded 
-      ** into the database handle. This block copies the error message 
+      /* This case occurs after failing to recompile an sql statement.
+      ** The error message from the SQL compiler has already been loaded
+      ** into the database handle. This block copies the error message
       ** from the database handle into the statement and sets the statement
-      ** program counter to 0 to ensure that when the statement is 
+      ** program counter to 0 to ensure that when the statement is
       ** finalized or reset the parser error message is available via
       ** sqlite3_errmsg() and sqlite3_errcode().
       */
-      const char *zErr = (const char *)sqlite3_value_text(db->pErr); 
+      const char *zErr = (const char *)sqlite3_value_text(db->pErr);
       sqlite3DbFree(db, v->zErrMsg);
       if( !db->mallocFailed ){
         v->zErrMsg = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, zErr);
@@ -886,7 +886,7 @@ int sqlite3_vtab_nochange(sqlite3_context *p){
 ** The destructor function for a ValueList object.  This needs to be
 ** a separate function, unknowable to the application, to ensure that
 ** calls to sqlite3_vtab_in_first()/sqlite3_vtab_in_next() that are not
-** preceeded by activation of IN processing via sqlite3_vtab_int() do not
+** preceded by activation of IN processing via sqlite3_vtab_int() do not
 ** try to access a fake ValueList object inserted by a hostile extension.
 */
 void sqlite3VdbeValueListFree(void *pToDelete){
@@ -1063,9 +1063,9 @@ void *sqlite3_get_auxdata(sqlite3_context *pCtx, int iArg){
 ** access code.
 */
 void sqlite3_set_auxdata(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
-  int iArg, 
-  void *pAux, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+  int iArg,
+  void *pAux,
   void (*xDelete)(void*)
 ){
   AuxData *pAuxData;
@@ -1107,7 +1107,7 @@ failed:
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED
 /*
-** Return the number of times the Step function of an aggregate has been 
+** Return the number of times the Step function of an aggregate has been
 ** called.
 **
 ** This function is deprecated.  Do not use it for new code.  It is
@@ -1152,9 +1152,9 @@ static const Mem *columnNullValue(void){
   ** these assert()s from failing, when building with SQLITE_DEBUG defined
   ** using gcc, we force nullMem to be 8-byte aligned using the magical
   ** __attribute__((aligned(8))) macro.  */
-  static const Mem nullMem 
+  static const Mem nullMem
 #if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) && defined(__GNUC__)
-    __attribute__((aligned(8))) 
+    __attribute__((aligned(8)))
 #endif
     = {
         /* .u          = */ {0},
@@ -1200,9 +1200,9 @@ static Mem *columnMem(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i){
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is called after invoking an sqlite3_value_XXX function on a 
+** This function is called after invoking an sqlite3_value_XXX function on a
 ** column value (i.e. a value returned by evaluating an SQL expression in the
-** select list of a SELECT statement) that may cause a malloc() failure. If 
+** select list of a SELECT statement) that may cause a malloc() failure. If
 ** malloc() has failed, the threads mallocFailed flag is cleared and the result
 ** code of statement pStmt set to SQLITE_NOMEM.
 **
@@ -1215,7 +1215,7 @@ static Mem *columnMem(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i){
 **     sqlite3_column_real()
 **     sqlite3_column_bytes()
 **     sqlite3_column_bytes16()
-**     sqiite3_column_blob()
+**     sqlite3_column_blob()
 */
 static void columnMallocFailure(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt)
 {
@@ -1241,8 +1241,8 @@ const void *sqlite3_column_blob(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i){
   const void *val;
   val = sqlite3_value_blob( columnMem(pStmt,i) );
   /* Even though there is no encoding conversion, value_blob() might
-  ** need to call malloc() to expand the result of a zeroblob() 
-  ** expression. 
+  ** need to call malloc() to expand the result of a zeroblob()
+  ** expression.
   */
   columnMallocFailure(pStmt);
   return val;
@@ -1444,13 +1444,13 @@ const void *sqlite3_column_origin_name16(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int N){
 
 
 /******************************* sqlite3_bind_  ***************************
-** 
+**
 ** Routines used to attach values to wildcards in a compiled SQL statement.
 */
 /*
-** Unbind the value bound to variable i in virtual machine p. This is the 
+** Unbind the value bound to variable i in virtual machine p. This is the
 ** the same as binding a NULL value to the column. If the "i" parameter is
-** out of range, then SQLITE_RANGE is returned. Othewise SQLITE_OK.
+** out of range, then SQLITE_RANGE is returned. Otherwise SQLITE_OK.
 **
 ** A successful evaluation of this routine acquires the mutex on p.
 ** the mutex is released if any kind of error occurs.
@@ -1467,7 +1467,7 @@ static int vdbeUnbind(Vdbe *p, unsigned int i){
   if( p->eVdbeState!=VDBE_READY_STATE ){
     sqlite3Error(p->db, SQLITE_MISUSE);
     sqlite3_mutex_leave(p->db->mutex);
-    sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE, 
+    sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE,
         "bind on a busy prepared statement: [%s]", p->zSql);
     return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
   }
@@ -1481,7 +1481,7 @@ static int vdbeUnbind(Vdbe *p, unsigned int i){
   pVar->flags = MEM_Null;
   p->db->errCode = SQLITE_OK;
 
-  /* If the bit corresponding to this variable in Vdbe.expmask is set, then 
+  /* If the bit corresponding to this variable in Vdbe.expmask is set, then
   ** binding a new value to this variable invalidates the current query plan.
   **
   ** IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-57496-20354 If the specific value bound to a host
@@ -1537,10 +1537,10 @@ static int bindText(
 ** Bind a blob value to an SQL statement variable.
 */
 int sqlite3_bind_blob(
-  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, 
-  int i, 
-  const void *zData, 
-  int nData, 
+  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+  int i,
+  const void *zData,
+  int nData,
   void (*xDel)(void*)
 ){
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
@@ -1549,10 +1549,10 @@ int sqlite3_bind_blob(
   return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, nData, xDel, 0);
 }
 int sqlite3_bind_blob64(
-  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, 
-  int i, 
-  const void *zData, 
-  sqlite3_uint64 nData, 
+  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+  int i,
+  const void *zData,
+  sqlite3_uint64 nData,
   void (*xDel)(void*)
 ){
   assert( xDel!=SQLITE_DYNAMIC );
@@ -1608,20 +1608,20 @@ int sqlite3_bind_pointer(
   }
   return rc;
 }
-int sqlite3_bind_text( 
-  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, 
-  int i, 
-  const char *zData, 
-  int nData, 
+int sqlite3_bind_text(
+  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+  int i,
+  const char *zData,
+  int nData,
   void (*xDel)(void*)
 ){
   return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, nData, xDel, SQLITE_UTF8);
 }
-int sqlite3_bind_text64( 
-  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, 
-  int i, 
-  const char *zData, 
-  sqlite3_uint64 nData, 
+int sqlite3_bind_text64(
+  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+  int i,
+  const char *zData,
+  sqlite3_uint64 nData,
   void (*xDel)(void*),
   unsigned char enc
 ){
@@ -1634,10 +1634,10 @@ int sqlite3_bind_text64(
 }
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
 int sqlite3_bind_text16(
-  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, 
-  int i, 
-  const void *zData, 
-  int n, 
+  sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+  int i,
+  const void *zData,
+  int n,
   void (*xDel)(void*)
 ){
   return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, n & ~(u64)1, xDel, SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE);
@@ -1652,7 +1652,7 @@ int sqlite3_bind_value(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i, const sqlite3_value *pValue){
     }
     case SQLITE_FLOAT: {
       assert( pValue->flags & (MEM_Real|MEM_IntReal) );
-      rc = sqlite3_bind_double(pStmt, i, 
+      rc = sqlite3_bind_double(pStmt, i,
           (pValue->flags & MEM_Real) ? pValue->u.r : (double)pValue->u.i
       );
       break;
@@ -1708,7 +1708,7 @@ int sqlite3_bind_zeroblob64(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i, sqlite3_uint64 n){
 
 /*
 ** Return the number of wildcards that can be potentially bound to.
-** This routine is added to support DBD::SQLite.  
+** This routine is added to support DBD::SQLite. 
 */
 int sqlite3_bind_parameter_count(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt){
   Vdbe *p = (Vdbe*)pStmt;
@@ -1853,7 +1853,7 @@ int sqlite3_stmt_status(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int op, int resetFlag){
   Vdbe *pVdbe = (Vdbe*)pStmt;
   u32 v;
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
-  if( !pStmt 
+  if( !pStmt
    || (op!=SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_MEMUSED && (op<0||op>=ArraySize(pVdbe->aCounter)))
   ){
     (void)SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
@@ -1934,8 +1934,8 @@ const char *sqlite3_normalized_sql(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt){
 ** if successful, or a NULL pointer if an OOM error is encountered.
 */
 static UnpackedRecord *vdbeUnpackRecord(
-  KeyInfo *pKeyInfo, 
-  int nKey, 
+  KeyInfo *pKeyInfo,
+  int nKey,
   const void *pKey
 ){
   UnpackedRecord *pRet;           /* Return value */
@@ -2028,7 +2028,7 @@ int sqlite3_preupdate_count(sqlite3 *db){
 ** only. It returns zero if the change that caused the callback was made
 ** immediately by a user SQL statement. Or, if the change was made by a
 ** trigger program, it returns the number of trigger programs currently
-** on the stack (1 for a top-level trigger, 2 for a trigger fired by a 
+** on the stack (1 for a top-level trigger, 2 for a trigger fired by a
 ** top-level trigger etc.).
 **
 ** For the purposes of the previous paragraph, a foreign key CASCADE, SET NULL
@@ -2043,7 +2043,7 @@ int sqlite3_preupdate_depth(sqlite3 *db){
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK
 /*
 ** This function is designed to be called from within a pre-update callback
-** only. 
+** only.
 */
 int sqlite3_preupdate_blobwrite(sqlite3 *db){
   PreUpdate *p = db->pPreUpdate;
@@ -2167,7 +2167,7 @@ int sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus_v2(
     idx = iScan;
     pScan = &p->aScan[idx];
   }else{
-    /* If the COMPLEX flag is clear, then this function must ignore any 
+    /* If the COMPLEX flag is clear, then this function must ignore any
     ** ScanStatus structures with ScanStatus.addrLoop set to 0. */
     for(idx=0; idx<p->nScan; idx++){
       pScan = &p->aScan[idx];
diff --git a/src/vdbeaux.c b/src/vdbeaux.c
index ecbf2d892..dc5514052 100644
--- a/src/vdbeaux.c
+++ b/src/vdbeaux.c
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
 **
 *************************************************************************
 ** This file contains code used for creating, destroying, and populating
-** a VDBE (or an "sqlite3_stmt" as it is known to the outside world.) 
+** a VDBE (or an "sqlite3_stmt" as it is known to the outside world.)
 */
 #include "sqliteInt.h"
 #include "vdbeInt.h"
@@ -152,13 +152,13 @@ void sqlite3VdbeSwap(Vdbe *pA, Vdbe *pB){
 }
 
 /*
-** Resize the Vdbe.aOp array so that it is at least nOp elements larger 
+** Resize the Vdbe.aOp array so that it is at least nOp elements larger
 ** than its current size. nOp is guaranteed to be less than or equal
 ** to 1024/sizeof(Op).
 **
 ** If an out-of-memory error occurs while resizing the array, return
-** SQLITE_NOMEM. In this case Vdbe.aOp and Vdbe.nOpAlloc remain 
-** unchanged (this is so that any opcodes already allocated can be 
+** SQLITE_NOMEM. In this case Vdbe.aOp and Vdbe.nOpAlloc remain
+** unchanged (this is so that any opcodes already allocated can be
 ** correctly deallocated along with the rest of the Vdbe).
 */
 static int growOpArray(Vdbe *v, int nOp){
@@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ static int growOpArray(Vdbe *v, int nOp){
   Parse *p = v->pParse;
 
   /* The SQLITE_TEST_REALLOC_STRESS compile-time option is designed to force
-  ** more frequent reallocs and hence provide more opportunities for 
+  ** more frequent reallocs and hence provide more opportunities for
   ** simulated OOM faults.  SQLITE_TEST_REALLOC_STRESS is generally used
   ** during testing only.  With SQLITE_TEST_REALLOC_STRESS grow the op array
   ** by the minimum* amount required until the size reaches 512.  Normal
@@ -624,19 +624,19 @@ void sqlite3VdbeReusable(Vdbe *p){
 
 /*
 ** The following type and function are used to iterate through all opcodes
-** in a Vdbe main program and each of the sub-programs (triggers) it may 
+** in a Vdbe main program and each of the sub-programs (triggers) it may
 ** invoke directly or indirectly. It should be used as follows:
 **
 **   Op *pOp;
 **   VdbeOpIter sIter;
 **
 **   memset(&sIter, 0, sizeof(sIter));
-**   sIter.v = v;                            // v is of type Vdbe* 
+**   sIter.v = v;                            // v is of type Vdbe*
 **   while( (pOp = opIterNext(&sIter)) ){
 **     // Do something with pOp
 **   }
 **   sqlite3DbFree(v->db, sIter.apSub);
-** 
+**
 */
 typedef struct VdbeOpIter VdbeOpIter;
 struct VdbeOpIter {
@@ -669,7 +669,7 @@ static Op *opIterNext(VdbeOpIter *p){
       p->iSub++;
       p->iAddr = 0;
     }
-  
+ 
     if( pRet->p4type==P4_SUBPROGRAM ){
       int nByte = (p->nSub+1)*sizeof(SubProgram*);
       int j;
@@ -703,7 +703,7 @@ static Op *opIterNext(VdbeOpIter *p){
 **   *  OP_VCreate
 **   *  OP_VRename
 **   *  OP_FkCounter with P2==0 (immediate foreign key constraint)
-**   *  OP_CreateBtree/BTREE_INTKEY and OP_InitCoroutine 
+**   *  OP_CreateBtree/BTREE_INTKEY and OP_InitCoroutine
 **      (for CREATE TABLE AS SELECT ...)
 **
 ** Then check that the value of Parse.mayAbort is true if an
@@ -728,12 +728,12 @@ int sqlite3VdbeAssertMayAbort(Vdbe *v, int mayAbort){
 
   while( (pOp = opIterNext(&sIter))!=0 ){
     int opcode = pOp->opcode;
-    if( opcode==OP_Destroy || opcode==OP_VUpdate || opcode==OP_VRename 
+    if( opcode==OP_Destroy || opcode==OP_VUpdate || opcode==OP_VRename
      || opcode==OP_VDestroy
      || opcode==OP_VCreate
      || opcode==OP_ParseSchema
      || opcode==OP_Function || opcode==OP_PureFunc
-     || ((opcode==OP_Halt || opcode==OP_HaltIfNull) 
+     || ((opcode==OP_Halt || opcode==OP_HaltIfNull)
       && ((pOp->p1)!=SQLITE_OK && pOp->p2==OE_Abort))
     ){
       hasAbort = 1;
@@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeAssertMayAbort(Vdbe *v, int mayAbort){
     if( opcode==OP_CreateBtree && pOp->p3==BTREE_INTKEY ) hasCreateTable = 1;
     if( mayAbort ){
       /* hasCreateIndex may also be set for some DELETE statements that use
-      ** OP_Clear. So this routine may end up returning true in the case 
+      ** OP_Clear. So this routine may end up returning true in the case
       ** where a "DELETE FROM tbl" has a statement-journal but does not
       ** require one. This is not so bad - it is an inefficiency, not a bug. */
       if( opcode==OP_CreateBtree && pOp->p3==BTREE_BLOBKEY ) hasCreateIndex = 1;
@@ -826,7 +826,7 @@ static void resolveP2Values(Vdbe *p, int *pMaxFuncArgs){
   p->bIsReader = 0;
   pOp = &p->aOp[p->nOp-1];
   assert( p->aOp[0].opcode==OP_Init );
-  while( 1 /* Loop termates when it reaches the OP_Init opcode */ ){
+  while( 1 /* Loop terminates when it reaches the OP_Init opcode */ ){
     /* Only JUMP opcodes and the short list of special opcodes in the switch
     ** below need to be considered.  The mkopcodeh.tcl generator script groups
     ** all these opcodes together near the front of the opcode list.  Skip
@@ -892,7 +892,7 @@ static void resolveP2Values(Vdbe *p, int *pMaxFuncArgs){
       ** have non-negative values for P2. */
       assert( (sqlite3OpcodeProperty[pOp->opcode]&OPFLG_JUMP)==0 || pOp->p2>=0);
     }
-    assert( pOp>p->aOp );    
+    assert( pOp>p->aOp );   
     pOp--;
   }
 resolve_p2_values_loop_exit:
@@ -1041,12 +1041,12 @@ void sqlite3VdbeVerifyAbortable(Vdbe *p, int onError){
 /*
 ** This function returns a pointer to the array of opcodes associated with
 ** the Vdbe passed as the first argument. It is the callers responsibility
-** to arrange for the returned array to be eventually freed using the 
+** to arrange for the returned array to be eventually freed using the
 ** vdbeFreeOpArray() function.
 **
 ** Before returning, *pnOp is set to the number of entries in the returned
-** array. Also, *pnMaxArg is set to the larger of its current value and 
-** the number of entries in the Vdbe.apArg[] array required to execute the 
+** array. Also, *pnMaxArg is set to the larger of its current value and
+** the number of entries in the Vdbe.apArg[] array required to execute the
 ** returned program.
 */
 VdbeOp *sqlite3VdbeTakeOpArray(Vdbe *p, int *pnOp, int *pnMaxArg){
@@ -1120,7 +1120,7 @@ VdbeOp *sqlite3VdbeAddOpList(
 void sqlite3VdbeScanStatus(
   Vdbe *p,                        /* VM to add scanstatus() to */
   int addrExplain,                /* Address of OP_Explain (or 0) */
-  int addrLoop,                   /* Address of loop counter */ 
+  int addrLoop,                   /* Address of loop counter */
   int addrVisit,                  /* Address of rows visited counter */
   LogEst nEst,                    /* Estimated number of output rows */
   const char *zName               /* Name of table or index being scanned */
@@ -1146,13 +1146,13 @@ void sqlite3VdbeScanStatus(
 ** Add the range of instructions from addrStart to addrEnd (inclusive) to
 ** the set of those corresponding to the sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() counters
 ** associated with the OP_Explain instruction at addrExplain. The
-** sum of the sqlite3Hwtime() values for each of these instructions 
+** sum of the sqlite3Hwtime() values for each of these instructions
 ** will be returned for SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NCYCLE requests.
 */
 void sqlite3VdbeScanStatusRange(
-  Vdbe *p, 
-  int addrExplain, 
-  int addrStart, 
+  Vdbe *p,
+  int addrExplain,
+  int addrStart,
   int addrEnd
 ){
   if( IS_STMT_SCANSTATUS(p->db) ){
@@ -1182,9 +1182,9 @@ void sqlite3VdbeScanStatusRange(
 ** addrExplain.
 */
 void sqlite3VdbeScanStatusCounters(
-  Vdbe *p, 
-  int addrExplain, 
-  int addrLoop, 
+  Vdbe *p,
+  int addrExplain,
+  int addrLoop,
   int addrVisit
 ){
   if( IS_STMT_SCANSTATUS(p->db) ){
@@ -1346,8 +1346,8 @@ static void freeP4(sqlite3 *db, int p4type, void *p4){
 
 /*
 ** Free the space allocated for aOp and any p4 values allocated for the
-** opcodes contained within. If aOp is not NULL it is assumed to contain 
-** nOp entries. 
+** opcodes contained within. If aOp is not NULL it is assumed to contain
+** nOp entries.
 */
 static void vdbeFreeOpArray(sqlite3 *db, Op *aOp, int nOp){
   assert( nOp>=0 );
@@ -1358,7 +1358,7 @@ static void vdbeFreeOpArray(sqlite3 *db, Op *aOp, int nOp){
       if( pOp->p4type <= P4_FREE_IF_LE ) freeP4(db, pOp->p4type, pOp->p4.p);
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_EXPLAIN_COMMENTS
       sqlite3DbFree(db, pOp->zComment);
-#endif     
+#endif    
       if( pOp==aOp ) break;
       pOp--;
     }
@@ -1455,7 +1455,7 @@ void sqlite3VdbeReleaseRegisters(
 ** the string is made into memory obtained from sqlite3_malloc().
 ** A value of n==0 means copy bytes of zP4 up to and including the
 ** first null byte.  If n>0 then copy n+1 bytes of zP4.
-** 
+**
 ** Other values of n (P4_STATIC, P4_COLLSEQ etc.) indicate that zP4 points
 ** to a string or structure that is guaranteed to exist for the lifetime of
 ** the Vdbe. In these cases we can just copy the pointer.
@@ -1516,7 +1516,7 @@ void sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(Vdbe *p, int addr, const char *zP4, int n){
 }
 
 /*
-** Change the P4 operand of the most recently coded instruction 
+** Change the P4 operand of the most recently coded instruction
 ** to the value defined by the arguments.  This is a high-speed
 ** version of sqlite3VdbeChangeP4().
 **
@@ -1605,7 +1605,7 @@ void sqlite3VdbeSetLineNumber(Vdbe *v, int iLine){
 ** routine, then a pointer to a dummy VdbeOp will be returned.  That opcode
 ** is readable but not writable, though it is cast to a writable value.
 ** The return of a dummy opcode allows the call to continue functioning
-** after an OOM fault without having to check to see if the return from 
+** after an OOM fault without having to check to see if the return from
 ** this routine is a valid pointer.  But because the dummy.opcode is 0,
 ** dummy will never be written to.  This is verified by code inspection and
 ** by running with Valgrind.
@@ -1835,9 +1835,9 @@ char *sqlite3VdbeDisplayP4(sqlite3 *db, Op *pOp){
         CollSeq *pColl = pKeyInfo->aColl[j];
         const char *zColl = pColl ? pColl->zName : "";
         if( strcmp(zColl, "BINARY")==0 ) zColl = "B";
-        sqlite3_str_appendf(&x, ",%s%s%s", 
-               (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[j] & KEYINFO_ORDER_DESC) ? "-" : "", 
-               (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[j] & KEYINFO_ORDER_BIGNULL)? "N." : "", 
+        sqlite3_str_appendf(&x, ",%s%s%s",
+               (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[j] & KEYINFO_ORDER_DESC) ? "-" : "",
+               (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[j] & KEYINFO_ORDER_BIGNULL)? "N." : "",
                zColl);
       }
       sqlite3_str_append(&x, ")", 1);
@@ -1960,13 +1960,13 @@ void sqlite3VdbeUsesBtree(Vdbe *p, int i){
 **
 ** If SQLite is not threadsafe but does support shared-cache mode, then
 ** sqlite3BtreeEnter() is invoked to set the BtShared.db variables
-** of all of BtShared structures accessible via the database handle 
+** of all of BtShared structures accessible via the database handle
 ** associated with the VM.
 **
 ** If SQLite is not threadsafe and does not support shared-cache mode, this
 ** function is a no-op.
 **
-** The p->btreeMask field is a bitmask of all btrees that the prepared 
+** The p->btreeMask field is a bitmask of all btrees that the prepared
 ** statement p will ever use.  Let N be the number of bits in p->btreeMask
 ** corresponding to btrees that use shared cache.  Then the runtime of
 ** this routine is N*N.  But as N is rarely more than 1, this should not
@@ -2034,8 +2034,8 @@ void sqlite3VdbePrintOp(FILE *pOut, int pc, VdbeOp *pOp){
   /* NB:  The sqlite3OpcodeName() function is implemented by code created
   ** by the mkopcodeh.awk and mkopcodec.awk scripts which extract the
   ** information from the vdbe.c source text */
-  fprintf(pOut, zFormat1, pc, 
-      sqlite3OpcodeName(pOp->opcode), pOp->p1, pOp->p2, pOp->p3, 
+  fprintf(pOut, zFormat1, pc,
+      sqlite3OpcodeName(pOp->opcode), pOp->p1, pOp->p2, pOp->p3,
       zP4 ? zP4 : "", pOp->p5,
       zCom ? zCom : ""
   );
@@ -2098,15 +2098,15 @@ static void releaseMemArray(Mem *p, int N){
       assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(p) );
 
       /* This block is really an inlined version of sqlite3VdbeMemRelease()
-      ** that takes advantage of the fact that the memory cell value is 
+      ** that takes advantage of the fact that the memory cell value is
       ** being set to NULL after releasing any dynamic resources.
       **
-      ** The justification for duplicating code is that according to 
-      ** callgrind, this causes a certain test case to hit the CPU 4.7 
-      ** percent less (x86 linux, gcc version 4.1.2, -O6) than if 
+      ** The justification for duplicating code is that according to
+      ** callgrind, this causes a certain test case to hit the CPU 4.7
+      ** percent less (x86 linux, gcc version 4.1.2, -O6) than if
       ** sqlite3MemRelease() were called from here. With -O2, this jumps
-      ** to 6.6 percent. The test case is inserting 1000 rows into a table 
-      ** with no indexes using a single prepared INSERT statement, bind() 
+      ** to 6.6 percent. The test case is inserting 1000 rows into a table
+      ** with no indexes using a single prepared INSERT statement, bind()
       ** and reset(). Inserts are grouped into a transaction.
       */
       testcase( p->flags & MEM_Agg );
@@ -2256,7 +2256,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeNextOpcode(
       Op *pOp = aOp + i;
       if( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenRead ) break;
       if( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenWrite && (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_P2ISREG)==0 ) break;
-      if( pOp->opcode==OP_ReopenIdx ) break;      
+      if( pOp->opcode==OP_ReopenIdx ) break;     
     }else
 #endif
     {
@@ -2364,7 +2364,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeList(
         sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem, pOp->p1);
         sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem+1, pOp->p2);
         sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem+2, pOp->p3);
-        sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pMem+3, zP4, -1, SQLITE_UTF8, sqlite3_free);     
+        sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pMem+3, zP4, -1, SQLITE_UTF8, sqlite3_free);    
         p->nResColumn = 4;
       }else{
         sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem+0, i);
@@ -2537,11 +2537,11 @@ void sqlite3VdbeRewind(Vdbe *p){
 ** creating the virtual machine.  This involves things such
 ** as allocating registers and initializing the program counter.
 ** After the VDBE has be prepped, it can be executed by one or more
-** calls to sqlite3VdbeExec().  
+** calls to sqlite3VdbeExec(). 
 **
 ** This function may be called exactly once on each virtual machine.
 ** After this routine is called the VM has been "packaged" and is ready
-** to run.  After this routine is called, further calls to 
+** to run.  After this routine is called, further calls to
 ** sqlite3VdbeAddOp() functions are prohibited.  This routine disconnects
 ** the Vdbe from the Parse object that helped generate it so that the
 ** the Vdbe becomes an independent entity and the Parse object can be
@@ -2575,7 +2575,7 @@ void sqlite3VdbeMakeReady(
   nMem = pParse->nMem;
   nCursor = pParse->nTab;
   nArg = pParse->nMaxArg;
-  
+ 
   /* Each cursor uses a memory cell.  The first cursor (cursor 0) can
   ** use aMem[0] which is not otherwise used by the VDBE program.  Allocate
   ** space at the end of aMem[] for cursors 1 and greater.
@@ -2622,10 +2622,10 @@ void sqlite3VdbeMakeReady(
   p->expired = 0;
 
   /* Memory for registers, parameters, cursor, etc, is allocated in one or two
-  ** passes.  On the first pass, we try to reuse unused memory at the 
+  ** passes.  On the first pass, we try to reuse unused memory at the
   ** end of the opcode array.  If we are unable to satisfy all memory
   ** requirements by reusing the opcode array tail, then the second
-  ** pass will fill in the remainder using a fresh memory allocation.  
+  ** pass will fill in the remainder using a fresh memory allocation. 
   **
   ** This two-pass approach that reuses as much memory as possible from
   ** the leftover memory at the end of the opcode array.  This can significantly
@@ -2663,7 +2663,7 @@ void sqlite3VdbeMakeReady(
 }
 
 /*
-** Close a VDBE cursor and release all the resources that cursor 
+** Close a VDBE cursor and release all the resources that cursor
 ** happens to hold.
 */
 void sqlite3VdbeFreeCursor(Vdbe *p, VdbeCursor *pCx){
@@ -2733,7 +2733,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeFrameRestore(VdbeFrame *pFrame){
 /*
 ** Close all cursors.
 **
-** Also release any dynamic memory held by the VM in the Vdbe.aMem memory 
+** Also release any dynamic memory held by the VM in the Vdbe.aMem memory
 ** cell array. This is necessary as the memory cell array may contain
 ** pointers to VdbeFrame objects, which may in turn contain pointers to
 ** open cursors.
@@ -2828,27 +2828,27 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
   int needXcommit = 0;
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
-  /* With this option, sqlite3VtabSync() is defined to be simply 
-  ** SQLITE_OK so p is not used. 
+  /* With this option, sqlite3VtabSync() is defined to be simply
+  ** SQLITE_OK so p is not used.
   */
   UNUSED_PARAMETER(p);
 #endif
 
   /* Before doing anything else, call the xSync() callback for any
   ** virtual module tables written in this transaction. This has to
-  ** be done before determining whether a super-journal file is 
+  ** be done before determining whether a super-journal file is
   ** required, as an xSync() callback may add an attached database
   ** to the transaction.
   */
   rc = sqlite3VtabSync(db, p);
 
   /* This loop determines (a) if the commit hook should be invoked and
-  ** (b) how many database files have open write transactions, not 
-  ** including the temp database. (b) is important because if more than 
+  ** (b) how many database files have open write transactions, not
+  ** including the temp database. (b) is important because if more than
   ** one database file has an open write transaction, a super-journal
   ** file is required for an atomic commit.
-  */ 
-  for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){ 
+  */
+  for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){
     Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
     if( sqlite3BtreeTxnState(pBt)==SQLITE_TXN_WRITE ){
       /* Whether or not a database might need a super-journal depends upon
@@ -2869,7 +2869,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
       if( db->aDb[i].safety_level!=PAGER_SYNCHRONOUS_OFF
        && aMJNeeded[sqlite3PagerGetJournalMode(pPager)]
        && sqlite3PagerIsMemdb(pPager)==0
-      ){ 
+      ){
         assert( i!=1 );
         nTrans++;
       }
@@ -2894,8 +2894,8 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
   ** super-journal.
   **
   ** If the return value of sqlite3BtreeGetFilename() is a zero length
-  ** string, it means the main database is :memory: or a temp file.  In 
-  ** that case we do not support atomic multi-file commits, so use the 
+  ** string, it means the main database is :memory: or a temp file.  In
+  ** that case we do not support atomic multi-file commits, so use the
   ** simple case then too.
   */
   if( 0==sqlite3Strlen30(sqlite3BtreeGetFilename(db->aDb[0].pBt))
@@ -2908,7 +2908,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
       }
     }
 
-    /* Do the commit only if all databases successfully complete phase 1. 
+    /* Do the commit only if all databases successfully complete phase 1.
     ** If one of the BtreeCommitPhaseOne() calls fails, this indicates an
     ** IO error while deleting or truncating a journal file. It is unlikely,
     ** but could happen. In this case abandon processing and return the error.
@@ -2967,7 +2967,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
     }while( rc==SQLITE_OK && res );
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
       /* Open the super-journal. */
-      rc = sqlite3OsOpenMalloc(pVfs, zSuper, &pSuperJrnl, 
+      rc = sqlite3OsOpenMalloc(pVfs, zSuper, &pSuperJrnl,
           SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE|SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE|
           SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE|SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL, 0
       );
@@ -2976,7 +2976,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
       sqlite3DbFree(db, zSuper-4);
       return rc;
     }
- 
+
     /* Write the name of each database file in the transaction into the new
     ** super-journal file. If an error occurs at this point close
     ** and delete the super-journal file. All the individual journal files
@@ -3024,7 +3024,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
     ** in case the super-journal file name was written into the journal
     ** file before the failure occurred.
     */
-    for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){ 
+    for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){
       Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
       if( pBt ){
         rc = sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseOne(pBt, zSuper);
@@ -3057,7 +3057,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
     */
     disable_simulated_io_errors();
     sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc();
-    for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){ 
+    for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){
       Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
       if( pBt ){
         sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo(pBt, 1);
@@ -3073,7 +3073,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** This routine checks that the sqlite3.nVdbeActive count variable
 ** matches the number of vdbe's in the list sqlite3.pVdbe that are
 ** currently active. An assertion fails if the two counts do not match.
@@ -3109,10 +3109,10 @@ static void checkActiveVdbeCnt(sqlite3 *db){
 ** If the Vdbe passed as the first argument opened a statement-transaction,
 ** close it now. Argument eOp must be either SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK or
 ** SAVEPOINT_RELEASE. If it is SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then the statement
-** transaction is rolled back. If eOp is SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, then the 
+** transaction is rolled back. If eOp is SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, then the
 ** statement transaction is committed.
 **
-** If an IO error occurs, an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned. 
+** If an IO error occurs, an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned.
 ** Otherwise SQLITE_OK.
 */
 static SQLITE_NOINLINE int vdbeCloseStatement(Vdbe *p, int eOp){
@@ -3125,7 +3125,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int vdbeCloseStatement(Vdbe *p, int eOp){
   assert( db->nStatement>0 );
   assert( p->iStatement==(db->nStatement+db->nSavepoint) );
 
-  for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){ 
+  for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){
     int rc2 = SQLITE_OK;
     Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
     if( pBt ){
@@ -3152,8 +3152,8 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int vdbeCloseStatement(Vdbe *p, int eOp){
     }
   }
 
-  /* If the statement transaction is being rolled back, also restore the 
-  ** database handles deferred constraint counter to the value it had when 
+  /* If the statement transaction is being rolled back, also restore the
+  ** database handles deferred constraint counter to the value it had when
   ** the statement transaction was opened.  */
   if( eOp==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){
     db->nDeferredCons = p->nStmtDefCons;
@@ -3170,20 +3170,20 @@ int sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement(Vdbe *p, int eOp){
 
 
 /*
-** This function is called when a transaction opened by the database 
-** handle associated with the VM passed as an argument is about to be 
+** This function is called when a transaction opened by the database
+** handle associated with the VM passed as an argument is about to be
 ** committed. If there are outstanding deferred foreign key constraint
 ** violations, return SQLITE_ERROR. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK.
 **
-** If there are outstanding FK violations and this function returns 
+** If there are outstanding FK violations and this function returns
 ** SQLITE_ERROR, set the result of the VM to SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_FOREIGNKEY
 ** and write an error message to it. Then return SQLITE_ERROR.
 */
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY
 int sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(Vdbe *p, int deferred){
   sqlite3 *db = p->db;
-  if( (deferred && (db->nDeferredCons+db->nDeferredImmCons)>0) 
-   || (!deferred && p->nFkConstraint>0) 
+  if( (deferred && (db->nDeferredCons+db->nDeferredImmCons)>0)
+   || (!deferred && p->nFkConstraint>0)
   ){
     p->rc = SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_FOREIGNKEY;
     p->errorAction = OE_Abort;
@@ -3214,7 +3214,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
 
   /* This function contains the logic that determines if a statement or
   ** transaction will be committed or rolled back as a result of the
-  ** execution of this virtual machine. 
+  ** execution of this virtual machine.
   **
   ** If any of the following errors occur:
   **
@@ -3256,16 +3256,16 @@ int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
       mrc = isSpecialError = 0;
     }
     if( isSpecialError ){
-      /* If the query was read-only and the error code is SQLITE_INTERRUPT, 
-      ** no rollback is necessary. Otherwise, at least a savepoint 
-      ** transaction must be rolled back to restore the database to a 
+      /* If the query was read-only and the error code is SQLITE_INTERRUPT,
+      ** no rollback is necessary. Otherwise, at least a savepoint
+      ** transaction must be rolled back to restore the database to a
       ** consistent state.
       **
       ** Even if the statement is read-only, it is important to perform
-      ** a statement or transaction rollback operation. If the error 
+      ** a statement or transaction rollback operation. If the error
       ** occurred while writing to the journal, sub-journal or database
       ** file as part of an effort to free up cache space (see function
-      ** pagerStress() in pager.c), the rollback is required to restore 
+      ** pagerStress() in pager.c), the rollback is required to restore
       ** the pager to a consistent state.
       */
       if( !p->readOnly || mrc!=SQLITE_INTERRUPT ){
@@ -3287,16 +3287,16 @@ int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
     if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK || (p->errorAction==OE_Fail && !isSpecialError) ){
       sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 0);
     }
-  
-    /* If the auto-commit flag is set and this is the only active writer 
-    ** VM, then we do either a commit or rollback of the current transaction. 
+ 
+    /* If the auto-commit flag is set and this is the only active writer
+    ** VM, then we do either a commit or rollback of the current transaction.
     **
-    ** Note: This block also runs if one of the special errors handled 
-    ** above has occurred. 
+    ** Note: This block also runs if one of the special errors handled
+    ** above has occurred.
     */
-    if( !sqlite3VtabInSync(db) 
-     && db->autoCommit 
-     && db->nVdbeWrite==(p->readOnly==0) 
+    if( !sqlite3VtabInSync(db)
+     && db->autoCommit
+     && db->nVdbeWrite==(p->readOnly==0)
     ){
       if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK || (p->errorAction==OE_Fail && !isSpecialError) ){
         rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 1);
@@ -3309,10 +3309,10 @@ int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
         }else if( db->flags & SQLITE_CorruptRdOnly ){
           rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT;
           db->flags &= ~SQLITE_CorruptRdOnly;
-        }else{ 
-          /* The auto-commit flag is true, the vdbe program was successful 
+        }else{
+          /* The auto-commit flag is true, the vdbe program was successful
           ** or hit an 'OR FAIL' constraint and there are no deferred foreign
-          ** key constraints to hold up the transaction. This means a commit 
+          ** key constraints to hold up the transaction. This means a commit
           ** is required. */
           rc = vdbeCommit(db, p);
         }
@@ -3348,7 +3348,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
         p->nChange = 0;
       }
     }
-  
+ 
     /* If eStatementOp is non-zero, then a statement transaction needs to
     ** be committed or rolled back. Call sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement() to
     ** do so. If this operation returns an error, and the current statement
@@ -3369,9 +3369,9 @@ int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
         p->nChange = 0;
       }
     }
-  
+ 
     /* If this was an INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE and no statement transaction
-    ** has been rolled back, update the database connection change-counter. 
+    ** has been rolled back, update the database connection change-counter.
     */
     if( p->changeCntOn ){
       if( eStatementOp!=SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){
@@ -3400,7 +3400,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
   }
 
   /* If the auto-commit flag is set to true, then any locks that were held
-  ** by connection db have now been released. Call sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked() 
+  ** by connection db have now been released. Call sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked()
   ** to invoke any required unlock-notify callbacks.
   */
   if( db->autoCommit ){
@@ -3422,7 +3422,7 @@ void sqlite3VdbeResetStepResult(Vdbe *p){
 
 /*
 ** Copy the error code and error message belonging to the VDBE passed
-** as the first argument to its database handle (so that they will be 
+** as the first argument to its database handle (so that they will be
 ** returned by calls to sqlite3_errcode() and sqlite3_errmsg()).
 **
 ** This function does not clear the VDBE error code or message, just
@@ -3448,7 +3448,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeTransferError(Vdbe *p){
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SQLLOG
 /*
-** If an SQLITE_CONFIG_SQLLOG hook is registered and the VM has been run, 
+** If an SQLITE_CONFIG_SQLLOG hook is registered and the VM has been run,
 ** invoke it.
 */
 static void vdbeInvokeSqllog(Vdbe *v){
@@ -3509,7 +3509,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeReset(Vdbe *p){
   /* Reset register contents and reclaim error message memory.
   */
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
-  /* Execute assert() statements to ensure that the Vdbe.apCsr[] and 
+  /* Execute assert() statements to ensure that the Vdbe.apCsr[] and
   ** Vdbe.aMem[] arrays have already been cleaned up.  */
   if( p->apCsr ) for(i=0; i<p->nCursor; i++) assert( p->apCsr[i]==0 );
   if( p->aMem ){
@@ -3564,7 +3564,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeReset(Vdbe *p){
 #endif
   return p->rc & db->errMask;
 }
- 
+
 /*
 ** Clean up and delete a VDBE after execution.  Return an integer which is
 ** the result code.  Write any error message text into *pzErrMsg.
@@ -3588,8 +3588,8 @@ int sqlite3VdbeFinalize(Vdbe *p){
 ** the first argument.
 **
 ** Or, if iOp is greater than or equal to zero, then the destructor is
-** only invoked for those auxiliary data pointers created by the user 
-** function invoked by the OP_Function opcode at instruction iOp of 
+** only invoked for those auxiliary data pointers created by the user
+** function invoked by the OP_Function opcode at instruction iOp of
 ** VM pVdbe, and only then if:
 **
 **    * the associated function parameter is the 32nd or later (counting
@@ -3861,7 +3861,7 @@ u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialType(Mem *pMem, int file_format, u32 *pLen){
 ** The sizes for serial types less than 128
 */
 const u8 sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[128] = {
-        /*  0   1   2   3   4   5   6   7   8   9 */   
+        /*  0   1   2   3   4   5   6   7   8   9 */  
 /*   0 */   0,  1,  2,  3,  4,  6,  8,  8,  0,  0,
 /*  10 */   0,  0,  0,  0,  1,  1,  2,  2,  3,  3,
 /*  20 */   4,  4,  5,  5,  6,  6,  7,  7,  8,  8,
@@ -3884,19 +3884,19 @@ u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(u32 serial_type){
   if( serial_type>=128 ){
     return (serial_type-12)/2;
   }else{
-    assert( serial_type<12 
+    assert( serial_type<12
             || sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[serial_type]==(serial_type - 12)/2 );
     return sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[serial_type];
   }
 }
 u8 sqlite3VdbeOneByteSerialTypeLen(u8 serial_type){
   assert( serial_type<128 );
-  return sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[serial_type];  
+  return sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[serial_type]; 
 }
 
 /*
-** If we are on an architecture with mixed-endian floating 
-** points (ex: ARM7) then swap the lower 4 bytes with the 
+** If we are on an architecture with mixed-endian floating
+** points (ex: ARM7) then swap the lower 4 bytes with the
 ** upper 4 bytes.  Return the result.
 **
 ** For most architectures, this is a no-op.
@@ -3918,7 +3918,7 @@ u8 sqlite3VdbeOneByteSerialTypeLen(u8 serial_type){
 ** (2007-08-30)  Frank van Vugt has studied this problem closely
 ** and has send his findings to the SQLite developers.  Frank
 ** writes that some Linux kernels offer floating point hardware
-** emulation that uses only 32-bit mantissas instead of a full 
+** emulation that uses only 32-bit mantissas instead of a full
 ** 48-bits as required by the IEEE standard.  (This is the
 ** CONFIG_FPE_FASTFPE option.)  On such systems, floating point
 ** byte swapping becomes very complicated.  To avoid problems,
@@ -3962,7 +3962,7 @@ u64 sqlite3FloatSwap(u64 in){
 ** The few cases that require local variables are broken out into a separate
 ** routine so that in most cases the overhead of moving the stack pointer
 ** is avoided.
-*/ 
+*/
 static void serialGet(
   const unsigned char *buf,     /* Buffer to deserialize from */
   u32 serial_type,              /* Serial type to deserialize */
@@ -4045,7 +4045,7 @@ void sqlite3VdbeSerialGet(
       /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-01849-26079 Value is a big-endian 32-bit
       ** twos-complement integer. */
       pMem->u.i = FOUR_BYTE_INT(buf);
-#ifdef __HP_cc 
+#ifdef __HP_cc
       /* Work around a sign-extension bug in the HP compiler for HP/UX */
       if( buf[0]&0x80 ) pMem->u.i |= 0xffffffff80000000LL;
 #endif
@@ -4098,7 +4098,7 @@ void sqlite3VdbeSerialGet(
 ** The space is either allocated using sqlite3DbMallocRaw() or from within
 ** the unaligned buffer passed via the second and third arguments (presumably
 ** stack space). If the former, then *ppFree is set to a pointer that should
-** be eventually freed by the caller using sqlite3DbFree(). Or, if the 
+** be eventually freed by the caller using sqlite3DbFree(). Or, if the
 ** allocation comes from the pSpace/szSpace buffer, *ppFree is set to NULL
 ** before returning.
 **
@@ -4120,10 +4120,10 @@ UnpackedRecord *sqlite3VdbeAllocUnpackedRecord(
 }
 
 /*
-** Given the nKey-byte encoding of a record in pKey[], populate the 
+** Given the nKey-byte encoding of a record in pKey[], populate the
 ** UnpackedRecord structure indicated by the fourth argument with the
 ** contents of the decoded record.
-*/ 
+*/
 void sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack(
   KeyInfo *pKeyInfo,     /* Information about the record format */
   int nKey,              /* Size of the binary record */
@@ -4131,7 +4131,7 @@ void sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack(
   UnpackedRecord *p      /* Populate this structure before returning. */
 ){
   const unsigned char *aKey = (const unsigned char *)pKey;
-  u32 d; 
+  u32 d;
   u32 idx;                        /* Offset in aKey[] to read from */
   u16 u;                          /* Unsigned loop counter */
   u32 szHdr;
@@ -4158,7 +4158,7 @@ void sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack(
   }
   if( d>(u32)nKey && u ){
     assert( CORRUPT_DB );
-    /* In a corrupt record entry, the last pMem might have been set up using 
+    /* In a corrupt record entry, the last pMem might have been set up using
     ** uninitialized memory. Overwrite its value with NULL, to prevent
     ** warnings from MSAN. */
     sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pMem-1);
@@ -4202,13 +4202,13 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareDebug(
 
   /* Compilers may complain that mem1.u.i is potentially uninitialized.
   ** We could initialize it, as shown here, to silence those complaints.
-  ** But in fact, mem1.u.i will never actually be used uninitialized, and doing 
+  ** But in fact, mem1.u.i will never actually be used uninitialized, and doing
   ** the unnecessary initialization has a measurable negative performance
   ** impact, since this routine is a very high runner.  And so, we choose
   ** to ignore the compiler warnings and leave this variable uninitialized.
   */
   /*  mem1.u.i = 0;  // not needed, here to silence compiler warning */
-  
+ 
   idx1 = getVarint32(aKey1, szHdr1);
   if( szHdr1>98307 ) return SQLITE_CORRUPT;
   d1 = szHdr1;
@@ -4229,7 +4229,7 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareDebug(
     ** sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen() in the common case.
     */
     if( d1+(u64)serial_type1+2>(u64)nKey1
-     && d1+(u64)sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(serial_type1)>(u64)nKey1 
+     && d1+(u64)sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(serial_type1)>(u64)nKey1
     ){
       break;
     }
@@ -4246,7 +4246,7 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareDebug(
     if( rc!=0 ){
       assert( mem1.szMalloc==0 );  /* See comment below */
       if( (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[i] & KEYINFO_ORDER_BIGNULL)
-       && ((mem1.flags & MEM_Null) || (pPKey2->aMem[i].flags & MEM_Null)) 
+       && ((mem1.flags & MEM_Null) || (pPKey2->aMem[i].flags & MEM_Null))
       ){
         rc = -rc;
       }
@@ -4292,7 +4292,7 @@ debugCompareEnd:
 ** incorrectly.
 */
 static void vdbeAssertFieldCountWithinLimits(
-  int nKey, const void *pKey,   /* The record to verify */ 
+  int nKey, const void *pKey,   /* The record to verify */
   const KeyInfo *pKeyInfo       /* Compare size with this KeyInfo */
 ){
   int nField = 0;
@@ -4318,7 +4318,7 @@ static void vdbeAssertFieldCountWithinLimits(
 /*
 ** Both *pMem1 and *pMem2 contain string values. Compare the two values
 ** using the collation sequence pColl. As usual, return a negative , zero
-** or positive value if *pMem1 is less than, equal to or greater than 
+** or positive value if *pMem1 is less than, equal to or greater than
 ** *pMem2, respectively. Similar in spirit to "rc = (*pMem1) - (*pMem2);".
 */
 static int vdbeCompareMemString(
@@ -4445,7 +4445,7 @@ int sqlite3MemCompare(const Mem *pMem1, const Mem *pMem2, const CollSeq *pColl){
   f2 = pMem2->flags;
   combined_flags = f1|f2;
   assert( !sqlite3VdbeMemIsRowSet(pMem1) && !sqlite3VdbeMemIsRowSet(pMem2) );
- 
+
   /* If one value is NULL, it is less than the other. If both values
   ** are NULL, return 0.
   */
@@ -4508,7 +4508,7 @@ int sqlite3MemCompare(const Mem *pMem1, const Mem *pMem2, const CollSeq *pColl){
     }
 
     assert( pMem1->enc==pMem2->enc || pMem1->db->mallocFailed );
-    assert( pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF8 || 
+    assert( pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF8 ||
             pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF16LE || pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF16BE );
 
     /* The collation sequence must be defined at this point, even if
@@ -4523,7 +4523,7 @@ int sqlite3MemCompare(const Mem *pMem1, const Mem *pMem2, const CollSeq *pColl){
     /* If a NULL pointer was passed as the collate function, fall through
     ** to the blob case and use memcmp().  */
   }
- 
+
   /* Both values must be blobs.  Compare using memcmp().  */
   return sqlite3BlobCompare(pMem1, pMem2);
 }
@@ -4531,7 +4531,7 @@ int sqlite3MemCompare(const Mem *pMem1, const Mem *pMem2, const CollSeq *pColl){
 
 /*
 ** The first argument passed to this function is a serial-type that
-** corresponds to an integer - all values between 1 and 9 inclusive 
+** corresponds to an integer - all values between 1 and 9 inclusive
 ** except 7. The second points to a buffer containing an integer value
 ** serialized according to serial_type. This function deserializes
 ** and returns the value.
@@ -4573,7 +4573,7 @@ static i64 vdbeRecordDecodeInt(u32 serial_type, const u8 *aKey){
 /*
 ** This function compares the two table rows or index records
 ** specified by {nKey1, pKey1} and pPKey2.  It returns a negative, zero
-** or positive integer if key1 is less than, equal to or 
+** or positive integer if key1 is less than, equal to or
 ** greater than key2.  The {nKey1, pKey1} key must be a blob
 ** created by the OP_MakeRecord opcode of the VDBE.  The pPKey2
 ** key must be a parsed key such as obtained from
@@ -4582,12 +4582,12 @@ static i64 vdbeRecordDecodeInt(u32 serial_type, const u8 *aKey){
 ** If argument bSkip is non-zero, it is assumed that the caller has already
 ** determined that the first fields of the keys are equal.
 **
-** Key1 and Key2 do not have to contain the same number of fields. If all 
-** fields that appear in both keys are equal, then pPKey2->default_rc is 
+** Key1 and Key2 do not have to contain the same number of fields. If all
+** fields that appear in both keys are equal, then pPKey2->default_rc is
 ** returned.
 **
-** If database corruption is discovered, set pPKey2->errCode to 
-** SQLITE_CORRUPT and return 0. If an OOM error is encountered, 
+** If database corruption is discovered, set pPKey2->errCode to
+** SQLITE_CORRUPT and return 0. If an OOM error is encountered,
 ** pPKey2->errCode is set to SQLITE_NOMEM and, if it is not NULL, the
 ** malloc-failed flag set on database handle (pPKey2->pKeyInfo->db).
 */
@@ -4629,13 +4629,13 @@ int sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(
     d1 = szHdr1;
     i = 0;
   }
-  if( d1>(unsigned)nKey1 ){ 
+  if( d1>(unsigned)nKey1 ){
     pPKey2->errCode = (u8)SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
     return 0;  /* Corruption */
   }
 
   VVA_ONLY( mem1.szMalloc = 0; ) /* Only needed by assert() statements */
-  assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nAllField>=pPKey2->nField 
+  assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nAllField>=pPKey2->nField
        || CORRUPT_DB );
   assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->aSortFlags!=0 );
   assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nKeyField>0 );
@@ -4672,9 +4672,9 @@ int sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(
       serial_type = aKey1[idx1];
       if( serial_type>=10 ){
         /* Serial types 12 or greater are strings and blobs (greater than
-        ** numbers). Types 10 and 11 are currently "reserved for future 
+        ** numbers). Types 10 and 11 are currently "reserved for future
         ** use", so it doesn't really matter what the results of comparing
-        ** them to numberic values are.  */
+        ** them to numeric values are.  */
         rc = serial_type==10 ? -1 : +1;
       }else if( serial_type==0 ){
         rc = -1;
@@ -4720,7 +4720,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(
         }else{
           int nCmp = MIN(mem1.n, pRhs->n);
           rc = memcmp(&aKey1[d1], pRhs->z, nCmp);
-          if( rc==0 ) rc = mem1.n - pRhs->n; 
+          if( rc==0 ) rc = mem1.n - pRhs->n;
         }
       }
     }
@@ -4794,8 +4794,8 @@ int sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(
   /* rc==0 here means that one or both of the keys ran out of fields and
   ** all the fields up to that point were equal. Return the default_rc
   ** value.  */
-  assert( CORRUPT_DB 
-       || vdbeRecordCompareDebug(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2, pPKey2->default_rc) 
+  assert( CORRUPT_DB
+       || vdbeRecordCompareDebug(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2, pPKey2->default_rc)
        || pPKey2->pKeyInfo->db->mallocFailed
   );
   pPKey2->eqSeen = 1;
@@ -4810,8 +4810,8 @@ int sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(
 
 
 /*
-** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare() 
-** that (a) the first field of pPKey2 is an integer, and (b) the 
+** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare()
+** that (a) the first field of pPKey2 is an integer, and (b) the
 ** size-of-header varint at the start of (pKey1/nKey1) fits in a single
 ** byte (i.e. is less than 128).
 **
@@ -4866,7 +4866,7 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareInt(
       testcase( lhs<0 );
       break;
     }
-    case 8: 
+    case 8:
       lhs = 0;
       break;
     case 9:
@@ -4874,11 +4874,11 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareInt(
       break;
 
     /* This case could be removed without changing the results of running
-    ** this code. Including it causes gcc to generate a faster switch 
+    ** this code. Including it causes gcc to generate a faster switch
     ** statement (since the range of switch targets now starts at zero and
     ** is contiguous) but does not cause any duplicate code to be generated
-    ** (as gcc is clever enough to combine the two like cases). Other 
-    ** compilers might be similar.  */ 
+    ** (as gcc is clever enough to combine the two like cases). Other
+    ** compilers might be similar.  */
     case 0: case 7:
       return sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2);
 
@@ -4893,7 +4893,7 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareInt(
   }else if( v<lhs ){
     res = pPKey2->r2;
   }else if( pPKey2->nField>1 ){
-    /* The first fields of the two keys are equal. Compare the trailing 
+    /* The first fields of the two keys are equal. Compare the trailing
     ** fields.  */
     res = sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2, 1);
   }else{
@@ -4908,9 +4908,9 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareInt(
 }
 
 /*
-** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare() 
+** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare()
 ** that (a) the first field of pPKey2 is a string, that (b) the first field
-** uses the collation sequence BINARY and (c) that the size-of-header varint 
+** uses the collation sequence BINARY and (c) that the size-of-header varint
 ** at the start of (pKey1/nKey1) fits in a single byte.
 */
 static int vdbeRecordCompareString(
@@ -4935,7 +4935,7 @@ vrcs_restart:
       assert( CORRUPT_DB );
     }
     res = pPKey2->r1;      /* (pKey1/nKey1) is a number or a null */
-  }else if( !(serial_type & 0x01) ){ 
+  }else if( !(serial_type & 0x01) ){
     res = pPKey2->r2;      /* (pKey1/nKey1) is a blob */
   }else{
     int nCmp;
@@ -4987,7 +4987,7 @@ RecordCompare sqlite3VdbeFindCompare(UnpackedRecord *p){
   /* varintRecordCompareInt() and varintRecordCompareString() both assume
   ** that the size-of-header varint that occurs at the start of each record
   ** fits in a single byte (i.e. is 127 or less). varintRecordCompareInt()
-  ** also assumes that it is safe to overread a buffer by at least the 
+  ** also assumes that it is safe to overread a buffer by at least the
   ** maximum possible legal header size plus 8 bytes. Because there is
   ** guaranteed to be at least 74 (but not 136) bytes of padding following each
   ** buffer passed to varintRecordCompareInt() this makes it convenient to
@@ -5048,7 +5048,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeIdxRowid(sqlite3 *db, BtCursor *pCur, i64 *rowid){
   /* Get the size of the index entry.  Only indices entries of less
   ** than 2GiB are support - anything large must be database corruption.
   ** Any corruption is detected in sqlite3BtreeParseCellPtr(), though, so
-  ** this code can safely assume that nCellKey is 32-bits  
+  ** this code can safely assume that nCellKey is 32-bits 
   */
   assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCur) );
   nCellKey = sqlite3BtreePayloadSize(pCur);
@@ -5113,7 +5113,7 @@ idx_rowid_corruption:
 **
 ** pUnpacked is either created without a rowid or is truncated so that it
 ** omits the rowid at the end.  The rowid at the end of the index entry
-** is ignored as well.  Hence, this routine only compares the prefixes 
+** is ignored as well.  Hence, this routine only compares the prefixes
 ** of the keys prior to the final rowid, not the entire key.
 */
 int sqlite3VdbeIdxKeyCompare(
@@ -5149,7 +5149,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeIdxKeyCompare(
 
 /*
 ** This routine sets the value to be returned by subsequent calls to
-** sqlite3_changes() on the database handle 'db'. 
+** sqlite3_changes() on the database handle 'db'.
 */
 void sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(sqlite3 *db, i64 nChange){
   assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
@@ -5206,7 +5206,7 @@ u8 sqlite3VdbePrepareFlags(Vdbe *v){
 
 /*
 ** Return a pointer to an sqlite3_value structure containing the value bound
-** parameter iVar of VM v. Except, if the value is an SQL NULL, return 
+** parameter iVar of VM v. Except, if the value is an SQL NULL, return
 ** 0 instead. Unless it is NULL, apply affinity aff (one of the SQLITE_AFF_*
 ** constants) to the value before returning it.
 **
@@ -5281,7 +5281,7 @@ int sqlite3NotPureFunc(sqlite3_context *pCtx){
 #if defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_CURSOR_HINTS) && defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
 /*
 ** This Walker callback is used to help verify that calls to
-** sqlite3BtreeCursorHint() with opcode BTREE_HINT_RANGE have 
+** sqlite3BtreeCursorHint() with opcode BTREE_HINT_RANGE have
 ** byte-code register values correctly initialized.
 */
 int sqlite3CursorRangeHintExprCheck(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
@@ -5312,7 +5312,7 @@ void sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(Vdbe *p, sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK
 
 /*
-** If the second argument is not NULL, release any allocations associated 
+** If the second argument is not NULL, release any allocations associated
 ** with the memory cells in the p->aMem[] array. Also free the UnpackedRecord
 ** structure itself, using sqlite3DbFree().
 **
@@ -5380,7 +5380,7 @@ void sqlite3VdbePreUpdateHook(
 
   assert( pCsr!=0 );
   assert( pCsr->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
-  assert( pCsr->nField==nRealCol 
+  assert( pCsr->nField==nRealCol
        || (pCsr->nField==nRealCol+1 && op==SQLITE_DELETE && iReg==-1)
   );
 
diff --git a/src/vdbesort.c b/src/vdbesort.c
index 3958662cc..5fad1d25b 100644
--- a/src/vdbesort.c
+++ b/src/vdbesort.c
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
 **                                  is like Close() followed by Init() only
 **                                  much faster.
 **
-** The interfaces above must be called in a particular order.  Write() can 
+** The interfaces above must be called in a particular order.  Write() can
 ** only occur in between Init()/Reset() and Rewind().  Next(), Rowkey(), and
 ** Compare() can only occur in between Rewind() and Close()/Reset(). i.e.
 **
@@ -63,16 +63,16 @@
 **   for each record: Write()
 **   Rewind()
 **     Rowkey()/Compare()
-**   Next() 
+**   Next()
 **   Close()
 **
 ** Algorithm:
 **
-** Records passed to the sorter via calls to Write() are initially held 
+** Records passed to the sorter via calls to Write() are initially held
 ** unsorted in main memory. Assuming the amount of memory used never exceeds
 ** a threshold, when Rewind() is called the set of records is sorted using
 ** an in-memory merge sort. In this case, no temporary files are required
-** and subsequent calls to Rowkey(), Next() and Compare() read records 
+** and subsequent calls to Rowkey(), Next() and Compare() read records
 ** directly from main memory.
 **
 ** If the amount of space used to store records in main memory exceeds the
@@ -82,10 +82,10 @@
 ** of PMAs may be created by merging existing PMAs together - for example
 ** merging two or more level-0 PMAs together creates a level-1 PMA.
 **
-** The threshold for the amount of main memory to use before flushing 
+** The threshold for the amount of main memory to use before flushing
 ** records to a PMA is roughly the same as the limit configured for the
-** page-cache of the main database. Specifically, the threshold is set to 
-** the value returned by "PRAGMA main.page_size" multipled by 
+** page-cache of the main database. Specifically, the threshold is set to
+** the value returned by "PRAGMA main.page_size" multipled by
 ** that returned by "PRAGMA main.cache_size", in bytes.
 **
 ** If the sorter is running in single-threaded mode, then all PMAs generated
@@ -102,28 +102,28 @@
 ** than zero, and (b) worker threads have been enabled at runtime by calling
 ** "PRAGMA threads=N" with some value of N greater than 0.
 **
-** When Rewind() is called, any data remaining in memory is flushed to a 
+** When Rewind() is called, any data remaining in memory is flushed to a
 ** final PMA. So at this point the data is stored in some number of sorted
 ** PMAs within temporary files on disk.
 **
 ** If there are fewer than SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs in total and the
 ** sorter is running in single-threaded mode, then these PMAs are merged
-** incrementally as keys are retreived from the sorter by the VDBE.  The
+** incrementally as keys are retrieved from the sorter by the VDBE.  The
 ** MergeEngine object, described in further detail below, performs this
 ** merge.
 **
 ** Or, if running in multi-threaded mode, then a background thread is
 ** launched to merge the existing PMAs. Once the background thread has
-** merged T bytes of data into a single sorted PMA, the main thread 
+** merged T bytes of data into a single sorted PMA, the main thread
 ** begins reading keys from that PMA while the background thread proceeds
 ** with merging the next T bytes of data. And so on.
 **
-** Parameter T is set to half the value of the memory threshold used 
+** Parameter T is set to half the value of the memory threshold used
 ** by Write() above to determine when to create a new PMA.
 **
-** If there are more than SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs in total when 
-** Rewind() is called, then a hierarchy of incremental-merges is used. 
-** First, T bytes of data from the first SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs on 
+** If there are more than SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs in total when
+** Rewind() is called, then a hierarchy of incremental-merges is used.
+** First, T bytes of data from the first SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs on
 ** disk are merged together. Then T bytes of data from the second set, and
 ** so on, such that no operation ever merges more than SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT
 ** PMAs at a time. This done is to improve locality.
@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@
 #include "sqliteInt.h"
 #include "vdbeInt.h"
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** If SQLITE_DEBUG_SORTER_THREADS is defined, this module outputs various
 ** messages to stderr that may be helpful in understanding the performance
 ** characteristics of the sorter in multi-threaded mode.
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ typedef struct SorterList SorterList;       /* In-memory list of records */
 typedef struct IncrMerger IncrMerger;       /* Read & merge multiple PMAs */
 
 /*
-** A container for a temp file handle and the current amount of data 
+** A container for a temp file handle and the current amount of data
 ** stored in the file.
 */
 struct SorterFile {
@@ -207,17 +207,17 @@ struct SorterList {
 ** the MergeEngine.nTree variable.
 **
 ** The final (N/2) elements of aTree[] contain the results of comparing
-** pairs of PMA keys together. Element i contains the result of 
+** pairs of PMA keys together. Element i contains the result of
 ** comparing aReadr[2*i-N] and aReadr[2*i-N+1]. Whichever key is smaller, the
-** aTree element is set to the index of it. 
+** aTree element is set to the index of it.
 **
 ** For the purposes of this comparison, EOF is considered greater than any
 ** other key value. If the keys are equal (only possible with two EOF
 ** values), it doesn't matter which index is stored.
 **
-** The (N/4) elements of aTree[] that precede the final (N/2) described 
+** The (N/4) elements of aTree[] that precede the final (N/2) described
 ** above contains the index of the smallest of each block of 4 PmaReaders
-** And so on. So that aTree[1] contains the index of the PmaReader that 
+** And so on. So that aTree[1] contains the index of the PmaReader that
 ** currently points to the smallest key value. aTree[0] is unused.
 **
 ** Example:
@@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ struct SorterList {
 **
 **     aTree[] = { X, 5   0, 5    0, 3, 5, 6 }
 **
-** The current element is "Apple" (the value of the key indicated by 
+** The current element is "Apple" (the value of the key indicated by
 ** PmaReader 5). When the Next() operation is invoked, PmaReader 5 will
 ** be advanced to the next key in its segment. Say the next key is
 ** "Eggplant":
@@ -271,11 +271,11 @@ struct MergeEngine {
 **
 ** Essentially, this structure contains all those fields of the VdbeSorter
 ** structure for which each thread requires a separate instance. For example,
-** each thread requries its own UnpackedRecord object to unpack records in
+** each thread requeries its own UnpackedRecord object to unpack records in
 ** as part of comparison operations.
 **
-** Before a background thread is launched, variable bDone is set to 0. Then, 
-** right before it exits, the thread itself sets bDone to 1. This is used for 
+** Before a background thread is launched, variable bDone is set to 0. Then,
+** right before it exits, the thread itself sets bDone to 1. This is used for
 ** two purposes:
 **
 **   1. When flushing the contents of memory to a level-0 PMA on disk, to
@@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ struct SortSubtask {
 
 
 /*
-** Main sorter structure. A single instance of this is allocated for each 
+** Main sorter structure. A single instance of this is allocated for each
 ** sorter cursor created by the VDBE.
 **
 ** mxKeysize:
@@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ struct VdbeSorter {
 ** PMA, in sorted order.  The next key to be read is cached in nKey/aKey.
 ** aKey might point into aMap or into aBuffer.  If neither of those locations
 ** contain a contiguous representation of the key, then aAlloc is allocated
-** and the key is copied into aAlloc and aKey is made to poitn to aAlloc.
+** and the key is copied into aAlloc and aKey is made to point to aAlloc.
 **
 ** pFd==0 at EOF.
 */
@@ -362,21 +362,21 @@ struct PmaReader {
 };
 
 /*
-** Normally, a PmaReader object iterates through an existing PMA stored 
+** Normally, a PmaReader object iterates through an existing PMA stored
 ** within a temp file. However, if the PmaReader.pIncr variable points to
 ** an object of the following type, it may be used to iterate/merge through
 ** multiple PMAs simultaneously.
 **
-** There are two types of IncrMerger object - single (bUseThread==0) and 
-** multi-threaded (bUseThread==1). 
+** There are two types of IncrMerger object - single (bUseThread==0) and
+** multi-threaded (bUseThread==1).
 **
-** A multi-threaded IncrMerger object uses two temporary files - aFile[0] 
-** and aFile[1]. Neither file is allowed to grow to more than mxSz bytes in 
-** size. When the IncrMerger is initialized, it reads enough data from 
-** pMerger to populate aFile[0]. It then sets variables within the 
-** corresponding PmaReader object to read from that file and kicks off 
-** a background thread to populate aFile[1] with the next mxSz bytes of 
-** sorted record data from pMerger. 
+** A multi-threaded IncrMerger object uses two temporary files - aFile[0]
+** and aFile[1]. Neither file is allowed to grow to more than mxSz bytes in
+** size. When the IncrMerger is initialized, it reads enough data from
+** pMerger to populate aFile[0]. It then sets variables within the
+** corresponding PmaReader object to read from that file and kicks off
+** a background thread to populate aFile[1] with the next mxSz bytes of
+** sorted record data from pMerger.
 **
 ** When the PmaReader reaches the end of aFile[0], it blocks until the
 ** background thread has finished populating aFile[1]. It then exchanges
@@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ struct PmaReader {
 **
 ** A single-threaded IncrMerger does not open any temporary files of its
 ** own. Instead, it has exclusive access to mxSz bytes of space beginning
-** at offset iStartOff of file pTask->file2. And instead of using a 
+** at offset iStartOff of file pTask->file2. And instead of using a
 ** background thread to prepare data for the PmaReader, with a single
 ** threaded IncrMerger the allocate part of pTask->file2 is "refilled" with
 ** keys from pMerger by the calling thread whenever the PmaReader runs out
@@ -499,7 +499,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReadBlob(
 
   assert( p->aBuffer );
 
-  /* If there is no more data to be read from the buffer, read the next 
+  /* If there is no more data to be read from the buffer, read the next
   ** p->nBuffer bytes of data from the file into it. Or, if there are less
   ** than p->nBuffer bytes remaining in the PMA, read all remaining data.  */
   iBuf = p->iReadOff % p->nBuffer;
@@ -520,11 +520,11 @@ static int vdbePmaReadBlob(
     assert( rc!=SQLITE_IOERR_SHORT_READ );
     if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
   }
-  nAvail = p->nBuffer - iBuf; 
+  nAvail = p->nBuffer - iBuf;
 
   if( nByte<=nAvail ){
     /* The requested data is available in the in-memory buffer. In this
-    ** case there is no need to make a copy of the data, just return a 
+    ** case there is no need to make a copy of the data, just return a
     ** pointer into the buffer to the caller.  */
     *ppOut = &p->aBuffer[iBuf];
     p->iReadOff += nByte;
@@ -603,7 +603,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReadVarint(PmaReader *p, u64 *pnOut){
 
 /*
 ** Attempt to memory map file pFile. If successful, set *pp to point to the
-** new mapping and return SQLITE_OK. If the mapping is not attempted 
+** new mapping and return SQLITE_OK. If the mapping is not attempted
 ** (because the file is too large or the VFS layer is configured not to use
 ** mmap), return SQLITE_OK and set *pp to NULL.
 **
@@ -624,7 +624,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterMapFile(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterFile *pFile, u8 **pp){
 
 /*
 ** Attach PmaReader pReadr to file pFile (if it is not already attached to
-** that file) and seek it to offset iOff within the file.  Return SQLITE_OK 
+** that file) and seek it to offset iOff within the file.  Return SQLITE_OK
 ** if successful, or an SQLite error code if an error occurs.
 */
 static int vdbePmaReaderSeek(
@@ -714,11 +714,11 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderNext(PmaReader *pReadr){
 
 /*
 ** Initialize PmaReader pReadr to scan through the PMA stored in file pFile
-** starting at offset iStart and ending at offset iEof-1. This function 
-** leaves the PmaReader pointing to the first key in the PMA (or EOF if the 
+** starting at offset iStart and ending at offset iEof-1. This function
+** leaves the PmaReader pointing to the first key in the PMA (or EOF if the
 ** PMA is empty).
 **
-** If the pnByte parameter is NULL, then it is assumed that the file 
+** If the pnByte parameter is NULL, then it is assumed that the file
 ** contains a single PMA, and that that PMA omits the initial length varint.
 */
 static int vdbePmaReaderInit(
@@ -751,7 +751,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderInit(
 
 /*
 ** A version of vdbeSorterCompare() that assumes that it has already been
-** determined that the first field of key1 is equal to the first field of 
+** determined that the first field of key1 is equal to the first field of
 ** key2.
 */
 static int vdbeSorterCompareTail(
@@ -769,7 +769,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterCompareTail(
 }
 
 /*
-** Compare key1 (buffer pKey1, size nKey1 bytes) with key2 (buffer pKey2, 
+** Compare key1 (buffer pKey1, size nKey1 bytes) with key2 (buffer pKey2,
 ** size nKey2 bytes). Use (pTask->pKeyInfo) for the collation sequences
 ** used by the comparison. Return the result of the comparison.
 **
@@ -915,7 +915,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterCompareInt(
 ** is non-zero and the sorter is able to guarantee a stable sort, nField
 ** is used instead. This is used when sorting records for a CREATE INDEX
 ** statement. In this case, keys are always delivered to the sorter in
-** order of the primary key, which happens to be make up the final part 
+** order of the primary key, which happens to be make up the final part
 ** of the records being sorted. So if the sort is stable, there is never
 ** any reason to compare PK fields and they can be ignored for a small
 ** performance boost.
@@ -1016,7 +1016,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeSorterInit(
       }
     }
 
-    if( pKeyInfo->nAllField<13 
+    if( pKeyInfo->nAllField<13
      && (pKeyInfo->aColl[0]==0 || pKeyInfo->aColl[0]==db->pDfltColl)
      && (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[0] & KEYINFO_ORDER_BIGNULL)==0
     ){
@@ -1041,7 +1041,7 @@ static void vdbeSorterRecordFree(sqlite3 *db, SorterRecord *pRecord){
 }
 
 /*
-** Free all resources owned by the object indicated by argument pTask. All 
+** Free all resources owned by the object indicated by argument pTask. All
 ** fields of *pTask are zeroed before returning.
 */
 static void vdbeSortSubtaskCleanup(sqlite3 *db, SortSubtask *pTask){
@@ -1141,7 +1141,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterCreateThread(
 }
 
 /*
-** Join all outstanding threads launched by SorterWrite() to create 
+** Join all outstanding threads launched by SorterWrite() to create
 ** level-0 PMAs.
 */
 static int vdbeSorterJoinAll(VdbeSorter *pSorter, int rcin){
@@ -1150,10 +1150,10 @@ static int vdbeSorterJoinAll(VdbeSorter *pSorter, int rcin){
 
   /* This function is always called by the main user thread.
   **
-  ** If this function is being called after SorterRewind() has been called, 
+  ** If this function is being called after SorterRewind() has been called,
   ** it is possible that thread pSorter->aTask[pSorter->nTask-1].pThread
   ** is currently attempt to join one of the other threads. To avoid a race
-  ** condition where this thread also attempts to join the same object, join 
+  ** condition where this thread also attempts to join the same object, join
   ** thread pSorter->aTask[pSorter->nTask-1].pThread first. */
   for(i=pSorter->nTask-1; i>=0; i--){
     SortSubtask *pTask = &pSorter->aTask[i];
@@ -1325,8 +1325,8 @@ static int vdbeSorterOpenTempFile(
 }
 
 /*
-** If it has not already been allocated, allocate the UnpackedRecord 
-** structure at pTask->pUnpacked. Return SQLITE_OK if successful (or 
+** If it has not already been allocated, allocate the UnpackedRecord
+** structure at pTask->pUnpacked. Return SQLITE_OK if successful (or
 ** if no allocation was required), or SQLITE_NOMEM otherwise.
 */
 static int vdbeSortAllocUnpacked(SortSubtask *pTask){
@@ -1389,14 +1389,14 @@ static SorterCompare vdbeSorterGetCompare(VdbeSorter *p){
   if( p->typeMask==SORTER_TYPE_INTEGER ){
     return vdbeSorterCompareInt;
   }else if( p->typeMask==SORTER_TYPE_TEXT ){
-    return vdbeSorterCompareText; 
+    return vdbeSorterCompareText;
   }
   return vdbeSorterCompare;
 }
 
 /*
-** Sort the linked list of records headed at pTask->pList. Return 
-** SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM) if 
+** Sort the linked list of records headed at pTask->pList. Return
+** SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM) if
 ** an error occurs.
 */
 static int vdbeSorterSort(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterList *pList){
@@ -1441,8 +1441,8 @@ static int vdbeSorterSort(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterList *pList){
   }
   pList->pList = p;
 
-  assert( pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_OK 
-       || pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_NOMEM 
+  assert( pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_OK
+       || pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_NOMEM
   );
   return pTask->pUnpacked->errCode;
 }
@@ -1483,8 +1483,8 @@ static void vdbePmaWriteBlob(PmaWriter *p, u8 *pData, int nData){
     memcpy(&p->aBuffer[p->iBufEnd], &pData[nData-nRem], nCopy);
     p->iBufEnd += nCopy;
     if( p->iBufEnd==p->nBuffer ){
-      p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd, 
-          &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart, 
+      p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd,
+          &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart,
           p->iWriteOff + p->iBufStart
       );
       p->iBufStart = p->iBufEnd = 0;
@@ -1499,7 +1499,7 @@ static void vdbePmaWriteBlob(PmaWriter *p, u8 *pData, int nData){
 /*
 ** Flush any buffered data to disk and clean up the PMA-writer object.
 ** The results of using the PMA-writer after this call are undefined.
-** Return SQLITE_OK if flushing the buffered data succeeds or is not 
+** Return SQLITE_OK if flushing the buffered data succeeds or is not
 ** required. Otherwise, return an SQLite error code.
 **
 ** Before returning, set *piEof to the offset immediately following the
@@ -1508,8 +1508,8 @@ static void vdbePmaWriteBlob(PmaWriter *p, u8 *pData, int nData){
 static int vdbePmaWriterFinish(PmaWriter *p, i64 *piEof){
   int rc;
   if( p->eFWErr==0 && ALWAYS(p->aBuffer) && p->iBufEnd>p->iBufStart ){
-    p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd, 
-        &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart, 
+    p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd,
+        &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart,
         p->iWriteOff + p->iBufStart
     );
   }
@@ -1521,11 +1521,11 @@ static int vdbePmaWriterFinish(PmaWriter *p, i64 *piEof){
 }
 
 /*
-** Write value iVal encoded as a varint to the PMA. Return 
+** Write value iVal encoded as a varint to the PMA. Return
 ** SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code if an error occurs.
 */
 static void vdbePmaWriteVarint(PmaWriter *p, u64 iVal){
-  int nByte; 
+  int nByte;
   u8 aByte[10];
   nByte = sqlite3PutVarint(aByte, iVal);
   vdbePmaWriteBlob(p, aByte, nByte);
@@ -1533,7 +1533,7 @@ static void vdbePmaWriteVarint(PmaWriter *p, u64 iVal){
 
 /*
 ** Write the current contents of in-memory linked-list pList to a level-0
-** PMA in the temp file belonging to sub-task pTask. Return SQLITE_OK if 
+** PMA in the temp file belonging to sub-task pTask. Return SQLITE_OK if
 ** successful, or an SQLite error code otherwise.
 **
 ** The format of a PMA is:
@@ -1541,8 +1541,8 @@ static void vdbePmaWriteVarint(PmaWriter *p, u64 iVal){
 **     * A varint. This varint contains the total number of bytes of content
 **       in the PMA (not including the varint itself).
 **
-**     * One or more records packed end-to-end in order of ascending keys. 
-**       Each record consists of a varint followed by a blob of data (the 
+**     * One or more records packed end-to-end in order of ascending keys.
+**       Each record consists of a varint followed by a blob of data (the
 **       key). The varint is the number of bytes in the blob of data.
 */
 static int vdbeSorterListToPMA(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterList *pList){
@@ -1551,7 +1551,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterListToPMA(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterList *pList){
   PmaWriter writer;               /* Object used to write to the file */
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
-  /* Set iSz to the expected size of file pTask->file after writing the PMA. 
+  /* Set iSz to the expected size of file pTask->file after writing the PMA.
   ** This is used by an assert() statement at the end of this function.  */
   i64 iSz = pList->szPMA + sqlite3VarintLen(pList->szPMA) + pTask->file.iEof;
 #endif
@@ -1704,7 +1704,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterFlushPMA(VdbeSorter *pSorter){
   SortSubtask *pTask = 0;    /* Thread context used to create new PMA */
   int nWorker = (pSorter->nTask-1);
 
-  /* Set the flag to indicate that at least one PMA has been written. 
+  /* Set the flag to indicate that at least one PMA has been written.
   ** Or will be, anyhow.  */
   pSorter->bUsePMA = 1;
 
@@ -1714,7 +1714,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterFlushPMA(VdbeSorter *pSorter){
   ** the background thread from a sub-tasks previous turn is still running,
   ** skip it. If the first (pSorter->nTask-1) sub-tasks are all still busy,
   ** fall back to using the final sub-task. The first (pSorter->nTask-1)
-  ** sub-tasks are prefered as they use background threads - the final 
+  ** sub-tasks are preferred as they use background threads - the final
   ** sub-task uses the main thread. */
   for(i=0; i<nWorker; i++){
     int iTest = (pSorter->iPrev + i + 1) % nWorker;
@@ -1795,14 +1795,14 @@ int sqlite3VdbeSorterWrite(
   ** If using the single large allocation mode (pSorter->aMemory!=0), then
   ** flush the contents of memory to a new PMA if (a) at least one value is
   ** already in memory and (b) the new value will not fit in memory.
-  ** 
+  **
   ** Or, if using separate allocations for each record, flush the contents
   ** of memory to a PMA if either of the following are true:
   **
-  **   * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater 
+  **   * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater
   **     than (page-size * cache-size), or
   **
-  **   * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater 
+  **   * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater
   **     than (page-size * 10) and sqlite3HeapNearlyFull() returns true.
   */
   nReq = pVal->n + sizeof(SorterRecord);
@@ -1941,11 +1941,11 @@ static int vdbeIncrBgPopulate(IncrMerger *pIncr){
 ** aFile[0] such that the PmaReader should start rereading it from the
 ** beginning.
 **
-** For single-threaded objects, this is accomplished by literally reading 
-** keys from pIncr->pMerger and repopulating aFile[0]. 
+** For single-threaded objects, this is accomplished by literally reading
+** keys from pIncr->pMerger and repopulating aFile[0].
 **
-** For multi-threaded objects, all that is required is to wait until the 
-** background thread is finished (if it is not already) and then swap 
+** For multi-threaded objects, all that is required is to wait until the
+** background thread is finished (if it is not already) and then swap
 ** aFile[0] and aFile[1] in place. If the contents of pMerger have not
 ** been exhausted, this function also launches a new background thread
 ** to populate the new aFile[1].
@@ -2086,7 +2086,7 @@ static void vdbeMergeEngineCompare(
 #define INCRINIT_TASK   1
 #define INCRINIT_ROOT   2
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Forward reference required as the vdbeIncrMergeInit() and
 ** vdbePmaReaderIncrInit() routines are called mutually recursively when
 ** building a merge tree.
@@ -2095,7 +2095,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode);
 
 /*
 ** Initialize the MergeEngine object passed as the second argument. Once this
-** function returns, the first key of merged data may be read from the 
+** function returns, the first key of merged data may be read from the
 ** MergeEngine object in the usual fashion.
 **
 ** If argument eMode is INCRINIT_ROOT, then it is assumed that any IncrMerge
@@ -2105,8 +2105,8 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode);
 ** required is to call vdbePmaReaderNext() on each PmaReader to point it at
 ** its first key.
 **
-** Otherwise, if eMode is any value other than INCRINIT_ROOT, then use 
-** vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() to initialize each PmaReader that feeds data 
+** Otherwise, if eMode is any value other than INCRINIT_ROOT, then use
+** vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() to initialize each PmaReader that feeds data
 ** to pMerger.
 **
 ** SQLITE_OK is returned if successful, or an SQLite error code otherwise.
@@ -2161,19 +2161,19 @@ static int vdbeMergeEngineInit(
 ** object at (pReadr->pIncr).
 **
 ** If argument eMode is set to INCRINIT_NORMAL, then all PmaReaders
-** in the sub-tree headed by pReadr are also initialized. Data is then 
-** loaded into the buffers belonging to pReadr and it is set to point to 
+** in the sub-tree headed by pReadr are also initialized. Data is then
+** loaded into the buffers belonging to pReadr and it is set to point to
 ** the first key in its range.
 **
 ** If argument eMode is set to INCRINIT_TASK, then pReadr is guaranteed
 ** to be a multi-threaded PmaReader and this function is being called in a
-** background thread. In this case all PmaReaders in the sub-tree are 
+** background thread. In this case all PmaReaders in the sub-tree are
 ** initialized as for INCRINIT_NORMAL and the aFile[1] buffer belonging to
 ** pReadr is populated. However, pReadr itself is not set up to point
 ** to its first key. A call to vdbePmaReaderNext() is still required to do
-** that. 
+** that.
 **
-** The reason this function does not call vdbePmaReaderNext() immediately 
+** The reason this function does not call vdbePmaReaderNext() immediately
 ** in the INCRINIT_TASK case is that vdbePmaReaderNext() assumes that it has
 ** to block on thread (pTask->thread) before accessing aFile[1]. But, since
 ** this entire function is being run by thread (pTask->thread), that will
@@ -2198,7 +2198,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode){
 
   rc = vdbeMergeEngineInit(pTask, pIncr->pMerger, eMode);
 
-  /* Set up the required files for pIncr. A multi-theaded IncrMerge object
+  /* Set up the required files for pIncr. A multi-threaded IncrMerge object
   ** requires two temp files to itself, whereas a single-threaded object
   ** only requires a region of pTask->file2. */
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -2229,12 +2229,12 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode){
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pIncr->bUseThread ){
     /* Use the current thread to populate aFile[1], even though this
     ** PmaReader is multi-threaded. If this is an INCRINIT_TASK object,
-    ** then this function is already running in background thread 
-    ** pIncr->pTask->thread. 
+    ** then this function is already running in background thread
+    ** pIncr->pTask->thread.
     **
-    ** If this is the INCRINIT_ROOT object, then it is running in the 
+    ** If this is the INCRINIT_ROOT object, then it is running in the
     ** main VDBE thread. But that is Ok, as that thread cannot return
-    ** control to the VDBE or proceed with anything useful until the 
+    ** control to the VDBE or proceed with anything useful until the
     ** first results are ready from this merger object anyway.
     */
     assert( eMode==INCRINIT_ROOT || eMode==INCRINIT_TASK );
@@ -2251,7 +2251,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode){
 
 #if SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS>0
 /*
-** The main routine for vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() operations run in 
+** The main routine for vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() operations run in
 ** background threads.
 */
 static void *vdbePmaReaderBgIncrInit(void *pCtx){
@@ -2269,8 +2269,8 @@ static void *vdbePmaReaderBgIncrInit(void *pCtx){
 ** (if pReadr->pIncr==0), then this function is a no-op. Otherwise, it invokes
 ** the vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() function with the parameters passed to
 ** this routine to initialize the incremental merge.
-** 
-** If the IncrMerger object is multi-threaded (IncrMerger.bUseThread==1), 
+**
+** If the IncrMerger object is multi-threaded (IncrMerger.bUseThread==1),
 ** then a background thread is launched to call vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit().
 ** Or, if the IncrMerger is single threaded, the same function is called
 ** using the current thread.
@@ -2300,7 +2300,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode){
 ** to NULL and return an SQLite error code.
 **
 ** When this function is called, *piOffset is set to the offset of the
-** first PMA to read from pTask->file. Assuming no error occurs, it is 
+** first PMA to read from pTask->file. Assuming no error occurs, it is
 ** set to the offset immediately following the last byte of the last
 ** PMA before returning. If an error does occur, then the final value of
 ** *piOffset is undefined.
@@ -2410,12 +2410,12 @@ static int vdbeSorterAddToTree(
 /*
 ** This function is called as part of a SorterRewind() operation on a sorter
 ** that has already written two or more level-0 PMAs to one or more temp
-** files. It builds a tree of MergeEngine/IncrMerger/PmaReader objects that 
+** files. It builds a tree of MergeEngine/IncrMerger/PmaReader objects that
 ** can be used to incrementally merge all PMAs on disk.
 **
 ** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and *ppOut set to point to the
 ** MergeEngine object at the root of the tree before returning. Or, if an
-** error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and the final value 
+** error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and the final value
 ** of *ppOut is undefined.
 */
 static int vdbeSorterMergeTreeBuild(
@@ -2427,8 +2427,8 @@ static int vdbeSorterMergeTreeBuild(
   int iTask;
 
 #if SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS>0
-  /* If the sorter uses more than one task, then create the top-level 
-  ** MergeEngine here. This MergeEngine will read data from exactly 
+  /* If the sorter uses more than one task, then create the top-level
+  ** MergeEngine here. This MergeEngine will read data from exactly
   ** one PmaReader per sub-task.  */
   assert( pSorter->bUseThreads || pSorter->nTask==1 );
   if( pSorter->nTask>1 ){
@@ -2537,7 +2537,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterSetupMerge(VdbeSorter *pSorter){
           }
           for(iTask=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && iTask<pSorter->nTask; iTask++){
             /* Check that:
-            **   
+            **  
             **   a) The incremental merge object is configured to use the
             **      right task, and
             **   b) If it is using task (nTask-1), it is configured to run
@@ -2600,7 +2600,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeSorterRewind(const VdbeCursor *pCsr, int *pbEof){
     return rc;
   }
 
-  /* Write the current in-memory list to a PMA. When the VdbeSorterWrite() 
+  /* Write the current in-memory list to a PMA. When the VdbeSorterWrite()
   ** function flushes the contents of memory to disk, it immediately always
   ** creates a new list consisting of a single key immediately afterwards.
   ** So the list is never empty at this point.  */
@@ -2612,7 +2612,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeSorterRewind(const VdbeCursor *pCsr, int *pbEof){
 
   vdbeSorterRewindDebug("rewind");
 
-  /* Assuming no errors have occurred, set up a merger structure to 
+  /* Assuming no errors have occurred, set up a merger structure to
   ** incrementally read and merge all remaining PMAs.  */
   assert( pSorter->pReader==0 );
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -2666,7 +2666,7 @@ int sqlite3VdbeSorterNext(sqlite3 *db, const VdbeCursor *pCsr){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return a pointer to a buffer owned by the sorter that contains the 
+** Return a pointer to a buffer owned by the sorter that contains the
 ** current key.
 */
 static void *vdbeSorterRowkey(
diff --git a/src/vtab.c b/src/vtab.c
index ad629bb03..741518991 100644
--- a/src/vtab.c
+++ b/src/vtab.c
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
 /*
 ** Before a virtual table xCreate() or xConnect() method is invoked, the
 ** sqlite3.pVtabCtx member variable is set to point to an instance of
-** this struct allocated on the stack. It is used by the implementation of 
+** this struct allocated on the stack. It is used by the implementation of
 ** the sqlite3_declare_vtab() and sqlite3_vtab_config() APIs, both of which
 ** are invoked only from within xCreate and xConnect methods.
 */
@@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ void sqlite3VtabModuleUnref(sqlite3 *db, Module *pMod){
 /*
 ** Lock the virtual table so that it cannot be disconnected.
 ** Locks nest.  Every lock should have a corresponding unlock.
-** If an unlock is omitted, resources leaks will occur.  
+** If an unlock is omitted, resources leaks will occur.
 **
 ** If a disconnect is attempted while a virtual table is locked,
 ** the disconnect is deferred until all locks have been removed.
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ void sqlite3VtabLock(VTable *pVTab){
 
 /*
 ** pTab is a pointer to a Table structure representing a virtual-table.
-** Return a pointer to the VTable object used by connection db to access 
+** Return a pointer to the VTable object used by connection db to access
 ** this virtual-table, if one has been created, or NULL otherwise.
 */
 VTable *sqlite3GetVTable(sqlite3 *db, Table *pTab){
@@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ void sqlite3VtabUnlock(VTable *pVTab){
 /*
 ** Table p is a virtual table. This function moves all elements in the
 ** p->u.vtab.p list to the sqlite3.pDisconnect lists of their associated
-** database connections to be disconnected at the next opportunity. 
+** database connections to be disconnected at the next opportunity.
 ** Except, if argument db is not NULL, then the entry associated with
 ** connection db is left in the p->u.vtab.p list.
 */
@@ -234,8 +234,8 @@ static VTable *vtabDisconnectAll(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){
   pVTable = p->u.vtab.p;
   p->u.vtab.p = 0;
 
-  /* Assert that the mutex (if any) associated with the BtShared database 
-  ** that contains table p is held by the caller. See header comments 
+  /* Assert that the mutex (if any) associated with the BtShared database
+  ** that contains table p is held by the caller. See header comments
   ** above function sqlite3VtabUnlockList() for an explanation of why
   ** this makes it safe to access the sqlite3.pDisconnect list of any
   ** database connection that may have an entry in the p->u.vtab.p list.
@@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ void sqlite3VtabDisconnect(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){
 ** Disconnect all the virtual table objects in the sqlite3.pDisconnect list.
 **
 ** This function may only be called when the mutexes associated with all
-** shared b-tree databases opened using connection db are held by the 
+** shared b-tree databases opened using connection db are held by the
 ** caller. This is done to protect the sqlite3.pDisconnect list. The
 ** sqlite3.pDisconnect list is accessed only as follows:
 **
@@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ void sqlite3VtabDisconnect(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){
 **      or, if the virtual table is stored in a non-sharable database, then
 **      the database handle mutex is held.
 **
-** As a result, a sqlite3.pDisconnect cannot be accessed simultaneously 
+** As a result, a sqlite3.pDisconnect cannot be accessed simultaneously
 ** by multiple threads. It is thread-safe.
 */
 void sqlite3VtabUnlockList(sqlite3 *db){
@@ -330,12 +330,12 @@ void sqlite3VtabUnlockList(sqlite3 *db){
 ** record.
 **
 ** Since it is a virtual-table, the Table structure contains a pointer
-** to the head of a linked list of VTable structures. Each VTable 
+** to the head of a linked list of VTable structures. Each VTable
 ** structure is associated with a single sqlite3* user of the schema.
-** The reference count of the VTable structure associated with database 
-** connection db is decremented immediately (which may lead to the 
+** The reference count of the VTable structure associated with database
+** connection db is decremented immediately (which may lead to the
 ** structure being xDisconnected and free). Any other VTable structures
-** in the list are moved to the sqlite3.pDisconnect list of the associated 
+** in the list are moved to the sqlite3.pDisconnect list of the associated
 ** database connection.
 */
 void sqlite3VtabClear(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){
@@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ void sqlite3VtabBeginParse(
   if( pTable->u.vtab.azArg ){
     int iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTable->pSchema);
     assert( iDb>=0 ); /* The database the table is being created in */
-    sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_CREATE_VTABLE, pTable->zName, 
+    sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_CREATE_VTABLE, pTable->zName,
             pTable->u.vtab.azArg[0], pParse->db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName);
   }
 #endif
@@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ void sqlite3VtabFinishParse(Parse *pParse, Token *pEnd){
   addArgumentToVtab(pParse);
   pParse->sArg.z = 0;
   if( pTab->u.vtab.nArg<1 ) return;
-  
+
   /* If the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement is being entered for the
   ** first time (in other words if the virtual table is actually being
   ** created now instead of just being read out of sqlite_schema) then
@@ -476,12 +476,12 @@ void sqlite3VtabFinishParse(Parse *pParse, Token *pEnd){
     }
     zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE %T", &pParse->sNameToken);
 
-    /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the 
+    /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the
     ** schema table.  We just need to update that slot with all
-    ** the information we've collected.  
+    ** the information we've collected.
     **
     ** The VM register number pParse->regRowid holds the rowid of an
-    ** entry in the sqlite_schema table tht was created for this vtab
+    ** entry in the sqlite_schema table that was created for this vtab
     ** by sqlite3StartTable().
     */
     iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema);
@@ -555,7 +555,7 @@ void sqlite3VtabArgExtend(Parse *pParse, Token *p){
 ** to this procedure.
 */
 static int vtabCallConstructor(
-  sqlite3 *db, 
+  sqlite3 *db,
   Table *pTab,
   Module *pMod,
   int (*xConstruct)(sqlite3*,void*,int,const char*const*,sqlite3_vtab**,char**),
@@ -577,7 +577,7 @@ static int vtabCallConstructor(
   /* Check that the virtual-table is not already being initialized */
   for(pCtx=db->pVtabCtx; pCtx; pCtx=pCtx->pPrior){
     if( pCtx->pTab==pTab ){
-      *pzErr = sqlite3MPrintf(db, 
+      *pzErr = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
           "vtable constructor called recursively: %s", pTab->zName
       );
       return SQLITE_LOCKED;
@@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ static int vtabCallConstructor(
       int iCol;
       u16 oooHidden = 0;
       /* If everything went according to plan, link the new VTable structure
-      ** into the linked list headed by pTab->u.vtab.p. Then loop through the 
+      ** into the linked list headed by pTab->u.vtab.p. Then loop through the
       ** columns of the table to see if any of them contain the token "hidden".
       ** If so, set the Column COLFLAG_HIDDEN flag and remove the token from
       ** the type string.  */
@@ -687,7 +687,7 @@ static int vtabCallConstructor(
 
 /*
 ** This function is invoked by the parser to call the xConnect() method
-** of the virtual table pTab. If an error occurs, an error code is returned 
+** of the virtual table pTab. If an error occurs, an error code is returned
 ** and an error left in pParse.
 **
 ** This call is a no-op if table pTab is not a virtual table.
@@ -759,7 +759,7 @@ static void addToVTrans(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){
 
 /*
 ** This function is invoked by the vdbe to call the xCreate method
-** of the virtual table named zTab in database iDb. 
+** of the virtual table named zTab in database iDb.
 **
 ** If an error occurs, *pzErr is set to point to an English language
 ** description of the error and an SQLITE_XXX error code is returned.
@@ -778,8 +778,8 @@ int sqlite3VtabCallCreate(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, const char *zTab, char **pzErr){
   zMod = pTab->u.vtab.azArg[0];
   pMod = (Module*)sqlite3HashFind(&db->aModule, zMod);
 
-  /* If the module has been registered and includes a Create method, 
-  ** invoke it now. If the module has not been registered, return an 
+  /* If the module has been registered and includes a Create method,
+  ** invoke it now. If the module has not been registered, return an
   ** error. Otherwise, do nothing.
   */
   if( pMod==0 || pMod->pModule->xCreate==0 || pMod->pModule->xDestroy==0 ){
@@ -838,7 +838,7 @@ int sqlite3_declare_vtab(sqlite3 *db, const char *zCreateTable){
   initBusy = db->init.busy;
   db->init.busy = 0;
   sParse.nQueryLoop = 1;
-  if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3RunParser(&sParse, zCreateTable) 
+  if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3RunParser(&sParse, zCreateTable)
    && ALWAYS(sParse.pNewTable!=0)
    && ALWAYS(!db->mallocFailed)
    && IsOrdinaryTable(sParse.pNewTable)
@@ -942,7 +942,7 @@ int sqlite3VtabCallDestroy(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, const char *zTab){
 ** called is identified by the second argument, "offset", which is
 ** the offset of the method to call in the sqlite3_module structure.
 **
-** The array is cleared after invoking the callbacks. 
+** The array is cleared after invoking the callbacks.
 */
 static void callFinaliser(sqlite3 *db, int offset){
   int i;
@@ -991,7 +991,7 @@ int sqlite3VtabSync(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** Invoke the xRollback method of all virtual tables in the 
+** Invoke the xRollback method of all virtual tables in the
 ** sqlite3.aVTrans array. Then clear the array itself.
 */
 int sqlite3VtabRollback(sqlite3 *db){
@@ -1000,7 +1000,7 @@ int sqlite3VtabRollback(sqlite3 *db){
 }
 
 /*
-** Invoke the xCommit method of all virtual tables in the 
+** Invoke the xCommit method of all virtual tables in the
 ** sqlite3.aVTrans array. Then clear the array itself.
 */
 int sqlite3VtabCommit(sqlite3 *db){
@@ -1022,7 +1022,7 @@ int sqlite3VtabBegin(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){
 
   /* Special case: If db->aVTrans is NULL and db->nVTrans is greater
   ** than zero, then this function is being called from within a
-  ** virtual module xSync() callback. It is illegal to write to 
+  ** virtual module xSync() callback. It is illegal to write to
   ** virtual module tables in this case, so return SQLITE_LOCKED.
   */
   if( sqlite3VtabInSync(db) ){
@@ -1030,7 +1030,7 @@ int sqlite3VtabBegin(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){
   }
   if( !pVTab ){
     return SQLITE_OK;
-  } 
+  }
   pModule = pVTab->pVtab->pModule;
 
   if( pModule->xBegin ){
@@ -1043,7 +1043,7 @@ int sqlite3VtabBegin(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){
       }
     }
 
-    /* Invoke the xBegin method. If successful, add the vtab to the 
+    /* Invoke the xBegin method. If successful, add the vtab to the
     ** sqlite3.aVTrans[] array. */
     rc = growVTrans(db);
     if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -1067,11 +1067,11 @@ int sqlite3VtabBegin(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){
 ** as the second argument to the virtual table method invoked.
 **
 ** If op is SAVEPOINT_BEGIN, the xSavepoint method is invoked. If it is
-** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, the xRollbackTo method. Otherwise, if op is 
+** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, the xRollbackTo method. Otherwise, if op is
 ** SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, then the xRelease method of each virtual table with
 ** an open transaction is invoked.
 **
-** If any virtual table method returns an error code other than SQLITE_OK, 
+** If any virtual table method returns an error code other than SQLITE_OK,
 ** processing is abandoned and the error returned to the caller of this
 ** function immediately. If all calls to virtual table methods are successful,
 ** SQLITE_OK is returned.
@@ -1123,7 +1123,7 @@ int sqlite3VtabSavepoint(sqlite3 *db, int op, int iSavepoint){
 ** This routine is used to allow virtual table implementations to
 ** overload MATCH, LIKE, GLOB, and REGEXP operators.
 **
-** Return either the pDef argument (indicating no change) or a 
+** Return either the pDef argument (indicating no change) or a
 ** new FuncDef structure that is marked as ephemeral using the
 ** SQLITE_FUNC_EPHEM flag.
 */
@@ -1153,7 +1153,7 @@ FuncDef *sqlite3VtabOverloadFunction(
   assert( pVtab->pModule!=0 );
   pMod = (sqlite3_module *)pVtab->pModule;
   if( pMod->xFindFunction==0 ) return pDef;
- 
+
   /* Call the xFindFunction method on the virtual table implementation
   ** to see if the implementation wants to overload this function.
   **
@@ -1219,13 +1219,13 @@ void sqlite3VtabMakeWritable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
 /*
 ** Check to see if virtual table module pMod can be have an eponymous
 ** virtual table instance.  If it can, create one if one does not already
-** exist. Return non-zero if either the eponymous virtual table instance 
+** exist. Return non-zero if either the eponymous virtual table instance
 ** exists when this routine returns or if an attempt to create it failed
 ** and an error message was left in pParse.
 **
 ** An eponymous virtual table instance is one that is named after its
 ** module, and more importantly, does not require a CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE
-** statement in order to come into existance.  Eponymous virtual table
+** statement in order to come into existence.  Eponymous virtual table
 ** instances always exist.  They cannot be DROP-ed.
 **
 ** Any virtual table module for which xConnect and xCreate are the same
@@ -1273,7 +1273,7 @@ void sqlite3VtabEponymousTableClear(sqlite3 *db, Module *pMod){
   Table *pTab = pMod->pEpoTab;
   if( pTab!=0 ){
     /* Mark the table as Ephemeral prior to deleting it, so that the
-    ** sqlite3DeleteTable() routine will know that it is not stored in 
+    ** sqlite3DeleteTable() routine will know that it is not stored in
     ** the schema. */
     pTab->tabFlags |= TF_Ephemeral;
     sqlite3DeleteTable(db, pTab);
@@ -1289,8 +1289,8 @@ void sqlite3VtabEponymousTableClear(sqlite3 *db, Module *pMod){
 ** within an xUpdate method.
 */
 int sqlite3_vtab_on_conflict(sqlite3 *db){
-  static const unsigned char aMap[] = { 
-    SQLITE_ROLLBACK, SQLITE_ABORT, SQLITE_FAIL, SQLITE_IGNORE, SQLITE_REPLACE 
+  static const unsigned char aMap[] = {
+    SQLITE_ROLLBACK, SQLITE_ABORT, SQLITE_FAIL, SQLITE_IGNORE, SQLITE_REPLACE
   };
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
   if( !sqlite3SafetyCheckOk(db) ) return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
@@ -1302,7 +1302,7 @@ int sqlite3_vtab_on_conflict(sqlite3 *db){
 }
 
 /*
-** Call from within the xCreate() or xConnect() methods to provide 
+** Call from within the xCreate() or xConnect() methods to provide
 ** the SQLite core with additional information about the behavior
 ** of the virtual table being implemented.
 */
diff --git a/src/wal.c b/src/wal.c
index 46d284c1b..5375dcdb9 100644
--- a/src/wal.c
+++ b/src/wal.c
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
 **
 *************************************************************************
 **
-** This file contains the implementation of a write-ahead log (WAL) used in 
+** This file contains the implementation of a write-ahead log (WAL) used in
 ** "journal_mode=WAL" mode.
 **
 ** WRITE-AHEAD LOG (WAL) FILE FORMAT
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@
 ** Each frame records the revised content of a single page from the
 ** database file.  All changes to the database are recorded by writing
 ** frames into the WAL.  Transactions commit when a frame is written that
-** contains a commit marker.  A single WAL can and usually does record 
+** contains a commit marker.  A single WAL can and usually does record
 ** multiple transactions.  Periodically, the content of the WAL is
 ** transferred back into the database file in an operation called a
 ** "checkpoint".
@@ -45,11 +45,11 @@
 **
 ** Immediately following the wal-header are zero or more frames. Each
 ** frame consists of a 24-byte frame-header followed by a <page-size> bytes
-** of page data. The frame-header is six big-endian 32-bit unsigned 
+** of page data. The frame-header is six big-endian 32-bit unsigned
 ** integer values, as follows:
 **
 **     0: Page number.
-**     4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages 
+**     4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages
 **        after the commit. For all other records, zero.
 **     8: Salt-1 (copied from the header)
 **    12: Salt-2 (copied from the header)
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@
 ** the checksum.  The checksum is computed by interpreting the input as
 ** an even number of unsigned 32-bit integers: x[0] through x[N].  The
 ** algorithm used for the checksum is as follows:
-** 
+**
 **   for i from 0 to n-1 step 2:
 **     s0 += x[i] + s1;
 **     s1 += x[i+1] + s0;
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@
 **
 ** Note that s0 and s1 are both weighted checksums using fibonacci weights
 ** in reverse order (the largest fibonacci weight occurs on the first element
-** of the sequence being summed.)  The s1 value spans all 32-bit 
+** of the sequence being summed.)  The s1 value spans all 32-bit
 ** terms of the sequence whereas s0 omits the final term.
 **
 ** On a checkpoint, the WAL is first VFS.xSync-ed, then valid content of the
@@ -116,19 +116,19 @@
 ** multiple concurrent readers to view different versions of the database
 ** content simultaneously.
 **
-** The reader algorithm in the previous paragraphs works correctly, but 
+** The reader algorithm in the previous paragraphs works correctly, but
 ** because frames for page P can appear anywhere within the WAL, the
 ** reader has to scan the entire WAL looking for page P frames.  If the
 ** WAL is large (multiple megabytes is typical) that scan can be slow,
 ** and read performance suffers.  To overcome this problem, a separate
 ** data structure called the wal-index is maintained to expedite the
 ** search for frames of a particular page.
-** 
+**
 ** WAL-INDEX FORMAT
 **
 ** Conceptually, the wal-index is shared memory, though VFS implementations
 ** might choose to implement the wal-index using a mmapped file.  Because
-** the wal-index is shared memory, SQLite does not support journal_mode=WAL 
+** the wal-index is shared memory, SQLite does not support journal_mode=WAL
 ** on a network filesystem.  All users of the database must be able to
 ** share memory.
 **
@@ -146,19 +146,19 @@
 ** byte order of the host computer.
 **
 ** The purpose of the wal-index is to answer this question quickly:  Given
-** a page number P and a maximum frame index M, return the index of the 
+** a page number P and a maximum frame index M, return the index of the
 ** last frame in the wal before frame M for page P in the WAL, or return
 ** NULL if there are no frames for page P in the WAL prior to M.
 **
 ** The wal-index consists of a header region, followed by an one or
-** more index blocks.  
+** more index blocks. 
 **
 ** The wal-index header contains the total number of frames within the WAL
 ** in the mxFrame field.
 **
-** Each index block except for the first contains information on 
+** Each index block except for the first contains information on
 ** HASHTABLE_NPAGE frames. The first index block contains information on
-** HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE frames. The values of HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE and 
+** HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE frames. The values of HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE and
 ** HASHTABLE_NPAGE are selected so that together the wal-index header and
 ** first index block are the same size as all other index blocks in the
 ** wal-index.  The values are:
@@ -167,10 +167,10 @@
 **   HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE  4062
 **
 ** Each index block contains two sections, a page-mapping that contains the
-** database page number associated with each wal frame, and a hash-table 
+** database page number associated with each wal frame, and a hash-table
 ** that allows readers to query an index block for a specific page number.
 ** The page-mapping is an array of HASHTABLE_NPAGE (or HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE
-** for the first index block) 32-bit page numbers. The first entry in the 
+** for the first index block) 32-bit page numbers. The first entry in the
 ** first index-block contains the database page number corresponding to the
 ** first frame in the WAL file. The first entry in the second index block
 ** in the WAL file corresponds to the (HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE+1)th frame in
@@ -191,8 +191,8 @@
 **
 ** The hash table consists of HASHTABLE_NSLOT 16-bit unsigned integers.
 ** HASHTABLE_NSLOT = 2*HASHTABLE_NPAGE, and there is one entry in the
-** hash table for each page number in the mapping section, so the hash 
-** table is never more than half full.  The expected number of collisions 
+** hash table for each page number in the mapping section, so the hash
+** table is never more than half full.  The expected number of collisions
 ** prior to finding a match is 1.  Each entry of the hash table is an
 ** 1-based index of an entry in the mapping section of the same
 ** index block.   Let K be the 1-based index of the largest entry in
@@ -211,12 +211,12 @@
 ** reached) until an unused hash slot is found. Let the first unused slot
 ** be at index iUnused.  (iUnused might be less than iKey if there was
 ** wrap-around.) Because the hash table is never more than half full,
-** the search is guaranteed to eventually hit an unused entry.  Let 
+** the search is guaranteed to eventually hit an unused entry.  Let
 ** iMax be the value between iKey and iUnused, closest to iUnused,
 ** where aHash[iMax]==P.  If there is no iMax entry (if there exists
 ** no hash slot such that aHash[i]==p) then page P is not in the
 ** current index block.  Otherwise the iMax-th mapping entry of the
-** current index block corresponds to the last entry that references 
+** current index block corresponds to the last entry that references
 ** page P.
 **
 ** A hash search begins with the last index block and moves toward the
@@ -241,7 +241,7 @@
 ** if no values greater than K0 had ever been inserted into the hash table
 ** in the first place - which is what reader one wants.  Meanwhile, the
 ** second reader using K1 will see additional values that were inserted
-** later, which is exactly what reader two wants.  
+** later, which is exactly what reader two wants. 
 **
 ** When a rollback occurs, the value of K is decreased. Hash table entries
 ** that correspond to frames greater than the new K value are removed
@@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ int sqlite3WalTrace = 0;
 ** values in the wal-header are correct and (b) the version field is not
 ** WAL_MAX_VERSION, recovery fails and SQLite returns SQLITE_CANTOPEN.
 **
-** Similarly, if a client successfully reads a wal-index header (i.e. the 
+** Similarly, if a client successfully reads a wal-index header (i.e. the
 ** checksum test is successful) and finds that the version field is not
 ** WALINDEX_MAX_VERSION, then no read-transaction is opened and SQLite
 ** returns SQLITE_CANTOPEN.
@@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ int sqlite3WalTrace = 0;
 **
 ** Technically, the various VFSes are free to implement these locks however
 ** they see fit.  However, compatibility is encouraged so that VFSes can
-** interoperate.  The standard implemention used on both unix and windows
+** interoperate.  The standard implementation used on both unix and windows
 ** is for the index number to indicate a byte offset into the
 ** WalCkptInfo.aLock[] array in the wal-index header.  In other words, all
 ** locks are on the shm file.  The WALINDEX_LOCK_OFFSET constant (which
@@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ typedef struct WalCkptInfo WalCkptInfo;
 **
 ** The szPage value can be any power of 2 between 512 and 32768, inclusive.
 ** Or it can be 1 to represent a 65536-byte page.  The latter case was
-** added in 3.7.1 when support for 64K pages was added.  
+** added in 3.7.1 when support for 64K pages was added. 
 */
 struct WalIndexHdr {
   u32 iVersion;                   /* Wal-index version */
@@ -358,9 +358,9 @@ struct WalIndexHdr {
 ** There is one entry in aReadMark[] for each reader lock.  If a reader
 ** holds read-lock K, then the value in aReadMark[K] is no greater than
 ** the mxFrame for that reader.  The value READMARK_NOT_USED (0xffffffff)
-** for any aReadMark[] means that entry is unused.  aReadMark[0] is 
+** for any aReadMark[] means that entry is unused.  aReadMark[0] is
 ** a special case; its value is never used and it exists as a place-holder
-** to avoid having to offset aReadMark[] indexs by one.  Readers holding
+** to avoid having to offset aReadMark[] indexes by one.  Readers holding
 ** WAL_READ_LOCK(0) always ignore the entire WAL and read all content
 ** directly from the database.
 **
@@ -378,7 +378,7 @@ struct WalIndexHdr {
 ** previous sentence is when nBackfill equals mxFrame (meaning that everything
 ** in the WAL has been backfilled into the database) then new readers
 ** will choose aReadMark[0] which has value 0 and hence such reader will
-** get all their all content directly from the database file and ignore 
+** get all their all content directly from the database file and ignore
 ** the WAL.
 **
 ** Writers normally append new frames to the end of the WAL.  However,
@@ -484,14 +484,14 @@ struct WalCkptInfo {
 ** big-endian format in the first 4 bytes of a WAL file.
 **
 ** If the LSB is set, then the checksums for each frame within the WAL
-** file are calculated by treating all data as an array of 32-bit 
-** big-endian words. Otherwise, they are calculated by interpreting 
+** file are calculated by treating all data as an array of 32-bit
+** big-endian words. Otherwise, they are calculated by interpreting
 ** all data as 32-bit little-endian words.
 */
 #define WAL_MAGIC 0x377f0682
 
 /*
-** Return the offset of frame iFrame in the write-ahead log file, 
+** Return the offset of frame iFrame in the write-ahead log file,
 ** assuming a database page size of szPage bytes. The offset returned
 ** is to the start of the write-ahead log frame-header.
 */
@@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ struct Wal {
 ** Candidate values for Wal.exclusiveMode.
 */
 #define WAL_NORMAL_MODE     0
-#define WAL_EXCLUSIVE_MODE  1     
+#define WAL_EXCLUSIVE_MODE  1    
 #define WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE 2
 
 /*
@@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ typedef u16 ht_slot;
 /*
 ** This structure is used to implement an iterator that loops through
 ** all frames in the WAL in database page order. Where two or more frames
-** correspond to the same database page, the iterator visits only the 
+** correspond to the same database page, the iterator visits only the
 ** frame most recently written to the WAL (in other words, the frame with
 ** the largest index).
 **
@@ -598,7 +598,7 @@ struct WalIterator {
 #define HASHTABLE_HASH_1     383                  /* Should be prime */
 #define HASHTABLE_NSLOT      (HASHTABLE_NPAGE*2)  /* Must be a power of 2 */
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** The block of page numbers associated with the first hash-table in a
 ** wal-index is smaller than usual. This is so that there is a complete
 ** hash-table on each aligned 32KB page of the wal-index.
@@ -624,7 +624,7 @@ struct WalIterator {
 **
 **   (1)  rc==SQLITE_OK    and *ppPage==Requested-Wal-Index-Page
 **   (2)  rc>=SQLITE_ERROR and *ppPage==NULL
-**   (3)  rc==SQLITE_OK    and *ppPage==NULL  // only if iPage==0 
+**   (3)  rc==SQLITE_OK    and *ppPage==NULL  // only if iPage==0
 **
 ** Scenario (3) can only occur when pWal->writeLock is false and iPage==0
 */
@@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int walIndexPageRealloc(
     pWal->apWiData[iPage] = (u32 volatile *)sqlite3MallocZero(WALINDEX_PGSZ);
     if( !pWal->apWiData[iPage] ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
   }else{
-    rc = sqlite3OsShmMap(pWal->pDbFd, iPage, WALINDEX_PGSZ, 
+    rc = sqlite3OsShmMap(pWal->pDbFd, iPage, WALINDEX_PGSZ,
         pWal->writeLock, (void volatile **)&pWal->apWiData[iPage]
     );
     assert( pWal->apWiData[iPage]!=0
@@ -717,7 +717,7 @@ static volatile WalIndexHdr *walIndexHdr(Wal *pWal){
 )
 
 /*
-** Generate or extend an 8 byte checksum based on the data in 
+** Generate or extend an 8 byte checksum based on the data in
 ** array aByte[] and the initial values of aIn[0] and aIn[1] (or
 ** initial values of 0 and 0 if aIn==NULL).
 **
@@ -829,11 +829,11 @@ static SQLITE_NO_TSAN void walIndexWriteHdr(Wal *pWal){
 
 /*
 ** This function encodes a single frame header and writes it to a buffer
-** supplied by the caller. A frame-header is made up of a series of 
+** supplied by the caller. A frame-header is made up of a series of
 ** 4-byte big-endian integers, as follows:
 **
 **     0: Page number.
-**     4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages 
+**     4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages
 **        after the commit. For all other records, zero.
 **     8: Salt-1 (copied from the wal-header)
 **    12: Salt-2 (copied from the wal-header)
@@ -884,13 +884,13 @@ static int walDecodeFrame(
   assert( WAL_FRAME_HDRSIZE==24 );
 
   /* A frame is only valid if the salt values in the frame-header
-  ** match the salt values in the wal-header. 
+  ** match the salt values in the wal-header.
   */
   if( memcmp(&pWal->hdr.aSalt, &aFrame[8], 8)!=0 ){
     return 0;
   }
 
-  /* A frame is only valid if the page number is creater than zero.
+  /* A frame is only valid if the page number is greater than zero.
   */
   pgno = sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[0]);
   if( pgno==0 ){
@@ -898,15 +898,15 @@ static int walDecodeFrame(
   }
 
   /* A frame is only valid if a checksum of the WAL header,
-  ** all prior frams, the first 16 bytes of this frame-header, 
-  ** and the frame-data matches the checksum in the last 8 
+  ** all prior frames, the first 16 bytes of this frame-header,
+  ** and the frame-data matches the checksum in the last 8
   ** bytes of this frame-header.
   */
   nativeCksum = (pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum==SQLITE_BIGENDIAN);
   walChecksumBytes(nativeCksum, aFrame, 8, aCksum, aCksum);
   walChecksumBytes(nativeCksum, aData, pWal->szPage, aCksum, aCksum);
-  if( aCksum[0]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[16]) 
-   || aCksum[1]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[20]) 
+  if( aCksum[0]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[16])
+   || aCksum[1]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[20])
   ){
     /* Checksum failed. */
     return 0;
@@ -941,7 +941,7 @@ static const char *walLockName(int lockIdx){
   }
 }
 #endif /*defined(SQLITE_TEST) || defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) */
-    
+   
 
 /*
 ** Set or release locks on the WAL.  Locks are either shared or exclusive.
@@ -1010,15 +1010,15 @@ struct WalHashLoc {
   u32 iZero;                /* One less than the frame number of first indexed*/
 };
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Return pointers to the hash table and page number array stored on
 ** page iHash of the wal-index. The wal-index is broken into 32KB pages
 ** numbered starting from 0.
 **
 ** Set output variable pLoc->aHash to point to the start of the hash table
-** in the wal-index file. Set pLoc->iZero to one less than the frame 
+** in the wal-index file. Set pLoc->iZero to one less than the frame
 ** number of the first frame indexed by this hash table. If a
-** slot in the hash table is set to N, it refers to frame number 
+** slot in the hash table is set to N, it refers to frame number
 ** (pLoc->iZero+N) in the log.
 **
 ** Finally, set pLoc->aPgno so that pLoc->aPgno[0] is the page number of the
@@ -1051,7 +1051,7 @@ static int walHashGet(
 /*
 ** Return the number of the wal-index page that contains the hash-table
 ** and page-number array that contain entries corresponding to WAL frame
-** iFrame. The wal-index is broken up into 32KB pages. Wal-index pages 
+** iFrame. The wal-index is broken up into 32KB pages. Wal-index pages
 ** are numbered starting from 0.
 */
 static int walFramePage(u32 iFrame){
@@ -1102,7 +1102,7 @@ static void walCleanupHash(Wal *pWal){
 
   if( pWal->hdr.mxFrame==0 ) return;
 
-  /* Obtain pointers to the hash-table and page-number array containing 
+  /* Obtain pointers to the hash-table and page-number array containing
   ** the entry that corresponds to frame pWal->hdr.mxFrame. It is guaranteed
   ** that the page said hash-table and array reside on is already mapped.(1)
   */
@@ -1121,9 +1121,9 @@ static void walCleanupHash(Wal *pWal){
       sLoc.aHash[i] = 0;
     }
   }
-  
+ 
   /* Zero the entries in the aPgno array that correspond to frames with
-  ** frame numbers greater than pWal->hdr.mxFrame. 
+  ** frame numbers greater than pWal->hdr.mxFrame.
   */
   nByte = (int)((char *)sLoc.aHash - (char *)&sLoc.aPgno[iLimit]);
   assert( nByte>=0 );
@@ -1167,9 +1167,9 @@ static int walIndexAppend(Wal *pWal, u32 iFrame, u32 iPage){
 
     idx = iFrame - sLoc.iZero;
     assert( idx <= HASHTABLE_NSLOT/2 + 1 );
-    
+   
     /* If this is the first entry to be added to this hash-table, zero the
-    ** entire hash table and aPgno[] array before proceeding. 
+    ** entire hash table and aPgno[] array before proceeding.
     */
     if( idx==1 ){
       int nByte = (int)((u8*)&sLoc.aHash[HASHTABLE_NSLOT] - (u8*)sLoc.aPgno);
@@ -1179,8 +1179,8 @@ static int walIndexAppend(Wal *pWal, u32 iFrame, u32 iPage){
 
     /* If the entry in aPgno[] is already set, then the previous writer
     ** must have exited unexpectedly in the middle of a transaction (after
-    ** writing one or more dirty pages to the WAL to free up memory). 
-    ** Remove the remnants of that writers uncommitted transaction from 
+    ** writing one or more dirty pages to the WAL to free up memory).
+    ** Remove the remnants of that writers uncommitted transaction from
     ** the hash-table before writing any new entries.
     */
     if( sLoc.aPgno[idx-1] ){
@@ -1231,7 +1231,7 @@ static int walIndexAppend(Wal *pWal, u32 iFrame, u32 iPage){
 
 
 /*
-** Recover the wal-index by reading the write-ahead log file. 
+** Recover the wal-index by reading the write-ahead log file.
 **
 ** This routine first tries to establish an exclusive lock on the
 ** wal-index to prevent other threads/processes from doing anything
@@ -1291,16 +1291,16 @@ static int walIndexRecover(Wal *pWal){
     }
 
     /* If the database page size is not a power of two, or is greater than
-    ** SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, conclude that the WAL file contains no valid 
+    ** SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, conclude that the WAL file contains no valid
     ** data. Similarly, if the 'magic' value is invalid, ignore the whole
     ** WAL file.
     */
     magic = sqlite3Get4byte(&aBuf[0]);
     szPage = sqlite3Get4byte(&aBuf[8]);
-    if( (magic&0xFFFFFFFE)!=WAL_MAGIC 
-     || szPage&(szPage-1) 
-     || szPage>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE 
-     || szPage<512 
+    if( (magic&0xFFFFFFFE)!=WAL_MAGIC
+     || szPage&(szPage-1)
+     || szPage>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE
+     || szPage<512
     ){
       goto finished;
     }
@@ -1310,7 +1310,7 @@ static int walIndexRecover(Wal *pWal){
     memcpy(&pWal->hdr.aSalt, &aBuf[16], 8);
 
     /* Verify that the WAL header checksum is correct */
-    walChecksumBytes(pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum==SQLITE_BIGENDIAN, 
+    walChecksumBytes(pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum==SQLITE_BIGENDIAN,
         aBuf, WAL_HDRSIZE-2*4, 0, pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum
     );
     if( pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[0]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aBuf[24])
@@ -1349,7 +1349,7 @@ static int walIndexRecover(Wal *pWal){
       assert( aShare!=0 || rc!=SQLITE_OK );
       if( aShare==0 ) break;
       pWal->apWiData[iPg] = aPrivate;
-      
+     
       for(iFrame=iFirst; iFrame<=iLast; iFrame++){
         i64 iOffset = walFrameOffset(iFrame, szPage);
         u32 pgno;                 /* Database page number for frame */
@@ -1419,8 +1419,8 @@ finished:
     pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[1] = aFrameCksum[1];
     walIndexWriteHdr(pWal);
 
-    /* Reset the checkpoint-header. This is safe because this thread is 
-    ** currently holding locks that exclude all other writers and 
+    /* Reset the checkpoint-header. This is safe because this thread is
+    ** currently holding locks that exclude all other writers and
     ** checkpointers. Then set the values of read-mark slots 1 through N.
     */
     pInfo = walCkptInfo(pWal);
@@ -1476,8 +1476,8 @@ static void walIndexClose(Wal *pWal, int isDelete){
   }
 }
 
-/* 
-** Open a connection to the WAL file zWalName. The database file must 
+/*
+** Open a connection to the WAL file zWalName. The database file must
 ** already be opened on connection pDbFd. The buffer that zWalName points
 ** to must remain valid for the lifetime of the returned Wal* handle.
 **
@@ -1487,7 +1487,7 @@ static void walIndexClose(Wal *pWal, int isDelete){
 ** were to do this just after this client opened one of these files, the
 ** system would be badly broken.
 **
-** If the log file is successfully opened, SQLITE_OK is returned and 
+** If the log file is successfully opened, SQLITE_OK is returned and
 ** *ppWal is set to point to a new WAL handle. If an error occurs,
 ** an SQLite error code is returned and *ppWal is left unmodified.
 */
@@ -1592,7 +1592,7 @@ int sqlite3WalOpen(
 }
 
 /*
-** Change the size to which the WAL file is trucated on each reset.
+** Change the size to which the WAL file is truncated on each reset.
 */
 void sqlite3WalLimit(Wal *pWal, i64 iLimit){
   if( pWal ) pWal->mxWalSize = iLimit;
@@ -1680,7 +1680,7 @@ static void walMerge(
     ht_slot logpage;
     Pgno dbpage;
 
-    if( (iLeft<nLeft) 
+    if( (iLeft<nLeft)
      && (iRight>=nRight || aContent[aLeft[iLeft]]<aContent[aRight[iRight]])
     ){
       logpage = aLeft[iLeft++];
@@ -1778,7 +1778,7 @@ static void walMergesort(
 #endif
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Free an iterator allocated by walIteratorInit().
 */
 static void walIteratorFree(WalIterator *p){
@@ -1786,7 +1786,7 @@ static void walIteratorFree(WalIterator *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** Construct a WalInterator object that can be used to loop over all 
+** Construct a WalInterator object that can be used to loop over all
 ** pages in the WAL following frame nBackfill in ascending order. Frames
 ** nBackfill or earlier may be included - excluding them is an optimization
 ** only. The caller must hold the checkpoint lock.
@@ -1815,7 +1815,7 @@ static int walIteratorInit(Wal *pWal, u32 nBackfill, WalIterator **pp){
 
   /* Allocate space for the WalIterator object. */
   nSegment = walFramePage(iLast) + 1;
-  nByte = sizeof(WalIterator) 
+  nByte = sizeof(WalIterator)
         + (nSegment-1)*sizeof(struct WalSegment)
         + iLast*sizeof(ht_slot);
   p = (WalIterator *)sqlite3_malloc64(nByte);
@@ -1851,7 +1851,7 @@ static int walIteratorInit(Wal *pWal, u32 nBackfill, WalIterator **pp){
       }
       aIndex = &((ht_slot *)&p->aSegment[p->nSegment])[sLoc.iZero];
       sLoc.iZero++;
-  
+ 
       for(j=0; j<nEntry; j++){
         aIndex[j] = (ht_slot)j;
       }
@@ -1875,8 +1875,8 @@ static int walIteratorInit(Wal *pWal, u32 nBackfill, WalIterator **pp){
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SETLK_TIMEOUT
 /*
 ** Attempt to enable blocking locks. Blocking locks are enabled only if (a)
-** they are supported by the VFS, and (b) the database handle is configured 
-** with a busy-timeout. Return 1 if blocking locks are successfully enabled, 
+** they are supported by the VFS, and (b) the database handle is configured
+** with a busy-timeout. Return 1 if blocking locks are successfully enabled,
 ** or 0 otherwise.
 */
 static int walEnableBlocking(Wal *pWal){
@@ -1905,7 +1905,7 @@ static void walDisableBlocking(Wal *pWal){
 /*
 ** If parameter bLock is true, attempt to enable blocking locks, take
 ** the WRITER lock, and then disable blocking locks. If blocking locks
-** cannot be enabled, no attempt to obtain the WRITER lock is made. Return 
+** cannot be enabled, no attempt to obtain the WRITER lock is made. Return
 ** an SQLite error code if an error occurs, or SQLITE_OK otherwise. It is not
 ** an error if blocking locks can not be enabled.
 **
@@ -2002,8 +2002,8 @@ static int walPagesize(Wal *pWal){
 ** client to write to the database (which may be this one) does so by
 ** writing frames into the start of the log file.
 **
-** The value of parameter salt1 is used as the aSalt[1] value in the 
-** new wal-index header. It should be passed a pseudo-random value (i.e. 
+** The value of parameter salt1 is used as the aSalt[1] value in the
+** new wal-index header. It should be passed a pseudo-random value (i.e.
 ** one obtained from sqlite3_randomness()).
 */
 static void walRestartHdr(Wal *pWal, u32 salt1){
@@ -2031,8 +2031,8 @@ static void walRestartHdr(Wal *pWal, u32 salt1){
 ** that a concurrent reader might be using.
 **
 ** All I/O barrier operations (a.k.a fsyncs) occur in this routine when
-** SQLite is in WAL-mode in synchronous=NORMAL.  That means that if 
-** checkpoints are always run by a background thread or background 
+** SQLite is in WAL-mode in synchronous=NORMAL.  That means that if
+** checkpoints are always run by a background thread or background
 ** process, foreground threads will never block on a lengthy fsync call.
 **
 ** Fsync is called on the WAL before writing content out of the WAL and
@@ -2045,7 +2045,7 @@ static void walRestartHdr(Wal *pWal, u32 salt1){
 ** database file.
 **
 ** This routine uses and updates the nBackfill field of the wal-index header.
-** This is the only routine that will increase the value of nBackfill.  
+** This is the only routine that will increase the value of nBackfill. 
 ** (A WAL reset or recovery will revert nBackfill to zero, but not increase
 ** its value.)
 **
@@ -2135,7 +2135,7 @@ static int walCheckpoint(
           if( (nSize+65536+(i64)pWal->hdr.mxFrame*szPage)<nReq ){
             /* If the size of the final database is larger than the current
             ** database plus the amount of data in the wal file, plus the
-            ** maximum size of the pending-byte page (65536 bytes), then 
+            ** maximum size of the pending-byte page (65536 bytes), then
             ** must be corruption somewhere.  */
             rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
           }else{
@@ -2194,8 +2194,8 @@ static int walCheckpoint(
   }
 
   /* If this is an SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_RESTART or TRUNCATE operation, and the
-  ** entire wal file has been copied into the database file, then block 
-  ** until all readers have finished using the wal file. This ensures that 
+  ** entire wal file has been copied into the database file, then block
+  ** until all readers have finished using the wal file. This ensures that
   ** the next process to write to the database restarts the wal file.
   */
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && eMode!=SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE ){
@@ -2219,7 +2219,7 @@ static int walCheckpoint(
           ** writer clients should see that the entire log file has been
           ** checkpointed and behave accordingly. This seems unsafe though,
           ** as it would leave the system in a state where the contents of
-          ** the wal-index header do not match the contents of the 
+          ** the wal-index header do not match the contents of the
           ** file-system. To avoid this, update the wal-index header to
           ** indicate that the log file contains zero valid frames.  */
           walRestartHdr(pWal, salt1);
@@ -2281,7 +2281,7 @@ int sqlite3WalClose(
       if( pWal->exclusiveMode==WAL_NORMAL_MODE ){
         pWal->exclusiveMode = WAL_EXCLUSIVE_MODE;
       }
-      rc = sqlite3WalCheckpoint(pWal, db, 
+      rc = sqlite3WalCheckpoint(pWal, db,
           SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE, 0, 0, sync_flags, nBuf, zBuf, 0, 0
       );
       if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -2291,7 +2291,7 @@ int sqlite3WalClose(
         );
         if( bPersist!=1 ){
           /* Try to delete the WAL file if the checkpoint completed and
-          ** fsyned (rc==SQLITE_OK) and if we are not in persistent-wal
+          ** fsynced (rc==SQLITE_OK) and if we are not in persistent-wal
           ** mode (!bPersist) */
           isDelete = 1;
         }else if( pWal->mxWalSize>=0 ){
@@ -2368,7 +2368,7 @@ static SQLITE_NO_TSAN int walIndexTryHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
 
   if( memcmp(&h1, &h2, sizeof(h1))!=0 ){
     return 1;   /* Dirty read */
-  }  
+  } 
   if( h1.isInit==0 ){
     return 1;   /* Malformed header - probably all zeros */
   }
@@ -2404,7 +2404,7 @@ static SQLITE_NO_TSAN int walIndexTryHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
 ** changed by this operation.  If pWal->hdr is unchanged, set *pChanged
 ** to 0.
 **
-** If the wal-index header is successfully read, return SQLITE_OK. 
+** If the wal-index header is successfully read, return SQLITE_OK.
 ** Otherwise an SQLite error code.
 */
 static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
@@ -2412,7 +2412,7 @@ static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
   int badHdr;                     /* True if a header read failed */
   volatile u32 *page0;            /* Chunk of wal-index containing header */
 
-  /* Ensure that page 0 of the wal-index (the page that contains the 
+  /* Ensure that page 0 of the wal-index (the page that contains the
   ** wal-index header) is mapped. Return early if an error occurs here.
   */
   assert( pChanged );
@@ -2444,7 +2444,7 @@ static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
 
   /* If the first page of the wal-index has been mapped, try to read the
   ** wal-index header immediately, without holding any lock. This usually
-  ** works, but may fail if the wal-index header is corrupt or currently 
+  ** works, but may fail if the wal-index header is corrupt or currently
   ** being modified by another thread or process.
   */
   badHdr = (page0 ? walIndexTryHdr(pWal, pChanged) : 1);
@@ -2519,15 +2519,15 @@ static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
 **
 **    The *-wal file has been read and an appropriate wal-index has been
 **    constructed in pWal->apWiData[] using heap memory instead of shared
-**    memory. 
+**    memory.
 **
 ** If this function returns SQLITE_OK, then the read transaction has
-** been successfully opened. In this case output variable (*pChanged) 
+** been successfully opened. In this case output variable (*pChanged)
 ** is set to true before returning if the caller should discard the
-** contents of the page cache before proceeding. Or, if it returns 
-** WAL_RETRY, then the heap memory wal-index has been discarded and 
-** the caller should retry opening the read transaction from the 
-** beginning (including attempting to map the *-shm file). 
+** contents of the page cache before proceeding. Or, if it returns
+** WAL_RETRY, then the heap memory wal-index has been discarded and
+** the caller should retry opening the read transaction from the
+** beginning (including attempting to map the *-shm file).
 **
 ** If an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned.
 */
@@ -2640,8 +2640,8 @@ static int walBeginShmUnreliable(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
   ** the caller.  */
   aSaveCksum[0] = pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[0];
   aSaveCksum[1] = pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[1];
-  for(iOffset=walFrameOffset(pWal->hdr.mxFrame+1, pWal->szPage); 
-      iOffset+szFrame<=szWal; 
+  for(iOffset=walFrameOffset(pWal->hdr.mxFrame+1, pWal->szPage);
+      iOffset+szFrame<=szWal;
       iOffset+=szFrame
   ){
     u32 pgno;                   /* Database page number for frame */
@@ -2689,10 +2689,10 @@ static int walBeginShmUnreliable(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
 **
 ** The useWal parameter is true to force the use of the WAL and disable
 ** the case where the WAL is bypassed because it has been completely
-** checkpointed.  If useWal==0 then this routine calls walIndexReadHdr() 
-** to make a copy of the wal-index header into pWal->hdr.  If the 
-** wal-index header has changed, *pChanged is set to 1 (as an indication 
-** to the caller that the local page cache is obsolete and needs to be 
+** checkpointed.  If useWal==0 then this routine calls walIndexReadHdr()
+** to make a copy of the wal-index header into pWal->hdr.  If the
+** wal-index header has changed, *pChanged is set to 1 (as an indication
+** to the caller that the local page cache is obsolete and needs to be
 ** flushed.)  When useWal==1, the wal-index header is assumed to already
 ** be loaded and the pChanged parameter is unused.
 **
@@ -2707,7 +2707,7 @@ static int walBeginShmUnreliable(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
 ** bad luck when there is lots of contention for the wal-index, but that
 ** possibility is so small that it can be safely neglected, we believe.
 **
-** On success, this routine obtains a read lock on 
+** On success, this routine obtains a read lock on
 ** WAL_READ_LOCK(pWal->readLock).  The pWal->readLock integer is
 ** in the range 0 <= pWal->readLock < WAL_NREADER.  If pWal->readLock==(-1)
 ** that means the Wal does not hold any read lock.  The reader must not
@@ -2745,16 +2745,16 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){
   **
   ** Circumstances that cause a RETRY should only last for the briefest
   ** instances of time.  No I/O or other system calls are done while the
-  ** locks are held, so the locks should not be held for very long. But 
+  ** locks are held, so the locks should not be held for very long. But
   ** if we are unlucky, another process that is holding a lock might get
-  ** paged out or take a page-fault that is time-consuming to resolve, 
+  ** paged out or take a page-fault that is time-consuming to resolve,
   ** during the few nanoseconds that it is holding the lock.  In that case,
   ** it might take longer than normal for the lock to free.
   **
   ** After 5 RETRYs, we begin calling sqlite3OsSleep().  The first few
   ** calls to sqlite3OsSleep() have a delay of 1 microsecond.  Really this
   ** is more of a scheduler yield than an actual delay.  But on the 10th
-  ** an subsequent retries, the delays start becoming longer and longer, 
+  ** an subsequent retries, the delays start becoming longer and longer,
   ** so that on the 100th (and last) RETRY we delay for 323 milliseconds.
   ** The total delay time before giving up is less than 10 seconds.
   */
@@ -2785,9 +2785,9 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){
       if( pWal->apWiData[0]==0 ){
         /* This branch is taken when the xShmMap() method returns SQLITE_BUSY.
         ** We assume this is a transient condition, so return WAL_RETRY. The
-        ** xShmMap() implementation used by the default unix and win32 VFS 
-        ** modules may return SQLITE_BUSY due to a race condition in the 
-        ** code that determines whether or not the shared-memory region 
+        ** xShmMap() implementation used by the default unix and win32 VFS
+        ** modules may return SQLITE_BUSY due to a race condition in the
+        ** code that determines whether or not the shared-memory region
         ** must be zeroed before the requested page is returned.
         */
         rc = WAL_RETRY;
@@ -2828,7 +2828,7 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){
         ** snapshot. Since holding READ_LOCK(0) prevents a checkpoint from
         ** happening, this is usually correct.
         **
-        ** However, if frames have been appended to the log (or if the log 
+        ** However, if frames have been appended to the log (or if the log
         ** is wrapped and written for that matter) before the READ_LOCK(0)
         ** is obtained, that is not necessarily true. A checkpointer may
         ** have started to backfill the appended frames but crashed before
@@ -2910,9 +2910,9 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){
   ** to read any frames earlier than minFrame from the wal file - they
   ** can be safely read directly from the database file.
   **
-  ** Because a ShmBarrier() call is made between taking the copy of 
+  ** Because a ShmBarrier() call is made between taking the copy of
   ** nBackfill and checking that the wal-header in shared-memory still
-  ** matches the one cached in pWal->hdr, it is guaranteed that the 
+  ** matches the one cached in pWal->hdr, it is guaranteed that the
   ** checkpointer that set nBackfill was not working with a wal-index
   ** header newer than that cached in pWal->hdr. If it were, that could
   ** cause a problem. The checkpointer could omit to checkpoint
@@ -2940,15 +2940,15 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SNAPSHOT
 /*
-** Attempt to reduce the value of the WalCkptInfo.nBackfillAttempted 
+** Attempt to reduce the value of the WalCkptInfo.nBackfillAttempted
 ** variable so that older snapshots can be accessed. To do this, loop
-** through all wal frames from nBackfillAttempted to (nBackfill+1), 
+** through all wal frames from nBackfillAttempted to (nBackfill+1),
 ** comparing their content to the corresponding page with the database
 ** file, if any. Set nBackfillAttempted to the frame number of the
 ** first frame for which the wal file content matches the db file.
 **
-** This is only really safe if the file-system is such that any page 
-** writes made by earlier checkpointers were atomic operations, which 
+** This is only really safe if the file-system is such that any page
+** writes made by earlier checkpointers were atomic operations, which
 ** is not always true. It is also possible that nBackfillAttempted
 ** may be left set to a value larger than expected, if a wal frame
 ** contains content that duplicate of an earlier version of the same
@@ -3045,13 +3045,13 @@ int sqlite3WalBeginReadTransaction(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
       bChanged = 1;
     }
 
-    /* It is possible that there is a checkpointer thread running 
+    /* It is possible that there is a checkpointer thread running
     ** concurrent with this code. If this is the case, it may be that the
-    ** checkpointer has already determined that it will checkpoint 
-    ** snapshot X, where X is later in the wal file than pSnapshot, but 
-    ** has not yet set the pInfo->nBackfillAttempted variable to indicate 
+    ** checkpointer has already determined that it will checkpoint
+    ** snapshot X, where X is later in the wal file than pSnapshot, but
+    ** has not yet set the pInfo->nBackfillAttempted variable to indicate
     ** its intent. To avoid the race condition this leads to, ensure that
-    ** there is no checkpointer process by taking a shared CKPT lock 
+    ** there is no checkpointer process by taking a shared CKPT lock
     ** before checking pInfo->nBackfillAttempted.  */
     (void)walEnableBlocking(pWal);
     rc = walLockShared(pWal, WAL_CKPT_LOCK);
@@ -3112,7 +3112,7 @@ int sqlite3WalBeginReadTransaction(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
       /* A client using a non-current snapshot may not ignore any frames
       ** from the start of the wal file. This is because, for a system
       ** where (minFrame < iSnapshot < maxFrame), a checkpointer may
-      ** have omitted to checkpoint a frame earlier than minFrame in 
+      ** have omitted to checkpoint a frame earlier than minFrame in
       ** the file because there exists a frame after iSnapshot that
       ** is the same database page.  */
       pWal->minFrame = 1;
@@ -3168,8 +3168,8 @@ int sqlite3WalFindFrame(
 
   /* If the "last page" field of the wal-index header snapshot is 0, then
   ** no data will be read from the wal under any circumstances. Return early
-  ** in this case as an optimization.  Likewise, if pWal->readLock==0, 
-  ** then the WAL is ignored by the reader so return early, as if the 
+  ** in this case as an optimization.  Likewise, if pWal->readLock==0,
+  ** then the WAL is ignored by the reader so return early, as if the
   ** WAL were empty.
   */
   if( iLast==0 || (pWal->readLock==0 && pWal->bShmUnreliable==0) ){
@@ -3182,9 +3182,9 @@ int sqlite3WalFindFrame(
   ** hash table (each hash table indexes up to HASHTABLE_NPAGE frames).
   **
   ** This code might run concurrently to the code in walIndexAppend()
-  ** that adds entries to the wal-index (and possibly to this hash 
-  ** table). This means the value just read from the hash 
-  ** slot (aHash[iKey]) may have been added before or after the 
+  ** that adds entries to the wal-index (and possibly to this hash
+  ** table). This means the value just read from the hash
+  ** slot (aHash[iKey]) may have been added before or after the
   ** current read transaction was opened. Values added after the
   ** read transaction was opened may have been written incorrectly -
   ** i.e. these slots may contain garbage data. However, we assume
@@ -3192,13 +3192,13 @@ int sqlite3WalFindFrame(
   ** opened remain unmodified.
   **
   ** For the reasons above, the if(...) condition featured in the inner
-  ** loop of the following block is more stringent that would be required 
+  ** loop of the following block is more stringent that would be required
   ** if we had exclusive access to the hash-table:
   **
-  **   (aPgno[iFrame]==pgno): 
+  **   (aPgno[iFrame]==pgno):
   **     This condition filters out normal hash-table collisions.
   **
-  **   (iFrame<=iLast): 
+  **   (iFrame<=iLast):
   **     This condition filters out entries that were added to the hash
   **     table after the current read-transaction had started.
   */
@@ -3274,7 +3274,7 @@ int sqlite3WalReadFrame(
   return sqlite3OsRead(pWal->pWalFd, pOut, (nOut>sz ? sz : nOut), iOffset);
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Return the size of the database in pages (or zero, if unknown).
 */
 Pgno sqlite3WalDbsize(Wal *pWal){
@@ -3285,7 +3285,7 @@ Pgno sqlite3WalDbsize(Wal *pWal){
 }
 
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** This function starts a write transaction on the WAL.
 **
 ** A read transaction must have already been started by a prior call
@@ -3373,18 +3373,18 @@ int sqlite3WalUndo(Wal *pWal, int (*xUndo)(void *, Pgno), void *pUndoCtx){
   if( ALWAYS(pWal->writeLock) ){
     Pgno iMax = pWal->hdr.mxFrame;
     Pgno iFrame;
-  
+ 
     /* Restore the clients cache of the wal-index header to the state it
-    ** was in before the client began writing to the database. 
+    ** was in before the client began writing to the database.
     */
     memcpy(&pWal->hdr, (void *)walIndexHdr(pWal), sizeof(WalIndexHdr));
 
-    for(iFrame=pWal->hdr.mxFrame+1; 
-        ALWAYS(rc==SQLITE_OK) && iFrame<=iMax; 
+    for(iFrame=pWal->hdr.mxFrame+1;
+        ALWAYS(rc==SQLITE_OK) && iFrame<=iMax;
         iFrame++
     ){
       /* This call cannot fail. Unless the page for which the page number
-      ** is passed as the second argument is (a) in the cache and 
+      ** is passed as the second argument is (a) in the cache and
       ** (b) has an outstanding reference, then xUndo is either a no-op
       ** (if (a) is false) or simply expels the page from the cache (if (b)
       ** is false).
@@ -3402,10 +3402,10 @@ int sqlite3WalUndo(Wal *pWal, int (*xUndo)(void *, Pgno), void *pUndoCtx){
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
-** Argument aWalData must point to an array of WAL_SAVEPOINT_NDATA u32 
-** values. This function populates the array with values required to 
-** "rollback" the write position of the WAL handle back to the current 
+/*
+** Argument aWalData must point to an array of WAL_SAVEPOINT_NDATA u32
+** values. This function populates the array with values required to
+** "rollback" the write position of the WAL handle back to the current
 ** point in the event of a savepoint rollback (via WalSavepointUndo()).
 */
 void sqlite3WalSavepoint(Wal *pWal, u32 *aWalData){
@@ -3416,7 +3416,7 @@ void sqlite3WalSavepoint(Wal *pWal, u32 *aWalData){
   aWalData[3] = pWal->nCkpt;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Move the write position of the WAL back to the point identified by
 ** the values in the aWalData[] array. aWalData must point to an array
 ** of WAL_SAVEPOINT_NDATA u32 values that has been previously populated
@@ -3618,7 +3618,7 @@ static int walRewriteChecksums(Wal *pWal, u32 iLast){
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Write a set of frames to the log. The caller must hold the write-lock
 ** on the log file (obtained using sqlite3WalBeginWriteTransaction()).
 */
@@ -3685,7 +3685,7 @@ int sqlite3WalFrames(
     walChecksumBytes(1, aWalHdr, WAL_HDRSIZE-2*4, 0, aCksum);
     sqlite3Put4byte(&aWalHdr[24], aCksum[0]);
     sqlite3Put4byte(&aWalHdr[28], aCksum[1]);
-    
+   
     pWal->szPage = szPage;
     pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum = SQLITE_BIGENDIAN;
     pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[0] = aCksum[0];
@@ -3729,7 +3729,7 @@ int sqlite3WalFrames(
 
     /* Check if this page has already been written into the wal file by
     ** the current transaction. If so, overwrite the existing frame and
-    ** set Wal.writeLock to WAL_WRITELOCK_RECKSUM - indicating that 
+    ** set Wal.writeLock to WAL_WRITELOCK_RECKSUM - indicating that
     ** checksums must be recomputed when the transaction is committed.  */
     if( iFirst && (p->pDirty || isCommit==0) ){
       u32 iWrite = 0;
@@ -3813,7 +3813,7 @@ int sqlite3WalFrames(
     pWal->truncateOnCommit = 0;
   }
 
-  /* Append data to the wal-index. It is not necessary to lock the 
+  /* Append data to the wal-index. It is not necessary to lock the
   ** wal-index to do this as the SQLITE_SHM_WRITE lock held on the wal-index
   ** guarantees that there are no other writers, and no data that may
   ** be in use by existing readers is being overwritten.
@@ -3852,7 +3852,7 @@ int sqlite3WalFrames(
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** This routine is called to implement sqlite3_wal_checkpoint() and
 ** related interfaces.
 **
@@ -3894,7 +3894,7 @@ int sqlite3WalCheckpoint(
   sqlite3WalDb(pWal, db);
   (void)walEnableBlocking(pWal);
 
-  /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-62028-47212 All calls obtain an exclusive 
+  /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-62028-47212 All calls obtain an exclusive
   ** "checkpoint" lock on the database file.
   ** EVIDENCE-OF: R-10421-19736 If any other process is running a
   ** checkpoint operation at the same time, the lock cannot be obtained and
@@ -3957,7 +3957,7 @@ int sqlite3WalCheckpoint(
   }
 
   if( isChanged ){
-    /* If a new wal-index header was loaded before the checkpoint was 
+    /* If a new wal-index header was loaded before the checkpoint was
     ** performed, then the pager-cache associated with pWal is now
     ** out of date. So zero the cached wal-index header to ensure that
     ** next time the pager opens a snapshot on this database it knows that
@@ -4008,7 +4008,7 @@ int sqlite3WalCallback(Wal *pWal){
 ** operation must occur while the pager is still holding the exclusive
 ** lock on the main database file.
 **
-** If op is one, then change from locking_mode=NORMAL into 
+** If op is one, then change from locking_mode=NORMAL into
 ** locking_mode=EXCLUSIVE.  This means that the pWal->readLock must
 ** be released.  Return 1 if the transition is made and 0 if the
 ** WAL is already in exclusive-locking mode - meaning that this
@@ -4025,8 +4025,8 @@ int sqlite3WalExclusiveMode(Wal *pWal, int op){
   assert( pWal->writeLock==0 );
   assert( pWal->exclusiveMode!=WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE || op==-1 );
 
-  /* pWal->readLock is usually set, but might be -1 if there was a 
-  ** prior error while attempting to acquire are read-lock. This cannot 
+  /* pWal->readLock is usually set, but might be -1 if there was a
+  ** prior error while attempting to acquire are read-lock. This cannot
   ** happen if the connection is actually in exclusive mode (as no xShmLock
   ** locks are taken in this case). Nor should the pager attempt to
   ** upgrade to exclusive-mode following such an error.
@@ -4057,10 +4057,10 @@ int sqlite3WalExclusiveMode(Wal *pWal, int op){
   return rc;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Return true if the argument is non-NULL and the WAL module is using
 ** heap-memory for the wal-index. Otherwise, if the argument is NULL or the
-** WAL module is using shared-memory, return false. 
+** WAL module is using shared-memory, return false.
 */
 int sqlite3WalHeapMemory(Wal *pWal){
   return (pWal && pWal->exclusiveMode==WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE );
@@ -4096,13 +4096,13 @@ int sqlite3WalSnapshotGet(Wal *pWal, sqlite3_snapshot **ppSnapshot){
 /* Try to open on pSnapshot when the next read-transaction starts
 */
 void sqlite3WalSnapshotOpen(
-  Wal *pWal, 
+  Wal *pWal,
   sqlite3_snapshot *pSnapshot
 ){
   pWal->pSnapshot = (WalIndexHdr*)pSnapshot;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Return a +ve value if snapshot p1 is newer than p2. A -ve value if
 ** p1 is older than p2 and zero if p1 and p2 are the same snapshot.
 */
@@ -4122,7 +4122,7 @@ int sqlite3_snapshot_cmp(sqlite3_snapshot *p1, sqlite3_snapshot *p2){
 /*
 ** The caller currently has a read transaction open on the database.
 ** This function takes a SHARED lock on the CHECKPOINTER slot and then
-** checks if the snapshot passed as the second argument is still 
+** checks if the snapshot passed as the second argument is still
 ** available. If so, SQLITE_OK is returned.
 **
 ** If the snapshot is not available, SQLITE_ERROR is returned. Or, if
diff --git a/src/walker.c b/src/walker.c
index f24c052d6..e3c112941 100644
--- a/src/walker.c
+++ b/src/walker.c
@@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ int sqlite3WalkSelect(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
 }
 
 /* Increase the walkerDepth when entering a subquery, and
-** descrease when leaving the subquery.
+** decrease when leaving the subquery.
 */
 int sqlite3WalkerDepthIncrease(Walker *pWalker, Select *pSelect){
   UNUSED_PARAMETER(pSelect);
diff --git a/src/where.c b/src/where.c
index 25405cedf..eb3bd0b21 100644
--- a/src/where.c
+++ b/src/where.c
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ int sqlite3WhereIsOrdered(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
 ** be the continuation for the inner-most loop.
 **
 ** It is always safe for this routine to return the continuation of the
-** inner-most loop, in the sense that a correct answer will result.  
+** inner-most loop, in the sense that a correct answer will result. 
 ** Returning the continuation the second inner loop is an optimization
 ** that might make the code run a little faster, but should not change
 ** the final answer.
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ int sqlite3WhereIsOrdered(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
 int sqlite3WhereOrderByLimitOptLabel(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
   WhereLevel *pInner;
   if( !pWInfo->bOrderedInnerLoop ){
-    /* The ORDER BY LIMIT optimization does not apply.  Jump to the 
+    /* The ORDER BY LIMIT optimization does not apply.  Jump to the
     ** continuation of the inner-most loop. */
     return pWInfo->iContinue;
   }
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ int sqlite3WhereBreakLabel(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
 ** operate directly on the rowids returned by a WHERE clause.  Return
 ** ONEPASS_SINGLE (1) if the statement can operation directly because only
 ** a single row is to be changed.  Return ONEPASS_MULTI (2) if the one-pass
-** optimization can be used on multiple 
+** optimization can be used on multiple
 **
 ** If the ONEPASS optimization is used (if this routine returns true)
 ** then also write the indices of open cursors used by ONEPASS
@@ -478,7 +478,7 @@ static WhereTerm *whereScanInit(
 ** if pIdx!=0 and <op> is one of the WO_xx operator codes specified by
 ** the op parameter.  Return a pointer to the term.  Return 0 if not found.
 **
-** If pIdx!=0 then it must be one of the indexes of table iCur.  
+** If pIdx!=0 then it must be one of the indexes of table iCur. 
 ** Search for terms matching the iColumn-th column of pIdx
 ** rather than the iColumn-th column of table iCur.
 **
@@ -592,17 +592,17 @@ static int isDistinctRedundant(
 ){
   Table *pTab;
   Index *pIdx;
-  int i;                          
+  int i;                         
   int iBase;
 
   /* If there is more than one table or sub-select in the FROM clause of
-  ** this query, then it will not be possible to show that the DISTINCT 
+  ** this query, then it will not be possible to show that the DISTINCT
   ** clause is redundant. */
   if( pTabList->nSrc!=1 ) return 0;
   iBase = pTabList->a[0].iCursor;
   pTab = pTabList->a[0].pTab;
 
-  /* If any of the expressions is an IPK column on table iBase, then return 
+  /* If any of the expressions is an IPK column on table iBase, then return
   ** true. Note: The (p->iTable==iBase) part of this test may be false if the
   ** current SELECT is a correlated sub-query.
   */
@@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ static LogEst estLog(LogEst N){
 ** Convert OP_Column opcodes to OP_Copy in previously generated code.
 **
 ** This routine runs over generated VDBE code and translates OP_Column
-** opcodes into OP_Copy when the table is being accessed via co-routine 
+** opcodes into OP_Copy when the table is being accessed via co-routine
 ** instead of via table lookup.
 **
 ** If the iAutoidxCur is not zero, then any OP_Rowid instructions on
@@ -777,7 +777,7 @@ static int constraintCompatibleWithOuterJoin(
   }
   return 1;
 }
- 
+
 
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOMATIC_INDEX
@@ -822,7 +822,7 @@ static int termCanDriveIndex(
 **
 ** This is only required if sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() is enabled, to
 ** associate an SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NCYCLE and SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NLOOP
-** values with. In order to avoid breaking legacy code and test cases, 
+** values with. In order to avoid breaking legacy code and test cases,
 ** the OP_Explain is not added if this is an EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN command.
 */
 static void explainAutomaticIndex(
@@ -1096,7 +1096,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE void constructAutomaticIndex(
   }
   sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrTop);
   sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regRecord);
-  
+ 
   /* Jump here when skipping the initialization */
   sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrInit);
   sqlite3VdbeScanStatusRange(v, addrExp, addrExp, -1);
@@ -1243,7 +1243,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE void sqlite3ConstructBloomFilter(
 
 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
 /*
-** Allocate and populate an sqlite3_index_info structure. It is the 
+** Allocate and populate an sqlite3_index_info structure. It is the
 ** responsibility of the caller to eventually release the structure
 ** by passing the pointer returned by this function to freeIndexInfo().
 */
@@ -1268,7 +1268,7 @@ static sqlite3_index_info *allocateIndexInfo(
   const Table *pTab;
   int eDistinct = 0;
   ExprList *pOrderBy = pWInfo->pOrderBy;
- 
+
   assert( pSrc!=0 );
   pTab = pSrc->pTab;
   assert( pTab!=0 );
@@ -1302,7 +1302,7 @@ static sqlite3_index_info *allocateIndexInfo(
     pTerm->wtFlags |= TERM_OK;
   }
 
-  /* If the ORDER BY clause contains only columns in the current 
+  /* If the ORDER BY clause contains only columns in the current
   ** virtual table then allocate space for the aOrderBy part of
   ** the sqlite3_index_info structure.
   */
@@ -1411,7 +1411,7 @@ static sqlite3_index_info *allocateIndexInfo(
       assert( pTerm->eOperator&(WO_IN|WO_EQ|WO_LT|WO_LE|WO_GT|WO_GE|WO_AUX) );
 
       if( op & (WO_LT|WO_LE|WO_GT|WO_GE)
-       && sqlite3ExprIsVector(pTerm->pExpr->pRight) 
+       && sqlite3ExprIsVector(pTerm->pExpr->pRight)
       ){
         testcase( j!=i );
         if( j<16 ) mNoOmit |= (1 << j);
@@ -1513,8 +1513,8 @@ static int vtabBestIndex(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, sqlite3_index_info *p){
 ** Return the index of the sample that is the smallest sample that
 ** is greater than or equal to pRec. Note that this index is not an index
 ** into the aSample[] array - it is an index into a virtual set of samples
-** based on the contents of aSample[] and the number of fields in record 
-** pRec. 
+** based on the contents of aSample[] and the number of fields in record
+** pRec.
 */
 static int whereKeyStats(
   Parse *pParse,              /* Database connection */
@@ -1539,7 +1539,7 @@ static int whereKeyStats(
   assert( pRec!=0 );
   assert( pIdx->nSample>0 );
   assert( pRec->nField>0 );
- 
+
 
   /* Do a binary search to find the first sample greater than or equal
   ** to pRec. If pRec contains a single field, the set of samples to search
@@ -1551,38 +1551,38 @@ static int whereKeyStats(
   ** consider prefixes of those samples. For example, if the set of samples
   ** in aSample is:
   **
-  **     aSample[0] = (a, 5) 
-  **     aSample[1] = (a, 10) 
-  **     aSample[2] = (b, 5) 
-  **     aSample[3] = (c, 100) 
+  **     aSample[0] = (a, 5)
+  **     aSample[1] = (a, 10)
+  **     aSample[2] = (b, 5)
+  **     aSample[3] = (c, 100)
   **     aSample[4] = (c, 105)
   **
-  ** Then the search space should ideally be the samples above and the 
-  ** unique prefixes [a], [b] and [c]. But since that is hard to organize, 
+  ** Then the search space should ideally be the samples above and the
+  ** unique prefixes [a], [b] and [c]. But since that is hard to organize,
   ** the code actually searches this set:
   **
-  **     0: (a) 
-  **     1: (a, 5) 
-  **     2: (a, 10) 
-  **     3: (a, 10) 
-  **     4: (b) 
-  **     5: (b, 5) 
-  **     6: (c) 
-  **     7: (c, 100) 
+  **     0: (a)
+  **     1: (a, 5)
+  **     2: (a, 10)
+  **     3: (a, 10)
+  **     4: (b)
+  **     5: (b, 5)
+  **     6: (c)
+  **     7: (c, 100)
   **     8: (c, 105)
   **     9: (c, 105)
   **
   ** For each sample in the aSample[] array, N samples are present in the
-  ** effective sample array. In the above, samples 0 and 1 are based on 
+  ** effective sample array. In the above, samples 0 and 1 are based on
   ** sample aSample[0]. Samples 2 and 3 on aSample[1] etc.
   **
   ** Often, sample i of each block of N effective samples has (i+1) fields.
   ** Except, each sample may be extended to ensure that it is greater than or
-  ** equal to the previous sample in the array. For example, in the above, 
-  ** sample 2 is the first sample of a block of N samples, so at first it 
-  ** appears that it should be 1 field in size. However, that would make it 
-  ** smaller than sample 1, so the binary search would not work. As a result, 
-  ** it is extended to two fields. The duplicates that this creates do not 
+  ** equal to the previous sample in the array. For example, in the above,
+  ** sample 2 is the first sample of a block of N samples, so at first it
+  ** appears that it should be 1 field in size. However, that would make it
+  ** smaller than sample 1, so the binary search would not work. As a result,
+  ** it is extended to two fields. The duplicates that this creates do not
   ** cause any problems.
   */
   if( !HasRowid(pIdx->pTable) && IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ){
@@ -1601,7 +1601,7 @@ static int whereKeyStats(
     iSamp = iTest / nField;
     if( iSamp>0 ){
       /* The proposed effective sample is a prefix of sample aSample[iSamp].
-      ** Specifically, the shortest prefix of at least (1 + iTest%nField) 
+      ** Specifically, the shortest prefix of at least (1 + iTest%nField)
       ** fields that is greater than the previous effective sample.  */
       for(n=(iTest % nField) + 1; n<nField; n++){
         if( aSample[iSamp-1].anLt[n-1]!=aSample[iSamp].anLt[n-1] ) break;
@@ -1636,8 +1636,8 @@ static int whereKeyStats(
       assert( i<pIdx->nSample );
       assert( iCol==nField-1 );
       pRec->nField = nField;
-      assert( 0==sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(aSample[i].n, aSample[i].p, pRec) 
-           || pParse->db->mallocFailed 
+      assert( 0==sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(aSample[i].n, aSample[i].p, pRec)
+           || pParse->db->mallocFailed
       );
     }else{
       /* Unless i==pIdx->nSample, indicating that pRec is larger than
@@ -1645,7 +1645,7 @@ static int whereKeyStats(
       ** (iCol+1) field prefix of sample i.  */
       assert( i<=pIdx->nSample && i>=0 );
       pRec->nField = iCol+1;
-      assert( i==pIdx->nSample 
+      assert( i==pIdx->nSample
            || sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(aSample[i].n, aSample[i].p, pRec)>0
            || pParse->db->mallocFailed );
 
@@ -1673,7 +1673,7 @@ static int whereKeyStats(
     aStat[0] = aSample[i].anLt[iCol];
     aStat[1] = aSample[i].anEq[iCol];
   }else{
-    /* At this point, the (iCol+1) field prefix of aSample[i] is the first 
+    /* At this point, the (iCol+1) field prefix of aSample[i] is the first
     ** sample that is greater than pRec. Or, if i==pIdx->nSample then pRec
     ** is larger than all samples in the array. */
     tRowcnt iUpper, iGap;
@@ -1705,7 +1705,7 @@ static int whereKeyStats(
 
 /*
 ** If it is not NULL, pTerm is a term that provides an upper or lower
-** bound on a range scan. Without considering pTerm, it is estimated 
+** bound on a range scan. Without considering pTerm, it is estimated
 ** that the scan will visit nNew rows. This function returns the number
 ** estimated to be visited after taking pTerm into account.
 **
@@ -1743,18 +1743,18 @@ char sqlite3IndexColumnAffinity(sqlite3 *db, Index *pIdx, int iCol){
 
 
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4
-/* 
+/*
 ** This function is called to estimate the number of rows visited by a
 ** range-scan on a skip-scan index. For example:
 **
 **   CREATE INDEX i1 ON t1(a, b, c);
 **   SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE a=? AND c BETWEEN ? AND ?;
 **
-** Value pLoop->nOut is currently set to the estimated number of rows 
-** visited for scanning (a=? AND b=?). This function reduces that estimate 
+** Value pLoop->nOut is currently set to the estimated number of rows
+** visited for scanning (a=? AND b=?). This function reduces that estimate
 ** by some factor to account for the (c BETWEEN ? AND ?) expression based
-** on the stat4 data for the index. this scan will be peformed multiple 
-** times (once for each (a,b) combination that matches a=?) is dealt with 
+** on the stat4 data for the index. this scan will be performed multiple
+** times (once for each (a,b) combination that matches a=?) is dealt with
 ** by the caller.
 **
 ** It does this by scanning through all stat4 samples, comparing values
@@ -1775,7 +1775,7 @@ char sqlite3IndexColumnAffinity(sqlite3 *db, Index *pIdx, int iCol){
 ** estimate of the number of rows delivered remains unchanged), *pbDone
 ** is left as is.
 **
-** If an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned. Otherwise, 
+** If an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned. Otherwise,
 ** SQLITE_OK.
 */
 static int whereRangeSkipScanEst(
@@ -1793,7 +1793,7 @@ static int whereRangeSkipScanEst(
   int rc = SQLITE_OK;
   u8 aff = sqlite3IndexColumnAffinity(db, p, nEq);
   CollSeq *pColl;
-  
+ 
   sqlite3_value *p1 = 0;          /* Value extracted from pLower */
   sqlite3_value *p2 = 0;          /* Value extracted from pUpper */
   sqlite3_value *pVal = 0;        /* Value extracted from record */
@@ -1825,7 +1825,7 @@ static int whereRangeSkipScanEst(
     nDiff = (nUpper - nLower);
     if( nDiff<=0 ) nDiff = 1;
 
-    /* If there is both an upper and lower bound specified, and the 
+    /* If there is both an upper and lower bound specified, and the
     ** comparisons indicate that they are close together, use the fallback
     ** method (assume that the scan visits 1/64 of the rows) for estimating
     ** the number of rows visited. Otherwise, estimate the number of rows
@@ -1872,7 +1872,7 @@ static int whereRangeSkipScanEst(
 **
 **   ... FROM t1 WHERE a = ? AND b > ? AND b < ? ...
 **
-** then nEq is set to 1 (as the range restricted column, b, is the second 
+** then nEq is set to 1 (as the range restricted column, b, is the second
 ** left-most column of the index). Or, if the query is:
 **
 **   ... FROM t1 WHERE a > ? AND a < ? ...
@@ -1880,13 +1880,13 @@ static int whereRangeSkipScanEst(
 ** then nEq is set to 0.
 **
 ** When this function is called, *pnOut is set to the sqlite3LogEst() of the
-** number of rows that the index scan is expected to visit without 
-** considering the range constraints. If nEq is 0, then *pnOut is the number of 
+** number of rows that the index scan is expected to visit without
+** considering the range constraints. If nEq is 0, then *pnOut is the number of
 ** rows in the index. Assuming no error occurs, *pnOut is adjusted (reduced)
 ** to account for the range constraints pLower and pUpper.
-** 
+**
 ** In the absence of sqlite_stat4 ANALYZE data, or if such data cannot be
-** used, a single range inequality reduces the search space by a factor of 4. 
+** used, a single range inequality reduces the search space by a factor of 4.
 ** and a pair of constraints (x>? AND x<?) reduces the expected number of
 ** rows visited by a factor of 64.
 */
@@ -1914,7 +1914,7 @@ static int whereRangeScanEst(
       int nBtm = pLoop->u.btree.nBtm;
       int nTop = pLoop->u.btree.nTop;
 
-      /* Variable iLower will be set to the estimate of the number of rows in 
+      /* Variable iLower will be set to the estimate of the number of rows in
       ** the index that are less than the lower bound of the range query. The
       ** lower bound being the concatenation of $P and $L, where $P is the
       ** key-prefix formed by the nEq values matched against the nEq left-most
@@ -1923,7 +1923,7 @@ static int whereRangeScanEst(
       ** Or, if pLower is NULL or $L cannot be extracted from it (because it
       ** is not a simple variable or literal value), the lower bound of the
       ** range is $P. Due to a quirk in the way whereKeyStats() works, even
-      ** if $L is available, whereKeyStats() is called for both ($P) and 
+      ** if $L is available, whereKeyStats() is called for both ($P) and
       ** ($P:$L) and the larger of the two returned values is used.
       **
       ** Similarly, iUpper is to be set to the estimate of the number of rows
@@ -1947,7 +1947,7 @@ static int whereRangeScanEst(
         iLower = 0;
         iUpper = p->nRowEst0;
       }else{
-        /* Note: this call could be optimized away - since the same values must 
+        /* Note: this call could be optimized away - since the same values must
         ** have been requested when testing key $P in whereEqualScanEst().  */
         whereKeyStats(pParse, p, pRec, 0, a);
         iLower = a[0];
@@ -2035,7 +2035,7 @@ static int whereRangeScanEst(
   ** reduced by an additional 75%. This means that, by default, an open-ended
   ** range query (e.g. col > ?) is assumed to match 1/4 of the rows in the
   ** index. While a closed range (e.g. col BETWEEN ? AND ?) is estimated to
-  ** match 1/64 of the index. */ 
+  ** match 1/64 of the index. */
   if( pLower && pLower->truthProb>0 && pUpper && pUpper->truthProb>0 ){
     nNew -= 20;
   }
@@ -2062,7 +2062,7 @@ static int whereRangeScanEst(
 ** for that index.  When pExpr==NULL that means the constraint is
 ** "x IS NULL" instead of "x=VALUE".
 **
-** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK. 
+** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK.
 ** If unable to make an estimate, leave *pnRow unchanged and return
 ** non-zero.
 **
@@ -2113,7 +2113,7 @@ static int whereEqualScanEst(
   WHERETRACE(0x20,("equality scan regions %s(%d): %d\n",
                    p->zName, nEq-1, (int)a[1]));
   *pnRow = a[1];
-  
+ 
   return rc;
 }
 #endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4 */
@@ -2126,7 +2126,7 @@ static int whereEqualScanEst(
 **
 **        WHERE x IN (1,2,3,4)
 **
-** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK. 
+** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK.
 ** If unable to make an estimate, leave *pnRow unchanged and return
 ** non-zero.
 **
@@ -2188,7 +2188,7 @@ void sqlite3WhereTermPrint(WhereTerm *pTerm, int iTerm){
       sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zLeft),zLeft,"left={%d:%d}",
                        pTerm->leftCursor, pTerm->u.x.leftColumn);
     }else if( (pTerm->eOperator & WO_OR)!=0 && pTerm->u.pOrInfo!=0 ){
-      sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zLeft),zLeft,"indexable=0x%llx", 
+      sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zLeft),zLeft,"indexable=0x%llx",
                        pTerm->u.pOrInfo->indexable);
     }else{
       sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zLeft),zLeft,"left=%d", pTerm->leftCursor);
@@ -2390,7 +2390,7 @@ static void whereInfoFree(sqlite3 *db, WhereInfo *pWInfo){
 /*
 ** Return TRUE if all of the following are true:
 **
-**   (1)  X has the same or lower cost, or returns the same or fewer rows, 
+**   (1)  X has the same or lower cost, or returns the same or fewer rows,
 **        than Y.
 **   (2)  X uses fewer WHERE clause terms than Y
 **   (3)  Every WHERE clause term used by X is also used by Y
@@ -2399,7 +2399,7 @@ static void whereInfoFree(sqlite3 *db, WhereInfo *pWInfo){
 **
 ** Conditions (2) and (3) mean that X is a "proper subset" of Y.
 ** If X is a proper subset of Y then Y is a better choice and ought
-** to have a lower cost.  This routine returns TRUE when that cost 
+** to have a lower cost.  This routine returns TRUE when that cost
 ** relationship is inverted and needs to be adjusted.  Constraint (4)
 ** was added because if X uses skip-scan less than Y it still might
 ** deserve a lower cost even if it is a proper subset of Y.  Constraint (5)
@@ -2423,7 +2423,7 @@ static int whereLoopCheaperProperSubset(
     }
     if( j<0 ) return 0;  /* X not a subset of Y since term X[i] not used by Y */
   }
-  if( (pX->wsFlags&WHERE_IDX_ONLY)!=0 
+  if( (pX->wsFlags&WHERE_IDX_ONLY)!=0
    && (pY->wsFlags&WHERE_IDX_ONLY)==0 ){
     return 0;  /* Constraint (5) */
   }
@@ -2450,10 +2450,10 @@ static void whereLoopAdjustCost(const WhereLoop *p, WhereLoop *pTemplate){
     if( p->iTab!=pTemplate->iTab ) continue;
     if( (p->wsFlags & WHERE_INDEXED)==0 ) continue;
     if( whereLoopCheaperProperSubset(p, pTemplate) ){
-      /* Adjust pTemplate cost downward so that it is cheaper than its 
+      /* Adjust pTemplate cost downward so that it is cheaper than its
       ** subset p. */
       WHERETRACE(0x80,("subset cost adjustment %d,%d to %d,%d\n",
-                       pTemplate->rRun, pTemplate->nOut, 
+                       pTemplate->rRun, pTemplate->nOut,
                        MIN(p->rRun, pTemplate->rRun),
                        MIN(p->nOut - 1, pTemplate->nOut)));
       pTemplate->rRun = MIN(p->rRun, pTemplate->rRun);
@@ -2462,7 +2462,7 @@ static void whereLoopAdjustCost(const WhereLoop *p, WhereLoop *pTemplate){
       /* Adjust pTemplate cost upward so that it is costlier than p since
       ** pTemplate is a proper subset of p */
       WHERETRACE(0x80,("subset cost adjustment %d,%d to %d,%d\n",
-                       pTemplate->rRun, pTemplate->nOut, 
+                       pTemplate->rRun, pTemplate->nOut,
                        MAX(p->rRun, pTemplate->rRun),
                        MAX(p->nOut + 1, pTemplate->nOut)));
       pTemplate->rRun = MAX(p->rRun, pTemplate->rRun);
@@ -2500,7 +2500,7 @@ static WhereLoop **whereLoopFindLesser(
     /* In the current implementation, the rSetup value is either zero
     ** or the cost of building an automatic index (NlogN) and the NlogN
     ** is the same for compatible WhereLoops. */
-    assert( p->rSetup==0 || pTemplate->rSetup==0 
+    assert( p->rSetup==0 || pTemplate->rSetup==0
                  || p->rSetup==pTemplate->rSetup );
 
     /* whereLoopAddBtree() always generates and inserts the automatic index
@@ -2508,7 +2508,7 @@ static WhereLoop **whereLoopFindLesser(
     ** rSetup. Call this SETUP-INVARIANT */
     assert( p->rSetup>=pTemplate->rSetup );
 
-    /* Any loop using an appliation-defined index (or PRIMARY KEY or
+    /* Any loop using an application-defined index (or PRIMARY KEY or
     ** UNIQUE constraint) with one or more == constraints is better
     ** than an automatic index. Unless it is a skip-scan. */
     if( (p->wsFlags & WHERE_AUTO_INDEX)!=0
@@ -2565,7 +2565,7 @@ static WhereLoop **whereLoopFindLesser(
 **
 ** When accumulating multiple loops (when pBuilder->pOrSet is NULL) we
 ** still might overwrite similar loops with the new template if the
-** new template is better.  Loops may be overwritten if the following 
+** new template is better.  Loops may be overwritten if the following
 ** conditions are met:
 **
 **    (1)  They have the same iTab.
@@ -2623,7 +2623,7 @@ static int whereLoopInsert(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder, WhereLoop *pTemplate){
       sqlite3WhereLoopPrint(pTemplate, pBuilder->pWC);
     }
 #endif
-    return SQLITE_OK;  
+    return SQLITE_OK; 
   }else{
     p = *ppPrev;
   }
@@ -2653,7 +2653,7 @@ static int whereLoopInsert(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder, WhereLoop *pTemplate){
   }else{
     /* We will be overwriting WhereLoop p[].  But before we do, first
     ** go through the rest of the list and delete any other entries besides
-    ** p[] that are also supplated by pTemplate */
+    ** p[] that are also supplanted by pTemplate */
     WhereLoop **ppTail = &p->pNextLoop;
     WhereLoop *pToDel;
     while( *ppTail ){
@@ -2783,7 +2783,7 @@ static void whereLoopOutputAdjust(
   }
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Term pTerm is a vector range comparison operation. The first comparison
 ** in the vector can be optimized using column nEq of the index. This
 ** function returns the total number of vector elements that can be used
@@ -2812,7 +2812,7 @@ static int whereRangeVectorLen(
 
   nCmp = MIN(nCmp, (pIdx->nColumn - nEq));
   for(i=1; i<nCmp; i++){
-    /* Test if comparison i of pTerm is compatible with column (i+nEq) 
+    /* Test if comparison i of pTerm is compatible with column (i+nEq)
     ** of the index. If not, exit the loop.  */
     char aff;                     /* Comparison affinity */
     char idxaff = 0;              /* Indexed columns affinity */
@@ -2832,9 +2832,9 @@ static int whereRangeVectorLen(
     ** the right column of the right source table. And that the sort
     ** order of the index column is the same as the sort order of the
     ** leftmost index column.  */
-    if( pLhs->op!=TK_COLUMN 
-     || pLhs->iTable!=iCur 
-     || pLhs->iColumn!=pIdx->aiColumn[i+nEq] 
+    if( pLhs->op!=TK_COLUMN
+     || pLhs->iTable!=iCur
+     || pLhs->iColumn!=pIdx->aiColumn[i+nEq]
      || pIdx->aSortOrder[i+nEq]!=pIdx->aSortOrder[nEq]
     ){
       break;
@@ -2853,7 +2853,7 @@ static int whereRangeVectorLen(
 }
 
 /*
-** Adjust the cost C by the costMult facter T.  This only occurs if
+** Adjust the cost C by the costMult factor T.  This only occurs if
 ** compiled with -DSQLITE_ENABLE_COSTMULT
 */
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COSTMULT
@@ -2863,15 +2863,15 @@ static int whereRangeVectorLen(
 #endif
 
 /*
-** We have so far matched pBuilder->pNew->u.btree.nEq terms of the 
+** We have so far matched pBuilder->pNew->u.btree.nEq terms of the
 ** index pIndex. Try to match one more.
 **
-** When this function is called, pBuilder->pNew->nOut contains the 
-** number of rows expected to be visited by filtering using the nEq 
-** terms only. If it is modified, this value is restored before this 
+** When this function is called, pBuilder->pNew->nOut contains the
+** number of rows expected to be visited by filtering using the nEq
+** terms only. If it is modified, this value is restored before this
 ** function returns.
 **
-** If pProbe->idxType==SQLITE_IDXTYPE_IPK, that means pIndex is 
+** If pProbe->idxType==SQLITE_IDXTYPE_IPK, that means pIndex is
 ** a fake index used for the INTEGER PRIMARY KEY.
 */
 static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
@@ -2979,9 +2979,9 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
     pNew->prereq = (saved_prereq | pTerm->prereqRight) & ~pNew->maskSelf;
 
     assert( nInMul==0
-        || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_NULL)!=0 
-        || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_IN)!=0 
-        || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_SKIPSCAN)!=0 
+        || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_NULL)!=0
+        || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_IN)!=0
+        || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_SKIPSCAN)!=0
     );
 
     if( eOp & WO_IN ){
@@ -3008,7 +3008,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
         /* Let:
         **   N = the total number of rows in the table
         **   K = the number of entries on the RHS of the IN operator
-        **   M = the number of rows in the table that match terms to the 
+        **   M = the number of rows in the table that match terms to the
         **       to the left in the same index.  If the IN operator is on
         **       the left-most index column, M==N.
         **
@@ -3053,11 +3053,11 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
       int iCol = pProbe->aiColumn[saved_nEq];
       pNew->wsFlags |= WHERE_COLUMN_EQ;
       assert( saved_nEq==pNew->u.btree.nEq );
-      if( iCol==XN_ROWID 
+      if( iCol==XN_ROWID
        || (iCol>=0 && nInMul==0 && saved_nEq==pProbe->nKeyCol-1)
       ){
-        if( iCol==XN_ROWID || pProbe->uniqNotNull 
-         || (pProbe->nKeyCol==1 && pProbe->onError && eOp==WO_EQ) 
+        if( iCol==XN_ROWID || pProbe->uniqNotNull
+         || (pProbe->nKeyCol==1 && pProbe->onError && eOp==WO_EQ)
         ){
           pNew->wsFlags |= WHERE_ONEROW;
         }else{
@@ -3104,7 +3104,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
 
     /* At this point pNew->nOut is set to the number of rows expected to
     ** be visited by the index scan before considering term pTerm, or the
-    ** values of nIn and nInMul. In other words, assuming that all 
+    ** values of nIn and nInMul. In other words, assuming that all
     ** "x IN(...)" terms are replaced with "x = ?". This block updates
     ** the value of pNew->nOut to account for pTerm (but not nIn/nInMul).  */
     assert( pNew->nOut==saved_nOut );
@@ -3125,8 +3125,8 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
       }else{
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4
         tRowcnt nOut = 0;
-        if( nInMul==0 
-         && pProbe->nSample 
+        if( nInMul==0
+         && pProbe->nSample
          && ALWAYS(pNew->u.btree.nEq<=pProbe->nSampleCol)
          && ((eOp & WO_IN)==0 || ExprUseXList(pTerm->pExpr))
          && OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_Stat4)
@@ -3174,8 +3174,8 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
         {
           pNew->nOut += (pProbe->aiRowLogEst[nEq] - pProbe->aiRowLogEst[nEq-1]);
           if( eOp & WO_ISNULL ){
-            /* TUNING: If there is no likelihood() value, assume that a 
-            ** "col IS NULL" expression matches twice as many rows 
+            /* TUNING: If there is no likelihood() value, assume that a
+            ** "col IS NULL" expression matches twice as many rows
             ** as (col=?). */
             pNew->nOut += 10;
           }
@@ -3190,7 +3190,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
     assert( pSrc->pTab->szTabRow>0 );
     if( pProbe->idxType==SQLITE_IDXTYPE_IPK ){
       /* The pProbe->szIdxRow is low for an IPK table since the interior
-      ** pages are small.  Thuse szIdxRow gives a good estimate of seek cost.
+      ** pages are small.  Thus szIdxRow gives a good estimate of seek cost.
       ** But the leaf pages are full-size, so pProbe->szIdxRow would badly
       ** under-estimate the scanning cost. */
       rCostIdx = pNew->nOut + 16;
@@ -3241,12 +3241,12 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
 
   /* Consider using a skip-scan if there are no WHERE clause constraints
   ** available for the left-most terms of the index, and if the average
-  ** number of repeats in the left-most terms is at least 18. 
+  ** number of repeats in the left-most terms is at least 18.
   **
   ** The magic number 18 is selected on the basis that scanning 17 rows
   ** is almost always quicker than an index seek (even though if the index
   ** contains fewer than 2^17 rows we assume otherwise in other parts of
-  ** the code). And, even if it is not, it should not be too much slower. 
+  ** the code). And, even if it is not, it should not be too much slower.
   ** On the other hand, the extra seeks could end up being significantly
   ** more expensive.  */
   assert( 42==sqlite3LogEst(18) );
@@ -3393,7 +3393,7 @@ struct CoveringIndexCheck {
 ** all columns less than 63 (really BMS-1) are covered, so we don't need
 ** to check them.  But we do need to check any column at 63 or greater.
 **
-** If the index does not cover the column, then set pWalk->eCode to 
+** If the index does not cover the column, then set pWalk->eCode to
 ** non-zero and return WRC_Abort to stop the search.
 **
 ** If this node does not disprove that the index can be a covering index,
@@ -3511,18 +3511,18 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE u32 whereIsCoveringIndex(
 **     cost = nRow * K                      // scan of covering index
 **     cost = nRow * (K+3.0)                // scan of non-covering index
 **
-** where K is a value between 1.1 and 3.0 set based on the relative 
+** where K is a value between 1.1 and 3.0 set based on the relative
 ** estimated average size of the index and table records.
 **
 ** For an index scan, where nVisit is the number of index rows visited
-** by the scan, and nSeek is the number of seek operations required on 
+** by the scan, and nSeek is the number of seek operations required on
 ** the index b-tree:
 **
 **     cost = nSeek * (log(nRow) + K * nVisit)          // covering index
 **     cost = nSeek * (log(nRow) + (K+3.0) * nVisit)    // non-covering index
 **
-** Normally, nSeek is 1. nSeek values greater than 1 come about if the 
-** WHERE clause includes "x IN (....)" terms used in place of "x=?". Or when 
+** Normally, nSeek is 1. nSeek values greater than 1 come about if the
+** WHERE clause includes "x IN (....)" terms used in place of "x=?". Or when
 ** implicit "x IN (SELECT x FROM tbl)" terms are added for skip-scans.
 **
 ** The estimated values (nRow, nVisit, nSeek) often contain a large amount
@@ -3535,7 +3535,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE u32 whereIsCoveringIndex(
 */
 static int whereLoopAddBtree(
   WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder, /* WHERE clause information */
-  Bitmask mPrereq             /* Extra prerequesites for using this table */
+  Bitmask mPrereq             /* Extra prerequisites for using this table */
 ){
   WhereInfo *pWInfo;          /* WHERE analysis context */
   Index *pProbe;              /* An index we are evaluating */
@@ -3551,7 +3551,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtree(
   LogEst rSize;               /* number of rows in the table */
   WhereClause *pWC;           /* The parsed WHERE clause */
   Table *pTab;                /* Table being queried */
-  
+ 
   pNew = pBuilder->pNew;
   pWInfo = pBuilder->pWInfo;
   pTabList = pWInfo->pTabList;
@@ -3649,9 +3649,9 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtree(
   }
 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOMATIC_INDEX */
 
-  /* Loop over all indices. If there was an INDEXED BY clause, then only 
+  /* Loop over all indices. If there was an INDEXED BY clause, then only
   ** consider index pProbe.  */
-  for(; rc==SQLITE_OK && pProbe; 
+  for(; rc==SQLITE_OK && pProbe;
       pProbe=(pSrc->fg.isIndexedBy ? 0 : pProbe->pNext), iSortIdx++
   ){
     if( pProbe->pPartIdxWhere!=0
@@ -3788,7 +3788,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtree(
               if( pTerm->eOperator & (WO_EQ|WO_IS) ) nLookup -= 19;
             }
           }
-          
+         
           pNew->rRun = sqlite3LogEstAdd(pNew->rRun, nLookup);
         }
         ApplyCostMultiplier(pNew->rRun, pTab->costMult);
@@ -3831,7 +3831,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtree(
 */
 static int isLimitTerm(WhereTerm *pTerm){
   assert( pTerm->eOperator==WO_AUX || pTerm->eMatchOp==0 );
-  return pTerm->eMatchOp>=SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_LIMIT 
+  return pTerm->eMatchOp>=SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_LIMIT
       && pTerm->eMatchOp<=SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_OFFSET;
 }
 
@@ -3881,13 +3881,13 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtualOne(
   *pbIn = 0;
   pNew->prereq = mPrereq;
 
-  /* Set the usable flag on the subset of constraints identified by 
+  /* Set the usable flag on the subset of constraints identified by
   ** arguments mUsable and mExclude. */
   pIdxCons = *(struct sqlite3_index_constraint**)&pIdxInfo->aConstraint;
   for(i=0; i<nConstraint; i++, pIdxCons++){
     WhereTerm *pTerm = &pWC->a[pIdxCons->iTermOffset];
     pIdxCons->usable = 0;
-    if( (pTerm->prereqRight & mUsable)==pTerm->prereqRight 
+    if( (pTerm->prereqRight & mUsable)==pTerm->prereqRight
      && (pTerm->eOperator & mExclude)==0
      && (pbRetryLimit || !isLimitTerm(pTerm))
     ){
@@ -3962,7 +3962,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtualOne(
           pNew->u.vtab.bOmitOffset = 1;
         }
       }
-      if( SMASKBIT32(i) & pHidden->mHandleIn ){ 
+      if( SMASKBIT32(i) & pHidden->mHandleIn ){
         pNew->u.vtab.mHandleIn |= MASKBIT32(iTerm);
       }else if( (pTerm->eOperator & WO_IN)!=0 ){
         /* A virtual table that is constrained by an IN clause may not
@@ -4042,7 +4042,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtualOne(
 **
 ** Return a pointer to the collation name:
 **
-**    1. If there is an explicit COLLATE operator on the constaint, return it.
+**    1. If there is an explicit COLLATE operator on the constraint, return it.
 **
 **    2. Else, if the column has an alternative collation, return that.
 **
@@ -4072,7 +4072,7 @@ int sqlite3_vtab_in(sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo, int iCons, int bHandle){
   HiddenIndexInfo *pHidden = (HiddenIndexInfo*)&pIdxInfo[1];
   u32 m = SMASKBIT32(iCons);
   if( m & pHidden->mIn ){
-    if( bHandle==0 ){ 
+    if( bHandle==0 ){
       pHidden->mHandleIn &= ~m;
     }else if( bHandle>0 ){
       pHidden->mHandleIn |= m;
@@ -4085,7 +4085,7 @@ int sqlite3_vtab_in(sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo, int iCons, int bHandle){
 /*
 ** This interface is callable from within the xBestIndex callback only.
 **
-** If possible, set (*ppVal) to point to an object containing the value 
+** If possible, set (*ppVal) to point to an object containing the value
 ** on the right-hand-side of constraint iCons.
 */
 int sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value(
@@ -4158,8 +4158,8 @@ void sqlite3VtabUsesAllSchemas(Parse *pParse){
 ** entries that occur before the virtual table in the FROM clause and are
 ** separated from it by at least one LEFT or CROSS JOIN. Similarly, the
 ** mUnusable mask contains all FROM clause entries that occur after the
-** virtual table and are separated from it by at least one LEFT or 
-** CROSS JOIN. 
+** virtual table and are separated from it by at least one LEFT or
+** CROSS JOIN.
 **
 ** For example, if the query were:
 **
@@ -4167,9 +4167,9 @@ void sqlite3VtabUsesAllSchemas(Parse *pParse){
 **
 ** then mPrereq corresponds to (t1, t2) and mUnusable to (t5, t6).
 **
-** All the tables in mPrereq must be scanned before the current virtual 
-** table. So any terms for which all prerequisites are satisfied by 
-** mPrereq may be specified as "usable" in all calls to xBestIndex. 
+** All the tables in mPrereq must be scanned before the current virtual
+** table. So any terms for which all prerequisites are satisfied by
+** mPrereq may be specified as "usable" in all calls to xBestIndex.
 ** Conversely, all tables in mUnusable must be scanned after the current
 ** virtual table, so any terms for which the prerequisites overlap with
 ** mUnusable should always be configured as "not-usable" for xBestIndex.
@@ -4226,7 +4226,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtual(
 
   /* If the call to xBestIndex() with all terms enabled produced a plan
   ** that does not require any source tables (IOW: a plan with mBest==0)
-  ** and does not use an IN(...) operator, then there is no point in making 
+  ** and does not use an IN(...) operator, then there is no point in making
   ** any further calls to xBestIndex() since they will all return the same
   ** result (if the xBestIndex() implementation is sane). */
   if( rc==SQLITE_OK && ((mBest = (pNew->prereq & ~mPrereq))!=0 || bIn) ){
@@ -4249,7 +4249,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtual(
       }
     }
 
-    /* Call xBestIndex once for each distinct value of (prereqRight & ~mPrereq) 
+    /* Call xBestIndex once for each distinct value of (prereqRight & ~mPrereq)
     ** in the set of terms that apply to the current virtual table.  */
     while( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
       int i;
@@ -4306,8 +4306,8 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtual(
 ** btrees or virtual tables.
 */
 static int whereLoopAddOr(
-  WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder, 
-  Bitmask mPrereq, 
+  WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder,
+  Bitmask mPrereq,
   Bitmask mUnusable
 ){
   WhereInfo *pWInfo = pBuilder->pWInfo;
@@ -4320,7 +4320,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddOr(
   WhereLoopBuilder sSubBuild;
   WhereOrSet sSum, sCur;
   SrcItem *pItem;
-  
+ 
   pWC = pBuilder->pWC;
   pWCEnd = pWC->a + pWC->nTerm;
   pNew = pBuilder->pNew;
@@ -4333,14 +4333,14 @@ static int whereLoopAddOr(
 
   for(pTerm=pWC->a; pTerm<pWCEnd && rc==SQLITE_OK; pTerm++){
     if( (pTerm->eOperator & WO_OR)!=0
-     && (pTerm->u.pOrInfo->indexable & pNew->maskSelf)!=0 
+     && (pTerm->u.pOrInfo->indexable & pNew->maskSelf)!=0
     ){
       WhereClause * const pOrWC = &pTerm->u.pOrInfo->wc;
       WhereTerm * const pOrWCEnd = &pOrWC->a[pOrWC->nTerm];
       WhereTerm *pOrTerm;
       int once = 1;
       int i, j;
-    
+   
       sSubBuild = *pBuilder;
       sSubBuild.pOrSet = &sCur;
 
@@ -4361,7 +4361,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddOr(
         }
         sCur.n = 0;
 #ifdef WHERETRACE_ENABLED
-        WHERETRACE(0x400, ("OR-term %d of %p has %d subterms:\n", 
+        WHERETRACE(0x400, ("OR-term %d of %p has %d subterms:\n",
                    (int)(pOrTerm-pOrWC->a), pTerm, sSubBuild.pWC->nTerm));
         if( sqlite3WhereTrace & 0x20000 ){
           sqlite3WhereClausePrint(sSubBuild.pWC);
@@ -4409,8 +4409,8 @@ static int whereLoopAddOr(
         /* TUNING: Currently sSum.a[i].rRun is set to the sum of the costs
         ** of all sub-scans required by the OR-scan. However, due to rounding
         ** errors, it may be that the cost of the OR-scan is equal to its
-        ** most expensive sub-scan. Add the smallest possible penalty 
-        ** (equivalent to multiplying the cost by 1.07) to ensure that 
+        ** most expensive sub-scan. Add the smallest possible penalty
+        ** (equivalent to multiplying the cost by 1.07) to ensure that
         ** this does not happen. Otherwise, for WHERE clauses such as the
         ** following where there is an index on "y":
         **
@@ -4430,7 +4430,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddOr(
 }
 
 /*
-** Add all WhereLoop objects for all tables 
+** Add all WhereLoop objects for all tables
 */
 static int whereLoopAddAll(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){
   WhereInfo *pWInfo = pBuilder->pWInfo;
@@ -4462,7 +4462,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddAll(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){
     pNew->iTab = iTab;
     pBuilder->iPlanLimit += SQLITE_QUERY_PLANNER_LIMIT_INCR;
     pNew->maskSelf = sqlite3WhereGetMask(&pWInfo->sMaskSet, pItem->iCursor);
-    if( bFirstPastRJ 
+    if( bFirstPastRJ
      || (pItem->fg.jointype & (JT_OUTER|JT_CROSS|JT_LTORJ))!=0
     ){
       /* Add prerequisites to prevent reordering of FROM clause terms
@@ -4518,17 +4518,17 @@ static int whereLoopAddAll(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){
 ** Examine a WherePath (with the addition of the extra WhereLoop of the 6th
 ** parameters) to see if it outputs rows in the requested ORDER BY
 ** (or GROUP BY) without requiring a separate sort operation.  Return N:
-** 
+**
 **   N>0:   N terms of the ORDER BY clause are satisfied
 **   N==0:  No terms of the ORDER BY clause are satisfied
-**   N<0:   Unknown yet how many terms of ORDER BY might be satisfied.   
+**   N<0:   Unknown yet how many terms of ORDER BY might be satisfied.  
 **
 ** Note that processing for WHERE_GROUPBY and WHERE_DISTINCTBY is not as
 ** strict.  With GROUP BY and DISTINCT the only requirement is that
 ** equivalent rows appear immediately adjacent to one another.  GROUP BY
 ** and DISTINCT do not require rows to appear in any particular order as long
 ** as equivalent rows are grouped together.  Thus for GROUP BY and DISTINCT
-** the pOrderBy terms can be matched in any order.  With ORDER BY, the 
+** the pOrderBy terms can be matched in any order.  With ORDER BY, the
 ** pOrderBy terms must be matched in strict left-to-right order.
 */
 static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
@@ -4578,7 +4578,7 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
   ** row of the WhereLoop.  Every one-row WhereLoop is automatically
   ** order-distinct.   A WhereLoop that has no columns in the ORDER BY clause
   ** is not order-distinct. To be order-distinct is not quite the same as being
-  ** UNIQUE since a UNIQUE column or index can have multiple rows that 
+  ** UNIQUE since a UNIQUE column or index can have multiple rows that
   ** are NULL and NULL values are equivalent for the purpose of order-distinct.
   ** To be order-distinct, the columns must be UNIQUE and NOT NULL.
   **
@@ -4610,7 +4610,7 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
       pLoop = pLast;
     }
     if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_VIRTUALTABLE ){
-      if( pLoop->u.vtab.isOrdered 
+      if( pLoop->u.vtab.isOrdered
        && ((wctrlFlags&(WHERE_DISTINCTBY|WHERE_SORTBYGROUP))!=WHERE_DISTINCTBY)
       ){
         obSat = obDone;
@@ -4636,10 +4636,10 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
                        ~ready, eqOpMask, 0);
       if( pTerm==0 ) continue;
       if( pTerm->eOperator==WO_IN ){
-        /* IN terms are only valid for sorting in the ORDER BY LIMIT 
+        /* IN terms are only valid for sorting in the ORDER BY LIMIT
         ** optimization, and then only if they are actually used
         ** by the query plan */
-        assert( wctrlFlags & 
+        assert( wctrlFlags &
                (WHERE_ORDERBY_LIMIT|WHERE_ORDERBY_MIN|WHERE_ORDERBY_MAX) );
         for(j=0; j<pLoop->nLTerm && pTerm!=pLoop->aLTerm[j]; j++){}
         if( j>=pLoop->nLTerm ) continue;
@@ -4686,7 +4686,7 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
       for(j=0; j<nColumn; j++){
         u8 bOnce = 1; /* True to run the ORDER BY search loop */
 
-        assert( j>=pLoop->u.btree.nEq 
+        assert( j>=pLoop->u.btree.nEq
             || (pLoop->aLTerm[j]==0)==(j<pLoop->nSkip)
         );
         if( j<pLoop->u.btree.nEq && j>=pLoop->nSkip ){
@@ -4698,7 +4698,7 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
           ** the loop need to be marked as not order-distinct because it can
           ** have repeated NULL rows.
           **
-          ** If the current term is a column of an ((?,?) IN (SELECT...)) 
+          ** If the current term is a column of an ((?,?) IN (SELECT...))
           ** expression for which the SELECT returns more than one column,
           ** check that it is the only column used by this loop. Otherwise,
           ** if it is one of two or more, none of the columns can be
@@ -4711,7 +4711,7 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
               testcase( isOrderDistinct );
               isOrderDistinct = 0;
             }
-            continue;  
+            continue; 
           }else if( ALWAYS(eOp & WO_IN) ){
             /* ALWAYS() justification: eOp is an equality operator due to the
             ** j<pLoop->u.btree.nEq constraint above.  Any equality other
@@ -4753,10 +4753,10 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
           if( iColumn==XN_EXPR ){
             isOrderDistinct = 0;
           }
-        } 
+        }
 
         /* Find the ORDER BY term that corresponds to the j-th column
-        ** of the index and mark that ORDER BY term off 
+        ** of the index and mark that ORDER BY term off
         */
         isMatch = 0;
         for(i=0; bOnce && i<nOrderBy; i++){
@@ -4790,7 +4790,7 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
           /* Make sure the sort order is compatible in an ORDER BY clause.
           ** Sort order is irrelevant for a GROUP BY clause. */
           if( revSet ){
-            if( (rev ^ revIdx) 
+            if( (rev ^ revIdx)
                            != (pOrderBy->a[i].fg.sortFlags&KEYINFO_ORDER_DESC)
             ){
               isMatch = 0;
@@ -4899,7 +4899,7 @@ static const char *wherePathName(WherePath *pPath, int nLoop, WhereLoop *pLast){
 #endif
 
 /*
-** Return the cost of sorting nRow rows, assuming that the keys have 
+** Return the cost of sorting nRow rows, assuming that the keys have
 ** nOrderby columns and that the first nSorted columns are already in
 ** order.
 */
@@ -4909,13 +4909,13 @@ static LogEst whereSortingCost(
   int nOrderBy,      /* Number of ORDER BY clause terms */
   int nSorted        /* Number of initial ORDER BY terms naturally in order */
 ){
-  /* Estimated cost of a full external sort, where N is 
+  /* Estimated cost of a full external sort, where N is
   ** the number of rows to sort is:
   **
   **   cost = (K * N * log(N)).
-  ** 
-  ** Or, if the order-by clause has X terms but only the last Y 
-  ** terms are out of order, then block-sorting will reduce the 
+  **
+  ** Or, if the order-by clause has X terms but only the last Y
+  ** terms are out of order, then block-sorting will reduce the
   ** sorting cost to:
   **
   **   cost = (K * N * log(N)) * (Y/X)
@@ -4923,8 +4923,8 @@ static LogEst whereSortingCost(
   ** The constant K is at least 2.0 but will be larger if there are a
   ** large number of columns to be sorted, as the sorting time is
   ** proportional to the amount of content to be sorted.  The algorithm
-  ** does not currently distinguish between fat columns (BLOBs and TEXTs) 
-  ** and skinny columns (INTs).  It just uses the number of columns as 
+  ** does not currently distinguish between fat columns (BLOBs and TEXTs)
+  ** and skinny columns (INTs).  It just uses the number of columns as
   ** an approximation for the row width.
   **
   ** And extra factor of 2.0 or 3.0 is added to the sorting cost if the sort
@@ -5033,7 +5033,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
     ** space for the aSortCost[] array. Each element of the aSortCost array
     ** is either zero - meaning it has not yet been initialized - or the
     ** cost of sorting nRowEst rows of data where the first X terms of
-    ** the ORDER BY clause are already in order, where X is the array 
+    ** the ORDER BY clause are already in order, where X is the array
     ** index.  */
     aSortCost = (LogEst*)pX;
     memset(aSortCost, 0, sizeof(LogEst) * nOrderBy);
@@ -5054,7 +5054,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
     ** in this case the query may return a maximum of one row, the results
     ** are already in the requested order. Set isOrdered to nOrderBy to
     ** indicate this. Or, if nLoop is greater than zero, set isOrdered to
-    ** -1, indicating that the result set may or may not be ordered, 
+    ** -1, indicating that the result set may or may not be ordered,
     ** depending on the loops added to the current plan.  */
     aFrom[0].isOrdered = nLoop>0 ? -1 : nOrderBy;
   }
@@ -5084,7 +5084,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
           continue;
         }
 
-        /* At this point, pWLoop is a candidate to be the next loop. 
+        /* At this point, pWLoop is a candidate to be the next loop.
         ** Compute its cost */
         rUnsorted = sqlite3LogEstAdd(pWLoop->rSetup,pWLoop->rRun + pFrom->nRow);
         rUnsorted = sqlite3LogEstAdd(rUnsorted, pFrom->rUnsorted);
@@ -5106,14 +5106,14 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
             );
           }
           /* TUNING:  Add a small extra penalty (3) to sorting as an
-          ** extra encouragment to the query planner to select a plan
+          ** extra encouragement to the query planner to select a plan
           ** where the rows emerge in the correct order without any sorting
           ** required. */
           rCost = sqlite3LogEstAdd(rUnsorted, aSortCost[isOrdered]) + 3;
 
           WHERETRACE(0x002,
               ("---- sort cost=%-3d (%d/%d) increases cost %3d to %-3d\n",
-               aSortCost[isOrdered], (nOrderBy-isOrdered), nOrderBy, 
+               aSortCost[isOrdered], (nOrderBy-isOrdered), nOrderBy,
                rUnsorted, rCost));
         }else{
           rCost = rUnsorted;
@@ -5185,11 +5185,11 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
           ** same set of loops and has the same isOrdered setting as the
           ** candidate path.  Check to see if the candidate should replace
           ** pTo or if the candidate should be skipped.
-          ** 
+          **
           ** The conditional is an expanded vector comparison equivalent to:
           **   (pTo->rCost,pTo->nRow,pTo->rUnsorted) <= (rCost,nOut,rUnsorted)
           */
-          if( pTo->rCost<rCost 
+          if( pTo->rCost<rCost
            || (pTo->rCost==rCost
                && (pTo->nRow<nOut
                    || (pTo->nRow==nOut && pTo->rUnsorted<=rUnsorted)
@@ -5240,8 +5240,8 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
           mxCost = aTo[0].rCost;
           mxUnsorted = aTo[0].nRow;
           for(jj=1, pTo=&aTo[1]; jj<mxChoice; jj++, pTo++){
-            if( pTo->rCost>mxCost 
-             || (pTo->rCost==mxCost && pTo->rUnsorted>mxUnsorted) 
+            if( pTo->rCost>mxCost
+             || (pTo->rCost==mxCost && pTo->rUnsorted>mxUnsorted)
             ){
               mxCost = pTo->rCost;
               mxUnsorted = pTo->rUnsorted;
@@ -5280,7 +5280,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
     sqlite3StackFreeNN(pParse->db, pSpace);
     return SQLITE_ERROR;
   }
-  
+ 
   /* Find the lowest cost path.  pFrom will be left pointing to that path */
   pFrom = aFrom;
   for(ii=1; ii<nFrom; ii++){
@@ -5323,7 +5323,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
         pWInfo->nOBSat = 0;
         if( nLoop>0 ){
           u32 wsFlags = pFrom->aLoop[nLoop-1]->wsFlags;
-          if( (wsFlags & WHERE_ONEROW)==0 
+          if( (wsFlags & WHERE_ONEROW)==0
            && (wsFlags&(WHERE_IPK|WHERE_COLUMN_IN))!=(WHERE_IPK|WHERE_COLUMN_IN)
           ){
             Bitmask m = 0;
@@ -5348,7 +5348,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
         && pWInfo->nOBSat==pWInfo->pOrderBy->nExpr && nLoop>0
     ){
       Bitmask revMask = 0;
-      int nOrder = wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(pWInfo, pWInfo->pOrderBy, 
+      int nOrder = wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(pWInfo, pWInfo->pOrderBy,
           pFrom, 0, nLoop-1, pFrom->aLoop[nLoop-1], &revMask
       );
       assert( pWInfo->sorted==0 );
@@ -5375,7 +5375,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
 ** times for the common case.
 **
 ** Return non-zero on success, if this query can be handled by this
-** no-frills query planner.  Return zero if this query needs the 
+** no-frills query planner.  Return zero if this query needs the
 ** general-purpose query planner.
 */
 static int whereShortCut(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){
@@ -5421,8 +5421,8 @@ static int whereShortCut(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){
       int opMask;
       assert( pLoop->aLTermSpace==pLoop->aLTerm );
       if( !IsUniqueIndex(pIdx)
-       || pIdx->pPartIdxWhere!=0 
-       || pIdx->nKeyCol>ArraySize(pLoop->aLTermSpace) 
+       || pIdx->pPartIdxWhere!=0
+       || pIdx->nKeyCol>ArraySize(pLoop->aLTermSpace)
       ) continue;
       opMask = pIdx->uniqNotNull ? (WO_EQ|WO_IS) : WO_EQ;
       for(j=0; j<pIdx->nKeyCol; j++){
@@ -5482,8 +5482,8 @@ static int exprNodeIsDeterministic(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return true if the expression contains no non-deterministic SQL 
-** functions. Do not consider non-deterministic SQL functions that are 
+** Return true if the expression contains no non-deterministic SQL
+** functions. Do not consider non-deterministic SQL functions that are
 ** part of sub-select statements.
 */
 static int exprIsDeterministic(Expr *p){
@@ -5496,7 +5496,7 @@ static int exprIsDeterministic(Expr *p){
   return w.eCode;
 }
 
-  
+ 
 #ifdef WHERETRACE_ENABLED
 /*
 ** Display all WhereLoops in pWInfo
@@ -5524,7 +5524,7 @@ static void showAllWhereLoops(WhereInfo *pWInfo, WhereClause *pWC){
 **   1) The query must not be an aggregate.
 **   2) The table must be the RHS of a LEFT JOIN.
 **   3) Either the query must be DISTINCT, or else the ON or USING clause
-**      must contain a constraint that limits the scan of the table to 
+**      must contain a constraint that limits the scan of the table to
 **      at most a single row.
 **   4) The table must not be referenced by any part of the query apart
 **      from its own USING or ON clause.
@@ -5544,13 +5544,13 @@ static void showAllWhereLoops(WhereInfo *pWInfo, WhereClause *pWC){
 **
 ** then table t2 can be omitted from the following:
 **
-**     SELECT v1, v3 FROM t1 
+**     SELECT v1, v3 FROM t1
 **       LEFT JOIN t2 ON (t1.ipk=t2.ipk)
 **       LEFT JOIN t3 ON (t1.ipk=t3.ipk)
 **
 ** or from:
 **
-**     SELECT DISTINCT v1, v3 FROM t1 
+**     SELECT DISTINCT v1, v3 FROM t1
 **       LEFT JOIN t2
 **       LEFT JOIN t3 ON (t1.ipk=t3.ipk)
 */
@@ -5814,7 +5814,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE void whereAddIndexedExpr(
 **
 ** OUTER JOINS
 **
-** An outer join of tables t1 and t2 is conceptally coded as follows:
+** An outer join of tables t1 and t2 is conceptually coded as follows:
 **
 **    foreach row1 in t1 do
 **      flag = 0
@@ -5836,7 +5836,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE void whereAddIndexedExpr(
 ** if there is one.  If there is no ORDER BY clause or if this routine
 ** is called from an UPDATE or DELETE statement, then pOrderBy is NULL.
 **
-** The iIdxCur parameter is the cursor number of an index.  If 
+** The iIdxCur parameter is the cursor number of an index.  If
 ** WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE is set, iIdxCur is the cursor number of an index
 ** to use for OR clause processing.  The WHERE clause should use this
 ** specific cursor.  If WHERE_ONEPASS_DESIRED is set, then iIdxCur is
@@ -5870,8 +5870,8 @@ WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
   u8 bFordelete = 0;         /* OPFLAG_FORDELETE or zero, as appropriate */
 
   assert( (wctrlFlags & WHERE_ONEPASS_MULTIROW)==0 || (
-        (wctrlFlags & WHERE_ONEPASS_DESIRED)!=0 
-     && (wctrlFlags & WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE)==0 
+        (wctrlFlags & WHERE_ONEPASS_DESIRED)!=0
+     && (wctrlFlags & WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE)==0
   ));
 
   /* Only one of WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE or WHERE_USE_LIMIT */
@@ -5887,7 +5887,7 @@ WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
   if( pOrderBy && pOrderBy->nExpr>=BMS ) pOrderBy = 0;
 
   /* The number of tables in the FROM clause is limited by the number of
-  ** bits in a Bitmask 
+  ** bits in a Bitmask
   */
   testcase( pTabList->nSrc==BMS );
   if( pTabList->nSrc>BMS ){
@@ -5895,7 +5895,7 @@ WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
     return 0;
   }
 
-  /* This function normally generates a nested loop for all tables in 
+  /* This function normally generates a nested loop for all tables in
   ** pTabList.  But if the WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE flag is set, then we should
   ** only generate code for the first table in pTabList and assume that
   ** any cursors associated with subsequent tables are uninitialized.
@@ -5930,7 +5930,7 @@ WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
   pWInfo->iLimit = iAuxArg;
   pWInfo->savedNQueryLoop = pParse->nQueryLoop;
   pWInfo->pSelect = pSelect;
-  memset(&pWInfo->nOBSat, 0, 
+  memset(&pWInfo->nOBSat, 0,
          offsetof(WhereInfo,sWC) - offsetof(WhereInfo,nOBSat));
   memset(&pWInfo->a[0], 0, sizeof(WhereLoop)+nTabList*sizeof(WhereLevel));
   assert( pWInfo->eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF );  /* ONEPASS defaults to OFF */
@@ -5953,7 +5953,7 @@ WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
   */
   sqlite3WhereClauseInit(&pWInfo->sWC, pWInfo);
   sqlite3WhereSplit(&pWInfo->sWC, pWhere, TK_AND);
-    
+   
   /* Special case: No FROM clause
   */
   if( nTabList==0 ){
@@ -5969,7 +5969,7 @@ WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
     **
     ** The N-th term of the FROM clause is assigned a bitmask of 1<<N.
     **
-    ** The rule of the previous sentence ensures thta if X is the bitmask for
+    ** The rule of the previous sentence ensures that if X is the bitmask for
     ** a table T, then X-1 is the bitmask for all other tables to the left of T.
     ** Knowing the bitmask for all tables to the left of a left join is
     ** important.  Ticket #3015.
@@ -5995,7 +5995,7 @@ WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
     }
   #endif
   }
-  
+ 
   /* Analyze all of the subexpressions. */
   sqlite3WhereExprAnalyze(pTabList, &pWInfo->sWC);
   if( pSelect && pSelect->pLimit ){
@@ -6099,7 +6099,7 @@ WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
     ** loops will be built using the revised truthProb values. */
     if( sWLB.bldFlags2 & SQLITE_BLDF2_2NDPASS ){
       WHERETRACE_ALL_LOOPS(pWInfo, sWLB.pWC);
-      WHERETRACE(0xffffffff, 
+      WHERETRACE(0xffffffff,
            ("**** Redo all loop computations due to"
             " TERM_HIGHTRUTH changes ****\n"));
       while( pWInfo->pLoops ){
@@ -6112,7 +6112,7 @@ WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
     }
 #endif
     WHERETRACE_ALL_LOOPS(pWInfo, sWLB.pWC);
-  
+ 
     wherePathSolver(pWInfo, 0);
     if( db->mallocFailed ) goto whereBeginError;
     if( pWInfo->pOrderBy ){
@@ -6160,7 +6160,7 @@ WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
   ** This query optimization is factored out into a separate "no-inline"
   ** procedure to keep the sqlite3WhereBegin() procedure from becoming
   ** too large.  If sqlite3WhereBegin() becomes too large, that prevents
-  ** some C-compiler optimizers from in-lining the 
+  ** some C-compiler optimizers from in-lining the
   ** sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart() procedure, and it is important to
   ** in-line sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart() for performance reasons.
   */
@@ -6269,7 +6269,7 @@ WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
       assert( pTabItem->iCursor==pLevel->iTabCur );
       testcase( pWInfo->eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF && pTab->nCol==BMS-1 );
       testcase( pWInfo->eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF && pTab->nCol==BMS );
-      if( pWInfo->eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF 
+      if( pWInfo->eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF
        && pTab->nCol<BMS
        && (pTab->tabFlags & (TF_HasGenerated|TF_WithoutRowid))==0
        && (pLoop->wsFlags & (WHERE_AUTO_INDEX|WHERE_BLOOMFILTER))==0
@@ -6498,7 +6498,7 @@ static int cursorIsOpen(Vdbe *v, int iCur, int k){
 #endif /* SQLITE_DEBUG */
 
 /*
-** Generate the end of the WHERE loop.  See comments on 
+** Generate the end of the WHERE loop.  See comments on
 ** sqlite3WhereBegin() for additional information.
 */
 void sqlite3WhereEnd(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
@@ -6584,7 +6584,7 @@ void sqlite3WhereEnd(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
         sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, pIn->addrInTop+1);
         if( pIn->eEndLoopOp!=OP_Noop ){
           if( pIn->nPrefix ){
-            int bEarlyOut = 
+            int bEarlyOut =
                 (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_VIRTUALTABLE)==0
                  && (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IN_EARLYOUT)!=0;
             if( pLevel->iLeftJoin ){
@@ -6596,7 +6596,7 @@ void sqlite3WhereEnd(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
               ** return the null-row. So, if the cursor is not open yet,
               ** jump over the OP_Next or OP_Prev instruction about to
               ** be coded.  */
-              sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_IfNotOpen, pIn->iCur, 
+              sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_IfNotOpen, pIn->iCur,
                   sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v) + 2 + bEarlyOut);
               VdbeCoverage(v);
             }
@@ -6605,7 +6605,7 @@ void sqlite3WhereEnd(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
                   sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+2,
                   pIn->iBase, pIn->nPrefix);
               VdbeCoverage(v);
-              /* Retarget the OP_IsNull against the left operand of IN so 
+              /* Retarget the OP_IsNull against the left operand of IN so
               ** it jumps past the OP_IfNoHope.  This is because the
               ** OP_IsNull also bypasses the OP_Affinity opcode that is
               ** required by OP_IfNoHope. */
@@ -6646,8 +6646,8 @@ void sqlite3WhereEnd(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
         assert( pLevel->iTabCur==pTabList->a[pLevel->iFrom].iCursor );
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_NullRow, pLevel->iTabCur);
       }
-      if( (ws & WHERE_INDEXED) 
-       || ((ws & WHERE_MULTI_OR) && pLevel->u.pCoveringIdx) 
+      if( (ws & WHERE_INDEXED)
+       || ((ws & WHERE_MULTI_OR) && pLevel->u.pCoveringIdx)
       ){
         if( ws & WHERE_MULTI_OR ){
           Index *pIx = pLevel->u.pCoveringIdx;
@@ -6702,7 +6702,7 @@ void sqlite3WhereEnd(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
     ** from the index instead of from the table where possible.  In some cases
     ** this optimization prevents the table from ever being read, which can
     ** yield a significant performance boost.
-    ** 
+    **
     ** Calls to the code generator in between sqlite3WhereBegin and
     ** sqlite3WhereEnd will have created code that references the table
     ** directly.  This loop scans all that code looking for opcodes
diff --git a/src/whereInt.h b/src/whereInt.h
index b89a4513e..759e774e3 100644
--- a/src/whereInt.h
+++ b/src/whereInt.h
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ typedef struct WhereRightJoin WhereRightJoin;
 
 /*
 ** This object is a header on a block of allocated memory that will be
-** automatically freed when its WInfo oject is destructed.
+** automatically freed when its WInfo object is destructed.
 */
 struct WhereMemBlock {
   WhereMemBlock *pNext;      /* Next block in the chain */
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ struct WhereLevel {
         int iCur;              /* The VDBE cursor used by this IN operator */
         int addrInTop;         /* Top of the IN loop */
         int iBase;             /* Base register of multi-key index record */
-        int nPrefix;           /* Number of prior entires in the key */
+        int nPrefix;           /* Number of prior entries in the key */
         u8 eEndLoopOp;         /* IN Loop terminator. OP_Next or OP_Prev */
       } *aInLoop;           /* Information about each nested IN operator */
     } in;                 /* Used when pWLoop->wsFlags&WHERE_IN_ABLE */
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ struct WhereLoop {
 
 /* This object holds the prerequisites and the cost of running a
 ** subquery on one operand of an OR operator in the WHERE clause.
-** See WhereOrSet for additional information 
+** See WhereOrSet for additional information
 */
 struct WhereOrCost {
   Bitmask prereq;     /* Prerequisites */
@@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ struct WherePath {
 ** clause subexpression is separated from the others by AND operators,
 ** usually, or sometimes subexpressions separated by OR.
 **
-** All WhereTerms are collected into a single WhereClause structure.  
+** All WhereTerms are collected into a single WhereClause structure. 
 ** The following identity holds:
 **
 **        WhereTerm.pWC->a[WhereTerm.idx] == WhereTerm
@@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ struct WhereClause {
   int nTerm;               /* Number of terms */
   int nSlot;               /* Number of entries in a[] */
   int nBase;               /* Number of terms through the last non-Virtual */
-  WhereTerm *a;            /* Each a[] describes a term of the WHERE cluase */
+  WhereTerm *a;            /* Each a[] describes a term of the WHERE clause */
 #if defined(SQLITE_SMALL_STACK)
   WhereTerm aStatic[1];    /* Initial static space for a[] */
 #else
@@ -377,8 +377,8 @@ struct WhereAndInfo {
 ** An instance of the following structure keeps track of a mapping
 ** between VDBE cursor numbers and bits of the bitmasks in WhereTerm.
 **
-** The VDBE cursor numbers are small integers contained in 
-** SrcItem.iCursor and Expr.iTable fields.  For any given WHERE 
+** The VDBE cursor numbers are small integers contained in
+** SrcItem.iCursor and Expr.iTable fields.  For any given WHERE
 ** clause, the cursor numbers might not begin with 0 and they might
 ** contain gaps in the numbering sequence.  But we want to make maximum
 ** use of the bits in our bitmasks.  This structure provides a mapping
diff --git a/src/wherecode.c b/src/wherecode.c
index 9158c9738..5d611f1f1 100644
--- a/src/wherecode.c
+++ b/src/wherecode.c
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ static void explainAppendTerm(
 }
 
 /*
-** Argument pLevel describes a strategy for scanning table pTab. This 
+** Argument pLevel describes a strategy for scanning table pTab. This
 ** function appends text to pStr that describes the subset of table
 ** rows scanned by the strategy in the form of an SQL expression.
 **
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ static void explainIndexRange(StrAccum *pStr, WhereLoop *pLoop){
 
 /*
 ** This function is a no-op unless currently processing an EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN
-** command, or if stmt_scanstatus_v2() stats are enabled, or if SQLITE_DEBUG 
+** command, or if stmt_scanstatus_v2() stats are enabled, or if SQLITE_DEBUG
 ** was defined at compile-time. If it is not a no-op, a single OP_Explain
 ** opcode is added to the output to describe the table scan strategy in pLevel.
 **
@@ -279,11 +279,11 @@ int sqlite3WhereExplainBloomFilter(
 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS
 /*
 ** Configure the VM passed as the first argument with an
-** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() entry corresponding to the scan used to 
-** implement level pLvl. Argument pSrclist is a pointer to the FROM 
+** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() entry corresponding to the scan used to
+** implement level pLvl. Argument pSrclist is a pointer to the FROM
 ** clause that the scan reads data from.
 **
-** If argument addrExplain is not 0, it must be the address of an 
+** If argument addrExplain is not 0, it must be the address of an
 ** OP_Explain instruction that describes the same loop.
 */
 void sqlite3WhereAddScanStatus(
@@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ void sqlite3WhereAddScanStatus(
 **
 ** Only the parent term was in the original WHERE clause.  The child1
 ** and child2 terms were added by the LIKE optimization.  If both of
-** the virtual child terms are valid, then testing of the parent can be 
+** the virtual child terms are valid, then testing of the parent can be
 ** skipped.
 **
 ** Usually the parent term is marked as TERM_CODED.  But if the parent
@@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ static void disableTerm(WhereLevel *pLevel, WhereTerm *pTerm){
 
 /*
 ** Code an OP_Affinity opcode to apply the column affinity string zAff
-** to the n registers starting at base. 
+** to the n registers starting at base.
 **
 ** As an optimization, SQLITE_AFF_BLOB and SQLITE_AFF_NONE entries (which
 ** are no-ops) at the beginning and end of zAff are ignored.  If all entries
@@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ static void codeApplyAffinity(Parse *pParse, int base, int n, char *zAff){
 }
 
 /*
-** Expression pRight, which is the RHS of a comparison operation, is 
+** Expression pRight, which is the RHS of a comparison operation, is
 ** either a vector of n elements or, if n==1, a scalar expression.
 ** Before the comparison operation, affinity zAff is to be applied
 ** to the pRight values. This function modifies characters within the
@@ -540,12 +540,12 @@ static Expr *removeUnindexableInClauseTerms(
         pNew->pLeft = p;
       }
       if( pSelect->pOrderBy ){
-        /* If the SELECT statement has an ORDER BY clause, zero the 
-        ** iOrderByCol variables. These are set to non-zero when an 
-        ** ORDER BY term exactly matches one of the terms of the 
+        /* If the SELECT statement has an ORDER BY clause, zero the
+        ** iOrderByCol variables. These are set to non-zero when an
+        ** ORDER BY term exactly matches one of the terms of the
         ** result-set. Since the result-set of the SELECT statement may
-        ** have been modified or reordered, these variables are no longer 
-        ** set correctly.  Since setting them is just an optimization, 
+        ** have been modified or reordered, these variables are no longer
+        ** set correctly.  Since setting them is just an optimization,
         ** it's easiest just to zero them here.  */
         ExprList *pOrderBy = pSelect->pOrderBy;
         for(i=0; i<pOrderBy->nExpr; i++){
@@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ static Expr *removeUnindexableInClauseTerms(
 
 /*
 ** Generate code for a single equality term of the WHERE clause.  An equality
-** term can be either X=expr or X IN (...).   pTerm is the term to be 
+** term can be either X=expr or X IN (...).   pTerm is the term to be
 ** coded.
 **
 ** The current value for the constraint is left in a register, the index
@@ -708,7 +708,7 @@ static int codeEqualityTerm(
       testcase( iEq>0
                 && (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IN_SEEKSCAN)==0
                 && (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_VIRTUALTABLE)!=0 );
-      if( iEq>0 
+      if( iEq>0
        && (pLoop->wsFlags & (WHERE_IN_SEEKSCAN|WHERE_VIRTUALTABLE))==0
       ){
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SeekHit, pLevel->iIdxCur, 0, iEq);
@@ -745,7 +745,7 @@ static int codeEqualityTerm(
 ** For example, consider table t1(a,b,c,d,e,f) with index i1(a,b,c).
 ** Suppose the WHERE clause is this:  a==5 AND b IN (1,2,3) AND c>5 AND c<10
 ** The index has as many as three equality constraints, but in this
-** example, the third "c" value is an inequality.  So only two 
+** example, the third "c" value is an inequality.  So only two
 ** constraints are coded.  This routine will generate code to evaluate
 ** a==5 and b IN (1,2,3).  The current values for a and b will be stored
 ** in consecutive registers and the index of the first register is returned.
@@ -837,7 +837,7 @@ static int codeAllEqualityTerms(
       testcase( pIdx->aiColumn[j]==XN_EXPR );
       VdbeComment((v, "%s", explainIndexColumnName(pIdx, j)));
     }
-  }    
+  }   
 
   /* Evaluate the equality constraints
   */
@@ -846,7 +846,7 @@ static int codeAllEqualityTerms(
     int r1;
     pTerm = pLoop->aLTerm[j];
     assert( pTerm!=0 );
-    /* The following testcase is true for indices with redundant columns. 
+    /* The following testcase is true for indices with redundant columns.
     ** Ex: CREATE INDEX i1 ON t1(a,b,a); SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE a=0 AND b=0; */
     testcase( (pTerm->wtFlags & TERM_CODED)!=0 );
     testcase( pTerm->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL );
@@ -862,8 +862,8 @@ static int codeAllEqualityTerms(
     if( pTerm->eOperator & WO_IN ){
       if( pTerm->pExpr->flags & EP_xIsSelect ){
         /* No affinity ever needs to be (or should be) applied to a value
-        ** from the RHS of an "? IN (SELECT ...)" expression. The 
-        ** sqlite3FindInIndex() routine has already ensured that the 
+        ** from the RHS of an "? IN (SELECT ...)" expression. The
+        ** sqlite3FindInIndex() routine has already ensured that the
         ** affinity of the comparison has been applied to the value.  */
         if( zAff ) zAff[j] = SQLITE_AFF_BLOB;
       }
@@ -891,7 +891,7 @@ static int codeAllEqualityTerms(
 #ifndef SQLITE_LIKE_DOESNT_MATCH_BLOBS
 /*
 ** If the most recently coded instruction is a constant range constraint
-** (a string literal) that originated from the LIKE optimization, then 
+** (a string literal) that originated from the LIKE optimization, then
 ** set P3 and P5 on the OP_String opcode so that the string will be cast
 ** to a BLOB at appropriate times.
 **
@@ -916,7 +916,7 @@ static void whereLikeOptimizationStringFixup(
     assert( pLevel->iLikeRepCntr>0 );
     pOp = sqlite3VdbeGetLastOp(v);
     assert( pOp!=0 );
-    assert( pOp->opcode==OP_String8 
+    assert( pOp->opcode==OP_String8
             || pTerm->pWC->pWInfo->pParse->db->mallocFailed );
     pOp->p3 = (int)(pLevel->iLikeRepCntr>>1);  /* Register holding counter */
     pOp->p5 = (u8)(pLevel->iLikeRepCntr&1);    /* ASC or DESC */
@@ -959,7 +959,7 @@ static int codeCursorHintCheckExpr(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
 /*
 ** Test whether or not expression pExpr, which was part of a WHERE clause,
 ** should be included in the cursor-hint for a table that is on the rhs
-** of a LEFT JOIN. Set Walker.eCode to non-zero before returning if the 
+** of a LEFT JOIN. Set Walker.eCode to non-zero before returning if the
 ** expression is not suitable.
 **
 ** An expression is unsuitable if it might evaluate to non NULL even if
@@ -972,9 +972,9 @@ static int codeCursorHintCheckExpr(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
 **   CASE WHEN col THEN 0 ELSE 1 END
 */
 static int codeCursorHintIsOrFunction(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
-  if( pExpr->op==TK_IS 
-   || pExpr->op==TK_ISNULL || pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT 
-   || pExpr->op==TK_NOTNULL || pExpr->op==TK_CASE 
+  if( pExpr->op==TK_IS
+   || pExpr->op==TK_ISNULL || pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT
+   || pExpr->op==TK_NOTNULL || pExpr->op==TK_CASE
   ){
     pWalker->eCode = 1;
   }else if( pExpr->op==TK_FUNCTION ){
@@ -995,13 +995,13 @@ static int codeCursorHintIsOrFunction(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
 ** that accesses any table other than the one identified by
 ** CCurHint.iTabCur, then do the following:
 **
-**   1) allocate a register and code an OP_Column instruction to read 
+**   1) allocate a register and code an OP_Column instruction to read
 **      the specified column into the new register, and
 **
-**   2) transform the expression node to a TK_REGISTER node that reads 
+**   2) transform the expression node to a TK_REGISTER node that reads
 **      from the newly populated register.
 **
-** Also, if the node is a TK_COLUMN that does access the table idenified
+** Also, if the node is a TK_COLUMN that does access the table identified
 ** by pCCurHint.iTabCur, and an index is being used (which we will
 ** know because CCurHint.pIdx!=0) then transform the TK_COLUMN into
 ** an access of the index rather than the original table.
@@ -1070,18 +1070,18 @@ static void codeCursorHint(
     if( pTerm->wtFlags & (TERM_VIRTUAL|TERM_CODED) ) continue;
     if( pTerm->prereqAll & pLevel->notReady ) continue;
 
-    /* Any terms specified as part of the ON(...) clause for any LEFT 
+    /* Any terms specified as part of the ON(...) clause for any LEFT
     ** JOIN for which the current table is not the rhs are omitted
-    ** from the cursor-hint. 
+    ** from the cursor-hint.
     **
-    ** If this table is the rhs of a LEFT JOIN, "IS" or "IS NULL" terms 
+    ** If this table is the rhs of a LEFT JOIN, "IS" or "IS NULL" terms
     ** that were specified as part of the WHERE clause must be excluded.
     ** This is to address the following:
     **
     **   SELECT ... t1 LEFT JOIN t2 ON (t1.a=t2.b) WHERE t2.c IS NULL;
     **
     ** Say there is a single row in t2 that matches (t1.a=t2.b), but its
-    ** t2.c values is not NULL. If the (t2.c IS NULL) constraint is 
+    ** t2.c values is not NULL. If the (t2.c IS NULL) constraint is
     ** pushed down to the cursor, this row is filtered out, causing
     ** SQLite to synthesize a row of NULL values. Which does match the
     ** WHERE clause, and so the query returns a row. Which is incorrect.
@@ -1094,7 +1094,7 @@ static void codeCursorHint(
     */
     if( pTabItem->fg.jointype & JT_LEFT ){
       Expr *pExpr = pTerm->pExpr;
-      if( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_OuterON) 
+      if( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_OuterON)
        || pExpr->w.iJoin!=pTabItem->iCursor
       ){
         sWalker.eCode = 0;
@@ -1132,7 +1132,7 @@ static void codeCursorHint(
   if( pExpr!=0 ){
     sWalker.xExprCallback = codeCursorHintFixExpr;
     if( pParse->nErr==0 ) sqlite3WalkExpr(&sWalker, pExpr);
-    sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_CursorHint, 
+    sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_CursorHint,
                       (sHint.pIdx ? sHint.iIdxCur : sHint.iTabCur), 0, 0,
                       (const char*)pExpr, P4_EXPR);
   }
@@ -1144,7 +1144,7 @@ static void codeCursorHint(
 /*
 ** Cursor iCur is open on an intkey b-tree (a table). Register iRowid contains
 ** a rowid value just read from cursor iIdxCur, open on index pIdx. This
-** function generates code to do a deferred seek of cursor iCur to the 
+** function generates code to do a deferred seek of cursor iCur to the
 ** rowid stored in register iRowid.
 **
 ** Normally, this is just:
@@ -1178,7 +1178,7 @@ static void codeDeferredSeek(
 
   assert( iIdxCur>0 );
   assert( pIdx->aiColumn[pIdx->nColumn-1]==-1 );
-  
+ 
   pWInfo->bDeferredSeek = 1;
   sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_DeferredSeek, iIdxCur, 0, iCur);
   if( (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & (WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE|WHERE_RIGHT_JOIN))
@@ -1515,7 +1515,7 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
           }
         }
 
-        /* Generate code that will continue to the next row if 
+        /* Generate code that will continue to the next row if
         ** the IN constraint is not satisfied
         */
         pCompare = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_EQ, 0, 0);
@@ -1608,7 +1608,7 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
       int r1, rTemp;        /* Registers for holding the start boundary */
       int op;               /* Cursor seek operation */
 
-      /* The following constant maps TK_xx codes into corresponding 
+      /* The following constant maps TK_xx codes into corresponding
       ** seek opcodes.  It depends on a particular ordering of TK_xx
       */
       const u8 aMoveOp[] = {
@@ -1619,7 +1619,7 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
       };
       assert( TK_LE==TK_GT+1 );      /* Make sure the ordering.. */
       assert( TK_LT==TK_GT+2 );      /*  ... of the TK_xx values... */
-      assert( TK_GE==TK_GT+3 );      /*  ... is correcct. */
+      assert( TK_GE==TK_GT+3 );      /*  ... is correct. */
 
       assert( (pStart->wtFlags & TERM_VNULL)==0 );
       testcase( pStart->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL );
@@ -1664,8 +1664,8 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
       testcase( pEnd->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL );
       memEndValue = ++pParse->nMem;
       codeExprOrVector(pParse, pX->pRight, memEndValue, 1);
-      if( 0==sqlite3ExprIsVector(pX->pRight) 
-       && (pX->op==TK_LT || pX->op==TK_GT) 
+      if( 0==sqlite3ExprIsVector(pX->pRight)
+       && (pX->op==TK_LT || pX->op==TK_GT)
       ){
         testOp = bRev ? OP_Le : OP_Ge;
       }else{
@@ -1693,14 +1693,14 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
   }else if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_INDEXED ){
     /* Case 4: A scan using an index.
     **
-    **         The WHERE clause may contain zero or more equality 
+    **         The WHERE clause may contain zero or more equality
     **         terms ("==" or "IN" operators) that refer to the N
     **         left-most columns of the index. It may also contain
     **         inequality constraints (>, <, >= or <=) on the indexed
-    **         column that immediately follows the N equalities. Only 
+    **         column that immediately follows the N equalities. Only
     **         the right-most column can be an inequality - the rest must
-    **         use the "==" and "IN" operators. For example, if the 
-    **         index is on (x,y,z), then the following clauses are all 
+    **         use the "==" and "IN" operators. For example, if the
+    **         index is on (x,y,z), then the following clauses are all
     **         optimized:
     **
     **            x=5
@@ -1721,7 +1721,7 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
     **         This case is also used when there are no WHERE clause
     **         constraints but an index is selected anyway, in order
     **         to force the output order to conform to an ORDER BY.
-    */  
+    */ 
     static const u8 aStartOp[] = {
       0,
       0,
@@ -1763,15 +1763,15 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
     iIdxCur = pLevel->iIdxCur;
     assert( nEq>=pLoop->nSkip );
 
-    /* Find any inequality constraint terms for the start and end 
-    ** of the range. 
+    /* Find any inequality constraint terms for the start and end
+    ** of the range.
     */
     j = nEq;
     if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_BTM_LIMIT ){
       pRangeStart = pLoop->aLTerm[j++];
       nExtraReg = MAX(nExtraReg, pLoop->u.btree.nBtm);
       /* Like optimization range constraints always occur in pairs */
-      assert( (pRangeStart->wtFlags & TERM_LIKEOPT)==0 || 
+      assert( (pRangeStart->wtFlags & TERM_LIKEOPT)==0 ||
               (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_TOP_LIMIT)!=0 );
     }
     if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_TOP_LIMIT ){
@@ -1804,7 +1804,7 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
     assert( pRangeEnd==0 || (pRangeEnd->wtFlags & TERM_VNULL)==0 );
 
     /* If the WHERE_BIGNULL_SORT flag is set, then index column nEq uses
-    ** a non-default "big-null" sort (either ASC NULLS LAST or DESC NULLS 
+    ** a non-default "big-null" sort (either ASC NULLS LAST or DESC NULLS
     ** FIRST). In both cases separate ordered scans are made of those
     ** index entries for which the column is null and for those for which
     ** it is not. For an ASC sort, the non-NULL entries are scanned first.
@@ -1826,7 +1826,7 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
     }
 
     /* If we are doing a reverse order scan on an ascending index, or
-    ** a forward order scan on a descending index, interchange the 
+    ** a forward order scan on a descending index, interchange the
     ** start and end terms (pRangeStart and pRangeEnd).
     */
     if( (nEq<pIdx->nColumn && bRev==(pIdx->aSortOrder[nEq]==SQLITE_SO_ASC)) ){
@@ -1875,7 +1875,7 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
       }
       if( zStartAff ){
         updateRangeAffinityStr(pRight, nBtm, &zStartAff[nEq]);
-      }  
+      } 
       nConstraint += nBtm;
       testcase( pRangeStart->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL );
       if( sqlite3ExprIsVector(pRight)==0 ){
@@ -1923,7 +1923,7 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
         ** of entries in the tree, so basing the number of steps to try
         ** on the estimated number of rows in the btree seems like a good
         ** guess. */
-        addrSeekScan = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_SeekScan, 
+        addrSeekScan = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_SeekScan,
                                          (pIdx->aiRowLogEst[0]+9)/10);
         if( pRangeStart || pRangeEnd ){
           sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, 1);
@@ -1948,7 +1948,7 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
         assert( bStopAtNull==startEq );
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+2);
         op = aStartOp[(nConstraint>1)*4 + 2 + bRev];
-        sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, op, iIdxCur, addrNxt, regBase, 
+        sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, op, iIdxCur, addrNxt, regBase,
                              nConstraint-startEq);
         VdbeCoverage(v);
         VdbeCoverageIf(v, op==OP_Rewind);  testcase( op==OP_Rewind );
@@ -2041,7 +2041,7 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
     }
 
     /* Seek the table cursor, if required */
-    omitTable = (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)!=0 
+    omitTable = (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)!=0
            && (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & (WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE|WHERE_RIGHT_JOIN))==0;
     if( omitTable ){
       /* pIdx is a covering index.  No need to access the main table. */
@@ -2076,7 +2076,7 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
       ** a LEFT JOIN: */
       assert( (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & (WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE|WHERE_RIGHT_JOIN))==0 );
     }
-  
+ 
     /* Record the instruction used to terminate the loop. */
     if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_ONEROW ){
       pLevel->op = OP_Noop;
@@ -2185,15 +2185,15 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
       pOrTab = pWInfo->pTabList;
     }
 
-    /* Initialize the rowset register to contain NULL. An SQL NULL is 
+    /* Initialize the rowset register to contain NULL. An SQL NULL is
     ** equivalent to an empty rowset.  Or, create an ephemeral index
     ** capable of holding primary keys in the case of a WITHOUT ROWID.
     **
-    ** Also initialize regReturn to contain the address of the instruction 
+    ** Also initialize regReturn to contain the address of the instruction
     ** immediately following the OP_Return at the bottom of the loop. This
     ** is required in a few obscure LEFT JOIN cases where control jumps
-    ** over the top of the loop into the body of it. In this case the 
-    ** correct response for the end-of-loop code (the OP_Return) is to 
+    ** over the top of the loop into the body of it. In this case the
+    ** correct response for the end-of-loop code (the OP_Return) is to
     ** fall through to the next instruction, just as an OP_Next does if
     ** called on an uninitialized cursor.
     */
@@ -2218,7 +2218,7 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
     **
     ** Actually, each subexpression is converted to "xN AND w" where w is
     ** the "interesting" terms of z - terms that did not originate in the
-    ** ON or USING clause of a LEFT JOIN, and terms that are usable as 
+    ** ON or USING clause of a LEFT JOIN, and terms that are usable as
     ** indices.
     **
     ** This optimization also only applies if the (x1 OR x2 OR ...) term
@@ -2259,7 +2259,7 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
         /* The extra 0x10000 bit on the opcode is masked off and does not
         ** become part of the new Expr.op.  However, it does make the
         ** op==TK_AND comparison inside of sqlite3PExpr() false, and this
-        ** prevents sqlite3PExpr() from applying the AND short-circuit 
+        ** prevents sqlite3PExpr() from applying the AND short-circuit
         ** optimization, which we do not want here. */
         pAndExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_AND|0x10000, 0, pAndExpr);
       }
@@ -2335,9 +2335,9 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
               **
               ** Use some of the same optimizations as OP_RowSetTest: If iSet
               ** is zero, assume that the key cannot already be present in
-              ** the temp table. And if iSet is -1, assume that there is no 
-              ** need to insert the key into the temp table, as it will never 
-              ** be tested for.  */ 
+              ** the temp table. And if iSet is -1, assume that there is no
+              ** need to insert the key into the temp table, as it will never
+              ** be tested for.  */
               if( iSet ){
                 jmp1 = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, regRowset, 0, r, nPk);
                 VdbeCoverage(v);
@@ -2376,8 +2376,8 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
           ** If the call to sqlite3WhereBegin() above resulted in a scan that
           ** uses an index, and this is either the first OR-connected term
           ** processed or the index is the same as that used by all previous
-          ** terms, set pCov to the candidate covering index. Otherwise, set 
-          ** pCov to NULL to indicate that no candidate covering index will 
+          ** terms, set pCov to the candidate covering index. Otherwise, set
+          ** pCov to NULL to indicate that no candidate covering index will
           ** be available.
           */
           pSubLoop = pSubWInfo->a[0].pWLoop;
@@ -2464,7 +2464,7 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
   **
   ** iLoop==1: Code only expressions that are entirely covered by pIdx.
   ** iLoop==2: Code remaining expressions that do not contain correlated
-  **           sub-queries.  
+  **           sub-queries. 
   ** iLoop==3: Code all remaining expressions.
   **
   ** An effort is made to skip unnecessary iterations of the loop.
@@ -2575,7 +2575,7 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
                     WO_EQ|WO_IN|WO_IS, 0);
     if( pAlt==0 ) continue;
     if( pAlt->wtFlags & (TERM_CODED) ) continue;
-    if( (pAlt->eOperator & WO_IN) 
+    if( (pAlt->eOperator & WO_IN)
      && ExprUseXSelect(pAlt->pExpr)
      && (pAlt->pExpr->x.pSelect->pEList->nExpr>1)
     ){
@@ -2633,7 +2633,7 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
   }
 
   /* For a LEFT OUTER JOIN, generate code that will record the fact that
-  ** at least one row of the right table has matched the left table.  
+  ** at least one row of the right table has matched the left table.
   */
   if( pLevel->iLeftJoin ){
     pLevel->addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
diff --git a/src/whereexpr.c b/src/whereexpr.c
index a979b6f2b..1355e9e85 100644
--- a/src/whereexpr.c
+++ b/src/whereexpr.c
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
 ** the WHERE clause of SQL statements.
 **
 ** This file was originally part of where.c but was split out to improve
-** readability and editabiliity.  This file contains utility routines for
+** readability and editability.  This file contains utility routines for
 ** analyzing Expr objects in the WHERE clause.
 */
 #include "sqliteInt.h"
@@ -263,8 +263,8 @@ static int isLikeOrGlob(
         **    2019-06-14 https://sqlite.org/src/info/ce8717f0885af975
         **    2019-09-03 https://sqlite.org/src/info/0f0428096f17252a
         */
-        if( pLeft->op!=TK_COLUMN 
-         || sqlite3ExprAffinity(pLeft)!=SQLITE_AFF_TEXT 
+        if( pLeft->op!=TK_COLUMN
+         || sqlite3ExprAffinity(pLeft)!=SQLITE_AFF_TEXT
          || (ALWAYS( ExprUseYTab(pLeft) )
              && ALWAYS(pLeft->y.pTab)
              && IsVirtual(pLeft->y.pTab))  /* Might be numeric */
@@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ static int isLikeOrGlob(
           ** function, then no OP_Variable will be added to the program.
           ** This causes problems for the sqlite3_bind_parameter_name()
           ** API. To work around them, add a dummy OP_Variable here.
-          */ 
+          */
           int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
           sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(pParse, pRight, r1);
           sqlite3VdbeChangeP3(v, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)-1, 0);
@@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ static int isLikeOrGlob(
 **      9.  column IS NOT NULL           SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_ISNOTNULL
 **
 ** In every case, "column" must be a column of a virtual table.  If there
-** is a match, set *ppLeft to the "column" expression, set *ppRight to the 
+** is a match, set *ppLeft to the "column" expression, set *ppRight to the
 ** "expr" expression (even though in forms (6) and (8) the column is on the
 ** right and the expression is on the left).  Also set *peOp2 to the
 ** appropriate virtual table operator.  The return value is 1 or 2 if there
@@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ static WhereTerm *whereNthSubterm(WhereTerm *pTerm, int N){
 **
 ** The following is NOT generated:
 **
-**    x<y OR x>y    -->     x!=y     
+**    x<y OR x>y    -->     x!=y    
 */
 static void whereCombineDisjuncts(
   SrcList *pSrc,         /* the FROM clause */
@@ -605,10 +605,10 @@ static void whereCombineDisjuncts(
 **     WhereTerm.u.pOrInfo->indexable  |=  the cursor number for table T
 **
 ** A subterm is "indexable" if it is of the form
-** "T.C <op> <expr>" where C is any column of table T and 
+** "T.C <op> <expr>" where C is any column of table T and
 ** <op> is one of "=", "<", "<=", ">", ">=", "IS NULL", or "IN".
 ** A subterm is also indexable if it is an AND of two or more
-** subsubterms at least one of which is indexable.  Indexable AND 
+** subsubterms at least one of which is indexable.  Indexable AND
 ** subterms have their eOperator set to WO_AND and they have
 ** u.pAndInfo set to a dynamically allocated WhereAndTerm object.
 **
@@ -700,7 +700,7 @@ static void exprAnalyzeOrTerm(
         if( !db->mallocFailed ){
           for(j=0, pAndTerm=pAndWC->a; j<pAndWC->nTerm; j++, pAndTerm++){
             assert( pAndTerm->pExpr );
-            if( allowedOp(pAndTerm->pExpr->op) 
+            if( allowedOp(pAndTerm->pExpr->op)
              || pAndTerm->eOperator==WO_AUX
             ){
               b |= sqlite3WhereGetMask(&pWInfo->sMaskSet, pAndTerm->leftCursor);
@@ -802,7 +802,7 @@ static void exprAnalyzeOrTerm(
                                             pOrTerm->leftCursor))==0 ){
           /* This term must be of the form t1.a==t2.b where t2 is in the
           ** chngToIN set but t1 is not.  This term will be either preceded
-          ** or follwed by an inverted copy (t2.b==t1.a).  Skip this term 
+          ** or followed by an inverted copy (t2.b==t1.a).  Skip this term
           ** and use its inversion. */
           testcase( pOrTerm->wtFlags & TERM_COPIED );
           testcase( pOrTerm->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL );
@@ -833,7 +833,7 @@ static void exprAnalyzeOrTerm(
         assert( (pOrTerm->eOperator & (WO_OR|WO_AND))==0 );
         if( pOrTerm->leftCursor!=iCursor ){
           pOrTerm->wtFlags &= ~TERM_OK;
-        }else if( pOrTerm->u.x.leftColumn!=iColumn || (iColumn==XN_EXPR 
+        }else if( pOrTerm->u.x.leftColumn!=iColumn || (iColumn==XN_EXPR
                && sqlite3ExprCompare(pParse, pOrTerm->pExpr->pLeft, pLeft, -1)
         )){
           okToChngToIN = 0;
@@ -855,7 +855,7 @@ static void exprAnalyzeOrTerm(
     }
 
     /* At this point, okToChngToIN is true if original pTerm satisfies
-    ** case 1.  In that case, construct a new virtual term that is 
+    ** case 1.  In that case, construct a new virtual term that is
     ** pTerm converted into an IN operator.
     */
     if( okToChngToIN ){
@@ -988,7 +988,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int exprMightBeIndexed2(
       for(i=0; i<pIdx->nKeyCol; i++){
         if( pIdx->aiColumn[i]!=XN_EXPR ) continue;
         assert( pIdx->bHasExpr );
-        if( sqlite3ExprCompareSkip(pExpr,pIdx->aColExpr->a[i].pExpr,iCur)==0 
+        if( sqlite3ExprCompareSkip(pExpr,pIdx->aColExpr->a[i].pExpr,iCur)==0
           && pExpr->op!=TK_STRING
         ){
           aiCurCol[0] = iCur;
@@ -1008,8 +1008,8 @@ static int exprMightBeIndexed(
 ){
   int i;
 
-  /* If this expression is a vector to the left or right of a 
-  ** inequality constraint (>, <, >= or <=), perform the processing 
+  /* If this expression is a vector to the left or right of a
+  ** inequality constraint (>, <, >= or <=), perform the processing
   ** on the first element of the vector.  */
   assert( TK_GT+1==TK_LE && TK_GT+2==TK_LT && TK_GT+3==TK_GE );
   assert( TK_IS<TK_GE && TK_ISNULL<TK_GE && TK_IN<TK_GE );
@@ -1064,8 +1064,8 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
   WhereTerm *pTerm;                /* The term to be analyzed */
   WhereMaskSet *pMaskSet;          /* Set of table index masks */
   Expr *pExpr;                     /* The expression to be analyzed */
-  Bitmask prereqLeft;              /* Prerequesites of the pExpr->pLeft */
-  Bitmask prereqAll;               /* Prerequesites of pExpr */
+  Bitmask prereqLeft;              /* Prerequisites of the pExpr->pLeft */
+  Bitmask prereqAll;               /* Prerequisites of pExpr */
   Bitmask extraRight = 0;          /* Extra dependencies on LEFT JOIN */
   Expr *pStr1 = 0;                 /* RHS of LIKE/GLOB operator */
   int isComplete = 0;              /* RHS of LIKE/GLOB ends with wildcard */
@@ -1166,7 +1166,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
       pTerm->eOperator = operatorMask(op) & opMask;
     }
     if( op==TK_IS ) pTerm->wtFlags |= TERM_IS;
-    if( pRight 
+    if( pRight
      && exprMightBeIndexed(pSrc, aiCurCol, pRight, op)
      && !ExprHasProperty(pRight, EP_FixedCol)
     ){
@@ -1205,7 +1205,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
       pNew->prereqRight = prereqLeft | extraRight;
       pNew->prereqAll = prereqAll;
       pNew->eOperator = (operatorMask(pDup->op) + eExtraOp) & opMask;
-    }else 
+    }else
     if( op==TK_ISNULL
      && !ExprHasProperty(pExpr,EP_OuterON)
      && 0==sqlite3ExprCanBeNull(pLeft)
@@ -1246,7 +1246,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
     for(i=0; i<2; i++){
       Expr *pNewExpr;
       int idxNew;
-      pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, ops[i], 
+      pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, ops[i],
                              sqlite3ExprDup(db, pExpr->pLeft, 0),
                              sqlite3ExprDup(db, pList->a[i].pExpr, 0));
       transferJoinMarkings(pNewExpr, pExpr);
@@ -1284,11 +1284,11 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
       Expr *pLeft = pExpr->pLeft;
       int idxNew;
       WhereTerm *pNewTerm;
-  
+ 
       pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_GT,
                               sqlite3ExprDup(db, pLeft, 0),
                               sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_NULL, 0, 0));
-  
+ 
       idxNew = whereClauseInsert(pWC, pNewExpr,
                                 TERM_VIRTUAL|TERM_DYNAMIC|TERM_VNULL);
       if( idxNew ){
@@ -1338,7 +1338,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
     pStr2 = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pStr1, 0);
     assert( pStr1==0 || !ExprHasProperty(pStr1, EP_IntValue) );
     assert( pStr2==0 || !ExprHasProperty(pStr2, EP_IntValue) );
- 
+
 
     /* Convert the lower bound to upper-case and the upper bound to
     ** lower-case (upper-case is less than lower-case in ASCII) so that
@@ -1361,7 +1361,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
       if( noCase ){
         /* The point is to increment the last character before the first
         ** wildcard.  But if we increment '@', that will push it into the
-        ** alphabetic range where case conversions will mess up the 
+        ** alphabetic range where case conversions will mess up the
         ** inequality.  To avoid this, make sure to also run the full
         ** LIKE on all candidate expressions by clearing the isComplete flag
         */
@@ -1408,7 +1408,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
   if( (pExpr->op==TK_EQ || pExpr->op==TK_IS)
    && (nLeft = sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pExpr->pLeft))>1
    && sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pExpr->pRight)==nLeft
-   && ( (pExpr->pLeft->flags & EP_xIsSelect)==0 
+   && ( (pExpr->pLeft->flags & EP_xIsSelect)==0
      || (pExpr->pRight->flags & EP_xIsSelect)==0)
    && pWC->op==TK_AND
   ){
@@ -1431,7 +1431,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
 
   /* If there is a vector IN term - e.g. "(a, b) IN (SELECT ...)" - create
   ** a virtual term for each vector component. The expression object
-  ** used by each such virtual term is pExpr (the full vector IN(...) 
+  ** used by each such virtual term is pExpr (the full vector IN(...)
   ** expression). The WhereTerm.u.x.iField variable identifies the index within
   ** the vector on the LHS that the virtual term represents.
   **
@@ -1480,7 +1480,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
       prereqColumn = sqlite3WhereExprUsage(pMaskSet, pLeft);
       if( (prereqExpr & prereqColumn)==0 ){
         Expr *pNewExpr;
-        pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_MATCH, 
+        pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_MATCH,
             0, sqlite3ExprDup(db, pRight, 0));
         if( ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_OuterON) && pNewExpr ){
           ExprSetProperty(pNewExpr, EP_OuterON);
@@ -1548,12 +1548,12 @@ void sqlite3WhereSplit(WhereClause *pWC, Expr *pExpr, u8 op){
 }
 
 /*
-** Add either a LIMIT (if eMatchOp==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_LIMIT) or 
-** OFFSET (if eMatchOp==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_OFFSET) term to the 
+** Add either a LIMIT (if eMatchOp==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_LIMIT) or
+** OFFSET (if eMatchOp==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_OFFSET) term to the
 ** where-clause passed as the first argument. The value for the term
 ** is found in register iReg.
 **
-** In the common case where the value is a simple integer 
+** In the common case where the value is a simple integer
 ** (example: "LIMIT 5 OFFSET 10") then the expression codes as a
 ** TK_INTEGER so that it will be available to sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value().
 ** If not, then it codes as a TK_REGISTER expression.
@@ -1633,7 +1633,7 @@ void SQLITE_NOINLINE sqlite3WhereAddLimit(WhereClause *pWC, Select *p){
       if( pWC->a[ii].nChild ){
         /* If this term has child terms, then they are also part of the
         ** pWC->a[] array. So this term can be ignored, as a LIMIT clause
-        ** will only be added if each of the child terms passes the 
+        ** will only be added if each of the child terms passes the
         ** (leftCursor==iCsr) test below.  */
         continue;
       }
@@ -1798,7 +1798,7 @@ Bitmask sqlite3WhereExprListUsage(WhereMaskSet *pMaskSet, ExprList *pList){
 
 
 /*
-** Call exprAnalyze on all terms in a WHERE clause.  
+** Call exprAnalyze on all terms in a WHERE clause. 
 **
 ** Note that exprAnalyze() might add new virtual terms onto the
 ** end of the WHERE clause.  We do not want to analyze these new
@@ -1817,7 +1817,7 @@ void sqlite3WhereExprAnalyze(
 
 /*
 ** For table-valued-functions, transform the function arguments into
-** new WHERE clause terms.  
+** new WHERE clause terms. 
 **
 ** Each function argument translates into an equality constraint against
 ** a HIDDEN column in the table.
@@ -1853,7 +1853,7 @@ void sqlite3WhereTabFuncArgs(
     assert( ExprUseYTab(pColRef) );
     pColRef->y.pTab = pTab;
     pItem->colUsed |= sqlite3ExprColUsed(pColRef);
-    pRhs = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_UPLUS, 
+    pRhs = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_UPLUS,
         sqlite3ExprDup(pParse->db, pArgs->a[j].pExpr, 0), 0);
     pTerm = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_EQ, pColRef, pRhs);
     if( pItem->fg.jointype & (JT_LEFT|JT_RIGHT) ){
diff --git a/src/window.c b/src/window.c
index a8081aa24..bbad81a72 100644
--- a/src/window.c
+++ b/src/window.c
@@ -40,12 +40,12 @@
 **   (in this case max()) to process rows sorted in order of (c, d), which
 **   makes things easier for obvious reasons. More generally:
 **
-**     * FROM, WHERE, GROUP BY and HAVING clauses are all moved to 
+**     * FROM, WHERE, GROUP BY and HAVING clauses are all moved to
 **       the sub-query.
 **
 **     * ORDER BY, LIMIT and OFFSET remain part of the parent query.
 **
-**     * Terminals from each of the expression trees that make up the 
+**     * Terminals from each of the expression trees that make up the
 **       select-list and ORDER BY expressions in the parent query are
 **       selected by the sub-query. For the purposes of the transformation,
 **       terminals are column references and aggregate functions.
@@ -54,14 +54,14 @@
 **   the same window declaration (the OVER bit), then a single scan may
 **   be used to process more than one window function. For example:
 **
-**     SELECT max(b) OVER (PARTITION BY c ORDER BY d), 
-**            min(e) OVER (PARTITION BY c ORDER BY d) 
+**     SELECT max(b) OVER (PARTITION BY c ORDER BY d),
+**            min(e) OVER (PARTITION BY c ORDER BY d)
 **     FROM t1;
 **
 **   is transformed in the same way as the example above. However:
 **
-**     SELECT max(b) OVER (PARTITION BY c ORDER BY d), 
-**            min(e) OVER (PARTITION BY a ORDER BY b) 
+**     SELECT max(b) OVER (PARTITION BY c ORDER BY d),
+**            min(e) OVER (PARTITION BY a ORDER BY b)
 **     FROM t1;
 **
 **   Must be transformed to:
@@ -114,15 +114,15 @@
 **     first_value(expr)
 **     last_value(expr)
 **     nth_value(expr, N)
-**   
-**   These are the same built-in window functions supported by Postgres. 
+**  
+**   These are the same built-in window functions supported by Postgres.
 **   Although the behaviour of aggregate window functions (functions that
-**   can be used as either aggregates or window funtions) allows them to
+**   can be used as either aggregates or window functions) allows them to
 **   be implemented using an API, built-in window functions are much more
-**   esoteric. Additionally, some window functions (e.g. nth_value()) 
+**   esoteric. Additionally, some window functions (e.g. nth_value())
 **   may only be implemented by caching the entire partition in memory.
 **   As such, some built-in window functions use the same API as aggregate
-**   window functions and some are implemented directly using VDBE 
+**   window functions and some are implemented directly using VDBE
 **   instructions. Additionally, for those functions that use the API, the
 **   window frame is sometimes modified before the SELECT statement is
 **   rewritten. For example, regardless of the specified window frame, the
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@
 **
 **   As well as some of the built-in window functions, aggregate window
 **   functions min() and max() are implemented using VDBE instructions if
-**   the start of the window frame is declared as anything other than 
+**   the start of the window frame is declared as anything other than
 **   UNBOUNDED PRECEDING.
 */
 
@@ -145,7 +145,7 @@
 **   ROWS BETWEEN UNBOUNDED PRECEDING AND CURRENT ROW
 */
 static void row_numberStepFunc(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
   int nArg,
   sqlite3_value **apArg
 ){
@@ -173,10 +173,10 @@ struct CallCount {
 ** Implementation of built-in window function dense_rank(). Assumes that
 ** the window frame has been set to:
 **
-**   RANGE BETWEEN UNBOUNDED PRECEDING AND CURRENT ROW 
+**   RANGE BETWEEN UNBOUNDED PRECEDING AND CURRENT ROW
 */
 static void dense_rankStepFunc(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
   int nArg,
   sqlite3_value **apArg
 ){
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ struct NthValueCtx {
   sqlite3_value *pValue;
 };
 static void nth_valueStepFunc(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
   int nArg,
   sqlite3_value **apArg
 ){
@@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ static void nth_valueFinalizeFunc(sqlite3_context *pCtx){
 #define nth_valueValueFunc noopValueFunc
 
 static void first_valueStepFunc(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
   int nArg,
   sqlite3_value **apArg
 ){
@@ -292,10 +292,10 @@ static void first_valueFinalizeFunc(sqlite3_context *pCtx){
 ** Implementation of built-in window function rank(). Assumes that
 ** the window frame has been set to:
 **
-**   RANGE BETWEEN UNBOUNDED PRECEDING AND CURRENT ROW 
+**   RANGE BETWEEN UNBOUNDED PRECEDING AND CURRENT ROW
 */
 static void rankStepFunc(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
   int nArg,
   sqlite3_value **apArg
 ){
@@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ static void rankValueFunc(sqlite3_context *pCtx){
 **   GROUPS BETWEEN CURRENT ROW AND UNBOUNDED FOLLOWING
 */
 static void percent_rankStepFunc(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
   int nArg,
   sqlite3_value **apArg
 ){
@@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ static void percent_rankStepFunc(
   }
 }
 static void percent_rankInvFunc(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
   int nArg,
   sqlite3_value **apArg
 ){
@@ -371,7 +371,7 @@ static void percent_rankValueFunc(sqlite3_context *pCtx){
 **   GROUPS BETWEEN 1 FOLLOWING AND UNBOUNDED FOLLOWING
 */
 static void cume_distStepFunc(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
   int nArg,
   sqlite3_value **apArg
 ){
@@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ static void cume_distStepFunc(
   }
 }
 static void cume_distInvFunc(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
   int nArg,
   sqlite3_value **apArg
 ){
@@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ struct NtileCtx {
 **   ROWS CURRENT ROW AND UNBOUNDED FOLLOWING
 */
 static void ntileStepFunc(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
   int nArg,
   sqlite3_value **apArg
 ){
@@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ static void ntileStepFunc(
   }
 }
 static void ntileInvFunc(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
   int nArg,
   sqlite3_value **apArg
 ){
@@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ struct LastValueCtx {
 ** Implementation of last_value().
 */
 static void last_valueStepFunc(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
   int nArg,
   sqlite3_value **apArg
 ){
@@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ static void last_valueStepFunc(
   }
 }
 static void last_valueInvFunc(
-  sqlite3_context *pCtx, 
+  sqlite3_context *pCtx,
   int nArg,
   sqlite3_value **apArg
 ){
@@ -647,7 +647,7 @@ static Window *windowFind(Parse *pParse, Window *pList, const char *zName){
 ** is the Window object representing the associated OVER clause. This
 ** function updates the contents of pWin as follows:
 **
-**   * If the OVER clause refered to a named window (as in "max(x) OVER win"),
+**   * If the OVER clause referred to a named window (as in "max(x) OVER win"),
 **     search list pList for a matching WINDOW definition, and update pWin
 **     accordingly. If no such WINDOW clause can be found, leave an error
 **     in pParse.
@@ -657,7 +657,7 @@ static Window *windowFind(Parse *pParse, Window *pList, const char *zName){
 **     of this file), pWin is updated here.
 */
 void sqlite3WindowUpdate(
-  Parse *pParse, 
+  Parse *pParse,
   Window *pList,                  /* List of named windows for this SELECT */
   Window *pWin,                   /* Window frame to update */
   FuncDef *pFunc                  /* Window function definition */
@@ -677,17 +677,17 @@ void sqlite3WindowUpdate(
     sqlite3WindowChain(pParse, pWin, pList);
   }
   if( (pWin->eFrmType==TK_RANGE)
-   && (pWin->pStart || pWin->pEnd) 
+   && (pWin->pStart || pWin->pEnd)
    && (pWin->pOrderBy==0 || pWin->pOrderBy->nExpr!=1)
   ){
-    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+    sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
       "RANGE with offset PRECEDING/FOLLOWING requires one ORDER BY expression"
     );
   }else
   if( pFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_WINDOW ){
     sqlite3 *db = pParse->db;
     if( pWin->pFilter ){
-      sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+      sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
           "FILTER clause may only be used with aggregate window functions"
       );
     }else{
@@ -697,14 +697,14 @@ void sqlite3WindowUpdate(
         int eStart;
         int eEnd;
       } aUp[] = {
-        { row_numberName,   TK_ROWS,   TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_CURRENT }, 
-        { dense_rankName,   TK_RANGE,  TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_CURRENT }, 
-        { rankName,         TK_RANGE,  TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_CURRENT }, 
-        { percent_rankName, TK_GROUPS, TK_CURRENT,   TK_UNBOUNDED }, 
-        { cume_distName,    TK_GROUPS, TK_FOLLOWING, TK_UNBOUNDED }, 
-        { ntileName,        TK_ROWS,   TK_CURRENT,   TK_UNBOUNDED }, 
-        { leadName,         TK_ROWS,   TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_UNBOUNDED }, 
-        { lagName,          TK_ROWS,   TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_CURRENT }, 
+        { row_numberName,   TK_ROWS,   TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_CURRENT },
+        { dense_rankName,   TK_RANGE,  TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_CURRENT },
+        { rankName,         TK_RANGE,  TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_CURRENT },
+        { percent_rankName, TK_GROUPS, TK_CURRENT,   TK_UNBOUNDED },
+        { cume_distName,    TK_GROUPS, TK_FOLLOWING, TK_UNBOUNDED },
+        { ntileName,        TK_ROWS,   TK_CURRENT,   TK_UNBOUNDED },
+        { leadName,         TK_ROWS,   TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_UNBOUNDED },
+        { lagName,          TK_ROWS,   TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_CURRENT },
       };
       int i;
       for(i=0; i<ArraySize(aUp); i++){
@@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ struct WindowRewrite {
 
 /*
 ** Callback function used by selectWindowRewriteEList(). If necessary,
-** this function appends to the output expression-list and updates 
+** this function appends to the output expression-list and updates
 ** expression (*ppExpr) in place.
 */
 static int selectWindowRewriteExprCb(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
@@ -847,16 +847,16 @@ static int selectWindowRewriteSelectCb(Walker *pWalker, Select *pSelect){
 **
 **   * TK_COLUMN,
 **   * aggregate function, or
-**   * window function with a Window object that is not a member of the 
+**   * window function with a Window object that is not a member of the
 **     Window list passed as the second argument (pWin).
 **
 ** Append the node to output expression-list (*ppSub). And replace it
-** with a TK_COLUMN that reads the (N-1)th element of table 
+** with a TK_COLUMN that reads the (N-1)th element of table
 ** pWin->iEphCsr, where N is the number of elements in (*ppSub) after
 ** appending the new one.
 */
 static void selectWindowRewriteEList(
-  Parse *pParse, 
+  Parse *pParse,
   Window *pWin,
   SrcList *pSrc,
   ExprList *pEList,               /* Rewrite expressions in this list */
@@ -950,7 +950,7 @@ static int disallowAggregatesInOrderByCb(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
 
 /*
 ** If the SELECT statement passed as the second argument does not invoke
-** any SQL window functions, this function is a no-op. Otherwise, it 
+** any SQL window functions, this function is a no-op. Otherwise, it
 ** rewrites the SELECT statement so that window function xStep functions
 ** are invoked in the correct order as described under "SELECT REWRITING"
 ** at the top of this file.
@@ -1023,8 +1023,8 @@ int sqlite3WindowRewrite(Parse *pParse, Select *p){
     selectWindowRewriteEList(pParse, pMWin, pSrc, p->pOrderBy, pTab, &pSublist);
     pMWin->nBufferCol = (pSublist ? pSublist->nExpr : 0);
 
-    /* Append the PARTITION BY and ORDER BY expressions to the to the 
-    ** sub-select expression list. They are required to figure out where 
+    /* Append the PARTITION BY and ORDER BY expressions to the to the
+    ** sub-select expression list. They are required to figure out where
     ** boundaries for partitions and sets of peer rows lie.  */
     pSublist = exprListAppendList(pParse, pSublist, pMWin->pPartition, 0);
     pSublist = exprListAppendList(pParse, pSublist, pMWin->pOrderBy, 0);
@@ -1058,11 +1058,11 @@ int sqlite3WindowRewrite(Parse *pParse, Select *p){
     /* If there is no ORDER BY or PARTITION BY clause, and the window
     ** function accepts zero arguments, and there are no other columns
     ** selected (e.g. "SELECT row_number() OVER () FROM t1"), it is possible
-    ** that pSublist is still NULL here. Add a constant expression here to 
-    ** keep everything legal in this case. 
+    ** that pSublist is still NULL here. Add a constant expression here to
+    ** keep everything legal in this case.
     */
     if( pSublist==0 ){
-      pSublist = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0, 
+      pSublist = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0,
         sqlite3Expr(db, TK_INTEGER, "0")
       );
     }
@@ -1248,10 +1248,10 @@ windowAllocErr:
 ** equivalent nul-terminated string.
 */
 Window *sqlite3WindowAssemble(
-  Parse *pParse, 
-  Window *pWin, 
-  ExprList *pPartition, 
-  ExprList *pOrderBy, 
+  Parse *pParse,
+  Window *pWin,
+  ExprList *pPartition,
+  ExprList *pOrderBy,
   Token *pBase
 ){
   if( pWin ){
@@ -1268,7 +1268,7 @@ Window *sqlite3WindowAssemble(
 }
 
 /*
-** Window *pWin has just been created from a WINDOW clause. Tokne pBase
+** Window *pWin has just been created from a WINDOW clause. Token pBase
 ** is the base window. Earlier windows from the same WINDOW clause are
 ** stored in the linked list starting at pWin->pNextWin. This function
 ** either updates *pWin according to the base specification, or else
@@ -1289,7 +1289,7 @@ void sqlite3WindowChain(Parse *pParse, Window *pWin, Window *pList){
         zErr = "frame specification";
       }
       if( zErr ){
-        sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, 
+        sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
             "cannot override %s of window: %s", zErr, pWin->zBase
         );
       }else{
@@ -1540,7 +1540,7 @@ struct WindowCsrAndReg {
 };
 
 /*
-** A single instance of this structure is allocated on the stack by 
+** A single instance of this structure is allocated on the stack by
 ** sqlite3WindowCodeStep() and a pointer to it passed to the various helper
 ** routines. This is to reduce the number of arguments required by each
 ** helper function.
@@ -1587,7 +1587,7 @@ struct WindowCsrAndReg {
 **
 **   Each cursor (start, current and end) consists of a VDBE cursor
 **   (WindowCsrAndReg.csr) and an array of registers (starting at
-**   WindowCodeArg.reg) that always contains a copy of the peer values 
+**   WindowCodeArg.reg) that always contains a copy of the peer values
 **   read from the corresponding cursor.
 **
 **   Depending on the window-frame in question, all three cursors may not
@@ -1632,8 +1632,8 @@ static void windowReadPeerValues(
 }
 
 /*
-** Generate VM code to invoke either xStep() (if bInverse is 0) or 
-** xInverse (if bInverse is non-zero) for each window function in the 
+** Generate VM code to invoke either xStep() (if bInverse is 0) or
+** xInverse (if bInverse is non-zero) for each window function in the
 ** linked list starting at pMWin. Or, for built-in window functions
 ** that do not use the standard function API, generate the required
 ** inline VM code.
@@ -1682,7 +1682,7 @@ static void windowAggStep(
     regArg = reg;
 
     if( pMWin->regStartRowid==0
-     && (pFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_MINMAX) 
+     && (pFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_MINMAX)
      && (pWin->eStart!=TK_UNBOUNDED)
     ){
       int addrIsNull = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_IsNull, regArg);
@@ -1718,7 +1718,7 @@ static void windowAggStep(
         VdbeCoverage(v);
         sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regTmp);
       }
-      
+     
       if( pWin->bExprArgs ){
         int iOp = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
         int iEnd;
@@ -1742,7 +1742,7 @@ static void windowAggStep(
         pColl = sqlite3ExprNNCollSeq(pParse, pWin->pOwner->x.pList->a[0].pExpr);
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_CollSeq, 0,0,0, (const char*)pColl, P4_COLLSEQ);
       }
-      sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, bInverse? OP_AggInverse : OP_AggStep, 
+      sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, bInverse? OP_AggInverse : OP_AggStep,
                         bInverse, regArg, pWin->regAccum);
       sqlite3VdbeAppendP4(v, pFunc, P4_FUNCDEF);
       sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, (u8)nArg);
@@ -1775,7 +1775,7 @@ static void windowAggFinal(WindowCodeArg *p, int bFin){
 
   for(pWin=pMWin; pWin; pWin=pWin->pNextWin){
     if( pMWin->regStartRowid==0
-     && (pWin->pWFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_MINMAX) 
+     && (pWin->pWFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_MINMAX)
      && (pWin->eStart!=TK_UNBOUNDED)
     ){
       sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, pWin->regResult);
@@ -1932,7 +1932,7 @@ static void windowReturnOneRow(WindowCodeArg *p){
         int lbl = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse);
         int tmpReg = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, pWin->regResult);
-  
+ 
         if( pFunc->zName==nth_valueName ){
           sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column,pMWin->iEphCsr,pWin->iArgCol+1,tmpReg);
           windowCheckValue(pParse, tmpReg, 2);
@@ -1954,7 +1954,7 @@ static void windowReturnOneRow(WindowCodeArg *p){
         int lbl = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse);
         int tmpReg = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
         int iEph = pMWin->iEphCsr;
-  
+ 
         if( nArg<3 ){
           sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, pWin->regResult);
         }else{
@@ -1971,7 +1971,7 @@ static void windowReturnOneRow(WindowCodeArg *p){
           sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, op, tmpReg2, tmpReg, tmpReg);
           sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, tmpReg2);
         }
-  
+ 
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SeekRowid, csr, lbl, tmpReg);
         VdbeCoverage(v);
         sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, csr, pWin->iArgCol, pWin->regResult);
@@ -2017,7 +2017,7 @@ static int windowInitAccum(Parse *pParse, Window *pMWin){
   return regArg;
 }
 
-/* 
+/*
 ** Return true if the current frame should be cached in the ephemeral table,
 ** even if there are no xInverse() calls required.
 */
@@ -2041,9 +2041,9 @@ static int windowCacheFrame(Window *pMWin){
 ** regOld and regNew are each the first register in an array of size
 ** pOrderBy->nExpr. This function generates code to compare the two
 ** arrays of registers using the collation sequences and other comparison
-** parameters specified by pOrderBy. 
+** parameters specified by pOrderBy.
 **
-** If the two arrays are not equal, the contents of regNew is copied to 
+** If the two arrays are not equal, the contents of regNew is copied to
 ** regOld and control falls through. Otherwise, if the contents of the arrays
 ** are equal, an OP_Goto is executed. The address of the OP_Goto is returned.
 */
@@ -2060,7 +2060,7 @@ static void windowIfNewPeer(
     KeyInfo *pKeyInfo = sqlite3KeyInfoFromExprList(pParse, pOrderBy, 0, 0);
     sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Compare, regOld, regNew, nVal);
     sqlite3VdbeAppendP4(v, (void*)pKeyInfo, P4_KEYINFO);
-    sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Jump, 
+    sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Jump,
       sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+1, addr, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+1
     );
     VdbeCoverageEqNe(v);
@@ -2094,7 +2094,7 @@ static void windowIfNewPeer(
 ** or subtraction is a a copy of csr1.peerVal.
 */
 static void windowCodeRangeTest(
-  WindowCodeArg *p, 
+  WindowCodeArg *p,
   int op,                         /* OP_Ge, OP_Gt, or OP_Le */
   int csr1,                       /* Cursor number for cursor 1 */
   int regVal,                     /* Register containing non-negative number */
@@ -2132,8 +2132,8 @@ static void windowCodeRangeTest(
       ((op==OP_Ge) ? ">=" : (op==OP_Le) ? "<=" : (op==OP_Gt) ? ">" : "<"), reg2
   ));
 
-  /* If the BIGNULL flag is set for the ORDER BY, then it is required to 
-  ** consider NULL values to be larger than all other values, instead of 
+  /* If the BIGNULL flag is set for the ORDER BY, then it is required to
+  ** consider NULL values to be larger than all other values, instead of
   ** the usual smaller. The VDBE opcodes OP_Ge and so on do not handle this
   ** (and adding that capability causes a performance regression), so
   ** instead if the BIGNULL flag is set then cases where either reg1 or
@@ -2148,23 +2148,23 @@ static void windowCodeRangeTest(
   **     if( op==OP_Le ) goto lbl;
   **   }
   **
-  ** Additionally, if either reg1 or reg2 are NULL but the jump to lbl is 
+  ** Additionally, if either reg1 or reg2 are NULL but the jump to lbl is
   ** not taken, control jumps over the comparison operator coded below this
   ** block.  */
   if( pOrderBy->a[0].fg.sortFlags & KEYINFO_ORDER_BIGNULL ){
     /* This block runs if reg1 contains a NULL. */
     int addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_NotNull, reg1); VdbeCoverage(v);
     switch( op ){
-      case OP_Ge: 
-        sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, lbl); 
+      case OP_Ge:
+        sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, lbl);
         break;
-      case OP_Gt: 
-        sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_NotNull, reg2, lbl); 
-        VdbeCoverage(v); 
+      case OP_Gt:
+        sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_NotNull, reg2, lbl);
+        VdbeCoverage(v);
         break;
-      case OP_Le: 
-        sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_IsNull, reg2, lbl); 
-        VdbeCoverage(v); 
+      case OP_Le:
+        sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_IsNull, reg2, lbl);
+        VdbeCoverage(v);
         break;
       default: assert( op==OP_Lt ); /* no-op */ break;
     }
@@ -2221,7 +2221,7 @@ static void windowCodeRangeTest(
 
 /*
 ** Helper function for sqlite3WindowCodeStep(). Each call to this function
-** generates VM code for a single RETURN_ROW, AGGSTEP or AGGINVERSE 
+** generates VM code for a single RETURN_ROW, AGGSTEP or AGGINVERSE
 ** operation. Refer to the header comment for sqlite3WindowCodeStep() for
 ** details.
 */
@@ -2280,8 +2280,8 @@ static int windowCodeOp(
   addrContinue = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
 
   /* If this is a (RANGE BETWEEN a FOLLOWING AND b FOLLOWING) or
-  ** (RANGE BETWEEN b PRECEDING AND a PRECEDING) frame, ensure the 
-  ** start cursor does not advance past the end cursor within the 
+  ** (RANGE BETWEEN b PRECEDING AND a PRECEDING) frame, ensure the
+  ** start cursor does not advance past the end cursor within the
   ** temporary table. It otherwise might, if (a>b). Also ensure that,
   ** if the input cursor is still finding new rows, that the end
   ** cursor does not go past it to EOF. */
@@ -2422,11 +2422,11 @@ Window *sqlite3WindowListDup(sqlite3 *db, Window *p){
 }
 
 /*
-** Return true if it can be determined at compile time that expression 
-** pExpr evaluates to a value that, when cast to an integer, is greater 
+** Return true if it can be determined at compile time that expression
+** pExpr evaluates to a value that, when cast to an integer, is greater
 ** than zero. False otherwise.
 **
-** If an OOM error occurs, this function sets the Parse.db.mallocFailed 
+** If an OOM error occurs, this function sets the Parse.db.mallocFailed
 ** flag and returns zero.
 */
 static int windowExprGtZero(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
@@ -2442,11 +2442,11 @@ static int windowExprGtZero(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
 }
 
 /*
-** sqlite3WhereBegin() has already been called for the SELECT statement 
+** sqlite3WhereBegin() has already been called for the SELECT statement
 ** passed as the second argument when this function is invoked. It generates
-** code to populate the Window.regResult register for each window function 
+** code to populate the Window.regResult register for each window function
 ** and invoke the sub-routine at instruction addrGosub once for each row.
-** sqlite3WhereEnd() is always called before returning. 
+** sqlite3WhereEnd() is always called before returning.
 **
 ** This function handles several different types of window frames, which
 ** require slightly different processing. The following pseudo code is
@@ -2461,17 +2461,17 @@ static int windowExprGtZero(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
 **         Gosub flush
 **       }
 **       Insert new row into eph table.
-**       
+**      
 **       if( first row of partition ){
 **         // Rewind three cursors, all open on the eph table.
 **         Rewind(csrEnd);
 **         Rewind(csrStart);
 **         Rewind(csrCurrent);
-**       
+**      
 **         regEnd = <expr2>          // FOLLOWING expression
 **         regStart = <expr1>        // PRECEDING expression
 **       }else{
-**         // First time this branch is taken, the eph table contains two 
+**         // First time this branch is taken, the eph table contains two
 **         // rows. The first row in the partition, which all three cursors
 **         // currently point to, and the following row.
 **         AGGSTEP
@@ -2500,17 +2500,17 @@ static int windowExprGtZero(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
 **               with arguments read from the current row of cursor csrEnd, then
 **               step cursor csrEnd forward one row (i.e. sqlite3BtreeNext()).
 **
-**   RETURN_ROW: return a row to the caller based on the contents of the 
-**               current row of csrCurrent and the current state of all 
+**   RETURN_ROW: return a row to the caller based on the contents of the
+**               current row of csrCurrent and the current state of all
 **               aggregates. Then step cursor csrCurrent forward one row.
 **
-**   AGGINVERSE: invoke the aggregate xInverse() function for each window 
+**   AGGINVERSE: invoke the aggregate xInverse() function for each window
 **               functions with arguments read from the current row of cursor
 **               csrStart. Then step csrStart forward one row.
 **
 ** There are two other ROWS window frames that are handled significantly
 ** differently from the above - "BETWEEN <expr> PRECEDING AND <expr> PRECEDING"
-** and "BETWEEN <expr> FOLLOWING AND <expr> FOLLOWING". These are special 
+** and "BETWEEN <expr> FOLLOWING AND <expr> FOLLOWING". These are special
 ** cases because they change the order in which the three cursors (csrStart,
 ** csrCurrent and csrEnd) iterate through the ephemeral table. Cases that
 ** use UNBOUNDED or CURRENT ROW are much simpler variations on one of these
@@ -2583,7 +2583,7 @@ static int windowExprGtZero(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
 **
 ** For the most part, the patterns above are adapted to support UNBOUNDED by
 ** assuming that it is equivalent to "infinity PRECEDING/FOLLOWING" and
-** CURRENT ROW by assuming that it is equivilent to "0 PRECEDING/FOLLOWING".
+** CURRENT ROW by assuming that it is equivalent to "0 PRECEDING/FOLLOWING".
 ** This is optimized of course - branches that will never be taken and
 ** conditions that are always true are omitted from the VM code. The only
 ** exceptional case is:
@@ -2660,15 +2660,15 @@ static int windowExprGtZero(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
 **           regEnd = <expr2>
 **           regStart = <expr1>
 **         }else if( new group ){
-**           ... 
+**           ...
 **         }
 **       }
 **
-**   2. Instead of processing a single row, each RETURN_ROW, AGGSTEP or 
+**   2. Instead of processing a single row, each RETURN_ROW, AGGSTEP or
 **      AGGINVERSE step processes the current row of the relevant cursor and
 **      all subsequent rows belonging to the same group.
 **
-** RANGE window frames are a little different again. As for GROUPS, the 
+** RANGE window frames are a little different again. As for GROUPS, the
 ** main loop runs once per group only. And RETURN_ROW, AGGSTEP and AGGINVERSE
 ** deal in groups instead of rows. As for ROWS and GROUPS, there are three
 ** basic cases:
@@ -2705,7 +2705,7 @@ static int windowExprGtZero(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
 **         }
 **       }
 **
-** In the above notation, "csr.key" means the current value of the ORDER BY 
+** In the above notation, "csr.key" means the current value of the ORDER BY
 ** expression (there is only ever 1 for a RANGE that uses an <expr> FOLLOWING
 ** or <expr PRECEDING) read from cursor csr.
 **
@@ -2804,11 +2804,11 @@ void sqlite3WindowCodeStep(
   int regStart = 0;               /* Value of <expr> PRECEDING */
   int regEnd = 0;                 /* Value of <expr> FOLLOWING */
 
-  assert( pMWin->eStart==TK_PRECEDING || pMWin->eStart==TK_CURRENT 
-       || pMWin->eStart==TK_FOLLOWING || pMWin->eStart==TK_UNBOUNDED 
+  assert( pMWin->eStart==TK_PRECEDING || pMWin->eStart==TK_CURRENT
+       || pMWin->eStart==TK_FOLLOWING || pMWin->eStart==TK_UNBOUNDED
   );
-  assert( pMWin->eEnd==TK_FOLLOWING || pMWin->eEnd==TK_CURRENT 
-       || pMWin->eEnd==TK_UNBOUNDED || pMWin->eEnd==TK_PRECEDING 
+  assert( pMWin->eEnd==TK_FOLLOWING || pMWin->eEnd==TK_CURRENT
+       || pMWin->eEnd==TK_UNBOUNDED || pMWin->eEnd==TK_PRECEDING
   );
   assert( pMWin->eExclude==0 || pMWin->eExclude==TK_CURRENT
        || pMWin->eExclude==TK_GROUP || pMWin->eExclude==TK_TIES
@@ -2830,9 +2830,9 @@ void sqlite3WindowCodeStep(
   s.end.csr = s.current.csr+3;
 
   /* Figure out when rows may be deleted from the ephemeral table. There
-  ** are four options - they may never be deleted (eDelete==0), they may 
+  ** are four options - they may never be deleted (eDelete==0), they may
   ** be deleted as soon as they are no longer part of the window frame
-  ** (eDelete==WINDOW_AGGINVERSE), they may be deleted as after the row 
+  ** (eDelete==WINDOW_AGGINVERSE), they may be deleted as after the row
   ** has been returned to the caller (WINDOW_RETURN_ROW), or they may
   ** be deleted after they enter the frame (WINDOW_AGGSTEP). */
   switch( pMWin->eStart ){
@@ -2862,7 +2862,7 @@ void sqlite3WindowCodeStep(
   }
 
   /* Allocate registers for the array of values from the sub-query, the
-  ** samve values in record form, and the rowid used to insert said record
+  ** same values in record form, and the rowid used to insert said record
   ** into the ephemeral table.  */
   regNew = pParse->nMem+1;
   pParse->nMem += nInput;
@@ -2880,7 +2880,7 @@ void sqlite3WindowCodeStep(
   }
 
   /* If this is not a "ROWS BETWEEN ..." frame, then allocate arrays of
-  ** registers to store copies of the ORDER BY expressions (peer values) 
+  ** registers to store copies of the ORDER BY expressions (peer values)
   ** for the main loop, and for each cursor (start, current and end). */
   if( pMWin->eFrmType!=TK_ROWS ){
     int nPeer = (pOrderBy ? pOrderBy->nExpr : 0);
@@ -2901,7 +2901,7 @@ void sqlite3WindowCodeStep(
   sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_MakeRecord, regNew, nInput, regRecord);
 
   /* An input row has just been read into an array of registers starting
-  ** at regNew. If the window has a PARTITION clause, this block generates 
+  ** at regNew. If the window has a PARTITION clause, this block generates
   ** VM code to check if the input row is the start of a new partition.
   ** If so, it does an OP_Gosub to an address to be filled in later. The
   ** address of the OP_Gosub is stored in local variable addrGosubFlush. */
diff --git a/tool/custom.txt b/tool/custom.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b96bc5f15
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tool/custom.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,1342 @@
+aa
+aaa
+abc
+abcdefg
+abd
+abf
+Abortable
+acc
+accessor
+accum
+acd
+activecpu
+Adaptor
+Additionallly
+addop
+addoptrace
+addr
+adjustements
+af
+aff
+afp
+afterward
+Agg
+agg
+agginfo
+alikes
+Alloc
+alloc
+alloca
+allocator
+allocators
+alphabetics
+alphanumerics
+alternateform
+altertab
+altform
+amalgamator
+amongst
+Analyse
+analyse
+antipenultimate
+ap
+api
+appdef
+appendall
+appendchar
+appendf
+ar
+Arg
+arg
+argc
+argcount
+arglist
+argn
+args
+argv
+arrayname
+ascii
+asm
+async
+Atoi
+atomics
+auth
+authorizer
+autocheckpoint
+Autocommit
+autocommit
+autoconf
+Autoext
+autoextension
+autoinc
+autoincrement
+autoincremented
+autoindex
+autoinstall
+autovac
+autovacuum
+autovacuumed
+autovacuuming
+auxdata
+awk
+Ax
+backend
+backends
+backfill
+backfilled
+backfilling
+backtrace
+backtraces
+backtracing
+bb
+bba
+bcb
+bcc
+beginthreadex
+behavior
+Behavioral
+behaviors
+benigncnt
+bg
+bigblob
+bitcount
+Bitfield
+bitfield
+Bitmask
+bitmask
+Bitmasks
+bitmasks
+bitset
+Bitvec
+bitvec
+bitvecs
+bitwise
+blobwrite
+blockquote
+Bloomfilter
+bom
+boolean
+booleans
+Borland
+br
+breadthfirstsearch
+breakpoint
+bt
+Btree
+btree
+Btrees
+btrees
+buf
+bufpt
+butoindex
+bytearray
+bytecode
+bytecodevtab
+byteorder
+cacheflush
+cachegrind
+Cachesize
+calc'ing
+callgrind
+cardinalities
+cardinality
+carray
+cb
+cd
+cdbaa
+ce
+ceil
+cellpadding
+cellspacing
+center
+chacha
+changecounter
+changeset
+characgter
+characterset
+checkpointed
+Checkpointer
+checkpointer
+checkpointers
+checkpointing
+checksummed
+checksums
+chmod
+chng
+chown
+chroot
+chsize
+chunksize
+cid
+cis
+ckalloc'd
+ckpt
+cksum
+cksumvfs
+clientdata
+closedir
+clownshoe
+cmd
+cmp
+cmpaff
+Cmpr
+cnt
+codec
+codepage
+Collseq
+collseq
+colname
+compileoption
+Concat
+concat
+config
+confstr
+connetion
+consective
+considertion
+const
+coredump
+Coroutine
+coroutine
+coroutines
+corresonding
+cov
+crashparams
+csr
+csv
+Cte
+ctime
+Ctrl
+ctrl
+ctx
+ctype
+cume
+Cx
+cx
+Cygwin
+cygwin
+dan
+darkstar
+databasename
+databse
+datasource
+datatypes
+datetime
+dbfuzz
+dbinfo
+dbname
+dbpage
+dbpagevfs
+dbs
+dbsize
+dbsqlfuzz
+dbstat
+dbtotxt
+De
+de
+deadman
+Deallocate
+deallocate
+deallocated
+Deallocates
+deallocates
+deallocating
+Deallocation
+deallocation
+decltype
+decrementing
+Defense
+defense
+defenses
+defn
+defragment
+defragmentation
+defragmented
+deinitialization
+Deinitialize
+deinitialize
+demovfs
+dependences
+Dequote
+dequote
+Dequoted
+dequoted
+dequoting
+dereferenced
+Dereferences
+desc
+deserialization
+Deserialize
+deserialize
+deserialized
+deserializes
+deserializing
+Dest
+dest
+Destructor
+destructor
+destructors
+deterministically
+dev
+devsim
+devsym
+df
+Dfdatasync
+dflt
+dir
+directonly
+dirent
+dirs
+disjunct
+disjunction
+disjuncts
+diskfull
+divy
+dl
+dll
+dlopen
+dlsym
+docid
+docids
+dont
+dontcache
+Dotfile
+dotfile
+dotlock
+doublearray
+drh
+dryrun
+dstr
+dt
+Duint
+dup
+Durian
+dword
+Dx
+dylib
+Dyn
+Ec
+ec
+ecel
+editability
+ef
+efc
+eg
+Ei
+elif
+emcc
+emscripten
+encodings
+endeavor
+endfor
+endian
+endianness
+endif
+endthreadex
+english
+enum
+eof
+eph
+Ephem
+ephem
+epheremal
+ephermal
+Eq
+eq
+eqp
+equaling
+equalities
+errcode
+errmsg
+Errno
+errno
+errorcode
+erroroffset
+errstr
+esc
+esign
+et
+etfs
+etilqs
+eval
+exe
+expander
+explainer
+expmask
+Expr
+expr
+expresssion
+exprlist
+extern
+fakeheap
+fallocate
+fanout
+faultsim
+favor
+favors
+fb
+fc
+fchmod
+fchown
+fclose
+fcntl
+fd
+fdatasync
+feb
+fef
+Feijoa
+ferror
+ffff
+ffffeff
+ffffffe
+fffffff
+ffffffff
+fffffffffffffff
+fflush
+fg
+fgets
+fi
+fibonacci
+fid
+Fifo
+filecount
+filectrl
+filemapping
+filesize
+filesystem
+filesystems
+finalised
+finalizer
+findfirst
+findnext
+Finially
+Fixup
+fk
+fkctr
+fkey
+flattener
+fmt
+fopen
+foreach
+formatter
+fprintf
+fputs
+fread
+fred
+fred's
+freeblock
+Freeblocks
+freeblocks
+Freelist
+freelist
+freepage
+freespace
+frombind
+fs
+fsanitize
+fsctl
+fsdir
+fseek
+fstat
+fstree
+Fsync
+fsync
+fsynced
+fsyncs
+ftell
+ftruncate
+fts
+fullfsync
+fullname
+fullschema
+fullshm
+fullsync
+fullsyncs
+Func
+func
+funcs
+functino
+fuzzer
+fuzzers
+fwrite
+Fx
+gcc
+gcov
+gdb
+getcwd
+getenv
+gethostuuid
+getpagesize
+getpid
+getrusage
+getsubtype
+getter
+getters
+gibabyte
+gid
+glibc
+Globbing
+globbing
+gmtime
+Gosub
+Goto
+goto
+groupbyparent
+Groupid
+growable
+grp
+hdl
+hdr
+hexadeximal
+hexdb
+hexdouble
+hexio
+Highwater
+highwater
+hijklmno
+honor
+honored
+honoring
+hostid
+href
+html
+htsize
+hw
+Hwtime
+icecube
+ideographical
+Idx
+idx
+idxaff
+idxnum
+idxstr
+idx'th
+ieee
+ifdef
+iff
+ifndef
+imm
+impl
+implementions
+implmentation
+incr
+Incrblob
+incrblob
+incrementing
+indexable
+indexname
+infop
+ing
+Init
+init
+initalize
+initfail
+initializer
+initializers
+initiallly
+inlined
+inlines
+inlining
+ino
+inode
+inodes
+inopertune
+installable
+intarray
+inteface
+interoperate
+interp
+interpretable
+intkey
+intptr
+intreal
+intrinsics
+invalidations
+invariants
+io
+ioerr
+iotrace
+ipk
+iplan
+isalnum
+isalpha
+isatty
+isdigit
+isempty
+isexplain
+ismemdb
+isnan
+isspace
+isxdigit
+i'th
+iversion
+jfd
+jj
+jointype
+jointypes
+journaled
+journaling
+journalled
+journalling
+journalmode
+jrnl
+jsl
+json
+jt
+julian
+julianday
+keyinfo
+keywordhash
+kibibytes
+kvstorage
+kvvfs
+lappend
+lasterrno
+lbl
+ldl
+le
+leafdata
+leftjustify
+len
+leveling
+lexeme
+lexemes
+lhs
+li
+libm
+libversion
+lifecycle
+lindex
+lineno
+Linenoise
+linux
+lised
+lld
+llvm
+lm
+ln
+lncurses
+loadext
+localhost
+localtime
+lockd
+lockdata
+lockingcontext
+lockless
+lockproxy
+locktype
+logmsg
+longvalue
+longwords
+lookahead
+Lookaside
+lookaside
+lookups
+losslessly
+lpthread
+lrc
+lreadline
+lru
+lseek
+lt
+lvalue
+lwr
+makefile
+makefiles
+Malloc
+malloc
+Malloc'd
+malloc'd
+malloced
+mallocs
+manditory
+manpage
+matchinfo
+materializations
+mathfuncs
+maxsize
+mbcs
+Mcafee
+md
+Meeus
+Mem
+mem
+memcmp
+memcpy
+memdb
+memdebug
+memget
+memmove
+mempool
+memset
+memstatus
+memsys
+memvfs
+mergeable
+mergepatch
+middleware
+millisec
+mincore
+mingw
+mis
+Miscoded
+mj
+mkctimec
+mkdir
+mkkeywordhash
+mkopcodec
+mkopcodeh
+mkpragmatab
+mmap
+mmapped
+mno
+modeof
+Movepage
+mprintf
+msd
+msdos
+msec
+msg
+msgs
+msize
+msvc
+mtime
+mult
+Multibyte
+multipled
+multiplex'ed
+multiplexor
+multithreaded
+multiwrite
+Mutex
+mutex
+Mutexes
+mutexes
+mutexing
+mx
+mxpathname
+myprefix
+nal
+namecontext
+Namespace
+namespace
+natively
+nbr
+nbsp
+ncell
+ncol
+ncycle
+nd
+ndlt
+neighbors
+neq
+nestable
+newrowid
+nfs
+nlt
+nnn
+nocase
+nochange
+nochng
+nofollow
+nolock
+nomem
+nomutex
+nonblocking
+nonroot
+Noop
+noop
+noshm
+notational
+notheld
+notnull
+nowrap
+Nr
+nr
+ntile
+Nul
+nul
+nullable
+nullif
+nullvalue
+Num
+objproc
+oc
+offsetof
+ofst
+ogham
+oid
+Ok
+ok
+ol
+onecolumn
+onepass
+onoff
+onwards
+Oom
+opcodesnever
+openable
+opendir
+optimizers
+optimizible
+orconf
+orderby
+orderbylist
+os
+Oswrite
+overread
+overreads
+overrideable
+oversize
+overwriteable
+Overwritting
+ovewrite
+ovfl
+pagecache
+pagecaches
+Pagecount
+pagecount
+pagelist
+pageno
+Pagesize
+pagesize
+pagetype
+Param
+params
+passwd
+patchset
+pathname
+pathnames
+pc
+pcache
+pclose
+pcx
+pgno
+pgoffset
+pgsize
+pgsz
+pid
+pluggable
+pmasz
+pn
+popen
+pos
+Posix
+posix
+Postgres
+Powersafe
+powersafe
+pq
+pqr
+pqrstuvw
+pragma
+pragmaed
+pragma's
+pragmas
+Pre
+pre
+pread
+preallocate
+Preallocated
+preallocated
+precisions
+precompiled
+Precomputed
+precomputed
+prefetch
+prefetched
+preformated
+preformatted
+prepend
+prepended
+prepending
+prepends
+prepopulate
+preprocess
+preprocessed
+preprocessing
+preprocessor
+prereq
+prereqs
+preupdate
+primarykey
+printf
+printfs
+Prng
+prng
+proc
+procs
+profiler
+proleptic
+proxying
+proxys
+pseudocode
+Pseudotable
+pseudotable
+psow
+psz
+pthread
+Pthreads
+pthreads
+Ptr
+ptr
+ptrmap
+ptrs
+purgeable
+putsnl
+pwrite
+pz
+qbox
+Qcircle
+quotaed
+quotefix
+radix
+randomblob
+randstr
+rarr
+rc
+rcauth
+Rcvr
+rds
+readdir
+Readline
+readline
+readlock
+readonly
+Readr
+Realloc
+realloc
+reallocs
+realvalue
+rebalance
+rebalanced
+recoverability
+redefinable
+redux
+reenabled
+reentrant
+refcount
+refcounts
+Regs
+regs
+reindexed
+reinitializer
+reinitializes
+Rekey
+rekey
+rekeyed
+relevancies
+Relink
+relink
+relock
+renormalize
+reoptimize
+Reparse
+reparse
+reparsed
+reparsing
+reportable
+Reprepare
+reprepare
+reprepared
+reprepares
+representable
+repurpose
+Req'd
+requeries
+requote
+reregister
+Reseek
+reservebytes
+resumable
+Retarget
+retargeted
+retrys
+returntype
+rfc
+rhs
+Ri
+Rivest
+ro
+Rootpage
+rootpage
+Rowid
+rowid
+Rowids
+rowids
+Rowkey
+rownumber
+Rowset
+rowset
+runtime
+rw
+rwc
+samplelib
+sampleno
+sandboxed
+sandboxing
+Savepoint
+savepoint
+Savepoints
+savepoints
+scanf
+scannning
+scanstats
+scanstatus
+schemas
+sectorsize
+selecttrace
+selftest
+setrlimit
+setsubtype
+settitle
+sharable
+shm
+shmlock
+sibs
+sig
+signaling
+significand
+sizehint
+Sizeof
+sizeof
+snprintf
+Solaris
+sorterref
+soundex
+sourceid
+speedtest
+sprintf
+sql
+sqlar
+sqlite
+sqliteplocks
+sqliterc
+sqllog
+sqllogglobal
+sqlthread
+sqr
+sqrt
+src
+srcck
+statfs
+statment
+stderr
+stdin
+stdout
+Stmt
+stmt
+stmts
+Str
+str
+strace
+strcasecmp
+strcmp
+strdup
+strerror
+strftime
+strglob
+stricmp
+stringify
+strlen
+strlike
+strncmp
+strncpy
+strnicmp
+stronly
+strstr
+struct
+structs
+subbitmap
+subcases
+subclassed
+subclauses
+subcomponents
+subdirectory
+subelement
+subexpression
+subexpressions
+Subfunction
+subfunctions
+subitem
+subjournals
+sublevels
+subnode
+suboptimal
+subpages
+subprocedures
+subprog
+subprogs
+subq
+subqueries
+subquery
+Subrtn
+subsec
+subsecond
+subsequence
+substr
+Substring
+substrings
+Subsubstructure
+subsubterms
+Subtask
+subtasks
+subterm
+subterms
+subtransaction
+subtransactions
+subtree
+subtrees
+Subtype
+subtype
+subtypes
+sumint
+sunday
+superclass
+superlock
+superset
+superunlock
+symlinks
+synching
+sys
+syscall
+sz
+szosfile
+tablename
+tailval
+tailvar
+tbl
+tblname
+Tcl
+tcl
+Tclcmd
+tclcmd
+tclsh
+tclsqlite
+tclvar
+td
+tempfilename
+testcase
+testctrl
+testfixture
+testtag
+testvfs
+textarray
+th
+threadid
+threadsafe
+threadsafety
+throughs
+tht
+timediff
+tkt
+tm
+tmp
+tmpdir
+tmpfs
+tnum
+Todo
+tokenize
+tokenizer
+tokenizing
+tolower
+toobig
+toupper
+treetrace
+treeview
+trimleft
+trimright
+truesize
+trys
+Tsd
+Ts'o
+tunable
+tvfs
+txn
+txt
+Typecheck
+typedef
+typedefed
+typedefs
+typename
+typenames
+typeof
+tz
+uber
+uid
+uint
+ul
+umask
+Un
+un
+unallocated
+unanalyzed
+Unary
+unary
+unbuffered
+unclosed
+uncompiled
+uncomputed
+undefining
+underfull
+unexpanded
+unfinalized
+unfreed
+unhex
+unicode
+Unindexed
+unindexed
+uninit
+Uninitialize
+unintuitive
+unioned
+unissued
+unix
+unixepoch
+Unlink
+unlink
+unlinked
+unlinking
+unlinks
+Unmap
+unmap
+unmapped
+unmapping
+unoptimized
+unparsed
+unreduced
+unref
+unreferenced
+unrefs
+Unregister
+unregister
+Unregistering
+unregisters
+unresolvable
+unsynced
+unterminated
+untracked
+untrusted
+Upfrom
+uppercasing
+upr
+Upsert
+upsert
+upto
+uptr
+uri
+userauth
+userdata
+Userid
+usleep
+utc
+Utf
+utf
+util
+uuu
+uuuuu
+uuzzzz
+va
+Valgrind
+valgrind
+vanishingly
+vappendf
+Vararg
+varargs
+varint
+varints
+Varname
+varname
+vcolumn
+Vdbe
+vdbe
+vdbeapi
+vdbe's
+vdbes
+vdbesort
+ve
+verfication
+verifications
+veritical
+vfs
+vfslog
+vfsname
+vfs's
+vfstrace
+vm
+vmprintf
+vmstep
+vsnprintf
+vt
+vtab
+vtabs
+Vugt
+vvv
+vvvv
+vvvvv
+vvvvvv
+vwait
+vxworks
+Wal
+wal
+wasm
+wherease
+wherecode
+whereexpr
+wheretrace
+whitespace
+Willmann
+withoutrowid
+wr
+wrapup
+writeable
+writecrash
+writefile
+wsd
+ww
+wwww
+wwzzzzyy
+wxyz
+xa
+xac
+xb
+xbf
+xc
+xd
+xdg
+xe
+xf
+xfe
+Xfer
+xfer
+xff
+xfff
+xfffd
+xfffe
+xffffffff
+x'hhhhhh
+xinfo
+xlc
+xtype
+xxxx
+xxxxx
+xxxxxx
+xxxxxxx
+xxxxxxxx
+xyz
+xyzzy
+yy
+yyxxxxxx
+yyy
+yyyyy
+yyyyyy
+zeroblob
+Zeroblobs
+zerodata
+zeropad
+zipfile
+zipvfs
+zplan
+zulu
+zzzz
+zzzzyyyy
diff --git a/tool/spellsift.tcl b/tool/spellsift.tcl
new file mode 100755
index 000000000..4e67c3e26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tool/spellsift.tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+#!/usr/bin/tclsh
+
+set usage {
+  Usage: spellsift.tcl <source_filenames>
+  The named .c and .h source files comment blocks are spell-checked.
+}
+
+if {[llength $argv] == 0} {
+  puts stderr $usage
+  exit 0
+}
+
+# Want a Tcl version with 3-argument close.
+package require Tcl 8.6
+
+set ::spellchk "aspell --extra-dicts ./custom.rws list"
+
+# Run text through aspell with custom dictionary, return finds.
+proc misspelled {text} {
+  set spellerr [open "|$::spellchk" r+]
+  puts $spellerr $text
+  flush $spellerr
+  close $spellerr write
+  set huhq [regsub {\s*$} [read $spellerr] {}]
+  close $spellerr read
+  return [split $huhq "\n"]
+}
+
+# Eliminate some common patterns that need not be well spelled.
+proc decruft {text} {
+  set nopp [regsub -all "\n *#\[^\n\]*\n" $text "\n\n" ]
+  set noticket [regsub -all {Ticket \[?[0-9a-f]+\]?} $nopp "" ]
+  return $noticket
+}
+
+# Sift out common variable spellings not in normal dictionaries.
+proc varsift {words} {
+  set rv [list]
+  foreach w $words {
+    set n [string length $w]
+    set cr [string range $w 1 end]
+    if {[string tolower $cr] ne $cr} continue
+    lappend rv $w;
+  }
+  return $rv
+}
+
+foreach fname $argv {
+  set ich [open $fname r]
+  set dtext [decruft [read $ich]]
+  close $ich
+  set cbounds [regexp -indices -inline -all {(/\*)|(\*/)} $dtext]
+  set ccb -1
+  set cblocks [list]
+  foreach {ap cb ce} $cbounds {
+    set cib [lindex $cb 1]
+    set cie [lindex $ce 0]
+    if {$cie != -1} {
+      if {$ccb != -1} {
+        set cce [expr $cie - 1]
+        set destar [string map [list * " "] [string range $dtext $ccb $cce]]
+        lappend cblocks $destar
+        set ccb -1
+      } else continue
+    } elseif {$cib != -1} {
+      set ccb [expr $cib + 1]
+    }
+  }
+  set oddspells [varsift [misspelled [join $cblocks "\n"]]]
+  if {[llength $oddspells] > 0} {
+    puts "!? Misspellings from $fname:"
+    puts [join [lsort -nocase -unique $oddspells] "\n"]
+  }
+}